Eee Bee R19

Mepco R2019 BE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), SIVAKASI

Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai 600 025.
BE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
MEPCO R2019 Choice Based Credit System
VISION MISSION
To Provide the Students a Rigorous Learning
Experience in Understanding Basics of Electrical &
To Render Services to Meet the Growing Global
Electronics Engineering Built on the Foundation of
Challenges of Engineering Industries by Educating
Science, Mathematics, Computing, and Technology
Students to become Exemplary Professional
by Emphasizing Active Learning with Strongly
Electrical and Electronics Engineers of High Ethics
Supported Laboratory Component and Prepare them
for Professional Careers
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (PO) and PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOME (PSO)
Engineering Knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an
PO1
engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems
Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex engineering problems
PO2 reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering
sciences
Design/Development of Solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system
PO3 components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health
and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental considerations
Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems: Use research-based knowledge and research methods including
PO4 design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid
conclusions
Modern Tool Usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering and
PO5 IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the
limitations
The Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health,
PO6 safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering
practice
Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions in societal and
PO7
environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable development
Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of the
PO8
engineering practice
Individual and Team Work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams,
PO9
and in multidisciplinary settings
Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community
PO10 and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design
documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions
Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and
PO11 management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage
projects and in multidisciplinary environments
Life-long Learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and
PO12
lifelong learning in the broadest context of technological change
Apply technical and logical skills to model, simulate and analyze the components of Electrical systems using
PSO1
modern engineering tools.
Assimilate the knowledge in Electronics, Control system and Embedded systems for the effective
PSO2
implementation of controllability and reliability of Electrical systems.
Contribute professionally and ethically to the society by way of integrating sustainable engineering solutions to
PSO3
Electrical Power, Energy and Electronics systems
PAGE 1
BE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

Curriculum and Syllabus
Semester - 1
S.No Code Name of the Course L T P C
Core Theory
1 19HS101 TECHNICAL ENGLISH - I 3 0 0 3
(Common to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA)
2 19BS101 MATHEMATICS - I 3 2 0 4
3 19BS102 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY 3 0 0 3
4 19GE101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING 3 0 0 3
5 19GE102 BASIC CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3
(Common to BBE, BEC, BEE)
Theory Course with Lab Component
6 19BS181 ENGINEERING PHYSICS 3 0 2 4
Core Practical
7 19GE151 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
8 19GE152 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
Total 18 2 8 23
Semester - 2
Core Theory
1 19HS201 TECHNICAL ENGLISH - II 3 0 0 3
2 19BS201 MATHEMATICS - II 3 2 0 4
3 19BS203 MATERIALS SCIENCE 3 0 0 3
(Common to BAD, BBE, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT)
4 19EE201 ELECTRIC CIRCUITS AND NETWORKS 3 2 0 4
5 19GEM01 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 2 2 0 3
(Common to BBE, BEC, BEE, BME, BRA)
6 19BS281 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT 3 0 2 4
Core Practical
7 19EE251 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
8 19GE251 LINUX COMMANDS AND SHELL PROGRAMMING 0 0 3 1.5
LABORATORY
(Common to BEC, BEE)
9 19HS251 COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY 0 0 2 1
Total 17 6 10 25
Semester - 3
Core Theory
1 19MA301 MATHEMATICS - III : BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEM AND 3 2 0 4
PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS
(Common to BCI, BEE, BME)
2 19EE301 MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3
3 19EE302 ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 3 2 0 4
4 19EE303 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS 3 0 0 3
5 19EE304 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING 3 0 0 3
6 19EE381 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS 3 0 2 4
Core Practical
7 19EE351 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
PAGE 2
8 19EE352 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5

9 19HSM01 PRESENTATION AND LANGUAGE SKILLS LABORATORY 0 0 2 1
(Common to BAD, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEE, BIT)
Special Course
10 IAS30 INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS - I (LOWER) 2 0 0 0
(Common to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME)
Total 20 4 10 25
Semester - 4
Core Theory
1 19MA401 MATHEMATICS - IV : NUMERICAL METHODS AND 3 2 0 4
STATISTICS
(Common to BCI, BEE, BME)
2 19EE401 DC MACHINES AND TRANSFORMERS 3 2 0 4
3 19EE402 CONTROL SYSTEMS 3 2 0 4
(Common to BEC, BEE)
4 19EE403 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION 2 2 0 3
5 19EE404 ALGORITHMS AND DATA STRUCTURES 3 0 0 3
6 19EE481 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND APPLICATIONS 3 0 2 4
Core Practical
7 19EE451 DC MACHINES AND TRANSFORMERS LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
8 19EE452 MEASUREMENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
Special Course
9 IAS40 INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS - II (LOWER) 2 0 0 0
Total 19 8 8 25
Semester - 5
Core Theory
1 19EE501 INDUCTION AND SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 3 2 0 4
2 19EE502 PRINCIPLES OF DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3 0 0 3
3 19EE503 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS 3 0 0 3
Core Elective
4 Core Elective-1 (BEE) 3 0 0 3
Open Elective
5 UG Open Elective-1 3 0 0 3
Allied Elective
6 UG Allied Elective-1 3 0 0 3
Core Practical
7 19EE551 INDUCTION AND SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
8 19EE552 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS 0 0 3 1.5
LABORATORY
9 19HSM02 CAREER PLANNING AND PROFESSIONAL ESSENTIALS 0 0 2 1
LABORATORY
(Common to BAD, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEE, BIT)
Special Course
10 IAS50 INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS - I (HIGHER) 2 0 0 0
Total 20 2 8 23
Semester - 6
Core Theory
1 19EE601 DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES 2 2 0 3
2 19EE602 POWER ELECTRONICS 3 0 0 3
3 19EE603 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS 2 2 0 3
Core Elective
Open Elective
PAGE 3
Allied Elective
6 UG Allied Elective-2 3 0 0 3
Core Practical
7 19EE651 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
8 19EE652 COMPREHENSIVE SKILL DEVELOPMENT* 0 0 3 1.5
9 19EE653 MINI PROJECT* 0 0 2 1
Special Course
10 IAS60 INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS - II (HIGHER) 2 0 0 0
Total 18 4 8 22
* - Internal Assessment Only
Semester - 7
Core Theory
1 19EE701 POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONTROL 3 0 0 3
2 19EE702 PROTECTION AND SWITCHGEAR 3 0 0 3
Core Elective
Open Elective
Core Practical
7 19EE751 POWER SYSTEM SIMULATION LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
8 19EE752 ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND GREEN ENERGY LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
Total 18 0 6 21
Semester - 8
Core Elective
Open Elective
Project Work / Viva Voce
3 19EE851 PROJECT WORK 0 0 18 9
Total 6 0 18 15
Core Elective-1 (BEE)

S.No Code Name of the Course Offered
1 19EEC01 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS EEE
2 19EEC02 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN EEE
3 19EEC03 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTATION EEE
4 19EEC04 BIO MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION EEE
1 19EEC05 COMPUTER SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE EEE
2 19EEC06 DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS EEE
3 19EEC07 ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLERS EEE
4 19EEC08 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS EEE
5 19EEC09 ANALYSIS AND SYNTHESIS OF ELECTRIC NETWORKS EEE
6 19EEC28 ILLUMINATION, WIRING AND ESTIMATION EEE
1 19EEC10 POWER QUALITY EEE
2 19EEC11 FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS EEE
3 19EEC12 SCADA AND DCS EEE
4 19EEC13 HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING EEE
PAGE 4
5 19EEC14 SMART GRID EEE

6 19EEC30 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION EEE

1 19EEC15 SOLID STATE DRIVES EEE
2 19EEC16 SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES EEE
3 19EEC17 ADVANCED POWER ELECTRONICS EEE
4 19EEC18 SWITCHED MODE POWER SUPPLY DESIGN EEE
5 19EEC19 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN EEE
1 19EEC20 ANALYSIS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES EEE
2 19EEC21 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES EEE
3 19EEC22 RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES EEE
4 19EEC23 FAULT IDENTIFICATION IN ELECTRICAL MACHINES EEE
5 19EEC31 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL EEE

1 19EEC24 MICRO GRIDS EEE
2 19EEC25 GENERATION AND UTILIZATION OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY EEE
3 19EEC26 RESTRUCTURED POWER SYSTEM EEE
4 19EEC27 HIGH VOLTAGE DIRECT CURRENT TRANSMISSION EEE
5 19EEC29 POWER SYSTEM TRANSIENTS EEE
UG Open Elective-1
1 19ADP01 DATA ANALYTICS IN BIOINFORMATICS AID
2 19ADP02 TEXT ANALYTICS AID
3 19ADP03 KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION AND REASONING AID
4 19ADP04 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE IN FINANCE AID
5 19ADP05 ETHICS AND VALUES IN INTELLIGENT COMPUTING AID
6 19ADP06 INFORMATION AND NETWORK SECURITY AID
7 19BMP01 MEDICAL PHYSICS BME
8 19BMP02 ENGINEERING OF NANOMATERIALS BME
9 19BTP01 BIOSENSOR TECHNOLOGY BT
10 19BTP02 IMAGING IN BIOLOGY AND MEDICINE BT
11 19CEP01 ARCHITECTURE CIV
12 19CEP02 BASICS OF CLIMATE SCIENCE AND POLICY CIV
13 19CEP03 FUNDAMENTALS OF URBAN PLANNING CIV
14 19CEP04 GEOINFORMATICS CIV
15 19CSP01 FREE OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE CSE
16 19CSP02 VIRTUAL REALITY AND AUGMENTED REALITY CSE
17 19CSP03 INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS CSE
18 19ECP01 NANO ELECTRONICS ECE
19 19ECP02 IMAGING MODALITIES ECE
20 19ECP03 CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ECE
21 19ECP04 ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS AND ITS APPLICATIONS ECE
22 19ECP13 MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES ECE
23 19EEP01 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION EEE
24 19EEP02 PLC AND INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION EEE
25 19EEP03 PROCESS CONTROL ENGINEERING EEE
26 19EEP04 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES EEE
27 19ITP01 SOCIAL NETWORKING IT
28 19ITP02 DATA SCIENCE USING R IT
29 19ITP03 FUZZY SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS IT
30 19ITP04 ANDROID AND IOS APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT IT
31 19MEP01 PROPERTIES AND SELECTION OF ENGINEERING MATERIALS MECH
PAGE 5
32 19MEP02 INNOVATION AND DESIGN THINKING MECH

33 19MEP03 MECHATRONICS MECH
34 19MEP04 METALLURGY OF STEEL MECH
35 19MEP05 SURFACE COATING TECHNOLOGY MECH
36 19MEP06 SOLAR ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES MECH
37 19UCP01 NANO MATERIALS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS CHE
38 19UCP02 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN CHEMICAL SCIENCE CHE
39 19UMP02 INTRODUCTION TO NUMBER THEORY AND CRYPTOGRAPHY MAT
40 19UMP06 NUMBER THEORY AND GRAPH THEORY FOR CRYPTOGRAPHY MAT
UG Open Elective-2
1 19ADP07 GEO SPATIAL ANALYTICS AID
2 19ADP08 DIGITAL ASSET MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS AID
3 19ADP09 EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTING ALGORITHMS AID
4 19ADP10 DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING AID
5 19ADP11 DATA SCIENCE USING PYTHON AID
6 19ADP12 DATA VISUALIZATION WITH TABLEAU AID
7 19BMP03 BIOMEDICAL SENSOR TECHNOLOGY BME
8 19BMP04 SURGICAL AND CRITICAL CARE EQUIPMENT BME
9 19BTP03 PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS OF RADIOISOTOPES IN BT
BIOTECHNOLOGY
10 19BTP04 BIOFUELS BT
11 19BTP05 MOLECULAR PATHOGENESIS OF INFECTIOUS DISEASES BT
12 19BTP10 CLINICAL TRIALS BT
13 19CEP06 PROJECT MANAGEMENT CIV
14 19CSP04 CYBER CRIME AND LAWS CSE
15 19ECP05 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT ECE
16 19EEP05 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT EEE
17 19EEP06 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS AND HUMAN VALUES EEE
18 19ITP05 HUMAN RESOURCE AND MANAGEMENT IT
19 19ITP06 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IT
20 19ITP07 ETHICS IN COMPUTING IT
21 19ITP08 REINFORCEMENT LEARNING IT
22 19MEP07 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS MECH
23 19MEP08 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND PSYCHOLOGY MECH
24 19MEP09 DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS MECH
25 19MEP10 LITHOGRAPHIC PROCESSES MECH
26 19MEP11 THERMAL TURBOMACHINES MECH
27 19MEP12 FUEL CELL AND HYDROGEN TECHNOLOGY MECH
28 19UEP01 BUSINESS COMMUNICATION ENG
29 19UEP02 WRITING FOR MASS MEDIA ENG
30 19UMP01 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES MAT
31 19UMP03 FUZZY SET AND ITS APPLICATIONS MAT
32 19UMP04 LATTICE THEORY MAT
33 19UMP05 GRAPH THEORY MAT
34 19UPP01 THIN FILMS TECHNOLOGY PHY
35 19UPP02 CRYSTAL GROWTH AND SPECTROSCOPY PHY
36 19UPP03 PHOTONICS PHY
UG Open Elective-3
1 19BTP06 SYSTEM BIOLOGY OF MICROBIAL NETWORKS BT
2 19BTP07 DIAGNOSTIC METHODS IN BIOTECHNOLOGY BT
3 19BTP08 DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS BT
4 19CEP07 COASTAL ENGINEERING CIV
5 19CEP08 ELEMENTS OF EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING CIV
6 19CEP09 ENVIRONMENT AND ECOLOGY CIV
7 19CEP10 INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING CIV
8 19CEP11 TRANSPORT ECONOMICS CIV
PAGE 6
9 19CEP17 ROAD SAFETY AND PRACTICE CIV

10 19CSP05 SECURITY IN COMPUTING CSE
11 19CSP06 SOCIAL NETWORKS CSE
12 19CSP07 CYBER SECURITY CSE
13 19CSP08 SEMANTIC WEB CSE
14 19CSP09 FUNDAMENTALS OF DEEP LEARNING TECHNIQUES CSE
15 19ECP06 ENGINEERING ACOUSTICS ECE
16 19ECP07 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS ECE
17 19ECP08 DATA HIDING TECHNIQUES ECE
18 19ECP09 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS ECE
19 19ECP10 QUADCOPTER AND ITS APPLICATIONS ECE
20 19ECP11 MULTICORE PROGRAMMING ECE
21 19ECP18 SPINTRONICS ECE
22 19ECP19 ESSENTIALS OF SEMICONDUCTOR IC TESTING ECE
23 19EEP07 WIRING, ESTIMATION AND COSTING EEE
24 19EEP08 ADVANCED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES EEE
25 19EEP09 ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND AUDITING EEE
26 19EEP10 ELECTRIC VEHICLES EEE
27 19ITP09 SOFTWARE TESTING IT
28 19ITP10 BIOMETRIC RECOGNITION IT
29 19ITP11 DATA VISUALIZATION WITH PYTHON IT
30 19ITP17 TAMIL COMPUTING IT
31 19MEP13 SOCIOLOGY AND INDIAN HISTORY FOR ENGINEERS MECH
32 19MEP14 ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES MECH
33 19MEP15 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY ENGINEERING MECH
34 19MEP16 IMAGING TECHNIQUES MECH
35 19MEP17 MODERN SENSOR TECHNOLOGY MECH
36 19MEP18 NUCLEAR ENGINEERING MECH
37 19MEP19 SMART MATERIALS MECH
UG Open Elective-4
1 19BTP09 DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY BT
2 19CEP12 COMPOSITE MATERIALS CIV
3 19CEP13 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM FOR DISASTER CIV
MANAGEMENT
4 19CEP14 GEOTECHNICAL FUNDAMENTALS OF EARTHQUAKE CIV
5 19CEP15 METRO SYSTEMS AND ENGINEERING CIV
6 19CEP16 WASTE MANAGEMENT CIV
7 19CSP10 GAMIFICATION CSE
8 19CSP11 GREEN COMPUTING CSE
9 19CSP12 CYBER FORENSICS CSE
10 19CSP13 USABILITY ENGINEERING CSE
11 19ECP12 PATTERN RECOGNITION ECE
12 19ECP14 VIDEO ANALYTICS ECE
13 19ECP15 MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION ECE
14 19ECP16 ELECTRONIC PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT ECE
15 19ECP17 BIO SIGNAL PROCESSING ECE
16 19EEP11 FIBER OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTS EEE
17 19EEP12 ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT EEE
18 19EEP13 ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS EEE
19 19ITP12 USER EXPERIENCE DESIGN IT
20 19ITP13 MOBILE 3D GRAPHICS IT
21 19ITP14 SURFACE COMPUTING IT
22 19ITP15 DIGITAL MARKETING IT
23 19ITP16 COGNITIVE IOT IT
24 19MEP20 CARBON NANO STRUCTURES AND ITS APPLICATIONS MECH
25 19MEP21 ERGONOMICS MECH
26 19MEP22 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR MECH
27 19MEP23 PRINTING TECHNOLOGY MECH
PAGE 7
28 19MEP24 SIMULATION MODELLING AND ANALYSIS MECH

29 19MEP25 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND ENERGY RECOVERY MECH
UG Allied Elective-1
1 19ADA01 INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE LEARNING AID
2 19ADA02 FUNDAMENTALS OF ARTIFICIAL INTELIIGENCE AID
3 19ADA03 DATA VISUALIZATION AID
4 19ADA04 WEB DEVELOPMENT USING NODE AND REACT JS AID
5 19ADA05 PROBLEM SOLVING USING PYTHON AID
6 19BMA01 BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING BME
7 19BMA02 HOSPITAL PLANNING AND EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT BME
8 19BTA01 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS BT
9 19BTA02 BASIC MICROBIOLOGY BT
10 19BTA03 BASIC BIOCHEMISTRY BT
11 19BTA04 FUNDAMENTALS OF IMMUNOLOGY BT
12 19CEA01 BUILDING PLANNING AND DRAWING CIV
13 19CEA02 INDUSTRIAL POLLUTION PREVENTION AND CONTROL CIV
14 19CEA03 INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY CIV
15 19CEA04 PRINCIPLES OF GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM CIV
16 19CEA05 WATER RESOURCES PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT CIV
17 19CSA01 INTERNET PROGRAMMING CSE
18 19CSA02 FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE ENGINEERING CSE
19 19CSA03 INTRODUCTION TO DATABASE CSE
20 19CSA04 FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATING SYSTEMS CSE
21 19ECA01 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ECE
22 19ECA02 INTRODUCTION TO IMAGE PROCESSING ECE
23 19ECA03 ARDUINO FOR ENGINEERS ECE
24 19ECA04 MATLAB PROGRAMMING FOR ENGINEERS ECE
25 19ITA01 WEB DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT IT
26 19ITA02 INTRODUCTION TO JAVA IT
27 19ITA03 PYTHON SCRIPTING IT
28 19MEA01 AUTOMOTIVE MAINTENANCE AND POLLUTION CONTROL MECH
29 19MEA02 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING MECH
30 19MEA03 DECISION SUPPORT AND INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS MECH
31 19MEA04 ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDINGS MECH
32 19MEA05 ELECTRONICS PACKAGING TECHNOLOGY MECH
33 19MEA06 FUNDAMENTALS OF ENERGY RESOURCES MECH
34 19MEA07 FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING MECH
35 19MEA08 RELIABILITY ENGINEERING MECH
36 19MEA09 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL MECH
UG Allied Elective-2
1 19ADA06 INTRODUCTION TO DEEP LEARNING TECHNIQUES AID
2 19ADA07 IOT AND ITS APPLICATIONS AID
3 19ADA08 ESSENTIALS OF BIG DATA AID
4 19ADA09 DATA ANALYTICS USING R AID
5 19ADA10 DESIGN THINKING IN ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AID
6 19BMA03 BIOSENSORS AND ITS APPLICATIONS BME
7 19BMA04 INTRODUCTION TO BIOMEDICAL DEVICES BME
8 19BTA05 CHEMICALS IN ENVIRONMENT AND PUBLIC HEALTH BT
9 19BTA06 BIOLOGICAL WASTE MANAGEMENT BT
10 19BTA07 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY BT
11 19BTA08 INTRODUCTION TO BIOINFORMATICS BT
12 19CEA06 ENVIRONMENTAL GEOTECHNOLOGY CIV
13 19CEA07 FUNDAMENTALS OF SMART CITY PLANNING CIV
14 19CEA08 HYDROPOWER ENGINEERING CIV
15 19CEA09 RESOURCES AND ENERGY RECOVERY FROM WASTE CIV
16 19CEA10 ROAD AND RAIL TRANSPORT CIV
PAGE 8
17 19CSA05 FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING CSE

18 19CSA06 INTRODUCTION TO IOT CSE
19 19CSA07 XML PROGRAMMING CSE
20 19CSA08 INTRODUCTION TO UML CSE
21 19CSA09 INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE CSE
22 19ECA05 MOBILE COMMUNICATION ECE
23 19ECA06 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS FOR INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS ECE
24 19ECA07 VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS ECE
25 19ECA08 ROBOTICS AND ITS APPLICATIONS ECE
26 19ITA04 GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING IT
27 19ITA05 BIG DATA AND APPLICATIONS IT
28 19ITA06 DECISION MAKING METHODS IT
29 19ITA07 PHP PROGRAMMING IT
30 19MEA10 FUNDAMENTALS OF AIRCRAFT AND SPACE TECHNOLOGY MECH
31 19MEA11 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOMATERIALS MECH
32 19MEA12 FUNDAMENTALS OF THERMAL SCIENCE MECH
33 19MEA13 PROPELLANTS, EXPLOSIVES AND PYROTECHNICS MECH
34 19UBA01 ESSENTIALS OF FINANCE MBA
35 19UBA02 ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT MBA
36 19UBA03 ESSENTIALS OF MARKETING MBA
37 19UBA04 ESSENTIALS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP MBA
Emerging Area Electives for BE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

Smart Grid Technologies
1 19EEH01 CONVENTIONAL AND ALTERNATE ENERGY SOURCES EEE
2 19EEH02 INTRODUCTION TO SMART GRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES EEE
3 19EEH03 DISTRIBUTED GENERATION AND MICRO GRID EEE
4 19EEH04 IOT FOR SMART GRIDS EEE
5 19EEH05 POWER ELECTRONIC INTERFACES FOR SMART GRID EEE
6 19EEH06 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS, SECURITY AND PROTECTION FOR EEE
SMART GRID
Electrical & Computer Engineering

1 19EEH21 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING USING JAVA FOR ELECTRICAL EEE
ENGINEERS
2 19EEH22 DATA ANALYSIS USING PYTHON FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS EEE
3 19EEH23 DATA MANAGEMENT FOR SMART GRID EEE
4 19EEH04 IOT FOR SMART GRIDS EEE
5 19EEH24 COMMUNICATION AND DATA SECURITY IN ELECTRICAL EEE
ENGINEERING
6 19EEH25 OPTIMIZATION STUDIES IN ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS EEE
Control Systems and Sensors Technology
1 19ECH01 SENSORS AND ACTUATORS ECE
2 19EEH41 DIGITAL MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION EEE
3 19EEH42 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION EEE
4 19EEH43 PROCESS CONTROL EEE
5 19EEH44 MEMS SENSORS AND ACTUATORS EEE
6 19EEH45 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS EEE
Internet of Things
2 19ECH02 IOT ARCHITECTURE AND FRAMEWORK ECE
3 19ECH03 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS FOR IOT ECE
4 19ECH04 CLOUD SERVICES FOR IOT ECE
5 19ECH05 BIG DATA ANALYTICS FOR IOT ECE
PAGE 9
6 19ECH06 PRIVACY AND SECURITY IN IOT ECE
Sensor Technology
2 19EEH41 DIGITAL MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION EEE
3 19ECH21 ENERGY AWARE SENSORS ECE
4 19ECH22 MULTIDISCIPLINARY SENSORS ECE
5 19ECH23 ADVANCED SENSOR AND DETECTION MATERIALS ECE
6 19EEH91 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT EEE
Robotics
1 19MEH21 FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOTICS MECH
2 19EEH92 ROBOT MANIPULATOR CONTROL EEE
3 19ECH91 ROBOT OPERATING SYSTEM AND PROGRAMMING ECE
4 19ECH92 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND REINFORCEMENT LEARNING ECE
5 19MEH22 AUTONOMOUS ROBOTS MECH
6 19MEH23 ROBOTICS IN MANUFACTURING AUTOMATION MECH
Electric Vehicles
1 19MEH41 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES MECH
2 19MEH42 ENERGY STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES MECH
3 19EEH93 INTELLIGENT AND AUTONOMOUS VEHICLES EEE
4 19MEH43 VEHICLE DYNAMICS AND CONTROL MECH
5 19MEH44 ELECTRIC VEHICLE DESIGN MECH
6 19EEH94 MODELING, SIMULATION AND CONTROL OF ELECTRIC VEHICLES EEE
Smart Cities
1 19CEH01 URBAN AND REGIONAL PLANNING REGULATIONS CIV
2 19CEH02 URBAN CLIMATE CHANGE AND ADAPTATION CIV
3 19CEH03 IOT PLATFORM FOR SMART CITY PLANNING CIV
4 19CEH04 INTELLIGENT TRANSPORT SYSTEMS CIV
5 19CEH05 INTEGRATED URBAN WATER MANAGEMENT CIV
6 19CEH06 GIS IMPLEMENTATION IN SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT CIV
Infrastructure Engineering
1 19CEH21 MATERIAL PROCUREMENT AND MANAGEMENT CIV
2 19CEH22 STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR INFRASTRUCTURE SECTORS CIV
3 19CEH23 GEOTECHNIQUES FOR INFRASTRUCTURE CIV
4 19CEH24 PROJECT FORMULATION AND IMPLEMENTATION CIV
5 19CEH25 HIGH RISE BUILDINGS CIV
6 19CEH26 INFRASTRUCTURE FINANCE CIV
Construction Technology
1 19CEH41 MODERN CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS CIV
2 19CEH42 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT CIV
3 19CEH43 ENERGY CONSERVATION METHODS IN CONSTRUCTION CIV
4 19CEH44 INTELLIGENT BUILDING TECHNIQUES CIV
5 19CEH45 QUALITY CONTROL IN CONSTRUCTION CIV
6 19CEH46 RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN CONSTRUCTION CIV
Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning

1 19CSH01 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE FOR ENGINEERS CSE
2 19CSH02 MACHINE LEARNING USING PYTHON CSE
3 19CSH03 NLP TOOLS AND APPLICATIONS CSE
PAGE 10
4 19CSH04 COMPUTER VISION WITH OPENCV CSE

5 19CSH05 DEEP LEARNING USING TENSOR FLOW CSE
6 19CSH06 KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION AND REASONING CSE
Cyber Security
1 19MAH91 NUMBER THEORY FOR INFORMATION SECURITY MAT
2 19CSH21 CRYPTOGRAPHIC ALGORITHMS AND ARCHITECTURE USING JAVA CSE
3 19CSH22 COMPUTER FORENSICS CSE
4 19CSH23 NETWORK SECURITY ESSENTIALS CSE
5 19CSH24 INTERNET SECURITY CSE
6 19CSH25 ETHICAL HACKING CSE
3D Printing
1 19MEH01 INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCT DESIGN MECH
2 19MEH02 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING PROCESSES MECH
3 19MEH03 DESIGN FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING MECH
4 19MEH04 REVERSE ENGINEERING MECH
5 19MEH05 BUSINESS VALUE ENHANCEMENT WITH ADDITIVE MECH
MANUFACTURING
6 19MEH06 STANDARDS, QUALITY CONTROL AND INSPECTION MECH
Energy Engineering
1 19MEH61 BIO ENERGY MECH
2 19MEH62 ALTERNATE ENERGY FUELS MECH
3 19MEH63 COMBUSTION ENGINEERING MECH
4 19MEH64 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS MECH
5 19MEH65 ENERGY AUDIT AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT MECH
6 19MEH66 DESIGN OF ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDINGS MECH
Systems Engineering
1 19MEH81 SCHEDULING ALGORITHMS MECH
2 19MEH82 LEAN AND AGILE MANUFACTURING MECH
3 19MEH83 SYSTEMS SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING MECH
4 19MEH84 SERVICES OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT MECH
5 19MEH85 QUALITY ENGINEERING MECH
6 19MEH86 PRODUCTIVITY MANAGEMENT AND RE-ENGINEERING MECH
Data Science
1 19CSH41 DATA SCIENCE FOR ENGINEERS CSE
2 19CSH02 MACHINE LEARNING USING PYTHON CSE
3 19CSH42 DATA MINING USING R CSE
4 19CSH43 DATA ANALYTICS USING SPARK CSE
5 19CSH05 DEEP LEARNING USING TENSOR FLOW CSE
6 19CSH44 DATA DRIVEN DECISION MAKING CSE
Blockchain
1 19ITH01 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND HASHING IT
2 19ITH02 INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL CURRENCIES IT
3 19ITH03 BLOCKCHAIN TECHNOLOGIES IT
4 19ITH04 SMART CONTRACTS AND DECENTRALIZED APPLICATIONS IT
5 19ITH05 BLOCKCHAIN PLATFORMS IT
6 19ITH06 BLOCKCHAIN FORENSICS IT
Virtual Reality & Augmented Reality

PAGE 11
1 19ITH21 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS IT

2 19ITH22 INTRODUCTION TO VIRTUAL REALITY IT
3 19ITH23 GEOMETRIC MODELLING FOR XR IT
4 19ITH24 INTERACTIVE 3D DESIGN IT
5 19ITH25 XR APP DEVELOPMENT IT
6 19ITH26 VIRTUAL REALITY AND GAME DEVELOPMENT IT
Genome Engineering & Technology

1 19BTH01 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY BT
2 19BTH02 ENZYME - COENZYME CHEMISTRY BT
3 19BTH03 INTRODUCTION TO ECOLOGY AND EVOLUTION BT
4 19BTH04 REGULATORY ISSUES IN PRODUCTION OF BIOLOGICALS BT
5 19BTH05 GENE EDITING TECHNOLOGIES BT
6 19BTH06 TRANSGENIC TECHNOLOGY BT
Biosimilar Technology
1 19BTH01 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY BT
2 19BTH02 ENZYME - COENZYME CHEMISTRY BT
3 19BTH21 MOLECULAR TOXICOLOGY BT
4 19BTH04 REGULATORY ISSUES IN PRODUCTION OF BIOLOGICALS BT
5 19BTH22 BIO-TRANSPORT PHENOMENA BT
6 19BTH23 GOOD LABORATORY AND MANUFACTURING PRACTICES BT
Computer Science and Biology

1 19CSH91 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS FOR BIOLOGICAL DATA CSE
REPRESENTATION
2 19CSH92 PYTHON AND R PROGRAMMING FOR BIOTECHNOLOGISTS CSE
3 19BTH03 INTRODUCTION TO ECOLOGY AND EVOLUTION BT
4 19BTH41 COMPUTER-AIDED DRUG DESIGN BT
5 19BTH42 MATHEMATICAL MODELING IN BIOLOGY BT
6 19BTH43 COMPUTATIONAL GENOMICS BT
Medical Robotics and Devices

1 19MEH21 FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOTICS MECH
2 19EEH92 ROBOT MANIPULATOR CONTROL EEE
3 19ECH91 ROBOT OPERATING SYSTEM AND PROGRAMMING ECE
4 19CSH04 COMPUTER VISION WITH OPENCV CSE
PAGE 12
19HS101 TECHNICAL ENGLISH - I L T P C

Offered by ENG (Core Theory offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
To impart knowledge on
• Developing listening skills and participate effectively in conversations
• Basic reading and writing skills to comprehend engineering and technology concepts
• Using grammatical structures
• Enhancing the vocabulary building
• Key strategies and expressions for communicating effectively and appropriately in real life situations
Course Outcome:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
• Improve the listening skills to practice in real contexts
• Read general as well as technical articles and construct lucid sentences in English
• Apply the right grammar convention in all sorts of communication in English language
• Develop a comprehensive understanding of the extensive vocabulary usage in formal English language
• Use English in multiple contexts
Unit I 9
Listening: Listening Skills: Importance and Types - Differentiating Hearing and Listening - Listening to small talks
(mp3 files)
Speaking: Greetings, Introducing Oneself, One’s family/friends, Describing Native places, Festivals
Reading: Casual Reading - Skimming and Scanning - Identifying the main ideas -Summarizing and Note-making
Writing: Free writing on any given topic (My favourite place / Hobbies / School life, etc.) - Informal letter and
Informal email, Instructions
Grammar: Parts of Speech- Kinds of Sentences - Word Order - Question Framing - Question Tags
Vocabulary: Etymology - Word Formation - Affixes
Unit II 9
Listening: Listening to video lectures/talks (TED Talk), Leaders’ orations with follow-up exercises, Newspaper Articles
Speaking: Seeking and Sharing Information
Reading: Deducing meanings from contexts - Making Inferences, Predicting & Finding key information in given texts
- Comprehension Exercises
Writing: Letter to the Editor (Regarding Social Issues) - Recommendations - Developing Hints
Grammar: Nouns (Singular and Plural forms) - Determiners - Prepositions
Vocabulary: Single line Definitions - Idioms
Unit III 9
Listening: Listening to different accents - Watching documentaries and responding to questions
Speaking: Describing Pictures - Events and chit-chats
Reading: Cohesive Markers - Sieving Transition words
Writing: Interpretations of bar graphs and tables - Paragraph Writing (Compare and Contrast/Analytical) - Jumbled
sentences - Dialogue Writing
Grammar: Conjunctions - Gerunds - Degrees of Comparison
Vocabulary: Discourse markers - Single word Substitutes
Unit IV 9
Listening: Excerpts from Films Focusing on Themes and Follow up exercises
Speaking: Responding to Questions - Giving Impromptu Talks - Pair Interactions
Reading: Predicting Open-ended Stories/Documentaries/Speech
Writing: Formal Letters - Invitations (Accepting/Declining) - Seeking Permission (Industrial Visits)
Grammar: Tense - Adverbs - Phrasal Verbs
Vocabulary: Standard Abbreviations & Acronyms - Collocations
Unit V 9
Listening: Listening to Quiz Programmes/ Spell Bee Contests
Speaking: Role-play Activities
Reading: Silent Reading (Newspapers/Books/ Pamphlets) understanding captions
Writing: Creating Posters/Notices - Creative Writing (Story Writing) - Advertisements Grammar: Modal verbs - Same
word in a different parts of speech - Error Corrections (Paragraphs)
Vocabulary: Lexical items (fixed / semi fixed expressions)
Text Book:
1. Kumar, Sanjay and Pushp Lata. Communication Skills: A Workbook. New Delhi: OUP, 2018.
2. Shoba,K.N. and Lourdes Joavani Rayen . Communicative English: A Workbook. New Delhi:CUP, 2019
Reference Book:
PAGE 13
1. Sudharshana,N.P. and C.Savitha. English for Technical Communication. NewDelhi: OUP, 2017.
2. Haines, Simon, Mark Nettle and Martin Hewings. Advanced Grammar in Use Supplementary Exercises. New
Delhi: CUP, 2008.
PAGE 14
19BS101 MATHEMATICS - I L T P C
Offered by MAT (Core Theory offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 2 0 4
Course Objective:
• To explain the concept of functions of several variables and partial derivatives.
• To evaluate problems in multiple integrals and its applications in Engineering.
• To compare the types of infinite series and their convergence.
• To solve ordinary differential equations obtained in Engineering problems.
• To explain about the importance of statistical methods in Engineering.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the concept of functions of several variables and partial derivatives.
• Explain about multiple integrals and their usage.
• Examine the convergence for any infinite series.
• Solve ordinary differential equations by various techniques.
• Compute different measures of central tendency and dispersion
Unit I FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12
Partial derivatives – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Differentiation of implicit
functions – Change of variables – Jacobians – Taylor’s series for functions of two variables – Maxima and minima of
functions of two variables – Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers
Unit II MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Change of variables – Double integrals in polar coordinates –
Area enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals– Triple integrals in cylindrical and spherical coordinates – Volume of
Solids.
Unit III INFINITE SERIES 12
Sequences – Convergence of series – General properties – Series of positive terms – Tests for convergence:
Comparison test, Integral test, Comparison of ratios and D’Alembert’s ratio test (Proofs excluded) – Alternating
series – Series of positive and negative terms – Absolute and conditional convergence – Power Series – Convergence
of exponential, logarithmic and Binomial Series
Unit IV DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Equation of first order with higher degree – Clairaut’s equation – Linear differential equations – Rules for finding the
complementary function – Rules for finding the particular integral – Method of variation of parameters –
Homogeneous equation of Euler’s and Legendre’s type.
Unit V STATISTICS 12
Measures of central tendency – Arithmetic Mean – Geometric Mean– Harmonic Mean – Median – Mode –
Measures of Dispersion – Range – Quartile deviation – Mean Deviation –Standard deviation- Coefficient of
Variation- Correlation – Coefficient of correlation – Lines of Regression.
Text Book:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 44th Edition, 2017.
Reference Book:
1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi, 4th Edition,
2014.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons Pvt. Ltd, Singapore, 9th Edition, 2006,
(Reprint 2013).
3. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 11th
Reprint, 2013.
4. Srimanta Pal and Subodh C. Bhunia, “ Engineering Mathematics” Oxford university Press, New Delhi, Third
impression 2016.
5. S.C. Gupta, V.K. Kapoor, “ Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand & Sons, 11th Edition, 2002
(Reprint, 2015)
PAGE 15
19BS102 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C

Offered by CHE (Core Theory offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To impart knowledge on
• Treatment of water for potable and industrial purposes.
• Principles of electrochemistry, electrochemical cells, emf and applications of emf measurements.
• Principles of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.
• Energy storage devices and various types of Lubricants.
• Different types of fuels and combustion.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the basic principles of water quality parameters, their analysis and various water treatment
processes for domestic and industrial applications.
• Understand the basic principles of electrochemistry and its applications.
• Know the principles, various types of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.
• Have a thorough knowledge on batteries and lubricants.
• Have a sound knowledge on different types of fuels.
Unit I WATER TECHNOLOGY 9
Characteristics of water – alkalinity – types of alkalinity and determination – hardness – types of hardness and
estimation by EDTA method (problems on calculation of hardness only) – Boiler feed water – requirements –
disadvantages of using hard water in boilers – priming and foaming – sludges and scales – caustic embrittlement –
boiler corrosion – external conditioning (demineralization process) – internal conditioning (colloidal, phosphate,
carbonate and calgon conditionings) – Domestic water treatment – disinfection methods (Chlorination, Ozonation
and UV treatment) – break point chlorination – salinity – desalination by reverse osmosis.
Unit II ELECTROCHEMISTRY 9
Electrochemical cells – reversible and irreversible cells – EMF – measurement of emf – Single electrode potential –
Nernst equation (problems) – reference electrodes – Standard Hydrogen electrode – Calomel electrode – Ion
selective electrode – glass electrode and measurement of pH – Standard Cell – electrochemical series – significance
– potentiometric redox titration – conductometric titrations (Strong acid Vs Strong base and Weak acid Vs Strong
base)
Unit III CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL 9
Chemical corrosion – Pilling-Bedworth rule – electrochemical corrosion – differential aeration corrosion – factors
influencing corrosion – different types – galvanic corrosion, erosion corrosion, pitting corrosion, crevice corrosion,
waterline corrosion and stress corrosion – corrosion control – sacrificial anode and impressed current cathodic
methods – corrosion inhibitors – Protective coatings – pretreatment of surface – metallic coating –hotdipping,
spraying, cladding, cementation and electroplating (Cr, Cu, Ni and Au) – electrolessplating (electroless nickel plating
only).
Unit IV ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES AND LUBRICANTS 9
Batteries – Primary battery – Dry cell and Lithium battery – Secondary battery – Lead acid battery, Nicad battery and
Lithium ion battery – Fuel cells – H2-O2 fuel cells – Supercapacitors – EDLC and its applications.
Lubricants – mechanism of lubrication, liquid lubricants – properties (viscosity index, flash point, fire point, cloud
point, pour point and oiliness) – solid lubricants – graphite and molybdenum disulphide – semisolid lubricants and
emulsions.
Unit V FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels – Classification – Calorific value (Problems using Dulong’s formula) – Coal – proximate and ultimate analysis –
Hydrogenation of coal – Petroleum – processing and fractions – cracking – catalytic cracking and methods –
synthetic petrol – Fischer-Tropsch and Bergius processes – knocking – octane number and cetane number – Biofuels
– Gaseous fuels – Natural gas, CNG and LPG – Flue gas analysis – Orsat apparatus – Combustion – theoretical
calculation of air (Problems on calculation of weight of air only).
Text Book:
1. P.C. Jain and Monika Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.(P) Ltd., 16th Edition, New Delhi
(2016).
2. S. S. Dara and S.S. Umare, A text book of engineering chemistry, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi (2017).
Reference Book:
1. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company (P) Ltd., New Delhi (2009).
2. B. K. Sharma, Engineering chemistry, Krishna Prakasan Media (P) Ltd., Meerut (2006).
3. B. Sivasankar, Engineering Chemistry, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi (2008).
PAGE 16
PAGE 17
19GE101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING L T P C

Offered by CSE (Core Theory offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To gain knowledge on problem solving techniques
• To learn how to write modular and readable C programs
• To understand the usage of arrays and strings
• To learn to use pointers to access and manipulate memory
• To exploit the notion of derived data types and file
Course Outcome:
• Solve problems using sound techniques
• Develop modular C programs for a given problem
• Store and manipulate homogeneous data using arrays and strings
• Write programs that uses memory based on the run time needs
• Store and manipulate heterogeneous data using structures and manipulate data stored on permanent storage
Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF C 9
Basic Organization of a Computer - Problem Solving Techniques: Introduction to Algorithm, Pseudo code, Flow
Chart. Structure of ‘C’ program, compilation and linking processes - C Tokens: Keywords, Data Types, Constants,
Variables - Declaration - Qualifiers - typedef - Enumeration - Pre-processor directives (#include, #define)
Unit II BASIC CONSTRUCTS IN C 9
Managing simple Input and Output operations - Operators and Expressions - Decision Making: Branching
statements, Looping statements - Function: Declaration, Definition - Recursion - Storage classes
Unit III ARRAYS AND STRINGS IN C 8
Arrays: Initialization - One dimensional, Two dimensional, and Multi-dimensional arrays - String: String operations,
Manipulating Strings - Pre-processor directives (#if, #else, #elif, #ifdef, #ifndef)
Unit IV POINTERS IN C 10
Pointers - Parameter passing mechanism in functions - Dynamic Memory Allocation - Pointer arithmetic - Pointers
and one dimensional array - Pointers and Multi-Dimensional Array: Array of Pointers, Pointer to Pointer, Pointer to
an array - void Pointer - Pointer to function - Command Line Arguments
Unit V STRUCTURES, UNIONS AND FILE HANDLING IN C 9
Structure: Declaration, Definition-Array of Structures - Pointer to Structure - Structure within a Structure - Bit fields
in Structure - Union - Files: File Management functions, Working with Text Files and Binary Files
Text Book:
1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C”, Second Edition, Oxford University
Press, 2013 reprint
2. Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C, Schaum’s Outlines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2017
reprint.
Reference Book:
1. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson Education,
2006 reprint.
2. R.G. Dromey, “How to Solve it by Computer”, Pearson Education, 2008
3. Al Kelley, Ira Pohl, “A Book on C : Programming in C”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2008 reprint
4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Seventh Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, 2013 reprint.
5. Ashok N. Kamthane, “Computer programming”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
6. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Sixteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2018.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/c-programming-language/
• http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm
• http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html
• https://www.w3schools.in/category/c-tutorial/
• https://fresh2refresh.com/c-programming/
PAGE 18
19GE102 BASIC CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING L T P C

Offered by MECH (Core Theory offered to BBE, BEC, BEE) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To introduce the essential principles of construction materials
• To make students understand the principles of to Building sciences.
• To introduce the essential principles of energy sciences.
• To make students to understand the functioning of fundamental prime movers & machines.
• To share the knowledge related to energy with emphasis on energy conversion and transmission to mechanical
energy.
Course Outcome:
• The students are able to understand the civil engineering materials
• The students shall acquire knowledge about building components and types of bridges and dams.
• The students will acquire knowledge on traditional & new energy sources and understand the functioning of
basic energy conversion devices.
• The students are able to understand the construction and functioning of critical appliances like IC engines,
refrigerator and air-conditioner.
• The students shall acquire knowledge on basic power plant engineering.
Unit I CIVIL ENGINEERING MATERIALS
Stones and Bricks – types, properties and uses - Materials for making concrete: cement - chemical compounds of
portland cement, types and storage - Fine aggregate - functions - gradation and effect of impurities - Coarse
aggregate – functions - Quality water for mixing.
Plain Cement Concrete (PCC) - functions of various ingredients , preparing placing and curing - Properties of fresh
concrete and hardened concrete - Reinforced cement concrete (RCC) – uses and requirement of good RCC Steel-
properties and uses
Unit II BUILDING COMPONENTS AND STRUCTURES
Foundations – Types, bearing capacity, requirement of good foundations, causes of failure of foundations
Superstructure – Brick masonry, stone masonry, beams, columns, lintels, roofing and flooring, plastering Bridges –
Classification and components - Dams – Classification and purposes governing selection of site.
Unit III ENERGY SOURCES, BOILERS AND TURBINES
Conventional and New & Renewable sources of energy, Indian and global energy scenario, Principle and operation
of : Boilers-fire tube and water tube (one example for each type), Hydraulic, Steam, and Gas turbines.
Unit IV IC ENGINES, REFRIGERATOR AND AIR CONDITIONER
Four stroke and two stroke IC engine cycles, functioning of petrol and Diesel Engines – Comparisons, simple vapour
compression refrigerator and window air conditioner
Unit V POWER PLANTS
Principle of operation, construction and working of : Hydel, Steam, Diesel, Gas and Nuclear power plants along with
accessories – Selection, comparison, merits and demerits
Text Book:
1. Shanmugam G and Palanichamy M S, “Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering”, 2nd edition,Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2000
Reference Book:
1. Ramamrutham.S, “Basic Civil Engineering”, DhanpatRai Publishing Co. (P) Ltd., 1999.
2. Seetharaman S. “Basic Civil Engineering”, Anuradha Agencies, 2005.
3. Venugopal K and Prahu Raja V, “Basic Mechanical Engineering” Anuradha Publishers, Kumbakonam, 2000.
4. Shantha Kumar S R J., “Basic Mechanical Engineering”, Hi- tech Publications, Mayiladuthurai, 2000.
PAGE 19
19BS181 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C

Offered by PHY (Theory Course with Lab Component offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 2 4
Course Objective:
• To impart sound knowledge about basic concepts of Elasticity.
• To introduce the basic physics concepts of Acoustics of buildings and ultrasonics
• To introduce the fundamentals of Quantum physics.
• To impart knowledge on waves and optics.
• To give exposure on solid state physics.
Course Outcome:
• Gain knowledge on the basics of properties of matter and its applications.
• Have adequate knowledge on the concepts of acoustics and ultrasonics.
• Acquire knowledge on the concepts of waves, lasers and their applications in fiber optics.
• Get knowledge on advanced physics concepts of quantum theory.
• Comprehend the basics of crystals, their structures and different crystal growth techniques.
Unit I PROPERTIES OF MATTER
Elasticity - Poisson’s ratio and relationship between moduli (qualitative) - Stress-strain diagram and its uses- factors
affecting tensile strength - bending of beams - cantilever - bending moment - theory and experiment of Young’s
modulus determination - Uniform and non-uniform bending - I shaped girders - twisting couple - hollow cylinder -
shaft - torsion pendulum - determination of rigidity modulus- moment of inertia of a body (regular and irregular).
Unit II ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS
Classification of sound - loudness and intensity - Weber-Fechner Law - standard intensity and intensity level -
decibel - reverberation - reverberation time - rate of growth and decay of sound intensity - derivation of Sabine’s
formula - absorption coefficient and its determination – factors affecting acoustics of buildings : focusing,
interference, echo, Echelon effect, resonance - noise and their remedies. Ultrasonics - production -
magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods - detection of ultrasound - acoustic grating - industrial applications -
NDT – Ultrasonic method: scan modes and practice.
Unit III QUANTUM PHYSICS
Inadequacy of classical mechanics- Black body radiation –Planck’s theory (derivation) -Wave and particle duality of
radiation-de Broglie concept of matter waves-Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle –Applications –Principle of
superposition – wave packet-Schrodinger wave equation – Time dependent and time independent wave equation-
Interpretation of wave function-Admissibility conditions of wave function- Particle confined in one and three
dimensional infinite square well potential
Unit IV WAVES AND FIBER OPTICS
Wave motion-Travelling wave in one dimension-Wave equation examples-Superposition of waves and standing
waves-Simple harmonic motion -Lasers - Einstein’s coefficients - CO2, Nd:YAG and semiconductor lasers -
homojunction and heterojunction lasers-construction and working - applications - Optical fibers - classification
(index & mode based) - principle and propagation of light in optical fibers - acceptance angle and numerical
aperture - fiber optic communication system – pressure and displacement fiber optic sensors
Unit V SOLID STATE PHYSICS
Growth of single crystals - Czochralski method and Bridgman–Stockbarger method - unit cell, crystal systems,
Bravais space lattices - crystal planes and directions, Miller indices - expressions for interplanar distance -
coordination number and packing factor for simple structures: SC, BCC, FCC and HCP - structure and significance of
NaCl, ZnS, diamond and graphite - crystal imperfections: point defects, line defects –Burger vectors, stacking faults
Practical Course 20
Practical Experiments:
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR PHYSICS LABORATORY
(Any TEN Experiments)
1. Torsional pendulum –Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of disc.
2. Non-uniform pending -Young’s modulus determination
3. Air-wedge-Determination of thickness of a thin sheet of paper
4. Spectrometer-Determination of wavelength of Hg spectrum using grating
5. Determination of ultrasonic velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid–Ultrasonic interferometer.
6. Carey Foster Bridge-Determination of specific resistance of the given coil of wire.
7. Laser-(i) Particle size and wavelength determination (ii) Numerical aperture and acceptance angle
measurement of an optical fibre
8. Post Office Box- Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
9. Indexing of Powder Diffraction Pattern
PAGE 20
10. Uniform pending- Young’s modulus determination

11. Spectrometer- Dispersive power of the prism
12. Viscosity of liquids-Determination of co-efficient of viscosity of a liquid by
Poiseuille’s method.
Text Book:
1. John W. Jewett. Jr, and Raymon A. Serway, Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics – Seventh
Edition, Cengage Learnings, Delhi, India, 2013.
2. David Halliday, Robert Resnick and Jearl Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, sixth edition, John Wiley and Sons,
New Delhi, 2010.
3. Marikani A, Engineering Physics, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.
4. Arumugam, M., Engineering Physics, Anuradha Publications, 2000.
Reference Book:
1. Sankar, B.N., Pillai.S.O., Engineering Physics I, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2015.
2. Palanisamy, P.K., Engineering Physics, Scitech Publications (P) Ltd, 2009.
3. Gaur R.K., and Gupta, S.L., Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Raj Publications, 2013
4. Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, Mepco Schlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.
PAGE 21
19GE151 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C

Offered by CSE (Core Practical offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 0 0 3 1.5
Course Objective:
• To develop C programs using conditional and looping statements
• To apply the principles of arrays and strings
• To access memory using pointers
• To group different kinds of information related to a single entity
• To manipulate data in permanent storage
Course Outcome:
• Implement programs using control statements
• Write programs using arrays and strings
• Access data in memory using pointers
• Use structures to manipulate heterogeneous data
• Manipulate data stored on permanent storage
Practical Course 45
Practical Syllabus:
Study of simple Document Processing & Presentation Preparation
Study of basic OS commands, Software Engineering Practices -2 sessions (Not for End Examination)
Programs using simple statements
Programs using decision making statements
Programs using looping statements
Programs using user defined functions and recursive functions
Programs using one dimensional and two dimensional arrays
Solving problems using string functions
Programs using pointers and dynamic memory allocation
Programs using structures and unions
Programs using pointers to structures and other data types
Programs using text files
Programs using binary files
Word Processing
i) Create a new word document named ‘Student Record’ and
• Set left margin at 1.8” and right margin at 1.3”.
• Your heading should be in Times New Roman, Bold and Italic with size 12.
• Include the Page number at the top of every page.
• Type your personal details.
• Table with details of 10 students with the following fields: Student name, Department, Internal, External, total,
result, Examination held.
ii) Create a word document named “Scientific Notation” and type one paragraph about the Equation editor with
font size 10, and in ‘Calibri’ format. Apply page set up with line spacing of 1 and type the following equations:
iii) Create a sheet in EXCEL as shown below:
Roll No Name M1 M2 M3 M4 Total Percentage Status
Maximum
Minimum
• Validate the columns M1, M2, M3 and M4so that the marks lie in the range 0- 100 and enter the roll number
of the students using auto fill.
• Calculate Total = sum of M1, M2, M3 and M4 and it should appear at the center of the cell.
• Percentage = Total / 3 and format these cell values so that all the values got 2 digits after the decimal point.
Status = “pass”, if M1, M2, M3 and M4 >=50= “fail”, otherwise
iv) Create a power point presentation about your school using animation, design template and effective
presentation.
A company XYZ pays their employers on a monthly basis. It pays their employers with DA=50% of BP, HRA=10% of
BP, allowance=Rs.1000. The company needs to automate the salary computation based on the basic pay. Develop
an application to compute the gross salary of an employee given their basic pay.
A company XYZ pays their employers on a monthly basis. It pays their employers with DA=50% of BP, HRA=10% of
BP, allowance=Rs.1000.The company needs to automate the salary computation based on the basic pay. Develop an
PAGE 22
application to compute the gross salary of an employee given their basic pay.
Collecting money becomes increasingly difficult during periods of recession, so companies may tighten their credit
limits to prevent their accounts receivable (money owed to them) from becoming too large. In response to a
prolonged recession, one company has cut its customers’ credit limits in half. Thus, if a particular customer had a
credit limit of $2000, it’s now $1000. If a customer had a credit limit of $5000, it’s now $2500. Write a program that
analyzes the credit status of a customer. For each customer you’re given:
• The customer’s account number
• The customer’s credit limit before the recession
• The customer’s current balance (i.e., the amount the customer owes the company).
Your program should calculate and print the new credit limit for the customer and should determine and print
whether customer has current balance that exceeds their new credit limits.
A right triangle can have sides that are all integers. The set of three integer values for the sides of a right triangle is
called a Pythagorean triple. These three sides must satisfy the relationship that the sum of the squares of two of the
sides is equal to the square of the hypotenuse. Find all Pythagorean triples for side1, side2, and the hypotenuse all
no larger than 500.Use a triple-nested for loop that simply tries all possibilities.(hypotenuse2=side12+side22)
It is required to display a series of numbers in descending order say 10 to 1. Develop a recursive code in c language
and implement it.
Read in an array of integers and print its elements in reverse order.
Write a function that will scan a character string passed as an argument and convert all lowercase characters into
their uppercase equivalents.
Read in a sequence of elements from the user and implement the code in C to find the kth largest element.
Dynamically allocate memory for storing the elements based on the user’s input.
Develop a code to implement mark processing system using structures. (Each record has the following fields: Name,
Reg_no, Mark1, Mark2, Mark3, Mark4, Total, average). Get the details of ‘n’ student details with marks. Find the
total and average marks for each student and print the student details based on the Reg_No given as input by the
user.
A stationery shop owner needs to maintain the details of items in his shop such as item id, name, no of items
available, price per item and display the details about the item based on the item id. Develop a code in c to
implement the operations by dynamically allocating space for the items.
Display the contents of file from the character at nth position. Assume the content of file is
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789ABCDEFGHIJ
Write a code in C to store details of faculty (faculty id, name, dept, designation, qualification) in a binary file. Also
read the binary file and display the details of faculty belonging to a particular dept.
Miniproject: making use of the concepts learnt in this course
Reference Book:
1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C”, Second Edition, Oxford University
Press, 2013 reprint
2. Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C, Schaum’s Outlines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2017
reprint.
3. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson Education,
2006 reprint.
4. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Sixteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2018.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/c-programming-language/
• http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm
• https://www.w3schools.in/category/c-tutorial/
• https://fresh2refresh.com/c-programming/
PAGE 23
19GE152 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C

Offered by MECH (Core Practical offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 0 0 3 1.5
Course Objective:
• Various basic engineering practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
• Plumbing and carpentry components.
• Basic machining processes such as drilling and lathe machine in workshop.
• Measurement of electrical quantities, energy and resistance to earth.
• Soldering Practice
Course Outcome:
• Do pipe connections with different joining components.
• Do simple carpentry connections like T joint, dove tail joint, etc.,
• Perform machining operations like drilling holes, facing, turning and chamfering.
• Do residential house wiring
• Measure energy and resistance to earth of electrical equipment
• Perform soldering
The Laboratory examination would be conducted for Group A & Group B, allotting 90 minutes for each group, with a
break of 15 minutes. Both the examinations are to be taken together in sequence, either in the FN session or in the AN
session. The maximum marks for Group A and Group B lab examinations will be 50 each, totaling 100 for the Lab
course. The candidates shall answer either I or II under Group A and either III or IV under Group B, based on lots.
Practical Syllabus:
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
List of Experiment:
CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE
Study of Plumbing accessories
Pipe threading and Assembling
Practice of simple pipe layout joints
Study of layout of Suction and Delivery of Pump.
Study of carpentry and its Tools used
Planning practice and Middle Lap Joint
Tee Halving Joint
Dove Tail Joint
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

Study of Welding and its Tools used
Butt Joint, Lap Joint and Tee Fillet Joint
Study of Gas Welding
Study of Basic Machining Operations
Facing and Turning in Lathe
Drilling
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS)

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE
Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
Fluorescent lamp wiring.
Stair case wiring
Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC circuit.
Measurement of energy using a single phase energy meter.
Measurement of resistance to earth of electrical equipment.
ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE

Study of Electronic components and equipment – Resistor, colour coding measurement of AC signal parameter
(peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CRO.
Study of logic gates AND, OR, EXOR and NOT.
Generation of Clock Signal.
Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose PCB.
Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
Reference Book:
1. K.Jeyachandran, S.Natarajan & S, Balasubramanian, “A Primer on Engineering Practices Laboratory”, Anuradha
PAGE 24
Publications, 2007.
2. T.Jeyapoovan, M.Saravanapandian & S.Pranitha, “Engineering Practices Lab Manual”, Vikas Publishing House
Pvt. Ltd, 2006.
3. H.S. Bawa, “Workshop Practice”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2009.
4. A.Rajendra Prasad & P.M.M.S. Sarma, “Workshop Practice”, Sree Sai Publication, 2002.
5. P.Kannaiah & K.L.Narayana, “Manual on Workshop Practice”, Scitech Publications, 2004.
PAGE 25
19HS201 TECHNICAL ENGLISH - II L T P C

Offered by ENG (Core Theory offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• LSRW skills in English
• Interpreting graphical data and developing logical writing using cohesive devices
• Formal writings for internal and external communication
• Acquiring English required for independent and effective communication in terms of academic requirements
• The ability to present and modify concepts according to the target audience
Course Outcome:
• Apply LSRW skills in English
• Decode graphical data coherently
• Involve in professional correspondences confidently
• Use English independently and effectively for academic requirements
• Present ideas as per the need of the audience and situation
Unit I 9
Listening: Listening to a Telephone Conversations - Video Lectures (NPTEL)
Speaking: Role-play Practice pertaining to Telephone Skills and Telephonic Phrases
Reading: Advertisements (Job/Product) - Profile of the company
Writing: Cover letter - Resume Preparation - Resume templates - Product Description - Checklist
Grammar: Compound Words - Conditional Clauses
Vocabulary: Homonyms and Homophones - Misspelt words
Unit II 9
Listening: Listening to Technical Talks and Conversations
Speaking: Asking for Direction and Help - Describing Simple Process
Reading: Speed Reading - Reading passages with time limit
Writing: Essay Writing - Interpretation of Charts (Flow chart and pie chart) - Instructions
Grammar: Connectives - Purpose Expressions
Vocabulary: American and British English - Use of Sequence Words
Unit III 9
Listening: Sports Commentaries / Animated stories and Follow-up Exercises
Speaking: Preparing Commentaries for Muted Videos
Reading: Short Story - Critical Reading - Understanding Varied Styles of Writing
Writing: Writing a review / Summary of a Story /Article - Precis Writing - Letter of Enquiry, Quotation, Order, Claim
and Adjustment
Grammar: Subject-Verb Agreement
Vocabulary: Vocabulary used in Formal Letters, Emails and Reports
Unit IV 9
Listening: Listening to Informal Conversations and Follow-up Exercises. (Mp4 files). Speaking: Situational
conversations (Meeting a friend in a café) - Narrating Personal Experience
Reading: Developing Analytical Skills - Verbal Reasoning
Writing: Biography Writing - Writing Statement of Purpose (SoP) - Emails, Memos, Notices and Circulars - Minutes of
the Meeting
Grammar: Voice - Numerical Expressions
Vocabulary: Technical Jargons and Cliche
Unit V 9
Listening: Model Debate and Reviewing the Performance of each participant
Speaking: Group Communication Skills - Discussing Social Issues and Current Affairs Reading: Fitting Sentences in
Paragraphs
Writing: Itinerary - Report - Accident report, Feasibility report - Recommendations
Grammar: Cause and Effect Expressions - Reported Speech
Vocabulary: Verbal Analogies
Text Book:
1. Sumant,S and Joyce Pereira. Technical English II. Chennai: Vijay Nicole Imprints Private Limited, 2014.
2. Kumar, Sanjay and Pushp Lata. Communication Skills: A Workbook. New Delhi: OUP, 2018.
Reference Book:
1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Communication Skills. New Delhi: OUP, 2018
2. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited,
PAGE 26
2007.
3. Shobha.K.N. and D.Praveen Sam. Technical English: A Workbook. Chennai: CUP, 2019.
PAGE 27
19BS201 MATHEMATICS - II L T P C
Offered by MAT (Core Theory offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 2 0 4
Course Objective:
• To explain the matrix algebra techniques for practical applications.
• To apply the concepts of vector calculus to solve engineering problems.
• To analyse about some elementary complex functions.
• To apply complex integration in engineering problems.
• To make the student for applying the Laplace and Fourier transform in their domains.
Course Outcome:
• Explain about matrix algebra.
• Solve engineering problems using vector calculus.
• Use complex variable theory for applications like heat conduction, fluid dynamics etc.
• Apply complex integration in engineering problems.
• Solve linear ODE and wave functions using Laplace and Fourier transforms.
Unit I MATRICES 12
Characteristic equation – Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Properties of eigenvalues and eigenvectors
– Cayley-Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Nature of quadratic forms – Reduction of a quadratic
form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation –Evaluation of inverse of a matrix by elementary row
operations – LU decomposition.
Unit II VECTOR CALCULUS 12
Gradient and Directional derivative – Divergence and Curl – Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields – Line integral
over a plane curve – Surface integral and Volume integral– Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stokes’ theorems
(excluding proofs) – Verification and application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals
Unit III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12
Analytic functions – Necessary and Sufficient conditions for analyticity – properties – Harmonic conjugates –
Construction of analytic functions – Conformal mapping – Mapping by functions w = z+c, cz, 1/z and z^2 - Bilinear
transformation.
Unit IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12
Line integral – Cauchy’s theorem and integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series – Singularities – Residues –
Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and
semi-circular contour with no pole on real axis
Unit V LAPLACE AND FOURIER TRANSFORMS 12
Laplace transform – Transform of periodic functions - Inverse Transform by Convolution – Application to solution of
linear ODE with constant coefficients –Fourier transform pair– Transforms of elementary functions – Convolution
theorem – Parseval’s identity – Relation between Fourier and Laplace transforms.
Text Book:
1. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publications, New Delhi, 44th edition, 2017
Reference Book:
1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi, 4th Edition,
2014
2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 11th
Reprint, 2013
3. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7th Edition,
2012
4. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 11th
Reprint, 2010.
5. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons Pvt. Ltd, Singapore, 9th Edition, 2006,
Reprint 2013
PAGE 28
19BS203 MATERIALS SCIENCE L T P C

Offered by PHY (Core Theory offered to BAD, BBE, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To impart sound knowledge about conducting materials.
• To acquire knowledge about semiconducting materials.
• To understand the working of semiconductor devices.
• To introduce the basic concepts about magnetic materials.
• To introduce the fundamentals of nanoelectronic devices.
Course Outcome:
• Comprehend the properties of conducting materials.
• Have adequate knowledge on semiconductors.
• Acquire knowledge on the working of semiconductor devices.
• Get knowledge on magnetic materials.
• Understand the basics principles of nanoelectronic devices
Unit I CONDUCTING MATERIALS
Classical free electron theory - electrical and thermal conductivity–Wiedemann Franz law–Draw backs of classical
free electron theory–Quantum free electron theory (qualitative)–Fermi function–Density of energy states–Carrier
concentration in metals–Expression for Fermi energy
Unit II SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS
Semiconductors–Classifications–Carrier concentration of intrinsic semiconductors–Direct and indirect band gap,
Determination of band gap energy–Extrinsic semiconductor– Carrier concentration in n type and p type
semiconductors–Variation of Fermi energy level with temperature and impurity concentration–Hall effect–
Determination of Hall coefficient
Unit III SEMICONDUCTING DEVICES
Theory of PN junction diode – Energy band structure of open circuited PN junction – Quantitative theory of PN
diode currents – Diode current equation – Diode resistance – Transition and diffusion capacitance – Effect of
temperature – Breakdown in PN junction diodes – Diode switching characteristics – Principles, characteristics and
applications of Zener Diode, tunnel diode, PIN diode, Varactor diode, SCR, UJT, photodiode and phototransistor.
Unit IV MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
Classification of magnetic materials–Quantum numbers–Origin of magnetic moments–Classical theory of
diamagnetism (Langevin theory) –Quantum theory of paramagnetism–Ferromagnetism (Weiss theory) – Energy
associated with domain theory –Hysteresis – antiferromagnetic materials–Ferrites–applications– Soft and hard
magnetic materials. Magnetic recording and readout in audio tapes, floppy and hard disk drives.
Unit V NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES
Introduction - quantum confinement – quantum structures - Density of states in quantum well, quantum wire and
quantum dot structures – resonant tunneling Diode – quantum interference effects – mesoscopic structures:
conductance fluctuations and coherent transport – Coulomb blockade effects - Single electron phenomena and
Single electron Transistor – spintronics - Carbon nanotubes :Preparation (CVD, Arc Discharge, laser Ablation),
Properties and applications.
Text Book:
1. Pradeep Fulay, Jung-Kun Lee, Electronic, Magnetic, and Optical Materials, CRC Press, 2017
2. Todd D. Steiner, Semiconductor Nanostructure for Optoelectronic Applications, ArTech House Publishers,
Boston, London, 2004
3. Marikani A, Materials Science, PHI Publishing, New Delhi, 2017
4. Kasap, S.O., Principle of Electronic Materials and devices, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2007
Extensive Reading:
• Pierret, R.F. Semiconductor device fundamentals, Pearsons 1996
• Garcia N and Damask A, Physics for Computer science students, Springer–Verlag, 1991
• Todd D. Steiner, Semiconductor Nanostructure for Optoelectronic Applications, ArTech House Publishers,
Boston, London, 2004
PAGE 29
19EE201 ELECTRIC CIRCUITS AND NETWORKS L T P C

Offered by EEE (Core Theory) 3 2 0 4
Course Objective:
• To motivate the students for solving AC and DC circuits using various laws and theorems.
• To familiarize the concepts and terminologies of series & parallel resonance circuits and coupled circuits among
the students.
• To motivate the students for analyzing three phase 3 wire and 4 wire circuits and network Parameters
Course Outcome:
• Comprehend the basic laws, mesh current, nodal voltage, voltage and current division, source transformation
and star/delta transformation methods for solving circuit problems.
• solve the basic network theorems used for solving networks with both DC and AC inputs
• elucidate the concepts and terminologies behind series & parallel resonance circuits and coupled circuits
• Comprehend the concepts of transient in circuits with DC and AC inputs.
• Distinguish the analysis of three phase 3 wire and 4 wire circuits with star and delta connected loads.
Unit I DC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS 12
Classification of network elements – R, L, C parameters – Energy sources: Independent Sources, Dependent Sources
- Ohms Law – Kirchhoff‟s laws–Resistors in series- voltage division- Resistors in parallel - current division- Network
reduction: source transformation – star delta conversion - Circuits with Independent and Dependent Sources - Mesh
current and node voltage method of analysis.
Unit II AC FUNDAMENTALS AND NETWORK THEOREMS FOR DC AND AC CIRCUITS 12
A.C. circuits: Average and RMS value - R, L, C parameters: Phasor Diagram, Power, Power Factor and Energy-
Theorems: Superposition Theorem, Reciprocity Theorem, Thevenins Theorem, Norton Theorem, Maximum power
transfer theorem.
Unit III RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS 12
Resonance in Series and Parallel RLC Circuits - frequency response – Quality factor and Bandwidth - Introduction to
coupled circuit – Self Inductance - Mutual inductance – Dot Convention- Coefficient of coupling -Series and parallel
connection of coupled circuit.
Unit IV TRANSIENT RESPONSE ANALYSIS 12
Transient response of RL, RC and RLC circuits using Laplace transform for DC input and A.C. sinusoidal input.
Unit V THREE PHASE CIRCUITS AND TWO PORT NETWORKS 12
Polyphase System: Comparison between single and three phase circuit- Interconnection of three phase sources and
loads- -Three phase Balanced star and Delta connected load - Three phase Unbalanced star and Delta connected
load.
Two port Networks: Characterization of two port networks in terms of Z, Y, ABCD and h parameters.
Practical Course 0
Text Book:
1. William H. HaytJr, Jack E. Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuits Analysis”, McGraw Hill
publishers, 8th edition, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Sudhakar A and Shyam Mohan SP, “Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis”, McGraw Hill, (2017).
Reference Book:
1. Paranjothi SR, “Electric Circuits Analysis,” New Age International Ltd., New Delhi, (1996).
2. Joseph A. Edminister, MahmoodNahri, “Electric circuits”, Schaum‟s series, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2001.
3. Chakrabati A, “Circuits Theory (Analysis and synthesis), DhanpathRai& Sons, New Delhi, (1999).
4. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, Second Edition, McGraw Hill,
(2003).
PAGE 30
19GEM01 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C

Offered by MECH (Core Theory offered to BBE, BEC, BEE, BME, BRA) 2 2 0 3
Course Objective:
• To gain knowledge on the basics of Engineering Drawing construction procedures.
• To understand the principles involved in graphic skill for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
engineering products.
• To draw various solids.
• To expose the existing national standards related to technical drawings.
Course Outcome:
• Sketch multiple views of engineering components
• Create the projection of point, straight line and plane
• Project the solid objects
• Section and Develop lateral surfaces of solids
• Apply isometric and perspective projections.
Unit I PLANE CURVES AND PICTORIAL VIEWS TO ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS 8
Geometrical Constructions like bisection of a straight line, division of a straight line into n equal parts, bisection of
angles, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by
eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – Construction of involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents
and normal to the above curves.
Orthographic projection – Principles – Principal planes - Representation of Three Dimensional objects – Layout of
views – Sketching of multiple views (Front, Top and Side views) from pictorial views of simple objects and
Engineering Components.
Unit II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACES 8
First Angle projection – Projection of points in four quadrants. Projection of straight lines (only First angle
projection) inclined to both the principal planes – Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating
line method and traces.
Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by change of position
method.
Unit III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 8
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one of the principal
planes by change of position method.
Unit IV SECTION OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF LATERAL SURFACES OF SOLIDS 8
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to one of the principal planes
and perpendicular to the other – Obtaining true shape of the section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones - Development of lateral
surfaces of sectioned solids.
Unit V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 5
Principles of isometric projection – Isometric scale – Isometric View – Isometric projections of simple solids and cut
solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones – Combination of two solid objects in simple vertical positions.
Perspective projection of simple solids – Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual ray method.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (NOT FOR EXAMINATION)
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS conventions and
specifications – Lettering and Dimensioning - Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets.
Text Book:
1. Natarajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2018.
Reference Book:
1. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P) Limited, 2018.
2. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.
3. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an introduction to
Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production”, Eastern Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
4. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
5. N.D. Bhatt, “Engineering Drawing” Charotar Publishing House, 53rd Edition, (2014).
PAGE 31
19BS281 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT L T P C

Offered by CHE (Theory Course with Lab Component offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 2 4
Course Objective:
• The student is expected to understand what constitutes the environment, what are precious resources in the
environment, how to conserve these resources, what is the role of a human being in maintaining a clean
environment for the future generations and how to maintain ecological balance and preserve biodiversity.
• The role of government and non-government organizations in environment management.
• About Disaster and its management.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the basic concepts of environment studies and natural resources.
• Get thorough knowledge about ecosystem and biodiversity.
• Have an elaborate knowledge about different types of pollution, social issues and pollution related acts.
• Get the knowledge about types of disaster.
• Have a fundamental idea about the management of disasters.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND NATURAL RESOURCES 9
Definition, scope and importance – Need for public awareness – Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation,
deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water
resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams –
benefits and problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using
mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and
overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer, pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies –
Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of alternate energy
sources. Case studies – Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of resources for
sustainable lifestyles
Unit II ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 10
Concept of an ecosystem – Structure and function of an ecosystem – Producers, consumers and decomposers –
Energy flow in the ecosystem (single channel energy flow model) – Concept of nutrient cycling (Nitrogen cycle) –
Ecological succession – Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids – Introduction to Biodiversity – Definition:
genetic, species and ecosystem diversity – Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical,
aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, National and local levels – India as a mega-diversity nation –
Hot-spots of biodiversity – Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts –
Endangered and endemic species of India – Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ conservation of
biodiversity.
Unit III ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND SOCIAL ISSUES 12
Definition – Causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Marine pollution (d)
Noise pollution and (e) Nuclear hazards – Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban
and industrial wastes – Role of an individual in prevention of pollution.
From Unsustainable to Sustainable development – Environmental ethics : Issues and possible solutions – Climate
change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies – Acts for
Prevention of Environmental Pollution – Wildlife Protection Act – Forest Conservation Act - Water (Prevention and
Control of Pollution) Act – Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Environment Protection Act – Issues
involved in enforcement of environmental legislation – Public awareness.
Unit IV DISASTER AND ITS IMPACTS 7
Definition of Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Risk – Types – Natural disasters (earthquake, landslides, flood, cyclones,
tsunami and drought) – Man-made disasters (Chemical, nuclear and biological) – Disaster impacts (environmental,
physical, social, ecological and economical) – Case studies.
Unit V DISASTER MANAGEMENT 7
Need and concept of Disaster management – Disaster Management cycle – Prevention, mitigation, preparedness,
relief and recovery – Post–disaster environmental response (water, sanitation, food safety, waste management and
disease control) – Disaster Management Plan – Role and responsibilities of government, community, local
institutions and NGOs.
Practical Course 20
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR CHEMISTRYLABORATORY
(Any TEN Experiments)
1. Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA method
2. Estimation of alkalinity of water sample
PAGE 32
3. pH-metric titration (acid & base)

4. Conductometric titration (strong acid Vs strong base)
5. Conductometric titration (mixture of acids Vs Strong base)
6. Potentiometric titration between ferrous ion and potassium dichromate
7. Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss method
8. Determination of DO in water by Winkler’s method
9. Estimation of Chloride in water sample by Argentometric method
10. Determination of COD value of industrial effluents
11. Estimation of chromium in tannery wastes
12. Estimation of available chlorine in bleaching powder
13. Estimation of iron by spectrophotometry
14. Estimation of sodium by flame photometry
Text Book:
1. Gilbert M. Masters and Wendell P. Ela, Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science, Pearson
Education Pvt., Ltd., Third Edition, 2014.
2. Miller T.G. Jr, Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co.
3. Townsend C., Harper J., and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science, Third Edition.
4. Trivedi R.K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to Air Pollution, Techno-Science Publications.
5. Anubha Kaushik and Kaushik C.P., Environmental Science and Engineering, New Age International (P) Ltd, Sixth
Edition, 2018.
6. J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J. D. Barnes, M.J.K. Thomas, Vogel's Quantitative Chemical Analysis, Prentice Hall,
India, 2000.
7. D.P. Shoemaker and C.W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.
8. A. I. Vogel, A Text Book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis, ELBS London, 1995.
9. N. Manivasakam, Industrial Effluents – Origin, Characteristics, Effects Analysis & Treatment, Sakthi Publications,
Coimbatore, 2003.
Reference Book:
1. Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad India, 2004.
2. Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and Standards, Vol. I and II,
Enviro Media.
3. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, Environmental Encyclopedia, Jaico Publ. House, Mumbai, 2001.
4. Wager K.D., Environmental Management, W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA, 1998.
5. Benny Joseph, Environmental Science and Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi,
ISBN: 0070601690, 2006.
6. Singh B.K., 2008, Handbook of Disaster Management: techniques & Guidelines, Rajat Publication.
7. Ghosh G.K., 2006, Disaster Management, APH Publishing Corporation.
PAGE 33
19EE251 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS LABORATORY L T P C

Offered by EEE (Core Practical) 0 0 3 1.5
Course Objective:
• To impart knowledge on the usage of CRO.
• To motivate the students for solving AC and DC circuits.
• To familiarize the concepts and terminologies of series & parallel resonance and Coupled circuits.
• To impart knowledge on the usage of circuit simulation software
Course Outcome:
• Measure sinusoidal voltage, frequency and power factor using CRO
• Apply kirchoff’s laws and network theorems in analyzing circuits
• Explain the characteristics of resonance and coupled circuits
• Analyze the behavior of circuits using simulation softwares
Study of CRO and measurement of sinusoidal voltage, frequency and power factor
Frequency Response of Parallel Resonance circuit
Frequency Response of Series Resonance circuit
Design and simulation of series and parallel resonance circuit
Determination of time constant of RL and RC series circuit
Frequency Response of single tuned Coupled circuit
Verification of Kirchhoff’s Voltage & current laws
Verification of Mesh & Nodal methods
Verification of Reciprocity Theorem
Verification of Superposition Theorem
Verification of Thevenins, Nortons and Maximum Power Transfer Theorems
Simulation & verification of Thevenin’s & Nortons Theorems using PSPICE
PAGE 34
19GE251 LINUX COMMANDS AND SHELL PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C

Offered by ECE (Core Practical offered to BEC, BEE) 0 0 3 1.5
Course Objective:
• To practice the installation of LINUX operating system
• To provide a formal foundation to the Linux commands
• To practice the installation of packages and web server configuration
• To write Linux shell programs with shell programming constructs
• To perform command line arguments in shell programming
Course Outcome:
• Install LINUX operating system
• Work with Linux commands
• Install packages and web server configuration
• Develop shell programs for conditional and looping statements
• Implement Command line arguments in shell programming
Practical Syllabus:
1. LINUX ADMINISTRATION COMMANDS
Basic Linux Commands - System Bootup and Shutting Commands - File and Directory Management Commands -
Pipes & Filters - Process Management Commands - Communication Commands – User Management Commands –
System Services Commands – Package Management Commands.
2. SHELL PROGRAMMING
Simple Shell program – Variables and Operators - Conditional Statements - Looping Statements – Command Line
Arguments.
1. Working with basic Linux Commands: ls, cd, mkdir, pwd, clear, man, cat, who, passwd, chmod, wc, grep, pipe,
redirection operators (<, >, >>).
2. Create a directory “CSE”, change your working directory to ‘CSE’ and display where you are working now?
Create files named “date”, “user”. Store the calendar and current date information in the file named “date” and
store the login details of all users in the file “user”. Also, store the details of all active users in the same file (“user”).
Finally merge the two files into a single file called “merge” and delete both the files.
3. Create a file consisting of countries and corresponding continents Display the countries which are in the
continent Africa. Sort the generated list and convert them into lowercase.
4. Create a directory Marks”, change your working directory to ‘Marks’.
A. Create 3 empty files MarkList, NameList and StudRep. Add necessary information (MarkList – Mark only,
NameList – Name only, StudRep – representative Name only) to the corresponding file (minimum 15 details)
B. Merge the contents of files NameList&MarkList and store it in a file MarkDetail1 & MarkDetail2 in the
following format.
a. MarkDetail1 MarkDetail2
b. Arun 100 Arun Bala …..
c. Bala 98 100 98 …..
d. …. …
C. Copy the first 8 lines from MarkDetail1 to the new file “Mark1”. Copy the last 4 lines from the file “Mark1” to
new file “Mark2”. And finally store the contents of MarkDetail1 from the line 4 to the file “Mark3”. Display the
contents of “Mark3” along with line number.
D. Display which file system is mounted on your system
5. Create a user group called “csestudent” and rename it as “engineers”. Add 10 users to the group and rename
the usernames for at least 5 students. Delete an user from the group and finally delete the group
6. Perform the following system administration tasks
• Print network connections, routing tables, interface statistics, masquerade connections, and multicast
memberships
• System Load statistics
• Report a snapshot of the current processes.
• Report virtual memory statistics
• Display call graph profile data
• Display system tasks
7. Create a file which consists of menu of cuisines for a restaurant. Perform the following operations in the file.
• Change the price of the items which are 4$ to 6$
• Delete the list of items whose prices are less than 3$
• Replace the whitespaces between the items into ‘-‘
PAGE 35
• Print the list of items from 4th to 10th position

• List out all the cuisines of type ‘Italian’
8. Write a shell script which will accepts login name from the user as command line argument and display the
message whether the user having that login name is currently logged in or not. Also enable the user to view the long
list of files that end with ‘ca’ along with the count.
9. Write a shell script to store the city names of different states in different files. The file names must be in the
short form of the corresponding state names (Eg: TamilNadu-TN). Accept the state name and city name from
command line. Store the city name in corresponding file. If the file doesn’t exist, create the file. If the city name
already exists, display the message “City already added”.
10. Generate payroll for the company with the specifications as follows.
If the employee’s basic salary is less than Rs.15000, then HRA=10% of basic salary and DA=90% of basic. If the
employee’s salary is either equal to or above Rs.15000, then HRA=Rs.500 and DA=98% of basic salary. Automatically
generate gross salary and net salary. Store the details in a file. The total number of employees should be obtained
from command line
Reference Book:
1. Mark G. Sobell, “A Practical Guide to Linux Commands, Editors, and Shell Programming”, Pearson
Education, 2nd Edition.
2. Wale Soyinka, “Linux Administration A Beginner’s Guide”, The McGrawHill, Sixth Edition.
3. Lars Wirzenius et al., “The Linux System Administrator's Guide”, 2004.
4. Stephen G. Kochan, Patrick wood, “Unix Shell Programming” SAMS Publishing, Third Edition, 2003.
5. Christopher Vickery, “UNIX shell programmer’s” Prentice Hall PTR, 1999.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.tutorialspoint.com/unix/index.htm
• https://www.guru99.com/must-know-linux-commands.html#7
• https://www-xray.ast.cam.ac.uk/~jss/lecture/computing/notes/out/commands_basic/
• https://www.tutorialspoint.com/linux_admin/linux_admin_tutorial.pdf
• http://www.greenstechnologys.com/unix-course-content.html
PAGE 36
19HS251 COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY L T P C

Offered by ENG (Core Practical offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 0 0 2 1
Course Objective:
• Different styles of communication and to improve listening, understanding and observation skills
• Key communication styles and techniques
• Critical and analytical reading skills
• Framing sentences with precision and clarity
• Applying comprehensive skills required for academic and societal situations
Course Outcome:
• Understand concepts clearly and avoid misinterpretation when listening to various styles of communication
• Communicate effectively using suitable techniques
• Critically analyze and assimilate the reading materials
• Construct error free simple, concise and clear sentences
• Participate casually in classroom discussions and other general activities
Practical Course 30
Practical Syllabus:
Listening 6
Listening & Learning Skills - Listening to Audio and Practice Exercises - Making a Critical Appreciation of the Content
- Answering Cloze Test based on Listening - Chinese Gossip - Demonstration of Barriers to Good Listening and Tips
for Effective Listening
Speaking 6
Self-Introduction - Introducing Friends and Chief Guests - Developing Stories using Picture Prompts - Language
Etiquette in Different Situations: Sharing Memorable Incidents - Expressing Agreement and Conflict Management
and Seeking Information - Expressing Feelings - Affection, Anger, Regret, Team Reviewing and Appraisal on any
Social Event/Issue - Data Decoding
Reading 6
Making Inference in Readings - SQ3R Method of Reading - Reading longer texts with Time Frame - Reading Data
using different types of Texts, Magazines and Internet Materials - Editing/Proofreading (Any Article/ Excerpt from
Research Papers)
Writing 6
Use of Idioms and Phrases - Correct usage of Proverbs - Words that are Commonly Misspelt - Advertisement
Designing with Catchy Captions and Slogans - Abstract Writing - Mind Mapping and Brainstorming on any Social
Event/Issue
Remedial Grammar and Vocabulary 6

Error Identification and Correction - Word Formation - Derivational & Inflectional - Word Choice: Appropriate Words
& Commonly Confused Words - Verbal Analogies - Verbal Reasoning - Synonyms - Antonyms - Vocabulary from GRE
(50 words) - Vocabulary Collection from Select Newspapers (50 words)
Text Book:
1. Taylor, Grant. English Conversational Practice. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill, 2019 Reprint.
Reference Book:
1. English Language Communication Skills: Lab Manual cum Workbook. New Delhi: Cengage Learning, 2014.
2. Sadanand, Kamlesh and Susheela Punitha. Spoken English: A Foundation Course, Part I. New Delhi, Orient Black
Swan, 2010.
3. Sadanand, Kamlesh and Susheela Punitha. Spoken English: A Foundation Course, Part II. New Delhi, Orient Black
Swan, 2010.
PAGE 37
19MA301 MATHEMATICS - III : BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEM AND PROBABILITY L T P C

Offered by MAT
DISTRIBUTIONS 3 2 0 4
(Core Theory offered to BCI, BEE, BME)
Course Objective:
• To explain the concepts of Fourier series for solving problems in engineering disciplines.
• To describe the methods to solve partial differential equations.
• To apply the standard techniques for solving boundary value problem
• To introduce the basic concepts of probability and random variables.
• To estimate solutions for probabilistic models using probability distributions.
Course Outcome:
• Express any periodic functions as a series of well-known simple periodic functions namely sine and cosine.
• Solve various partial differential equations.
• Obtain the solution of boundary value problem such as displacement of string and heat conduction
• Relate the real life problems with the concept of probability.
• Apply the concepts of probability distributions to solve engineering problems.
Unit I FOURIER SERIES 12
Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine and cosine series –
Parseval’s identity – Complex form of Fourier series – Harmonic analysis.
Unit II PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Formation of PDE – Solutions of first order PDE – Lagrange’s linear PDE – Standard types and equations reducible to
standard types – Singular solution – Classification of second order PDE – Solution of second and higher order linear
homogeneous PDE with constant coefficients.
Unit III BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN PDE 12
Method of separation of variables – Solutions of one dimensional wave equation and one dimensional heat flow
equation – Steady state solution of two dimensional heat flow equation in Cartesian coordinates – Fourier series
solutions in Cartesian coordinates.
Unit IV PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLE 12
Axiomatic definition of probability – Addition theorem of probability – Conditional probability – Baye’s theorem –
Multiplication theorem of probability – Discrete and Continuous random variables – Moments – Moment
generating function.
Unit V PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS 12
Discrete distributions: Binomial, Poisson, Negative binomial and Geometric distributions – Continuous distributions:
Uniform, Exponential, Gamma and Normal distributions.
Text Book:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 44th Edition, Khanna Publishers, 2017.
2. Gupta S.C and Kapoor V.K., “ Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, 11th Edition Reprint, Sultan Chand &
Sons, 2015.
Reference Book:
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 8th Edition, Firewall Media (An imprint
of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), 2011.
2. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 7th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
3. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2016.
4. Hwei Hsu, “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables and Random
Processes”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
5. Oliver C. Ibe, “Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes”, 2nd Edition, Elsevier India Private
Ltd, 2014.
PAGE 38
19EE301 MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Electrical & electronic instruments and measurements techniques.
• Calibration of meters.
• Measurement of Capacitance, Inductance and resistance.
• Measurement of Magnetic parameters, and Electronics Instruments.
Course Outcome:
• Calibrate electrical parameter measuring instruments.
• Apply analog and digital techniques to measure electrical quantities.
• Measure resistance, inductance and capacitance using various bridge circuits.
• Measure Magnetic parameters and use various Electronics Instruments.
• Use various transducers for measuring non-electrical quantities.
Unit I CHARACTERISTICS,ERRORS & STANDARDS OF INSTRUMENTS 9
Functional elements of generalized Instrumentation Systems-Static characteristics: Accuracy, Precision,
Sensitivity, Linearity, Resolution, Range, Span and Dynamic characteristics: Speed of response, Measuring lag,
Fidelity, Dynamic error of measuring instruments - Absolute, gross, systematic, random and limiting errors in
measurements -Statistical estimation of measurements data: Arithmetic mean, Average deviation, Standard
deviation, Variance and Probable error of mean - Standards and calibration.
Unit II ELECTRICAL MEASURING INSTRUMENTS 9
Classification of measuring instruments-Essential requirements of an instrument-Construction, working principle
and Torque equation of Permanent Magnet Moving Coil instruments - Attraction type and Repulsion type Moving
iron instruments-Electro-dynamometer type Wattmeter, Extension of Voltmeter and Ammeter range -
Construction, working principle of Instrument transformers-1φ Induction type Energy meter.
Unit III MEASUREMENT OF RESISTANCE, INDUCTANCE & CAPACITANCE 9
D.C Bridges: Wheatstone Bridge, Kelvin’s bridge, Kelvin’s double bridge - A.C bridges: Maxwell bridge, Anderson
bridge, Hays bridge, Schering bridge, Wein’s bridge.
Unit IV MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS & ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS 9
Magnetic Measurements: Measurement of Flux density and Magnetizing force, Determination of B-H
curve for the magnetic material specimen, Measurement of Iron-loss using Maxwell’s bridge method-
Weston frequency meter – Multimeter-Servo- potentiometric type, Successive approximations type Digital
Voltmeter -Construction, working principle and applications of X –Y recorder, PC based data acquisition system.
Unit V MEASUREMENT OF NON-ELECTRICAL QUANTITIES 9
Transducers: Classifications and Selection of transducers –Principle of operation of Resistance potentiometer-Strain
gauge transducers - Capacitive transducers-Linear Variable Differential Transducer, Piezo-electric transducers -
Measurement of Temperature: Resistance thermometers, Thermistors and Thermocouples-Speed measurement:
Contact and non-contact type.
Text Book:
1. Sawhney A K, “A Course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”, DhanpatRai& Sons,
New Delhi, 18th Edition, 2012.
2. Doeblin E O and Dhanesh N Manik, ―Measurement Systems", McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Gupta J.B., “A Course in Electronic and Electrical Measurements”, S. K. Kataria& Sons, Delhi, 2009
2. PrithwirajPurkait, Budhaditya Biswas, ChiranjibKoley “Electrical and Electronics Measurements and
Instrumentation”, McGraw Hill Education India, First Edition, 2013.
3. Golding E W, and Widdis F C, “Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments”, A H Wheeler &Company,
Calcutta, Fifth Edition, 2011.
4. Moorthy D.V.S, “Transducers and Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd, 2007.
5. Patranabi.D, “Sensors and Transducers”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2003.
6. Kalsi H.S, “Electronic Instrumentation”, McGraw Hill Education India, 3rd Edition, 2010.
7. Rangan C S, Sharma G R, Mani V S, ‗Instrumentation Devices and Systems‘, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
PAGE 39
19EE302 ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS L T P C

Course Objective:
• The basic mathematical concepts related to electromagnetic vector fields.
• Concepts of electrostatics, electrical potential, energy density and their calculations.
• Concepts of magnetostatics, magnetic flux density, scalar and vector potential and their calculations.
• Faraday’s laws, induced emf and their applications.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the basic mathematical concepts related to electromagnetic vector fields in field calculations.
• Apply the basic concepts about electrostatic fields for the calculation of electric field intensity, electrical
potential and energy density.
• Explain Electric field in free space, conductors, dielectric and multiple dielectrics and apply the basic concepts in
Capacitance calculations.
• Apply the basic concepts about magneto static fields forthe calculation of magnetic flux density, scalar
potential, vectorpotential and energy density.
• Explain the different methods of emf generation and Maxwell’s equations.
Unit I VECTOR ANALYSIS 12
Vector fields – Different co-ordinate systems – Rectangular, Cylindrical, Spherical co-ordinate systems – Gradient,
Divergence and Curl – Divergence Theorem – Stoke’s Theorem.
Unit II ELECTROSTATICS- I 12
Sources and effects of electromagnetic fields – Coulomb’s Law – Electric field intensity – Field due to point and
continuous charges –Gauss’s law and applications –. Electric potential – Energy density.
Unit III ELECTROSTATICS- II 12
Electric field in free space, conductors, dielectric - Dielectric polarization - Dielectric strength - Electric field in
multiple dielectrics – Boundary conditions– Poisson’s and Laplace’s equations – Capacitance.
Unit IV MAGNETOSTATICS 12
Magnetic field intensity – Biot-Savart Law - Ampere’s Law and applications - Magnetic field due to straight
conductors, circular loop, infinite sheet of current – Magnetic flux density (B) –Magnetization –Boundary conditions
– Scalar and vector potential –Inductance – Energy density.
Unit V ELECTRODYNAMIC FIELDS 12
Magnetic force – Lorentz Law of force –Torque –Faraday’s laws, induced emf – Transformer and motional EMF –
Maxwell’s equations (differential and integral forms) –Displacement current – Derivation of generalized Wave
Equations from Maxwell’s equations.
Text Book:
1. Mathew N. O. SADIKU, “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press Inc., Seventh Edition, 2018.
2. William H.Hayt, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, McGraw Hill, Sixth Edition, 2001.
Reference Book:
1. Joseph. A.Edminister, “Theory and Problems of Electromagnetics”, Second Edition, Schaum Series, McGraw Hill,
1993.
2. Kraus and Fleish, “Electromagnetics with Applications”, McGraw Hill International Editions, Fifth Edition, 2010.
3. AshutoshPramanik, “Electromagnetism – Theory and Applications”, Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited, New
Delhi, Second Edition 2008.
4. Gangadhar K.A., “Field Theory”, Khanna Publishers, Fifteenth Edition, Third Reprint 2004.
PAGE 40
19EE303 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Construction, Theory, Characteristics and Applications of Electronic Devices, Power supplies.
• Operation of Amplifiers and Oscillators.
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate the construction, theory and characteristics of the basic electronic devices.
• Design a power supply, regulator and filter.
• Demonstrate the construction, operation and characteristics of BJT.
• Demonstrate the construction, operation and characteristics of FET devices.
• Identify and design a suitable amplifier/oscillator for a specific application.
Unit I PN JUNCTION AND SPECIAL DIODES 9
PN junction diode-Operation, VI characteristics –static and dynamic resistance - Diode current equation: Drift and
diffusion currents – temperature effects - Diode equivalent circuits – diode junction capacitances - switching
characteristics –Zener diode – VI characteristics, LED, Schottky diode, varactor diode, photo diode and applications.
Unit II RECTIFIERS, FILTERS AND REGULATORS 9
Diode clampers and clippers – Rectifiers: Half wave and full wave rectifiers, Average and RMS value, Ripple factor,
Regulation, Rectification efficiency, Filters: C, L, LC filters – Zener diode shunt Regulator.
Unit III BJT AND ITS BIASING 9
Transistor construction, operation – Input and output characteristics – CE, CB and CC configurations – hybrid model
– transistor switching – transistor biasing: operating point, load line and stability factor – base bias and voltage
divider bias - Darlington connection - Phototransistor and Opto couplers.
Unit IV FIELD CONTROLLED DEVICES 9
JFET – construction, operation and characteristics, parameters, pinch-off voltage – small signal frequency model.
MOSFET - construction, operation and characteristics – enhancement and depletion types – parameters – MOSFET
as voltage variable resistor.
UJT – characteristics, operation and saw tooth oscillators.
Unit V AMPLIFIERS, OSCILLATORS & MULTIVIBRATOR 9
BJT as an amplifier: Small signal analysis of CE amplifier with voltage divider bias using h-parameters, frequency
response – RC coupled amplifier – Differential amplifiers, CMRR
Feedback amplifiers: Feedback concepts - Advantages and Disadvantages of negative feedback – Feedback
connections - Voltage / current, series / shunt feedback.
FET amplifiers :CS and CD amplifiers
Oscillators - condition for oscillation – Hartley, Colpitts, RC phase shift, Wienbridge and crystal oscillators-
AstableMultivibrator.
Text Book:
1. Robert L. Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Eighth Edition, Prentice Hall of
India, 2002
2. R.S.Sedha, “A Textbook of Electronic Devices and Circuits”, S. Chand & company Ltd. 2007.
Reference Book:
1. Albert Paul Malvino, “Electronic Principles”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.
2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall India, 1999.
3. Millman and Halkias, “Electron devices and circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 3rd edition, 2010.
PAGE 41
19EE304 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basic concepts of Object Oriented Paradigm.
• Implementation procedure of Object Oriented concepts using C++ programming language.
• Introduce the open source Python programming language.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the basic concepts of Object-Oriented Programming and how object-oriented concepts are
incorporated into C++ programming language.
• Apply the concepts of classes, objects, data encapsulation to the applications of varying complexities
• Apply the concepts of inheritance, and polymorphism to the applications of varying complexities.
• Apply an object-oriented approach in handling Template,Exceptions and Streams
• Understand the basic concepts python programming also develop simple python programs
Unit I OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING PARADIGM USING C++ 9
Introduction - object oriented programming fundamental - abstraction - encapsulation - derivation - object oriented
languages and packages. Introduction to C++ – C++ program construction – Preprocessor directives – Data types -
standard input output streams - Type conversion - Control structures.
Function: function proto-types – passing by reference – passing constants and variables – Returning values from
functions – Return by reference – Overloaded functions – inline functions–friend function-default arguments.
Unit II CLASSES AND OBJECTS 9
Classes – Constructor – copy constructor – overloaded constructor – copy constructor - Destructors – Data
Members - Member Functions– Static class data – Array as class member data – Array of objects – Operator
overloading –Data type conversion using operator overloading.
Unit III INHERITANCE AND POLYMORPHISM 9
Inheritance concept-Types-single, multiple, multilevel and hybrid inheritance-Concept of reusability- Abstract class-
friend function -virtual base class-this pointer-virtual function and pure virtual function.
Unit IV TEMPLATE,EXCEPTIONS AND STREAMS 9
Template concept-function Template-class Template, Exception handling-syntax-multiple Exceptions-Stream
Classes.
Unit V PYTHON PROGRAMMING 9
Python Programming Language – Overview – Syntax – Variable types – Operators – Decision Making – Loops –
Numbers – Strings – Data Structures – Lists and tuples – Dictionary – Functions.
Text Book:
1. Robert Lafore, “Object Oriented Programming in C++”,Galgotia Publications, 2001.
2. Balagurusamy E., “Object Oriented Programming with C++”, Tata McGraw Hill, IInd Edition, 2011.
3. Wesley J Chun, “Core Python Programming”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2006.
Reference Book:
1. Herbert Schildt, “C++ - The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
2. Bjarne Stroustrup, “The C++ Programming Language”, Addison Wesley, 2000.
3. John .R .Hubbard, “Schaums Outline Programming with C++”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
4. Lippman S.B., Josee Lajoie, Barbara E. Moo, “C++ Premier”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition,2005.
5. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, ―An Introduction to Python – Revised and updated for Python 3.2,
Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
6. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist‘‘, 2nd edition, Updated for Python 3,
Shroff/O‘Reilly Publishers, 2016.
PAGE 42
19EE381 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS L T P C

Offered by EEE (Theory Course with Lab Component) 3 0 2 4
Course Objective:
• Basic theorems of Boolean algebra and gate level minimization and implementation.
• Procedures for the analysis and design of combinational circuits and sequential circuits
• The concept of memories and programmable logic devices.
Course Outcome:
• Apply Boolean algebra and gate level minimization to design digital circuits
• Design combinational logic circuits.
• Design &analyze the synchronous sequential logic circuits.
• Describe the function of different memory systems and programmable logic devices.
• Design &analyze the Asynchronous Sequential Logic Circuits
Unit I BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND GATE LEVEL MINIMIZATION 9
Boolean theorems and properties –Boolean functions -Logic gates –Gate Level Minimization using Karnaugh map,
POS simplification, Don’t Care conditions and Quine-McCluskey method. Implementations of Logic Functions
using gates-NAND–NOR implementations
Unit II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC 9
Design of adders, subtractor, Adder with Look Ahead Carry, Subtraction using adder, Multiplexers-Combinational
logic design using Multiplexers-Demultiplexers and their use in combinational logic design-Magnitude
comparators, Code Converters-BCD to Binary and Binary to BCD, Priority Encoders-Decimal to BCD, Octal to Binary,
Decoders-BCD to Decimal and BCD to Seven Segment Display driver.
Unit III SEQUENTIAL LOGIC 9
Latches, Flip-flops -SR, JK, D, T, and Master-Slave –Characteristic table and equation –Application table –Edge
triggering –Level Triggering– Asynchronous Ripple or serial counters- Design of Synchronous counters: state
diagram-State table –State minimization –State assignment -Excitation table and maps-Circuit implementation,
Modulo–n counter, Synchronous counters -Analysis of clocked sequential circuits.
Unit IV REGISTERS AND MEMORIES 9
Shift registers, Ring counter –Shift counters- Memories: ROM -PROM –EPROM –EEPROM –EAPROM– RAM -FLASH
Memories - Programmable Logic Devices –Programmable Logic Array (PLA) -Programmable Array Logic (PAL)-
FPGA.
Unit V ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC 9
Design of fundamental mode and pulse mode asynchronous sequential circuits –Primitive State Table, State
Minimization – Merger Graph, State Assignment, Excitation and output maps, Incompletely specified State
Machines, Problems in Asynchronous Sequential Circuits -Cycles, Races and Hazards.
Study of Basic Digital ICs. (Verification of truth table for AND, OR, EXOR, NOT, NOR, NAND, JK FF, RS FF, D FF)
Implementation of Boolean Functions, Adder/ Subtractor circuits.
Code converters, Excess-3, 2s Complement, Binary to Gray code using IC7486, IC7404, IC7432, IC7408.
Design and Implementation of 4-bit shift registers in SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO modes using IC7404, IC7411, IC7432, IC
74147 and IC 7445.
Counters: Design and implementation of 4-bit modulo counters as synchronous and Asynchronous types using
IC7476, IC7408, IC7432, IC7400.
Multiplexer/ De-multiplexer: Study of 4:1; 8:1; 16:1multiplexers and Study of 1:4; 1:8; 1:16 demultiplexers
Text Book:
1. Salivahanan S and Arivazhagan S, “Digital Circuits and Design”, Oxford University Press, 5th Edition, 2018.
2. Morris Mano M and Michael D. Ciletti., “Digital Design”, Prentice Hall, 5thEdition, 2013
Reference Book:
1. Charles H.Roth. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Thomson Learning, 2003.
2. Donald P.Leach and Albert Paul Malvino, “Digital Principles and Applications”, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2003.
3. Raj Kamal, “Digital systems - Principles and Design”, Pearson education 2nd Edition, 2012.
4. Thomas L. Floyd, “Digital Fundamentals”, Pearson Education Inc, New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2003
PAGE 43
19EE351 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basic concepts of Object Oriented Paradigm.
• Implementation procedure of Object Oriented concepts using C++ programming language.
• Introduce the open source Python programming language.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the basic concepts of Object-Oriented Programming and its implementation in C++ programming
language.
• Develop problem-solving and programming skills using OOP concept.
• Apply an object-oriented programming approach to selective electrical engineering problems.
• Understand the basic concepts python programming also develop simple python programs.
Practical Course 3
1. Simple class design in C++, objects creations dynamic memory allocation, destructor, constructor
2. Implementation of copy constructor and friend functions
3. Function overloading, default arguments in C++ - application to solve electric circuits, line parameters, etc.,
4. Unary and Binary Operator overloading
5. Overloading assignment operator- type conversions – application for conversion between polar and rectangular
6. Inheritance, run-time polymorphism – application to find I & V in different types of DC motors/generators
7. Implementation of Function Template & Class Template in C++
8. Exception handling mechanism in C++
9. Simple Programming using Python
10. Linear search, Binary Search and Dictionary implementation using Python
Text Book:
1. Robert Lafore, “Object Oriented Programming in C++”,Galgotia Publications, 2001.
2. Balagurusamy E., “Object Oriented Programming with C++”, Tata McGraw Hill, IInd Edition, 2011.
3. Wesley J Chun, “Core Python Programming”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2006.
Reference Book:
1. Herbert Schildt, “C++ - The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
2. Bjarne Stroustrup, “The C++ Programming Language”, Addison Wesley, 2000.
3. John .R .Hubbard, “Schaums Outline Programming with C++”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
4. Lippman S.B., Josee Lajoie, Barbara E. Moo, “C++ Premier”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition,2005.
5. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, ―An Introduction to Python – Revised and updated for Python 3.2,
6. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist‘‘, 2nd edition, Updated for Python 3,
Shroff/O‘Reilly Publishers, 2016.
PAGE 44
19EE352 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LABORATORY L T P C

Course Objective:
• the behavior of semiconductor device based on experimentation.
Course Outcome:
• Identify and select a suitable semiconductor device for a specific applications based on the characteristic
• Design and choose a suitable filter for various applications based on its filtering action.
• Design an amplifier using BJT
• Design a wave shaping circuit.
Realization of Passive Low Pass Filter and High Pass Filter
Characteristics of Semiconductor Diode and Zener Diode
Characteristics of Photo diode and Phototransistor
Diode clipper circuits and Clamper circuits
Single Phase Half wave rectifier with Capacitive and Inductive - Capacitive Filter
Single Phase Full wave rectifiers with Capacitive and Inductive - Capacitive Filter
Bipolar Junction Transistor - CE characteristics
Bipolar Junction transistor - CB characteristics
Characteristics of JFET
Frequency Response of Common Emitter Amplifier
Characteristics of UJT
Transistor Astable Multivibrator
Simulation of RC Phase Shift Oscillator
PAGE 45
19HSM01 PRESENTATION AND LANGUAGE SKILLS LABORATORY L T P C

Offered by ENG (Core Practical offered to BAD, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEE, BIT) 0 0 2 1
Course Objective:
• The strategies of presentation skills
• Pronunciation skills by learning phonetics
• Proficiency in application of language skills
• Nuances to interact with technical audience
• English usage in research papers
Course Outcome:
• Implement the strategies of presentation skills
• Recognize phonemes and improve pronunciation
• Speak English confidently on any topic
• Interact with a technical audience
• Apply English language skills in research papers
Practical Course 30
Practical Syllabus:
Phonetic Practice 3
English Phonemes: Vowels, Diphthongs, Consonants - Word Stress - Phoneme Recognizing Practice - Exposure to
various English Accents with main focus on Received Pronunciation (RP) Accent
Listening Comprehension 3
Documentaries and Educational Video Clips - Oration of Great Leaders - Live news - Listening Business Conversations
- Reviewing News from Media & Webinar
Language Functions 6
Speaking Activities using Cohesive Markers :
1. Impromptu - Just a Minute – Turncoat - Role-Play - Small Talks
2. Prepared Talks: Giving Reasons, Future Plans, Comparing & Contrasting, Making Suggestions
Presentation Strategies 3
Defining Purpose - Audience & Locale - Topics and Organizing Contents - Preparing Outline -Audio-visual Aids -
Nuances of Delivery - Body Language - Voice Dynamics – Time-Dimension
Presentation and Appraisal Sessions 15

Importance of Journal Articles - Elements of Technical Articles (Abstract, Introduction, Methodology, Results,
Discussion, Conclusion, Appendices, Writing Bibliography and References as well as using Software for Data
Interpretation), Preparation of Scholarly Papers in IEEE Format and Awareness on Plagiarism and its Software,
Hands-on Power Point Presentation - Quiz on Presentation - Reviews and Feedback
Reference Book:
1. Balasubramanian, T. A. Textbook of English Phonetics for Indian Students. India:MacMillan, 2011.
2. Laws, Anne. Presentations. Hyderabad: Orient Blackswan, 2011.
3. Mandel, Steve. Effective Presentation Skills. New Delhi: Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., 2004.
4. Pease, Barbara and Allan Pease. The Definitive Book of Body Language. US: RHUS, 2006.
PAGE 46
IAS30 INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS - I (LOWER) L T P C

Offered by MECH (Special Course offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 2 0 0 0
Course Objective:
• To understand the basic concepts of quantitative ability
• To understand the basic concepts of logical reasoning Skills
• To acquire satisfactory competency in use of verbal reasoning
Course Outcome:
• Students at the end of the course will be able to solve aptitude, logical and verbal reasoning questions
Unit I QUANTITATIVE APTITUDE 10
1. Numbers – Number Systems, Types of Numbers, Series (Arithmetic Progression, Geometric Progression)
2. Problem on Ages
3. HCF & LCM
4. Profit & Loss
5. Problems on Trains, Boats & Stream
6. Calendar & Clocks
7. Time & Work
8. Speed & Distance (Or) Time & Distance
9. Decimal Fractions, Simplification (Including Expression & Evaluation)
10. Square Root, Cubic Root
11. Average
12. Surds & Indices
13. Odd Man Out & Series
Unit II LOGICAL REASONING 10
1. Series completion
2. Analogy
3. Classification
4. Coding-Decoding
5. Blood Relation
6. Puzzle test
7. Sequential Output Tracing
8. Direction sense test
9. Logical Venn Diagram
10. Alphabet Test
11. Alpha-numeric sequence Puzzle
12. Number, Ranking and Time sequence Test
13. Mathematical Operations
14. Logical Sequence of words
15. Arithmetical Reasoning
16. Inserting the mission character
17. Data Sufficiency
18. Eligibility test
19. Assertions and Reasoning
20. Situation Reaction Test
21. Verification of truth of the statement
Unit III VERBAL ABILITY 10
1. Vocabulary Based - Synonyms
2. Vocabulary Based - Antonyms
3. Spotting Errors
4. Spelling
5. Jumbled words
6. One word substitution
7. Sentence Correction
8. Idioms & Phrases.
9. Commonly confusing words
10. Statement and Conclusion
11. Change of Voice
12. Facts/Inferences and Judgment
Text Book:
PAGE 47
1. Agarwal R.S, “Quantitative Aptitude,” S.Chand and Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, First Edition 1989, Reprint,
2016
2. Agarwal R.S, “A Modern Approach to Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning,” S.Chand and Company Pvt. Ltd.,New
Delhi, First Edition 1994, Reprint, 2016
3. Agarwal R.S, “Objective General English,” S.Chand and Company Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi, First Edition 1997,
Reprint, 2016
Reference Book:
1. Anand P A, “Quantitative Aptitude,” Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Edition, 2016
2. Arun Sharma, “How to Prepare for Logical Reasoning,” Tata-McGraw Hill Education Series. New Delhi, First
Edition 2016
3. Sharon Weiner Green, Ira K Wolf, “Barron’s GRE,” Barron Publishers. First Edition 1995, Reprint, 2016
4. The Princeton Review, “Cracking the GRE”, Random House Publisher, Premium Edition 2016.
5. Mark Alan Steward, J D,”30 days to the GMAT CAT”, Arco Publishers, 2nd Edition 2016.
Extensive Reading:
• www.indiabix.com
• http://www.practiceaptitudetests.com
PAGE 48
19MA401 MATHEMATICS - IV : NUMERICAL METHODS AND STATISTICS L T P C

Offered by MAT (Core Theory offered to BCI, BEE, BME) 3 2 0 4
Course Objective:
• To explain the techniques for solving the transcendental equations, system of equations and eigenvalue
problems.
• To construct an approximate polynomial, derivative and integration for the given data.
• To evaluate the differential equation with initial and boundary conditions
• To categorize various statistical techniques to make rational decision in engineering problems.
• To describe the concept of design of experiment to make the scientific judgments in the real life problems.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the techniques for solving the transcendental equations, system of equations and eigenvalue problems.
• Apply the numerical differentiation and integration for the given data.
• Obtain the solution of differential equation with initial and boundary conditions.
• Describe the notion of sampling distributions and statistical techniques.
• Examine statistical methods designed to contribute the process of making scientific judgments.
Unit I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS 12
Solutions of algebraic and transcendental equations: Iteration method and Newton-Raphson method – Solutions of
linear simultaneous equations: Direct methods – Gauss elimination method and Gauss Jordan method - Iterative
methods - Gauss Jacobi method and Gauss-Seidel method – Matrix inversion by Gauss Jordan method –
Eigenvalues of a matrix by Jacobi method.
Unit II INTERPOLATION, DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 12
Interpolation and derivatives: Newton’s forward and backward difference method – Newton’s divided difference
method – Lagrange’s method.
Numerical integration: Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 and 3/8 rule – Gaussian two point and three point
quadrature formula.
Unit III INITIAL AND BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Initial value problem: Single step methods- Taylor series method, Euler and Modified Euler methods for first order
equation and fourth order Runge Kutta Method for second order equation - Multi-step method - Milne’s predictor-
corrector methods for solving first order equation.
Boundary value problem: Finite difference method for linear differential equations – Poisson and Laplace equations.
Unit IV TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 12
Hypothesis testing: One sample and two sample tests for means of large samples (z-test) - One sample and two
sample tests for means of small samples (t-test) - F-test for two sample standard deviations - Chi square test to test
the goodness of fit and independence of attributes.
Unit V DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 12
Analysis of variance – One way classification (CRD) – Two way classification (RBD) – Latin square Design (LSD)
Text Book:
1. Grewal B.S and Grewal J.S., “Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, 10th Edition Reprint, Khanna
Publishers, 2016.
2. Milton S.J and Arnold J.C., " Introduction to Probability and Statistics", 4th Edition, Mc Graw Hill-Education,
2001.
Reference Book:
1. Sankar Rao K, “Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall of India Private,
2018.
2. Kandasamy P., Thilagavathy K and Gunavathy K., “Numerical Methods”, 3rd Edition Reprint, S. Chand Co. Ltd.,
2014.
3. Walpole R. E., Myers R. H., Myers S. L and Ye K.E., “Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists”, 8th
Edition, Pearsons Education, 2007.
4. Lipschutz S and Schiller J, “Schaum’s outlines - Introduction to Probability and Statistics”, 1st Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, 2011.
5. Gupta S.C and Kapoor V.K., “ Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, 11th Edition Reprint, Sultan Chand &
Sons, 2015.
PAGE 49
19EE401 DC MACHINES AND TRANSFORMERS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Principles of electromechanical energy conversion in singly and doubly excited systems.
• Working principles of DC machines, Types, characteristics, starting and speed control.
• Estimation of various losses in D.C. machines by conducting different tests.
• Principle of operation, prediction of performance, the methods of testing the transformers and three
• phase transformer connections.
Course Outcome:
• Describe Energy Conversion of Electro Mechanical Devices.
• Select DC Generator for a particular application based on its Characteristics.
• Select DC Motor for a particular application based on its Characteristics.
• Estimate Transformer parameters and its performance.
• Estimate machine parameters by conducting various tests.
Unit I ELECTROMECHANICAL ENERGY CONVERSION 12
Principle of Energy conversion – Review of magnetic circuit–Faraday's law of induced EMF - Hysteresis and Eddy
Current losses – AC operation of magnetic circuits - Singly and Doubly Excited magnetic field systems – Torque
production in rotating machines.
Unit II DC GENERATORS 12
Constructional features of a DC machine – Principle of Operation of DC generator – EMF equation – Methods of
Excitation – Types of generator – No load and Load characteristics of DC generators – Commutation – Armature
Reaction and its effects – Parallel operation of DC shunt generators – Applications.
Unit III DC MOTORS 12
Principle of operation – Back EMF & Torque equation – Characteristics of series, shunt & compound motors –
starting of DC motors– Types of starters– Speed control methods for DC shunt & series motors – Applications.
Unit IV TRANSFORMERS 12
Construction – Principle of Operation – EMF Equation –Transformer on no load and load – Phasor diagram –
Equivalent Circuit –Auto Transformer –Tap Changing – Parallel operation of single phase transformers – Three phase
transformer Connections – Scott Connection – Parallel operation of three phase transformers.
Unit V TESTING OF DC MACHINES AND TRANSFROMERS 12
Testing of DC machines – Brake test, Swinburne’s test& Hopkinson’s test.Losses & efficiency – Condition for
maximum efficiency.
Testing of Transformer: Polarity test, Open Circuit and short circuit tests & Sumpner’s test – Losses, Efficiency and
Voltage Regulation
Text Book:
1. Nagrath, I.J.and Kothari, D.P.”, “Electrical Machines”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi,
2. Reprint 2011.
3. Theraja A.K &Theraja B.L, “ A Text book of Electrical Technology (Vol II)”, S Chand & Co- .,3rd Edition
4. 2008.
Reference Book:
1. Rajput, R.K, “Electrical Machines”, Laxmi publications, New Delhi 5th Edition, 2008.
2. Parkar Smith, N.N., “Problems in Electrical Engineering” CBS Publishers and Distributers, New Delhi,
3. 9th Edition, 2003.
4. Say.M.G. “Alternating Current Machines”, ELBS & Pitman, London, 5th Edition,1992.
PAGE 50
19EE402 CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P C

Offered by EEE (Core Theory offered to BEC, BEE) 3 2 0 4
Course Objective:
• Transfer function modeling of electrical and mechanical systems.
• Time domain analysis for different types and order of the system.
• Frequency domain analysis using various graphical methods.
• Stability analysis of control system.
• Design of compensators.
Course Outcome:
• Develop mathematical models of electrical and mechanical systems
• Estimate the time domain and frequency domain specifications
• Analyze the performance and stability of system through time domain and frequency domain approach.
• Design the lag and lead compensators for desired system performance
• Frame various types of state space model of a system.
Unit I SYSTEM MODELLING AND REPRESENTATION 12
System concepts- Classifications of control system with examples-Transfer function Modeling of Electrical systems,
Mechanical systems (Translational & Rotational systems) - AC and DC Servomotors- Electrical Analogy of Mechanical
Systems - Block diagram reduction techniques –Signal flow graphs– Mason’ gain formula.
Unit II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS 12
Standard test signals- Time response of First-order system for different input Signals - Time response of Second-
order systems for step input signal - Time domain specifications - Steady state error constants: Position, Velocity
and Acceleration error constants- Generalized error series –Transfer function model and characteristics of P, PI, PD
and PID controllers.
Unit III STABILITY ANALYSIS 12
Characteristics equation –Concepts of Stability - Location of roots in S-plane for stability- Routh-Hurwitz Stability
criterion – Necessary and sufficient conditions for stability– Root locus concept-Rules for construction of root loci-
Root locus plot for stability analysis.
Unit IV FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS 12
Frequency domain specifications – Peak resonance, Resonant frequency, Bandwidth and Cut-off rate-Correlation
between time and frequency responses for second order systems-Gain margin and phase margin – Bode plot
method - Polar plot method - Stability analysis using Gain and Phase margin- Nyquist plot method.
Unit V COMPENSATOR DESIGN & STATE VARIABLE MODEL 12
Compensators: Performance criteria – Lag and Lead compensators networks– Design of Lag, Lead and Lag-Lead
compensators using Bode plot method. Concepts of State, State variable, State model-State models for simple
electrical system– Phase variable model – Canonical model- Controllability and Observability using Kalman’s test
method.
Text Book:
1. Nagrath.J and Gopal.M,” Control System Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Gopal M, “Control Systems – Principles and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
3. Gopal.M, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, McGraw- Hill, 4th Edition, 2012.
4. Palani.S,“Control Systems Engineering”, McGraw-Hill Education (India) Pvt Ltd, 4th Edition ,2012.
5. Richard C. Dorf & Robert H. Bishop, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education, 12th Edition 2011.
6. Schaum’s Outline Series, “Feedback and Control Systems”, McGraw- Hill, 2nd Edition, 2011.
7. Norman S Nise, “Control System Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi, 2013.
8. Dhanesh N.Manik, “Control Systems”, Cengage Learning, Delhi, 1st Edition, 2012.
9. Benjamin Kuo, ―Automatic Control Systems‖, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010.
PAGE 51
19EE403 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION L T P C

Course Objective:
• computation of transmission line parameters.
• equivalent circuits for the transmission lines based on distance and operating voltage for determining voltage
regulation and efficiency.
• improving the voltage profile of the transmission system.
• voltage distribution in insulator strings and Grading of cables
• Types of Distribution System
Course Outcome:
• Calculate the sag of transmission lines.
• Estimate the line parameters for transmission lines.
• Predict the performance parameters of transmission lines
• Explain voltage distribution in insulator strings and Grading of cables
• Explain the types of Distribution System
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO POWER SYSTEM 9
Structure of electric power system - operating voltages of generation, transmission and distribution – advantage of
higher operating voltage for AC transmission - Right of Way. Substation layout.
Mechanical designs of transmission line: Sag and tension calculations- effect of ice and wind on sag.
Unit II TRANSMISSION LINE PARAMETERS 9
Resistance, inductance and capacitance calculations: single and three phase transmission lines - double circuits -
solid, stranded and bundled conductors - symmetrical and unsymmetrical spacing – transposition of lines - concepts
of GMR and GMD - skin and proximity effects
Unit III MODELLING AND PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION LINES 9
Transmission line classification - short line, medium line and long line – equivalent circuits –Sending end voltage,
current, voltage regulation and transmission efficiency- ABCD constants- real and reactive power flow in lines –
surge impedance and surge-impedance loading - Ferranti effect -. Corona discharge characteristics – critical voltage
and corona loss.
Unit IV INSULATORS AND UG CABLES 9
Insulators: Types - Characteristics and classification – voltage distribution in insulator string - improvement of string
efficiency.
Underground cables: constructional features of LT and HT cables – insulation resistance, capacitance, and dielectric
stress – grading of UG cables.
Unit V DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 9
Feeders, distributors and service mains. DC 2-wire distributor – radial and ring main distribution. AC distribution –
single phase (with concentrated loads) and three phase 3-wire and 4-wire distribution with balanced and
unbalanced loads.
Text Book:
1. Gupta B.R., “Power System Analysis and Design”, S. Chand, New Delhi, 2008.
2. Soni M L, Gupta P V, Bhatnagar U S and Chakrabarthi A, "A Text Book on Power System Engineering", Dhanpat
Rai & Co., New Delhi, 2008.
3. Kothari D P and Nagrath J, “Power System Engineering”, McGraw-Hill Publishing Company New Delhi, second
Edition 2007
Reference Book:
1. Uppal S L, "Electrical Power", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, Thirteenth Edition, 1995.
2. Wadhwa C L, "Electrical Power Systems", New Age International Publishers, Delhi, 2006 Fourth Edition Reprint
Aug, 2007.
3. Mehta V K, Rohit Mehta , "Principles of Power Systems", S.Chand & Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
4. Gupta J B, “A Course in Electrical Power”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2003
5. Singh S.N., “Electric Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New
Delhi, 2002.
PAGE 52
19EE404 ALGORITHMS AND DATA STRUCTURES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To introduce the basics of problem solving techniques and analysis of algorithms
• To impart knowledge on ADTs such as List, Stack, Queue
• To explore the binary trees and Heaps
• To get exposure on Set and hashing techniques.
• To learn and explore the graph data structures.
Course Outcome:
• Analyze recursive and non recursive algorithms for complexity
• Implement List, Stack and Queue with appropriate data structure
• Work with binary trees and heap based priority queue
• Exploit the Set and hashing technique.
• Implement various graph ADT algorithms.
Unit I ALGORITHM INTRODUCTION 9
Fundamentals of algorithmic problem solving - Important problem types- ¬Fundamentals of the analysis of
algorithm efficiency - analysis frame work ¬Asymptotic notations - Mathematical analysis for recursive and non-
recursive algorithms.
Unit II LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES 9
Abstract Data Types – The List ADT – Singly Linked List – Doubly Linked List – Cursor Linked list – Applications and
analysis of List. The Stack ADT – Applications and Analysis of Stack. The Queue ADT – Applications and Analysis of
Queues.
Unit III NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES 9
Trees: Preliminaries – Implementation of Trees, Tree traversals with applications, Binary Trees: Implementation,
Expression Trees, Search tree ADT: Operations – MakeEmpty, Find, FindMin, FindMax, Insert and Delete, Average-
Case Analysis, Binary Heap – Operation.
Unit IV SET AND HASHING 9
Set Operations – Representation – Implementation of Union – Find operations – Smart Union algorithms – Path
compression – Applications of set – Hashing – Model – Implementation – Hash Function – Separate Chaining – Open
addressing – Rehashing – Extendible Hashing
Unit V GRAPH ADT 9
Definitions, Representation of Graphs, Topological Sort, Warshall's and Floyd' algorithm, Shortest Path Algorithms –
Dijkstra’s Algorithm, Minimum Spanning Tree – Prim’s Algorithm, Graph coloring problem, Graph Applications-
Traveling salesman problem.
Text Book:
1. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, Pearson Education Asia, Second Edition, 1997.
2. Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithm”, Pearson Education Asia, 2003.
Reference Book:
1. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffry D. Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2006
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”, Orient Longman, Second
Edition, 2008.
3. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, “An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications”, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, Second Edition, 1991.
PAGE 53
19EE481 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

Offered by EEE (Theory Course with Lab Component) 3 0 2 4
Course Objective:
• To discuss the basic building blocks of linear integrated circuits, characteristics and their configurations.
• To outline the design procedure of applications using operational amplifiers, analog multipliers and PLL.
• To understand the operation of ADC and DAC.
• To introduce the concepts of waveform generation and introduce some special function ICs
Course Outcome:
• Describe the fabrication methods of op-amp.
• Describe the characteristics of op-amp.
• Design different applications using general purpose op- amp and application specific ICs
• Design circuits using Multipliers, and PLL, and applications using Timer IC.
• Describe the application of ICs
Unit I IC FABRICATION 9
IC classification, fundamental of monolithic IC technology, epitaxial growth, masking and etching, diffusion of
impurities, Active and passive components of ICs, Fabrication of a typical circuit. Realization of monolithic ICs and
packaging. Fabrication of diodes, capacitance, resistance and FETs, Thin and Thick film technology, State of the art
Technology trends in IC fabrication.
Unit II CHARACTERISTICS OF OPAMP 9
Ideal OP-AMP characteristics, Basic op-amp configurations, Ideal op-amp circuit analysis, Loop gain, General
operational amplifier stages -and internal circuit diagrams of IC 741, differential amplifier; frequency response of
OP-AMP, DC and AC performance characteristics, slew rate.
Unit III APPLICATIONS OF OPAMP 9
Applications of op-amp – summer, differentiator and integrator, Instrumentation amplifier, AC amplifier, first order
active filters, V/I & I/V converters, comparators, op-amp circuits using diodes, S/H circuit, Log and anti-log amplifier,
Multiplier and divider, Power amplifiers, D/A and A/D converters
Unit IV TIMER AND PLL 9
555 Timer circuit – Functional block, characteristics & applications; 566-voltage controlled oscillator circuit; 565-
phase lock loop circuit functioning and applications, Triangular wave generator, Saw-tooth wave generator.
Unit V APPLICATION ICS 9
IC voltage regulators -723 regulator, switching regulator, MA 7840, LM 380 power amplifier, ICL8038 function
generator, Frequency to Voltage and Voltage to Frequency converters, isolation amplifiers, opto coupler, opto
electronic ICs.
Practical Course 15
Applications of Op-Amp using IC741: Inverting and non-inverting amplifier, Adder, comparator, Integrater and
Differentiator and Slew rate verifications.
HWR and FWR using Opamp and diodes.
Clippers, Clampers and peak detector using Opamp and diodes.
Study of Analog to Digital Converter and Digital to Analog Converter: Verification of A/D conversion and D/A
conversion using IC 74147 and IC 0808.
Study of VCO and PLL ICs: i. Voltage to frequency characteristics of NE/ SE 566 IC. ii. Frequency multiplication using
NE/SE 565 PLL IC.
Timer IC application: Study of NE/SE 555 timer in Astable, Monostable operation.
Text Book:
1. Roy Choudhary.D, Sheil B.Jani, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age, 2nd Edition, 2003.
2. Salivahanan S &Kanchana Bhaskaran V.S, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, McGraw Hill, 2008.
Reference Book:
1. Jacob Millman, Christos C.Halkias, “Integrated Electronics - Analog and Digital circuits system”, McGraw Hill,
2003.
2. Robert F.Coughlin, Fredrick F.Driscoll, “Op-amp and Linear ICs”, Pearson Education, 4th Edition, 2002 / PHI. 3.
Sergio Franco, “Design with operational amplifiers and analog integrated circuits”, 3rd Edition, McGrawHill,
2007.
3. David A.Bell, “Op-amp & Linear ICs”, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 1997
4. RamakantA.Gayakward, “Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits”, Pearson Education, 4th Edition, 2003
PAGE 54
19EE451 DC MACHINES AND TRANSFORMERS LABORATORY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To make the students to know about the operation, performance and Characteristics of D.C. machines and
transformers by conducting various tests
• To enable the students to be familiar with the speed control of DC Motors
• To understand the working of DC motor starters
Course Outcome:
• Determine the performance characteristics of DC machines for different operating conditions
• Determine the performance characteristics and parameters of Transformers under different operating
conditions
• Separate no load losses of Transformers
Practical Course 3
Open circuit and load characteristics of separately excited DC Generator.
Open circuit and load characteristics of self excited DC shunt Generator.
Load characteristics of DC compound generator with differential and cumulative connection
Load characteristics of DC shunt and compound motor
Load characteristics of DC series motor
Swinburne’s test and speed control of DC shunt motor
Hopkinson’s test on DC motor – generator set
Load test on single-phase transformer and three phase transformer connections
Open & short circuit test and polarity tests on single phase transformer.
Sumpner’s test on transformers
Separation of no-load losses in single phase transformer
Study of D.C motor starters
PAGE 55
19EE452 MEASUREMENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Measurement of various electrical quantities.
• Calibrate of energy meter and current transformer.
• Determination of transfer function model of electro mechanical system.
• Simulation of second order systems with controllers using MATLAB.
• Stability analysis of linear system using various graphical methods.
Course Outcome:
• Measure various electrical quantities using various bridges.
• Familiar with calibration of energy meter and current transformer.
• Determine the transient response of simple electrical circuits.
• Model the transfer function of electromechanical systems.
• Determine the stability of linear systems.
Practical Course 3
DC Bridges: Wheatstone Bridge & Kelvin’s Double Bridge.
AC Bridges: Maxwell’s Bridge & Schering Bridge.
Calibration of Current Transformers and Potential transformers.
Calibration of Energy meter by Phantom loading.
Performance characteristics of Displacement, Pressure and Temperature transducers.
Measurement of 3- Φ Power and Power factor in a balanced 3- Φ circuit by using two 1- Φ Wattmeter.
Measurement of Iron loss and Magnetic permeability of a given Ring Specimen
Transfer Function of Armature Controlled D.C Motor
Transfer Function of Field Controlled D.C Motor
Transfer Function of A.C Servomotor
Transfer Function of Separately Excited D.C Shunt Generator
Digital Simulation of Second-order Systems for obtaining the time response of a system under various damping
conditions.
Stability Analysis of Linear Systems using Bode, Root locus & Nyquist plots method using simulation software.
Estimate the Effect of P, PI, PD and PID Controllers on the Linear Second-order system.
PAGE 56
IAS40 INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS - II (LOWER) L T P C

Course Objective:
Course Outcome:
• Students at the end of the course will be able to solve aptitude, logical and verbal reasoning questions.
1. Percentage
2. Ratio & Proportions
3. Pipes & Cisterns
4. Permutations & Combinations
5. Partnership
6. Alligation (Or) Mixture
7. Races & Games
8. Stocks & Shares
9. Height & Distance
10. True Discount & Banker’s Discount
11. Probability
12. Mensuration (Area, Volume & Surface Area)
13. Interest (Simple Interest, Compound Interest)
14. Logarithm
15. Chain Rule
16. Data Interpretation (Tabulation, Bar Chart, Pie Chart, Line Graphs)
VERBAL REASONING:
Logical Deduction
1. Logic
2. Statement – Argument
3. Statement – Assumptions
4. Statement –Courses of action
5. Statement –Conclusion
6. Deriving Conclusion from passages
7. Theme Detection
8. Cause and Effect reasoning
NON-VERBAL REASONING
1. Series
2. Analogy
3. Classification
4. Analytical Reasoning
5. Mirror – Images
6. Water – Images
7. Spotting out the embedded figures
8. Completion of incomplete patterns
9. Figure Matrix
10. Paper Folding
11. Paper Cutting
12. Rule Detection
13. Grouping of identical figures
14. Cubes and Dice
15. Dot Situation
16. Construction of squares and triangles
17. Figure formation and analysis
1. Concord
2. Cloze Passage
3. Analogies or Reverse Analogies
PAGE 57
4. Jumbled Sentences.
5. Error Deduction.
6. Reading Comprehension
7. Paragraph Formation
8. Completing Statements
9. Usage of Prepositions
10. Inference(Theme Detection)
11. Verification of Truth from the Statements
12. Change of Speech
Unit IV -4
Text Book:
2016
3. Agarwal R.S, “Objective General English,” S.Chand and Company Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi, First Edition 1997, Reprint,
2016
Reference Book:
Edition 2016
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.practiceaptitudetests.com/
PAGE 58
19EE501 INDUCTION AND SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES L T P C

Course Objective:
• Operation of AC generators and motors (Both three phase and single phase)
• Methods for determining regulation of AC generator Concept involved in the predetermination of parameters
of three phase induction motor.
• Starters and speed control methods of three phase induction motor.
• Operation of single phase induction motor and special machines
Course Outcome:
• Determine regulation of both types of alternators
• Start synchronous motor and recommend for various specific applications
• Distinguish between types of Induction motors and select correctly the drive for applications
• Differentiate between different types of starting and speed control methods
• Select proper single phase motors for specific application requirements
Unit I SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR 15
Constructional details – Types of rotors – EMF equation – Synchronous reactance – Armature reaction – Voltage
regulation – EMF, MMF, ZPF and ASA methods – Synchronizing and parallel operation – Synchronizing torque -
Operating characteristics - Capability curves– Salient pole Machine: Two reaction theory – Determination of direct
and quadrature axis synchronous reactance using slip test – Expression for power developed
Unit II SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR 10
Principle of operation – procedure for starting - Starting methods – Different torques - V-curves – Power input and
power developed equations –– Current loci for constant power input, constant excitation and constant power
developed – Hunting – natural frequency of oscillations – Experimental method of obtaining V and inverted V curves
- Applications
Unit III THREE PHASE INDUCTION MACHINES 15
Constructional details – Types of rotors – Principle of operation – Slip – Equivalent circuit – Slip-torque
characteristics - Condition for maximum torque – Losses and efficiency – Load test - No load and blocked rotor tests
- Circle diagram – Separation of no load losses – Cogging – Crawling - Double cage rotors – Induction generator –
Synchronous induction motor
Unit IV STARTING AND SPEED CONTROL OF THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR 10
Need for starters – Types of starters: Primary resistor, Autotransformer and Star-delta starters and Rotor resistance
– Speed control: Change of voltage, frequency, number of poles and V/f control – Cascaded connection – Slip power
recovery scheme
Unit V SINGLE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS AND SPECIAL MACHINES 10
Constructional details of single phase induction motor – Double revolving field theory and operation – Equivalent
circuit –– Starting methods of single-phase induction motors - Shaded pole induction motor - Linear induction motor
- Reluctance motor – Hysteresis motor – Universal motor
Text Book:
1. Kothari D.P and Nagrath I.L., “Electric Machines”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd , Fourth Edition,2010.
2. Bhimbhra P.S., “Electrical Machinery”, Khanna Publishers, 2003
3. Theraja B.L., “ A Text of Electrical Technology, Volume-II”, S.Chand & Co Ltd, 2008
Reference Book:
1. Fitzgerald A.E., Charles Kingsley, Stephen.D.Umans, “Electric Machinery”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,
2003.
2. Gupta J.B., “Theory and Performance of Electrical Machines”, S.K.Kataria and Sons, 2002.
3. Cotton H. “Advanced Electrical Technology “ Pitman, London, 1967.
4. Say M.G., “Alternating current Machines”, ELBS & Pitma
PAGE 59
19EE502 PRINCIPLES OF DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C

Course Objective:
• Classification of signals and systems & their mathematical representation.
• Analysis of discrete-time systems using different types of transforms.
• Design of Digital Filters
Course Outcome:
• Apply the concepts of digital signal processing
• Analyze the discrete-time systems using Z- transform
• Apply FFT algorithm for computing DFT of discrete signal
• Design suitable digital FIR filter for the required specifications
• Design suitable digital IIR filter for the required specifications
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9
Classification of systems: Continuous, discrete, linear, causal, stable, dynamic, recursive, time variance; classification
of signals: continuous and discrete, energy and power; mathematical representation of signals; operation of signals,
spectral density; sampling techniques, quantization, quantization error, Nyquist rate, aliasing effect.
Unit II DISCRETE TIME SYSTEM ANALYSIS 9
Z-transform and its properties, inverse z-transforms; difference equation – Solution by z-transform, application to
discrete systems - Stability analysis, frequency response – Convolution – Analysis of LTI Systems in z-domain.
Unit III DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM & COMPUTATION 9
DFT properties, magnitude and phase representation - Computation of DFT using FFT algorithm – DIT & DIF - FFT
using radix 2 – Butterfly structure – Application of DSP in power quality analysis.
Unit IV DESIGN OF FIR FILTERS 9
FIR design: Windowing Techniques (Rectangular, Triangular, Hamming, Hanning windows only) – Need and choice of
windows – Linear phase characteristics.
Unit V DESIGN OF IIR FILTERS AND FILTER REALIZATION 9
IIR design: Analog filter design - Butterworth and Chebyshev approximations - digital design using impulse invariant
and bilinear transformation - Warping, prewarping. FIR & IIR filter realization – Direct, Parallel &Cascade forms.
Text Book:
1. John G Proakis, Dimtris G Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms and Application”,PHI, 3rd
Edition, 2012.
2. Salivahanan S, “Digital Signal Processing”, McGraw-Hill / TMH, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer and John R. Buck, ‘Discrete – Time Signal Processing’,Pearson Education,
New Delhi, 2003.
2. JohnyR.Johnson, “Introduction to Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall, 2002.
3. Mitra S.K., "Digital Signal Processing - A Computer based approach", McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2001.
PAGE 60
19EE503 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Architecture of 8085 & 8051.
• Addressing modes & instruction set of 8085 & 8051.
• The need & use of Interrupt structure 8085 & 8051.
• Developing skill for writing simple programs in 8051 & 8085 and applications.
• Interfacing peripheral interface Ics.
Course Outcome:
• Develop programming of 8085 microprocessor based on its architecture.
• Design and Implement the Memory interface and interrupt with 8085 Processor
• Design and Implement the Peripheral Devices interface with 8085 Processor
• Develop programming of 8051 microcontroller based on its architecture.
• Design and Implement the Memory & Peripheral Devices interface with 8051
Unit I ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING OF 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9
Functional Block Diagram - Instruction formats – Addressing modes – Instruction set – Need for Assembly language
– Development of Assembly language programs – Assembler Directives - Machine cycles and Timing diagrams
Unit II INTERRUPTS MEMORY AND I/O DEVICE INTERFACING 9
Interrupts: Interrupt feature – Need for interrupts - Types of Interrupts – Interrupt structure and their handling.
Memory Interfacing: Interface requirements -Wait states – Memory control signals – Read and write cycles –Typical
ROM and RAM Interfacing. Memory mapped I/O scheme – I/O mapped I/O scheme –Simple I/O ports
Unit III PERIPHERAL IC INTERFACING 9
Study of Architecture and programming of ICs: 8255 PPI, 8251 USART, 8279 Key board display controller and 8253
Timer/ Counter – Interfacing with 8085
Unit IV 8051 MICROCONTROLLER 9
Functional block diagram - Instruction format and addressing modes – Instruction Set –Simple programs interrupt
structure, Timer –I/O ports – Serial communication.
Unit V APPLICATIONS OF MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER 9
Memory interfacing seven segment LED Display systems - Interfacing LCD Display - Stepper motor control -
Interfacing A/D Converter –D/A Converter – Waveform generators.
Text Book:
1. Gaonkar R.S., “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and its Applications with 8085”, Penram
Publications, 6th Edition, 2013.
2. Senthil Kumar N.,Saravanan M., Jeevananthan.S, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers” Oxford University
Press, New Delhi, 2010.
3. Kenneth Ayala, “8051 Microcontroller”, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd 2004
Reference Book:
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice Gilli Mazidi, R.D.Kinley “The 8051 Micro Controller and Embedded Systems”,
PHI Pearson Education, 5th Indian reprint, 2003.
2. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessor and Microcontrollers”, Eastern Company Edition, Prentice – Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2007.
3. Rafiquzzaman. M, “Microprocessors Theory and applications - Intel and Motorola”, Prentice Hall, India, 2001.
4. Douglas V.Hall, “Microprocessors and Digital Systems”, McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. 1980.
PAGE 61
19EE551 INDUCTION AND SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES LABORATORY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To acquire practical knowledge in determining regulation of synchronous machines
• To understand and analyze performance characteristics of synchronous & induction machines
• To predetermine the performance characteristics of induction machines
Course Outcome:
• perform load test on generators & motors and to obtain performance characteristics.
• apply various methods and techniques to determine regulation of alternators.
• predetermine the performance characteristics of induction machines
Regulation of three phase alternator by EMF and MMF methods.
Regulation of three phase alternator by ZPF and ASA methods
Regulation of three phase salient pole alternator by slip test
Load test on Alternator (with resistive, inductive and capacitive loads)
Paralleling two alternators
V and Inverted V curves of Three Phase Synchronous Motor
Load test on three-phase squirrel cage induction motor
Load test on three-phase slip ring induction motor
Predetermination of performance characteristics of three-phase
induction motor by circle diagram and equivalent circuit .
Separation of No-load losses of three-phase induction motor
Load test on single-phase induction motor
Equivalent circuit of single-phase induction motor.
PAGE 62
19EE552 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Programming of 8085 using and its instruction set.
• Interfacing peripheral devices such as keyboard, ADC, DAC and stepper motor with 8085.
• Programming of 8051 based controller using the Keil development tool.
• Interfacing peripheral devices such as keyboard, ADC, DAC, stepper motor and USART with 8051.
Course Outcome:
• Develop programming of 8085 microprocessor based on its architecture and instruction set.
• Design and Implement the Peripheral Devices interface with 8085 Processor
• Develop programming of 8051 microcontroller based on its architecture and instruction set.
• Design and Implement the Peripheral Devices interface with 8051 hardware components
Addition, subtraction, multiplication and division using 8085 processor
Programming of array handling and sorting using 8085 microprocessor
Interfacing ADC with 8085
Interfacing DAC with 8085
Interfacing matrix keyboard and multiplexed display with 8085 using 8279
Multi precision addition, multiplication and division using 8051
Code conversion: binary to ASCII and binary to BCD code conversion using 8051
Stepper motor control using 8051
LCD interface with 8051
Study of Integrated Development Environment tool for 8051 based system
PWM signal generation using timer interrupts
Study of C compiler for serial communication
Frequency measurement using microcontroller
PAGE 63
19HSM02 CAREER PLANNING AND PROFESSIONAL ESSENTIALS LABORATORY L T P C

Offered by ENG (Core Practical offered to BAD, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEE, BIT) 0 0 2 1
Course Objective:
• Effective English language proficiency for career skills
• Interview and group communication skills
• Becoming successful employees by honing their soft skills
• Competitive examinations and higher studies
• Significance of communicative competence
Course Outcome:
• Attain effective professional communication skills
• Have enhanced group communication skills
• Manifest employability and soft skills
• Face interviews / pursue higher studies / become entrepreneurs
• Appear for Competitive Examinations
Practical Course 30
Practical Syllabus:
Vocabulary Building 6
Words & Word Chunks: Synonyms - Antonyms - Affixes - Compound Words - Business Idioms & Phrases and Phrasal
Verbs - Listening Comprehension and Reading Comprehension Exercises to hone Word Power (with the Focus on
English Proficiency Tests) - Verbal Ability
Business Essentials 6
Official Communication: Emails - Memos - Agenda - Meeting and Minutes of the Meeting - Resume Designing -
Submitting offline/online Resume - Project Proposals - Report Writing: Project Report - Report Format - Literature
Survey - Preparation of a Report Based on Print and Web Sources
Group Discussion & Interview Skills 6

Group Discussion - GD Etiquette - Sample Videos on GD - Participation in Group Discussion - Persuasive Skills -
Negotiating Ability - Team Skills and Leadership Quality - Writing Minutes for Group Discussion and Notes of
Observation - Successful Interview Skills - Mock Interviews and Types of Interviews
Career Planning 6
Self-Image - Goal Setting and Career Planning - Career Awareness - Adaptability - Attitude Building - Corporate
Etiquette - Body Language - Dress Code and Power Dressing - Time and Stress Management - Health Awareness -
Moral Conduct and Social Behavior - Netiquette - Searching Job Using Online/Offline Resources - Entrepreneurial
Development
Event Management & Language Proficiency Tests 6

Master of Ceremony - Welcome Address - Vote of Thanks - An Introduction to International English Language
Testing System (IELTS) - Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) - Cambridge Advanced English(CAE) -
Graduate Record Examination (GRE) - Civil Service Examinations (Verbal)
Reference Book:
1. Nurnberg, Maxwell and Morris Rosenblum. How to Build a Better Vocabulary. 4th ed. USA: Warner Books,
2011.
2. Mitra, Barun. Personality Development and Soft Skills. 2nd ed. New Delhi: OUP, 2016.
3. Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeetha Sharma. Communication Skills. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2018.
4. Bhatnagar, R.P. English for Competitive Examination. 3rd ed. New Delhi: Macmillan, 2012.
5. Konar, Nira. English Language Laboratories. 1st ed. New Delhi: PHI Learning Private Limited, 2011.
PAGE 64
IAS50 INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS - I (HIGHER) L T P C

Course Objective:
Course Outcome:
1. Numbers – Number Systems, Types of Numbers, Series (Arithmetic Progression, Geometric Progression)
2. Problem on Ages
3. HCF & LCM
4. Profit & Loss
5. Problems on Trains, Boats & Stream
6. Calendar & Clocks
7. Time & Work
8. Speed & Distance (Or) Time & Distance
9. Decimal Fractions, Simplification (Including Expression & Evaluation)
10. Square Root, Cubic Root
11. Average
12. Surds & Indices
13. Odd Man Out & Series
General Mental Ability
1. Series completion
2. Analogy
3. Classification
4. Coding-Decoding
5. Blood Relation
6. Puzzle test
7. Sequential Output Tracing
8. Direction sense test
9. Logical Venn Diagram
10. Alphabet Test
11. Alpha-numeric sequence Puzzle
12. Number, Ranking and Time sequence Test
13. Mathematical Operations
14. Logical Sequence of words
15. Arithmetical Reasoning
16. Inserting the mission character
17. Data Sufficiency
18. Eligibility test
19. Assertions and Reasoning
20. Situation Reaction Test
21. Verification of truth of the statement
1. Vocabulary Based - Synonyms
2. Vocabulary Based - Antonyms
3. Spotting Errors
4. Spelling
5. Jumbled words
6. One word substitution
7. Sentence Correction
8. Idioms & Phrases.
9. Commonly confusing words
10. Statement and Conclusion
11. Change of Voice
12. Facts/Inferences and Judgment.
PAGE 65
Text Book:
2016
2016
Reference Book:
Edition 2016
Extensive Reading:
PAGE 66
19EE601 DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P C

Course Objective:
• the design of various electrical machines.
• thermal rating of electrical machines.
• armature and field systems for D.C. machines.
• design core, yoke, windings and cooling systems of transformers.
• design of stator and rotor of induction machines and synchronous machines
Course Outcome:
• Calculate the Temperature Rise of Machines under different loading conditions.
• Design the different parts of D.C. Machines.
• Design the different parts of Transformer.
• Design the different parts of Induction Machines.
• Design the different parts of Synchronous Machines
Unit I INTRODUCTION 9
Major considerations in Electrical Machine Design - Electrical Engineering Materials – Space factor – Choice of
Specific Electrical and Magnetic loadings – Rating of machines – Standard specifications.
Unit II DC MACHINES 9
Output Equations – Main Dimensions - Magnetic circuit calculations – Carter’s Coefficient - Net length of Iron – Real
and Apparent flux densities – Selection of number of poles – Design of Armature – Design of commutator and
brushes.
Unit III TRANSFORMERS 9
Output Equations – Main Dimensions - kVA output for single and three phase transformers – Window space factor –
Overall dimensions – Temperature rise – Design of Tank with cooling tubes.
Unit IV INDUCTION MOTORS 9
Output equation of Induction motor – Main dimensions – Length of air gap - Rules for selecting rotor slots of
squirrel cage machines – Design of rotor bars and slots – Design of end rings – Design of wound rotor – Magnetizing
current - Short circuit current .
Unit V SYNCHRONOUS GENERATORS 9
Output equation – Design of salient pole machines – Short circuit ratio – shape of pole face – Armature design –
Armature parameters – Estimation of air gap length – Design of rotor – Design of field winding – Design of turbo
alternators – Rotor design.
Text Book:
1. Sawhney, A.K., 'A Course in Electrical Machine Design', Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, Fifth Edition, 2014.
2. Sen, S.K., 'Principles of Electrical Machine Designs with Computer Programmes', Oxford and IBH Publishing Co.
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Reprint 2004.
Reference Book:
1. Shanmugasundaram A., Gangadharan.G, Palani R., “Electrical Machine Design Data Book”, New Age
International Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2007.
2. Balbir Singh, ‘Electrical Machine Design', Vikas Publishing House Private Limited, 1981.
PAGE 67
19EE602 POWER ELECTRONICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Different types of power semi-conductor devices and their switching characteristics.
• The operation, switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.
• The operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers.
• The different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to understand the harmonic
reduction methods.
• The operation of AC-AC converters.
Course Outcome:
• Identify and select the switching devices for different power converter applications.
• Design and analyze different DC-DC converter with various loads.
• Design a suitable power converter for given dc load specification from AC input.
• Design and analyze the single phase inverter and three phase inverters.
• Explain the concepts of AC-AC converters.
Unit I POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
Introduction to Power Electronics - Study of switching devices: structure, operation, static and switching
characteristics of Power DIODE, SCR, TRIAC, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT.
SCR: Two Transistor model, Triggering Methods and Snubber circuits.
Unit II DC TO DC CONVERTER 9
Step-down and Step-up chopper - Time ratio control and Current limit control – Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost and Cuk
converter - Concept of Resonant switching.
Unit III PHASE-CONTROLLED CONVERTERS 9
1-pulse, 2-pulse converters - circuit, operation, waveforms - Estimation of average load voltage and average load
current for continuous current operation - Input power factor estimation for ripple free load current - Effect of
source inductance – Single phase dual converters - 3-pulse and 6-pulse converters – circuit, operation, waveforms -
Estimation of average load voltage.
Unit IV INVERTERS 9
Types of Inverter – Voltage Source Inverter and Current Source Inverter – VSI: Single phase and three phase
inverters (both 120 degree mode and 180 degree mode) - PWM techniques: single, multiple, sinusoidal PWM –
Voltage and harmonic control - CSI: Capacitor commutated CSI - UPS – types of UPS.
Unit V AC TO AC CONVERTERS 9
Single phase AC voltage controllers –Integral cycle control, phase angle control - Estimation of RMS load voltage,
RMS load current and input power factor - sequence control - Single phase to single phase cyclo-converters.
Text Book:
1. Rashid M H, " Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Pearson Education, India, 4th Edition,
2017.
2. P.S.Bimbhra P.S., “Power Electronics“ Khanna Publishers, 6th Edition 2018.
Reference Book:
1. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland, William P. Robbins, “Power Electronics - Converters, Applications and Design”,
Wiley India, 3rd Edition, 2018.
2. Vedam Subrahmanyam, "Power Electronics", New Age International (P) Limited, New Delhi, 2nd Edition. 2006.
3. Philip T Krein, “Elements of Power Electronics”, Oxford University Press, 2017.
4. Soumitra Kumar Mandal., “Power Electronics”, McGraw Hill publishers Pvt. Ltd., 2014.
PAGE 68
19EE603 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Different aspects of modeling of system components
• Steady-state operation of large-scale power systems
• Solving power flow problems using efficient numerical methods suitable for computer simulation.
• Concept of symmetrical and un-symmetrical faults in power system studies.
• Analyzing the dynamics of power system for small-signal and large signal disturbances
Course Outcome:
• Do modeling for various power system components
• Distinguish between different methods of power flow analysis
• Design the protective gadgets based on short circuit capacity
• Analyze the nature of the system for various fault conditions.
• Identify the stability of Power system
Structure of Power system - Basic Components of a power system and its modeling - Single line diagram –
Impedance diagram – Reactance diagram - Per Phase Analysis -Per unit system - Simple bus building algorithms for
the formation of Y-Bus matrix
Unit II POWER FLOW ANALYSIS 9
Importance of power flow analysis in planning and operation of power systems-Statement of power flow problem -
Bus Classifications – power flow solution methods -Gauss Seidal method - Newton Raphson method (polar form) -
Fast decoupled method (qualitative study only) - Flow charts - Comparison.
Unit III SYMMETRICAL FAULT ANALYSIS 9
Need of short circuit analysis - Symmetrical three phase fault- Short circuit capacity- Bus building algorithm for the
formulation of Z – Bus matrix - systematic fault analysis using bus impedance matrix (Bus frame analysis).
Unit IV UNSYMMETRICAL FAULT ANALYSIS 9
Fundamentals of symmetrical components – sequence impedances – sequence networks representation – single
line to ground fault – line to line fault - Double line to ground fault
Unit V POWER SYSTEM STABILITY ANALYSIS 9
Importance of stability analysis in power system planning and operation – Types of stability - Basic concepts and
definitions – Rotor angle stability - Swing equation- Solution of swing equation by step by step method (Method 2) –
An elementary view of transient stability – Equal area criterion – critical clearing angle and time- Numerical
integration methods (Algorithm and flow chart) for multi-machine stability analysis – Euler method – modified Euler
method
Text Book:
1. John J. Grainger and W.D. Stevenson Jr., “Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill International Book Company,
1st Edition, 2003.
2. Nagrath I.J. and Kothari D.P., “Modern Power System Analysis”, McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi,
2011.
3. Hadi Saadat, “Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2002.
4. P. Venkatesh, B. V. Manikandan, A. Srinivasan, S. Charles Raja, “Electrical Power Systems: Analysis, Security and
Deregulation” Prentice Hall India (PHI), second edition - 2017.
Reference Book:
1. Wadhwa C L, "Electrical Power Systems", New Age International Publishers, Delhi, 2006 Fourth Edition Reprint
Aug, 2007.
2. Kundur P., “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw Hill, Publications, 2013
3. Olle. I. Elgerd, “Electric Energy Systems Theory – An Introduction”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited,
New Delhi, Second Edition, 2013.
4. Pai M.A., “Computer Techniques in Power System Analysis”, McGraw – Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi,
2003.
5. Gupta B.R., “Power System Analysis and Design”, S. Chand, New Delhi, 2003.
PAGE 69
19EE651 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES LABORATORY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Single phase and three phase AC-DC converters fed dc drives.
• Chopper fed dc motor drives and Inverter fed induction motor drives.
• Simulation of basic topological power converter circuits
Course Outcome:
• Differentiate the characteristics of power Electronics switches.
• Design and analyze the single phase and three phase controlled rectifiers fed DC drives.
• Design and analyze the choppers and chopper fed dc drives.
• Analyze the inverter operation and inverter fed induction motor drives.
• Analyze the performance of AC-AC converters.
Characteristics of SCR and TRIAC.
Characteristics of MOSFET and IGBT.
Single phase semi converter with R, RL and RLE load.
Single phase full converter with R, RL and RLE load.
Three phase full converter with R Load.
Step down Chopper with R, RL and RLE load.
Step up Chopper with R and RL load.
Single Phase PWM inverter.
Speed control of three phase induction motor using inverter.
Single phase AC voltage Controller.
Generation of PWM signals using micro controller.
Single Phase cycloconverter
PAGE 70
19EE652 COMPREHENSIVE SKILL DEVELOPMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• The aim of the comprehension course is to enhance the employability skills of students with a special focus on
Presentation skills, Group discussion skills, Interview skills, and also the Arithmetic, Analytic & Verbal
knowledge skills through periodic exercise which are necessary for the workplace situations
Course Outcome:
• Enhance the employability skills.
• Prepare and present Technical Seminar effectively.
• Find out optimum solution for societal problem through group discussion.
• Succeed in competitive examination.
Unit I WEEKLY NEWS 5
From Dailies, weekly and other Magazines, State News, National News.
International News, Science and Technology development news and Sports News.
Unit II TECHNICAL SEMINAR 5
Making presentations: introducing a topic -Preparing effective PPTs – presenting the visuals effectively–Technical
seminars- answering questions – individual presentation practice.
From the previous UG projects, Academic subjects, from Electronics for You, from Electrical India, other Technical
Magazines & Journals
Unit III GROUP DISCUSSION 5
Participating in group discussions – understanding group dynamics – brainstorming the topic
Unit IV APTITUDE TEST 5
(i) Technical
(ii) General (Arithmetic, Analytic, Verbal)
Apply technical knowledge to write Technical Aptitude test for succeeding in any competitive examinations. Apply
Arithmetic, Analytic and Verbal knowledge to write General Aptitude test and for succeeding in any competitive
examinations.
Unit V MOCK INTERVIEW 5
Imparting training in soft skills - persuasive skills – People skills - questioning and clarifying skills – Interview 68
etiquette – dress code – body language – mock interview.
Enable them to gain confidence to face the placement interviews & react to the questions posed.
Text Book:
1. Meenakshi Raman and Sangeetha Sharma. “Technical Communication- Principles and Practice”, Oxford
University Press, 2009.
2. Dhanavel.S.P, “English and Communication Skills for Students of Science and Engineering”, Orient Blackswan
Ltd., 2009.
3. Agarwal.R.S , “Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations”, S.Chand Limited 2011.
Reference Book:
1. Abhijit Guha, “Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations”, McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2011.
2. Edgar Thrope, “Test of Reasoning for Competitive Examinations”, McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2012.
PAGE 71
19EE653 MINI PROJECT L T P C

Offered by EEE (Core Practical) 0 0 2 1
Course Objective:
• To deepen comprehension of principles by applying them to new technical problems which may be the design
and research investigation of electrical and electronic systems.
Course Outcome:
• Identify and formulate a technical problem.
• Make effective literature survey for the identified problem.
• Finalize project specifications and requirements.
• Implement a Hardware / Software project successfully.
• Present and Demonstrate the work done.
• Prepare a consolidated report on the work done.
PAGE 72
IAS60 INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS - II (HIGHER) L T P C

Course Objective:
Course Outcome:
1. Percentage
2. Ratio & Proportions
3. Pipes & Cisterns
4. Permutations &
Combinations
5. Partnership
6. Allegation (Or) Mixture
7. Races & Games
8. Stocks & Shares
9. Height & Distance
10. True Discount & Banker’s Discount
11. Probability
12. Mensuration (Area, Volume & Surface Area)
13. Interest (Simple Interest, Compound Interest)
14. Logarithm
15. Chain Rule
16. Data Interpretation (Tabulation, Bar Chart, Pie Chart, Line Graphs)
VERBAL REASONING:
Logical Deduction
1. Logic
2. Statement – Argument
3. Statement – Assumptions
4. Statement –Courses of action
5. Statement –Conclusion
6. Deriving Conclusion from passages
7. Theme Detection
8. Cause and Effect reasoning
NON-VERBAL REASONING
1. Series
2. Analogy
3. Classification
4. Analytical Reasoning
5. Mirror – Images
6. Water – Images
7. Spotting out the embedded figures
8. Completion of incomplete patterns
9. Figure Matrix
10. Paper Folding
11. Paper Cutting
12. Rule Detection
13. Grouping of identical figures
14. Cubes and Dice
15. Dot Situation
16. Construction of squares and triangles
17. Figure formation and analysis
1. Concord
2. Cloze Passage
PAGE 73
3. Analogies or Reverse Analogies

4. Jumbled Sentences.
5. Error Deduction.
6. Reading Comprehension
7. Paragraph Formation
8. Completing Statements
9. Usage of Prepositions
10. Inference(Theme Detection)
11. Verification of Truth from the Statements
12. Change of Speech
Text Book:
2016
2016
Reference Book:
Edition 2016
Extensive Reading:
PAGE 74
19EE701 POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONTROL L T P C

Course Objective:
• operation of power system.
• modeling the power system for real power-frequency and reactive power – voltage control.
• concepts of computer control of power systems.
Course Outcome:
• Describe power system behavior, operations and control.
• Explain the modeling and analysis of Real Power and Frequency Control.
• Explain the modeling and analysis of Reactive Power and Voltage Control.
• Analyze the optimal dispatch problems and unit commitment in various power plants.
• Describe the principles of computer control of power system.
System load – variation - load characteristics - load curves and load-duration curve (daily, weekly and annual) - load
factor - diversity factor- Introduction to restructuring of power systems. Importance of load forecasting -simple
techniques. An overview of power system operation and control.
Unit II REAL POWER - FREQUENCY CONTROL 9
Fundamentals of speed governing mechanism and modeling - speed-load characteristics – load sharing between
two synchronous machines in parallel. Concept of control area- LFC control of a single-area system. Static and
dynamic analysis of uncontrolled and controlled cases. Integration of economic dispatch control with LFC. Two area
system – modeling – static and dynamic analysis - uncontrolled case, tie line with frequency bias control of two-area
system, state variable model –two area system.
Unit III REACTIVE POWER–VOLTAGE CONTROL 9
Basics of reactive power control. Types of Excitation system – AVR modeling. Static and dynamic analysis - stability
compensation - generation and absorption of reactive power. Relation between voltage, power and reactive power
at a node. Method of voltage control - tap-changing transformer, SVC (TCR + TSC) and STATCOM. System level
control using generator voltage magnitude setting, tap setting of OLTC transformer.
Unit IV ECONOMIC DISPATCH AND UNIT COMMITMENT 9
Introduction- economic dispatch problem – cost of generation – incremental cost curve - co-ordination equations
without loss and with loss, solution by direct method and λ-iteration method. (No derivation of loss
coefficients).Base Point and participation factors. Economic dispatch controller added to LFC control. Statement of
Unit Commitment problem – constraints; spinning reserve, thermal unit constraints, hydro constraints, fuel
constraints and other constraints. UC Solution methods - Priority-list methods. Numerical problems only in priority-
list method using full-load average production cost.
Unit V COMPUTER CONTROL OF POWER SYSTEMS 9
Need of computer control of power system. Energy control centre: Functions - system monitoring - data acquisition
and control. System hardware configuration – SCADA and EMS functions. Network topology - state estimation -
security analysis and control. Various operating states (Normal, alert, emergency, in-extremis and restorative)
showing various state transitions and control strategies- System Black out (Case studies).
Text Book:
1. Dr.K.Uma Rao , “Power System Operation and Control”, Wiley India Pvt .Ltd. New Delhi, 2016.
2. Abhijit Chakrabarti, Sunita Halder, “Power System Analysis Operation and Control”, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., Third
Edition, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. Olle. I. Elgerd, “Electric Energy Systems Theory – An Introduction”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 2010 Mahalanabis A.K., Kothari D.P., Ahson S., “Computer Aided Power System Analysis and Control”,
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 1988.
2. Gupta B.R., Vandana Singhal ‘Power System operation and control’, S.Chand Publications, Reprint 2014.
3. Murty P.S.R., ‘Operation and Control in Power Systems’, B.S. Publications, First Edition, 2007.
4. Kirchmayer, Leon.K, ‘Economic Operation of Power Systems’ Wiley Eastern Limited, 1985.
5. Weedy. B.M., Cory B.J., ‘Electric Power Systems’ John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2004.
6. Ramana N.V., “Power System Operation and Control,” Pearson, 2011.
7. Allen.J.Wood and Bruce F.Wollenberg, “Power Generation, Operation and Control”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
2013.
8. Kundur P., “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
PAGE 75
19EE702 PROTECTION AND SWITCHGEAR L T P C

Course Objective:
• Importance of protection, protection schemes and earthing.
• Characteristics, functions and application areas of relays and circuit breakers.
• Common faults in major power system apparatus and selection of suitable protective schemes.
• Problems associated with circuit breaking.
• Various circuit breakers and methods of testing
Course Outcome:
• Select proper earthing for the power system apparatus and components.
• Suggest the types of relays for specific applications
• Identify the protective schemes for safeguarding major power system apparatus and components
• Apply suitable methods for quenching arc
• Select circuit breaker based on application requirements
Importance of protective schemes for electrical apparatus and power system. Types of protective schemes - Types
of faults, fault statistics and effects of faults - relay terminologies – essential qualities of protection. Power System
earthing and types of earthing
Unit II PROTECTIVE TRANSFORMERS AND RELAYS 9
Protective Transformers: CTs and PTs – operating principle and construction – types and applications.
Relays: Electromagnetic relays – over current, directional and non-directional, distance, negative sequence,
differential and under frequency relays – Introduction to static relays and Numerical relays
Unit III APPARATUS PROTECTION 9
Alternator : Stator protection - Percentage differential protection - Protection against stator inter-turn faults - Stator
overheating protection - Rotor protection - Field ground fault protection - Loss of excitation - Rotor overheating
protection – Field suppression. Transformer: Common faults – Buchholz relay – differential protection. Transmission
line: Time graded protection - distance protection of HV and EHV lines - Pilot wire protection - Carrier current
protection. Bus bar: Fault bus and Differential schemes
Unit IV THEORY OF CIRCUIT INTERRUPTION 9
Physics of arc phenomena and arc interruption. Theories for arc interruption - AC circuit breaking - restriking voltage
and recovery voltage - rate of rise of recovery voltage - resistance switching - current chopping - interruption of
capacitive current. DC circuit breaking.
Unit V CIRCUIT BREAKERS 9
Types of circuit breakers – Construction and working principle- Oil, air blast, air break, SF6 and vacuum circuit
breakers –Advantages and disadvantages of various circuit breakers – Ratings of CBs – Testing of circuit breakers
Text Book:
1. M.L. Soni, P.V. Gupta, V.S. Bhatnagar, A. Chakrabarti, ‘A Text Book on Power System Engineering’, Dhanpat Rai
& Co., 2009.
2. Badri Ram, Vishwakarma, ‘Power System Protection and Switchgear’, McGraw Hill, 2011
Reference Book:
1. Sunil S. Rao, ‘Switchgear and Protection’, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 2013.
2. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Electrical Power Systems’, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2009.
3. B. Ravindranath, and N. Chander, ‘Power System Protection & Switchgear’, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2005.
4. Y.G. Paithankar and S.R. Bhide, ‘Fundamentals of Power System Protection’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi–110001, 2003.
5. V.K.Mehta and Rohit Mehta, ‘Principles of Power System’. S.Chand & Company Limited, Revised Edition, 2005
PAGE 76
19EE751 POWER SYSTEM SIMULATION LABORATORY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To assist the students acquire software development skills and experience in the usage of standard packages
necessary for analysis and simulation of power system required for its planning, operation and control.
Course Outcome:
• Develop C/C++ programs for performance evaluation of transmission lines, formation of bus admittance and
impedance matrices, for solving Economic Dispatch problems and for performing state estimation.
• Use standard software packages for Power flow analysis, Fault analysis, Transient stability analysis and Load-
Frequency Dynamics and control of power system and for analyzing Electromagnetic Transients in Power
Systems.
Computation of Parameters and Modelling of Transmission Lines.
Formation of Bus Admittance Matrix of a network.
Formation of Bus Impedance Matrix of a network.
Load Flow Analysis by Gauss-Seidel Method.
Load Flow Analysis by Newton-Raphson and Fast-Decoupled Methods.
Symmetrical Fault Analysis.
Unsymmetrical Fault Analysis.
Transient Stability Analysis of Single-Machine Infinite Bus System.
Load – Frequency Dynamics of Single- Area and Two-Area Power Systems.
Economic Dispatch in Power Systems
State estimation: Weighted least square estimation
Electromagnetic Transients in Power Systems : Transmission Line Energization
PAGE 77
19EE752 ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND GREEN ENERGY LABORATORY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Electrical engineering concepts through hardware implementation
• Practical implementation aspects and utility of green energy sources such as wind and solar energy systems.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the practical issues related to applications using electrical and electronic equipments.
• Address variety of issues in harnessing Renewable Energy.
• Explain future role of Renewable energy sources in meeting global power demand
Practical Course 3
1. Transformer oil Testing
2. Cable fault Identification
3. Harmonic analysis of Non-linear systems
4. Study on Shunt Active Power Filter
5. Study of Battery charging circuits
6. Experiment on performance assessment of Fuel cell
7. Experiment on V-I Characteristics and Efficiency of 1kW Solar PV system.
8. Experiment on Shadowing effect & diode based solution in 1kW Solar PV system.
9. Experiment on Performance assessment of Grid connected and Stand alone 1kW Solar PV system.
10. Experiment on Performance Assessment of micro wind energy generator (500W).
11. Experiment on Performance Assessment of Hybrid (Solar – Wind) Power System.
12. Simulation study on Solar PV Energy System under various shading conditions
PAGE 78
19EE851 PROJECT WORK L T P C

Offered by EEE (Project Work / Viva Voce) 0 0 18 9
Course Objective:
• To deepen comprehension of principles by applying them to new technical problems which may be the design,
and research investigation of electrical and electronic systems.
• To perform literature survey on recent developments in a selected problem domain.
• To exercise various strategies to find a solution addressing the problem.
• To communicate the work done in written and oral forms.
Course Outcome:
• Identify and formulate a technical problem.
• Make effective literature survey for the identified problem.
• Plan a project with resource and time constraints.
• Finalize project specifications and requirements.
• Apply technical knowledge and skills in solving an engineering problem as a part of a project team.
• Implement a Hardware / Software project successfully.
• Present and Demonstrate the work done.
• Prepare a consolidated report on the work done.
PAGE 79
19EEC01 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P C

Offered by EEE (Core Elective) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Basics of Digital Control Systems
• Z-domain description of Systems and Digital PID controllers
• State variable formulation of digital systems
• Different methods of stability analysis of Digital Control Systems
• Design of Digital control system
Course Outcome:
• Interpret the basic knowledge of digital control
• Develop simple system models for position, velocity control applications.
• Represent digital systems in state space representation.
• Analyse the stability of digital systems using different techniques
• Design Digital control (compensator / Controller / Observer) systems.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 9
Basic concepts of Digital control systems – advantages and Implementation issues – Schematic ofdigital
control,Sample and Hold circuits – Factors affecting the choice of sampling Rate–reconstruction of signals –Time
domain models for discrete time systems – State space models – Difference equation models – Impulse response
models.
Unit II MODELS OF DIGITAL CONTROL DEVICES AND SYSTEMS 9
Z-domain description of sampled continuous time plants – models of A/D and D/A converters –Implementation of
digital controllers – recursive and non-recursive realizations, Digital PID controllers – position, velocity algorithms,
Digital Control Systems – Temperature control – Position control.
Unit III STATE VARIABLE MODELS OF DIGITAL SYSTEMS 9
Concept of state space method – state space representations of discrete time systems– Solving discretetime state
space equations – Pulse transfer function matrix- Discretization of continuous state spaceequations –Controllability
– observability – Design via poleplacement-state observers.
Unit IV STABILITY ANALYSIS 9
Mapping between S-plane and z-plane – Jury stability test – Bilinear transformation and Extended Routh array –
Root locus method – Liapunov stability analysis of discrete time systems.
Unit V DESIGN OF DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 9
Z-plane specifications of control system design – Digital compensator design – Frequency response method, state
feedback – pole placement design – full order state observer.
Text Book:
1. Gopal M., “Digital Control and State Variable Methods – Conventional and Intelligent Control Systems”, fourth
Edition, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2013
Reference Book:
1. M. Sami Fadali, Antonio Visioli., “Digital Control Engineering: Analysis and Design”, Academic Press, 2012.
2. Anastasia Veloni, Nikolaos Miridakis “Digital Control Systems: Theoretical Problems and Simulation Tools”, CRC
Press, 2017.
3. Kuo B.C., “Digital Control Systems”, Oxford University Press, Inc. 2003.
4. Ogata K., “Discrete Time Control Systems”, Prentice Hall International, New Jersey, USA 2002.
5. Houpis C.H. and Lamont C.B., “Digital Control Systems”, McGraw Hill, 1999.
PAGE 80
19EEC02 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN L T P C

Course Objective:
• P, PI & PID controllers design
• Various models, analysis and design using state variable techniques.
• Phase plane analysis, describing function analysis and stability analysis of linear and non-linear systems.
• Basic concepts of optimal control.
Course Outcome:
• Design P, PI & PID controllers.
• Derive models, analyze and design the controller through State Variable approach for LTIV continuous systems.
• Evaluate the performance and stability analysis of non-linear system thro’ Phase plane and Describing Function
methods respectively.
• Analyze the stability of linear and non-linear systems thro’ various concepts.
Unit I CONTROLLER DESIGN 9
P, PI, PID Controllers - Transfer function – Design in frequency domain - Ziegler-Nichols tuning of PID Controller,
Cohen Coon tuning Method.
Unit II STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9
Concept of state and State variable - State models for LTIV continuous-time systems (Physical, Phase Variable and
Canonical) – Transfer function from State model – Diagonalisation - Solution of state equations- State Transition
Matrix.
Unit III CONTROLLABITY, OBSERVABILTY AND DESIGN 9
Controllability and Observability- Kalman’s and Gilbert’s tests – Effect of pole–zero cancellation in TF on
Controllability and Observability - Pole Placement by state feedback – Full order Observer Design.
Unit IV NON-LINEAR SYSTEMS 9
Introduction – Properties of Non-Linear systems-Phase plane method: Basic Concept – Phase trajectory and phase
portraits – Singular points – Construction of phase trajectories: Isocline methods. Describing function: Basic
concepts-Describing functions for common nonlinearities: dead zone, saturation and relay with hysteresis.
Unit V STABILITY ANALYSIS 9
Introduction – Concept of stability – Equilibrium points- Lyapunov’s stability theorems -Lyapunov’s direct method
for LTIV systems – Lyapunov’s method for non-linear systems – Determination of Lyapunov function using
Krasovskii’s and Variable Gradient methods.
Text Book:
1. Gopal M., “Modern Control System Theory”, New Age International Publishers, 2011.
2. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. Constantine H. Houpis, Stuart N. Sheldon, Linear Control System Analysis and Design with MATLAB®, CRC Press,
USA, 2013.
2. Nagrath I J and Gopal M, ―Control System Engineering, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Norman S. Nise, ―Control system Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2011.
4. Gopal M, ―Digital Control and State Variable Methods, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
PAGE 81
19EEC03 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• Various types of signal generators and signal analyzers used in measurements applications.
• PC based Instrumentation systems and modern display devices.
• Electrical type flow, level meters and high temperature measurement techniques.
• Various measurement techniques for acceleration, vibration and force.
• Measurement of low, medium and high pressures in an industrial process.
Course Outcome:
• Select the required signal generators and Analyzers for the design of the Measurement Process and
maintenance of equipment.
• Construct an automated data acquisition system for computer controlled measurement in modern wire and
wireless domain.
• Identify sensors for measurement of level, flow and high temperature
• Select sensors for measurement of acceleration, vibration and force
• Choose sensors for different levels of pressure
Unit I SIGNAL GENERATORS AND ANALYZERS 9
Function Generators – RF signal generators – Sweep generators – Frequency Synthesizer – Wave Analyzer –
Harmonic Distortion Analyzer – Spectrum Analyzer, Digital Spectrum Analyzer, Vector Network Analyzer – Digital
RLC meters.
Unit II DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS AND DISPLAY DEVICES 9
Elements of a Digital Data Acquisition System – Interfacing of Transducers – Multiplexing – Data Loggers – Computer
Controlled Instrumentation – IEEE 488 bus-LCD- LED’s - Digital Storage Oscilloscope.
Unit III MEASUREMENT OF LEVEL, FLOW, AND HIGH TEMPERATURE 9
Principle and constructional details of Electromagnetic flow meter –Ultrasonic flow meters- Level measurements:
Electrical types- Conductivity sensors –Capacitive sensors –Ultrasonic gauge- Differential pressure method- High
Temperature Measurement: Radiation fundamentals - Radiation methods of temperature measurement - Total
radiation pyrometers - Optical pyrometers.
Unit IV MEASUREMENT OF ACCELERATION, VIBRATION AND FORCE 9
Vibration Measuring Instruments: Reasons for the measurement of vibrations- Vibrometer /Seismic Instrument
Frequency response analysis of systems- Accelerometers: Piezoelectric, LVDT, Strain gauge and Variable reluctance
type accelerometers - Different types of load cells - Hydraulic, Pneumatic, strain gauge and Piezoelectric load cells.
Unit V MEASUREMENT OF LOW, MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE 9
Units of pressure – Liquid Manometers: U-tube, Well type and Inclined tube Manometer- McLeod Gauge-Elastic
type pressure gauges: Bourdon tube, bellows and diaphragms - Capacitive type pressure transducer – Piezo-resistive
pressure sensor- Pirani gauge: Thermal conductivity gauges – Ionization gauge - calibration of pressure gauges. Dead
weight tester.
Text Book:
1. Albert D.Helfrick and William D.Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement
2. Techniques”, 2nd Edition, Pearson / Prentice Hall of India, 2009.
3. Doebelin, E.O.and Manik,D.N., Measurement Systems Application and Design,Special Indian Edition,
McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2007.
Reference Book:
1. A.K. Sawhney and PuneetSawhney, “A Course In Electrical And Electronic Measurements And
2. Instrumentation”, 19th Edition, DhanpatRai Publications, 2012.
3. H. S. Kalsi, “Electronic instruments”,3rd Edition Tata McGraw–Hill Education, 2010
4. Patranabis, D. Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, 3rdEdition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
5. Liptak, B.G., Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement), CRC Press, 2005.
6. Singh,S.K., Industrial Instrumentation and Control, McGrawHill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
7. Jain, R.K., Mechanical and Industrial Measurements, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1999.
PAGE 82
19EEC04 BIO MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• Physiological systems of the human body and relate them to the parameters that have clinical importance.
• Medical equipments that are actually in use at the present day in the healthcare centre.
• Patient life assisting devices, Therapeutic and Medical imaging equipments used in Hospitals.
• Telemedicine and Electrical safety in clinical environment.
Course Outcome:
• Acquaintance with physiology of the heart, lung, blood circulations and respirations.
• Know how to use the latest medical equipments available for measurement of non-electrical parameters in the
physiological systems of the human body.
• Obtain the in-depth knowledge in various electrical origins of recording methods of ECG, EEG, EMG and ERG.
• Know the latest procedure adopted for providing Medical assistance through telemetry and the Therapeutic
equipments used for diagnostic and surgery purposes.
• Aware ofmodern methods of imaging techniques used for diagnostic purpose in the health care centre. And,
also about patient monitoring and electrical safety in clinical environment.
Unit I HUMAN PHYSIOLOGICAL SYSTEM 9
Cell and its Structure – Action potential – Resting potential – Propagation of Action potential and Sodium pump –
Nerve cell: Neuron – Axon – Synapse – Central Nervous System-Peripheral Nervous System – Respiratory System-
Electro Physiology of Cardiopulmonary Circulation system.
Unit II NON-ELECTRICAL PARAMETER MEASUREMENTS 9
Measurement of Blood pressure – Cardiac Output measurement – Measurement of Heart Sounds –
Phonocardiography – Measurement of Partial pressure of Carbon dioxide (PaCO2) and Partial pressures of Oxygen
(PaO2) in the Arterial blood – Measurement of lung volumes: Spirometry.
Unit III ELECTRO–PHYSIOLOGICAL PARAMETERS MEASUREMENTS 9
Basic components of a Biomedical system – Bio-Electrodes : Micro, Needle and Surface Electrodes – Different Lead
configurations and recording methods of Electrocardiograph(ECG) – Electroencephalograph(EEG) – Brain Waves:
Alpha, Beta, Theta and Delta waves and their frequency spectrum – Electromyography (EMG)- Electroretinography
(ERG).
Unit IV PATIENT LIFE ASSISTING AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS 9
Pacemakers and its types –Defibrillators: D.C and AED – Ventilators: Pressure limited, Volume limited and Servo
controlled ventilators – Nerve and Muscle stimulators-Surgical diathermy machines: Short wave, Microwave and
Ultrasonic diathermy – Hemo and Peritoneal dialyzers.
Unit V MEDICAL IMAGING EQUIPMENTS & ELECTRICAL SAFETY IN CLINICAL ENVIRONMENT 9
Block diagram, operations and applications of X-Ray machines– Computer Tomography (CT) – Magnetic Resonance
Imaging (MRI) System – Ultrasonography – Medical Thermography – Telemedicine – Electrical safety in Clinical
environment.
Text Book:
1. Khandpur R.S., “Handbook of Bio-Medical Instrumentation”, TataMcGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd., 2013.
2. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J.Weibell, Erich A.Pfeiffer, “Bio-Medical Instrumentation and Measurements”, Pearson
Education, 2011 / PHI, 2nd Edition.
Reference Book:
1. John G. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”, John Wiley and sons, India, 3rd Edition,
2013.
2. Geddes L.A. and Baker L.E., “Principles of Applied Bio-Medical Instrumentation”, John Wiley & Sons, 3rd Edition,
2013.
3. Ed. Joseph D. Bronzino, “The Biomedical Engineering Handbook”, Second Edition, Boca Raton, CRC Press LLC,
2000.
4. Barbara L. Christe, “Introduction to biomedical Instrumentation, “Cambridge University Press, 2009.
5. Joseph J. Carr and John M.Brown,” Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology,’’ Pearson,4th
edition,2002.
PAGE 83
19EEC05 COMPUTER SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE L T P C

Course Objective:
• The basic structure and operation of a digital computer.
• The basics of processing unit and control signals.
• Pipelining architecture and its issues.
• Hierarchical memory system and interfaces for I/O devices.
Course Outcome:
• Identify the parameters that affect the performance of digital computers.
• Design the components of arithmetic unit.
• Trace the execution sequence of an instruction.
• Address the various issues of pipeline organization.
• Analyze the cost performance of memory types and design I/O interface circuits.
Unit I BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS 9
Functional units - Basic operational concepts - Performance - Instructions and instruction sequencing - Addressing
modes - Arithmetic: Design of fast adders - Multiplication of unsigned and signed numbers - Fast Multiplication -
Integer division - Floating point numbers and operations
Unit II BASIC PROCESSING UNIT 9
Fundamental concepts - Instruction Execution - Hardware Components - Instruction Fetch and Execution Steps -
Control Signals - Hardwired control - RISC and CISC Styles Processors.
Unit III PIPELINING 9
Basic concepts - Pipeline organization and issues - Data dependencies - Memory and branch delays - Performance
evaluation - Pipelining in CISC processors.
Unit IV MEMORY SYSTEM 9
Basic concepts - Memory hierarchy - Semiconductor RAM - Read-only Memories - Direct Memory Access - Cache
memory - Performance considerations - Virtual memory - Secondary storage.
Unit V I/O ORGANIZATION 9
Bus structure - Bus operation - Arbitration - Interface circuits - Interconnection standards: PCI, SCSI, SATA, USB, SAS,
and HDMI - Accessing I/O Devices: I/O Device Interface - Program-Controlled I/O - Interrupts
Text Book:
1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, and Naraig Manjikian, “Computer Organization and Embedded
Systems”, McGraw Hill Higher Education, Sixth Edition, 2011.
2. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The Hardware / Software
interface”, Elsevier, Third Edition, 2005.
Reference Book:
1. “Computer Organization”, ISRD Group, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
2. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture - Designing for Performance”, Pearson Education,
Sixth Edition, 2003.
3. John P. Hayes, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, Third Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 1998.
PAGE 84
19EEC06 DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS L T P C

Course Objective:
• the fundamental concepts of computer networking.
• the responsibilities of various layers of OSI reference model.
• some real network applications.
Course Outcome:
• Apply and develop modularity of the layering concept in OSI and TCP / IP models and encapsulation
• Analyze the protocol performance used for different purposes like error control, flow control, logical
addressing.
• Analyze the causes and effects of congestion and suggest control measures
• Apply Cryptographic services and mechanisms for network security
• Select the right protocol to be offered a particular service
Unit I PHYSICAL LAYER 9
Data Communications – Networks – Networks models – OSI model – Layers in OSI model – TCP / IP protocol suite –
Signals: Modulation & Encoding Techniques – Various medium for data transmission – Network connecting devices
– Switching: Circuit switched networks – Datagram Networks – Virtual circuit networks – Cable networks for Data
transmission: DSL – Cable TV for Data transfer.
Unit II DATA LINK LAYER 9
Data link control: Framing – Flow and error control – Protocols for Noiseless and Noisy Channels – HDLC, Multiple
access: Random access – Controlled access – Wired LANS: Ethernet – IEEE standards – standard Ethernet – Fast
Ethernet – Gigabit Ethernet – Wireless LANS
Switching: Circuit switching – Packet switching – Message switching.
Unit III NETWORK LAYER 9
Logical addressing: IPv4 & IPV6 Addressing – subnetting – Internet Protocol: Internetworking – IPv4, IPv6 – Address
mapping – ARP, RARP, DHCP, ICMP, IGMP, Delivery – Forwarding – Routing algorithms – Inside a Router: Input
Ports, Switching Fabric, Output Ports.
Unit IV TRANSPORT LAYER 9
Duties of the Transport layer – Process–to–Process delivery – User Datagram Protocol (UDP) – Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP) – Congestion Control – Quality of services (QoS) – Techniques to improve QoS – Shaping, Scheduling.
Unit V APPLICATION LAYER 9
Multimedia – Network Security: Cryptography – Symmetric key and Public Key algorithms – Digital signature –
Management of Public keys – Kerberos Authentication Protocol - Domain Name System (DNS) – E–mail – FTP –
WWW – HTTP.
Text Book:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data communication and Networking”, 5thEdition, Tata McGraw–Hill, 2013.
2. Andrew S. Tannenbaum, “Computer Networks”, 5thEdition, Pearson Education, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. Wayne Tomasi, “Introduction to Data Communications and Networking”, Pearson Education, 2004.
2. James .F. Kurose & KeithW.Rouss, “Computer Networking: A Topdown Approach”, 7thEdition, Pearson
3. Education, 2016.
4. Greg Tomshon, “Guide to Networking Essentials”, 7thEdition, Cengage Learning, 2015.
5. William Stallings, “Data and Computer Communication”, 10th Edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.mhhe.com/engcs/compsci/forouzan/
• www.net.cs.umass.edu/kurose-ross-ppt-6e
PAGE 85
19EEC07 ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLERS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Architecture of 8086,80186,80286,80386,80486 and Pentium processors
• Architecture and instruction set of PIC 18 series microcontroller
• Internal peripheral units of PIC 18 microcontrollers and using them for interfacing applications
Course Outcome:
• Understand the architecture and interrupt structure of 8086 microprocessor
• Understand the architecture and instruction set of 80186, 80286, 80386, 80486 and Pentium
microprocessor
• Develop programs based on the architecture and instruction set of PIC 18 series microcontroller
• Design interfacing applications based on internal peripheral units of PIC 18 microcontrollers and
programming them
• Understand interfacing of microprocessor for various applications
Unit I 8086 ARCHITECTURE 9
Architecture – memory accessing - Pin details – Addressing Mode – Instruction Format – Interrupt Structure
Unit II ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS 9
Architecture 80186 – Architecture 80286 – 80386 -80486 – Pentium Processor
Unit III PIC18F MICROCONTROLLER 9
Architecture – Memory Organization-Addressing Modes – Instruction Set – PIC Programming
Unit IV PERIPHERALS OF PIC MICROCONTROLLER 9
I/O ports -Timer – CCP module –Interrupts- UART – ADC and Programming
Unit V SYSTEM DESIGN – CASE STUDY 9
Interfacing of LCD - Motor Control – Generation of waveforms (Sine, Triangular, Square, Ramp)
Text Book:
1. Senthil Kumar N.,Saravanan M.,Jeevananthan.S., Shah S.K, “Microprocessors and Interfacing” Oxford University
Press, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Rolin D. Mckinlay, Danny Causey, “PIC Microcontroller and Embedded Systems using
Assembly and C for PIC18”, Pearson Education, 2008.
Reference Book:
1. Douglas V Hall, “Microprocessors And Interfacing”, 3rdEdition, McGraw Hill Education, 2012
2. Rafiquzzaman. M, “Microprocessors Theory and applications-Intel and Motorola”, Prentice Hall India, 2001.
3. Walter A Tribal &Avtar Singh, “The 8088 & 8086 Microprocessors”, Pearson, Fourth Edition, 2007
4. Mandal S.K.,“Microprocssors and Microcontrollers”, McGraw Hill education,2011
5. Rafiquzzaman.M,“Microcontroller Theory and Applications with the PIC18F”Wiley,2nd Edition,2018
PAGE 86
19EEC08 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Providing an overview of Power Plants and detailing the role of Electrical Engineers in their operation and
maintenance.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the layout, construction and working of the components inside a thermal power plant and
Cogeneration.
• Explain the layout, construction and working of the components of Hydro power plants.
• Illustrate the layout, construction and working of the components inside nuclear power plants.
• Exhibit the use of renewable energy in power plants.
• Exemplify the power plant economics and environmental hazards.
Unit I COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS 9
Layout of modern coal power plant- Pulverisation- FBC-Boilers, component-Turbines, Super-Heaters-Economizer-Air
Preheater- Condensers-Cooling Tower, Subsystems of thermal power plants - Fuel and ash handling, Draught
system, Feed water treatment. Cogeneration systems.
Unit II HYDRO POWER PLANTS 9
Hydro Electric Power Plants – Classification, Typical Layout and associated components including Turbines-Site
selection- Small and Micro-Hydro power plant- Pumped storage system.
Unit III NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS 5
Basics of Nuclear Engineering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear Power Plants, Working of Nuclear Reactors :
Boiling Water Reactor (BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR), CANada Deuterium Uranium reactor (CANDU),
Breeder, Gas Cooled and Liquid Metal Cooled Reactors. Safety measures for Nuclear Power plants.
Unit IV POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY 9
Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, Solar Photo Voltaic (SPV), Solar Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas
and Fuel Cell power systems.
Unit V ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES OF POWER PLANTS 9
Power tariff types, Load distribution parameters, load curve, Comparison of site selection criteria, relative merits &
demerits, Capital & Operating Cost of different power plants. Pollution control technologies including Waste
Disposal Options for Coal and Nuclear Power Plants.
Text Book:
1. P.K. Nag, “Power Plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Ltd., Third Edition, 2008.
Reference Book:
1. M.M. El-Wakil, “Power Plant Technology”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2010.
2. Black & Veatch, Springer, “Power Plant Engineering”, 1996.
3. Thomas C. Elliott, Kao Chen and Robert C. Swanekamp, “Standard Handbook of Power Plant Engineering”,
Second Edition, McGraw – Hill, 1998.
4. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable energy”, Open University, Oxford University Press in association with the Open
University, 2004.
5. Rajput R.K., “A Text book of Power plant Engineering”, 5th Edition, Lakshmi Publications, 2013.
PAGE 87
19EEC09 ANALYSIS AND SYNTHESIS OF ELECTRIC NETWORKS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To analyse any given electrical network.
• To study two port model of circuit and circuit elements.
• To familiarize the fundamentals of filters and attenuators.
• To gain knowledge about the concept of network synthesis.
Course Outcome:
• Analyse any given electrical network based on network graphs.
• Determine the network functions of two port network.
• Design the various types of filters.
• Design the various types of attenuators.
• Synthesis of networks from system equation.
Unit I NETWORK TOPOLOGY 9
Network graphs, Tree and Co-Tree, Twigs and Links, Incidence Matrix, Properties of incidence matrix, incidence
matrix and KCL, link current: Tie-set matrix, Cut Set and Tree branch Voltages
Unit II NETWORK FUNCTIONS 9
Network Functions & Responses: Concept of complex frequency, driving point and transfer functions for one port
and two port network, poles & zeros of network functions, Restriction on Pole and Zero locations of network
function. Impulse response and complete response. Time domain behavior form pole-zero plot.
Unit III DESIGN OF FILTERS 9
Classification of filters, Filter elements, Equations of filter Networks, characteristics impedance in pass band and
stop bands, Constant – K Low pass filter, Constant – K high Pass filter, band pass filter
Unit IV ATTENUATORS 9
T-type attenuator,π-type attenuator, lattice attenuator, Bridged T-type attenuator, L-type attenuator
Unit V NETWORK SYNTHESIS OF ELEMENTS 9
Hurwitz polynomials, Positive Real functions, synthesis of reactive one-ports by Foster’s method, synthesis of
reactive one-ports by Cauer method, synthesis of RL and RC network by Foster’s method and Cauer method.
Text Book:
1. A. Sudhakar and ShyammohanS.Palli, “Network Analysis and Synthesis”, McGraw-
2. Hill, 2006.
3. Sudakar A. and Shyam Mohan S.Palli , “Circuits and Networks (Analysis and Synthesis)”, McGraw Hill Book Co.,
New Delhi, Third Edition, 2007.
Reference Book:
1. C. L. Wadhwa “Network Analysis and Synthesis”, New Age Publications, Delhi, 2004.
2. Franklin F. Kuo, “Network Analysis and Synthesis”, 2nd Edition, Wiley India Pvt. Limited.
3. M. E. Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”, PHI Publications, Delhi, 2003.
PAGE 88
19EEC28 ILLUMINATION, WIRING AND ESTIMATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• Energy efficient lighting system
• Different wiring methods
• Estimation for electrical wiring
Course Outcome:
• Explicate the advancement in energy efficient lighting schemes
• Explain about different wiring methods
• Explicate the essential elements of Estimating and Costing
• Explain about domestic wiring Installation
• Estimate the conductor size and cost of a wiring system
Unit I ENERGY EFFICIENT LAMPS AND WIRING METHODOLOGY 9
Compact Fluorescent Lamp (CFL) – Selection of CFL – Lumens output – Disposal of waste CFL – Limitations of CFL –
LED – Terminologies – Choice of LED Lamps for different lighting requirements – Benefits of LED lighting – CFL Vs
LED lighting,12V DC home wiring – Solar powered lamps – Importance – Constraints in 12V DC wiring – Voltage
Regulation devices – wiring and distribution, Necessary Appliances.
Unit II TYPES AND INSTALLATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS 9
Types of wires, Factors influencing the choice of wiring system, Types of wiring system, Conduit Wiring System,
Accessories, Advantages and Disadvantages of Conduit Wiring Systems, IE rules, 1956: rules 50, 56, 57, 58, 60,61 –
Internal wiring systems – Looping-in system – Ring system – tree system - Position of switches, cutouts, main switch
board, sub-distribution boards. Domestic Wiring Protection equipments: Miniature Circuit Breaker – Residual
Current Circuit Breaker or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
Unit III ELEMENTS OF ESTIMATION 9
Introduction ,Purpose of Estimating and Costing:, Qualities of a good Estimator, Essential Elements of Estimating
and Costing, Tender, Guidelines for Inviting Tenders, Quotation, Other Important Factors of Estimating and Costing
Unit IV DOMESTIC ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND ESTIMATES 9
Estimation of load requirements-Estimation of connected load, Maximum demand, and type of supply required for
a domestic building and related problem- Determination of size of distribution boards – Different types of
commonly available distribution boards-Estimation of Accessories required, wiring materials and labour
requirement for a domestic building and related problem-Pre-commissioning tests for domestic wiring Installation:
Visual Inspection, Testing- Special features applicable for High-Rise apartment buildings
Unit V ESTIMATION OF CONDUCTOR SIZE FOR INTERNAL WIRING AND SERVICE LINES 9
Estimation of conductor size for main circuit, room- Estimation of conductor size for an electric motor in an
industry-IE rules regarding the installation of Service lines-Estimation of service mains for a double storey building-
Estimation of wiring materials for computer centre, street light services
Text Book:
1. Uppal S.L, “Electrical Wiring - Estimating and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, Sixth edition 2011.
2. Giridharan M.K., “Electrical Systems Design”, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2011.
3. Raina K.B., Bhattacharya S.K., “Electrical Design Estimating and Costing” New Age International Pvt. Ltd., 1991
Reference Book:
1. J.B. Gupta, “A Course in Electrical Installation Estimating and Costing” , S. K. Kataria & Sons, Ninth Edition, 2012.
Extensive Reading:
• http://eartheasy.com/live_energyeff_lighting.htm
• http://dreamgreenhouse.com/designs/12v/index.php
• http://www.treehugger.com/sustainable-product-design/big-steps-in-building-change-our-wiring-to-12-volt-
dc.html
PAGE 89
19EEC10 POWER QUALITY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Different Power Quality Problems.
• Sources and mitigation of voltage sag and interruption
• Sources of harmonics and power under harmonic condition
• Mitigation of harmonics
• Benchmarking process and power quality monitoring
Course Outcome:
• List and Identify different Power Quality problems
• Describe about different sources for Voltage sag problem and its mitigation Techniques
• Estimate the harmonic indices and Calculate Power system quantities under non-sinusoidal condition
• Illustrate about different sources for Harmonics and its mitigation techniques
• Explain about Power quality monitoring techniques and benchmark process
Terms and definitions: Transients, short duration and long duration voltage variations, Voltage imbalance,
waveform distortion, Voltage fluctuations, Power frequency variation- Power acceptability curves: Computer
Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA) curve
Unit II VOLTAGE SAGS AND INTERRUPTIONS 9
Sources of sags and interruptions – Estimation of sag magnitude in radial systems: Influence of fault distance,
Transformer, area of cross section of conductor-Estimation of voltage sag due to Induction Motor Starting-
Estimating voltage sag Performance using: Area of Vulnerability Equipment, Sag ride through capability curves-
Voltage Tolerance Ranges for different equipment - Mitigation of voltage sag at End user Level: Ferro resonant
Transformer, Active series compensators, UPS,SMES, Static Transfer switch
Unit III HARMONICS 9
Harmonics and its types-Harmonics versus Transients- Voltage distortion from current distortion-Harmonic indices:
THD,IHD,TDD and Related Problems-Power Systems Quantities under Non-sinusoidal Condition: Sinusoidal Voltage
Source Supplying Non-linear Load Current-Non-sinusoidal Voltage Source Supplying Non-linear Loads-Distortion
Power factor-True Power factor- System Response characteristics to harmonics: System Impedance, capacitor
impedance, parallel resonance and series resonance
Unit IV SOURCES, EFFECTS AND MITIGATION OF HARMONICS 9
Harmonic sources from commercial and industrial loads – Effect of Harmonics on Transformer, AC motors, Capacitor
banks, Protective Devices, Energy and demand Metering- k-factor of Transformer-Capacitor Bank Evaluation for IEEE
standard for Shunt Power Capacitor-Harmonic Evaluation-Devices for controlling Harmonic Distortion: In-line
Reactor, Zigzag Transformers, Passive filters, Active filters- Standards on Harmonics.
Unit V POWER QUALITY BENCH MARKING AND MONITORING 9
Power Quality Indices: SAIFI, SAIDI, CAIDI and SARFI -Benchmarking Process- Power Quality Contracts-Power Quality
Insurance- Power Quality Monitoring: Objectives and considerations
Text Book:
1. Roger.C.Dugan, Mark.F.McGranagham, Surya Santoso, H.Wayne Beaty, “Electrical Power Systems Quality”,
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2013.
2. Math H.J.Bollen, “Understanding Power Quality Problems-Voltage Sag & Interruptions”, (New York: IEEE press,
2000).
3. Arindam Ghosh and Gerard Ledwich, “Power Quality Enhancement Using Custom Power Devices”, Springer
International Edition, 2002
Reference Book:
1. C.Sankaran, “Power Quality”, CRC press, 2002.
2. J.Arrilaga, N.R.Watson, S.Chen, “ Power System Quality Assessment”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000
3. NPTEL Course on Power Quality in Power Distribution Systems (Web link:
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106025/)
PAGE 90
19EEC11 FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basics of power flow control and compensation.
• FACTS technology.
• Variable impedance type and converter type shunt and series compensators.
• Operation of versatile FACTS devices.
• Features of FACTS projects around the world and FACTS controller co-ordination.
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate the importance of compensation and appropriate compensators.
• Explainfunctions and capabilities of variable impedance based shunt compensators
• Explainfunctions and capabilities of series compensation FACTS devices.
• Describe the functions and capabilities of converter based compensators
• Address the need for FACTS controller co-ordination.
Unit I GENERAL SYSTEM CONSIDERATION AND BASICS OF FACTS CONCEPTS 9
Active & Reactive Power flow between Two synchronous sources in AC Systems - Constraints of maximum
transmission line loading – Relative importance of controllable parameters. Compensation - Uncompensated line,
shunt compensation. Series compensation, Effect of compensation on power transfer capacity. Definition and types
of FACTS controllers - Benefits of FACTS Technology
Unit II VARIABLE IMPEDANCE BASED STATIC SHUNT COMPENSATORS 9
Objectives of shunt compensation – Variable Impedance type static VAR generators: Operation, control and
characteristics of TCR, TSR, TSC, FC-TCR and TSC-TCR-Functional control scheme for the FC-TCR and TSC-TCR type
static VAR generator
Unit III VARIABLE IMPEDANCE BASED STATIC SERIES COMPENSATION 9
Objectives of series compensation–Need for Variable-Series Compensation-Variable impedance type series
compensator: Operation, control, characteristics and control schemes of TSSC and TCSC
Unit IV CONVERTER BASED COMPENSATORS 9
STATCOM: Operation and VI Characteristics-Control Scheme for STATCOM- Comparison between SVC and
STATCOM- SSSC – Capability, control range and VA rating-Control Scheme for SSSC- Features of SSSC-UPFC: Basic
operating principle- IPFC : Basic operating principle
Unit V INSTALLATION OF FACTS CONTROLLERS & CO-ORDINATION ASPECTS 9
Introduction , planning aspects, operational aspects and results of Slatt’s TCSC, Sullivan’s STATCOM-Introduction to
Co-ordination of FACTS controllers-Controller Interactions-Different interaction between FACTS controllers: Steady
state interactions, electro mechanical interaction, Small signal interaction, SSR interaction, High frequency
interaction
Text Book:
1. N.G. Hingorani& L. Gyugyi, “Understanding FACTS: Concepts and Technology of Flexible AC Transmission
Systems” IEEE Press, 2000
2. R. Mohan Mathur, Rajiv K. Varma, “Thyristor-Based FACTS Controllers for Electrical Transmission Systems”, IEEE
press and John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
Reference Book:
1. Y.H. Song & A.T. John, “Flexible AC Transmission Systems (FACTS)”, Book,IEE Power and Energy Series, 2000.
2. Padiyar K.R., “FACTS Controllers in Power Transmission and Distribution”, New Age International, First Edition,
Reprint 2013.
PAGE 91
19EEC12 SCADA AND DCS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basic concepts of implementation of digital controllers for industrial process.
• Components of SCADA and DCS.
• Architecture of DCS.
• Information about the programming languages and the interfaces used in DCS and Computer Controlled
Systems.
Course Outcome:
• Interpret a PC based Supervisory control system.
• Interface DCS system in different architecture.
• Interface the digital controllers with PC.
• Identify required architectural interface for the industrial process.
• Develop simple proto type applications.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER CONTROLLED SYSTEMS 9
Introduction– Principles of modern Supervisory Control systems- Computer in process control – Building blocks of
Computer controlled systems–Supervisory Control – Direct digital Control, Man-machine interface – Management
Information System.
Unit II ELEMENTS OF SCADA SYSTEMS 9
Data Acquisition System –Data storage with time stampings – SCADA - Hardware and software, Remote terminal
units, Master Station and Communication architectures.
Unit III DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM & INTERFACES 9
Distributed Control System – Various Architectures – Comparison – Local control unit – Process interfacing issues –
Communication facilities in DCS. Operator interfaces:- Low level and high level operator interfaces – Displays -
Engineering interfaces : Low level and high level engineering interfaces.
Unit IV HART AND FIELD BUS 9
Introduction – Evolution of Signal standard – HART Communication Protocol – Communication Modes – HART
Commands – HART Applications Field Bus-Introduction, General field bus Architecture, Basic requirements of Field
bus standard, Field Bus topology.
Unit V APPLICATIONS OF SCADA & DCS IN INDUSTRIES 9
Applications of SCADA & DCS in Thermal power plant, Cement manufacturing Industries, Sugar Industries, paper
manufacturing Industries and Water Treatment plant.
Text Book:
1. Krishna kant, “Computer based industrial control”, PHI, second edition, 2010.
2. Stuart G McCrady, “Designing SCADA Application Software: A Practical Approach”, First Edition, Elsevier, 30-Jul-
2013.
Reference Book:
1. Clarke, G., Reynders, D. and Wright, E., “Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: “DNP3, 60870.5 and Related
Systems”, Newnes, 1st Edition, 2004.
2. Gordon Clarke, Deon Reynders, “Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: DNP3, 60870.5 and Related Systems”,
Elsevier, 20-Jan-2004.
3. David Bailey & Edwin Wright, “Practical SCADA for Industry”, Elsevier 2003.
4. Michael P. Lukas, “Distributed Control System”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., Canada, 1995.
PAGE 92
19EEC13 HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• Causes of over voltages and protection against them.
• Breakdown phenomenon in Gas, Liquid, and Solid Dielectrics.
• Generation of high AC& DC voltages and Impulse voltage & currents.
• Various methods of measurement of high voltages and currents.
• Testing for power apparatus as per Indian standard specification.
Course Outcome:
• Familiar with the natural causes of over voltages and protection of power system components..
• Explicate the various breakdown mechanisms in Gas, Liquid, and Solid Dielectrics.
• Generate various forms of voltage and current using various methods
• Measure various forms of voltage and current using different methods.
• Aware various Testing methods adapted for the power system apparatus as per Indian Standard Specification.
Unit I OVER VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to over voltages-Natural causes of over voltages – Charge formation in the clouds - Lightning
phenomenon –, Mechanism of lightning stroke, Mathematical modeling of lightning - Switching surges- Causes- its
effect on power system – Control of switching surges in power system - Protection of transmission lines against over
voltages.
Unit II ELECTRICAL BREAKDOWN IN GAS, LIQUID AND SOLID DIELECTRICS 9
Gaseous breakdown - Uniform field – Townsend criterion, Streamer theory- Pachen’s law - Non-uniform fields –
Corona discharges – Vacuum breakdown - Conduction and breakdown in pure and commercial liquids – Breakdown
mechanisms in solid dielectrics.
Unit III GENERATION OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENTS 9
Generation of High DC Voltages: Voltage doubler, Cockcroft Walton voltage multiplier and Vande-Graff generator-
Generation of high AC voltages: Cascaded transformer, Resonant transformer, and Tesla coil - Generation of impulse
voltage: Multistage impulse generator - MARX circuit and generation of impulse current – Tripping and control of
impulse generators.
Unit IV MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENTS 9
Measurement of High DC voltages - AC voltages: Power frequency, High frequency and impulse - High DC currents-
AC currents: Power frequency, High frequency and impulse- PD Measurements - Cathode Ray Oscillograph for
Impulse Voltage and Current measurements.
Unit V HIGH VOLTAGE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS 9
Terminologies and Definitions - High voltage testing of electrical power apparatus as per standards: Insulators,
Bushings, Isolators, Circuit Breakers, Cables, Transformers, and Surge Arrester - Insulation Coordination - Layout of
High Voltage Laboratory.
Text Book:
1. Naidu M.S. and Kamaraju V., “High Voltage Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2013.
2. Wadhwa C.L., “High Voltage Engineering’’, New age publishers, 3rd Edition, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Kuffel E. and Zaengl W.S., “High Voltage Engineering Fundamentals”, Pergamon press, Oxford, London, 2005.
2. RavindraArora, Wolfgang Mosch ,”High Voltage Insulation Engineering” ,New age international Publishers,
1995,\Reprint 2013
3. Alston,L.L., “High Voltage Technology”,Oxford University Press,Oxford,2006
4. Dieter Kind and Hermann Karner, “High Voltage Insulation Technology”, (Translated from German by
NarayanaRao Y., Friedr. Vieweg&Sohn, Braunschweig), 1985.
5. Dieter Kind, Kurt Feser, “High Voltage Test Techniques”, SBA Electrical Engineering Series, New Delhi, 2001.
6. Begamudre, R D, “High Voltage Test Techniques”, New age publishers, 1ST Edition, 2010,\Reprint 2011.
PAGE 93
19EEC14 SMART GRID L T P C

Course Objective:
• Smart Grid technologies, different smart meters and advanced metering infrastructure.
• Power quality management issues in Smart Grid.
• high performance computing for Smart Grid applications
Course Outcome:
• Explicate the need of smart grid technology.
• Describe the concept of smart grid technologies
• Exemplify the smart meters and their role
• Analyze the power quality issues in smart grid
• Apply high performance computing for smart grid
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO SMART GRID
Evolution of Electric Grid, Concept, Definitions and Need for Smart Grid, Smart grid drivers, functions, opportunities,
challenges and benefits, Difference between conventional & Smart Grid, Concept of Resilient &Self Healing Grid,
Present development & International policies in Smart Grid, Diverse perspectives from experts and global Smart
Grid initiatives.
Unit II SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES
Technology Drivers, Smart energy resources, Smart substations, Substation Automation, Feeder Automation
,Transmission systems: EMS, FACTS and HVDC, Wide area monitoring, Protection and control, Distribution systems:
DMS, Volt/VAr control, Fault Detection, Isolation and service restoration, Outage management, High-Efficiency
Distribution Transformers, Phase Shifting Transformers, Plug in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV).
Unit III SMART METERS AND ADVANCED METERING INFRASTRUCTURE
Introduction to Smart Meters, Advanced Metering infrastructure (AMI) drivers and benefits, AMI protocols,
standards and initiatives, AMI needs in the smart grid, Phasor Measurement Unit(PMU), Intelligent Electronic
Devices(IED) & their application for monitoring & protection.
Unit IV POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN SMART GRID
Power Quality & EMC in Smart Grid, Power Quality issues of Grid connected Renewable Energy Sources, Power
Quality Conditioners for Smart Grid, Web based Power Quality monitoring, Power Quality Audit.
Unit V HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTING FOR SMART GRID APPLICATIONS
Local Area Network (LAN), House Area Network (HAN), Wide Area Network (WAN), Broadband over Power line
(BPL), IP based Protocols, Basics of Web Service and CLOUD Computing to make Smart Grids smarter, Cyber Security
for Smart Grid
Text Book:
1. Keyhani A. (2012) Smart Power Grids. In: Keyhani A., Marwali M. (eds) Smart Power Grids 2011. Power Systems.
Springer.
2. James Momoh Smart Grid: Fundamentals of Design and Analysis, Wiley publication, 2015
Reference Book:
1. Stuart Borlase, “Smart Grid: Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions”, CRC Press, 2016
2. Janaka Ekanayake, Nick Jenkins, KithsiriLiyanage, Jianzhong Wu, Akihiko Yokoyama, “Smart Grid: Technology
and Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012
3. Lars T. Berger and Krzysztof Iniewski, “Smart Grid Applications, Communications, and Security”, John Wiley &
Sons, 2012
PAGE 94
19EEC30 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• different methods of power generation with a particular stress on thermal power generation.
• various measurements involved in power generation plants.
• different types of devices used for analysis in power generation plants.
• different types of controls and control loops in boiler.
• methods of monitoring different parameters like speed, vibration of turbines and their control.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the basic principles of power generation.
• Explain about measurement of various parameters in power plant.
• Explain the various analyzers in power plant.
• Explain about the turbine boiler control.
• Explain about the turbine monitoring.
Unit I OVERVIEW OF POWER GENERATION 9
Brief survey of methods of power generation – hydro, thermal, nuclear, solar and wind power – importance of
instrumentation in power generation – thermal power plants – building blocks – details of boiler processes – P&I
diagram of boiler – cogeneration.
Unit II MEASUREMENTS IN POWER PLANTS 9
Electrical measurements – current, voltage, power, frequency, power factor etc. – non electrical parameters – flow
of feed water, fuel, air and steam with correction factor for temperature – steam pressure and steam temperature –
drum level measurement – radiation detector – smoke density measurement – dust monitor.
Unit III ANALYZERS IN POWER PLANTS 9
Flue gas oxygen analyzer – analysis of impurities in feed water and steam – dissolved oxygen analyzer –
chromatography – PH meter – fuel analyzer – pollution monitoring instruments.
Unit IV CONTROL LOOPS IN BOILER 9
Combustion control – air/fuel ratio control – furnace draft control – drum level control – main steam and reheat
steam temperature control – super heater control – at temperature – deaerator control – distributed control
system in power plants – interlocks in boiler operation. Nuclear power plant instrumentation - radiations detection
instruments - process sensors - Spectrum Analyzer - nuclear reactor control systems and allied instrumentation.
Unit V TURBINE – MONITORING AND CONTROL 9
Speed, vibration, shell temperature monitoring and control – steam pressure control – lubricant oil temperature
control – cooling system.
Text Book:
1. Sam G. Dukelow, “The control of Boilers”, instrument Society of America, 1991.
2. Modern Power Station Practice, Vol.6, Instrumentation, Controls and Testing, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1971.
3. Liptak B.G., “Instrumentation in Process Industries”, Chilton, 1973
4. P.Tamilmani, “Power Plant Instrumentation”, Sams Publishers,Chennai.
5. P.K.Nag, “Power Plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2007.
6. Krishnaswamy.K and Ponnibala.M., “Power Plant Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. Elonka,S.M.and Kohal A.L. “Standard Boiler Operations”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1994.
2. R.K.Jain, “Mechanical and industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1995.
3. Everett Woodruff , Herbert Lammers, Thomas Lammers, “Steam Plant Operation”, 9th Edition McGraw Hill,
2012.
4. Rajput R.K., “A Text book of Power plant Engineering”, 5th Edition, Lakshmi Publications, 2013.
5. E.Al. Wakil, “Power Plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1984.
PAGE 95
19EEC15 SOLID STATE DRIVES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To impart the basic knowledge of Electrical Drives.
• To analyze the operation of controlled rectifier and chopper fed DC Drives.
• To analyze and design the current and speed controllers for solid state DC motor drives.
• To study and understand the speed control of Induction motor and synchronous motor drives.
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate the importance of Electrical drives.
• Design and analyze the operation of the various controlled rectifier and chopper fed DC drives.
• Analyze and design the current and speed controllers for solid state DC motor drives.
• Analyze the various speed control methods of induction motor drives.
• Analyze the various speed control methods of synchronous motor drives and the selection of drives for
industrial applications.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL DRIVES 9
Introduction: drive system, types, choice of electrical drives- Dynamics of electrical drives: fundamental torque
equation, classification of load torques, components of load torques - multi-quadrant operation - equivalent values
of drive parameters - steady state stability - modes of operation.
Unit II DC MOTOR DRIVE 9
DC motor Fundamental relations- Analysis of fed single-phase semi converter, single-phase full converter and three
phase full converter separately excited DC motor with continuous conduction mode operation- Time ratio and
current limit control of chopper- Chopper fed DC motor drives: single, two and four quadrant operations.
Unit III DESIGN OF CONTROLLERS FOR DC DRIVES 9
Transfer function of separately excited DC motors - Closed loop control of armature and field control-Design of
controllers: Current controller and speed controller - Converter selection and characteristics-PLL and
microcomputer control of DC drives.
Unit IV INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES 9
Introduction - Equivalent circuit, speed-torque characteristics, Steady state performance equations - Stator control:
Stator Voltage Control - Constant Voltage Variable Frequency operation - Constant V/f operation - VSI and CSI fed
induction motor drives and Closed loop control- Rotor control: Rotor resistance control - Qualitative treatment of
slip power recovery scheme.
Unit V SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DRIVES AND SELECTION OF DRIVES 9
Wound field cylindrical rotor motor – Equivalent circuit– synchronous motors variable speed drives-separate control
and self controlled synchronous motor drive using load commutated thyristor inverter–Permanent magnet
synchronous motor drives.
Selection of drives: Textile mills, cement mills and paper mills.
Text Book:
1. Dubey G.K., “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Narosa Publishing House, Second Edition ,2015
2. Krishnan R., “ Electric Motor & Drives: Modelling, Analysis and Control”, Pearson Education, 2015
Reference Book:
1. Bimal K Bose, “Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives” Pearson Education, 2016
2. Vedam Subramanyam, “Electric Drives – Concepts and Applications”, McGraw Hill, Second Edition ,2010
3. Pillai S.K., “A First Course on Electrical Drives”., New Age International Publishers, Third Edition, 2013.
4. Muhammad H. Rashid, “Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Pearson Education, 4th Edition,
2017.
PAGE 96
19EEC16 SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P C

Course Objective:
• The constructional features and operating principles of various types of special electrical machines.
• The characteristics and performance of various special electrical machines.
• Different types of controllers used in driving various special electrical machines.
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the operation and performance of various stepper motors.
• Design and analyze the different types of controllers and control technique for switched reluctance motors.
• Analyze the characteristics and different types of controllers for synchronous reluctance motors and linear
motors.
• Analyze the characteristics and different types of controllers for permanent magnet brushless DC motors.
• Analyze the operation and performance of various types of permanent magnet synchronous motors and
their applications.
Unit I STEPPER MOTORS 9
Constructional features and principle of operation: Variable reluctance, Permanent and Hybrid Stepper motor -
torque production in Variable Reluctance (VR) stepping motor – Static and Dynamic Characteristics - Linear and Non
Linear Analysis - Drive systems circuits and current suppression schemes for stepper motor
Unit II SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTORS 9
Constructional features-principle of operation-Inductance profile-Torque equation- Converters for SRM– Current
control schemes: Hysteresis and PWM – Torque Speed Characteristics–Microprocessor based controller and
Sensorless Controller-Applications
Unit III SYNCHRONOUS RELUCTANCE MOTORS & LINEAR MOTORS 9
Constructional features of axial and radial air gap Motors - operating principle – Phasor diagram-Derivation of
reluctance torque from phasor diagram - motor characteristics- Controller for Synchronous Reluctance motor-
Applications
Linear Induction Motor – Types , Construction & Operation, Characteristics – Linear DC motor – Linear Synchronous
Motor
Unit IV PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS 9
Construction and Principle of operation – EMF and Torque equations - Phasor diagram– Torque speed
characteristics – Self control, Vector control schemes- Comparison of BLDC and PMSM-Applications
Unit V BRUSHLESS DC MOTORS 9
Commutation in DC motors- Difference between mechanical and electronic commutator-Position sensors: Hall
sensors, Optical sensors- Advantages and Disadvantages of BLDC motor-Principle of operation of BLDC motors- -
Torque and EMF equation-Torque-Speed characteristics-Magnetic Circuit Analysis-Microprocessor based controller
for BLDC-Sensorless control of BLDC motor
Text Book:
1. Miller, T.J.E., “Brushless permanent magnet and reluctance motor drives ", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.
2. Kenjo, T. “Stepping motors and their microprocessor control ", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.
3. Kenjo, T and Naganori, S “Permanent Magnet and brushless DC motors ", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.
Reference Book:
1. Krishnan R., “ Electric Motor & Drives: Modelling, Analysis and Control”, Pearson Education, 2015.
2. Krishnan R., “Switched Reluctance Motor Drives: Modeling, Simulation, Analysis, Design and Applications” CRC
Press, 2017.
3. Athani V.V, “Stepper Motors: Fundamentals Applications and Design”, New Age International, 1997.
4. Hamid A. Toliyat, Gerald B. Kliman, “Handbook of Electric Motors”, CRC press, 2018.
5. Bimal K Bose, “Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives” Pearson Education, 2016.
6. J.Gnanavadivel, S.Muralidharan, J.Karthikeyan and P.Yogalakshmi, ”Principle of Special Electrical Machines”
Anuradha Publications, Sixth Edition-2020.
PAGE 97
19EEC17 ADVANCED POWER ELECTRONICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Advancement in AC-DC conversion
• Advancement in DC-AC conversion
• Advancement in DC-DC conversion
• Modeling of DC-DC converter
Course Outcome:
• Describe the need and working of active power factor correction techniques
• Explain the working and compare different topologies of multilevel inverter
• illustrate the working of DC-DC converter
• Design the passive components for DC-DC converter for desired specification
• Obtain the state-space modeling of DC-DC converter
Unit I AC-DC CONVERSION 9
Generation of current harmonics from AC to DC converter- Harmonics standard and recommended practice-Need
for improved utility Interface- Diode rectifier-fed boost converter -Working of Three phase PWM rectifier and its
advantages- Interface for bidirectional power flow single phase and three phase
Unit II MULTILEVEL INVERTER 9
Features of Multilevel inverter-Multilevel concept – Principle of operation and Features of: diode clamped, flying
capacitor, cascade type multilevel inverters - Comparison of multilevel inverters - application of multilevel inverters
Unit III ISOLATED DC-DC CONVERTERS 9
Need for isolated DC-DC converter- Working principle and Derivation of output voltage for: Fly back converter,
Forward converter, Push pull converter, half bridge converter and Full bridge converter
Unit IV MODERN DC-DC CONVERTERS 9
CUK converter –SEPIC converter-Multi output boost converter-L-Type ZCS Resonant converter-M-type ZCS Resonant
converter-Zero voltage resonant converter
Unit V DC- DC CONVERTER DYNAMICS 9
Block diagram explanation of closed loop control of DC-DC Converter- Steps involved in state space averaging-
Derivation of Transfer function of Ideal buck, boost converter using state space averaging- Converter Non Idealities
Text Book:
1. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland, William P. Robbins, “Power Electronics - Converters, Applications and Design”,
Wiley India, 3rd Edition, 2018.
2. Muhammad H.Rashid, “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Pearson Publication, 4th Edition,
2017
Reference Book:
1. Robert W. Erickson, Dragan Maksimovic, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer Science & Business
Media, 2nd edition 2001.
PAGE 98
19EEC18 SWITCHED MODE POWER SUPPLY DESIGN L T P C

Course Objective:
• To provide an in depth knowledge about modeling, analysis and Design of switched mode power converters.
• To analyze and design switch mode power electronic converters for various applications
Course Outcome:
• Design of magnetic components (i.e., inductor and transformer) in a converter,
• Analyze the Steady-state analysis of switched mode power supply
• Obtain the Equivalent circuit Model for a switching power supply
• Analyze the steady state Performance of soft switching converters
• Describe the various current control switched mode power converter
Unit I INTRODUCTION
Reactive Elements in Power Electronic Systems - Design of inductor - Design of transformer - Capacitors for power
electronic applications.
Unit II SWITCHED MODE POWER CONVERTERS
Switched Mode power converters : Buck Converter - Boost Converter - Buck-Boost Converter - Discontinuous Mode
of Operation in dc to dc Converters - Isolated dc to dc Converters: Forward Converter - Push-Pull converter - Fly-
back Converter.
Unit III ANALYSIS OF CONVERTERS
Pulse Width Modulated Converter: Averaged Model of the Converter - Steady State Solution - Small Signal Model of
The Converter - Transfer Functions of the converter - Generalized State Space Model of the Converter - Linear Small
signal Model - Dynamic functions of the Converter.
Unit IV SOFT SWITCHING CONVERTERS
Resonant Load Converters - Principle of Operation - SMPS Using Resonant Circuit - Steady State Modeling of
Resonant SMPS - Resonant Switch Converters - Buck Converter with Zero Current Switching- Conversion Ratio of the
Converter - Boost Converter with Zero Voltage Switching - Resonant Transition Phase Modulated Converters - Boost
Converter with Zero Voltage Switching - Design considerations to achieve ZVS - Resonant Switching Converters with
Active Clamp.- Analysis of Active Clamp ZVS Buck Converter – Steady State Conversion Ratio.
Unit V CURRENT CONTROL OF CONVERTERS
Sub-harmonic Instability in Current Programmed Control - Determination of Duty Ratio for Current Programmed
Control - Power Circuit of UPF Rectifiers - Average Current Mode Control - Resistor Emulator UPF Rectifiers.
Text Book:
1. Robert W. Erickson, Dragan Maksimovic, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer Science & Business
Media, 2nd edition 2001.
Reference Book:
1. S. S. Ang, A. Oliva, “Power Switching Converters”, Marcel Dekker, 2nd ed., 2005
2. H. W. Whittington, B. W. Flynn, D. E. Macpherson, “Switched Mode Power Supplies”, 2nd Ed., John Wiley &
Sons Inc., 1997.
3. A. S. Kislovski, R. Redl, N. Sokal, “Dynamic Analysis of Switching-Mode DC/DC Converters”, Springer, 1994.
4. Y. S. Lee,” Computer Aided Analysis and Design of Switch-Mode Power Supplies”, Marcel Dekker, 1993.
PAGE 99
19EEC19 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN L T P C

Course Objective:
• Different programmable Logic Devices.
• Basic concepts in VHDL programming Language
• Different ways of writing an VHDL program
• Designing and implementing different types of practically used combinational and sequential circuits.
Course Outcome:
• Explain about the architecture of different Programmable Logic devices
• Describe about the basic programming structure of VHDL
• Illustrate about Behavioral and Structural modeling of VHDL
• Describe about sequential modeling of VHDL
• Design and write the VHDL code for any applications
Introduction to Field Programmable devices: SPLD, CPLD and FPGA- Classification of SPLD’s: PLA, PAL and GAL- Logic
implementation using PLA and PAL- Organization of FAGA: Logic Cell Array (LCA), Configurable Logic Blocks (CLB),
Input/output Blocks (IOB) – Programmable Interconnection Points-Introduction to VHDL-Simplified VHDL design
flow.
Unit II VHDL LANGUAGE CONCEPTS-I 9
Libraries and Packages-Signals-Variables- Signals Vs Variables-Entity-Architecture-Generic-Introductory VHDL
Example programs- Data Types Classification: Standard data type, Standard logic data types- Unsigned and signed
data type, Fixed and floating point types, User defied scalar types, User defied Array types
Unit III VHDL LANGUAGE CONCEPTS-II 9
Operators and Attributes-Concurrent code: WHEN, SELECT and GENERATE statement-Implementing Arithmetic
circuits with operators- Simple programs using concurrent control Sequential control: Process, IF statement, WAIT
statement, LOOP statement, CASE statement- CASE Vs SELECT- Simple programs using Sequential control
Unit IV SYSTEM LEVEL VHDL 9
Packages and component- Configuration- Block – Functions- Procedure-Overloading- Behavioral, Dataflow and
Structural modeling of digital circuits
Unit V VHDL DESIGN EXAMPLES 9
VHDL design of State Machines: Vending Machine Controller-Zero-to-nine counter-Design Examples: Ramp Wave
Generation and Pulse Generation for DC-DC converter
Text Book:
1. Volnei A. Pedroni, “Circuit Design and Simulation with VHDL”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, Second
Edition, 2011.
2. Charles H. Roth and Lizy Kurian Jhon, “Digital Systems Design Using VHDL”, Cengage Learning India Private
Limited, Second Edition, 2008.
3. Sudhakar Yalamanchili, “Introductory VHDL From Simulation to Synthesis”, Pearson, 2012
Reference Book:
1. Jayaram Bhasker, “VHDL Primer”, Prentice Hall, Third Edition, 1999.
PAGE 100
19EEC20 ANALYSIS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P C

Course Objective:
• The fundamentals circuits, energy, force and torque of single and multi-excited systems.
• To make the students analyze the steady state and dynamic state operation of a DC machine through
mathematical modeling.
• To provide knowledge on transformation of three phase variables to two phase variables.
• To make the students analyze the steady state and dynamic state operation of three-phase induction machines
& synchronous machines using transformation theory based mathematical modeling.
Course Outcome:
• Calculate energy, force and torque for single and multi-excited systems.
• Analyze the steady state and dynamic state operation of DC machine through mathematical modeling.
• Analyze the theory of transformation of three phase variables to two phase variables.
• Analyze the steady state and dynamic state operation of three-phase induction machines
• Analyze the steady state and dynamic state operation of synchronous machines.
Unit I PRINCIPLES OF ELECTROMECHANICAL ENERGY CONVERSION 9
Principles of Electromechanical Energy Conversion, General expression of stored magnetic energy, co-energy and
force/torque, example using single and doubly excited system.
Unit II DC MACHINES 9
Elementary DC machine and analysis of steady state operation - Voltage and torque equations – dynamic
characteristics of permanent magnet and shunt DC motors – Time domain block diagrams - Solution of dynamic
characteristic by Laplace transformation.
Unit III REFERENCE FRAME THEORY 9
Static and rotating reference frames – Equations of transformation: Change of variables – Stationary circuit variables
transformed to arbitrary reference frame – Commonly used reference frames –Transformation between reference
frames.
Unit IV INDUCTION MACHINES 9
Three phase induction machine – Voltage and torque equations in machine variables and arbitrary reference frame
variables – Analysis of steady state operation – Analysis of dynamic performance for load torque variations.
Unit V SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 9
Three phase synchronous machine - Voltage and torque equations in machine variables and rotor reference frame
variables (Park’s equations) – Analysis of steady state operation - Analysis of dynamic performance for load torque
variations.
Text Book:
1. Paul C.Krause, Oleg Wasyzczuk, Scott S, Sudhoff, “Analysis of Electric Machinery and drive Systems”, John
Wiley, Second Edition, 2010.
2. D.P.Kothari, I.J.Nagrath,” Electrical Machines”, McGraw-Hill, Fifth edition, 2017.
Reference Book:
1. R. Krishnan, ‘Electric Motor & Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2003.
2. A.E, Fitzgerald, Charles Kingsley, Jr, and Stephan D, Umanx, “ Electric Machinery”, McGraw Hill, Sixth Edition,
2002.
3. P S Bimbhra, “Generalized Theory of Electrical Machines”, Khanna Publishers, 2014
PAGE 101
19EEC21 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P C

Course Objective:
• the importance of computer aided design methods.
• the basic electromagnetic field equations and the problem formulation for CAD applications.
• Numerical method as applicable for Electrical Engineering.
• the organization of a typical CAD package.
• finite element method for the design of different Electrical apparatus.
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate the design procedure and need of computer aided design.
• Formulate the mathematical model for various field problem
• Formulate, compute and analyze Electromagnetic Field equations using numerical methods in terms of
mathematical model.
• Demonstrate the different elements of a CAD package.
• Design and analyse the performance of electrical apparatus using Finite Element Method.
Conventional design procedures – Limitations – Need for field analysis based design – Review of Basic principles of
energy conversion – Development of Torque/Force.
Unit II MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION OF FIELD PROBLEMS 9
Electromagnetic Field Equations – Magnetic Vector/Scalar potential – Electrical vector /Scalar potential – Stored
energy in Electric and Magnetic fields – Capacitance – Inductance- Laplace and Poisson’s Equations – Energy
functional.
Unit III PHILOSOPHY OF FEM NUMERICAL METHOD 0
Mathematical models – Differential/Integral equations – Finite Difference method – Finite element method –
Energy minimization – Variational method- 2D field problems – Discretisation – Shape functions – Stiffness matrix –
Solution techniques.
Unit IV CAD PACKAGES 9
Elements of a CAD System –Pre-processing – Modelling – Meshing – Material properties- Boundary Conditions –
Setting up solution – Post processing.
Unit V DESIGN APPLICATIONS 9
Voltage Stress in Insulators – Capacitance calculation – Design of Solenoid Actuator – Inductance and force
calculation – Torque calculation in Switched Reluctance Motor.
Text Book:
1. S.J Salon, ‘Finite Element Analysis of Electrical Machines’, Springer, YesDEE publishers, Indian reprint, 2007.
2. Nicola Bianchi, ‘Electrical Machine Analysis using Finite Elements’, CRC Taylor & Francis, 2005.
Reference Book:
1. Nathan Ida, Joao PA Batos, "Electromagnetics and Calculation of fields", Sprigr Verlage, 1992
2. KJ Binns, PJ Lawrenson, CW Trowbridge. "The analytical and numerical solution of Electric and magnetic fields",
John Wiley & Sons, 1993
3. P.P.Silvester and Ferrari, ‘Finite Elements for Electrical Engineers’, Cambridge University Press, 1983.
4. D.A.Lowther and P.P Silvester, ‘Computer Aided Design in Magnetics’, Springer Verlag, New York, 1986.
5. S.R.H.Hoole, ‘Computer Aided Analysis and Design of Electromagnetic Devices’,
6. Elsevier, New York, 1989.
7. User Manuals of MAGNET, MAXWELL & ANSYS Softwares.
PAGE 102
19EEC22 RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To analyze topology of the stand-alone and grid connected photo-voltaic systems.
• To outline the various forms of wind energy conversion systems.
• To utilize the solar and wind energy for both domestics and industrial applications.
Course Outcome:
• Categorize the renewable energy sources and compute the solar radiation empirically.
• Develop a stand-alone photo voltaic system and implement a maximum power point tracking in the PV system.
• Design a stand-alone PV system to meet the particular load demand.
• Analyze the different configurations of the wind energy conversion systems.
• Outline the need for the hybrid PV system and fuel cell technology.
Classification of energy sources-Features of Renewable energy- Renewable energy scenario in India–Solar Energy:
Sun and Earth-Basic Characteristics of solar radiation- angle of sunrays on solar collector-Estimating Solar Radiation
Empirically
Unit II SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAICS 9
Equivalent circuit of PV Cell- Photovoltaic cell-characteristics: P-V and I-V curve of cell-Impact of Temperature and
Insolation on I-V characteristics-Shading Impacts on I-V characteristics-Bypass diode-Blocking diode- Boost
converter based Maximum power point tracking (MPPT)-MPPT algorithms: P&O and Incremental conductance
algorithm
Unit III PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM DESIGN 9
PV systems classification- Stand-alone PV system configurations-Design of PV-powered DC pump-Design of stand-
alone system with battery and AC or DC load-Hybrid PV systems – Grid connected solar photovoltaic system – Grid
integration issues.
Unit IV WIND ENERGY 9
Origin of Winds: Global and Local Winds- Aerodynamics of Wind turbine-Derivation of Betz’s limit- Power available
in wind-Classification of wind turbine: Horizontal Axis wind turbine and Vertical axis wind turbine- Aerodynamic
Efficiency-Tip Speed-Tip Speed Ratio-Solidity-Blade Count-Power curve of wind turbine - Configurations of wind
energy conversion systems: Type A, Type B, Type C and Type D Configurations- Grid Integration.
Unit V FUEL CELL AND HYBRID RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS 9
Fuel cell – principle of working of phosphoric acid Fuel cell –VI Characteristics of Fuel cell-.Introduction to Hybrid
Renewable Energy System - Need for Hybrid Systems- Range and type of Hybrid systems- Quantitative study of
Diesel-PV and Wind- PV system
Text Book:
1. Chetan Singh Solanki, “Solar Photovoltaics: Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications”, PHI Learning Private
Limited, 2012.
2. Twidell, J.W. and Weir, A., “Renewable Energy Sources”, EFN Spon Ltd., 2005.
3. B.H.Khan, “Non Conventional energy resources”, McGraw-Hill Education,2nd Edition,2009.
4. Sukhatme S P, Nayak J K, “Solar Energy: Principles of Solar Thermal Collection and Storage”, McGraw Hill, 2008.
Reference Book:
1. Kothari D. P &Singal K. C &Ranjan, Rakesh, “Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies”, PHI
Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2013.
2. TasneemAbbasi&AbbasiSa, “Renewable Energy Sources”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2013.
3. Gilbert M. Masters, “Renewable and Efficient Electric Power Systems”, Second Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2013.
4. Rashid .M. H “power electronics Hand book”, Academic press, 2001.
5. www.renewableenergyworld.com/rea/tech/home
6. www.eschooltoday.com/energy/renewable-energy
Extensive Reading:
• Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press, U.K, 1996.
• Veziroglu, T.N., “Alternative Energy Sources”, Vol 5 and 6, McGraw-Hill, 1990.
PAGE 103
19EEC23 FAULT IDENTIFICATION IN ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To impart knowledge on the various technologies for diagnosis of faults in electrical machines.
• To make the students understand signal processing techniques applied to fault detection and diagnosis.
• To impart knowledge on intelligent techniques for fault diagnosis in electrical machines.
Course Outcome:
• Identify the various fault detection methods.
• Identify various faults in Electrical Machines.
• Analyze and monitor the electrical machines.
• Predict the level of fault in the earlier stage itself.
• Apply Artificial Intelligence techniques for fault diagnosis.
Basic Terminologies: Faults, failures, malfunction, reliability, safety, fault tolerance and redundancy.
Knowledge based fault detection methods – Signal based fault detection methods – Process model based fault
detection methods – Fault diagnosis: Classification, Inference methods.
Unit II FAULT IDENTIFICATION 9
Induction Motor Fault Identification: Stator, Bearing, Broken Rotor and Eccentricity faults – Synchronous Motor
Fault: Stator inter turn, Rotor inter turn, Damper winding fault, Bearing and Eccentricity faults – Transformers:
Types of faults in transformer, insulation breakdown, winding breakdown.
Unit III CONDITION MONITORING OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9
Need for Condition monitoring – Performance Monitoring – Vibration Monitoring – Shock pulse Analysis - Current
Analysis (MCSA) – Acoustic Emission Monitoring – Lubricating oil Analysis - Thermography.
Unit IV FAULT PREDICITON 9
Data Driven prediction methods: Principle component Analysis - Model based prediction theory - Case study related
to Model based prediction theory for Induction Motor and Synchronous machines
Unit V AI TECHNIQUES FOR FAULT DIAGNOSIS 9
Individual Intelligent Methods: ANN – Clustering Algorithm: Weighted KNN, Fuzzy C – mean based fault diagnosis,
Hybrid Clustering algorithm – Hybrid Intelligent Fault Diagnosis methods: multiple WKNN combination.
Reference Book:
1. Rolf Isermann “Fault-Diagnosis Applications: Model-Based Condition Monitoring: Actuators, Drives, Machinery,
Plants, Sensors, and Fault-tolerant Systems” Springer Science & Business Media, 2011.
2. Nordin Saad, Muhammad Irfan, Rosdiazli Ibrahim, “Condition Monitoring and Faults Diagnosis of Induction
Motors: Electrical Signature Analysis”, CRC Press, 2018.
3. Hamid A. Toliyat, Subhasis Nandi, Seungdeog Choi, Homayoun Meshgin-Kelk “Electric Machines: Modeling,
Condition Monitoring, and Fault Diagnosis”, First Edition, CRC Press, 2017.
4. L.H. Chiang, E.L. Russell, R.D. Braatz “Fault Detection and Diagnosis in Industrial Systems” Springer Science &
Business Media, 2012.
5. Yaguo Lei, “Intelligent Fault Diagnosis and Remaining Useful Life Prediction of Rotating Machinery”
Butterworth-Heinemann, 2016.
PAGE 104
19EEC31 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL L T P C

Course Objective:
• The concept of system identification and adaptive control
• Black-box approach based system identification
• Batch and recursive identification
• Computer Controlled Systems
• Design concept for adaptive control schemes
Course Outcome:
• explain various system identification techniques and features of adaptive control like STR and MRAC.
• explain the concept of system identification and adaptive control
• explain Black-box approach based system identification
• explain about batch and recursive identification
• explain about computer controlled systems
• design concept for adaptive control schemes
Unit I NON-PARAMETRIC METHODS 9
Non-parametric methods - Transient analysis - frequency analysis - Correlation analysis - Spectral analysis - Input
signal design for identification
Unit II PARAMETRIC METHODS 9
Least squares estimation – Analysis of the least squares estimate - Best linear unbiased estimate – Model
parameterizations - Prediction error methods.
Unit III RECURSIVE IDENTIFICATION METHODS 9
The recursive least square method - Model validation –Model structure determination - Introduction to closed loop
system identification.
Unit IV ADAPTIVE CONTROL SCHEMES 9
Introduction – Auto-tuning of PID controller using relay feedback approach – Types of adaptive control, Gain
scheduling, Model reference adaptive control, Self–tuning controller – Design of gain scheduled adaptive controller
– Applications of gain scheduling.
Unit V MODEL-REFERENCE ADAPTIVE SYSTEM (MRAS) AND SELF-TUNING REGULATOR (STR) 9
STR – Pole placement design – Indirect STR and direct STR – MRAC - MIT rule – Lyapunov theory – Relationship
between MRAC and STR.
Text Book:
1. T. Soderstrom and PetreStoica, “System Identification”, Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd. 1989.
2. Karl J. Astrom and Bjorn Witten mark, “Adaptive Control”, Pearson Education, Second edition, Fifth impression,
2009.
3. Sinha N K, Kuztsa, “Modeling and Identification of Dynamic Systems”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, 1983.
Reference Book:
1. L. Ljung, “System Identification - Theory for the User”, 2nd edition, PTR Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, N.J.,
1999.
2. K. S. Narendra and A. M. Annaswamy, “Stability Adaptive Systems”, Prentice-Hall, 1989.
3. H. K. Khalil, “Nonlinear Systems”, Prentice Hall, 3rd edition, 2002.
4. William S.Levine, “Control Systems-Advanced Methods, the Control Handbook”, CRC Press 2011.
5. S. Sastry and M. Bodson, “Adaptive Control”, Prentice-Hall, 1989
PAGE 105
19EEC24 MICRO GRIDS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To impart knowledge about distributed generation technologies, their interconnection in grid
• To understand relevance of power electronics in DG
• To understand concept of microgrid
Course Outcome:
• Relate the conventional power generation and distributed generation
• Analyze the concept of distributed generation and installation
• Explain the grid integration system with conventional and non-conventional energy sources
• Explicate the concept of AC/DC microgrids
• Analyze power quality issues and control operation of micro grid
Unit I INTRODUCTION
Conventional power generation: advantages and disadvantages, Energy crises, Non - conventional energy (NCE)
resources: review of Solar PV, Wind Energy systems, Fuel Cells, micro-turbines, biomass, and tidal sources.
Unit II DISTRIBUTED GENERATIONS (DG)
Concept of distributed generations, topologies, selection of sources, regulatory standards/ framework, Standards
for interconnecting Distributed resources to electric power systems: IEEE 1547. DG installation classes, security
issues in DG implementations. Energy storage elements: Batteries, ultra-capacitors, flywheels. Captive power plants
Unit III IMPACT OF GRID INTEGRATION
Requirements for grid interconnection, limits on operational parameters,: voltage, frequency, THD, response to grid
abnormal operating conditions, islanding issues. Impact of grid integration with NCE sources on existing power
system: reliability, stability and power quality issues.
Unit IV BASICS OF A MICROGRID
Concept and definition of microgrid, microgrid drivers and benefits, review of sources of microgrids, typical
structure and configuration of a microgrid, AC and DC microgrids, Power Electronics interfaces in DC and AC
microgrids
Unit V CONTROL AND OPERATION OF MICROGRID
Modes of operation and control of microgrid: grid connected and islanded mode, Active and reactive power control,
protection issues, anti-islanding schemes: passive, active and communication based techniques, microgrid
communication infrastructure, Power quality issues in microgrids, regulatory standards, Microgrid economics,
Introduction to smart microgrids.
Text Book:
1. Nikos Hatziargyriou, “Microgrids: Architectures and Control”, December 2013, Wiley-IEEE Press.
2. S. Chowdhury, S.P. Chowdhury and P. Crossley, “Microgrids and Active Distribution Networks”, The Institution
of Engineering and Technology, London, U.K, 2009
Reference Book:
1. Amirnaser Yezdani, and Reza Iravani, “Voltage Source Converters in Power Systems: Modeling, Control and
Applications”, IEEE John Wiley Publications, 2009.
2. DorinNeacsu, “Power Switching Converters: Medium and High Power”, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis, 2006.
3. Chetan Singh Solanki, “Solar Photo Voltaics”, , PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009
4. J.F. Manwell, J.G “Wind Energy Explained, Theory Design and Applications,”. McGowan Wiley publication, 2nd
Edition, 2009.
5. D. D. Hall and R. P. Grover, “Biomass Regenerable Energy”, , John Wiley, New York, 1987.
6. John Twidell and Tony Weir, “Renewable Energy Resources”, Taylor and Francis Publications, Second Edition,
2006.
PAGE 106
19EEC25 GENERATION AND UTILIZATION OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Various methods of electrical power generation
• the working of domestic refrigerators, water coolers and Air-Conditioning Systems and the importance of using
efficient motors
• Principle and design of illumination systems
• Methods of heating and welding
• Electric traction systems and their performance.
Course Outcome:
• Differentiate the methods of electrical power generation
• Explicate the working of domestic refrigerators, water coolers and Air-Conditioning Systems and the
importance of using efficient motors
• Elucidate the working of various electric lamps and design a good lighting scheme
• Expound the various types of electric heating, electric welding and design a heating element
• Address the recent trends in electric traction.
Unit I ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION 9
Conventional methods – thermal, hydro and nuclear based power generation, Non-conventional methods of power
generation – fuel cells – tides – wind – geothermal – solar – bio-mass, Cogeneration, Distributed generation.
Unit II REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 9
Principle of a refrigerator – Vapour Compression System – Mechanical and Electrical circuits – Voltage Regulator –
Water Cooler – Coefficient of Performance – Standard rating – Maintenance and trouble shooting of refrigerators –
Air conditioning system – Types – operation – Mechanical and Electrical circuits – Cooling capacity – Thermo-
electric Refrigeration – Central Air Conditioning System–Smart air conditioning units – EnergyEfficient motors:
Standard motor efficiency, need for efficient motors, Motor life cycle.
Unit III ILLUMINATION 9
Importance of lighting – properties of good lighting scheme – laws of illumination – types of lamps – Filament lamps
– Arc lamps – Fluorescent lamps – Mercury Vapour lamps – Sodium Vapour lamps– CFL, LED lighting and energy
efficient lamps– lighting calculations – basic design of illumination schemes for residential, commercial, street
lighting and sports ground.
Unit IV INDUSTRIAL HEATING AND WELDING 9
Role of electric heating for industrial applications – resistance heating –induction heating – dielectric heating -
electric arc furnaces.
Brief introduction to electric welding – welding generator, welding transformer and their characteristics.
Unit V ELECTRIC TRACTION 9
Merits of electric traction – requirements of electric traction system – supply systems – mechanics of train
movement – Speed Time curve –tractive effort – specific energy consumption – traction motors and control.
Text Book:
1. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy’, New Age International Pvt. Ltd,
Third Edition 2015.
2. B.R. Gupta, ‘Generation of Electrical Energy’, Eurasia Publishing House (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Energy Efficiency in Electric Utilities, BEE Guide Book, 2010
Reference Book:
1. H. Partab, ‘Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy’, DhanpatRai and Co, New Delhi, Third Edition
2014.
2. E. Openshaw Taylor, ‘Utilization of Electrical Energy in SI Units’, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd, Eleventh Edition 2007.
3. J.B. Gupta, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition 2015.
4. G.C.Garg, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.
5. A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, ‘A text Book on Power System Engineering', DhanpatRai and
Co, New Delhi, 2009.
6. N.V.Suryanarayana, ‘Utilisation of Electric Power: Including Electric Drives and Electric Traction’, New Age
International Publishers, Second Edition 2014.
7. Cleaner Production – Energy Efficiency Manual for GERIAP, UNEP, Bangkok prepared by National Productivity
Council.
PAGE 107
19EEC26 RESTRUCTURED POWER SYSTEM L T P C

Course Objective:
• To enable the students understand the operation of restructured power system
• To understand the issues related to Restructuring
• To know about the technical challenges in restructuring
Course Outcome:
• Elucidate the concept of Deregulation, different entities
• Explain the concept of market structures and bidding
• Explain the transmission pricing issues and Ancillary services
• Explain the Ancillary servicesmanagement
• Address the technical challenges in Restructuring
Unit I DEREGULATION OF ELECTRIC SUPPLY INDUSTRY 9
Introduction about deregulation – Structure of restructured electric utility – Different entities – Deregulation
situation around the world (Qualitative treatment) – Benefits from competitive electricity market – After effects of
deregulation. Role of Load Managers
Unit II POWER SYSTEM OPERATION IN COMPETITIVE ENVIRONMENT 9
Role of ISO – Comparison of two different market structures – Operational planning activities of ISO – ISO in
bilateral markets – Operational planning activities of GENCO – GENCO in pool and bilateral markets – Market
participation issues – Competitive bidding
Unit III TRANSMISSION OPEN ACCESS AND PRICING ISSUES 9
Power wheeling – Types of transmission services in open access – Cost components in transmission – Pricing of
power transactions – Pricing mechanisms in various countries.
Unit IV ANCILLARY SERVICES MANAGEMENT 9
General description of some ancillary services – Ancillary service management in various countries – Reactive power
as an ancillary service – Synchronous generators as ancillary service providers
Unit V TECHNICAL CHALLENGES AND AVAILABILITY BASED TARIFF 9
Total Transfer Capability – Limitations - Margins – Available transfer capability (ATC) – Procedure - Methods to
compute ATC – Static and Dynamic ATC –Concept of Congestion Management – Bid, Zonal and Node Congestion
Principles - Generation Rescheduling. Availability based tariff – Necessity – Working Mechanism – Beneficiaries –
Day Scheduling Process – Deviation from Schedule – Unscheduled Interchange Rate – 24*4 block – System Marginal
Rate – Trading Surplus Generation – Applications
Text Book:
1. Kankar Bhattacharya, Math H.J. Bollen and Jaap E. Daalder, “Operation of Restructured Power Systems”, Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 2001.
2. Loi Lei Lai, “Power system Restructuring and Deregulation”, John Wiley sons, 2001.
Reference Book:
1. Shahidehpour.M and Alomoush.M, “Restructuring Electrical Power Systems”, Marcel Decker Inc., 2001.
2. G.Zaccour, “Deregulation of Electric Utilities”, Kluwer Academic Publishers 1998.
3. M.Illic, F.Galiana and L.Fink, “Power Systems Restructuring: Engineering and Economics”, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 2000.
PAGE 108
19EEC27 HIGH VOLTAGE DIRECT CURRENT TRANSMISSION L T P C

Course Objective:
• The basic concepts of HVDC with existing HVDC projects.
• Analysis of HVDC Converters with varying firing angle.
• Various control concepts used in HVDC system control.
• Harmonics and design concepts of filters used in HVDC system.
• Mathematical modeling and simulation of HVDC system.
Course Outcome:
• Address the modern trends and planning of HVDC system.
• Analyze HVDC converter with different operating conditions.
• Explicate various control strategy used in the HVDC system.
• Design AC and DC filter to eliminate Harmonics in the HVDC system
• Model the HVDC systems for Digital Dynamic Simulation.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO HVDC SYSTEM 9
Introduction of DC power transmission technology – Comparison of AC and DC transmission – Application of DC
transmission – Description of DC transmission system –Ground Electrodes for HVDC systems-Planning for HVDC
transmission – Modern trends in DC transmission.
Unit II ANALYSIS OF HVDC CONVERTERS 9
Pulse number – Choice of converter configuration –Analysis of Graetz bridge circuit with and without overlap –
Converter bridge characteristics – Characteristics of a twelve pulse converter – Detailed analysis of line commutated
converters.
Unit III HVDC SYSTEM CONTROL 9
Principles of DC link control– Converter control characteristics(CIA,CEA and CC control) –Power Reversal in a DC link-
VDCOL-Control hierarchy - Firing angle control: IPC & EPC – Tap changer control - Starting and Stopping of HVDC
link.
Unit IV HARMONICS AND FILTERS 9
Introduction – Generation of harmonics – Characteristics and Non-Characteristics harmonics – Definition of Wave
Distortion or Ripple - Harmonics Filters – Types – Effect of Network Impedance on Filtering - Design of AC filters –
Types of AC filters – Single Tuned Passive filters – Minimum Cost Tuned Filters – Design of High Pass Damped Filter-
Design of DC filters –- PLC/RI noise filters.
Unit V MODELLING AND SIMULATION OF HVDC SYSTEMS 9
Simulation: Introduction to system simulation – Philosophy and tools – HVDC Simulator– Parity Simulator – Digital
Dynamic Simulation - Modeling of HVDC systems for digital dynamic simulation - Graph Theoretic Analysis –
Transient Simulation of DC and AC networks.
Text Book:
1. Padiyar K.R., , “HVDC Power Transmission Systems”, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2017.
2. Kakshaish S., Kamaraju V., “HVDC Transmission”, McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. J.Arrillaga, “High Voltage Direct Current Transmission”, Peter Pregrinus, London 1983.
2. Erich Uhlmann, “Power Transmission by Direct Current”, BS Publications, 2004.
3. Sood V.K., “HVDC and FACTS controllers – Applications of Static Converters in Power System”, Kluwer Academic
Publisher,April 2004.
4. Rao S., “EHV AC and HVDC Transmission Engineering and Practice,” Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1990.
5. Kundur P., “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw-Hill, 1993.
6. Kimbark E.W., “Direct Current Transmission” John Wiley & Sons
PAGE 109
19EEC29 POWER SYSTEM TRANSIENTS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basic concepts related to generation of switching transients.
• Laplace transform methods for handling transients.
• Impacts of voltage transients due to switching.
• Principles of propagation of voltage and current waves along power lines
Course Outcome:
• Explain the causes of transients and their effects on power system.
• Demonstrate the basic concepts of switching surges in a system
• Illustrate the impact of voltage transients due to various switching surges
• Develop the theoretical aspects of travelling waves.
• Estimate the transient voltages in integrated power system.
Unit I INTRODUCTION ABOUT ELECTRICAL TRANSIENTS 9
Review and importance of the study of transients – Physical Interpretation of Transients-Circuit characteristics-
causes for transients. Sources of electrical transients-basic mathematical concepts for transient analysis.
RL circuit transient with sine wave excitation - double frequency transients – Different types of power system
transients - effect of transients on power systems – role of the study of transients in system planning.
Unit II BASIC CONCEPTS OF SWITCHING TRANSIENTS 9
Basic simulation of switching –Closing and opening of a switch-Recovery voltage in circuit breaker-Current chopping
in dc systems and ac systems-compound transients-switching surges in capacitive circuits-switching surges in
distributed constant systems.
Unit III TRANSFORMS OF SWITCHING TRANSIENTS 9
Basic transforms of the RLC circuit transients- equivalent circuit for interrupting the resistor current - load switching
and equivalent circuit - waveforms for transient voltage across the load and the switch - normal and abnormal
switching transients. Current suppression - effective equivalent circuit. Capacitance switching - effect of source
regulation - capacitance switching with a restrike, with multiple restrikes Illustration for multiple restriking
transients - ferro resonance
Unit IV WAVE PROPAGATION 9
Wave equation-velocity of travelling waves-Relation between the voltage and current waves-Line of finite length:
Point of discontinuity-Examples of line terminations-Line terminated by surge impedance-open circuited line-short
circuited line- Line terminated by complex impedance- -Multiple reflections –Lattice diagram-Examples of Multiple
reflections.
Unit V TRANSIENTS IN INTEGRATED POWER SYSTEM 9
The short line and kilometric fault - distribution of voltages in a power system -Line dropping and load rejection -
voltage transients on closing and reclosing lines - over voltage induced by faults - switching surges on integrated
system-Qualitative application of EMTP for transient computation.
Text Book:
1. Allan Greenwood, ”Electrical Transients in power systems”, Wiley Interscience, New York,3rd Edition, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Pritindra Chowdhuri, “Electromagnetic transients in power systems”, Prentice Hall India Learning Private
Limited, 2ndedition, 2008.
2. Begamudre R.D., “Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering”, New Academic Science,4thedition, 2011.
3. Mazen Abdel-Salam, Hussein Anis, Ahdab El-Morshedy and Roshdy Radwan, “High Voltage Engineering: Theory
and Practice”, Marcel Dekker, Inc, 2010.
4. Wadhwa C.L., “Power Systems Engineering”, New Age International, 6thedition, 2012.
5. Harold A. Peterson, ‘Transients in Power Systems’, Dover Publications, 1966.
PAGE 110
19ADP01 DATA ANALYTICS IN BIOINFORMATICS L T P C

Offered by AID (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To Exposed to the need for Bioinformatics technologies
• To Data warehousing and datamining techniques in bioinformatics
• To Familiar with the modeling techniques
• To Different Pattern Matching and Visualization techniques
• To Use of microarray analysis on various benchmark datasets
Course Outcome:
• Use the concept of bioinformatics technologies
• Analyse biomedical data using machine learning techniques
• Develop models for biological data
• Apply pattern matching techniques to bioinformatics, protein and genomic data
• Implement micro array technologies for evaluation of biological data
Need for Bioinformatics technologies – Overview of Bioinformatics technologies Structural bioinformatics – Data
format and processing – Secondary resources and applications – Role of Structural bioinformatics – Biological Data
Integration System
Unit II DATAWAREHOUSING AND DATA MINING IN BIOINFORMATICS 9
Bioinformatics data – Data warehousing architecture – data quality – Biomedical data analysis – DNA data analysis –
Protein data analysis – Machine learning – Neural network architecture and applications in bioinformatics
Unit III MODELLING FOR BIOINFORMATICS 9
Hidden Markov modeling for biological data analysis – Sequence identification –Sequence classification – multiple
alignment generation – Comparative modeling –Protein modeling – genomic modeling – Probabilistic modeling –
Bayesian networks – Boolean networks – Molecular modeling – Computer programs for molecular modelling
Unit IV PATTERN MATCHING AND VISUALIZATION 9
Gene regulation – motif recognition – motif detection – strategies for motif detection – Visualization – Fractal
analysis – DNA walk models – one dimension – two dimension – higher dimension – Game representation of
Biological sequences – DNA, Protein, Amino acid sequences
Unit V MICROARRAY ANALYSIS 9
Microarray technology for genome expression study – image analysis for data extraction – preprocessing –
segmentation – gridding – spot extraction – normalization, filtering – cluster analysis – gene network analysis –
Compared Evaluation of Scientific Data Management Systems – Cost Matrix – Evaluation model – Benchmark –
Tradeoffs
Text Book:
1. Yi-Ping Phoebe Chen (Ed), “BioInformatics Technologies”, Springer Verlag, 2007
Reference Book:
1. Bryan Bergeron, “Bio Informatics Computing”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2003
2. Arthur M Lesk, “Introduction to Bioinformatics”, Fourth Edition, Oxford University Press, 2005
Extensive Reading:
• https://towardsdatascience.com/hidden-markov-model-applied-to-biological-sequence-373d2b5a24c
• https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/biochemistry-genetics-and-molecular-biology/bioinformatics
• https://www.ebi.ac.uk/training/online/courses/functional-genomics-ii-common-technologies-and-data-
analysis-methods/microarrays/analysis-of-microarray-data/
PAGE 111
19ADP02 TEXT ANALYTICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To Study about natural language processing
• To Study about text categorization using classification
• To Study about clustering text document
• To Understand about Topic modeling and summarization
Course Outcome:
• Apply natural language processing algorithms for text processing
• Implement classification algorithms for text classification
• Apply clustering algorithms for document grouping
• Perform modeling based on LSI and LDH algorithms
• Perform summarization of text document
Unit I NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING 9
Basic techniques in natural language processing – Tokenization Part-of-Speech tagging – chunking – syntax
parsing named entity recognition – N– gram language model – estimating parameters and smoothing – evaluating
language model; Sequence Labelling – Lexical syntax and Hidden Markov Models
Unit II TEXT CATEGORIZATION 9
Basic supervised text categorization algorithms – Naive Bayes – k Nearest Neighbour (kNN) – Logistic Regression–
Support Vector Machines – Decision Trees
Unit III TEXT CLUSTERING 9
Clustering structure of a corpus of text documents – assigning documents to cluster; Clustering algorithms –
connectivity – based clustering – hierarchical clustering –centroid-based clustering – k– means clustering
Unit IV TOPIC MODELLING 9
Topic modelling basics – Probabilistic Latent Semantic Indexing (pLSI) – Latent Dirichlet Allocation (LDA) – their
variants for different application scenarios – imagine annotation – collaborative filtering – Hierarchical topical
structure modelling
Unit V DOCUMENT SUMMARIZATION AND CASE STUDIES 9
Extraction based document summarization methods; Case study – Social Media and Network analysis – unique
characteristic of social network – inter-connectivity –PageRank algorithm –Case Stud – Sentiment analysis –
sentiment polarity prediction – review mining –aspect identification; Case Study – Text Visualization – Visual
representations of abstract data to reinforce human cognition
Text Book:
1. Charu C. Aggarwal and ChengXiangZhai, “Mining Text Data”, Springer, 2012
Reference Book:
1. DanJurafsky and James H Martin, “Speech and Language Processing”. Pearson Education India, 2000
2. Christopher D. Manning, PrabhakarRaghavan, and HinrichSchuetze, “Introduction to Information Retrieval”,
Cambridge University Press, 2007
Extensive Reading:
• https://monkeylearn.com/blog/what-is-text-analytics/
• https://www.lexalytics.com/technology/text-analytics
• https://www.linguamatics.com/what-text-mining-text-analytics-and-natural-language-processing
PAGE 112
19ADP03 KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION AND REASONING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To Basic concepts of knowledge and its role
• To Representation of knowledge& associated methods for automated reasoning
• To Identifying knowledge-based techniques which are appropriate for specific tasks
• To Representation of knowledge using object oriented and it structural description
• To Design and apply knowledge-based systems
Course Outcome:
• Use the basic concept of KRR and Evaluate how the knowledge can be used to represent
• Design the Rule based system
• Represent the knowledge using Object oriented approach
• Generate the plans using knowledge about actions and assess the trade off between representation and
reasoning
• Apply KRR systems for challenging real-world problems
Unit I KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION 9
The Key Concepts : Knowledge Representation and Reasoning – Why Knowledge Representation and Reasoning –
Role of Logic – First Order Logic: Syntax and Semantics – Pragmatics – Explicit and Implicit Belief – Expressing
Knowledge – Resolution
Unit II REASONING WITH HORN CLAUSE AND PROCEDURAL CONTROL 9
Horn Clauses – SLD Resolution – Computing SLD Derivations – Facts and Rules – Rule Formation and Search Strategy
– Algorithm Design – Specifying Goal Order – Committing to Proof Methods – Controlling Backtracking – Negation as
Failure – Dynamic Databases – Rules in Production Systems
Unit III OBJECT ORIENTED REPRESENTATION AND STRUCTURAL DESCRIPTIONS 9
Objects and Frames – A Basic Frame Formalism – Using frames to Plan – Other uses of frames – Extension to the
frame formalism – Object-Driven Programming with frames – Description and Description Language – Meaning and
Entailment – Computing Entailments – Taxonomies and Classifications – Extensions to the Language – Applications
of Description Logics
Unit IV INHERITANCE AND DEFAULT REASONING 9
Inheritance Networks – Strategies for Defeasible Inheritance – A formal account of Inheritance Networks – Generics
and Universals – Default Reasoning – Monotonicity and Nonmonotonicity – Closed World Reasoning –
Circumscription –Default Logic – Auto epistemic Logic
Unit V ACTIONS AND PLANNING 9
The Situation Calculus – A Simple Solution to the Frame Problem – Complex Actions –Planning – Planning in the
Situation Calculus – STRIPS Representation – Planning as a Reasoning Task – Hierarchical Planning – Conditional
Planning – The Trade off between expressiveness and Tractability
Text Book:
1. Ronald J. Brachman, Hector J. Levesque, “Knowledge Representation and Reasoning”,Morgan Kaufmann, 2004
Reference Book:
1. Deepak Khemani, “A First Course in Artificial Intelligence”, McGraw Hill Education (India), 2013
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.javatpoint.com/knowledge-representation-in-ai
• https://www.edureka.co/blog/knowledge-representation-in-ai/
PAGE 113
19ADP04 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE IN FINANCE L T P C

Course Objective:
• To explore the concepts of machine intelligence
• To understand the types of Finance, and Concepts of AI in Finance
• To discuss the neural networks and reinforcement learning
• To learn algorithmic trading and test it in python environment
• To understand the role of AI in finance and its applications
Course Outcome:
• Explore the main concepts of AI and machine learning
• Use financial types, metrics and machine learning techniques in AI
• Apply neural networks in Finance
• Explore algorithmic trading that AI and machine learning techniques can add to various portfolio and risk
management strategies
• Apply the concepts of AI in financial applications
Unit I MACHINE INTELLIGENCE 9
Artificial Intelligence: Algorithms, Neural Networks— Importance of Data. Super Intelligence : Forms of Intelligence
– Paths to Superintelligence – Intelligence Explosion
Unit II FINANCE AND MACHINE LEARNING 9
Normative Finance: Uncertainty and Risk – Expected Utility Theory – Mean – Variance Portfolio Theory – Capital
Asset Pricing Model – Arbitrage Pricing Theory. Data-Driven Finance: Scientific Method – Financial Econometrics and
Regression – Data Availability, Normative Theories Revisited – Debunking Central Assumptions. Machine Learning.
AI– First Finance
Unit III STATISTICAL INEFFICIENCIES 9
Dense Neural Networks: Baseline prediction – Normalization – Dropout – Regularization – Bagging – Optimizers
.Recurrent Neural Networks: Second Example – Financial Price Series – Financial Return Series – Financial Features.
Reinforcement Learning : Fundamental Notations – OpenAI Gym - Monte Carlo Agent – Neural Network Agent –
DQL Agent – Simple Finance Gym - Better Finance Gym – FQL Agent
Unit IV ALGORITHMIC TRADING 9
Vectorized Backtesting : Backtesting an SMA-Based Strategy - Backtesting a Daily DNN-Based Strategy – Backtesting
an Intraday DNN-Based Strategy. Risk Management: Trading Bot, Vectorized Backtesting Event-Based Backtesting –
Assessing Risk – Backtesting Risk Measures. Execution and Deployment : Oando Account – Data Retrieval – Order
Execution – Trading Bot
Unit V OUTLOOK 9
AI-Based Competition: AI and Finance – Lack of Standardization – Education and Training Fight for Resources –
Market Impact – Competitive Scenarios – Risks – Regulation and Oversight. Financial Singularity
Text Book:
1. Yves Hilpisch,“Artificial Intelligence in Finance – A Python-Based Guide”, O’Reilly Media, Inc. First Edition, 2020
Reference Book:
1. Oliver Wyman,"Artificial Intelligence Applications in Financial Services”,Marsh & McLennan, First Edition, 2019
Extensive Reading:
• https://rb.gy/9d2bu7
• https://www.coursera.org/learn/ai-for-everyone
• https://www.henryharvin.com/ai-in-finance-course
PAGE 114
19ADP05 ETHICS AND VALUES IN INTELLIGENT COMPUTING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand, identify, and apply different ethical philosophies, frameworks, and methodologies
• To identify and interpret the codes of professional conduct relating to the disciplines of computer science and
software engineering
• To analyse the local and global impact of computing on individuals, organizations, and society
• To understand and apply the concepts and principles of moral thinking to problems relating to computing and
digital technologies
• To learn the professional, ethical, legal, security, social issues and responsibilities
Course Outcome:
• Identify the ethical issues in information technology
• Apply privacy related laws and regulation to enlighten the legal constraints
• Identify the legalities to avoid plagiarism and intellectual property related crimes
• Apply the code of ethics for software development
• Exhibit ethics while working as teams in IT organizations
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ETHICS 9
Ethics in Business World – Ethics in Information Technology – Ethics for IT Workers and IT users – Computer and
Internet Crime – Information Technology Security Incidents – Implementing Trustworthy Computing
Unit II PRIVACY 9
Privacy Protection and the Law – Key Privacy and Anonymity issues – Identity Theft – Electronic Discovery –
Consumer Profiling – Treating Consumer Data Responsibility – Workplace Monitoring – Advanced Surveillance
TechnologyFreedom of Expression–First Amendment rights–Freedom of Expression – Key issues
Unit III INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 9
Definition–Copyrights–Copyright Term–Eligible works–Software copyright protection – PRO–IP–GATT– WTO and
WTO TRIPS Agreement– WIPO – Digital Millennium Copyright–patents–Software Patents–Cross Licensing
Agreements–Trade Secrets–Key Intellectual Property Issues – Plagiarism – Reverse Engineering – Open Source Code
– Competitive Intelligence – Trademark Infringement – Cyber Squatting
Unit IV SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT 9
Strategies for engineering Quality Software–Software Product Liability–Key issues in software development–Impact
of IT on productivity and quality of life–Social Networking–Business Application– Ethical Issues–Online Virtual
worlds
Unit V ETHICS OF IT ORGANIZATIONS 9
Key Ethical Issues for Organizations–Contingent Workers–H–1B Workers–Application Process – outsourcing–
offshore outsourcing–pros and cons–strategies–Whistle Blowing–Protection for whistle blowers and Private sector
Workers Green Computing
Text Book:
1. George_Reynolds,” Ethics in Information Technology”, Cengage Learning, Fourth edition 2014
Reference Book:
1. Michael J. Quinn ,”Ethics for the Information Age”, Pearson Edu, Fifth Edition, 2012
2. Deborah G.Johnson ,”Computer Ethics”,Pearson,4th Edition ,2009
3. Kallman, E.A. & Grillo, J.P,” Ethical Decision Making and Information Technology”, McGraw-Hill, Second
Edition,2006
4. Lee, Wanbil W., Information Security Management: Semi—intelligent Risk-analytic Audit, Verlag Dr Muller,
2010
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.cengage.com/resource_uploads/downloads/1111138214_259148
• http://users.jyu.fi/~riesta/Green_Computing
• https://www.aat.org.uk/about-aat/professional-ethics
• http://ethics.iit.edu/publication/WhistleBlowing_Peterson1
PAGE 115
19ADP06 INFORMATION AND NETWORK SECURITY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To Various types of classical cryptographic algorithms
• To Symmetric and asymmetric key encryption techniques
• To Authentication measures and digital signatures
• To Program based security threats including virus and trojan
• To Various network security threats
Course Outcome:
• Apply concepts of classical cryptographic techniques for applications
• Implement and use advanced cryptographic algorithms such as AES and DES
• Apply various authentication and validation techniques
• Design and detect various attacks in that happen in networks
• Detect vulnerability and apply various measures to secure the devices in network
Attacks Vulnerability – Security Goals –Security Services and mechanisms Conventional Cryptographic Techniques:
Conventional substitution and transposition ciphers –One-time Pad –Block cipher and Stream Cipher –
Steganography
Unit II CRYPTOGRAPHY 9
Key management – Session and Interchange keys – Key exchange and generation – Cryptographic Key
Infrastructure–Storing and Revoking Keys –Digital Signatures –Cipher Techniques – Symmetric and Asymmetric
Cryptographic Techniques: DES –AES –RSA–algorithms
Unit III AUTHENTICATIONANDDIGITALSIGNATURES 9
AuthenticationandDigitalSignatures:UseofCryptographyforauthentication –Secure Hash function –Key
management– Kerberos –Representing Identity – Access Control Mechanisms – Information Flow and Confinement
Problem
Unit IV PROGRAM SECURITY 9
Malicious Logic – Viruses – Worms & Trojans – Vulnerability Analysis –Auditing and Intrusion Detection Systems –
Real Time Systems Intrusion Detection Systems –Signature Based Detection Systems Non-malicious Program errors
– Buffer overflow – Incomplete mediation – Time-of-check to Time-of-use Errors –Viruses –Trapdoors –Salami
attack –Man-in-the-middle attacks –Covert channels
Unit V SECURITY IN NETWORK 9
Threats in networks –Network Security Controls – Architecture – Encryption – Content Integrity – Strong
Authentication–Access Controls –Wireless Security – Honeypots –Traffic flow security –Firewalls–Design and Types
of Firewalls –Personal Firewalls –IDS –Email Security–PGP,S/MIME
Text Book:
1. Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, Charles P. Pfleeger, Jonathan Margulies, “Security in Computing”, Fifth
Edition,PearsonEducation,2015
2. William Stallings, “Cryptography And Network Security Principles And Practice” ,Seventh Edition, Pearson,2017
Reference Book:
1. MattBishop,“ComputerSecurity artandscience”,Addison-Wesley Professional,2003
2. WenboMao , “ModernCryptography:TheoryandPractice”,HP Professional books,2003
3. WilliamStallings , “NetworkSecurityEssentials:ApplicationsandStandards”, Sixth Edition,Pearson,2018
4. MarkMerkow,JamesBreithaupt,“InformationSecurity:PrinciplesandPractices”
,SecondEdition,PearsonEducation,2014
5. Mark S. Merkow,James Breithaupt“Information Security: Principles and Practices”, Pearson,2005
Extensive Reading:
• https://page.math.tu-berlin.de/~kant/teaching/hess/krypto-ws2006/des.htm
• https://www.tutorialspoint.com/cryptography/data_encryption_standard.htm
• https://www.techtarget.com/searchsecurity/definition/Advanced-Encryption-Standard
• https://engineering.purdue.edu/kak/compsec/NewLectures/Lecture8.pdf
• https://www.javatpoint.com/computer-network-security
• https://www.w3schools.com/cybersecurity/index.php
PAGE 116
19BMP01 MEDICAL PHYSICS L T P C

Offered by BME (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To study principles of atomic physics and effects of ionizing and non-ionizing radiation in human body
• To discuss the physics of the senses
• To explore the effects of radiation and interaction of radiation with matter
• To understand various detectors for detecting the presence of ionizing radiation
Course Outcome:
• Explain about atomic physics and non-ionizing radiation, interaction with tissue and its effects.
• Understand the physics of the senses
• Explain the fundamentals of radioactivity and radioactive isotopes
• Summarizes the ionizing radiation interacts with the human body and to quantify its levels
• Illustrates the methods of detecting and recording the ionizing radiation and its interaction with matter
Unit I NON-IONIZING RADIATION AND ITS MEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9
Introduction to atomic physics - emission of light and its frequencies. Tissue as a leaky dielectric - Relaxation
processes, Debye model, Cole–Cole model, Overview of non-ionizing radiation effects-Low Frequency Effects-
Higher frequency effects. Physics of light, Measurement of light and its unit- limits of vision and color vision.
Unit II PHYSICS OF THE SENSES 9
Introduction and objectives - Cutaneous sensation - The chemical senses – Audition –physics of sound, Normal
sound level, theories of hearing, –Vision – physics of light, Intensity of light and limit of vision – Psychophysics
Unit III PRINCIPLES OF RADIOACTIVE NUCLIDES 9
Radioactive Decay Types- Decay Law- Decay series -Units of Radiation Measurement-Attenuation of Gamma-Rays-
Sources of Radioisotopes-Production of Radioisotopes- Natural and Artificial radioactivity- Radionuclide used in
Medicine and Technology. Cyclotron, Reactor produced Radionuclide- nuclide-fission and electron Capture reaction,
radionuclide Generator-Technetium generator.
Unit IV INTERACTION OF RADIATION WITH MATTER 9
Spontaneous Fission- Isomeric Transition-Alpha -Beta -Positron Decay- Interaction of charged particles with matter –
Specific ionization, Linear energy transfer range, Bremsstrahlung, Annihilation, Interaction of X and Gamma
radiation with matter- Photoelectric effect, Compton Scattering , Pair production, Attenuation of Gamma Radiation,
Interaction of neutron with matter and their clinical significance.
Unit V RADIATION DETECTORS 9
Scintillation Detectors - Solid Scintillation Counters - Gamma-Ray Spectrometry-Liquid Scintillation Counters-
Characteristics of Counting Systems-Gamma Well Counters-Thyroid Probe-Principles of Gas-Filled Detectors -
Ionization Chambers-Geiger–Müller Counters
Text Book:
1. B.H Brown, R.H Smallwood, D.C. Barber, P.V Lawford, D.R Hose, "Medical Physics and Biomedical Engineering",
Institute of Physics Publishing1999.
2. Gopal B. Saha, “Physics and Radiobiology of Nuclear Medicine”, 4th Edition, Springer, 2013.
Reference Book:
1. John R Cameran, James G Skotfronick, "Medical Physics", John- Wiley & Sons, 1978
2. W. J. Meredith and J. B. Massey, "Fundamental Physics of Radiology", Varghese Publishing house, 1992.
3. S. Webb, "The Physics of Medical Imaging", Taylor and Francis, 1988.
4. J. P. Woodcock, "Ultrasonics Medical Physics Handbook-1”, Adam Hilger Ltd, Bristol, 2002.
5. Agarwal R.S., "Advanced Biophysics", APH Publishing Corporation, New Delhi, 2005.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.gatech.edu/academics/degrees/masters/medical-physics-online-degree-ms
• https://elearning.iaea.org/m2/course/index.php?categoryid=127
PAGE 117
19BMP02 ENGINEERING OF NANOMATERIALS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To explore the basic concepts and ideas involved in the synthesis of nanomaterials.
• To implement different strategies for synthesizing 0, 1D, 2D nanomaterials.
• To explore the role and application of nanomaterials in various fields.
Course Outcome:
• Classify and understand various top-down and bottom-up approaches for nanomaterial synthesis.
• Understand and discuss various chemical approaches for nanomaterial synthesis.
• Comprehend various physical approaches for nanomaterial synthesis.
• Acquire knowledge about various kinds of nanoporous materials and its characterization.
• Get clear knowledge on the application and implementation of nanomaterials to solve the societal problems.
Unit I BULK SYNTHESIS 9
Top down and bottom up approaches–Mechanical alloying and mechanical ball milling, Mechano chemical process,
Inert gas condensation technique – Arc plasma and laser ablation.
Unit II CHEMICAL APPROACHES 9
Sol gel processing - Solvo thermal, hydrothermal, precipitation, Spray pyrolysis, Electro spraying and spin coating
routes, Self-assembly, self-assembled monolayers (SAMs). Langmuir - Blodgett (LB) films, micro emulsion
polymerization - templated synthesis, pulsed electrochemical deposition.
Unit III PHYSICAL APPROACHES 9
Vapor deposition and different types of epitaxial growth techniques (CVD,MOCVD,MBE,ALD) - pulsed laser
deposition, Magnetron sputtering - lithography :Photo/UV/EB/FIB techniques, Dip pen nanolithography, Etching
process :Dry and Wet etching, micro contact printing.
Unit IV NANOPOROUS MATERIALS 9
Zeolites, mesoporous materials, nano membranes - Carbon nano tubes and graphene - Core shell and hybrid nano
composites.
Unit V APPLICATION OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Overview of nano materials properties and their applications, Molecular Electronics and Nano electronics –
Nanobots - Biological Applications – Quantum Devices – Nanomechanics - Photonics - Nano structures as single
electron transistor – principle and design.
Text Book:
1. W.Gaddand, D.Brenner, S.Lysherski and G.J.Infrate, “Handbook of NanoScience, Engineering and Technology”,
CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2012.
2. G.A. Ozin and A.C. Arsenault, “Nanochemistry: A chemical approach to nanomaterials”, Royal Society of
Chemistry, 2nd Edition, 2009
Reference Book:
1. K. Barriham, D.D. Vvedensky, “Low dimensional semiconductor structures: fundamental and device
applications”, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
2. G. Cao, Y. Wang. “Nanostructures &Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties &Applications”, Imperial College
Press, 2nd Edition, 2011
Extensive Reading:
• https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_mm05/preview
• https://www.manchester.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/2022/12661/meng-materials-science-and-
engineering-with-nanomaterials/
• https://www.edx.org/course/fundamentals-of-nanomaterials-and-nanotechnology
• https://www.classcentral.com/course/swayam-surface-engineering-of-nanomaterials-7914
• https://www.coursera.org/courses?query=nanotechnology
PAGE 118
19BTP01 BIOSENSOR TECHNOLOGY L T P C

Offered by BT (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Basic components of biosensor
• Principle and working of enzymatic sensors.
• Principle and working of immunosensors.
• Principle and working of nucleic acid based sensors.
• Application of nanotechnology in biosensor.
Course Outcome:
• Illustrate and explain the components and characteristics of biosensor.
• Comprehend the transduction systems used in enzymatic Sensors.
• Explain the role of affinity interactions in biosensors.
• Analyze the application of DNA based biosensors.
• Apply nanoconstructs in design of Biosensors.
Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF BIOSENSOR 9
Definition, Historical development, Important aspects of sensors- Biological Recognition elements and Transduction
: Electrochemical, Optical, Piezoelectric and Thermal. Methods of Immobilization of the Biological recognition
elements in Biosensors, Choice of bioreceptor, Choice of transducer. Performance factors: calibration, selectivity,
sensitivity, reproducibility, detection limits and response time.
Unit II ENZYMATIC SENSORS 9
Enzymes with relevance to Biosensors - Transduction Methods in Enzymatic Biosensors - Potentiometric enzyme
electrodes - Amperometric enzyme electrodes - Semiconductor enzyme sensors - Optical enzyme sensors - Thermal
enzyme sensors - Piezoelectric enzyme sensors.
Unit III IMMUNOLOGICAL SENSORS 9
General Principles - Immobilization Methods in Immunosensors - Immunoassay Formats - Membrane
Immunosensors - Piezoelectric Systems - Optical Immunosensors - Biosensors Using Intact Biological Receptors.
Unit IV NUCLEIC ACID BASED BIOSENSORS 9
Nucleic Acid Structure and Properties, Nucleic Acid Analogs, Nucleic Acids as Receptors in Recognition Processes,
Immobilization of Nucleic Acids, Transduction Methods in Nucleic Acids Sensors, DNA Microarrays.
Unit V NANOTECHNOLOGY BASED BIOSENSORS 9
Nanomaterials for Sensing Applications - Signal Amplification Using Nanomaterials for Biosensing - Nanomaterial-
Based Electroanalytical Biosensors for Cancer and Bone Disease - Gold Nanostructure LSPR- based Biosensors for
Biomedical Diagnosis - DNA Sensors Employing Nanomaterials for Diagnostic Applications.
Text Book:
1. Eiggns B. R., “Chemical sensors and Biosensors”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd,1st Edition, 2004.
2. Banica F. G., “Chemical sensors and Biosensors Fundamentals and Applications” John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 1st
Edition, 2012.
3. Scheller F. and Schubert F., “Biosensors”, Elsevier Science Publishers, 1992.
4. Cahn T. M., “Biosensors”, Chapman and Hall, 1st Edition, 1993
Reference Book:
1. Serra P.A., “Biosensors”, Intech Publishers, 1st Edition, 2010.
2. Tuantranont A ., “Applications of Nanomaterials in Sensors and Diagnostics”, Springer, 1st Edition, 2013
PAGE 119
19BTP02 IMAGING IN BIOLOGY AND MEDICINE L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn the basic concepts of radiation and its applications in medical imaging.
• To provide knowledge on Optical microscopy and advancements.
• To know the advanced microscopic techniques.
• To learn about the photomicrography.
• To impart knowledge onmedical imaging techniques and its applications
Course Outcome:
• Learn the basic concepts of radiation and its effect on macro molecules.
• Study about the basics in optical microscopy and photomicrography.
• Know the principle and applications of advanced microscopic techniques.
• learn the basis of recording and reproduction of captured image for analysis.
• Learn the application of radiation in medical imaging.
Imaging: overview - Non-invasive methods of imaging - Electromagnetic spectrum - Radiation types – Initial physical
events – radiolysis of water – effects of radiation on DNA and chromosomes – Whole body response to radiation:
the acute radiation syndrome - radiation induced carcinogenesis.
Unit II OPTICAL MICROSCOPY 9
Microscope: simple and compound microscope - Optical microscopy – Conventional light microscopy: Principle,
applications - Confocal microscopy: principle, applications - Fluorescence, fluorescent molecules and dyes, Gel
documentation, Fluorescent microscopy: principle, applications.
Unit III ADVANCED MICROSCOPIC TECHNIQUES 9
Scanning electron microscopy (SEM): principle, applications - Transmission electron microscopy (TEM): principle,
applications - Scanning probe microscopy - Scanning tunneling microscopy (STM): principle, applications - Atomic
force microscopy (AFM): principle, applications.
Unit IV RECORDING AND REPRODUCTION OF MICROSCOPIC IMAGES 9
Photomicrography: general principles, photomicrographic equipment, the holomicrographic exposure, contrasts in
the negative, colour photomicrography - Some special techniques in photomicrography: microflash,
stereophotomicrography, holography.
Unit V MEDICAL IMAGING 9
Imaging modalities – X ray: principle, applications - Ultrasound: principle, applications - Computed tomography (CT):
principle, applications – Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI): principle, applications – Positron emission tomography
(PET): principle, applications.
Text Book:
1. Jerrold T., Bushberg, J. Anthony S., Edwin M. L., Jr, John M. B., “The Essential Physics of Medical Imaging”, 3rd
Edition, LWW, 2011.
2. Douglas B. Murphy, “Fundamentals of Light Microscopy and Electronic Imaging”, Wiley-Blackwell, 2nd Edition,
2012.
3. Haidekker, M. A., “Medical Imaging Technology”, Springer, 2013.
Reference Book:
1. Prescott M., Harley J, PandKlein D.A., “Microbiology”, McGraw-Hill Education, 9th 2013.
2. Nadine B.S., Andrew W., “Introduction to Medical Imaging: Physics, Engineering and Clinical Applications”,
Cambridge University Press, 1st Edition, 2010.
3. Wilson K., Walker J, “Principles and Techniques of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology”, Cambridge University
Press, 7th Edition, 2010.
PAGE 120
19CEP01 ARCHITECTURE L T P C
Offered by CIV (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• The fundamentals of visual perception and principles.
• The architectural principles in the design of buildings.
• The National traditions and the local regional heritage in architecture, landscape design including the
vernacular tradition.
• The basic principles, appropriate application, performance of building envelope materials and assemblies.
• The technical, practical skills of landscape architecture and their role in investigating complex and innovative
ideas.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the fundamentals of visual perception in two and three dimensional design.
• Utilize the architectural principles in the design of buildings and interior spaces.
• Plan the buildings by considering our Indian climatic conditions.
• Choose the various building material as per the interior design aspects.
• Perform landscape architecture according to the environmental conditions.
Definition - Architecture - classification - influencing factors - region, culture, climate, topography, building
materials, economic and technology - historic structure - prominent world architecture - Anthropometrics - Human
scale - Space requirements in architecture.
Unit II ELEMENTS OF ARCHITECTURE 9
Elements - Mass and space visual emotional effects of geometric forms and their derivatives - sphere, cube,
pyramid, cylinder and cone - aesthetic qualities of architecture: Proportion, scale, balance, symmetry, rhythm and
axis - Contrast in form - Harmony.
Unit III ORIENTATION AND PLANNING OF BUILDINGS 9
General - Factors affecting orientation - Sun, Wind and Rain - Orientation criteria for Indian conditions - Planning
Specifications and standards - Planning of buildings - Green building - Carbon rating - Case studies.
Unit IV INTERIOR ARCHITECTURE 9
General - Decorative materials - Cement bonded boards, Water proof cement - Paint - Industrial glazing and roofing
- Masonry - Plaster and dry wall - Wall surface materials - Effect of colour - Home furnishing - Case studies.
Unit V LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE 9
Principles - Site planning - Design - Styles - Elements and materials - Plant characteristics and design - Landscape
planning - Case studies.
Text Book:
1. Francis D.K.Ching, “Architecture: Form, Space and Order”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2007.
2. Mohmohan, Muthu Shoba G, “Principles of Architecture” Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2009.
Reference Book:
1. Arvind Krishnan,”Climate Responsive Architecture: A Design Handbook for Energy Efficient Buildings”, McGraw
Hill Education, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Leland M. Roth, Amanda C. Roth Clark “Understanding Architecture: Its Elements, History, and Meaning”,
Westview Press, 2013.
3. V.S.Pramar, "Design fundamentals in Architecture", Somaiya Publications Pvt., Ltd, 2003.
4. Simon Unwin, “Analysing Architecture”, Routledge, London, 2003.
5. Edward D.Mills, “Planning and Architects Handbook”, Butterworth London, 1995.
6. Paul Alan Johnson, “The Theory of Architecture: Concepts, Themes & Practices”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.1994.
Extensive Reading:
• https://theconstructor.org/building/green-building-materials/7028/
• https://nptel.ac.in/courses/124/107/124107011/
PAGE 121
19CEP02 BASICS OF CLIMATE SCIENCE AND POLICY L T P C

Course Objective:
• The future scenarios of climate change and likely risks and impacts.
• The earth’s climate system and its components.
• The concept of paleoclimatology
• The impacts and mitigation of climate change
• Clean development mechanism and governance
Course Outcome:
• Apply the concepts of climate science and the role of policy for transitioning to a low carbon energy supply.
• Realize the earth’s change in climate, causes for the climate change and basics of atmosphere
• Apply the paleoclimatology concepts
• Categorize the effect of climate change in national and global level.
• Apply the clean development mechanism to their cities
Unit I CLIMATE SCIENCE 9
Understanding climate science - Fundamentals of meteorology - Atmospheric vertical profile of temperature and
pressure - Microphysical processes in the atmosphere.
Unit II COMPONENTS OF CLIMATE SCIENCE 9
Earth Climate System - Interaction among components of climate system and feedback mechanisms- Atmospheric
thermodynamics - Radiation in the atmosphere - Greenhouse gases and climate forcing.
Unit III PALEOCLIMATOLOGY 9
Introduction of the concept - Measurement techniques. Aerosol science: Introduction and overview of aerosols,
properties of atmospheric aerosols - Carbonaceous aerosols - Radioactive effects of Atmospheric aerosols - Direct
and indirect effects of aerosol particles.
Unit IV IMPACTS AND MITIGATION 9
Time series trends of important climate variables temperature and precipitation - Mitigation of GHGs and
stabilization scenario - Long term and short term mitigation options - Linkages between mitigation and adaptation
of climate change - Mitigation from cross sector perspective and its linkages with sustainable development - Case
study based approach.
Unit V GOVERNANCE AND REGULATORY APPROACHES 9
Market based approaches (CDM, REDD, REDD plus) - Co-operatives arrangements for implementation - National
Action Plan on Climate change (Mitigation specific Missions) - Nationwide policies for alternate energy programme -
Alternate energy crops programmes and afforestation - Regulatory approaches – Macro and Micro level initiatives -
Conventions and Protocols.
Text Book:
1. Banerjee K.K., "Global Warming Database Technology Options in Power and End-use Sectors Using Fossil Fuels",
New Delhi, 2005.
2. Gupta M., "Restricting Greenhouse Gas Emissions: Economic Implications for India", New Delhi, 2006.
Reference Book:
1. Barbara J., Pitts F. and Pitts J.N.,Jr, "Chemistry of the Upper and Lower Atmosphere- Theory, Experiments and
Applications Academic Press", San Diego, 2000.
2. Oliver J.E. and Hidore J.J., "Climatology: An Atmospheric Science", Pearson educationl, 2009.
3. Seinfeld J.H. and Pandis S.N. , "Atmospheric Chemistry and Physics-from Air Pollution to Climate Change", John
Wiley and Sons, Inc, 2016.
4. Hardy J., "Climate Change: Causes, Effects and Solutions", John Wily & Sons, 2003.
5. Nakicenovic N. (Eds), "Integrative Assessment of Mitigation, Impacts and Adaptation to Climate Change",
Austria, 1994.
6. Sathaye J. and Meyers S.D., "Greenhouse Gas Mitigation Assessment: A Guidebook", Springer, 2010.
7. Thomas S.,Jessica C., "Policy Instruments for Environment and Natural Resource Management",Taylor and
Francis Inc, Washington DC, 2011.
8. Tiwari G.N., "Greenhouse Technology for Controlled Environment", New Delhi, 2003.
9. Mahajan.S.P.,Pollution Control in Process Industries, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Company, NewDelhi,2017.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.ncdc.noaa.gov/news/what-have-we-learned-paleoclimatology
• https://cdm.unfccc.int/
PAGE 122
19CEP03 FUNDAMENTALS OF URBAN PLANNING L T P C

Course Objective:
• The fundamentals of city planning.
• The planning policies.
• The types of urban patterns.
• The infrastructure facilities and planning.
• The development control and management.
Course Outcome:
• Plan for the land use and other developments in a city.
• Design the facilities in a city using the knowledge of planning policies.
• Locate the facilities and design the components of the city.
• Plan and manage the inventories of the infrastructure facilities of a proposed city.
• Evolve the required policies for controlling the city development.
Urbanization - Urbanization trends in 20th century & Growth of cities - Land uses - Types - Change of land use - Its
implications on development - Conceptual Foundations of Sustainability in city planning.
Unit II PLANNING POLICIES 9
Planning policies - theories - Standards of planning facilities for the city - Social issues in planning - Various
development plans - Land use planning - Detailed development plan - Master plan - Comprehensive planning - Role
of external funding in planning of cities.
Unit III URBAN DESIGN 9
Urban growth - Urban sprawl - Urban renewal and community development - Urban design - Types of cities -
Sustainable design of cities - Case studies of Chandigarh and Pondicherry - Strategies for smart growth.
Unit IV INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING 9
Need and importance of infrastructure planning - Housing - Transportation planning - Toll ways vs. freeways -
Economic development planning - Case studies of Chennai & Delhi.
Unit V DEVELOPMENT CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT 9
Sustainable development - Environmental and energy planning - Conservation - Development Control Regulations -
Byelaws in Planning - Natural Hazards & Disasters - Management plans Post - Disaster Redevelopment - Case studies
of Chennai & Delhi.
Text Book:
1. Prakash M Apte, “Urban Planning and Development: An Indian Perspective”, Zorba Publishers. 2013.
2. Faia Arthur B. Gallion, “The Urban Pattern City Planning And Design”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2005.
Reference Book:
1. Hall, P., “Cities of tomorrow: - An intellectual history of urban planning and design in the twentieth century”,
Blackwell, London.2001.
2. Ingram, G., A. Carbonell, Y. Hong and A. Flint. “Urban Development Patterns and Smart Growth Policies”,
Cambridge, MA, 2009.
3. Wheeler, S. “Sustainable Urban Development: A Literature Review and Analysis”, UC Berkeley: Institute of
Urban and Regional Development, 1996.
PAGE 123
19CEP04 GEOINFORMATICS L T P C
Course Objective:
• The basics of classification and map preparation.
• The basics of GPS techniques.
• The EMR and its interactions.
• Basic concepts of GIS.
• The process of storage and analysis of various data’s.
Course Outcome:
• Read different types of maps using cartography principles.
• Prepare geospatial database using principles of GPS.
• Map different kinds of resources using principles of remote sensing.
• Identify the methodology for solving a the given engineering problem in geospatial environment
• Analyze data models for different studies.
Unit I GEODESY AND CARTOGRAPHY 9
Modern surveying instruments - Projection systems - Heights and geoids - Local and global datum’s - Map
classification - Topographic and thematic - Map reading.
Unit II GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEMS 9
Global positioning systems - GPS signal and segments - GPS errors - Technical characteristics - Measurement
techniques - Other positioning systems.
Unit III REMOTE SENSING 9
Electromagnetic spectrum - Electromagnetic radiation - Atmospheric interaction - Interaction with matter -
Resolutions - Platforms - IRS - LANDSAT.
Unit IV GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM 9
Introduction - Maps - Map projections - Types of map projections - Map analysis - GIS definition - Basic components
of GIS - standard GIS software’s - Data type - Spatial and non-spatial (attribute) data - Measurement scales - Data
Base Management Systems (DBMS).
Unit V DATA ENTRY, STORAGE AND ANALYSIS 9
Data models - Vector and raster data - Data compression - Data input by digitization and scanning - Attribute data
analysis - Integrated data analysis - Routing through GIS.
Text Book:
1. Satheesh Gopi, “Advanced Surveying”, Pearson Education, 2017.
2. Burrough, P.A. and McDonnell, R.A., “Principles of Geographic Information System”, Oxford University Press,
2016.
Reference Book:
1. Bannister A and Raymond S, “Surveying”, Addison Wesley Longman ltd, England, 2006.
2. Duggal R.K, “Surveying” Vol. I and II, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
3. Anderson, J.M. and Mikhail, E.M., “Surveying: Theory and Practice”, McGraw Hill, 1998
4. Schofield, W. and Breach M., “Engineering Surveying”, 6th Ed., Butterworth-Heineman,2007
5. Bossler, J.D., “Manual of Geospatial Science and Technology”, Taylor and Francis,2002.
6. Kang Tsung Chang., Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd,
New Delhi, 2008.
PAGE 124
19CSP01 FREE OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE L T P C

Offered by CSE (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To learn the context and operation of free and open source software (FOSS) communities and associated
software projects.
• To study about Gawk and Linux portable devices.
• To learn Package management system and source code management system
• To be familiar with Web servers.
• To study cloud platform
Course Outcome:
• Able to select appropriate open source licenses.
• Explore the use of gawk.
• Able to manages the packages using different package managers in linux and able to manage source code using
versioning systems
• Work with Web servers.
• Explore the open source cloud platform
Unit I PHILOSOPHY 9
Introduction to Open sources – Need of open sources- Advantages of open sources – Application of open sources-,
open source operating system – Linux: Introduction- General Overview – Kernel Mode and User Mode –Advanced
concepts – Scheduling – Personalities – Cloning – Signals – Development with Linux – OSS Installation - Four degrees
of freedom - FOSS Licensing Models - FOSS Licenses – GPL- AGPL- LGPL - FDL - Implications – FOSS examples.
Unit II LINUX UTILITIES 9
Gwak - Conceptual Overview - Command-Line Syntax - Patterns and Procedures - Built-in Variables – Operators -
Variable and Array Assignment - User-Defined Functions - Group Listing of awk Functions and Commands –Specific
features - df - env - grep - ifconfig - locate, slocate - ln - netconfig, netcfg - netstat - ping - Snort –traceroute, Linux
for portable Devices, Creation of Bootable CD and USB from command line, Case Studies – Samba, CUPS
Unit III PACKAGE MANAGEMENT AND SOURCE CODE MANAGEMENT 9
Package Management – YUM, RPM, APT. Source Code Management – Usage Models and Systems, Sub Version
Control Systems – Command Line Client, Repository Administration, Examining the repository, Providing Remote
Access, GIT – Overview, Git Repository Format, Git Commit, Creating and Sharing a New Repository, Git Command
Line Client
Unit IV WEBSERVER AND DEVELOPMENT PLATFORMS 9
Apache HTTP Server and its flavors – Lighttpd - Tornado HTTP static File Server - WAMP server, MySQL, PHP,
PYTHON - PERL as development platform.
Unit V OPEN SOURCE CLOUD 9
Introduction to Cloud, FOSS Cloud Software Environment, Eucalyptus – History, Overview and goals of Eucalyptus,
Architecture and components, Compatibility with Amazon EC2, Open Stack – History and overview, Characteristics,
Features, Architecture, Components, Open Stack Cloud Operating System
Text Book:
1. RAO M N, Fundamentals of Open source software, PHI New Delhi, 2015
2. Stephen Figgins, Arnold Robbins, Ellen Siever, Robert Love, Linux in a Nutshell 6th Edition, O’Reilly, 2009.
Reference Book:
1. 1Rachna Kapur, Mario Briggs, Getting started with open source development, First Edition, IBM corporation,
July 2010
2. B.Mahendran, Understanding FOSS, GNU Developers, 2009
3. Evi Nemeth, Garth Snyder, Trent R. Hein, Linux Administration Handbook, Second Edition, Pearson Education,
2011
Extensive Reading:
• www.bitnami.com
• Philosophy of GNU URL: http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/
• https://fossbazaar.org/content/foss-policies-and-guidelines/
• http://open-source.gbdirect.co.uk/migration/benefit.html
• Introduction to Linux – A Hands on Guide, URL: http://tldp.org/guides.html
• http://rute.2038bug.com/index.html.gz
• Version control system , URL: http://git-scm.com
• SVN version control , URL: http://svnbook.red-bean.com/
PAGE 125
• Case study SAMBA: URL : http://www.samba.org/

• www.cups.org/
• www.rpm.org
PAGE 126
19CSP02 VIRTUAL REALITY AND AUGMENTED REALITY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To introduce virtual reality and input and output devices
• To acquire knowledge on computing architectures and modeling
• To explore VR programming and human factors
• To learn various applications of VR
• To get exposure on augmented reality
Course Outcome:
• Explore different input and output devices used in virtual reality system
• Model the VR system
• Create scene graph using different toolkits
• Apply VR in various fields.
• Apply visualization techniques for AR
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO VIRTUAL REALITY AND INPUT AND OUTPUT DEVICES 9
Introduction: The three I’s of Virtual Reality - A short history of early virtual reality - Early commercial VR technology
- VR becomes an industry - The five classic components of a VR system. Input devices: Three-Dimensional position
trackers - tracker performance parameters - ultrasonic trackers - optical trackers - navigation and manipulation
interfaces - gesture interfaces. Output devices: graphics displays - large-volume displays - sound displays.
Unit II COMPUTING ARCHITECTURES AND MODELING OF A VR SYSTEM 9
Computing architectures for VR: The rendering pipeline - The graphics rendering pipeline - The haptics rendering
pipeline - PC graphics architecture - PC graphics accelerators - Graphics benchmarks - Distributed VR architectures -
Multipipeline synchronization - Colocated rendering pipelines. Modeling: geometric modeling - kinematics modeling
- physical and behavior modeling
Unit III VR PROGRAMMING AND HUMAN FACTORS 9
Toolkits and scene graphs - WorldToolKit - Model geometry and appearance - The WTK scene graph - Sensors and
action functions - WTK networking - Java 3D - Model geometry and appearance - Java 3D scene graph - Sensors and
behaviors - Java 3D networking - WTK and Java 3D performance comparison –Human factors in VR: Methodology
and terminology - user performance studies - VR health and safety issues - VR and society
Unit IV APPLICATIONS OF VR 9
Medical applications of VR - Virtual anatomy - Triage and diagnostic - Surgery - VR in education - VR and the Arts -
Entertainment applications of VR - military VR applications - Army use of VR - VR applications in the Navy - Air force
use of VR - Applications of VR in Robotics - Robot programming - Robot teleoperation
Unit V AUGMENTED REALITY 9
Augmented reality: An overview: Introduction - History - Augmented reality technologies - Computer vision
methods in AR - AR devices - AR interfaces - AR systems. Visualization techniques for augmented reality: data
integration - Depth perception - Augmenting pictorial depth cues - Occlusion handling - Image based X-ray
visualization - Scene manipulation: Rearranging real world objects - Space-distorting visualization – Context driven
visualization.
Text Book:
1. Grigore C. Burdea, Philippe Coiffet, “Virtual reality technology”, Wiley, Second Edition, 2006
2. “Handbook of Augmented Reality”, Borko Furht, Springer, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. Sherman, William R & Craig, Alan B, “Understanding Virtual reality”, Elsevier India Private Limited, Noida, 2008
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.cs.uic.edu/~jbell/Courses/Eng591_F1999/HWGUIDE_NT.PDF
• http://www.iamwire.com/2017/10/19-ways-on-how-to-get-the-most-from-virtual-reality/167724
• https://www.atlantis-press.com/php/download_paper.php?id=5686
• http://www.agocg.ac.uk/reports/virtual/37/37.pdf
PAGE 127
19CSP03 INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn the fundamental concepts of genetic algorithms
• To solve optimization problems using advanced GA operators
• To understand the multi objective optimization concepts
• To learn the significance of evolutionary algorithms
• To study the applications of genetic algorithms
Course Outcome:
• Work with the basics of genetic algorithms
• Solve real world problems using advanced operators of GA
• Work with multi objective optimization problems
• Identify the different evolutionary algorithms for solving problems
• Apply genetic algorithms to solve real-world domain problems
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction - Comparison of Biological and GA terminology – Mutation – Selection – Elitism – Crossover –
Initialization
Unit II ADVANCED OPERATORS OF GA 9
Combinatorial optimization – Constraints - Multicriteria optimization - Hybrid algorithm - Alternative selection and
crossover methods - Meta GAs – Mutation - Parallel Genetic Algorithm
Unit III MULTIOBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION 9
Multi objective optimization problem - Principles of Multi objective optimization problem - Difference with single
objective optimization - Dominance and Pareto optimality - Optimality conditions
Unit IV EVOLUTIONARY ALGORITHMS 9
Difficulties with classical optimization algorithms - Genetic algorithms - Evolution strategies - Evolution
programming - Genetic programming – Multi-model function optimization
Unit V APPLICATIONS OF GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Image registration - Recursive prediction of night light levels - Estimation of the optical parameter of liquid crystals –
Intrusion Detection- Wireless Networks-Feature Selection in Machine learning using GA
Text Book:
1. David A Coley, “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms for Scientists and Engineers”, World Scientific Publishing
Company,1997. (UNIT I and II)
2. Kalyamoy Deb,” Multi objective optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms”, John Wiley & Sons, First Edition,
2003. (UNIT III and IV)
3. S.N. Sivanandam, S.N. Deepa “Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, Springer, 2008. (UNIT V)
Reference Book:
1. Melaine Mitchell “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, First MIT Press paperback edition, 1998.
2. David E. Goldberg “Genetic Algorithms”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2009.
3. Koza, John, Wolfgang Banzhaf, Kumar Chellapilla, Kalyanmoy Deb, Marco Dorigo, David Fogel, Max Garzon,
David Goldberg, Hitoshi Iba, and Rick Riolo(Eds.), "Genetic Programming", Academic Press. Morgan Kaufmann,
USA, 1998.
4. John R.Koza, Forrest H Bennett III, David Andre, Martin A Keane, "Genetic Programming III: Darwinian Invention
and Problem Solving" Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1999.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/~nd/surprise_96/journal/vol1/hmw/article1.html
• http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/
• http://intelligence.worldofcomputing.net/machine-learning/genetic-algorithms.html
• http://epubs.siam.org/doi/abs/10.1137/0202009
• http://study.com/academy/lesson/genetic-algorithms-examples-lesson.html
• https://www.cs.wmich.edu/~elise/courses/cs6800/Genetic-Algorithms.ppt
PAGE 128
19ECP01 NANO ELECTRONICS L T P C

Offered by ECE (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To understand the basics of nano electronics and scaling principles.
• To enhance the knowledge in the field of quantum electron devices.
• To analyze the superconducting devices and photonics.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the basics of nano electronics and the fabrication techniques.
• Realize the working of quantum electronic devices.
• Narrate the working of tunneling devices.
• Design superconducting device for memory applications.
• Analyze sensor and advanced electronic systems for various applications.
Unit I BASICS OF NANOELECTRONICS 9
Basic information theory- Data & bits – Data processing - Capabilities of nano electronics - physical fundamentals of
nano electronics: Moores law, Scaling principles, limits to scaling,– Replacement Technologies - Energy and Heat
dissipation - Parameter spread as Limiting Effect - Limits due to thermal particle motion - Reliability as limiting factor
- Final objectives of integrated chip and systems. Tools for micro and nano fabrication, basics of lithographic
techniques for nano electronics.
Unit II QUANTUM ELECTRON DEVICES 9
Quantum electron devices - from classical to quantum physics: upcoming electronic devices - electrons in
mesoscopic structure - short channel MOS transistor - split gate transistor - electron wave transistor - electron spin
transistor - quantum cellular automate - quantum dot array. Principles of Single Electron Transistor (SET) - SET
circuit design - comparison between FET and SET circuit design.
Unit III TUNNELLING DEVICES 9
Tunnelling element technology - RTD: circuit design based RTD, Nano structured LEDs, photo detectors.
Superconducting devices: Macroscopic characteristics, macroscopic model, super conducting switching devices,
memory cells, flux quantum devices - application of Superconducting devices. Molecular electronics - Nano tubes
and fullerene based switches, elementary circuits
Unit IV SUPER CONDUCTING DEVICES AND PHOTONICS 9
Cooper pairs – Super conducting switching Devices – Cryotron– Josephson Tunnelling Devices – Associative or
Content Addressable Memory – SQUID – Flux Quantum device –LC Gate – Magnetic Flux Quantum – Quantum
computer with Single Flux devices – SFQD – RSFQD – Application of superconducting devices.
Unit V MEMORY DEVICES AND SENSORS 9
Nano ferroelectrics - Ferroelectric random access memory - Fe-RAM circuit design - ferroelectric thin film properties
and integration - calorimetric sensors - electrochemical cells - surface and bulk acoustic devices - gas sensitive FETs -
resistive semiconductor gas sensors -electronic noses - identification of hazardous solvents and gases -
semiconductor sensor array.
Text Book:
1. K. Goser, P. Glosekotter and J. Dienstuhl, “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular
Quantum Devices”, Springer, 2004.
Reference Book:
1. Rainer Waser, ―Nanoelectronics and Information Technology: Advanced Electronic Materials and Novel and
Devices‖, Wiley VchVerlag, Weiheim, 2012.
2. Keith Barnham, DimitriVvedensky, “Low–dimensional semiconductor structures: Fundamentals and device
applications”, Cambridge University Press, 2001.
3. HerveRigneault, Jean–Michel Lourtioz, Claude Delalande, Ariel Levenson,“Nanophotonics”, Wiley–ISTE, 2006.
4. W.R.Fahrner, “Nanotechnology and Nanoelectronics: Materials, Devices and Measurement Techniques”
Springer, 2005.
5. Tai–Ran Hsu, “MEMS & Microsystems Design and Manufacture”, Tata McGraw–Hill, 2007.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.understandingnano.com/nanotechnology-electronics.html
• https://www.mitre.org/sites/default/files/pdf/nano_overview.pdf
• http://www.cein.ucla.edu/new/file_uploads/chapter08.pdf
• http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-701-introduction-to-
nanoelectronics-spring-2010/readings/MIT6_701S10_notes.pdf
PAGE 129
19ECP02 IMAGING MODALITIES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the working principle and artifacts of various Imaging modalities.
• To apply imaging techniques to various applications.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the domain knowledge of X ray imaging modalities to solve various problems.
• Apply the domain knowledge of Magnetic resonance imaging modalities to solve various problems.
• Explore the Ultrasound Imaging and Thermal Imaging applications.
• Analyze the impact of Microwave Imaging and SAR Imaging techniques in various applications.
• Analyze the impact of emerging Optical and Microscopy imaging techniques in various applications.
Unit I X–RAY IMAGING AND COMPUTED TOMOGRAPHY 9
Physics of X–Ray – Attenuation based X–Ray Imaging –X-Ray Detection - Image Quality – X–rays in Diagnostic
imaging –X ray Mammography – Computed tomography systems –Principles –Attenuation Tomography- Biomedical
CT Scanners – Complications of X–Ray Imaging – Diagnostic Applications of X–Ray Imaging
Unit II MAGNETIC RESONANCE IMAGING AND NUCLEAR MEDICINE IMAGING 9
MRI Principles – MR Instrumentation –MRI Pulse sequences – fMRI – Contrast, Spatial Resolution and SNR -
Radioactivity – SPECT – Detectors and Data Acquisition System , Contrast , spatial Resolution and SNR in SPECT
imaging - PET – Detectors and Data Acquisition System , Contrast , spatial Resolution and SNR in PET imaging- Dual
modalities SPECT – CT and PET-CT scanners.
Unit III ULTRASOUND IMAGING AND THERMAL IMAGING 9
Generation and Detection of Ultrasound Waves – Physical and Physiological Principles of Ultrasound – Resolution–
Ultrasound Imaging Modalities – Modes of Representation – Ultrasound Image Artifacts – Three–Dimensional
Ultrasound Image Reconstruction – Applications of Ultrasound Imaging.
Fundamentals of Infrared Thermal Imaging - Basic Properties of IR Imaging Systems - Advanced Methods in IR
Imaging -IR Imaging of Buildings and Infrastructure - Applications – Industry , Medical, Security and surveillance.
Unit IV MICROWAVE IMAGING AND SAR IMAGING 9
Microwave Imaging Apparatus and Systems – Scanning Systems for Microwave Tomography Antennas for
Microwave Imaging – Modulated Scattering Technique, Microwave Camera – Applications of Microwave Imaging –
Civil and Industrial Applications – Medical Applications of Microwave Imaging.
Synthetic Aperture Radar Imaging - Principle- Imaging in Range Direction-SAR Data Model-Properties of SAR Images-
SAR System-Processing of Radar Data - Applications of imaging radar to land use and land cover mapping.
Unit V OPTICAL IMAGING AND MICROSCOPY IMAGING 9
Optical Imaging – Optical Microscopy –Optical Endoscopy –Optical Coherence Tomography, Medical Application.
Scanning Probe Microscopy- Atomic forcemicroscopy (AFM)-Principle, operating modes- Application- – Electron
Microscopy Imaging - Scanning electron microscopy (SEM) –Configuration - Imaging vs. Diffraction -igh Resolution
Imaging and Diffraction Modes - operating parameters-Application- Transmission electron microscopy(TEM)-
Working Principle- Construction and resolution -TEM imaging -Electron Diffraction- Scanning TEM- Application.
Text Book:
1. KavyanNajarian and Robert Splerstor ,“Biomedical signals and Image processing”, 2nd Edition, CRC – Taylor and
Francis, New York, 2012.
2. Atam.P.Dhawan, “Medical Image Analysis”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. MatteoPastorino,” Microwave Imaging”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2010.
2. Michael Vollmer, Klaus–Peter Möllmann,”Infrared Thermal Imaging: Fundamentals, Research and Applications”,
2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
3. Herbert Kaplan,” Practical Applications of Infrared Thermal Sensing and Imaging Equipment”, 3rd Edition, SPIE,
2007.
4. Transmission Electron Microscopy, by David B. Williams and C. Barry Carter (Plenum Press, New York, 1996)
ISBN: 0-306-45247-2
5. Milan Sonka, J. Michael Fitzpatrick, “Handbook of Medical Imaging: Medical Image Processing and Analysis
volume”, 2nd Edition, SPIE press, 2009.
6. F. M. Henderson, A. J. Lewis, et all, Principles & Applications of Imaging Radar – Manual of Remote Sensing (3rd
edition, volume 2), John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1998.
7. J. Goldstein, D.E. Newbury, D.C. Joy, C. E. Lyman, P. Echlin, E. Lifshin, L. C. Sawyer, J.R. Michael, “ Scanning
Electron Microscopy and X-Ray Microanalysis”, Third Edition, Plenum Press. 2003.
PAGE 130
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.sbirc.ed.ac.uk/research/imageanalysis.html
• http://www.siemens.com/press
PAGE 131
19ECP03 CONSUMER ELECTRONICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To familiarize principles of operation of Audio System and VCR.
• To understand the operating principles of Television.
• To understand the working principles and troubleshooting of Home appliances.
Course Outcome:
• Narrate the working principles of operation of audio system.
• Explain the concepts of CD audio and video recordings and playback.
• Narrate the working principles of television.
• Explain the concepts of working principles of miscellaneous electronic devices.
• Explain the concepts of working principles and troubleshoot the home appliances
Unit I MICROPHONES AND LOUDSPEAKERS 9
Microphones, Characteristics of Microphones, types, Electrical, Mechanical and Acoustical Analog - Loudspeakers,
types, Loudspeaker Impedance, Woofers, Tweeters, Multispeaker Systems, Crossover Networks, Impedance
Matching
Unit II RADIO AND AV RECORDING AND PLAYBACK 9
Optical Recording and Reproduction, Disc, Reconstitution of the Audio Signal - Commercial Sound, - AM/FM Tuners,
Video Disc Recording and Playbacks
Unit III TELEVISION 9
Monochrome TV Standards and Systems, Elements of a Television System, the Scanning Process, Scanning Methods
and Aspect Ratio, Monochrome TV Camera, Camera Tubes, Vestigial Sideband Transmission-Colour TV Standards
and Systems, Colour TV Cameras, NTSC, PAL , SECAM, Broadcasting of TV Programs, CCTV – Cable TV – HDTV, LED
TV, LCD TV, plasma TV
Unit IV MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRONIC DEVICES: 9
Mobile Radio Systems, Xerography, Calculators, Digital Clocks, UPS – Inverter, PC, Laptops, iPAD, Digital Camera
Unit V HOME APPLIANCES AND TROUBLESHOOTING PRINCIPLES 9
Microwave Ovens, Washing Machines, Air Conditioners and Refrigerators - Principles of troubleshooting and repair
of home appliances, television, mobile phones
Text Book:
1. S P Bali, "Consumer Electronics", Pearson Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., 2008.
2. B.R. Gupta, “Consumer Electronics“, S K Kataria & Sons Publisher, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. R.M. Reed, M.K. Reed , “The Encyclopaedia of Television, Cable, and Video”, Focal press, 2012.
2. Wayne Tomasi, “Introduction to Data Communication and Networking”, Pearson Education, 2004.
3. R.R.Gulati,” Monochrome and Color Television”, 3rd Edition , New Age International publisher, 2014
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.pssurvival.com/PS/Electronic/Repair/Troubleshooting_And_Repair_Of_Consumer_Electronics_Eq
uipment_2004.pdf
PAGE 132
19ECP04 ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS AND ITS APPLICATIONS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To explore the architecture and learning principles of Neural Networks.
• To develop various hybrid algorithms involved in Neural Networks.
• To provide adequate knowledge of application of Neural Networks in real time systems.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the concept of neural networks in practical applications
• Design, implement and analyze the performance of Back Propagation Neural Network.
• Apply Counter Propagation Network and Self Organizing Map for solving various problems.
• Solve real world problems using Associative and Adaptive Neural Network Techniques
• Implement Neocognitron architecture for practical applications
Unit I NEURAL NETWORKS ARCHITECTURES 9
Neurophysiology – General Processing Element – Perceptron representation – Learning – Linear separability–
Problems with the perceptron training algorithms – Multilayer perceptron Learning rules – Supervised learning –
ADALINE Architecture – LMS learning rule – Applications
Unit II BACK PROPAGATION NETWORK AND SIMULATED ANNEALING 9
Back Propagation Network – operation, generalized delta rule, Training algorithm – updating of output and hidden
layer weights – Practical difficulties and considerations – Application of BPN – Annealing – Boltzmann machine –
Learning – Application
Unit III COUNTER PROPAGATION NETWORK AND SELF ORGANIZING MAP 9
Counter Propagation network concept – Architecture –Training – Practical consideration – Applications-Self
organizing map – learning algorithm, feature map classifier, Applications
Unit IV ASSOCIATIVE MEMORY AND ADAPTIVE RESONANCE THEORY 10
Associative Memory concept – Bi–directional Associative Memory – Hopfield memory – traveling salesman problem
– Architecture of Adaptive Resonance Theory – Pattern matching in ART network.
Unit V NEOCOGNITRON 8
Architecture of Neocognitron– Data processing and performance of architecture of spatio temporal networks for
speech recognition.
Text Book:
1. J.A. Freeman and B.M.Skapura, "Neural Networks, Algorithms Applications and Programming Techniques",
Addison–Wesely, 2003.
2. Laurene V. Fausett “Fundamentals of Neural Networks: Architectures, Algorithms and Applications”, Prentice
Hall, 2013.
Reference Book:
1. Jang J.S.R., Sun C.T and Mizutani E, “Neuro Fuzzy and Soft computing”, Pearson education (Singapore), Reprint
2010.
2. S.Rajasekaran and G.A.VijayalakshmiPai “Neural networks, Fuzzy logics, and Genetic algorithms”, Prentice Hall
of India, 2013.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www–cs–faculty.stanford.edu/.../neural–networks/Applications/index.html
• http://www.softcomputing.net/ann_chapter.pdf
• http://home.thep.lu.se/pub/Preprints/91/lu_tp_91_23.pdf
PAGE 133
19ECP13 MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To discuss different learning techniques.
• To understand various machine learning procedures.
• To learn various algorithms.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the fundamental concepts of machine learning.
• Implement supervised methods of machine learning.
• Apply tree based models for classification and regression
• Apply ensemble learning for the real world applications.
• Employ clustering algorithms
Unit I FOUNDATIONS OF MACHINE LEARNING 9
Types of machine learning: Supervised learning- Unsupervised learning-Reinforcement Learning- Machine Learning
Process-Terminologies: Weight Space, Curse of Dimensionality, Overfitting, Training, Testing, Validation Sets-
Performance Measures: Confusion Matrix, Accuracy Metrics, Receiver Operator Characteristic (ROC) Curve,
Measurement Precision- Model selection-No free lunch theorem- Bias-Variance Tradeoff
Unit II SUPERVISED LEARNING 9
Linear Classification- Probability and Bayes learning - Naive Bayes - Bayesian Network - Perceptron - Perceptron
Learning - Neural Networks – Back propagation- Support Vector Machines.
Unit III REGRESSION AND TREE BASED MODELS 9
Linear Regression - Multivariate Regression- Logistic Regression- Principal Component Regression- Decision Trees,
Regression Trees
Unit IV ENSEMBLE LEARNING 9
Ensemble Methods - Bagging, Committee Machines and Stacking, Boosting - Gradient Boosting, Adaptive Boosting,
Random Forests-Multi-class Classification
Unit V UNSUPERVISED LEARNING 9
Introduction to Clustering- Partitional Clustering - Hierarchical Clustering - Birch Algorithm-CURE Algorithm - Density
based Clustering- Expectation Maximization
Text Book:
1. Stephen Marsland, “Machine Learning - An Algorithmic Perspective” 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2015
2. EthemAlpaydin, "Introduction to Machine Learning", 3rd Edition, MIT Press, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. P. Flach, “Machine Learning: The art and science of algorithms that make sense of data”, Cambridge University
Press, 2012
2. K. P. Murphy, “Machine Learning: A probabilistic perspective”, MIT Press, 2012.
3. C. M. Bishop, “ Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2007
4. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning", McGraw Hill Indian Edition, 2013.
5. Yagang Zhang, “Machine Learning”, InTech, 2010
Extensive Reading:
PAGE 134
19EEP01 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P C

Offered by EEE (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Programming of Virtual Instruments using various programming structures.
• Designing real time application using LabVIEW software and data acquisition
Course Outcome:
• Recognize the importance and parts of Virtual Instrumentation.
• Relate different data types and do basic arithmetic and logic programming
• Use advanced LabVIEW programming structures to develop virtual instruments
• Implement modular programming and data storage in files.
• Acquire real time signal / data using DAQ Hardware in LabVIEW and develop simple applications
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION AND ITS PARTS 9
Introduction to Virtual Instrumentation – Need and Advantages of VI – data flow programming, comparison with
conventional programming, creating VI - Front Panel, Block diagram, Parts of VI- Tools palette – function palette –
Control palette.
Unit II BASIC VI PROGRAMMING 9
Data types – Numeric, Boolean, String, Enum, and TypeDefs. – Basic arithmetic and Math operations, Implementing
VI - Loops – FOR & WHILE loops, Tunneling options, Shift Registers, Feedback node
Unit III ADVANCED VI PROGRAMMING STRUCTURES 9
Control Timing in a VI, Timed loop - Sequence Structure, Local and global variable, Arrays & Clusters – Basic
operations on Array and Cluster, String handling, Case structure, Formula nodes,
Unit IV MODULAR PROGRAMMING AND FILE HANDLING 9
Creating a subVI – editing and saving a subVI, icon and connector pane; Charts & Graphs – Update mode; File read /
write operations – File formats
Unit V DATA ACQUISITION AND APPLICATIONS 9
Basics of Data Acquisition– Digital and analog signal interfacing, sampling, resolution, connecting signal to the
board, Data Acquisition with LabVIEW, DAQmx and DAQ VIs -Resolution of DAQ devices–DAQ interface
requirements, Simulation of a simple second order system, sensor interfacing - temperature data acquisition
system.
Text Book:
1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2010.
2. Robert H. Bishop, “Learning withLabVIEWTM “,by Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, New Jersey
07458, 2015.
3. Sanjay Gupta, Joseph John, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw HillEducation
Private Limited, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. Gary W. Johnson, Richard Jennings , “LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill
publications, 2006.
2. WEB Reference: www.ni.com
PAGE 135
19EEP02 PLC AND INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• Simple logic circuits used in industrial applications
• Various programming methods of PLC
• Timers and Counters
• Functions, Function Blocks and Data Blocks
• Applications in automation industries.
Course Outcome:
• Explicate the Architecture of Industrial Automation and working of Programmable Logic Controllers
• Choose the components of PLC and addressing the memory
• Do simple programs for simple applications using bit logic instructions and timers & counters
• Use Functions and Function Blocks for Industrial Applications programming.
• Diagnose the Hardware faults, Programming Error, and developing simple application.
Unit I PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 9
Evolution of PLC – Sequential and Programmable controllers – Architecture of PLC-PLC Hardware components: I/O
modules, CPU, Memory–PLC Programming devices-Memory allocation and Addressing, PLC Scan Cycle.
Unit II PROGRAMMING PART - I 9
Programming Methods: Ladder logic, Instruction list, Sequential function chart- NO/NC & RLO Concept – Bit Logic
Instructions - Programming timers and counters using ladder logic – math instructions, Program control instructions.
Unit III PROGRAMMING PART - II 9
Symbolic Name - Local Variables – Function and Function Blocks, Instance Data block, Shared Data Block–Single
Instance and Multiple Instance – Analog Signal Processing in PLC – Scaling & Normalising, Program Debugging –
Cross references – Call structure – Assignment list – Dependency Structure and Resources, Error Handling OBs.
Unit IV INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION 9
History of Automation – Architecture of Industrial Automation, Fixed Automation – Programmable Automation –
Flexible Automation, Components of Industrial Automation – Sensors.
Unit V PLCS IN PROCESS AUTOMATION 9
Development of control logic for:Planner machine-Skip hoist control-Automatic control of water pump-Air
compressor-Conveyor system-Battery operated truck-bottle filling system.
Text Book:
1. SIMATIC S7-300 & S7-400 PLC Programming Manual.
2. SIMATIC Programming with STEP 7 Manual.
Reference Book:
1. Frank Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers” McGraw-Hill Education – Fourth Edition, 2010.
2. W. Bolton, “Programmable Logic Controllers” Newnes, Sixth edition 2015.
3. BISWANATH PAUL, “Industrial Electronics and Control Including Programmable Logic Controller”, Prentice-Hall
of India Private Limited – Third Edition, 2014.
4. John W. Webb, Ronald A. Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and Applications” PrenticeHall,
2003.
5. Jon Stenerson, “Programmable Logic Controllers with ControlLogics”, DELMAR Cengage Learning.
PAGE 136
19EEP03 PROCESS CONTROL ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• Dynamics of various processes.
• Effect of various control actions.
• Evaluation criteria and tuning techniques of controllers.
• Concept of multi loop control techniques.
Course Outcome:
• Build the mathematical model of Simple systems
• Select the suitable control methods for a particular process
• Choose the Final control elements for process control
• Develop a simple tuning algorithm for PID controller
• Relate the simple control methods with multi-loop control.
Unit I PROCESS DYNAMICS 9
Need for process control – Mathematical model of Flow, Level, and Thermal processes – Interacting and non-
interacting systems –Continuous and batch processes –Servo and regulatory operations – Heat exchanger.
Unit II CONTROL ACTIONS 9
Characteristic of on-off, proportional, single speed floating, integral and derivative controllers – PI, PD and PID
Control modes –Electronic PID controller – Auto transfer - Reset windup.
Unit III FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS 9
I/P converter – Pneumatic, hydraulic and electric actuators – Valve Positioner – Control Valves – Characteristic of
Control Valves: - Inherent and Installed characteristics.
Unit IV CONTROLLER TUNING 9
PID Tuning – Process reaction curve method – Continuous-cycling method – Damped oscillation method,
Introduction to Auto tuning of PID controllers.
Unit V MULTILOOP CONTROL 9
Methods of process control – Feed-forward control – Ratio control – Cascade control – Inferential control,
Introduction to multivariable control– Model Predictive Control.
Text Book:
1. Myke King, “Process Control: A Practical Approach”, John Wiley & Sons, 2016
2. D. Patranabis, “Principles of Process Control,” Tata McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Bequette, B.W., “Process Control Modeling, Design and Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
2. Stephanopoulos, G., “Chemical Process Control - An Introduction to Theory and Practice”, Prentice Hallof India,
2005
3. Dale E. Seborg, Duncan A. Mellichamp, Thomas F. Edgar, Francis J. Doyle, “Process Dynamics and Control”,
Technology & Engineering – 2010.
4. Sudheer S. Bhagade, Govind Das Nageshwar, “Process Dynamics and Control”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
5. Curtis D. Johnson “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, eighth Edition, Pearson, 2006.
6. Seborg, D.E., Edgar, T.F. and Mellichamp, D.A., “Process Dynamics and Control”, Wiley John andSons, second
Edition, 2003.
PAGE 137
19EEP04 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES L T P C

Course Objective:
• The emerging area of intelligent control and optimization.
• Expert systems, fuzzy logic systems, artificial neural networks and optimization techniques.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the concept of intelligent control, Expert System and their applications.
• Explain the concept of Artificial Neural Networks and their different architectures.
• Explain the concepts of Genetic Algorithm and ant colony optimization.
• Explain the concept of a fuzzy logic controller.
• Apply ANN, genetic algorithm and fuzzy logic for engineering problems.
Approaches to intelligent control, Architecture for intelligent control, Symbolic reasoning system, rule-based
systems, the AI approach, Knowledge representation, Expert systems-Architecture, rule based expert system,
applications.
Unit II ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Concept of Artificial Neural Network and its basic mathematical model – McCulloch-Pitts neuron model – simple
perceptron – Adaline and Madaline – Feed-forward Multilayer Perceptron – Learning and Training the neural
network – Hopfield network – Self-organizing network – Neural Network based controller.
Unit III GENETIC ALGORITHM AND ANT-COLONY OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUE 9
Basic concept of Genetic algorithm and detailed algorithmic steps – Flowchart – GA operators – adjustment of GA
parameters – Concept of ant-colony search technique for solving optimization problems.
Unit IV FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEM 9
Introduction to crisp sets and fuzzy sets – basic fuzzy set operation and approximate reasoning – Introduction to
fuzzy logic modeling and control – Fuzzification – inferencing and defuzzification – Fuzzy knowledge and rule bases-
Fuzzy logic applications.
Unit V APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of Neural Network to engineering problems – GA applications to engineering optimization problems –
Fuzzy modeling and control schemes for non-linear systems.
Text Book:
1. Sivanandam S.N., Deepa S.N., “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2012.
2. K. Sundareswaran, “A Learner's Guide to Fuzzy Logic Systems”, Jaico Publishing House, 2006.
3. Jang J.S.R., Sun C.T. and Mizutani E., “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing: A Computational Approach to Learning
and Machine Intelligence”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. AJacek.M.Zurada, “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.
2. Kosko B., “Neural Networks And Fuzzy Systems”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1994.
3. Klir G.J., Folger T.A., “Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1993.
4. Zimmerman H.J., “Fuzzy set theory-and its Applications”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1994.
5. Padhy N.P., “Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent System, Oxford University Press, 2005.
6. Allain Bonnet, “Artificial Intelligence – Promise and Performance, Prentice Hall International Publisher
PAGE 138
19ITP01 SOCIAL NETWORKING L T P C

Offered by IT (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To understand the Network Structure
• To familiarize with Network Modelling
• To explore various features in Location based Social Networks
• To explore variety of features in Social Networking Site.
• To have in depth idea about Twitter and Github
Course Outcome:
• Perform various computations on the Social Networks
• Find Missing and duplicated information in the networks
• Analyze Location based Social Media
• Analyze the branded Social Networking Page.
• Perform Twitter analysis and Trend Mining in Github
Unit I SOCIAL NETWORK STRUCTURE AND MEASURES 9
Basics of network structure – Representing networks- Basic network structures and properties Subnetworks -
Describing nodes and edges-Describing networks-Tie Strength
Unit II ENTITY RESOLUTION AND LINK PREDICTION 9
Modeling networks- Sampling methods- Egocentric network analysis- Link prediction- Entity resolution-
Incorporating network data-Case Study
Unit III LOCATION-BASED SOCIAL INTERACTION AND ANALYSIS 9
Location technology-Mobile location sharing-Location-based social media analysis-Privacy and location-based social
media-Social sharing and social filtering-Automated recommender systems-Analyzing public-sector social media-
Case study
Unit IV UNCOVERING BRAND ACTIVITY, POPULARITY, AND EMOTIONS 9
Facebook brand page -Project planning -Analysis -Noun phrases -Detecting trends in time series -Uncovering
emotions
Unit V TWITTER ANALYSIS AND TRENDS MINING IN GITHUB 9
Getting the data from Twitter - Sentiment analysis -Customized sentiment analysis -Named entity recognition -
Combining NER and sentiment analysis -Trends Mining on GitHub -Data pull -Data processing -Data analysis
Text Book:
1. Jennifer Golbeck “Analyzing the Social Web “ Morgan Kaufmann; 1 edition 2013
2. Siddhartha Chatterjee, Michal Krystyanczuk “Python Social Media Analytics” Packt publishers, 2017
Reference Book:
1. Charu C. Aggarwal, “Social Network Data Analytics”, Springer, 2011
2. Guandong Xu , Yanchun Zhang and Lin Li, “Web Mining and Social Networking Techniques and applications”,
Springer, first edition, 2011.
3. Peter Mika, “Social networks and the Semantic Web”, Springer, first edition 2007.
4. Borko Furht, “Handbook of Social Network Technologies and Applications”, Springer, first edition, 2010.
5. Dion Goh and Schubert Foo, “Social information retrieval systems: emerging technologies and applications for
searching the Web effectively”, IGI Global snippet, 2008.
6. Max Chevalier, Christine Julien and Chantal Soulé-Dupuy, “Collaborative and social information retrieval and
access: techniques for improved user modelling”, IGI Global snippet, 2009.
7. John G. Breslin, Alexandre Passant and Stefan Decker, “The Social Semantic Web”, Springer, 2009
PAGE 139
19ITP02 DATA SCIENCE USING R L T P C

Course Objective:
• Explore the need of R tool
• Apply various Data manipulation techniques in R to import and export data
• Work on applications, implementing R Analytics to create Business Insights
• Use concepts of object oriented programming in R
• Apply graphics interface and create packages in R
Course Outcome:
• Apply the basics of R programming with its datatypes
• Apply the functional programming and data manipulation statements in R
• Identify packages to implement machine learning techniques in R
• Explore concepts of object oriented programming in R
• Implement graphics and create new packages with R
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO DATA SCIENCE & R 9
Introduction to Data Science – Data Science Lifecycle - Introduction – R environmental setup – Installation – RStudio
– Programming with R – R as a calculator – Dealing with Missing Values – Using R Packages – Expression – Data
Types – Data Structures – Control Structures – Functions – Lazy Evaluation – Recursive Functions – Exercises.
Unit II DATA MANIPULATION & FUNCTIONAL PROGRAMMING 9
Creating a R Markdown – YAML – Markdown language – R Code in Markdown documents – Data Manipulation –
Data Import and Export – Manipulation data with dplyr – Vectorizing Functions – Apply Family – Infix operator –
Replacement Functions – Function with arguments & return – Filter, Map and Reduce.
Unit III MACHINE LEARNING 9
Dealing with large dataset – Sampling – Regression – Linear Regression – Logistic Regression – Evaluating and
Validating Models – Cross Validation – Classification – Decision Trees– Neural Network – Support Vector Machine –
Unsupervised Learning - Clustering - Association Rule Mining
Unit IV CLASS AND OBJECTS 9
Immutable objects and Polymorphic functions – Data structures – Classes Introduction: Why Classes? -
Programming with New Classes - Inheritance and Inter-class Relations - Virtual Classes - Creating and Validating
Objects - Programming with S3 Classes – Class Heirachies - Exercises
Unit V DATA VISUALIZATION AND PACKAGES 9
XY Plot – Graphics Package – ggplot2 - Package concept and tools – Creating an R package – Description –
Namespace – Roxygen – Adding data to Package - Documentation for Packages – Building an R Package
Text Book:
1. Thomas Mailund, “Beginning Data Science in R – Data Analysis, Visualisation and Modelling for the Data
Scientist”, Apress Publication, 2017
2. John Chambers, “Software for Data Analysis: Programming with R “, Springer; 1st ed. 2008. , 2nd printing 2009
edition
Reference Book:
1. Torsten Hothorn, Brian S. Everitt, “ A Handbook of Statistical Analyses Using R “,Chapman and Hall/CRC; 2
edition ,2009
2. Thomas Lumley,” Complex Surveys: A Guide to Analysis Using R”, Wiley Series in survey methodology, 2010
3. Nicholas J. Horton, Ken Kleinman,” Using R and RStudio for Data Management, Statistical Analysis, and
Graphics” , CRC Press, Second edition, 2015
4. John Maindonald, W. John Braun,”Data Analysis and Graphics Using R: An Example-Based Approach”, University
Press, Cambridge, Third edition, 2010
5. John M. Quick,” Statistical Analysis with R”, Packt Publishing , 2010
6. K.G.Srinivasa, G M Siddesh, Chetan Shetty, “Statistical Programming in R”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi,
2017
PAGE 140
19ITP03 FUZZY SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

Offered by IT (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems
• To choose various fuzzy inference systems and approximate reasoning for decision making
• To understand the impact of fuzzy system for group decision making
• To understand how to evaluate the criteria in structured situations
• To learn to hybrid fuzzy with decision making methods
Course Outcome:
• Identify the decision making problems in fuzzy environments
• Identify the suitable FIS for decision making
• Implement fuzzy concepts for multi-person decision making
• Solve complex problems using multi-criteria decision making
• Integrate fuzzy with decision making methods for ranking
Classical and Fuzzy Sets – Operations – Properties – Classical and Fuzzy Relation – Crisp Relations – Fuzzy Relations
– Composition - Max – Min Method - Individual Decision Making in Fuzzy Environments
Unit II DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 9
Features of Membership Function – Fuzzification – Defuzzification – Approximate Reasoning - Fuzzy Rule based
Systems – Mamdani – Sugeno - Fuzzy and Semi Fuzzy Multi Objective Problems
Unit III MULTI-PERSON DECISION MAKING IN FUZZY ENVIRONMENTS 9
Basic Models – Fuzzy Games – Fuzzy Team Theory – Fuzzy Group Decision Making – Fuzzy Mathematical
Programming - Fuzzy Linear and Non Linear Programming – Fuzzy Multi Stage Programming
Unit IV MULTI CRITERIA DECISION MAKING IN STRUCTURED SITUATIONS 9
Fuzzy Multi Criteria Programming – Multi Attribute Decision Making – Fuzzy Outranking – Operators and
Membership functions in Decision Models
Unit V DECISION MAKING WITH FUZZY INFORMATION 9
Fuzzy Synthetic Evaluation – Fuzzy Ordering – Non Transitive Ranking – Preference and Consensus – Multiobjective
Decision Making – Fuzzy Bayesian Decision Method – Decision Making under Fuzzy States and Fuzzy Actions
Text Book:
1. 1. Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2015
2. 2. Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in
Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987
Reference Book:
1. 1.S. N. Sivanandam & S. N. Deepa, “Principles of Soft Computing”, Second Edition, Wiley Publication, 2011.
2. 2.S. Rajasekaran & G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithm: Synthesis and
Applications” Prentice Hall of India ,2004
Extensive Reading:
• 1. www.math.ucdenver.edu/~wlodwick/m4-5779/lecture3fuzzylogic
• 2. https://link.springer.com/chapter/10.1007/978-3-642-58930-0_11
PAGE 141
19ITP04 ANDROID AND IOS APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• Understand system requirements for mobile applications
• Generate suitable design using specific mobile development frameworks
• Generate mobile application design
• Implement the design using specific mobile development frameworks
• Deploy the mobile applications in marketplace for distribution
Course Outcome:
• Describe the requirements for mobile applications
• Design user interface for mobile applications
• Store mobile data of android applications
• Evaluate native capabilities of android applications
• Design iOS applications with tools
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE APPLICATIONS 9
Web Vs mobile App – Cost of Development – Myths - Mobile Applications – Marketing - Mobile User Interface
Design - Effective Use of Screen – Mobile Users - Mobile Information Design - Mobile Platforms - Tools of Mobile
Interface Design
Unit II ANDROID USER INTERFACE DESIGN 9
Android Architecture – Android SDK Tools - Application Components - Intents - Content providers - Broadcast
receivers – Services - User Interface Design - Views - View Groups – Layouts - Event Handling – Listeners – Adapters
– Menus - Action Bars – Notifications - Android Localization
Unit III ANDROID DATA STORAGE 9
Content Providers – Uri - CRUD access –Browser – CallLog – Contacts – Media Store - Data Access and Storage -
Shared Preferences - Storage External - Network Connection - SQLite Databases
Unit IV ANDROID NATIVE CAPABILITIES 9
Camera – Audio - Sensors and Bluetooth - Playing audio/video - Media recording - Sensors - Listening to sensor
readings – Bluetooth - Android Communications – GPS - Working with Location Manager, Working with Google
Maps extensions - Maps via intent - Map Activity - Location based Services - Location Updates - Location Providers -
Selecting a Location Provider - Finding Location
Unit V IOS DESIGN 9
iPhone Craze – iOS Features – iOS Tools - iOS Project – Objective C Basics – Building iOS App – Actions and Outlets –
Delegates - User Interface Elements – Accelerometer – Location Handling - SQLite Database
Text Book:
1. Jeff McWherter and Scott Gowell, "Professional Mobile Application Development", Wrox, 2012
2. Reto Meier, “Professional Android 4 Development”, John Wiley and Sons, 2012
3. David Mark, Jack Nutting, Jeff LaMarche and Frederic Olsson, “Beginning iOS 6 Development: Exploring the iOS
SDK”, Apress, 2013.
Extensive Reading:
• https://developer.android.com
• http://www.androidcentral.com/apps
• https://www.opensesame.com/c/android-app-development-beginners-training-course
PAGE 142
19MEP01 PROPERTIES AND SELECTION OF ENGINEERING MATERIALS L T P C

Offered by MECH (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Selection of appropriate engineering materials and basic parts, including the use of appropriate safety factors
and cost, for specific engineering applications using mechanical properties.
• Selection of materials in engineering design by applying ethical principles, engineering codes of ethics, and
professional responsibilities.
Course Outcome:
• Select the materials in the aspects of failure and cost analysis.
• Understand the static strength of the materials.
• Study the toughness, stiffness and fatigue properties for material selection.
• Identify the correct creep and temperature ranges for the materials for the application.
• Select and optimum use of materials in the industries.
Unit I ISSUES IN MATERIALS SELECTION 9
Introduction- properties of materials- Failure in service– Cost- Space filling - Fabrication route-Surface durability -
Future trends- Motivation for selection - New product development - Improvement of an existing product - Problem
situations and constraints on choice -Cost basis for selection - Cost-effectiveness and value analysis - Analysis of
cost.
Unit II SERVICE FAILURE AND STATIC STRENGTH 9
Selection and design in relation to anticipated service - Causes of failure in service - Mechanisms of failure-
Corrosion - Role of standard specifications- Inspection and quality control - Static strength - strength of metals -
strength of thermoplastics - strength of fibre-reinforced composites - cement and concrete - strength of wood-
Materials selection criteria for static strength.
Unit III TOUGHNESS, STIFFNESS AND FATIGUE 9
Toughness - importance - assessment of toughness -Fracture mechanics - General yielding fracture - Toughness in
polymers and adhesives-Materials selection for toughness.
Stiffness - importance - stiffness of materials- stiffness of sections - Materials selection criteria for stiffness-
Comparison of materials selection criteria.
Fatigue -Micro mechanisms of fatigue in metals - assessment of fatigue resistance - Factors influencing fatigue of
metals -Fatigue of non-metallic materials -Materials selection for fatigue resistance.
Unit IV CREEP, TEMPERATURE AND CORROSION 9
Creep and temperature resistance - evaluation of creep- nature of creep- development of creep-resisting alloys -
service temperatures of engineering materials- selection of materials for creep resistance - Selection for corrosion
resistance - selection of materials for resistance to atmospheric corrosion - selection of materials for resistance to
corrosion in water - selection of materials for chemical plant -Selection of materials for resistance to wear.
Unit V MATERIALS FOR PRODUCTS 9
Relationship between materials selection and materials processing - formalization of selection procedures -
Materials for airframes -Materials for ship structures - Materials for engines and power generation -Materials for
automobile structures -Materials for bearings - Materials for springs.
Text Book:
1. F A A Crane, Justin Furness, “Selection and Use of Engineering Materials” Elsevier Science & Technology Books,
1997.
Reference Book:
1. George E. Dieter, "Mechanical Metallurgy" , Mc Graw Hill , 2017
2. R. E. Smallman and A. H. W. Ngan, "Physical Metallurgy and advanced materials" , Butter worth – Heinemann,
2007
3. Alok Nayar,"Testing of metals “, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2005.
4. R.C. Sharma, "Principles of Heat – treatment of steels", New Age International Publishers, 2018
5. Kenneth G. Budinski and Michael K. Budinski, “Engineering Materials - Properties and Selection”, Pearson, 2009
PAGE 143
19MEP02 INNOVATION AND DESIGN THINKING L T P C

Course Objective:
• Stimulate creativity in themselves and others.
• Incorporate design thinking into analysis of manufacturing situations.
• Apply creative and design thinking to a real-world situation
Course Outcome:
• Be familiar with processes and methods of creative problem solving
• Enhance their creative and innovative thinking skills
• Able to generate concepts and select the promising one.
• Follow modularity concept in deciding Product architecture.
• Able to design a product with Design for Manufacturing Principles
Unit I CREATIVITY 9
Types of Intelligence-Types of Thinking- Pattern Breaking - Critical thinking vs. Creative thinking – Barriers to
Creative thinking –Exercises for Lateral thinking – Six thinking hats
Methods and tools for Directed Creativity – Basic Principles – Tools of Directed Creativity – Tools that prepare the
mind for creative thought – Stimulation of new ideas – Development and Actions.
Processes in creativity ICEDIP – Inspiration, Clarification, Distillation, Perspiration, Evaluation and Incubation.
Case Studies. Brain-twisters and puzzles.
Unit II INNOVATION 9
Invention vs. Innovation. Product Development Strategies related to Innovation-Traits of Innovative people-Types of
Innovation-Need driven innovation-Radical Innovation-Case Studies of technology-push products, Platform
products, Customized products, Quick build products and complex systems.
Social Innovation- Understanding social problems- Human-Centered Design. Sustainable innovation – Technological
Innovation – Innovation in business & Entrepreneurship
Unit III DESIGN THINKING 9
History of Design thinking- Arcturus IV case Study- Empathy- Customer journey mapping- Ethnography-
visualization- double diamond design- journey mapping - customer co-creation- Eight-Dimensional (8D) Approach to
Ideation
Ideation: Brainstorming, Reverse Brainstorming, trigger session, Brain writing, Mind maps, SCAMPER, TRIZ, Bio-
mimicry, Shape mimicry
Unit IV PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9
Plan and establish product specifications. Concept Generation– search externally and internally-Explore
systematically - reflect on the solutions and processes.
Concept Selection - methodology - benefits. Implications - Product change - variety - component standardization -
product performance – manufacturability. Concept Testing Methodologies. Planning for Prototypes.
Unit V PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE & INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9
Implications of Product Architecture - establishing the architecture - creation - clustering - geometric layout
development- Fundamental and incidental interactions – Platform Planning- System level design issues – Secondary
systems -architecture of the chunks - Creating detailed interface specifications-Case studies
Assessing the Need for Industrial Design- The Impact of Industrial Design-The Industrial Design Process Management
of the Industrial Design Process- assessing the quality of industrial design. Case Studies.
Text Book:
1. Karl T.Ulrich and Steven D.Eppinger, “Product Design and Development”, 5th edition Mcgraw Higher Ed.2016.
2. Clayton M. Christensen Michael E. Raynor, “Innovator's Solution: Creating and Sustaining Successful Growth”,
Harvard Business School Press India Limited, 2013.
Reference Book:
1. A. K. Chitale, R. C. Gupta, “Product Design and Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited
6thedition, 2014.
2. Floyd Hurr, “Rousing Creativity: Think New Now”, ISBN 1560525479, Crisp Publications Inc. 1999.
3. Donald A. Norman, “Emotional Design”, Perseus Books Group New York, 2004.
4. John E. Arnold, John Arnold Jr. , Arcturus IV Case Study, Amazon Digital Services LLC, 2017.
Extensive Reading:
• http://design-engine.com/
• http://meche.mit.edu/research/design
• https://www.insead.edu/executive-education/digital-transformation-innovation/innovation-design
PAGE 144
• https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110106124/
PAGE 145
19MEP03 MECHATRONICS L T P C
Course Objective:
• Learn the theoretical and practical aspects of measurement system design.
• Learn the basics of sensor and actuator theory, design, and application.
• Become proficient with using laboratory instrumentation and with building basic circuits.
• Gain experience of designing and constructing basic mechatronic systems, low cost Automation systems.
Course Outcome:
• Develop automation technologies by using the different automation approaches and skills to solve the complex
industrial problems necessary for contemporary engineering practice.
• Select appropriate sensors and actuators based on characteristics, loading effect, reliability and economic
issues.
• Analyse the system models in order to choose the automatic control structures.
• Make a simple programming in a microcontroller and PLC.
• Explain various applications of designing of mechatronics systems
Unit I MECHATRONICS, SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 9
Introduction to Mechatronics Systems – Measurement Systems – Control Systems – Microprocessor based
Controllers. Sensors and Transducers – Performance Terminology – Sensors for Displacement Position and
Proximity; Velocity, Motion, Force, Fluid Pressure, Liquid Flow, Liquid Level, Temperature, Light Sensors – Selection
of Sensors.
Unit II ACTUATION SYSTEMS 9
Pneumatic and Hydraulic Systems – Directional Control Valves – Rotary Actuators. Mechanical Actuation
Systems – Cams – Gear Trains – Ratchet and pawl – Belt and Chain Drives – Bearings. Electrical Actuation Systems –
Mechanical Switches – Solid State Switches – Solenoids – Construction and working principle of DC and AC Motors –
speed control of AC and DC drives, Stepper Motors-switching circuitries for stepper motor – AC & DC Servo motors.
Unit III SYSTEM MODELS AND CONTROLLERS 9
Building blocks of Mechanical, Electrical, Fluid and Thermal Systems, Rotational – Transnational Systems,
Electromechanical Systems – Hydraulic – Mechanical Systems. Continuous and discrete process Controllers –
Control Mode – Two – Step mode – Proportional Mode – Derivative Mode – Integral Mode – PID Controllers –
Digital Controllers – Velocity Control – Adaptive Control – Digital Logic Control – Micro Processors Control.
Unit IV PROGRAMMING LOGIC CONTROLLERS 9
Programmable Logic Controllers – Basic Structure – Input / Output Processing – Programming – Mnemonics –
Timers, Internal relays and counters – Shift Registers – Master and Jump Controls – Data Handling – Analogs Input /
Output – Selection of a PLC.
Unit V DESIGN OF MECHATRONICS SYSTEM 9
Stages in designing Mechatronics Systems – Traditional and Mechatronic Design - Possible Design Solutions. Case
studies of Mechatronics systems- Pick and place Robot- Autonomous mobile robot-Wireless surveillance Balloon -
Automatic car park barrier.
Text Book:
1. W.Bolton, “Mechatronics”, Pearson education, 6th Edition, Indian Reprint, 2016.
Reference Book:
1. Smile.A and Mrad.F, "Mechatronics integrated technologies for intelligent machines", Oxford university press,
2008.
2. Rajput. R.K, A textbook of mechatronics, S. Chand & Co, 2007.
3. Michael B. Histand and David G. Alciatore, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement Systems”,
McGraw-Hill International Editions, 2018.
4. Bradley D. A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and. Loader A.J, “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall, 1993.
5. Dan Necsulesu, “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education Asia, (Indian Reprint) 2002.
6. Lawrence J. Kamm, “Understanding Electro – Mechanical Engineering”, an Introduction to
Mechatronics, Prentice – Hall of India Pvt., Ltd., 2000.
7. Nitaigour Premchand Mahadik, “Mechatronics”, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing Company Ltd., 2003.
Extensive Reading:
• http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php
• http://ebookbrowsee.net/np/nptel-lecture-notes
PAGE 146
19MEP04 METALLURGY OF STEEL L T P C

Course Objective:
• Properties, specifications and applications of steels.
• Appropriate, efficient and effective uses and applications of steels.
Course Outcome:
• Get the idea of metallurgical facts about the steel and its characteristics.
• Get an in-depth idea of the fundamental features of steel making and rolling processes.
• Understand the properties of structural engineering and stainless steel for efficient selection.
• Grades of steel for structural, heat treatable and forming grade steels.
• Application of steels in the view of reliability and component integrity.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO STEEL 9
Introduction to steel – crystal structure and phase formation in steel - Iron Carbide Diagram - importance and
uniqueness of steel - Type of properties of steels - factors influencing the properties of steel - factors influencing the
choice of steels - Fabrication of steels - Influence of microstructures on the properties of steels.
Unit II INFLUENCE OF GRAINSIZE AND INCLUSIONS ON THE PROPERTIES OF STEELS 9
Introduction - Formation of grains and grain boundaries - formation of grains in steels and their structure - the
influence of grain size on mechanical properties of steels - grain size determination and measurement - formation of
inclusions in steel - determination of inclusions types and ratings - Effect of inclusion on the properties of steels.
Unit III STEELMAKING AND ROLLING FOR QUALITY STEEL PRODUCTION 9
Introduction to steelmaking processes for quality steel, salient process features for quality steelmaking - features of
steel making by ladle furnace and vacuum dressing - making clean steels for critical applications -killing of steels,
steel casting routes - steel defects and their causes - the task of steel rolling - Cold rolling of steel.
Unit IV CLASSIFICATION, SPECIFICATION, PROPERTIES AND GRADES OF STEELS 9
Classification of steels- Steel standards and grades - steel designation systems and equivalent grade systems -
Influence of carbon and alloying elements of properties of steels - structural steels: properties and applications,
Engineering Steels: Properties and applications, Stainless steels: Properties and applications.
Unit V SELECTION AND APPLICATION OF STEELS : CASE STUDIES 9
Selection and application of steels: reliability, quality and quality costs, failure modes and mechanisms.
Road map to the selection of steel, Selection of steels for Engineering Structures - Steel for LPG cylinder, Steel for
Automotive body parts and wheel rims - Automotive Axle Shafts - Pivot Pins - Fastening Bolts and Ball Bearings.
Text Book:
1. S.K. Mandal “Steel Metallurgy – Properties, specifications and applications”, McGraw hill. 2014.
Reference Book:
1. Dieter , George E, Mechanical Metallurgy , McGraw Hill, 2017
2. Smallman R.E, Physical Metallurgy and advance materials , Butter worth – Heinemann, 7th Edition, 2011.
3. Nayar, Alok “ Testing of metals “ Tata McGraw Hill, 2011
4. Sharma , Ramesh C, Principles of Heat – treatment of steels : Newage publication, 2018
PAGE 147
19MEP05 SURFACE COATING TECHNOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Various techniques of surface modifications for applications such as engineering components, in which the
substrate / bulk material properties are the primary consideration.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the different types of polymeric binders and polymerization reactions
• Know the role of resins and pigments in surface modifications
• Decide the surface preparation methods suitable for different substrate materials
• Interpret testing & evaluation of metallic coatings
• Apply knowledge on properties offered by different coatings based on the application requirement
Unit I INDRODUCTION TO POLYMERIC BINDERS 9
Classification of polymers – Step-growth polymerization – Chain-growth polymerization – Industrial polymerizations
– co-polymerization - Block and graft co-polymers and co-polymer networks – Ionic polymerization – Poly insertion
- Ring-opening polymerization – Dendrimers – Metathesis polymerization – Group transfer polymerization –
Reaction injection moulding.
Unit II INDUSTRIAL RESINS & PIGMENTS 9
Resins: Alkyds and polyesters – Formaldehyde-based polymers – silicone resins – Epoxy resins – chlorinated rubber
– Polyurethanes – Acrylic resins – Hydrocarbon resins – Fluoro-polymers – Vinyl resins.
Pigments: Inorganic pigments – Organic pigments – Extenders.
Unit III SOLVENT SELECTION AND PIGMENT DISPERSION 9
Solvent selection: Binders solubility – Solvent evaporation – Solvent properties – Formulating methodology.
Pigment dispersion: Theory of pigment dispersion – Dispersion characterization – Formulation of non-aqueous
pigment dispersions – Water-based pigment dispersions.
Unit IV PAINT APPLICATION AND EVALUATION 9
Surface treatments for steel - Surface treatments for aluminium - Surface treatments for polymers and plastics –
Paint applications.
Mechanism of film formation – Factors affecting coating properties – Methods used for film preparations – Barrier
properties of coatings – Mechanical properties of coatings – Optical properties of coatings – Ageing properties of
coatings – Rheological properties of coatings – Adhesion properties of coatings.
Unit V TYPES OF COATINGS 9
Appliance finishes – Automotive finishes – Coil coatings – Can coatings – Marine coatings – Aircraft coatings –
Building coatings – Paper coatings.
Recent coating technologies: Water-borne coatings – Radiation curable coatings – Powder coatings – High-solids
liquid coatings.
Text Book:
1. Swaraj Paul, Surface Coatings: Science and Technology,John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. J. R. Davis, Surface Engineering for Corrosion and Wear Resistance, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis, 2014.
2. Arthur A. Tracton, Coatings Materials and Surface Coatings, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis, 2006.
3. James A. Murphy, Surface Preparation and Finishes for Metals, McGraw-Hill, New York 1971
4. Rose A. Ryntz, Philip V. Yaneff, Coatings of Polymers And Plastics, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis, 2014.
PAGE 148
19MEP06 SOLAR ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES L T P C

Course Objective:
• Application of solar energy technologies in various fields like power generation, air conditioning and
desalination.
• Economic feasibility of solar technology for suitable application.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the basics of solar radiation
• To have knowledge on solar photovoltaic and photochemical engineering.
• Be able to understand the solar collector and its heating application.
• Realize the application of passive solar techniques and solar cooling methods.
• Understand the solar economics and real time application of solar energy.
Unit I SOLAR RADIATION 9
Sun-earth geometric relationship, nature of solar radiation, global, beam and diffuse radiation, hourly, daily and
seasonal variation of solar radiation, estimation of terrestrial solar radiation- measurement of solar radiation, solar
charts - solar radiation data.
Unit II SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC AND PHOTOCHEMICAL APPLICATION 9
Solar PV technology - stationary and concentrated PV - standalone systems - grid connected systems - hybridization,
synchronization and power evacuation - site selection and land requirements - design of solar cells: cell parameters
limits-losses in solar cells – analysis of PV cells-manufacture of solar cells and panels-photo catalytic reaction-solar
reactors.
Unit III SOLAR COLLECTORS AND SOLAR HEATING SYSTEM 9
Flat plate collector-liquid type, air type, glazing-evacuated tube collector-concentrating collector-parabolic trough
collector, Fresnel reflectors & lens. Solar water heating system: natural, forced-solar air heating system –
configuration, collector design, air-preheating-solar industrial process heating: textile and milk processing.
Unit IV SOLAR COOLING AND PASSIVE SOLAR TECHNIQUES 9
Solar space cooling and refrigeration-vapour compression cycle, absorption air-conditioning (NH3-H2O & LiBr- H2O).
Passive space heating-types-fundamental concept and generalized passive design methods, passive space cooling,
controlling solar input, movement of air, evaporative cooling, nocturnal and radiative cooling.
Unit V SOLAR ECONOMICS AND APPLICATION 9
Present worth method to analyse feasibility of project / policy alternatives. Solar stirling power system, solar
distillation, solar still: simple solar still, solar desalination techniques, non-convecting solar ponds, solar disinfection
of water and air, solar desiccant dehumidification system, solar cookers.
Text Book:
1. D.Yogi Goswami,”Principles of solar engineering”,3rd edition, CRC press, 2015.
Reference Book:
1. HP Garg and J Prakash,“Solar Energy: Fundamentals and Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. Suhatme and Nayak, “Solar Energy: Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
3. H P Garg, M Dayal, G Furlan, “Physics and Technology of Solar Energy- Volume I: Solar Thermal Applications”,
Springer, 2007.
4. Edward E. Anderson, “Fundamentals for solar energy conversion”, Addison Wesley Publ. Co, 1983.
5. Anne Grete Hestnes, Robert Hastings, Bjarne Saxhof, “Solar Energy Houses: Strategies, Technologies Examples”,
Earthscan Publications, 1st edition, 2003.
PAGE 149
19UCP01 NANO MATERIALS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS L T P C

Offered by CHE (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Fundamental aspects of nanomaterials
• Various synthetic methods of nanomaterials
• Different characterization techniques used for nanomaterials
• Basic ideas of recent nanomaterials
• Applications of nanomaterials in different fields
Course Outcome:
• Gain knowledge about the fundamentals of nano science
• Synthesize nanomaterials
• Characterize the nanomaterials
• Acquire knowledge on different categories of recent nanomaterials
• Get exposure to the applications of nanomaterials in different fields
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO NANOMATERIALS 9
Background to nano technology - scientific revolutions - basic principles of nano scale materials - Comparison with
bulk materials - Classification confined to one, two and three dimensions - Properties of low dimensional systems -
Fraction of surface atoms, surface area and aspect ratio - Enhanced catalytic, optical and mechanical properties
compared to bulk materials.
Unit II SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Bottom-up Synthesis: Physical vapour deposition, Chemical vapour deposition, Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Chemical
precipitation and co-precipitation, colloidal and sol gel methods, gel combustion – Template methods - Self-
assembly - Top-down Approach: Mechanical Milling, Dry etching and Lithography.
Unit III CHARACTERIZATION OF NANOMATERIALS 9
X-ray diffraction – UV-Vis. Spectroscopy (Ag and Au system)- FTIR Spectroscopy (Metal oxides) - Energy Dispersive X-
ray Analysis – X-ray Photo Electron Spectroscopy - Raman spectroscopy (CNT and Graphene) – Luminescence:
Photoluminescence and Electroluminescence.
Unit IV RECENT NANO MATERIALS 9
Functional materials - Carbon based nanomaterials: Structure and properties of Fullerenes, CNT and Graphene –
Electroactive Polymers –Thermo, Photo and Electro Chromic materials – Luminescent materials: Photoluminescence
and Electroluminescence – Ferro fluid – Superhydrophobic materials – Dendrimers.
Unit V APPLICATIONS OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Display devices: Field emission - Chemical and biological sensors -Solar energy conversion – Catalysis and
Photocatalysis- Smart sunglasses - Molecular sieves – Graphene in water purification – Nano coatings: Corrosion
resistant and Self-cleaning – Drug delivery – Hyper thermia - Swim-suits with sharkskin effect.
Text Book:
1. Charles P. Poole, Jr., Frank J. Owens, “Introduction to Nanotechnology”, John Wiley and Sons Publishers, 2013
Reprint.
2. B.S. Murty, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B.B. Rath, James Murday, Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology,
Springer Science & Business Media, 2013.
3. G. Cao, Nanostructures &Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties & Applications, Imperial College Press, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. Jeremy Ramsden, An Introduction to Nanotechnology, 2nd edition, William Andrew, 2016.
2. Wesley C. Sanders, Basic Principles of Nanotechnology, CRC Press; 1st edition, 2018.
3. Douglas Natelson, Nanostructures and Nanotechnology, Cambridge University Press, 2015.
PAGE 150
19UCP02 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN CHEMICAL SCIENCE L T P C

Offered by CHE (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To impart knowledge on basic concepts of engineering applications in chemical science
• To impart knowledge on programming application development with the help of Chemical Science
Course Outcome:
• Have the basics of ChemDraw application
• Gain the basic knowledge of computer software in chemistry
• Get exposure to the knowledge and applications of numerical methods in chemistry
• Develop the basic application programs for chemical science
• Develop the engineering application programs in chemical science
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO CHEMDRAW 9
Introduction – simple chemical structure – object setting – orbital structure in molecule – TLC plate – template
molecule usage – molecule to journal setting – stereochemistry of isomer molecule – name to structure and
structure to name – predicting 1H NMR shift and 13C NMR shift of molecule – analysis information of a molecule –
ACX number from structure – writing a simple chemical reaction
Unit II COMPUTER SOFTWARE IN CHEMISTRY 9
Introduction – chemical inventory system – Material Safety Data Sheet – electronic handbooks – chemical structure
and information database – Environmental Chemistry – Physical Properties Pro – Molecular Modeling Pro –
Chemoffice – information storage and retrieval – modeling, simulation and optimization
Unit III NUMERICAL METHODS FOR CHEMISTRY 9
Introduction – bisection method – numerical integration – trapezoidal rule – simpson’s 1/3rd rule – computation of
∆S and Cp – differentiation – curve fitting – runge-kutta method – Blakley method of balancing chemical equation
with matrix – monte carlo simulation – application to first order kinetics
Unit IV DEVELOPING PROGRAMS FOR CHEMISTRY 9
C Programming for simple applications in Chemistry: water quality parameters like hardness, dissolved oxygen –
emf of a cell – corrosion rate – combustion of fuel – thermodynamic parameters – binding energy – theoretical yield
– solubility product
Unit V ENGINEERING APPLICATION PROGRAMS IN CHEMISTRY 9
C Programming for simple engineering applications in Chemistry: Calculation of BOD, COD of a waste water sample,
Determination of percentage of elements in an organic compound, Determination of efficiency of solar cell and
solar panel, Determination of energy of electromagnetic radiations (given : Wavelength or frequency), Calculation
of binding energy and half-life period, Calculation of enthalpy change using Clapeyron-Clausius Equation, Calculation
of degree of freedom from component and phase from phase diagram of water, Program to find porosity of
refractory, Calculation of pH using Henderson’s equation, Program to arrange the names of the few metals in their
alphabetical order using sorting method.
Text Book:
1. Ramesh Kumari, Computers and Their Applications to Chemistry, Narosa Publishing House, India, 2011
Reference Book:
1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C, First Edition, Oxford University
Press, 2013
2. K.V. Raman, Computers in Chemistry, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 11th Reprint, 2010
Extensive Reading:
• WEB REFERENCES:
• http://www.cambridgesoft.com/
• https://byjus.com/chemistry-formulas/
• http://www.chemistrylearning.com/writing-c-program/
PAGE 151
19UMP02 INTRODUCTION TO NUMBER THEORY AND CRYPTOGRAPHY L T P C

Offered by MAT (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To acquire knowledge on basic group, ring and number theory.
• To understand about congruence.
• To define and interpret primitive roots and quadratic residues.
• To know about the basic concepts in Cryptography.
• To learn about public key cryptography and digital envelop.
Course Outcome:
• Apply divisibility concept for solving the number theory problems.
• Solve congruence relations problems.
• Apply quadratic residue concept for finding the nature of numbers.
• Know ideas of different ciphers.
• Know algorithm for designing a new public key cryptography and digital signature.
Unit I DIVISIBILITY AND PRIMES 9
Groups, Rings and Finite fields (examples only) – Divisibility - Division algorithm – Greatest common divisors – The
Euclidean algorithm and Continued fractions – Fundamental theorem of arithmetic – Euclid’s theorem and Sieve of
Eratosthenes.
Unit II CONGRUENCES 9
Ring of congruence classes – Linear congruences – Euler phi function – Chinese Remainder theorem – Euler’s and
Fermat’s theorem – Psuedoprimes and Carmichael numbers.
Unit III PRIMITIVE ROOTS AND QUADRATIC RECIPROCITY 9
Polynomials and Primitive roots - Power residue – Quadratic residue – Quadratic reciprocity law – Quadratic
residues to composite moduli.
Unit IV CRYPTOGRAPHIC BASICS AND SYMMETRIC-KEY CIPHERS 9
Definitions and Illustrations – Enciphering and Deciphering transformations - Symmetric-Key Ciphers –
Monoalphabetic and Polyalphabetic Ciphers - Classic Ciphers - Shift Ciphers- Affine Ciphers - The Vigenère Auto key
Polyalphabetic Cipher - Cryptanalysis of the Vigenère Cipher - The Hill Cipher Stream Ciphers - The Vernam Cipher -
Attacks.
Unit V PUBLIC-KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9
The Ideas Behind PKC - PKCs and SKCs - A Comparison - Digital Envelopes and PKCs - Trapdoor One -Way Functions -
RSA - Digital Signatures - The RSA Signature Scheme - ElGamal - ElGamal Signature Scheme.
Text Book:
1. Melvyn B. Nathanson, Elementary Methods in Number Theory, Springer, New York, 2013.
2. R.A.Mollin,” An Introduction to Cryptography”, Chapman & Hall/CRC, Taylor & Francis Group, New York, 2rd
Edition, 2007.
Reference Book:
1. J.A. Buchmann, “Introduction to cryptography”, Springer, Second Edition 2004
2. Neal Koblitz “A Course in Number Theory and Cryptography (Graduate Texts in Mathematics)”, Springer Science
& Business Media, Second edition,2012.
PAGE 152
19UMP06 NUMBER THEORY AND GRAPH THEORY FOR CRYPTOGRAPHY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To acquire knowledge on Number Theory
• To understand about linear Congruence’s
• To understand about solution of higher order congruence
• To introduce the students about basic graph theory
• To know about the basic concepts in Cryptography
Course Outcome:
• Apply proof techniques in basic number theory
• Solve congruence and system of congruence
• Analyze the existence of solution of higher order congruence equation
• Acquire knowledge about basic concepts in graphs and the connectivity in graphs
• Know ideas in public key and symmetric key cryptography
Basic group theory – Rings and finite fields - Division algorithm – Greatest common Divisors – The Euclidean
algorithm and continued fractions – Fundamental theorem of arithmetic – Euclid’s Theorem and Sieve of
Eratosthenes
Unit II CONGRUENCES 9
Ring of congruence classes – Linear congruences – Euler phi function – Chinese Remainder theorem – Euler’s and
Fermat’s theorem – Psuedoprimes and Carmichael numbers
Polynomials and primitive roots – power residue – Quadratic residue – Quadratic reciprocity law – Quadratic
residues to composite moduli
Unit IV INTRODUCTION TO GRAPHS 9
Graphs - degree sequences – Reconstruction problem – Elementary properties of trees - vertex connectivity and
edge connectivity – Hamiltonian and Eulerian graphs (definition and example only), Matchings and independence in
graphs
Unit V CRYPTOGRAPHIC BASICS AND SYMMETRIC-KEY CIPHERS 9
Definitions and Illustrations – Enciphering and Deciphering Transformations - Symmetric-Key Ciphers –
Monoalphabetic and Poly alphabetic Ciphers - Classic Ciphers - Shift Ciphers- Affine Ciphers - The Vigenère Auto key
Polyalphabetic Cipher - Cryptanalysis of the Vigenère Cipher - The Hill Cipher Stream Ciphers - The Vernam Cipher -
Attacks
Text Book:
1. Melvyn B. Nathanson, Elementary Methods in Number Theory, Springer New York, 2013.
2. G. Chartrand and L. Lesniak, Graphs & Digraphs, Chapman & Hall / CRC A CRC press company , USA, 6th Edition
2016.
3. R.A.Mollin,” An Introduction to Cryptography”, Chapman & Hall/CRC Taylor & Francis Group, New York, 2rd
Edition, 2007.
Reference Book:
1. J.A. Buchmann, “Introduction to cryptography”, Springer, Second Edition 2004
2. Neal Koblitz “A Course in Number Theory and Cryptography (Graduate Texts in Mathematics)”, Springer Science
& Business Media, Second edition,2012.
PAGE 153
19ADP07 GEO SPATIAL ANALYTICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To Fundamentals of Geo Spatial technology
• To Designing geographic information science database
• To Familiar with the modeling techniques
• To Learn spatial, raster and terrain analysis
• To Exposed to spatial modeling and estimation
Course Outcome:
• Use the fundamental concepts of Geographic Information Science and Technology
• Design Geo Spatial Database
• Describe the geospatial system and represents various data model.
• Analyse Geospatial data using spatial and raster analysis techniques.
• Create and design principles, including thematic map display, map projections, and cartographic design
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO GIS 9
Introduction – GIS Components – GIS in Organizations – Data Models : Introduction – Common Spatial Data Models
– Raster Data Models – Other Data Models – Data File and Structures - Geodesy – Datums
Unit II DESIGNING GIS DATABASE WITH DIGITAL DATA 9
Projections and Coordinate Systems – Building GIS Database – Digitizing Coordinate capture – Coordinate
Transformation – Output : Maps – Data – Meta Data - Digital Data: Introduction – Global Digital Data – Attribute
Data and Tables
Unit III GEOSPATIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM AND DATA MODEL 9
Global Satellite Navigation System : Introduction – Differential Correction – Optical and Laser Coordinate Surveying
– GNSS Applications – Aerial and Satellite Images : Basic Principles – Aerial Images – Satellite Images – Air born
LiDAR
Unit IV SPATIAL AND RASTER ANALYSIS 9
Introduction – Selection and Classification – Dissolve – Proximity Functions and Buffering – Overlay – Map Algebra –
Local Functions – Neighborhood, Zonal and Global Functions – Terrain Analysis
Unit V SPATIAL MODELING AND ESTIMATION 9
Sampling – Spatial Interpolation Methods –Spatial Prediction –Core Area Mapping–Cartographic Modeling– Saptio–
Temporal Models–Data Standards and Data Quality – GNSS – Datum Modernization–Improved Remote Sensing–
Cloud Based GIS–Open GIS
Text Book:
1. Paul Bolstad, “GIS Fundamentals: A First Text on Geographic Information Systems”, 6th edition, 2019
Reference Book:
1. Robert Haining, “Spatial Data Analysis Theory and Practice”, Cambridge University, 2010
Extensive Reading:
• https://saylordotorg.github.io/text_essentials-of-geographic-information-systems/s12-geospatial-analysis-ii-
raster-.html
• https://www.omnisci.com/learn/geospatial
• https://www.gislounge.com/methods-for-creating-spatial-databases/
PAGE 154
19ADP08 DIGITAL ASSET MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the ways and means of creating digital content
• To learn the methods of storing large digital content
• To understand the content related workflows
• To know the key design issues of Content Management Systems
• To familiarize various security issue of Content Management Systems
Course Outcome:
• Use the concepts of digital assets for encoding media
• Apply different models for storing and retrieval using XML and storage medias
• Identify the appropriate concept for presentation of digital assets
• Apply Content Management Systems for specific application
• Use security policies needed for various Content Management System applications
Introduction to Digital Asset Management – Document and Content Management – Media Management –The Case
for Digital Asset Management – Asset Formats
Unit II SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9
System Components – XML – Cataloguing and Indexing – Search Engines – Databases – Disk storage and Media
Servers – Mass Storage – Storage Management
Unit III CONTENT RELATED WORKFLOWS 9
Content Related Workflows – File Formats – Content Representation and Metadata – Content Description
Standards– Standards for Metadata Transmission and Exchange – Presentation Tier – Application Server
Unit IV CONTENT MANAGEMENT 9
Content Management System Infrastructure – System and Data Integration in CMS – Integration Principle – CMS
Legacy System– Integration of Third Party Systems – CMS and Web Integration – Applications – Future Trends
Unit V DOCUMENT SECURITY AND DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT 9
Document Security and Digital Rights Management – Authentication and trust – Water marking – System
Integration– Project Management – Internationalization – Digital Asset Management Products – Document
Management – Web Content Management – Video Asset Libraries – Applications
Text Book:
1. Boiko, B. “Content Management Bible”, Second Edition, Wiley Publishing, 2005
Reference Book:
1. Austerberry, D,”Digital Asset Management”, Burlington, MA: Focal Press. Second edition, 2013
2. Mauthe, A & Thomas, P. “ Professional Content Management Systems: Handling Digital Media Assets”, John
Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2005
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.stibosystems.com/global/explore–stibo–systems/master–data–management/digital–
assetmanagement.aspx
• http:// www. damguru.com/best–dam–practices–a–digital–asset–management–philosophy.html
• http://www.lac–group.com/digital–asset–management–vs–content–management–vs–knowledge–
management
PAGE 155
19ADP09 EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTING ALGORITHMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To study the concepts of simple evolutionary algorithms
• To understand the concepts of development Systems
• To solve the problems using immune system based algorithms
• To solve the problems using different behavioural systems
• To learn the various evolutionary algorithms based on collective systems and their applications
Course Outcome:
• Apply the operations of Evolutionary systems
• Use the techniques of Development Systems
• Solve problems using Immune Systems
• Identify the various applications for behavioural systems
• Implement solutions to various problems based on Collective systems
Unit I EVOLUTIONARY SYSTEMS 9
Pillars of Evolutionary Theory – Genotype – Artificial Evolution – Genetic Representations – Initial Population –
Fitness Functions – Selection and Reproduction –Genetic Operators – Evolutionary Measures – Types of
Evolutionary Algorithms – Schema Theory – Human – Competitive Evolution – Evolutionary Electronics –Lessons –
Role of Abstraction – Extrinsic and Intrinsic Evolution – Evolutionary Digital Design – Evolutionary Analog Design –
Multiple Objectives and Constraints
Unit II DEVELOPMENTAL SYSTEMS 9
Potential Advantages of a Developmental Representation –Rewriting Systems – Synthesis of Developmental Systems
– Evolution and Development – Defining Artificial Evolutionary Developmental Systems – Evolutionary Rewriting
Systems – Evolutionary Developmental Programs – Evolutionary Developmental Processes
Unit III IMMUNE SYSTEMS 9
Biological Immune Systems Working – Constituents of Biological Immune Systems – Lessons for Artificial Immune
Systems – Algorithms and Applications – Shape Space – Negative Selection Algorithm – Clonal Selection Algorithm –
Examples
Unit IV BEHAVIORAL SYSTEMS 9
Behaviour in Cognitive Science – Behaviour in Artificial Intelligence – Behaviour–Based Robotics –Biological
Inspiration for Robots –Robots as Biological Models – Robot Learning – Evolution of Behavioural Systems – Evolution
and Learning in Behavioural Systems – Evolution and Neural Development in Behavioural Systems – Coevolution of
Body and Control – Toward Self–Reproduction – Simulation and Reality
Unit V COLLECTIVE SYSTEMS 9
Biological Self–Organization – Particle Swarm Optimization – Ant Colony Optimization –Swarm Robotics – Co-
evolutionary Dynamics: Biological Models – Artificial Evolution of Competing – Artificial Evolution of Cooperation
Text Book:
1. Dario Floreano, Claudio Mattiussi, “Bio-Inspired Artificial Intelligence: Theories, Methods, and Technologies”,
The MIT Press, 2008
Reference Book:
1. Alain Petrowski , Sana Ben‐Hamida, “Evolutionary Algorithms”, Wiley Publications ,First Edition, 2017
2. A.E. Eiben , J. E. Smith , “Introduction to Evolutionary Computing” , Springer 2019
3. Xinjie Yu, Mitsuo Gen, “Introduction to Evolutionary Algorithms”, Springer, 2010
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.cse.iitb.ac.in/~pb/cs621-2009/previous-years-other%20things/Evolutionary-Computation-genetic-
algo.ppt
• http://www2.cs.uh.edu/~ceick/ep/Evo-Intro.ppt
• http://web.cecs.pdx.edu/~mperkows/CLASS_574/574-fall-08/Evolutionary-Algorithms.ppt
• http://www.gephi.org
• https://www.cs.virginia.edu/~evans/bio/slides/SI.ppt
PAGE 156
19ADP10 DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To study the distributed system principles and architecture models
• To gain knowledge about various communication models
• To understand distributed file systems
• To learn synchronization and replication techniques
• To study the resource management techniques
Course Outcome:
• Explore the system models in distributed system
• Apply various communication models in distributed system
• Explore distributed file systems
• Apply synchronization and replication algorithms in distributed system
• Use resource management algorithms for load balancing
Introduction – Examples of distributed systems–Trends in distributed systems – Focus on resource sharing –
Challenges – World Wide Web – System models – Physical models – Architectural models – Fundamental models
Unit II COMMUNICATION IN DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM 9
Inter Process Communication – the API for the Internet protocols – External data representation – Multicast
communication – Network virtualization: Overlay networks. MPI – Request–reply protocols – Remote procedure
call. Distributed Objects: Java RMI – Group communication – Publish–subscribe systems – Message queues – Shared
memory approaches – From Objects to Components: Enterprise Java Beans
Unit III PEER TO PEER SYSTEMS AND DISTRIBUTED FILE SYSTEMS 9
Introduction – Napster and its legacy – Peer–to–peer Middleware – Routing overlays – Overlay case studies: Pastry,
Tapestry. Distributed File Systems – File service architecture – Sun Network File System –Google File System – Name
Services and Domain Name System – Directory services – Case studies: The Global Name System, X.500 Directory
Service
Unit IV SYNCHRONIZATION AND FAULT TOLERANCE 9
Introduction – Clocks, events and process states – Synchronizing physical clocks – Logical time and logical clocks –
Global states – Coordination and Agreement – Distributed mutual exclusion – Elections –Transactions – Locks –
Optimistic concurrency control – Timestamp ordering – Atomic commit protocols – Concurrency control in
distributed systems – Distributed deadlocks
Unit V RESOURCE AND PROCESS MANAGEMENT 9
Resource management: Desirable features of a good global scheduling algorithm –Task assignment approach – Load
balancing approach – Load sharing approach – Process management: Process migration – Threads
Text Book:
1. George Coulouris, Jean Dollimore and Tim Kindberg, “Distributed Systems Concepts and Design”, Fifth Edition,
Pearson Education, 2012
2. Pradeep K Sinha, “Distributed Operating Systems: Concepts and Design”, Prentice Hall of India, 2007
Reference Book:
1. Tanenbaum A.S., Van Steen M., “Distributed Systems: Principles and Paradigms”, Pearson Education, 2007
2. Liu M.L., “Distributed Computing, Principles and Applications”, Pearson Education, 2004
3. Nancy A Lynch, “Distributed Algorithms”, Morgan Kaufman Publishers, USA, 2003
4. MukeshSinghal and Niranjan G. Shivaratri, “Advanced Concepts in Operating Systems – Distributed, Database,
and Multiprocessor Operating Systems”, Tata McGraw–Hill, 2001
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.coda.cs.cmu.edu/ljpaper/lj.html
• http://techgenix.com/windows2003–distributed–file–system/
• https://www.ntfs.com/index.html
PAGE 157
19ADP11 DATA SCIENCE USING PYTHON L T P C

Course Objective:
• To work using Numpy and pandas libraries
• To study about applying matplotlib and seaborn libraries
• To study about applying skitlearn for classification and clustering
• To study about applying tensor flow libraries for convolutional networks
Course Outcome:
• Apply Numpy and pandas libraries on data sets for pre-processing
• Apply matplotlib and seaborn libraries for data visualization
• Implement machine learning algorithms in Scikit learn to generate models
• Apply Scikit learn to perform clustering
• Implement deep learning analysis using tensor flow
Unit I DATA PROCESSSING USING NUMPY AND PANDAS 9
Python Jupyter –Ipython shell commands; Arrays – universal functions – aggregations – broadcasting – comparison
– masks – Boolean logic – fancy indexing – sorting – structured arrays;Pandas Objects – Data indexing and selection
– Operating on Data in pandas – Handling missing data – Combining Data sets – Aggregation and grouping –
Vectorized string operations –Time series data
Unit II VISUALIZATION WITH MATPLOTLIB AND SEABORN 9
Simple line plots – Simple scatter plots – Visualizing errors –Density and contour plots – Multiple sub plots– Text and
annotation –Three dimensional plotting – Geographic data with base map – visualization with seaborn
Unit III SUPERVISED LEARNING USING SCIKIT LEARN 9
Hyperparameters and model validation – Feature engineering – Naïve Bayes – Support Vector Machine – Linear
Regression – Decision Trees and Random Forest – Principal Component Analysis – In depth manifold learning –
Model Evaluation-Cross validation – Grid search – Metrics and scoring
Unit IV CLUSTERING AND TEXT ANALYTICS USING SCIKIT LEARN 9
k-Means clustering – Agglomerative Clustering – DBSCAN – Gaussian mixture models – Kernel Density Estimation –
Model Case Study: Face Detection – HOG –Text data analytics – Bag of words – stop words – TF-IDF – n grams –
Stemming – Topic modelling – Document clustering
Unit V DEEP LEARNING USING TENSOR FLOW 9
Neural network – Convolutional neural network – Max pooling –ReLu activations – Strides-zero padding – Tensor
flow – Convolutional neural network – Case study using MNINST dataset
Text Book:
1. Jake Vander Plas, “Python Data Science Handbook”, O’Reilly, 2016
2. Andreas C. Muller, “Introduction to Machine learning with Python”, O’Reilly, 2016
Reference Book:
1. John Paul Mueuller, Luca Massaron, “Python for Data Science for Dummies”, Wiley,2019
2. Samir Madhavan, “Mastering Python for Data Science”, 2015
Extensive Reading:
• https://realpython.com/tutorials/data-science/
• https://www.tutorialspoint.com/python_data_science/index.htm
• https://www.analyticsvidhya.com/learning-paths-data-science-business-analytics-business-intelligence-big-
data/learning-path-data-science-python/
• https://www.datacamp.com/tracks/data-scientist-with-python
PAGE 158
19ADP12 DATA VISUALIZATION WITH TABLEAU L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the tableau terminologies and its fields
• To explain the methodologies to create a chart
• To gain knowledge about the different Chart types in tableau
• To get used with chart types and frameworks
• To explore different security aspects involved in data visualization
Course Outcome:
• Infer the representation of tableau and its fields
• Explore charts present in tableau
• Apply the various charts used for data visualization
• Apply visualization tips in charts
• Outline the security issues present in data visualization
Introduction to Tableau – Tableau products – Connecting to Data in Tableau – Shaping Data for Use with Tableau –
Tableau Terminology – Views of data and records – Measure – Dimension – Discrete – Continuous
Unit II CREATION OF CHARTS IN TABLEAU 9
Creation of bar charts in Tableau – Aggregation – Line Graphs – Independent Axes – Date Hierarchies – Marks Cards
– Encoding – Level of Detail – Filters – Calculated fields – Table Calculations – Parameters – Level of detail
expressions – Dashboards and distribution
Unit III CHART TYPES 9
Spreadsheet – Highlight table – Heat Map – Dual-Axis Combination Chart – Scatter Plot – Tree Map – Spark lines –
Small Multiples – Bullet graphs – Stacked area – Histogram – Box-and-Whisker Plot – Symbol Map – Mapbox – Filled
Map – Dual axis Map – Sequential Map – Polygon Maps – Gannt Chart – Waterfall Chart – Dual-Axis Slope Graphs –
Donut Chart – Funnel Chart – Pace chart – Pareto Chart – Control Chart – Dynamic Dual-Axis Bump Chart –
dumbbell Chart
Unit IV DATA VISUALIZATION TIPS AND FRAMEWORK 9
Icon-Based Navigation – Filters – Analysis using Parameters – Adding alerts to dashboards – Methodology Using
Custom Shape Palettes – Tableau Data Visualization Tips – Alternative Approaches to Pie Charts – One-Dimensional
Unit Charts – Insight Framework for Data Visualization – Steps in Insight Framework – Introduction to Data
Storytelling and its elements
Unit V SECURITY DATA VISUALIZATION 9
Port scan visualization – Vulnerability assessment and exploitation – Firewall log visualization – Intrusion detection
log visualization – Attacking and defending visualization systems – Creating security visualization system
Text Book:
1. Ryan Sleeper, ”Practical Tableau” O’Reilly Media, Inc, First Edition, 2018
Reference Book:
1. Greg Conti, “Security Data Visualization: Graphical Techniques for Network Analysis”, Starch Press Inc., First
Edition, 2007
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.datacamp.com/courses/introduction–to–data–visualization–with–python
• https://machinelearningmastery.com/data–visualization–methods–in–python/
• https://www.kaggle.com/benhamner/python–data–visualizations
PAGE 159
19BMP03 BIOMEDICAL SENSOR TECHNOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Introduce the students to different types of electrodes used in bio potential recording
• To expose the students to perceive the need for bio amplifiers and their characteristics needed to be design for
various bandwidth and frequency response.
• To proclaim the conception in detection of chemical and biomolecules
Course Outcome:
• Realize the need for reusable electrodes and understands the method of implementation.
• Capable of understanding the design principles of bio-amplifiers and drawback related with noises.
• Gain knowledge for implementing different types of physiological parameter measurement using appropriate
sensors.
• Understand and apply the concepts to design various biochemical sensors.
• Acquire knowledge on advanced sensor design process.
Unit I BIOPOTENTIAL ELECTRODES 9
Origin of bio potential and its propagation. Electrode-electrolyte interface, electrode–skin interface, half-cell
potential, impedance, polarization effects of electrode – nonpolarizable electrodes. Types of electrodes - surface,
needle and micro electrodes and their equivalent circuits. Recording problems - measurement with two electrodes.
Unit II BIOMEDICAL SENSORS 9
Sensors Terminology in human body, Introduction, Cell, Body Fluids Musculoskeletal system, Bioelectric Amplifiers,
Bioelectric Amplifiers for Multiple input Circuits, Differentional Amplifiers, Physiological Pressure and other
cardiovascular measurements and devices.
Unit III PHYSICAL SENSORS IN BIOMEDICINE 9
Temperature measurement: core temperature,-surface temperature- invasive. Blood flow measurement: skin
blood- hot film anemometer- Doppler sonography- electromagnetic sensor - blood pressure measurement:
noninvasive- hemodynamic invasive. Spirometry- sensors for pressure pulses and movement- ocular pressure
sensor- acoustic sensors in hearing aid, in blood flow measurement, sensors for bio-magnetism, tactile sensors for
artificial limbs, sensors in ophthalmoscopy, artificial retina.
Unit IV CHEMICAL BIOSENSORS 9
Blood gas and Acid-Base Physiology, Electrochemical sensors, reference electrode, electrodes, Ion-Selective Field-
Effect Transistor (ISFET), Noninvasive Blood-Gas Monitoring, BloodGlucose Sensors. Transcuteneous arterial oxygen
tension & carbon dioxide tension monitoring enzyme electrode.
Unit V ADVANCED SENSOR DESIGN 9
Fluoroscopic machines design, Nuclear medical systems, EMI to biomedical sensors, types and sources of EMI,
Fields, EMI effects. Computer systems used in X-ray and Nuclear Medical equipments. Calibration, Typical faults,
Trouble shooting, Maintenance procedure for medical equipments and Design of 2& 4 wire transmitters with 4 – 20
mA output.
Text Book:
1. J. G. Webster, J. G. Webster,“Medical Instrumentation; Application and Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 4th Edition,
2015.
2. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd edition, 2014.
3. Sabrie Soloman, “Sensors Hand Book”, McGraw Hill, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. Graham Ramsay, “Commercial Biosensors”, John Wiley & Sons, 1st edition, 1998.
2. Tran Minh Canh, “Sensor Physics & Technology – Biosensors”, 1st Edition, Champan& Hall, 1993.
3. Carr and Brown, “Introduction to Medical Equipment Technology”, Addison Wesley, 2nd Edition, 1999.
Extensive Reading:
• https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ee50/preview
• https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc19/SEM2/noc19-ee41/
PAGE 160
19BMP04 SURGICAL AND CRITICAL CARE EQUIPMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the principle of biotelemetry and diathermy and its uses
• Explore the different types of critical care and medical lasers and their applications extracorporeal devices
• Understand the importance of patient safety against electrical hazard.
Course Outcome:
• Perform continuous monitoring and transmission of vital parameters
• Explain the types of diathermy and its applications.
• Express the basics of critical care equipment’s and special diagnostic devices its application in medicine
• Describe surgical applications of lasers.
• Outline the importance of patient safety against electrical hazard
Unit I PATIENT MONITORING AND BIOTELEMETRY 9
Patient monitoring systems - ICU/CCU Equipment, Infusion pumps, bed side monitors, Central monitoring console.
Architecture of Biotelemetry system – single and multi-channel Biotelemetry - Inductively coupled Biotelemetry -
Optical Biotelemetry - readout formats. Concept of m-Health 2.0, Point of care devices – disposable haematology
sensors.
Unit II DIATHERMY 9
IR and UV lamp and its application. Short wave diathermy, ultrasonic diathermy, Microwave
diathermy, Surgical Diathermy- Principle of surgical diathermy, Surgical diathermy machine,
Safety Aspects in Electro-Surgical units, Surgical diathermy analyzers.
Unit III CRITICAL CARE EQUIPMENT 9
Cardiac Pacemaker- Internal and External Pacemaker– Batteries, AC and DC Defibrillator- Internal and External,
Defibrillator Protection Circuit, Cardiac ablation catheter. Types of Ventilators – Pressure, Volume, and Time
controlled. Humidifiers, Nebulizers. Need for heart lung machine, functioning of bubble, disc type and membrane
type oxygenators. Hemo Dialyser unit,
Unit IV SURGICAL THERAPEUTIC APPLICATIONS OF LASERS 9
Lasers in ophthalmology, Dermatology, Dentistry, Urology, Otolaryngology, Tissue welding and Soldering.
Lithotripsy, Principles of Cryogenic technique and application, Endoscopy, Laparoscopy, Otoscopes.
Unit V PATIENT SAFETY 9
Physiological effects of electricity – important susceptibility parameters – Macro shock – Micro shock hazards –
Patient’s electrical environment – Isolated Power system – Conductive surfaces – Electrical safety codes and
standards – IEC 60601-1 2005 standard, Basic Approaches to Protection against shock, Protection equipment design,
Electrical safety analyzer – Testing the Electric system.
Text Book:
1. John G. Webster, "Medical Instrumentation Application and Design", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 4th
edition, 2015.
2. Khandpur.R.S, "Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 3rd edition, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. Leslie Cromwell, "Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2nd
edition, 2015.
2. Richard Aston, "Principles of Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement", Merril Publishing Company, 1990.
3. L.A Geddes and L.E.Baker, "Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation", 3rd edition, 2008.
4. Myer Kutz, "Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering and Design", McGraw Hill, 2003.
5. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, "Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology", Pearson education,
2012
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.eintegrity.org/e-learning-healthcare-course/intensive-care-medicine.html
PAGE 161
19BTP03 PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS OF RADIOISOTOPES IN L T P C

Offered by BT
BIOTECHNOLOGY 3 0 0 3
(Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME)
Course Objective:
• To impart knowledge on basic concepts related to radioisotopes.
• To impart knowledge on applications of radioisotopes in fields of Biotechnology.
• To impart knowledge on health impacts of radioisotopes.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the basic concepts about radioisotopes.
• Learn the radioisotope methods
• Apply of radioisotopes in Biotechnology, agriculture and food processing.
• Apply of radioisotopes in diagnosis and therapeutics.
• Determine the health effects of radioisotopes and radioactive waste disposal
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO RADIOISOTOPES AND RADIOACTIVITY 9
Radioactivity – half life – radioactive elements - radioactive decay - alpha decay, beta decay, gamma ray emission,
positron decay - properties of radioisotopes - radioactivity measurements: units of radioactivity.
Unit II RADIOISOTOPE METHODS 9
Autoradiography, Radioimmunoassay – Radioisotopes as tracers and its advantages - Application of Radioisotopes in
Biochemical Analyses: radioactive elements in ion transport experiments – liquid scintillation spectrometry:
principle and applications – Identification of calcium binding proteins using radioisotope of calcium.
Unit III AGRICULTURAL AND FOOD PROCESSING APPLICATIONS OF RADIOISOTOPES 9
Agricultural applications: radioactive tracers, plant nutrition studies, Insect pest management – Radiotracer
technique in drug metabolism studies - Applications of radioisotopes in food processing.
Unit IV DIAGNOSTIC AND THERAPEUTIC APPLICATIONS OFRADIOISOTOPES 9
Application in medical field: Sterilization of medical equipments - Diagnostic radiology: X – ray, Positron Emission
Tomography (PET), Single Photon Emission Computed Tomography (SPECT) – Radiopharmaceuticals : Radioactive
iodine and over active thyroid gland - Radioactive chromium for labeling erythrocytes – Diagnostic use of
radiolabelled antibodies for Cancer - Antibody-radionuclide conjugates for Cancer Therapy.
Unit V HEALTH IMPACTS OF RADIOISOTOPES 9
Metabolism and biological effects of deposited radio nucleotides – cellular effects of ionizing radiation – cell survival
curves – radioactive wastes – sources, radioactive waste disposal.
Text Book:
1. Wilson K. & Walker J, “Principles and Techniques of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology “, Cambridge
University Press, 7th Edition, 2010.
2. C. L Comar, “Radioisotopes in biology and agriculture: Principles and practice”, McGraw-Hill, 1st Edition, 1955.
3. Edward Alpen, “Radiation Biophysics”, Academic Press, 2nd Edition, 1997.
Reference Book:
1. Wilson K. & Walker J, “Practical Biochemistry”, Cambridge University Press, 5th Edition, 2003.
PAGE 162
19BTP04 BIOFUELS L T P C
Course Objective:
• To understand the sources of energy and their types
• To provide a thorough understanding of various renewable feedstock of importance their availability and
attributes for biofuels production.
• To provide a thorough understanding of the broad concept of second and third generation biofuel production
from biomass and other low-cost agri residues and bio-wastes.
Course Outcome:
• Able to know about the resources of biofuels.
• Able to learn the source of second generation different biofuels.
• Able to know the importance of biological conversion process for biofuels.
• Able to learn about the role of chemical conversion process in biofuel formation.
• Able to know about the biofuel economy in industrial development.
Introduction to Energy Sources -Short Supply of Fossil Fuels- Petroleum in the World-Natural Gas as the Fastest
Growing Primary Energy Source -Coal as a Fuel and Chemical Feedstock- Renewable and Biorenewable Sources -
Non-combustible Renewable Energy Sources -Biorenewable Energy Sources-Ethanol as the Leading “First-
Generation” Biofuel-case studies-Brazil, United states.
Unit II CELLULOSIC ETHANOL AS A “SECOND-GENERATION” BIOFUEL 9
Bioethanol and Cellulosic Ethanol - Structural and Industrial Chemistry of Cellulosic Biomass-Cellulases:
Biochemistry, Molecular Biology, and Biotechnology-Hemicellulases--Lignin-Degrading Enzymes as Aids to
Saccharifcation- Biomass Substrate Pretreatment Strategies-Microbiology of Cellulosic Ethanol Production.
Unit III BIOLOGICAL CONVERSION PROCESS 9
Vegetable Oils and Biodiesel-Biogas-Aerobic Conversion Processes-Anaerobic Conversion Processes -Biogas
Processing -Reactor Technology for Anaerobic Digestion-Landfill Gas-Crude Gases from Biorenewable Feedstocks.
Unit IV CHEMICAL CONVERSION PROCESSES 9
Introduction to Thermochemical Conversion Processes-Thermal Decomposition Mechanisms of Biorenewables -
Hydrothermal Liquefaction of Biorenewable Feedstocks- The Role of Water During the HTL Process- HTU
Applications-Direct Combustion of Biomass-Combustion Efficiency -Direct Liquefaction-Pyrolysis Processes-Reaction
Mechanism of Pyrolysis-Gasification Research and Development-Biomass Gasification-Biomass Gasification Systems
-Electricity from Cogenerative Biomass Firing Power Plants-Fischer–Tropsch Synthesis (FTS)-Supercritical Steam
Gasification.
Unit V BIOFUEL ECONOMY 9
Introduction to Biofuel Economy -Biofuel Economy- Estimation of Biofuel Prices- Biodiesel Economy -Bioethanol
Economy-Biorenewable Energy Costs and Biohydrogen Economy-Biofuel Policy-Global Biofuel Projections.
Text Book:
1. Ayhan Demirbas , “Biofuels Securing the Planet’s Future Energy Needs”, springer, 2008.
2. David M. Mousdale, “Biofuels: Biotechnology, Chemistry, and Sustainable Development “CRC Press, 2008.
3. Gupta, Vijai Kumar; Tuohy, Maria G. (Eds.), “Biofuel Technologies Recent Developments”, Springer, 2013.
Reference Book:
1. Robert C. Brown, “Biorenewable Resources: Engineering New Products from Agriculture”, Wiley-Blackwell
Publishing, 2003
2. Lee, James.,. “Biochemical Engineering”, PHI, 1992.
PAGE 163
19BTP05 MOLECULAR PATHOGENESIS OF INFECTIOUS DISEASES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To acquire basic knowledge about the characteristics of pathogens.
• To know about the mechanism involved in the host defense and pathogenic strategies.
• To know about the molecular mechanism of the virulence strains.
• To learn the host pathogen interactions.
• To learn the modern pathogen control strategies.
Course Outcome:
• Able to know about the concepts involved in the pathogenic cycle, disease and vaccines.
• Able to learn the mechanisms involved in the host defense.
• Able to learn the molecular pathogenesis mechanisms of various pathogens.
• Able to analyze the host pathogen interactions.
• Able to know about the modern approaches in controlling the pathogens.
Unit I OVERVIEW 9
Historical perspective - microbial toxins, vaccines, antibiotics and birth of molecular genetics - Louis Pasteur’s
contributions, Robert Koch’s postulates and molecular concepts - Pathogen types and Modes of entry - Attributes &
components of microbial pathogenesis, Virulence, virulence factors, virulence-associated factors and virulence
lifestyle factors.
Unit II SIGNAL TRANSDUCTION, HOST DEFENSE AND PATHOGEN RESPONSE 9
Concepts of signaling in disease: receptor ligands, membrane receptor tyrosine kinases and phosphatases, G
proteins, proto-oncogenes, signaling pathways, cytoplasmic protein kinases and phosphatases, transcription factors,
receptor-nucleus signaling - Host defense: skin, mucosa, mechanism of killing by humoral and cellular defense
mechanisms, complements, inflammation process - Pathogenic adaptations: Antigenic variation, immune
destruction, latency, immune-suppression.
Unit III MOLECULAR PATHOGENESIS (WITH SPECIFIC EXAMPLES) 9
Molecular genetics and gene regulation in virulence of pathogens: Vibrio Cholerae: Cholera toxin, co-regulated pili,
filamentous phage, survival - E. coli pathogens: Entero- pathogenic E. coli (EPEC), type III secretion, cytoskeletal
changes, intimate attachment - Tuberculosis: clinical manifestation, molecular biology of infection - early events,
late events, lipid metabolism, iron uptake and models (macrophage and animal) in studying tuberculosis -
Leptospirosis: epidemiology and pathogenesis - Plasmodium: Life cycle, erythrocyte stages, transport mechanism
and processes to support the rapidly growing schizont, parasitiparous vacuoles, and knob protein transport,
Antimalarials based on transport processes - Influenza virus: Intracellular stages, Neuraminidase & Haemagglutinin
in entry, M1 & M2 proteins in assembly and disassembly, action of amantidine.
Unit IV MOLECULAR PATHOGENESIS (WITH SPECIFIC EXAMPLES) 9
Virulence assays: adherence, invasion, cytopathic, cytotoxic effects. Criteria & tests in identifying virulence factors -
Molecular characterization of virulence factors: Genetic Approach - Gene disruption, global gene inactivation,
Complemetation, Antisense technique, Non-genetic Approach - reporter fusion, hybridisation methods - Large scale
approach: genomics, proteomics.
Unit V APPROACHES TO CONTROL PATHOGENS 9
Classical approaches based on serotyping - Modern diagnosis based on highly conserved virulence factors, immune
& DNA-based techniques; Antibiotics and antibiotics resistance: Principles of antibiotic mechanisms - Mechanisms
of the origin of antibiotics resistance; Vaccines - DNA, subunit and cocktail vaccines - approaches behind success
story of small pox eradication across the world and polio in India.
Text Book:
1. Iglewski B.H. and Clark V.L “Molecular Basis of Bacterial Pathogenesis”, Academic Press, 1st Edition, 1990.
2. Williams, P.H., Ketley, J. and Salmond, G., “Methods in Microbiology: Bacterial Pathogenesis-Volume 27”,
Academic Press, 1st Edition, 1998.
3. Nester E.W., Anderson D.G., Roberts C.E., Pearsall N.N. and Nester M.T., “Microbiology: A Human Perspective”,
McGraw Hill, 4th revised Edition, 2003.
4. Janeway C.A. Jr, Travers P. and Walport M., “Immunobiology: The Immune System in Health and Disease”,
Garland Science, 5th Edition, 2001.
Reference Book:
1. Eduardo A. G., “Principles of Bacterial Pathogenesis”, Academic Press, 1st Edition, 2001.
2. Salyers A.A., Wilson B.A., Whitt D.D. and Winkler M., “Bacterial Pathogenesis: A Molecular Approach”,
American Society for Microbiology, 3rd Edition, 2011.
3. Norkin L.C., “Virology: Molecular Biology and Pathogenesis”, American Society for Microbiology, 1st Edition,
PAGE 164
2010.
Extensive Reading:
• Issar Smith, “Mycobacterium tuberculosis Pathogenesis and Molecular Determinants of Virulence”, Clin.
Microbiol Rev. 2003 Jul; 16(3): 463–496
• T. Jacob John and Vipin M. Vashishtha, “Eradicating poliomyelitis: India's journey from hyperendemic to polio-
free status”, Indian J Med Res. 2013 May; 137(5): 881–894.
• Munita J M, Arias C A. “Mechanisms of Antibiotic Resistance”, Microbiol Spectr. 2016 Apr;4(2).
• http://www.historyofvaccines.org/
• http://www.bt.cdc.gov/agent/smallpox/training/overview/pdf/eradicationhistory.pdf
• http://www.polioeradication.org/Polioandprevention/Historyofpolio.aspx
PAGE 165
19BTP10 CLINICAL TRIALS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Fundamentals of drug discovery and development
• The ethical considerations of clinical trials
• The stages in clinical trials based on the available principles
• Documents required for conducting clinical trials
• Management strategies for efficient trials
Course Outcome:
• List the steps involved in the drug development process
• Explain the ethical principles to be followed while conducting clinical trials
• Describe the guidelines of clinical trials
• Comprehend the essential documents required for conducting trials
• Apply project management strategies to conduct clinical trials
Unit I HISTORY AND STAGES IN DRUG DEVELOPMENT PROCESS 9
Origin and history of clinical research, Introduction to drug discovery and drug development, Preclinical trials-
animal studies, toxicology, Clinical Trials in India –The National Perspective, Clinical Trial Phase I, Clinical Trial Phase
II, Clinical Trial Phase III, Clinical Trial Phase IV – methods
Unit II ETHICS IN CLINICAL TRIALS 9
Historical guidelines in clinical research- Nuremberg code, Declaration of Helsinki, Belmont report, Research ethics
and Bioethics – Principles of research ethics; Ethical issues in clinical trials; Use of humans in Scientific Experiments;
the informed consent; Introduction to animal ethics; Animal rights and use of animals
Unit III GUIDELINES FOR CLINICAL RESEARCH 9
International Conference on Harmonization (ICH) - Brief history of ICH, Structure of ICH, ICH Harmonization Process,
Responsibilities of Stakeholders: Sponsors, Investigators, CROs, Monitors, Institutional ethics committee.
Unit IV ESSENTIAL DOCUMENTS 9
Essential Documents in Clinical Trials: SOP, Clinical Trial Protocol and Amendments, Investigator Brochure, Master
Files, Informed Consent Forms, Consort statement, Case Record Form.
Unit V CLINICAL TRIAL MANAGEMENT 9
Project management in clinical trials - principles of project management; Application in clinical trial management;
Risk assessment, Pharmacovigilance, Project Auditing and Inspection.
Text Book:
1. Mira T. SundaraRajan. “Moral Rights: Principles, Practice and New Technology”, Oxford University Press, 1st
Edition, 2011.
2. Rao M. B, Manjula Guru. “Patent Law in India”, Kluwer Law International, 1st Edition, 2010.
3. McFadden Elizabeth, M McFadden. “Management of Data in Clinical Trials”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2nd Edition,
2008
Reference Book:
1. Lee, Chi-Jen; et.al. “Clinical Trials for Drugs and Biopharmaceuticals”, CRC / Taylor & Francis, 2011.
2. Friedman, L.M., Furberg, C.D., DeMets, D., Reboussin, D.M.,Granger, C.B. “Fundamentals of Clinical Trials”,
Springer International Publishing, 5th Edition, 2015.
PAGE 166
19CEP06 PROJECT MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• The project management fundamentals.
• The project costing and budgeting.
• The project planning and scheduling.
• The project control and resource management
• Computer application in project management.
Course Outcome:
• Employ management fundamentals in complex projects.
• Carry out costing and budgeting during project estimation.
• Plan and schedule large scale projects.
• Ensure proper project control and resource management.
• Incorporate latest technologies in project management.
Unit I PROJECT MANAGEMENT FUNDAMENTALS 9
Introduction - Characteristics of projects - Project management Process - Role of Project Manager - Project life cycle
- Project Teams - Work Breakdown Structure - Organizational Breakdown Structure and Linear Responsibility Charts.
Unit II PROJECT COSTING AND BUDGETING 9
Capital Cost Estimating - Estimating work process - Preparing early estimates - Methods and Techniques - Cost
Capacity Curves - Risk Analysis - Contingency.
Project Budgeting - Types of Project Budgets - Development of Project Estimates for Budgeting - Owner's Estimate
for Budgeting - Economic Feasibility Study - Single Payments - Uniform Payment Series - Time Value of Money -
Contractor's bid.
Unit III PROJECT PLANNING AND SCHEDULING 9
Estimating project time - Developing project plan - Planning for Multiple Projects - Assigning Realistic Durations - Bar
charts - Activity on Arrow (AOA) and Activity on Node (AON) Scheduling - Network analysis - Start and finish time -
Floats - Critical path - Time-cost trade off - Network crashing - Program Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT).
Unit IV PROJECT CONTROL AND RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 9
Project Measurement and Control - Earned-Value System - Monitoring Project Performance - Interpretation of
Performance Indices - Cost and Schedule Variances -Resource Management - Resource constrained Scheduling -
Material Management -Inventory control - Types of Inventory - Selective Inventory Control - Economic Order
Quantity - Material Requirements Planning.
Unit V COMPUTER APPLICATION IN PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction - Managing special projects - International Projects - Issues in managing international projects - Total
Quality Management - Background - Training - Teamwork - Statistical Methods - Cost of quality - Lean Management
- Case studies.
Text Book:
1. Garold D. Oberlender, “Project Management for Engineering and Construction”, McGraw-Hill Education, 3rd
edition, 2014.
2. Chitkara K K, “Construction Project Management – Planning, Scheduling and Controlling” McGraw Hill
Education; 3rd edition, 2019.
Reference Book:
1. S. Choudhury, “Project Scheduling and Monitoring in Practice”, McGraw-Hill Professional, 2016.
2. P. K. Joy, “Total Project Management: The Indian Context”, Macmillan India Ltd. 2016.
3. Shtub, Bard and Globerson, “Project Management: Engineering, Technology, and Implementation”, Prentice
Hall India. 2015.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.cmu.edu/cee/projects/PMbook/12_Cost_Control,_Monitoring,_and_Accounting.html
PAGE 167
19CSP04 CYBER CRIME AND LAWS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To become familiar with the fundamentals of Network and Network Security concept
• To study about various cyber crimes
• To understand the various cyber laws
• To explain the importance of digital evidence
• To understand the procedure for evidence acquisition and analysis
Course Outcome:
• Analyze various network security issues
• Identify different types of cyber crimes
• Use cyber laws against various cyber crimes
• Perform evidence collection on digital devices
• Apply various tools to analyze collected evidence
Unit I NETWORK CONCEPTS AND NETWORK SECURITY 7
Networking Architecture – Networking Technologies – Network Models – Networking Devices – LAN Technologies –
Networking Topologies – TCP/IP Protocol Suite – Physical Layer – Data Link Layer – Network Layer: Addressing –
Routing – ARP – ICMP – IPv4 – IPv6 – Transport Layer – Application Layer – Security Vulnerabilities in TCP/IP suite –
Security Mechanisms in Network Layer – Network Layer Security – Transport Layer Security – Application Layer
Security – Firewall – Intrusion Detection System – Intrusion Prevention System
Unit II INTRODUCTION TO CYBER CRIME AND CLASSIFICATION 10
Introduction – Role of Electronic Communication Devices in Cybercrime – Mens rea and Actusreus in Cybercrime –
Types – Crimes associated with mobile electronic communication devices – Classification Cyber Criminals –
Execution of Cybercrime – Tools used in Cybercrime – Factors influencing Cybercrime – Challenges to Cybercrime –
Strategies to prevent cybercrime – Extent of Cybercrime – Classification: Cybercrime against individual – Cybercrime
against Property – Cybercrime against Nation
Unit III FUTURE OF CYBER CRIME AND CYBER LAWS 9
Cyber War – Cryptocurrency – Bitcoin – Ethereum – Blockchain – Ransomeware – Deep Web and Dark Web – Deep
Web Challenges – Cyber Laws: Need for Cyber Law – Cyber Laws and Legal Issues –Cyber Security – Strategies
involved in Cyber Security – Minimizing risk with Cyber Laws – Cyber Laws in India and Case Studies – International
Cyber Laws and Case Studies
Unit IV INTRODUCTION TO CYBER FORENSICS AND DIGITAL EVIDENCE 10
Cyber Forensics – Disk Forensics – Network Forensics – Wireless Forensics – Database Forensics – Malware
Forensics – Mobile Forensics – Email Forensics – Memory Forensics – Digital Evidence: Evidence Collection
Procedure – Source of Evidence – Digital Evidence from Computer and Electronic Communication Devices - OS and
Boot process –File System – Windows registry – Artifacts – Evidence from Mobile Devices – Evidence from Internet
Unit V ACQUISITION AND ANALYSIS OF DIGITAL EVIDENCE 9
Preliminaries of Digital Evidence – Acquisition and Seizure of Evidence – Chain of Custody – Fourth Amendment and
Seizure – Acquisition of Computer and Electronic Evidence – Challenges of Acquisition of Digital Evidence – Analysis:
Capturing of Forensic copy from Memory and Hard drive using Toolkit Forensic Imager – RAM analysis – Analysing
Hard drive – Working with Autopsy – Email Tracking and Tracing
Text Book:
1. Dejey, Murugan, "Cyber Forensics", Oxford, 2018
Reference Book:
1. John R. Vacca , “Computer Forensics, Computer Crime Investigation”, Firewall Media, New Delhi,2nd Edition,
2005
2. Nelson, Phillips Enfinger, Steuart, “Computer Forensics and Investigations”, Cengage Learning,4th Edition,2009
3. Keith J. Jones, Richard Bejtlieh, Curtis W. Rose, “Real Digital Forensics”, Addison – Wesley Pearson
Education,2005
4. Christopher L.T. Brown , “Computer Evidence Collection & Presentation”, Firewall Media, 2th Edition,2009
5. Jesus Mena, “Homeland Security, Techniques & Technologies”, Firewall Media, 2007
6. Robert M. Slade, “Software Forensics Collecting Evidence from the scene of a Digital Crime”, TMH 2005
7. Chad Steel, “Windows Forensics”, Wiley India Edition, 2006
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.sans.org/course/computer-forensic-investigations-windows-in-depth
• http://www.porcupine.org/forensics/forensic-discovery/
PAGE 168
• http://www.cftt.nist.gov/
PAGE 169
19ECP05 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To Identify the purpose and need for TQM activities
• To develop an insight and understanding of Strategic Management
• To develop quality assessment skills.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the principle of TQM concepts and peculiarities of their implementation.
• Assess the quality of products and services.
• Develop in-depth knowledge on various tools and techniques of quality management.
• Handle Quality Function Deployment.
• Prepare for accreditation by NBA, NACC.
Unit I NEED FOR QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of manufacturing and
service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - Definition of TQM – TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and
Crosby – Barriers to TQM – Cost of Quality – Factors affecting TQM environment.
Unit II PRINCIPLES OF QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9
Quality statements - Customer focus –Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction, Customer complaints, Customer
retention - Employee involvement – Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward,
Performance appraisal - Continuous process improvement – PDSA cycle, 5s, Kaizen - Supplier partnership –
Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.
Unit III TOOLS & TECHNIQUES 9
The seven traditional tools of quality – New management tools – Six-sigma: Concepts, methodology, applications to
manufacturing, service sector including IT – Bench marking – Reason to bench mark, Bench marking process – FMEA
– Stages, Types.
Unit IV TQM PERFORMANCE 9
Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – Benefits of QFD - Taguchi quality loss function – TPM –
Concepts, improvement needs – Performance measures, Washinton Accord, Blooms Taxonomy.
Unit V QUALITY SYSTEMS 9
Need for ISO 9000- ISO 9000-2008 Quality System – Elements, Documentation, Quality auditing- QS 9000 – ISO
14000 – Concepts, Requirements and Benefits – Case studies of TQM implementation in manufacturing and service
sectors including IT, NBA, NAAC.
Text Book:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, et at., “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, 3rd Edition, Indian Reprint
(2006).
Reference Book:
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, “The Management and Control of Quality”, 6th Edition, South-Western
(Thomson Learning), 2005.
2. Oakland, J.S., “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford,3rd Edition, 2003.
3. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd.,2006.
4. Janakiraman, B and Gopal, R.K, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
2006.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.ibc.apqc.org/
• http://www.brint.com/BPR.htm
• http://www.qfdi.org/
• http://www.quality.org//
• http://www.wineasy.se/QMP/
• https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_mg34/
PAGE 170
19EEP05 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To attain fundamental concept, theory about management, including the basic roles, skills and functions of
management
• To envision managerial skills, leadership along with engineering background for students
• To coordinate role of managers in organization
• To describe the importance of employee motivation
• To establish the process of communication and effective control
Course Outcome:
• Apply the evolution of management and recent contribution to management thought.
• Describe the concept of strategic management, strategic planning process and policies.
• State the role of an organisation in managing business activities
• Evaluate the theories of leadership
• Detect key problems in controlling process and recommend effective control system
Unit I MANAGEMENT THEORY AND SCIENCE 9
Definition of Management – Management and Administration- Management functions – Science or Art ––
Development of Management Thought – Contribution of Taylor and Fayol – Management & Society: Social
Responsibility – Ethics in management.
Unit II PLANNING 9
Definition – Nature & Purpose – Types of planning - Steps involved in Planning – Objectives – Setting Objectives –
Process of Managing by Objectives – Strategies, Policies & Planning Premises- Forecasting – Decision-making.
Unit III ORGANIZING 9
Definition – The nature and Purpose of organization – Organization levels and the span of Management –
Departmentation – Line/Staff Authority – Centralization – Decentralization – Effective organization & Organizational
culture – Staffing – Managerial Job – An overview of staffing function (selection process, techniques and
instruments) – Performance appraisal and career strategy – HRD.
Unit IV LEADING 9
Human factors in Managing – Behavioral models – Creativity and innovation – Motivational theories –techniques –
Job enrichment – Leadership Behaviors & styles – Communication – Communication process – Electronic media in
Communication - Barriers and breakdowns in communication – Effective communication.
Unit V CONTROLLING 9
The system and process of Controlling – Control Technique – Information Technology – Productivity & Operation
Management – Overall Preventing Control – Direct and Preventive Control - Globalization and Liberalization -
International Management –Global Management Theory.
Text Book:
1. Harold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management- An International Perspective”, McGraw- Hill,
8th Edition, 2010.
2. Harold Koontz, Heinz Weihrich and A Ramachandra Aryasri “Principles of Management”, McGraw- Hill, 2nd
Edition, 2016.
3. Stephen P.Robbins and David A.Decenzo, “Management”, Pearson Education, 10th Edition, 2016.
Reference Book:
1. Tim Hannagan, “Management Concepts and Practices”, Pearson Education, 5th Edition 2013.
2. P C Tripathy and P N Reddy “Principles of Management”, McGraw- Hill, 6nd Edition, 2017.
3. Charles W L Hill and Steven L McShane “Principles of Management”, McGraw- Hill, Special Indian Edition, 2017.
4. Hellriegel, Jackson and Slocum, “Management: A competency – Based Approach” South Western, 9th Edition
2002.
5. Fraidoon Mazda, “Engineering Management”, Addison Wesley,-2000.
PAGE 171
19EEP06 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS AND HUMAN VALUES L T P C

Course Objective:
• Obtain awareness on Engineering Ethics, Human Values & instill moral values, social values and Loyalty.
• Appreciate the rights of others
• Practice the codes of conduct for engineers in the society,
• Realize their responsibilities, professional rights and moralities for the enhancement of an organization.
• Familiar with the global issues.
Course Outcome:
• Obtain awareness on Engineering Ethics, Human Values & instill moral values, social values and Loyalty.
• Appreciate the rights of others
• Practice the codes of conduct for engineers in the society,
• Realize their responsibilities, professional rights and moralities for the enhancement of an organization.
• Familiar with the global issues.
Unit I HUMAN VALUES AND ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
Morals, Values and Ethics - Work Ethic - Team work - Service Learning - Respect for Others - Living Peacefully –
Honesty - Courage - Valuing Time - Co-operation –Commitment -Self-Confidence -Customs and religion - Senses of
Engineering Ethics - Variety of moral issues -Types of inquiry, Moral dilemmas and Moral Autonomy - Kohlberg’s
Theory -Gilligan’s Theory - Case studies and moral stories.
Unit II ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
Engineering as experimentation - Engineers as responsible experimenters - Codes of ethics - Sample code of conduct
(Specific to a particular engineering discipline) - A balanced outlook on Law - The Challenger case study.
Unit III RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
Collegiality and loyalty - Respect for Authority -Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality - Conflicts of Interest
(Whistle Blowing) – Occupational Crime.
Professional Rights- Employee Rights- Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) - Case studies.
Unit IV SAFETY AND RISK 9
Safety and risk - Assessment of safety and risk - Risk Benefit Analysis - Reducing risk - The Three Mile Island and
Chernobyl disaster - Bhopal gas tragedy - Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear disaster case studies.
Unit V GLOBAL ISSUES 9
Multinational corporations – Environmental Ethics - Computer Ethics - Weapons Development - Engineers as
Managers and Consulting Engineers - Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors - Moral Leadership - Case studies.
Text Book:
1. Mike Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 4th Edition, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. Jayshree suresh, B.S.Raghavan,”Human values and professional ethics,” S.Chand&company Ltd, New Delhi, 2th
Edition, 2007.
2. Kiran D.R,” Professional ethics and Human values,” Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2007.
3. Charles D. Fleddermann, "Engineering Ethics", Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004 (Indian
Reprint).
4. Charles E Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J Rabin’s, “Engineering Ethics – Concepts and
5. Cases”, Wadsworth Thompson Learning, United States, 2000 (Indian Reprint).
6. John R Boatrigh t, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003.
7. Edmund G See Bauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers”,
8. Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001.
9. David Ermann and Michele S Shauf, “Computers, Ethics and Society”, Oxford University Press, 2003.
10. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “ Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India, New
11. Delhi, 2004.
12.
13.
14. WEB Reference:
15.
16. www.onlineethics.org
17. www.nspe.org
18. www.globalethics.org
19. www.ethics.org
PAGE 172
19ITP05 HUMAN RESOURCE AND MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the basic concepts, role, functions and processes of human resource management
• To be aware of the HRM practices, HR planning, Training, promotion, demotion and transfer activities
• To know about performance evaluation and appraisal systems, compensation and incentives
• To understand the concept and the process of entrepreneurship
• To learn the managing skills for the enterprise
Course Outcome:
• Plan the human resources for the given jobs
• Identify suitable training methods, promotion/demotion planning for the given situation
• Evaluate the performance of human resources for appraisal
• Develop entrepreneurial personality using EDP
• Identify the opportunities for developing small scale industries
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 9
Evolution of human resource management – Definition, scope and objectives of human resource management –
Functions of human resource department – Human resource planning- job analysis - job design - job evaluation –
Recruitment and selection process.
Unit II CAREER PLANNING, TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Introduction – Promotion: Types, programme and procedure, Promotion system and policy –Demotion – Transfer:
Policy and Procedure – Career planning – Employee training and development – Introduction – Need and
Importance of training – Concept of training – Steps in training – Types of training methods – Executive
development : Introduction – Executive development programmes.
Unit III PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND ADMINISTRATION 9
Introduction – Methods for appraisal performance – Components of appraisal evaluation – Problems of appraisal –
Solutions – Ethics of appraisal – Wage and salary administration –Nature and purpose – Wages: types,
determination process, factors influencing wage – Compensation – Incentives.
Unit IV ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT 9
Introduction – Entrepreneurship Concept – Entrepreneurship as a career – Entrepreneurial personality –
Characteristics of successful Entrepreneur – Factors affecting entrepreneurial growth – Entrepreneurial Motivation
– Competencies – Mobility – Entrepreneurship Development Programmes (EDP).
Unit V LAUNCHING OF SMALL ENTERPRISE 9
Definition, Characteristics – Relationship between small and large units – Opportunities for an Entrepreneurial
career – Role of small enterprise in economic development – Problems of small scale industries – Institutional
finance to entrepreneurs - Institutional support to entrepreneurs – Total Quality Management for small Enterprises.
Text Book:
1. C.B.Mamoria and S.V.Gankar, “A Text Book of Human Resource Management”, Himalaya Publishing Company,
Seventh edition, 2013.
2. S.S Khanka, “Entrepreneurial Development”, S.Chand & Company LTD, New Delhi, 2007.
Reference Book:
1. Decenzo and Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, Wiley, Eighth Edition, 2007.
2. Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, Pearson Education Limited, 2007
3. Bernadin, “Human Resource Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, Sixth edition, 2006.
4. Eugence Mckenna and Nic Beach, “Human Resource Management”, Pearson Education Limited, 2007.
5. Hisrich, “Entrepreneurship”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2001.
6. P.Saravanavel, “Entrepreneurial Development”, Ess Pee kay Publishing House, Chennai - 1997.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.mu.ac.in/myweb_test/M.Com.%20Study%20Material/Human%20Res.%20Management%20-
%20M.%20Com%20-%20I.pdf
• http://www.csb.gov.hk/english/publication/files/e-hrmguide.pdf
• https://www.uop.edu.jo/Repository/41/Strategic%20Human%20Resource%20Management.pdf
• https://biblio.ugent.be/input/download?func=downloadFile&recordOId=873189&fileOId=1134952
• http://www.ljmu.ac.uk/secretariat/docs/Getting_to_Grips_HR_Management.pdf
PAGE 173
19ITP06 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Understand the basic types of Intellectual property
• Recognize the relevant criteria for generating and protecting intellectual works
• Understand the relevance and impact of IP Law on academic/scientific works/studies
• Recognize the intellectual property likely to be produced in the academic and professional environment
Course Outcome:
• Infer the fundamental legal principles relating to patents
• Express the use of copyrights and trademarks
• Interpret the laws of trade secrets and unfair competition
• Make use of the patent application
• Familiarize with recent developments in copyright laws
Invention and Creativity – Intellectual Property – Importance –Types of IPRs- Protection of IPR – Basic types of
property - Movable Property - Immovable Property - Intellectual Property- Patents
Unit II THE LAW OF TRADEMARK AND COPYRIGHT 9
Introduction to Trade mark – Trade mark Registration Process – Post registration Procedures – Trade mark
maintenance - Transfer of Rights - Inter partes Proceeding- Infringement - Dilution of Trade mark –Trademarks
claims –International Trade mark Law Introduction to Copyrights – Principles of Copyright -The subjects Matter of
Copy right – The Rights Afforded by Copyright Law – Copy right Ownership, Transfer and duration -International
Copyright Law
Unit III THE LAW OF TRADE SECRETS AND UNFAIR COMPETITION 9
Introduction to Trade Secret – Maintaining Trade Secret – Physical Security –Employee Limitation - Employee
confidentiality agreement - Trade Secret Law -Unfair Competition – Trade Secret Litigation – Breach of Contract –
Applying State Law
Unit IV PATENT AND INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION 9
Concept of Patent- Procedure for Filing of Patent Application and types of Applications- Procedure for Opposition-
Revocation of Patents- Patent Agent- Qualification and Registration Procedure-Preparation of Patent document-
Recent Developments in Patent System International convention relating to Intellectual Property – Establishment of
WIPO – Mission and Activities -General Agreement on Trade and Tariff (GATT)- Indian Position Vs WTO and
Strategies – Indian IPR legislations – commitments to WTO - Case Studies – Patents - Basumati rice – Turmeric -
Neem
Unit V NEW DEVELOPMENTS IN COPYRIGHT LAW 9
Copyright Protection for Computer Programs- Copyright Protection for Automated Databases- Domain Name
Protection-Objectives- domain name and Intellectual Property- Registration of domain names- disputes under
Intellectual Property Rights- Jurisdictional Issues- International Perspective-Copyright in the Electronic age-Digital
Millennium Copyright Act-Musical Notes-Recent Development in Copyright Law-Terms of the Trade-Vessel Hull
Protection -Semiconductor Chip Protection
Text Book:
1. Deborah E. Bouchoux, “Intellectual Property Rights”, Cengage Learning India Private Ltd, 2005.
Reference Book:
1. Subbaram N.R., “Handbook of Indian Patent Law and Practice”, S.Viswanathan Printers and Publishers
Pvt.Ltd.,1998.
2. Prabuddha Ganguli, “Intellectual Property Rights”, TMH, 2001.
3. Rachna Singh Puri & Arvind Viswanathan, “Practical Approach to Intellectual Property Rights”, I.K.International
Publishing House Pvt.Ltd.
4. P.Narayanan; Law of Copyright and Industrial Designs; Eastern law House, Delhi 2010.
5. B.L.Wadehra;Law Relating to Patents,Trade Marks,Copyright Designs & Geographical Indications; Universal law
Publishing Pvt. Ltd., India 2000.
6. G.V.G Krishnamurthy, “The Law of Trademarks ,Copyright ,Patents and Design”.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.ipindia.nic.in/ipr/patent/manual/main%20link.htm
• www.wipo.int/ebookshop
PAGE 174
19ITP07 ETHICS IN COMPUTING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand, identify, and apply different ethical philosophies, frameworks, and methodologies
• To identify and interpret the codes of professional conduct relating to the disciplines of computer science and
software engineering
• To analyze the local and global impact of computing on individuals, organizations, and society
• To understand and apply the concepts and principles of moral thinking to problems relating to computing and
digital technologies
• To understand the professional, ethical, legal, security, social issues and responsibilities
Course Outcome:
• Identify the ethical issues in information technology
• Apply privacy related laws and regulation to enlighten the legal constraints
• Learn the legalities to avoid plagiarism and intellectual property related crimes
• Apply the code of ethics for software development
• Exhibit ethics while working as teams in IT organizations
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ETHICS 9
Ethics in Business World - Ethics in Information Technology - Ethics for IT Workers and IT users - Computer and
Internet Crime - Information Technology Security Incidents - Implementing Trustworthy Computing
Unit II PRIVACY 9
Privacy Protection and the Law - Key Privacy and Anonymity issues - Identity Theft - Electronic Discovery - Consumer
Profiling - Treating Consumer Data Responsibility - Workplace Monitoring - Advanced Surveillance Technology-
Freedom of Expression-First Amendment rights-Freedom of Expression - Key issues
Unit III INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 9
Definition-Copyrights-Copyright Term-Eligible works-Software copyright protection - PRO-IP-GATT- WTO and WTO
TRIPS Agreement- WIPO - Digital Millennium Copyright-patents-Software Patents-Cross Licensing Agreements-Trade
Secrets-Key Intellectual Property Issues – Plagiarism - Reverse Engineering - Open Source Code - Competitive
Intelligence - Trademark Infringement - Cyber Squatting
Unit IV SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT 9
Strategies for engineering Quality Software-Software Product Liability-Key issues in software development-Impact
of IT on productivity and quality of life-Social Networking-Business Application- Ethical Issues-Online Virtual worlds
Unit V ETHICS OF IT ORGANIZATIONS 9
Key Ethical Issues for Organizations-Contingent Workers-H-1B Workers-Application Process - outsourcing-offshore
outsourcing-pros and cons-strategies-Whistle Blowing-Protection for whistle blowers and Private sector Workers-
Green Computing
Text Book:
1. George_Reynolds,” Ethics in Information Technology”, Cengage Learning, Fourth edition 2014
Reference Book:
1. Michael J. Quinn ,”Ethics for the Information Age”, Pearson Edu, Fifth Edition, 2012
2. Deborah G.Johnson ,”Computer Ethics”,Pearson,4th Edition ,2009
3. Kallman, E.A. & Grillo, J.P,” Ethical Decision Making and Information Technology”, McGraw-Hill, Second
Edition,2006
4. Lee, Wanbil W., Information Security Management: Semi-intelligent Risk-analytic Audit, Verlag Dr Muller, 2010
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.cengage.com/resource_uploads/downloads/1111138214_259148
• http://users.jyu.fi/~riesta/Green_Computing
• https://www.aat.org.uk/about-aat/professional-ethics
• http://ethics.iit.edu/publication/WhistleBlowing_Peterson1
PAGE 175
19ITP08 REINFORCEMENT LEARNING L T P C

Course Objective:
• Provides an foundational ideas on which modern reinforcement learning is built
• Develop an intuitive understanding on the mathematical theory of reinforcement learning
• Implementation and testing of complete decision making systems.
Course Outcome:
• Implement and apply policy iteration and value iteration reinforcement learning algorithms
• Implement and apply Monte Carlo reinforcement learning algorithms
• Implement and apply temporal-difference reinforcement learning algorithms
• Construct and apply on/off - policy reinforcement learning algorithms with function approximation
Introduction - Elements of RL, History of RL- Evaluative feedback -Goals and rewards – Returns – Markovian Decision
Problem (MDP) – Value functions - Optimality Criterion in MDPs. Policy Evaluation- Policy Improvement- Value
Iteration, asynchronous DP- Efficiency of DP.
Unit II MONTE CARLO METHODS 9
Monte Carlo Prediction - Monte Carlo Estimation of Action Values - Monte Carlo Control- Policy Evaluation - Policy
Improvement - On-policy and off - policy Monte Carlo controls -Incremental implementation.
Unit III LEARNING 9
Temporal-Difference prediction - Optimality of TD – Sarsa – Q Learning – Off-Policy TD Control - R Learning -Actor-
Critic Model- Unifying Monte Carlo and TD –Traces - Games.
Unit IV FUNCTION 9
Approximation - Value prediction and control – Gradient Descent methods - Linear methods – Control with Function
Approximation - Artificial Neural Network based approximation.
Unit V PLANNING AND LEARNING 9
Model based learning and planning - Integrating Planning, Acting, and Learning - prioritized sweeping - Trajectory
Sampling - Monte Carlo Tree Search - Heuristic search - Case Studies
Practical Course -5
Text Book:
1. Sutton R. S. and Barto A. G., "Reinforcement Learning: An Introduction", MIT Press,2015.
2. CsabaSzepesvári, “Algorithms for Reinforcement Learning”, Morgan & Claypool, 2013.
Reference Book:
1. Kevin Murphy , “Machine Learning - A Probabilistic Perspective” , MIT press, 2012.
2. Christopher Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2006.
PAGE 176
19MEP07 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS L T P C

Course Objective:
• the basics of economics.
• cost analysis related to engineering so as to take economically sound decisions.
• the different types of maintenance analysis.
• the concepts of depreciation and inflation.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the concept of Engineering Economics, types of costs and make economic analysis.
• Remember, understand and apply various interest formulae and their applications for different investment
situations.
• Compare and analyze various investment alternatives and make appropriate decisions.
• Make replacement and maintenance analysis to take optimal decisions.
• Understand the concept of depreciation, and inflation.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 9
Need to study economics- Circular flow of economic activities - Law of supply and demand, Definition and scope of
engineering economics- Types of efficiency - Ways of improving productivity - Elements of costs - Relation between
cost and volume – break-even analysis- Assumptions- Break-even chart - Profit-volume chart and P/V ratio –
Elementary economic analysis – Material selection for product design selection for a product, process planning.
Unit II INTEREST FORMULAE AND THEIR APPLICATIONS 9
Make or buy decision – Decisive factors – Techniques used - Value engineering –VE process - Time value of money,
Interest, Interest rate, Cash flow diagrams, Terminology and symbols Interest formulae relating present and future
equivalent values of single cash flow- Interest formulae relating a uniform series (annuity) to its present and future
worth (sinking fund factor, payment Present worth factor and capital recovery factor) - Interest formulae relating an
arithmetic gradients and geometric gradients to its present and annual worth - Nominal and Effective interest rates.
Unit III METHODS FOR MAKING ECONOMY STUDIES 10
Methods: Present worth method – Future worth method – Annual worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow
diagram and cost dominated cash flow diagram for all the above three methods) – Rate of return method (Internal
and External) - Payback method - Selection among alternatives – different revenues and identical lives - identical
revenues and different lives - different revenues and different lives
Unit IV REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS 10
Introduction – Reasons for replacement – Types of maintenance - Terminology used in replacement study - types of
replacement problem, determination of economic life of an asset, Replacement of an asset with a new asset –
capital recovery with return and concept of challenger and defender, Simple probabilistic model for items which fail
completely – Individual replacement policy – Group replacement policy.
Unit V DEPRECIATION 7
Introduction – Depreciation terminology, Methods: Straight line method of depreciation, declining balance method
of depreciation-Sum of the years digits method of depreciation, sinking fund method of depreciation/ Annuity
method of depreciation, service output method of depreciation-Evaluation of public alternatives- Benefit/Cost
analysis - Inflation – Effects of inflation - Inflation adjusted decisions –Examples on comparison of alternatives and
determination of economic life of asset.
Text Book:
1. Zahid A Khan, Arshad N. Siddiquee, Brajesh Kumar, Mustafa H. Abidi, “Principles of Engineering Economics with
Applications”, Cambridge University Press, 2nd Edition, 2018
Reference Book:
1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2014
2. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 6th Edition2015.
3. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis”, Oxford University Press, 12th
Edition, 2013.
4. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Pearson, 6th Edition2014.
5. Grant.E.L, Ireson.W.G, and Leavenworth, R.S, “Principles of Engineering Economy”, Wiley, 8th Edition1990.
6. Smith, G.W., “Engineering Economy”, Iowa State Press, 4th Edition1987.
PAGE 177
19MEP08 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND PSYCHOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• principles and functions of management and psychological concepts.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the scope of Management.
• Gain the knowledge about planning and organizing.
• Understand the Concept of Directing and Controlling.
• Become familiar with the basic Psychological concepts.
• Become familiar with cognitive Psychology.
Unit I NATURE OF MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction to Management – Nature and scope of Management - Definitions of Management by various schools –
Management an Art or Science - Functions of management – Role of managers - types of managers – managerial
roles and skills – Evolution of Management – Contribution of F.W. Taylor, Henri Fayol and Contingency Approach –
Current trends and issues in Management.
Unit II PLANNING AND ORGANISING 9
Nature and purpose of Planning process – Types of plans – Steps in Planning - Objectives – Management by
Objectives (MBO) – The nature and purpose of Strategies and Policies – The strategic Planning process – Rational
Decision making – Importance – Decision making steps and process – Decision making under certainty, uncertainty
and risk. Formal and informal organization – Organizational level – span of management - Departmentalization –
Matrix Organization – Strategic business units - authority and power – Centralization and decentralization.
Unit III DIRECTING AND CONTROLLING 9
Staffing – Selection Process – Performance appraisal – Organizational Development - Communication – Process of
communication – Barrier in communication – Effective communication – Communication and Information
Technology (IT). System and process of controlling – Budgetary and non - Budgetary control techniques – Use of
computers and IT in Management control – Direct and preventive control – Reporting.
Unit IV INTRODUCTION TO PSYCHOLOGY 9
Psychology Definition – Roots of Psychology – Key issues and Controversies of Psychology – Psychological Research
– Scientific method – Theories – Hypotheses – Psychological Research – Critical Research issues - Brain and
Behavior – Nervous system and Endocrine System – Methods to study the Brain – States of Consciousness - Sleeping
and Dreaming – Morality.
Unit V COGNITIVE PSYCHOLOGY 9
Learning - Classical Conditioning - Operant Conditioning - Thorndike’s Law of Effect - Cognitive Approaches to
Learning: Latent Learning - Observational Learning. The Foundations of Memory - Sensory Memory - Short-Term
Memory - Working Memory - Long-Term Memory - Recalling Long-Term Memories - Retrieval Cues - Levels of
Processing - Explicit and Implicit Memory - Flashbulb Memories - Constructive Processes in Memory – Forgetting -
Proactive and Retroactive Interference - Memory Dysfunctions - Cognition and Language - Thinking and Reasoning -
Problem Solving – Intelligence - Theories of Intelligence - Variations in Intellectual Ability - Group Differences in
Intelligence
Text Book:
1. Herald Koontz and Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited,
10th Edition, 2015.
2. Robert S. Feldman, “Understanding Psychology”, McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, 10th Edition, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 10th Edition, 2009.
2. Miner J.B, “Industrial/Organizational Psychology”, McGraw Hill NY, 1992.
3. Aamodt M.G, “Industrial Organizational Psychology: An Applied Approach”, Wadsworth/Thompson: Belmont,
C.A, 5th Edition, 2007.
PAGE 178
19MEP09 DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS L T P C

Course Objective:
• design experiments to a problem situation using traditional experimental designs as well as Taguchi Methods.
• conducting experiments and analyze the data to determine the optimal process parameters that optimize the
process.
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate the fundamentals of experimental designs.
• Design single factor experiments.
• Carry out factor designs.
• Analyse the 2K designs.
• Apply the Taguchi Methods.
Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPERIMENTAL DESIGNS 9
Hypothesis testing – single mean, two means, dependant/ correlated samples – confidence intervals,
Experimentation – need, Conventional test strategies, Analysis of variance, F-test, terminology, basic principles of
design, steps in experimentation – choice of sample size – Normal and half normal probability plot – simple linear
regression, testing using Analysis of variance.
Unit II SINGLE FACTOR EXPERIMENTS 9
Completely Randomized Design - effect of coding the observations - model adequacy checking - estimation of model
parameters, residuals analysis - treatment comparison methods - Duncan’s multiple range test, testing using
contrasts- Randomized Block Design – Latin Square Design - Graeco Latin Square Design.
Unit III FACTORIAL DESIGNS 9
Main and Interaction effects - Two and three factor full factorial designs - Fixed effects and random effects model -
Rule for sum of squares and Expected Mean Squares - 2K Design with two and three factors - Yate’s Algorithm -
fitting regression model - Randomized Block Factorial Design.
Unit IV SPECIAL EXPERIMENTAL DESIGNS 9
Blocking and Confounding in 2K Designs - blocking in replicated design - 2K Factorial Design in two blocks - Complete
and partial confounding - Confounding 2K Design in four blocks - Two level Fractional Factorial Designs - one-half
fraction of 2K Design, design resolution, Construction of one-half fraction with highest design resolution, one-
quarter fraction of 2K Design.
Unit V TAGUCHI METHODS 9
Design of experiments using Orthogonal Arrays (OA), Data analysis from Orthogonal experiments Response Graph
Method, ANOVA - attribute data analysis - Robust design - noise factors, Signal to noise ratios, Inner/outer OA
design.
Text Book:
1. Krishnaiah K, and Shahabudeen P, “Applied Design of Experiments and Taguchi Methods”, PHI, India, 2012.
2. Douglas C. Montgomery, “Design and Analysis of Experiments”, John Wiley & sons, 10th Edition, 2019.
Reference Book:
1. Phillip J. Ross, “Taguchi Techniques for Quality Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, India, 2012.
2. Box, G. E., Hunter, W.G., Hunter, J.S., Hunter, W.G., “Statistics for Experimenters: Design, Innovation, and
Discovery”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2005.
PAGE 179
19MEP10 LITHOGRAPHIC PROCESSES L T P C

Course Objective:
• The fundamentals of clean room and nano fabrication by optical projection lithography.
• Printing the pattern with a radiation source.
• Printing with soft lithographic concepts.
Course Outcome:
• Emphasize about the importance of clean room and the necessity of photo masks.
• Understand the lithographic process at the pre-exposure stage.
• Explain about the different exposure methods to achieve lithography.
• Develop economically viable lithography techniques.
• Know the developments in the field of lithography.
Unit I BASIC PROCESS 9
Introduction to micromachining and lithography - Overview of Lithography - introduction to semiconductor
processing - necessity of a clean room - different types of clean rooms - maintenance of a clean room - Optical
Pattern Formation - Aerial Images – light focus – Photoresists - Positive and Negative Resists -Adhesion Promotion -
Resist Spin Coating, Soft bake, and Hard bake – Photochemistry – Acid Catalyzation - Development and Post-
Exposure - Line-Edge Roughness - Multilayer Resist Processes - Methods for Addressing the Problems of Reflective
Substrates
Unit II PRE-EXPOSURE STAGE 10
Wafer Steppers -Light Sources - Illumination Systems - Reduction Lenses - Autofocus Systems – Scanning - Dual-
Stage Exposure Tools – Overlay Alignment Systems - Overlay Models – Matching – Process-Dependent Overlay
Effects.
Masks and Reticles – Mask Blanks – Mechanical Optical-Pattern Generators - Electron Beam Lithography and Mask
Writers - Optical Mask Writers - Resists for Mask Making - Phase-Shifting Masks – Etching – Pellicles – Mask-Defect
Inspection and Repair.
Unit III RADIATION EXPOSURE AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Radiation Exposure - Electron Beam Performance,Exposure Equipment - Electron Beam-Resist Interaction-
Registration - Proximity Effects - Radiation Damage - Developing Resist Images - General Mechanisms - PMMA
Developer Sensitivity - Development of Negative Resists - Dry Development - Post bake - Physical Chemistry of
Postbake - Chemical Reactions in Postbake - Other Methods of Hardening.
Unit IV ECONOMICS OF LITHOGRAPHY 8
Metrology in lithography - Linewidth Measurement – Scatterometry - Measurement of Overlay -Capital costs –
Consumables - Mask costs – Rework costs – Metrology costs - Maintenance costs - Labour costs - Facilities cost –
Strategies to reduce cost.
Unit V MODERN LITHOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES 9
Extreme Ultraviolet Lithography - Background and Multilayer Reflectors - EUV Masks, Sources, Illuminators, Optics,
Resists - Proximity X-ray Lithography - Electron-Beam Direct-Write Lithography - Ion-Projection Lithography - Imprint
Lithography - Directed Self-Assembly - Future of Lithography.
Text Book:
1. Harry J. Levinson, “Principles of Lithography, 4th Edition” (SPIE Press Monograph, Vol. PM198), 2019
2. Wayne M. Moreau, “Semiconductor Lithography: Principles, Practices, and Materials”, Springer, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Chris Mack, “Fundamental principles of optical lithography: The science of micro fabrication”, Wiley 2008.
2. M. Madou, “Fundamentals of micro fabrication”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, e book 2018.
3. Stepanova, Maria, “Nano fabrication techniques and principles”, Dew, Steven (Eds.) Springer, 2012.
4. John A. Rogers & Hong H. Lee, “Unconventional nano patterning techniques and applications”, A John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., 2009.
5. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS: Systems, devices and structures”, CRC Press LLC, 2002.
6. Zheng Cui, “Nano fabrication – Principles, capabilities and limits”, 2nd edition, Springer Science, 2017.
7. Mark J. Jackson, “Micro fabrication and nano manufacturing”, CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group, 2006.
PAGE 180
19MEP11 THERMAL TURBOMACHINES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To instruct the importance of the principles of various turbo machines.
• To understand the principles, operations and applications of different types of turbo machinery components.
• To design the components of various system in turbomachines.
Course Outcome:
• Have a fundamental understanding on basic concepts and operating principles of turbo machines.
• Be able to understand the design procedure of centrifugal fans and blowers.
• Recognize the importance and to understand the concept of Centrifugal compressor
• Familiar with the concepts and applications of Axial flow compressor
• Acquire knowledge about principles, operations and applications of Axial and Radial flow turbines
Unit I PRINCIPLES OF TURBO MACHINES 9
Introduction to turbo machines-Energy transfer between fluid and rotor-classification of fluid machinery- specific
speed-applications-stage velocity triangles-work and efficiency.
Unit II CENTRIFUGAL FANS AND BLOWERS 9
Types- stage and design parameters-flow analysis in impeller blades-design procedure of centrifugal fans and
blowers- volute and diffusers- losses- characteristic curves and selection, fan drives and fan noise, fan testing,
blower regulations- throttling control.
Unit III CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR 9
Construction details- design procedure of centrifugal compressor-Impeller flow losses- slip factor- diffuser Analysis -
losses and performance curves.
Unit IV AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSOR 9
Stage velocity diagrams- enthalpy entropy diagrams- design procedure of axial flow compressor- stage losses and
efficiency-work done, simple stage design problems and performance characteristics.
Unit V AXIAL AND RADIAL FLOW TURBINES 9
Stage velocity diagrams- reaction stages- design procedure of axial and radial flow turbines-losses and Coefficients,
Blade design principles, testing and performance characteristics.
Text Book:
1. Yahya, S.M., “Turbines, Compressors and Fans”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 4th edition, 2017.
Reference Book:
1. Bruneck, “Fans”, Pergamom Press, 1973.
2. Earl Logan, Jr., “Handbook of Turbomachinery”, Marcel Dekker Inc., 2003.
3. Dixon, S.I., “Fluid Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Turbomachinery”, Pergamon Press, 2014.
4. Shepherd, D.G., “Principles of Turbomachinery”, Macmillan, 1969.
5. Stepanpff, A.J., “Blowers and Pumps”, John Wiley and Sons Inc. 2015.
6. Ganesan, V., “Gas Turbines”, Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Co., 3rd edition, 2010.
7. Gopalakrishnan .G and Prithvi Raj .D, “A Treatise on Turbo machines”, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
2008.
PAGE 181
19MEP12 FUEL CELL AND HYDROGEN TECHNOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Electrochemistry and Thermodynamics of fuel cells
• Working principle, Design and applications of fuel cells.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the basic concepts and application of fuel cells.
• Know the thermodynamics of fuel cells.
• Acquire knowledge on Electrochemistry of fuel cells.
• Familiar with the concepts of design and optimization of fuel cells.
• Understand the basics of utilizing hydrogen for fuel cell application.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO FUEL CELLS 9
Basic Principles - Classification – Alkaline, Proton Exchange Membrane, Direct Methanol, Phosphoric Acid & Molten
Carbonate, solid oxide, polymer electrolyte fuel cells – Parts - Fuel cell poisoning-application-Micro fuel cells &
portable power
Unit II THERMODYNAMICS 9
Basic Reactions, Heat of reaction, Enthalpy of formation of substances – Enthalpy change of a reacting. system -
Gibbs free energy of substances - Gibbs free energy change of a reacting system - Efficiency - Power, heat due to
entropy change, and internal ohmic heating.
Unit III ELECTROCHEMISTRY 9
Nernst equation and open circuit potential, pressure effect, temperature effect -Stoichiometric coefficients and
reactants utilization - Mass flow rate calculation – voltage and current in parallel and serial connection - Over-
potentials and polarizations - Activation polarization - Tafel equation and exchange current density - Ionic
conductivity, catalysts, Temperature and humidification effect, electro-osmotic drag effect.
Unit IV DESIGN AND OPTIMISATION 9
Geometries of fuel cells and fuel cell stacks-planar & tubular - Rate of Diffusion of reactants – Water flooding and
water management - Gas delivery and current collection - Bipolar plate configuration - Optimization of gas delivery
and current collection - Heat Removal methods.
Unit V HYDROGEN ENERGY 9
Hydrogen: as a fuel; Properties, Applications, Hydrogen production methods - Production of hydrogen from fossil
fuels, electrolysis, thermal decomposition, photochemical and photo-catalytic methods. Hydrogen storage methods
- Metal hydrides, metallic alloy hydrides, carbon nano-tubes – Storage Safety.
Text Book:
1. Shripad T. Revankar,Pradip Majumdar, “Fuel Cells: Principles, Design, and Analysis (Mechanical and Aerospace
Engineering Series)”, CRC Press, May 2014.
Reference Book:
1. James Larminie and Andrew Dicks, “Fuel Cell Systems Explained”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2nd Edition,2013.
2. B. Viswanathan and Aulice M. Scibioh, “Fuel Cells: Principles and Applications”,Universities Press, 1st Edition
2008.
3. Matthew M. Mench, “Fuel Cell Engines”, Wiley; 1st Edition, March 2008.
4. Collier J.G., and Hewitt G.F, “Introduction to Nuclear power”, Hemisphere publishing, New York. 2000.
5. Frano Barbir, “PEM Fuel Cells Theory and Practice”, Elsevier Academic Press, 2nd edition, 2012.
PAGE 182
19UEP01 BUSINESS COMMUNICATION L T P C

Offered by ENG (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• The importance of business communication
• Techniques and styles of business communication
• The language usage in marketing techniques and advertising
• Strategies to be a successful employee or employer in the workplace
• Using vocabulary in formal and informal business contexts
Course Outcome:
• Communicate appropriately in various business environment
• Know the techniques and styles of business communication
• Use apt language for marketing
• Analyze and adapt to working environment
• Write business correspondences with related terms and phrases
Unit I RUDIMENTS OF BUSINESS COMMUNICATION 9
Importance of Communication - Characteristics of Communication - Channels of Communication - Intrapersonal
Communication - Managerial Communication - Group Communication and Strategies - Role of Listening and
Speaking in Business Context - Technology Enabled Communication - Various Communication Devices and their
Usage - Ethics in Business Communication
Unit II BUSINESS COMMUNICATION – I 9
Basic Principles of Business Message Writing - Types and Approaches to Business Messages - Communication
Through Letters - Letter Formats - Application for Appointment - Order Letters - Enquiry Letters - Offers and
Quotations - Execution of Orders - Cancellation of Orders - Adjustment and Settlement of Accounts - Letter of
Complaints and Responding to Complaints - Forms of Communication: Fax, Memos, Circulars, Notices, E-mail and
Websites especially Blogs, Online Reviews, Ratings
Unit III BUSINESS COMMUNICATION – II 9
Questionnaire Preparation for Market Survey - Writing Business Plan and Proposal - Guidelines for Report
Preparation - Product-based Project Report Content development - Project Appraisal Techniques - Steps for Product
Analysis & Financial Analysis
Unit IV BUSINESS SKILLS 9
Case Studies - Finance Specific Scenarios - Team Building - Crisis Management - Customer Service - Leadership Skills
- Types of Leadership - Management Skills - Business Idioms and Phrases - Business Jargons
Unit V MARKETING AND ADVERTISING 9
Definition of Marketing and Advertising - Integrated Marketing Communication - Human Resource Communication -
Functions of Advertising - Persuasion Process - Sales Promotion: Tools and Techniques - Art of Negotiation -
Professional Blogs - Advertising in Media -Broadcast Media, Print Media, Support Media, Internet and Interactive
Media etc. - Implementation and Evaluation
Text Book:
1. Raman, Meenakshi & Prakash Singh. Business Communication. New Delhi: OUP, Second edition, 2017.
Reference Book:
1. Pal, Rajendra and J. S. Korlahalli. Essentials of Business Communication. 13th ed. India: Sultan Chand & Sons,
2011.
2. Sharma, Sangeetha. Entrepreneurship Development. 1st ed. New Delhi: PHI Learning Private Limited, 2017.
PAGE 183
19UEP02 WRITING FOR MASS MEDIA L T P C

Offered by ENG (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Understanding general functions, laws and ethics of media writing
• Objective and accurate news stories development in print media style
• Modes of media writing styles among radio, television news, print journalism and advertising
• Script for TV programmes and film editing process
• Trending and invincible digital media style of writing
Course Outcome:
• Understand media writing functions, ethics and responsibilities of media writing
• Develop print media style of writing news articles and stories
• Prepare and modify convergent news stories for multimedia platforms
• Know the various steps involved in TV programme and film making process
• Generate personal/official blogs, effective e-contents and e-posters
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO MEDIA WRITING 9
Definition of Mass Media - Their characteristics and Functions - Challenges in Mass Media Writing – Ways to
Overcome Obstacles - What Makes News - Copyright Issues and Libel/Defamation - News Values and Ethics - The
Writer and the Law - Obligations, Considerations and Qualities of a Media Writer - Media Writing Glossary
Unit II PRINT MEDIA 9
Writing for the Print Medium - The Characteristics of the Print Media - News - Types (Hard and Soft News) - Story
Structure - Basics of Reporting - Newspaper, Magazine, Newsletter - Types of Reporting - Writing Techniques &
Information Presentation Styles in Print - Op-ed - Letter to the Editor - Film Review - Book Review - Sports Review -
Photojournalism & the Place of Pictures in Print Writing – Headlines - Feature Writing
Unit III BROADCAST MEDIA & WRITING FOR RADIO 9
Similarities and Differences between Print and Broadcast Journalism - Writing for the Broadcast Media - Techniques
and Approaches to Broadcast Style - Broadcast Writing Tips - Key Elements of Radio Jockeying - Preparation of
Radio News - Characteristics of a Radio Script - Radio Feature - Documentary, Drama, Interview, Discussions, and
Commercials/Jingles - Future of Radio
Unit IV VISUAL MEDIA 9
Writing for Visuals (Television) - Functions of Visuals - TV News Script Format - Spots (TV ads ) and Creation of Spots
- Use of Formal/Informal/Conversational Language - Script Writing - Live News - Live Shows - Anchoring &
Interviews - Interviews and Talk Shows - Film - Dialogue, Language & Themes - Film Based Programmes -
Documentaries - Serials - Roles of Editors
Unit V DIGITAL MEDIA 9
Web Writing – Importance of Web Writing - Differences between Web Writing and other Journalism - Online
Journalism - Features - Interactivity - Headlines and Blurbs - Language Techniques for Search Engine Optimization
(SEO) - Writing Effectively for the Social Media - Editing for Effective User-Friendly Content - Blogs - E-
Advertisements - Elements of Advertising - Posters
Text Book:
1. Ceramella, Nick, and Elizabeth Lee. Cambridge English for the Media. UK: CUP, 2016.
2. Nair, Latha. English for the Media. India: CUP, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. Kershner, J.W. The Elements of News Writing. 2nd ed. Boston: Pearson/Allyn & Bacon, 2009.
2. Lieb, T. All the News: Writing and Reporting for Convergent Media. Boston: Pearson/Allyn & Bacon 2009.
PAGE 184
19UMP01 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To model and solve problems using linear and non-linear programming.
• To identify the job sequence to minimize the total cost.
• To solve decision making problems.
• To apply game theory for solving problems in engineering and technology.
• To design mathematical models as networks for some real time situations.
Course Outcome:
• Solve linear and non-linear programming problems.
• Model the n jobs through m machines with minimal cost.
• Optimize the decisions using trees.
• Solve n-person zero sum games.
• Apply the techniques of minimizing the project duration and cost.
Unit I LINEAR AND NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEM 9
Mathematical formulation of LPP – Graphical solution of LPP – General NLPP – Constrained optimization with
equality and inequality constraints.
Unit II SEQUENCING MODELS 9
Sequencing problems – Assumptions in sequencing problems – Processing n jobs through one machine - Processing
n jobs through two machines - Processing two jobs through m machines – Processing of n jobs through m machine -
Problems related to sequencing.
Unit III DECISION THEORY 9
Decision making problem – Decision making environment – Decisions under uncertainty – Decisions under risk –
Decision tree analysis – Decision making with utilities.
Unit IV GAME THEORY 9
Theory of games – Characteristics of games – Game models – Rules for game theory – Mixed strategies – n-person
zero sum games – Limitations of game theory.
Unit V NETWORK SCHEDULING BY PERT/CPM 9
Rules for network construction – Critical path analysis – Probability considerations in PERT – Distinction between
PERT and CPM – Resource analysis in network scheduling: Time-cost optimization algorithm.
Text Book:
1. Kanti Swarup, Gupta P.K and Man Mohan, “Operation Research”, 16th Edition, Sultan Chand & sons, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. Prem Kumar Gupta and Hira D.S., "Operations Research”, 6th Edition, S.Chand & Company Ltd, 2013.
2. Taha H.A., “Operations Research”, 9th Edition, Pearson India Education, 2016.
3. Sharma J.K., “Operations Research Theory and Applications”, 5th Edition, Macmillan, 2013.
PAGE 185
19UMP03 FUZZY SET AND ITS APPLICATIONS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To explain the basics of fuzzy Sets.
• To describe fuzzy Numbers and operations on fuzzy numbers.
• To apply defuzzification and fuzzification in sets.
• To define various relations in fuzzy sets.
• To solve problems using Fuzzy Decision Making
Course Outcome:
• Apply the fuzzy set concept in unclear situations.
• Use Arithmetic operations on fuzzy numbers
• Apply defuzzification technique in optimization problems.
• Identify the types of fuzzy relations.
• Obtain the solution for decision making problems using fuzzy theory.
Unit I BASICS OF FUZZY SET THEORY 9
Representations of fuzzy sets - Extension principle for fuzzy sets – Operations of fuzzy sets – Types of operations –
Fuzzy complements.
Unit II FUZZY NUMBERS AND OPERATIONS 9
Fuzzy arithmetic – Fuzzy numbers - Linguistic variables – Arithmetic operations on intervals – Arithmetic operations
on fuzzy numbers – Fuzzy equations.
Unit III FUZZIFICATION AND DEFUZZIFICATION 9
Features of the membership function – Various forms – Fuzzification – Defuzzification to crisp sets – α-cut for fuzzy
relations – Defuzzification to scalars.
Unit IV FUZZY RELATIONS 9
Fuzzy relations – Crisp versus fuzzy relations - Binary fuzzy relations – Binary relations on a single set - Fuzzy
equivalence relations – Fuzzy compatibility relations.
Unit V FUZZY DECISION MAKING 9
Fuzzy decision making – Individual decision making – Multiperson decision making – Multicriteria decision making –
Fuzzy ranking methods – Fuzzy linear programming.
Text Book:
1. George J. Klir and Bo Yuan, “Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic Theory and Applications”, Prentice Hall of India, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Ganesh M., “Introduction to Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy logic”, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
2. Timothy J. Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, 3rd Edition, Wiley Student Edition, 2010.
3. Zimmermann H.J., “Fuzzy Set Theory and its Applications”, Springer, 2013.
PAGE 186
19UMP04 LATTICE THEORY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To explain the basic concept of various kinds of lattices and its properties.
• To classify some spacial lattices.
• To introduce the basics of homomorphism between lattices.
• To apply the concepts of Boolean algebra and sub algebra.
• To describe switching theory.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the concept of lattices to the problems of data mining.
• Solve problems in computer networks using special lattices.
• Perform homomorphic encryption.
• Infer Boolean Algebra for the development of logic circuits.
• Apply the concept of Boolean Algebra to solve problems in switching.
Unit I BASICS OF LATTICES 9
Lattices as partially ordered sets -Two definitions of lattices- Hasse diagrams and their properties- Lattices as
algebraic systems- Sub lattices.
Unit II SOME SPECIAL LATTICES 9
Complete lattice – Bounded lattice - Complemented lattice - Distributive – Modular and non modular lattices with
example and properties- Ideal lattice.
Unit III CONGRUENCE LATTICE 9
Congruence relations- Congruence lattices - Homomorphism theorem and product of lattices – Congruence of direct
product of lattices.
Unit IV BOOLEAN ALGEBRAS 9
Boolean algebras as lattices - Various Boolean identities - The switching algebra with example - Sub algebra - Direct
product and homomorphism.
Unit V SWITCHING THEORY 9
Boolean forms and their equivalence- Midterm Boolean forms (excluding free Boolean algebras) - Sum and
products of canonical forms - Minimization of Boolean functions - Applications of Boolean algebra to switching
theory (using AND, OR and NOT gates) - The Karnaugh map method.
Text Book:
1. George Gratzer , “Lattice Theory: Foundations”, 1st Edition, Birkhäuser Basel, 2011.
2. George Gratzer, “General Lattice Theory”, 2nd Edition, Birkhäuser Basel, 2003
Reference Book:
1. Vijay K. Garg, “Introduction to Lattice Theory with Computer Science Applications”, 1st Edition, Wiley, 2015.
2. George Grätzer, “Lattice Theory: First Concepts and Distributive Lattices (Dover Books on Mathematics)”, Dover
Publications, 2009.
3. Davey B.A and Priestley H.A., “Introduction to Lattices and Order”, 2nd Edition, Cambridge University Press,
2002.
PAGE 187
19UMP05 GRAPH THEORY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To introduce the basic concepts of graph theory.
• To explain the basics of connectedness in graphs.
• To introduce the students about trees, their properties and their applications as models of networks.
• To identify types of digraphs and various matrix representations.
• To solve theoretical problems using algorithms based on graph structures.
Course Outcome:
• Describe the basic concepts of graphs.
• Discuss the connectivity in graphs.
• Solve problems in Network using tree structure.
• Classify the types of digraphs and the matrix representations.
• Apply algorithms to solve graph theoretic problems.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO GRAPH THEORY 9
Graphs and its types – Representation of graphs – Incidence and degree – Graph isomorphism – Subgraphs –
Operations on graphs.
Unit II CONNECTIVITY IN GRAPHS 9
Walks, trails, paths and circuits – Connectedness and components – Cut vertices and cut edges – Vertex connectivity
– Edge connectivity.
Unit III TREES 9
Characterisation of trees – Centers and centroids of a tree – Spanning trees – Fundamental circuits – Rank and
nullity – Spanning tree in a weighted graph.
Unit IV DIRECTED GRAPHS 9
Digraphs and its types – Directed path and connectedness – Matrix representation of digraphs – Paired comparisons
and tournaments.
Unit V BASIC GRAPH ALGORITHMS 9
Dijkstra’s algorithm – Warshall Floyd algorithm – Depth first search algorithm – Krushkals’s algorithm.
Text Book:
1. Narsingh Deo, “ Graph Theory with applications to Engineering and Computer Science”, 11th Reprint, Prentice-
Hall of India, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. John Clark and Derek Allan Holton, “A first look at Graph Theory”, Reprint, World scientific publishing company
incorporated, 2005.
2. Douglas B. West, “Introduction to Graph Theory “, 2nd Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, 2012.
PAGE 188
19UPP01 THIN FILMS TECHNOLOGY L T P C

Offered by PHY (Open Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• impart a sound basis for an understanding of vacuum technology.
• provide a fundamental knowledge on various principles and methods used in the synthesis of materials in thin
film form.
• introduce nucleation and growth mechanisms of thin films based on thermodynamics and molecular theory.
• acquire knowledge on growing thin films and measuring the thickness
• familiarize with physics and techniques involved in the measurement and characterization of thin films.
Course Outcome:
• Understand vacuum technology and vacuum pumps
• Acquire knowledge on physical methods of thin film technology
• Understand various chemical methods of thin film deposition
• Define nucleation and its consequences in growing a crystal.
• Characterize thin films usig different tchniques
Unit I VACUUM TECHNOLOGY 9
Fundamentals of vacuum, basic definition and pressure regions of vacuum, kinetic theory of gases mean free path,
types of flow, conductance, vacuum pumps and systems, rotary mechanical pump, roots pump, diffusion pump,
turbo molecular pump, sputter ion pump, measurement of vacuum, concept of different gauges, capacitance
gauges, Pirani gauge, ionization gauge and penning gauge, vacuum system components and operation.
Unit II PHYSICAL METHODS OF THIN FILM DEPOSITION 9
Thermal evaporation, resistive heating, flash evaporation, laser evaporation, rf-heating, co-evaporation, electron
bombardment heating, sputtering plasma, discharges and arc, sputtering variants, sputtering yield low pressure
sputtering, rf-sputtering, reactive sputtering, magnetron sputtering, magnetron configurations, bias sputtering,
evaporation versus sputtering.
Unit III CHEMICAL METHODS OF THIN FILM DEPOSITION 9
Electrodeposition, electrolytic deposition, electro less deposition, anodic oxidation, spray pyrolysis, spin and dip
coating, chemical vapor deposition (CVD), homogenous and heterogeneous process, CVD reactions, pyrolysis,
hydrogen reduction, halide disproportionation, transfer reactions, CVD processes and systems, low pressure CVD,
laser enhanced CVD, metal organic CVD (MOCVD).
Unit IV GROWTH OF THIN FILMS AND THICKNESS MEASUREMENTS 9
Introduction: nucleation and early stages of film growth, thermodynamic aspects of nucleation, capillary theory,
thin film growth modes Volmert, Weber (VW) growth, Frank-van der Merwe (FM) growth, Stranski-Krastanov
growth, thickness measurement, electrical methods, microbalance monitors, quartz crystal monitor, mechanical
method (stylus), optical interference methods, ellipsometry, interference fringes.
Unit V CHARACTERIZATION METHODS OF THIN FILMS 9
X-ray diffraction (XRD), scanning electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, energy dispersive analysis,
Auger electron spectroscopy, X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy, Rutherford backscattering spectroscopy, secondary
ion mass spectrometry.
Text Book:
1. Hartmut Frey.Hamid R.Khan,Hand book of Thinfilm Technology, Springer Verlag Berlin Heidelberg,2015.
2. M. Ohring, Materials Science of Thin Films: Deposition and Structure, 2nd Ed.,Academic Press (An Imprint of
Elsevier), 2002.
3. Kaufmann, Characterization of Materials, 2nd Ed., Wiley, 2003
Reference Book:
1. N.Yoshimura, Vacuum Technology: Practice for Scientific Instruments, Springer Publications, 2007.
2. Z.L. Wang, Characterization of Nanophase Materials, Wiley, 2000.
PAGE 189
19UPP02 CRYSTAL GROWTH AND SPECTROSCOPY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn the basics of nucleation and its related thermodynamic processes
• To Understand the various experimental techniques involved in crystal growth
• To know about Nonlinear optics in crystals and nano-scale materials
• To analyse the crystal using Infrared and Raman spectroscopy.
• To learn characterization techniques involved in crystal growth
Course Outcome:
• Understand the nucleation which leads to the crystal formation
• Explain the various conditions pertaining to the crystal growth techniques
• Accomplish the idea of nonlinear optics and nanomaterials
• Explain the IR and Raman spectroscopic techniques and their instrumentation
• Describe the various characterization techniques for the analysis of a crystal
Unit I BASICS OF NUCLEATION
Nucleation concept – Kinds of nucleation – Homogeneous and Heterogeneous nucleation – Gibbs – Thomson
equation – Kinetic theory of nucleation – Energy of formation of a nucleus – Equilibrium concentration of embryos
for different sizes – Secondary nucleation
Unit II GROWTH OF CRYSTAL
Growth of crystals from solutions – Solubility – Preparation of a solution – Saturation and Super-saturation – Low
temperature solution growth – Evaporation method – Temperature gradient method (Melt growth) – Electro
crystallization – Crystal growth from solid phase
Unit III NONLINEAR OPTICS AND NANOMATERIALS
Nonlinear Optics – Harmonic generation – Second Harmonic generation (SHG) – Phase matching – Phase
conjugation – Optical mixing – NLO crystals – Nano-scale materials – Nano crystals – Harmonic generation from
nano crystals and its application
Unit IV INFRARED AND RAMAN SPECTROSCOPY
Infrared Spectroscopy – Vibrating Diatomic Molecule – Diatomic Vibrating Rotator – Fourier Transform
Spectroscopy
Raman Spectroscopy – Classical Theory of Raman Effect – Polarization of Light and Raman Effect – Structure
Determination – Instrumentation
Unit V OTHER CHARACTERIZATION TECNHIQUES
X-ray methods – Production of X-rays and X-ray spectroscopy – Determination of crystalline particle size – Scanning
Electron Microscopy – Tunneling Electron Microscopy – Luminescence – Photoluminescence – Thermo
luminescence – Measurement of electrical conductivity – Measurement of dielectric constant.
Text Book:
1. Banwell, Collin N., McCash, Elaine M., Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy 20th Edn, Tata McGraw Hill,
2004.
2. Ivan V Markov, Crystal Growth for Beginners, World Scientific, Singapore, 1996
Reference Book:
1. K.Sangwal, Elementary Crystal Growth, Saan Publisher, UK, 1994.
2. B.R.Pamplin, Progress in Crystal Growth Characterisation, Pergamon press Ltd., Y.K.1982.
3. J.C.Brice, Crystal Growth Processes, Blackie & Sons, London, 1986
PAGE 190
19UPP03 PHOTONICS L T P C
Course Objective:
• Learn about quantum confinement of materials.
• Learn about near field optics.
• Know plasmonics.
• Understand photonics in the field of biology.
• Know concepts of photonics.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the effects of quantization on the optical properties of semiconductors and metals.
• Know principles of surface plasmon resonance and meta materials.
• Understand fundamentals of near field optics and its applications.
• Learn interactions of light with biological systems.
• Know important features of photonic crystals and applications
Unit I QUANTUM CONFINED MATERIALS 9
Quantum dots – optical transitions – absorption-inter-band transitions - quantum confinement intra band
transitions - fluorescence/luminescence – photoluminescence/fluorescence optically excited emission –
electroluminescence emission.
Unit II PLASMONICS 9
Internal reflection and evanescent waves - plasmons and surface plasmon resonance (SPR) - Attenuated total
reflection - Grating SPR coupling - Optical waveguide SPR coupling - SPR dependencies and materials - plasmonics
and nanoparticles.
Unit III NEW APPROACHES IN NANO PHOTONICS 9
Near-Field Optics - Aperture near-field optics - Aperture less near - field optics - Near-field scanning optical
microscopy (NSOM or SNOM) - SNOM based detection of plasmonic energy transport - SNOM based visualization of
waveguide structures - SNOM in nanolithography - SNOM based optical data storage and recovery.
Unit IV BIOPHOTONICS 9
Interaction of light with cells – tissues - nonlinear optical processes with intense laser beams - photo induced effects
in biological systems - generation of optical forces - optical trapping and manipulation of single molecules and cells
in optical confinement - laser trapping and dissection for biological systems - single molecule biophysics - DNA
protein interactions.
Unit V PHOTONIC CRYSTALS 9
Important features of photonic crystals - Presence of photonic band gap - Anomalous group velocity dispersion -
Micro cavity - Effects in photonic crystals - Fabrication of photonic crystals - Dielectric mirrors and interference
filters - Photonic crystal laser - PC based LEDs - Photonic crystal fibers (PCFs) - Photonic crystal sensing.
Text Book:
1. Georg.A.Reider,Photonics An Introduction,Springer Cham Heidelberg, New York, 2017.
2. Sergey.V.Gapoenko,Introduction to Nano photonics.Cambridge University,2010.
3. H.Masuhara, S.Kawata & F.Tokunaga, “Nano Biophotonics”, Elsevier Science, 2007
4. V.M. Shalaev & S.Kawata, “Nano photonics with Surface Plasmons (Advances in Nano-Optics and Nano-
Photonics)”, Elsevier B.V, 2007.
Reference Book:
1. M.Ohtsu, K.Kobayashi, T.Kawazoe, & T.Yatsui, “Principles of Nano photonics (Optics and Optoelectronics)”,
University of Tokyo, Japan, 2003.
2. P.N. Prasad, “Introduction to Biophotonics”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.
3. J.D.Joannopoulos, R.D.Meade & J.N.Winn, “Photonic Crystals”, Princeton University Press, Princeton, 1995.
PAGE 191
19BTP06 SYSTEM BIOLOGY OF MICROBIAL NETWORKS L T P C

Offered by BT (Open Elective offered to BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Basic concepts of systems biology.  
• Terminologies and tools deployed in basic systems biology analysis.  
• Concepts of Biological Networks  
• Structure and properties of biological networks
• Modeling of networks for specific biological phenomena.
Course Outcome:
• Understanding the fundamentals of molecular biology and systems biology.  
• Introduce the need for measurement and modeling in systems approach.  
• Understand biological networks and their properties.  
• Understand network structure/diversity across various biological phenomena.  
• Apply systems biology in modeling specific cellular processes.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS BIOLOGY 9
Systems - scales, static/dynamic, approaches, limitations, reductionism - mathematical models vs. computational
analysis vs. statistics - Molecular biology fundamentals - Central Dogma: Replication, Transcription, Translation;
Signal Transduction - Complexity in biological systems - Modeling biochemical reactions: Deterministic Models,
Stochastic Models.
Unit II EXPERIMENTAL METHODS IN SYSTEMS BIOLOGY 9
Measurement in Biology: The biochemical paradigm, the genetic paradigm, the systems paradigm - Linking Models
and Measurement: the concepts of calibration and identifiability Informatics for experiments, data vs. metadata -
Measuring and modeling variance in biological processes - Computational Tools for Systems Biology: MatLab
Fundamentals, Systems Biology Module.
Unit III BIOLOGICAL NETWORKS – I 9
Basic concepts of transcription networks - Autoregulation: a network motif, feed-forward loop (FFL) network motif;
- Demand rules for gene regulation - Minimal Load - Selection Pressure; Network Structure Identification, Bottom-
up, Top-down approach.
Unit IV BIOLOGICAL NETWORKS – II 9
Structure of biological networks - Global structure of transcription networks - Metabolic Networks - Transcriptional
Regulatory Networks - Signaling networks and neuron circuits - Tools for kinetic modeling of biochemical networks -
Metabolic Databases and Simulation.
Unit V APPLICATION OF NETWORK PRINCIPLES IN BIOLOGY 9
Cell Signaling Networks: Logic-Based Models for the Analysis of Cell Signaling Networks - Robustness of Protein
Circuits: Biological chemotaxis, Response and Adaptation - Models of Adaptation, Robust and Fine-Tuned Model -
Patterning in development, Principle of robustness in Drosophila Patterning - Network motifs in development and
signal transduction - Network Motifs in neuronal network of C. elegans - Optimal Gene Circuit Design: Cost- Benefit
Analysis of Lac operon.
Text Book:
1. Brian P. I., “Mathematical Modelling in Systems Biology: An Introduction”, The MIT Press, 2013.  
2. Uri A., “An Introduction to Systems Biology: Design Principles of Biological Circuits”, Chapman & Hall/CRC,
 2007.  
3. Stan T.C., “An Introduction to Computational Biochemistry”, Wiley-Liss, Inc., 2002.
Reference Book:
1. Mark Ptashne and Alexander Gann, “Genes and Signals” Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2002.  
2. Steven Strogatz, “Introduction to Nonlinear Dynamics”, Addison- Wesley, 1994.  
3. Hiroaki K., “Foundations of Systems Biology”, The MIT Press, 2001.
Extensive Reading:
• Melody K. M. et al., “Logic-Based Models for the Analysis of Cell Signaling Networks”. Biochemistry, 49, 3216–
3224, 2010.  
• Daniel M. et al., “Wisdom of crowds for robust gene network inference”. Nature Methods, 9(8), 796-804, 2012.
 
• Rui A. et al., “Tools for kinetic modeling of biochemical networks”. Nat. Biotech. 24(6): 667-672, 2006.
PAGE 192
19BTP07 DIAGNOSTIC METHODS IN BIOTECHNOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basis for diagnosis of diseases
• Techniques for cytodiagnosis
• Role of imaging techniques in disease diagnosis
• Techniques involving DNA and proteins as a diagnostic tool
• Modern tools of diagnostics and their principles
Course Outcome:
• Able to summarize the principles of diagnosis
• Able to perform cell diagnostics
• Able to use different imaging techniques for diagnosis
• Able to design diagnostic protocols based on DNA and protein
• Able to apply the modern principles for diagnosis of diseases
Introduction, importance and historical perspective of development of molecular diagnostic technology, Specimen
collection (blood, urine, spinal fluid, saliva, synovial fluid and amniotic fluid), preservation, transportation.
Biomarkers, markers used in cell and molecule diagnosis such as antibody markers, CD markers, secreted
proteins/enzymes, cell specific antigens etc. single cell diagnostics.
Unit II TECHNIQUES USED IN CELL DIAGNOSTICS 9
Cytodiagnosis - detection of disease in cells using specialized staining methods and microscopically examining their
morphology and internal architecture, flow cytometry, immuno-histochemistry-– immuno fluorescence, immuno-
enzymatic and immuno-ferrtin techniques, immuno-electron microscopy, tissue in-situ hybridization, tissue
microarrays.
Unit III IMAGING TECHNIQUES 9
Properties of fluorescent molecules and use as probes, Fluorescent insitu hybridization, live-cell & live-animal
imaging, high-content screening, confocal, two-photon microscopy, intra-vital microscopy, autoradiography.
phosphor-imaging, chemi-luminescence, imaging based on staining and detection of nucleic acid and protein in gel
and blot – densitometer, CCD and laser based scanners, Surface Plasmon Microscopy
Unit IV DNA AND PROTEIN-BASED DIAGNOSTICS 9
Restriction endonuclease: introduction and Application in identification of pathogens, principles of development of
pathogen specific DNA probes, Southern and Northern hybridization. PCR and Q-PCR based diagnosis of diseases,
Real Time PCR, isothermal PCR, sequencing, DNA microarrays, spectral karyotype imaging, DNA methylation based
diagnosis, Western Blotting, ELISA, radio immuno assay (RIA) principles and applications, non isotopic methods of
detection of antigens-enhanced chemilluminescence assay.
Unit V DIAGNOSIS OF IMPORTANT DISORDERS/DISEASES 9
Cellular and molecular diagnosis of some important diseases like TB, malaria, HIV, typhoid, cholera, dengue, etc.,
and disorders like neural disorders, diabetes, genetic disorders. Molecular diagnostics in the evaluation of cancer.
Text Book:
1. Patricia M. Tille. “Bailey & Scott's Diagnostic Microbiology”, Elsevier Health Sciences, 14th Edition. 2016.
2. Rob Elles, Roger Mountford. “Molecular Diagnosis of Genetic Disease”, Humana Press, 2nd Edition, 2010.
3. John M. Walker, “The Protein Protocols Handbook”, Humana Press, 3rd Edition, 2009.
4. Andreas Hofmann and Samuel Clokie, “Wilson and Walker's Principles and Techniques of Biochemistry and
Molecular Biology”, Cambridge University Press, 8th Edition, 2018
5. David E. Bruns & Edward R. Ashwood & Carl A. Burtis, “Fundamentals of Molecular Diagnostics”, Saunders,
1st Edition, 2007
Reference Book:
1. Marry Hennon-Fletcher and Perry Maxwell. “Advanced techniques in diagnostics cellular pathology”, John
Wiley & Sons, 1st Edition, 2009.
2. William B. Coleman, Gregory J. Tsongalis. “Molecular Diagnostics: For the Clinical Laboratorian”, Humana Press,
2nd Edition, 2012.
3. Dongfeng Tan, Henry T.Lynch. “Principles of Molecular Diagnostics and Personalized Cancer Medicine”,
Lippincott William and Wilkins, 1st Edition, 2013.
4. J. Sambrook , E.F. Fritsch , T. Maniatis, “Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual”, 4th Edition, Cold Spring
Harbor Press, 2012
PAGE 193
PAGE 194
19BTP08 DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basic principles, advantages and disadvantages of controlled release systems.
• Different strategies used in the drug delivery of controlled release systems.
• Transdermal Drug Delivery System.
• Parenteral Drug Delivery Systems.
• Basics of targeted drug delivery systems.
Course Outcome:
• Acquire knowledge on basic principles of controlled release medications.
• Explain different approaches used in the formulation of modified release oral dosage forms.
• Gain knowledge on fundamental of skin permeation and various approaches used for formulation and
development of transdermal drug delivery system.
• Explain different approaches used for the development of Parenteral controlled release formulations.
• Describe the concept of targeted drug delivery systems.
Unit I FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES OF CONTROLLED DRUG RELEASE 9
Advantages and disadvantages of controlled release technology as compared to conventional drug delivery -
Systems for achieving controlled drug release including membrane encapsulated reservoir devices, Bioerodible
polymers, Matrix systems, Polymers containing pendant drug substituents and osmotic systems - New
developments in controlled release technology.
Unit II ORAL MODIFIED RELEASE DOSAGE FORMS AND DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEM 9
Types of modified-release dosage forms – Extended release, delayed release - Modified release technologies-
Coated Beads, Granules, and Microspheres Matrix & Reservoir systems, hydrogels, ion exchange, osmotic pressure
controlled, gastro retention, colon targeting.
Unit III TRANSDERMAL DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEM 9
Percutaneous absorption - Factors affecting percutaneous absorption - Enhancers - Percutaneous absorption
models; Design features - Advantages and Disadvantages - Examples - Transdermal scopolamine, Transdermal
nitroglycerin, Transdermal clonidine, Transdermal contraceptive system - Clinical considerations.
Unit IV PARENTERAL DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS 9
Parenteral routes of administration - Approaches used for the development of Parenteral controlled release
formulations; Parenteral emulsions & parenteral suspensions - Implants - Microparticulates - Liposomes - Niosomes,
Nanoparticles.
Unit V TARGETED DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS 9
Concept, advantages and disadvantages - Types of targeting and applications - Monoclonal antibodies- Hybridoma
cell production, Diagnostic and therapeutic applications – Cancer and autoimmune diseases - Problems related to
monoclonal antibodies.
Text Book:
1. Michael E.A., “Pharmaceutics, Design and manufacture of Medicines”, Churchill Livingstone, 4th Edition, 2013.
2. Loyd V. Allen., “Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy”, Pharmaceutical Press, 22nd Edition, 2012.
3. Loyd V. Allen., “Ansel’sPharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems”, Wolters Kluwer India Pvt.
Ltd.; Eleventh edition, 2018.
Reference Book:
1. Lachman, Lieberman. “The theory and Practice of Industrial Pharmacy”, CBS Publishers & Distributers, 1st
Edition, 2010.
2. Coelho J., “Drug Delivery Systems: Advanced Technologies Potentially Applicable in Personalised Treatment”,
Springer, 2013.
3. Hillary A. M., Lloyd A. W., Swarbrick J., “Drug Delivery and Targeting: For Pharmacists and Pharmaceutical
Scientists”, CRC press, 2001.
PAGE 195
19CEP07 COASTAL ENGINEERING L T P C

Offered by CIV (Open Elective offered to BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Various aspects of coastal engineering
• Analysis and design procedures used in the field of coastal engineering
• Various issues connected with coastal sediment transport
• Planning and designing of various coastal protection works
• Various types of modelling aspects
Course Outcome:
• Analyse the behaviour of various types of wave
• Analyse wave properties
• Estimate the coastal sediment transport
• Design shore defence structures
• Develop site specific physical and numerical models
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO COASTAL ENGINEERING 9
Introduction - Wind and waves - Sea and Swell - Introduction to small amplitude wave theory -Use of wave tables-
Mechanics of water waves - Linear (Airy) wave theory.
Unit II WAVE PROPERTIES AND ANALYSIS 9
Introduction to non-linear waves and their properties - Waves in shallow waters - Wave Refraction - Diffraction and
Shoaling - Hinds east wave generation models - Wave shoaling - Wave refraction - Wave breaking - Wave diffraction
random and 3D waves - Short term wave analysis - Wave spectra and its utilities - Long term wave analysis- Statistics
analysis of grouped wave data
Unit III COASTAL SEDIMENT TRANSPORT 9
Dynamic beach profile - Cross-shore transport - Along shore transport (Littoral transport) - Sediment movement
Unit IV COASTAL DEFENSE 9
Field measurement - Models, groins, sea walls, offshore breakwaters and artificial nourishment - Planning of coast
protection works - Design of shore defense structures - Case studies
Unit V MODELING IN COASTAL ENGINEERING 9
Physical modelling in Coastal Engineering - Limitations and advantages - Role of physical modelling in coastal
engineering - Numerical modelling - Modelling aspects - Limitations - Case studies using public domain models
Text Book:
1. V.Sundar, “Ocean Wave Mechanics: Applications in Marine Structures”, Wiley , 2017.
2. J.S.Mani, “Coastal Hydrodynamics”,PHI Learning pvt ltd, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. US Army Corps of Engineers, “Coastal Engineering Manual, Vol. I-VI”, Coastal Engineering Research Centre,
Department of the Army, Washington DC, 2006.
2. Kamphuis, J.W. “Introduction to Coastal Engineering and Management”, 2020.
Extensive Reading:
PAGE 196
19CEP08 ELEMENTS OF EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• The fundamentals of earthquake vibrations and response of structural buildings.
• The students to understand the concepts of engineering seismology.
• Analysis of buildings subjected to earthquake forces.
• The design guidelines for earthquake resistant masonry buildings.
• Recent developments in structural controls & Seismic strengthening of structures.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the basics of structural dynamics in analysis of structures subjected to earthquake.
• Recognize the concepts of engineering seismology.
• Compute earthquake forces for buildings and able to understand design concepts.
• Describe design guidelines for earthquake resistant masonry buildings.
• Adopt earthquake resistant features in the buildings.
Unit I BASICS OF EARTHQUAKE VIBRATIONS OF BUILDINGS 9
Static load v/s Dynamic load - Force control and displacement control - Simplified single degree of freedom system -
Modelling of buildings - Natural frequency and resonance - Responses of buildings to different types of vibrations
like free and forced - Damped and Undamped vibration - Response of building to earthquake ground motion -
Introduction to multi degree of freedom systems - Mode shapes only.
Unit II EARTHQUAKE BASICS 9
Cross section of Earth interior - Causes of Earthquakes - Plate tectonics- Faults - Consequences of earthquake -
Earthquake parameters - Magnitude & intensity scales - Seismic zones of India - Characteristics of ground motion
and attenuation - Earthquake recording instruments ‐ Seismograph - Seismogram - Damages caused during past
earthquakes.
Unit III DESIGN PHILOSOPHY 9
Philosophy of earthquake resistant design - Strength, stiffness, ductility and configuration - Seismic structural
configuration - Codal provisions of IS: 1893 (Part I) and IS: 875 (Part V) - Seismic load - Seismic coefficient method -
Base shear and lateral force distribution along height - Introduction to Response spectrum - Concepts only
Unit IV EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT MASONRY FEATURES 9
Un-reinforced Masonry - Basics of masonry - Units of masonry - Good construction practice - Earthquake resistant
features - Bands and vertical reinforcements - IS 4326, IS13827 and IS 13828 Codal provisions.
Unit V SPECIAL TOPICS 9
Concepts of Detailing of various structural components as per IS: 13920 provisions - Bases Isolation - Application of
base Isolation - Introduction to soil liquefaction - Repair of masonry and concrete structure.
Text Book:
1. S.K.Duggal, “Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures”, Oxford University Press, 2013.
2. Pankaj Agarwal and Manish Shrikhande, “Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. Chopra A K, “Dynamics of Structures - Theory and Applications to Earthquake Engineering”, Pearson Education
Ltd., 2019.
2. Clough R W and Penzien J, “Dynamics of Structures”, McGraw Hill, INC, 1993.
3. Taranath B S, “Wind and Earthquake Resistant Buildings - Structural Analysis & Design”, CRC Press, 2019.
4. Y-X. Hu, S-C. Liu, W. Dong, “Earthquake Engineering”, CRC Press, 2019.
Extensive Reading:
• IS:1893(Part I)-2002 - Criteria for earthquake resistant design General provision & Building.
• IS:13920-2016 - Code of Practice for Ductile Detailing of RC Structures.
• IS:4326-2013 - Code of Practice for earthquake resistant design & Construction of buildings.
• IS:13827-1993(R2006) - Improving Earthquake Resistance of Earthen Buildings -
• IS:13828-1993(R2008) - Guide lines for Improving Earthquake Resistance low strength masonry buildings.
PAGE 197
19CEP09 ENVIRONMENT AND ECOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• The basic knowledge about Environment and Ecology.
• The natural resources and the energy produced.
• The various environmental pollution and their effects.
• The various environment quality standards.
• The Environment Impact Assessment for infrastructure projects.
Course Outcome:
• Differentiate the various ecosystem and effects of human activities on environment.
• Classify the types of natural resources and the sources of energy produced.
• Explain the environment issue based on environmental pollution.
• Apply the Environment Quality Standards according to pollution types.
• Do the Environment Impact Assessment for infrastructure projects.
Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF ENVIRONMENT AND ECOLOGY 9
Environment - Ecology and Ecosystem - Food chain - Food web - Trophic level - Energy flow - Introduction, types,
characteristic features, structure and function - Forest - Grassland - Desert and Aquatic ecosystems - Effects of
human activities on environment, Agriculture, Housing, Industry, Mining and Transportation.
Unit II NATURAL RESOURCES 9
Water Resources - Mineral Resources - Soil, Material cycles - Carbon, Nitrogen and Sulphur Cycles - Energy -
Different types of energy - Conventional and Non-Conventional sources - Hydro Electric. - Fossil Fuel based, Nuclear,
Solar, Biomass and Geothermal energy and Bio-gas.
Unit III ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND CURRENT ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES OF IMPORTANCE 9
Concepts of Air Pollution, Water pollution, Land pollution, Noise pollution - Causes, effects and control measures -
Climate Change and Global warming effects - Acid Rain, Ozone Layer depletion, Photochemical Smog - Solid waste
management and Waste water treatment.
Unit IV ENVIRONMENT QUALITY STANDARDS 9
Ambient air quality standards - Water quality parameters and standards - Turbidity, pH, Suspended solids, hardness,
residual chlorine, sulphates, phosphates, iron and manganese, DO, BOD and COD - WHO and BIS norms.
Unit V ENVIRONMENT IMPACT ASSESSMENT 9
Introduction to EIA - Screening, Scoping, Public Participation - EIA for infrastructure projects - Highways - Dams -
Multi-storey Buildings - Water Supply and Drainage - Case studies.
Text Book:
1. Pandey SN and Misra SP, “Environment and Ecology”, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2018.
2. P.D.Sharma, “Ecology and Environment”, Rastogi Publication, 2015.
Reference Book:
1. Shukla, S.K. and Srivastava, P.R., “Concepts in Environmental Impact Analysis”, Common Wealth Publishers,
New Delhi, 1992.
2. Canter, L.W., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw-Hill Inc., 1997.
3. S. S. Dara, “A Text Book of Environmental Chemistry & Pollution Control”, S. Chand and Co., 2004.
4. Samir K. Banerjee, “Environmental Chemistry”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2009.
Extensive Reading:
• Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I & II”, Blackwell Science, 1999
PAGE 198
19CEP10 INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING L T P C

Course Objective:
• The fundamentals of Infrastructure planning and management.
• The Indian Urban Infrastructure
• The fundamentals of Infrastructure Privatization
• The strategies for Successful Infrastructure Project
• The Infrastructure Management
Course Outcome:
• Analyse the basic concepts of Strategies for Successful Infrastructure Project
• Plan and design the Urban Infrastructure Projects.
• Plan the Infrastructure Privatization by analysing existing strategies.
• Analyse the Strategies for Successful Infrastructure Project.
• Manage the Infrastructure project life cycles.
Unit I BASIC CONCEPTS OF INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Introduction to Infrastructure - Overview of the Power Sector - Water Supply and Sanitation - Road, Rail, Air and
Port Transportation Sectors - Telecommunications Sector in India.
Unit II URBAN INFRASTRUCTURE SCENARIO 9
Urban and Rural Infrastructure in India - Special Economic Zones - Organizations and Players in the field of
Infrastructure - Stages of an Infrastructure Project Life cycle - Overview of Infrastructure Project Finance.
Unit III PRIVATIZATION OF INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Historical Overview of Infrastructure Privatization - Benefits of Infrastructure Privatization - Problems - Challenges
in Privatization of Power, Water Supply, Road transport - Case Studies - Mapping and Facing the Landscape of Risks
in Infrastructure Projects - Economic and Demand Risks - Social environmental risk - Case of Vadodara Expressway-
Dabhol Power Plant Case Study.
Unit IV STRATEGIES FOR INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT 9
Risk Management Framework - Shaping the Planning Phase of Infrastructure Projects to mitigate risks - Strategies -
Designing Sustainable Contracts - Fair Process and Negotiation - Stakeholders on Infrastructure Projects -
Sustainable Development of Infrastructure.
Unit V INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGEMENT 9
Infrastructure Modeling - Life Cycle Analysis of Infrastructure projects - Capacity Building – Governments’ Role in
Infrastructure - Implementation - Infrastructure Management Systems.
Text Book:
1. Singh B, “Urban Infrastructure and Real Estate Management”, Surendra Publications, 2011.
2. Masanori Hamada, “Critical Urban Infrastructure Handbook”, CRC Press, 1st Edition, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. George E Peterson , Patricia Clarke Annez , “Financing Cities: Fiscal Responsibility and Urban Infrastructure in
Brazil, China, India, Poland and South Africa”, SAGE Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2007.
Extensive Reading:
• Infrastructure in India - https://www.india.gov.in/topics/infrastructure.
• India Infrastructure Report 2006: Urban Infrastructure - http://www.idfc.com/pdf/report/IIR-2006.pdf.
PAGE 199
19CEP11 TRANSPORT ECONOMICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• The basic valuation of transport projects.
• The various road user cost parameters.
• The transport system with different dimensions of economics.
• The various transport pricing parameters.
• The financial management of transport infrastructure system.
Course Outcome:
• Perform the economic analysis of transport projects
• Manage the various road user costs for a transport system
• Analyse the economics of transport system
• Fix the pricing for the public and private transport system
• Prepare the financial management plan for the transport infrastructure system
Unit I ECONOMIC EVALUATION 9
Need for Economic Evaluation of Urban Transport Projects – Principles of Economic Analysis – Methods of Economic
Evaluation – Comparison of various methods – Case Studies.
Unit II ROAD USER COSTS 9
Components of vehicle operating cost – Factors affecting vehicle operating cost – Value of Travel Time Saving,
Accident Cost, Sensitivity Analysis – Case Studies.
Unit III TRANSPORT ECONOMICS 9
Transport and Economics – Movement, Transportation and Location – The demand for Transport – The supply of
transport – Direct cost of transport, External cost of transport – Subsidy in Transport.
Unit IV TRANSPORT PRICING 9
Transport costs – Elasticity of demand – Average cost and Marginal cost pricing – Market Pricing and Market
Segmentation – Second best pricing – Pricing Policy – Congestion Pricing – Public and Private Transport Pricing –
Price Co-ordination.
Unit V FINANCING TRANSPORT SYSTEM 9
Characteristics of Transportation Infrastructure – Trends in Transportation Infrastructure – Investment Needs,
Options and Budgetary Support in Transport Sector – Existing Financing Practices – Build, Operate and Transfer
(BOT) – Principles and BOT variants - Costing Transport – Cost Recovery, Pricing – Alternative Financial Resources –
Special Purpose Vehicles.
Text Book:
1. Kadiyali L.R, “Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning”, Khanna Publishers, 1999.
2. S.K Khanna, and C.E.G. Justo and A. Veeraragavan, “Highway Engineering”, New Chand and Bros, Roorkee, 10th
edition, 2017.
Reference Book:
1. Robert F Baker, (eds), “Hand Book of Highway Engineering”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, New York, 1975
2. Hanspeter George, “Cost Benefit Analysis and Public Investment in Transport – A Survey Butterworths”,
London, 1973
3. The Institution of Engineers India (1997), Proceedings of the National Seminar on Infrastructure Development –
Strategies for Transportation Sector, New Delhi.
4. Button,K.J, “Transport economics”, Edward Elgar, Aldershot, England, 2010.
Extensive Reading:
• “Manual on Economic Evaluation of Highway Projects in India (IRC:SP-30-2009)”, Indian Roads Congress (IRC),
Ministry of Road Transport & Highways, 2009.
PAGE 200
19CEP17 ROAD SAFETY AND PRACTICE L T P C

Course Objective:
• Concepts of road safety, principles and the crash data analysis
• Road markings, traffic signs and signals for safe driving
• Traffic flow concepts at intersections
• Road safety management techniques
• Safe driving for the vulnerable road users
Course Outcome:
• At the end of the course, the students will be able to
• Enumerate the concepts of road safety, principles and the crash data analysis
• Apply the knowledge of road markings, traffic signs and signals for safe driving
• Apply the knowledge of traffic flow concepts at intersections
• Enumerate the road safety management techniques
• Enumerate the art of safe driving for the vulnerable road users
Unit I NATURE OF ROAD SAFETY 9
Introduction, definition - science based perspectives - Road safety demographics - Road user decisions -
Classification of accidents, causes Origin, characteristics and uses - of crash data - Contributing to crash factors,
countermeasures
Unit II ROAD MARKINGS 9
Functions, types, general principles - Carriageway marking, pedestrian crossing, cyclist crossing, marking at parking
space, object marking, word messages
Unit III TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS 9
Importance of traffic signs - need for international standardization - general principles of traffic signing Types of
traffic signs – purposes Advantages and disadvantages of traffic signals - signal faces, fixed time signals - Vehicle
actuated signals, concept of signal coordination
Unit IV ROAD SAFETY MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction to traffic control aids - Street furniture - types and purposes - Traffic islands and channelization –
general principle and purposes, street lighting - At grade intersection – types, conflict points - Grade separated
structures – types, advantages and disadvantages, traffic flow concepts - Traffic regulations – basic principles, Roles
of Government and NGO’s, Motor Vehicle Act – 1988 - Rules of Road Regulations – 1989, National Road Safety
Policy, Parking regulations - Road side facilities and amenities – general principles and purposes
Unit V SAFE DRIVING 9
Tips and suggestions for safe driving at urban and rural locations - safety in long journey, driving in night times, hill
roads and tunnels - vulnerable road user – regulatory measures for motor cycle and scooter riders - Common rules
for pedestrians and cyclists - Case studies
Text Book:
1. Kadiyali L.R, “Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, seventh edition, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. Elvik Rune, “The Handbook of Road Safety Measures”, Emrald Group Publishing Limited, 2nd revised edition
2009
2. Ashwini Bagga and Nisha Bagga, “Essentials of Road Safety”, Mayas Publishers, 2012
3. Highway Safety Code, Indian Road Congress, New Delhi, 1996
4. Transportation Planning Handbook, The Institute of Transportation Engineers,Prentice Hall, Englewood Clifts,
1992
5. Code of Practice for Road Markings, IRC: 35 – 1970, revised edition, 1990
6. Recommended Practice for Road Delineators, IRC:79 Indian Road Congress, New Delhi, 1981
7. 7. The Diver’s Handbook, Government of South Australia, published in 2015
8. 8. www.indiatransportportal.com, 2012
9. 9. http://www.morth.nic.in
10. 10. http://www.legislation.sa.gov.au
PAGE 201
19CSP05 SECURITY IN COMPUTING L T P C

Offered by CSE (Open Elective offered to BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To understand the basics of cryptography
• To learn to identify the vulnerabilities in programs and to overcome them
• To know about the different kinds of security threats in networks
• To study the security threats in databases
• To learn about the models and standards for security
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate knowledge of symmetric and asymmetric Encryption Algorithms like DES, AES and RSA and hash
functions and digital signatures for protecting messages and data.
• Secure programs and protect systems from malicious code
• Work with Firewalls, VPNs and IDSs to secure networks
• Identify the issues and solutions for implementing Security in Databases.
• Demonstrate knowledge of Bell Lapadula and Biba models and ISO 27000 family of standards
Unit I ELEMENTARY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9
Terminology and background – Substitution ciphers – Transpositions – Making good encryption algorithms –Data
Encryption Standard – AES encryption algorithm– Public key encryption– Cryptographic hash functions– Key
exchange – Digital signatures – Certificates
Unit II PROGRAM SECURITY 9
Secure programs – Non-malicious program errors – Viruses – Targeted malicious code – Controls against program
threat – Control of access to general objects – User authentication – Secure coding practices – Vulnerabilities in
web applications
Unit III SECURITY IN NETWORKS 9
Threats in networks – Threat analysis – Encryption – Virtual Private Networks – PKI – SSH – SSL – IPSec – content
integrity – Access controls – Wireless security – Honey pots – Traffic flow security – Firewalls – Intrusion detection
systems – Secure e-mail – Mobile Security
Unit IV SECURITY IN DATABASES 9
Security requirements of database systems – Reliability and integrity in databases – Two phase update –
Redundancy / internal consistency– Recovery– Concurrency / consistency– Monitors – Sensitive data – Types of
disclosures – Inference
Unit V SECURITY MODELS AND STANDARDS 9
Security architecture models – Bell LaPadula confidentiality model – Biba integrity model – Graham Denning access
control model – Harrison Ruzzo Ullman model – Computer Security Tools – ISO 27000 Family of Standards-Design
and Implementation of the Computer Architecture for Security
Text Book:
1. Charles P. Pfleeger, Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Security in Computing”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2015.
Reference Book:
1. Shuangbao Wang, Robert S.Ledley, “Computer Architecture and Security: Fundamentals of Designing Secure
Computer Systems”, Wiley, 2013.
2. Joachim Biskup, ”Security in Computing Systems: Challenges, Approaches and Solutions”, Springer-Verlag, 2009.
3. Brook S.E.Schoenfield, ”Securing Systems: Applied Security Architecture and Threat Models”, CRC Press, 2015.
4. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practices”, Prentice Hall, Fifth Edition,
2010.
5. Matt Bishop, “Introduction to Computer Security”, Addison-Wesley, 2004.
6. Michael Whitman, Herbert J. Mattord, “Management of Information Security”, Course Technology, Third
Edition, 2010
7. Matt Bishop, “Computer Security: Art and Science”, Addison-Wesley, First Edition, 2002
8. Michael Whitman, Herbert J. Mattord, ”Principles of Information Security”, Cengage Learning, Fourth Edition,
2011.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.owasp.org/index.php/Top_10_2010
• http://cwe.mitre.org/top25/index.html
• http://www.insecure.org
• http://www.27000.org
• www.intechopen.com/books/cryptography-and-security-in-computing
PAGE 202
19CSP06 SOCIAL NETWORKS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To gain basic knowledge on social networks.
• To explore the concepts of groups, networks and communities.
• To visualize social networks as social capital
• To understand the concepts of semantic web
• To learn case studies related to social networks.
Course Outcome:
• Visualize and segment social networks
• Explore groups, networks and communities
• To visualize social networks as social capital
• Model and aggregate social network data
• Develop semantic web applications using social network features
Unit I BASIC NETWORK CONCEPTS 9
Introduction – Individual members of networks – Whole social networks – Network Segmentation – Psychological
foundations of social networks
Unit II GROUPS, NETWORKS AND COMMUNITIES 9
Primary groups and informal systems – Asymmetric ties and the influence of external systems x – Organizations and
networks – The small world, circles and communities
Unit III NETWORKS AS SOCIAL CAPITAL 9
Networks and diffusion – Influence and Decision Making – Epidemiology – Tipping points and thresholds – Social
Capital: General idea – Individual level – An attribute of social systems – Ethical dilemmas of social network research
Unit IV THE SEMANTIC WEB AND SOCIAL NETWORKS 9
Key concepts of the Semantic Web – Electronic sources for network analysis: Electronic discussion networks – Blogs
– Online communities – Web based networks – Modelling and Aggregating social network data
Unit V CASE STUDIES 9
Developing Semantic Web applications with social network features: Sesame – Elmo – GraphUtil – Flink – Open
academia – Evaluating electronic data extraction for network analysis – Semantic-based Social Network Analysis in
the sciences
Text Book:
1. Charles Kadushin, "Understanding Social Networks: Theories, Concepts, and Findings”, First Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2012
2. Peter Mika, “Social Networks and the Semantic Web”, Springer Science & Business Media, 2017
Reference Book:
1. Stephen P Borgatti, Martin G. Everett, Jeffrey C. Johnson, ”Analyzing Social Networks”, First Edition, SAGE
Publications Ltd, 2013
2. Song Yang, Franziska B Keller, Lu Zheng, “Social Network Analysis: Methods and Examples”, First Edition, SAGE
Publications Ltd, 2016
Extensive Reading:
• http://nptel.ac.in
PAGE 203
19CSP07 CYBER SECURITY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To introduce cryptographic mechanisms
• To survey the attack techniques used in Cyberspace
• To explore the origin and propagation of malicious code
• To become familiar with the tools for analysis of malicious code
• To learn about the insider threats in local networks
• To manage the insider threats using various techniques
Course Outcome:
• Work with encryption and decryption techniques
• Identify the vulnerabilities and attacks in cyberspace
• Analyze the origin and behaviour of malicious code
• Detect intruders and insider attacks
• Mitigate insider threats by various techniques
Unit I CYBER SECURITY FUNDAMENTALS 9
Network and security concepts – Information assurance fundamentals – Basic cryptography –Symmetric encryption
– Public key encryption – Domain name system security – Firewalls –Virtualization – Radio frequency identification
Unit II ATTACK TECHNIQUES 9
Use of proxies – Tunnelling techniques – Fraud techniques – Threat techniques – Shell code – Integer overflow
vulnerabilities – Buffer overflow vulnerabilities – Format string vulnerabilities – SQL injection – Malicious PDF files –
Race conditions – Web exploit tools –DoS conditions – Brute force and dictionary attacks – Misdirection,
Reconnaissance and Disruption methods
Unit III MALICIOUS CODE 9
Self replicating malicious code – Worms – Viruses – Evading detection and elevating privileges –Obfuscation –
Virtual machine obfuscation – Persistent software techniques – Rootkits – Spyware –Attacks against user accounts –
Token kidnapping – Virtual machine detection – Stealing information and exploitation – Form grabbing – Man in the
middle attacks – DLL injection – Browser helper objects
Unit IV DEFENSE AND ANALYSIS TOOLS 9
Memory forensics – Honey pots – Malicious code naming – Automated malicious code analysis systems – Intrusion
detection systems –Types of Insider Attack- Insider Threat issues-Model of the Insider sabotage Problem-Mitigation
of Insider Sabotage problem
Unit V MANAGING INSIDER THREATS 9
Data theft–Detecting Insider Attacks- The Naive Bayes approach – Tamper Resistant Key-Store– Information Flow
Signature Checking– System Architecture including Trusted Computing Engine–Surviving Insider threats-Insider
Threat Mitigation via Access Control
Text Book:
1. James Graham, Richard Howard, and Ryan Olson (Eds), “Cyber Security Essentials”, CRC Press, 2011.
2. Salvator J.Stolfo, Steven M.Bellovin, Shlomo Hershkop, Angelos D. Keromytis, Sara Sinclair, and Sean W.Smith
(Eds), “Insider Attack and Cyber Security: Beyond the Hacker”, Springer, 2008.
Reference Book:
1. Vipin Kumar, Jaideep Srivastava, and Aleksander Lazarevic(Eds),”Managing Cyber Threats: Issues Approaches
and Challenges”, Springer, 2005.
2. Christian W.Probst, Jeffrey Hunker, Dieter Gollman and Matt Bishop(Eds), “Insider Threats in Cyber Security”,
Springer, 2010
3. Junaid Ahmed Zubairi and Athar Mahboob (Eds), “Cyber Security Standards, Practices and Industrial
Applications: Systems and Methodologies”, Information Science Reference (IGI-Global), 2012.
4. Maurizio Martellini, “Cyber Security Deterrence and IT protection for Critical Infrastructures”, Springer 2013.
5. John Vacca, “Cyber Security and IT Infrastructure Protection”, Elsevier, 2013.
Extensive Reading:
• http://csrc.nist.gov
• http://www.us-cert.gov
• https://www.cybrary.it/
• https://www.ncsc.gov.uk/guidance/10-steps-cyber-security
• https://www.sans.org/cybersecurity/
• http://www.its.ms.gov/Services/Pages/Security-Quizzes-Tests.aspx
PAGE 204
• https://www.etsi.org/technologies-clusters/technologies/cyber-security
PAGE 205
19CSP08 SEMANTIC WEB L T P C

Course Objective:
• To gain knowledge on the basic of semantic web, its architecture and technologies
• To learn the RDF-Related Technologies such as microformats, RDFa and RDFS
• To get exposed to web ontology language (OWL)
• To learn how to work with SPARQL query language
• To find out the importance of semantic web in social networks
Course Outcome:
• Understand semantic web basics, architecture and technologies
• Represent data from a chosen problem in XML with appropriate semantic tags obtained or derived from the
ontology
• Realize the semantic relationships among these data elements using Resource Description Framework (RDF)
• Design and implement a web service application that discovers the data and / or other web services via
the semantic web
• Discover the capabilities and limitations of semantic web technology for social networks
Data integration on the Web – Semantic Web: Concept – semantic web, linked data and the Web of Data – Building
block for the Semantic Web: RDF overview – Abstract model of RDF – RDF Serialization – Fundamental rules of RDF
– XML vs RDF
Unit II MICROFORMATS, RDFA, RDFS 9
Microformats – RDFa – GRDDL– RDFS: Overview – Core elements – Ontology concepts – Building the bridge to
Ontology (SKOS).
Unit III WEB ONTOLOGY LANGUAGE 9
OWL 1 Web Ontology Language – Basic Notions – Basic syntax forms – Defining classes and properties –
OWL 2 Web Ontology Language: New constructs for common patterns – Improved expressiveness for properties –
Extended support for data types – Punning and annotations – Other OWL 2 features.
Unit IV SPARQL 9
Overview – SPARQL 1.0 Query Language: SELECT, CONSTRUCT, DESCRIBE, ASK queries – SPARQL 1.1 Query
Language: SPARQL 1.1 Query – Federated query – Update – Other SPARQL 1.1 features
Unit V APPLIED SEMANTIC WEB 9
FOAF: Friend of a Friend – Core FOAF vocabulary and examples – Semantic markup – Facebook’s Open Graph
Protocol (OGP) – Twitter cards for structured information –Jena: A Semantic Web Framework for Java – Inferencing
using Jena
Text Book:
1. Liyang Yu, A Developer’s Guide to the Semantic Web, Springer, Second Edition, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. Grigoris Antoniou, Paul Groth, Frank van Harmelen, and Rinke Hoekstra, “A Semantic Web Primer”, MIT Press,
Third Edition, 2012.
2. Karin Breitman, Marco Antonio Casanova and Walt Truszkowski, “Semantic Web: Concepts, Technologies and
Applications”, Springer, 2010.
3. VipulKashyap, Christoph Bussler and Matthew Moran, “The Semantic Web: Semantics for Data and Services on
the Web (Data-Centric Systems and Applications)”, Springer, 2008.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/ontologies-semantic-web/introduction.html
• https://www.cambridgesemantics.com/semantic-university/introduction-semantic-web
• http://www.linkeddatatools.com/semantic-web-basics
• http://kmi.open.ac.uk/events/iswc08-semantic-web-intro/slides/02%20-%20Sean.pdf
• http://www.w3.org/2001/sw/
PAGE 206
19CSP09 FUNDAMENTALS OF DEEP LEARNING TECHNIQUES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To acquire knowledge on linear algebra and probability.
• To introduce the basics of machine learning techniques.
• To learn feed forward deep networks.
• To get exposure convolutional networks and sequence modelling.
• To explore probabilistic models and auto encoders.
Course Outcome:
• Work with linear algebra and probabilistic distributions.
• Apply machine learning techniques for real world problems.
• Design feed forward deep networks to meet out application requirement.
• Implement convolutional networks and sequence modelling for problem solving.
• Use probabilistic models and auto encoders
Unit I APPLIED MATHEMATICS 9
Linear Algebra: Scalars, Vectors, Matrices and Tensors – Multiplying Matrices and Vectors – Identity and Inverse
Matrices – Norms – Trace operator – Determinant. Probability and Information Theory: Random Variables –
Probability Distributions – Marginal Probability – Conditional Probability - Expectation, Variance and Covariance
Unit II MACHINE LEARNING BASICS 9
Perceptron – Adaline – Madaline – Training Algorithm for Pattern Association – Hetero-associative memory –Auto-
associate Net – Iterative Auto-associative net – Bidirectional Associative Memory. Numerical Computation:
Overflow and underflow – Gradient based Optimization – Constrained Optimization - Example: Linear Least Squares.
Machine Learning: Learning Algorithms, Supervised and Unsupervised learning - Capacity, Overfitting and
Underfitting – Hyperparameters and Validation Sets
Unit III DEEP NETWORKS 9
Deep Feed forward Networks: Learning XOR – Gradient based learning – Hidden Units. Regularization: Parameter
Norm Penalties – Dataset augmentation – Early Stopping – Parameter Typing and Parameter Sharing – sparse
representation. Optimization for training Deep models: Learning Vs Optimization – Stochastic Gradient Descent
algorithm – Momentum.
Unit IV CONVOLUTIONAL NETWORKS AND SEQUENCE MODELLING 9
Convolutional Networks – Convolution operation – Motivation Pooling – Basic Convolution function – Algorithms –
Recurrent and recursive nets: Recurrent neural networks – Bidirectional RNN – Recursive Neural networks – Auto
regressive networks
Unit V PROBABILISTIC MODELS AND AUTO ENCODERS 9
Structured Probabilistic models : Challenges of unstructured modelling – using graphs to describe model structure –
Learning about dependencies – inference – Deep learning approach – Monte carlo models – Linear Factor models
and Auto encoders
Text Book:
1. Yoshua Bengio and Ian J.Goodfellow and Aaron Courville, "Deep Learning", MIT Press, 2015.
Reference Book:
1. Li Deng, Dong Yu, "Deep Learning: Methods and Applications", now publishers, 2014.
2. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks and Learning Machines”, Prentice Hall, Pearson Education, 3rd edition, 2009.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.deeplearning.net
• www.cs.toronto.edu/~fritz/absps/imagenet.pdf
• http://neuralnetworksanddeeplearning.com/
PAGE 207
19ECP06 ENGINEERING ACOUSTICS L T P C

Offered by ECE (Open Elective offered to BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To get acquainted with the physics of acoustic wave propagation, human hearing system and acoustic waves
characteristics
• To familiarize architectural acoustics, noise control, environmental standards
• To be aware of the transducers used for acoustic signals
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the linear acoustic wave equation in various media.
• Evaluate the parameters related to acoustic wave propagation
• Analyze speech production and perception mechanisms
• Design architectures with specified acoustic levels.
• Analyze the operation of loudspeakers and microphones.
Unit I ACOUSTIC WAVES 9
Linear wave equation– speed of sound in fluids –Harmonic plane waves –Energy density –Acoustic intensity –
Specific acoustic impedance –Spherical waves –Describer scales – Cylindrical waves –Reflection and Transmission:
Changes in Media-Transmission from one fluid to another normal and oblique incidence.
Unit II RADIATION AND RECEPTION OF ACOUSTIC WAVES 9
Radiation from pulsating sphere –Acoustic reciprocity –Continuous line source –Radiation impedance –Fundamental
properties of transducers –Absorption and attenuation of sound: Absorption from viscosity –complex sound speed
and absorption –Classical absorption coefficient.
Unit III HEARING, SPEECH AND FILTERS 9
Mechanism and Properties of hearing – Thresholds - Equal Loudness level contours – critical bandwidth – masking –
Beats and aural harmonics – pitch and frequency- Speech production mechanism- nature of speech signal -
Reflection and transmission of waves in pipe – Detecting signals in noise- Acoustic filters –Low pass, high pass and
band pass filters.
Unit IV ARCHITECTURAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL ACOUSTICS 9
Sound in enclosure –model for sound in a room –Reverberation time –Sabine, sound absorption materials –
Measurement of the acoustic output of sound sources in live rooms –Acoustics factor in architectural design.
Environmental Acoustics: speech interference –Highway noise –Noise induced hearing loss – measurement of sound
isolation- design of portions
Unit V TRANSDUCTION OF ACOUSTIC SIGNALS 9
Transducer as an electrical network –Canonical equation for the electrostatic and moving coil transducers –
Transmitters –Moving coil loud speaker –Loudspeaker cabinets –Horn loud speaker, Receivers –Condenser
Microphone –Moving coil, Piezoelectric –carbon microphone.
Text Book:
1. Lawrence E.Kinsler, Austin, R.Frey, Alan B.Coppens, James V.Sanders, “Fundamentals of Acoustics”, 4th Edition,
Wiley student edition, 2000.
Reference Book:
1. Beranek&Mellow, “Acoustics: Sound Fields and Transducers”, Academic Press, 2012.
2. Frank J. Fahy, “Foundations of Engineering Acoustics”, Elsevier Academic press, 2005.
3. L.R.Rabiner, R.W.Schaffer, “Digital Processing of Speech signals”, Pearson Education, First Edition,2008
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.acoustics–engineering.com
• http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Engineering_Acoustics
PAGE 208
19ECP07 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To be aware of the Challenges and architecture of Wireless Sensor Networks.
• To get familiarized with different communication protocols and network components in Wireless Sensor
Networks.
• To provide up-to-date knowledge of wideband wireless communication techniques.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the significance of sensor network mechanisms.
• Explain the various architectures of sensor network
• Describe the roles of supporting communication protocols as how they assist Wireless Sensor Networks.
• Compare the performance of different techniques applied for node positioning and localization in wireless
sensor network.
• Explain how transport layer mechanisms applied to achieve the required QoS.
Unit I OVERVIEW OF WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 8
Definition, advantages, Applications with examples – Types of applications – Challenges for Wireless sensor
networks – Characteristic requirements – required mechanisms – Comparison of Mobile ad hoc networks and
wireless sensor networks.
Unit II WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK ARCHITECTURES 9
Single–Node Architecture – Hardware Components – Energy Consumption of Sensor Nodes – Operating Systems
and Execution Environments – Network Architecture – Sensor Network Scenarios – Optimization Goals and Figures
of Merit – Design Principles and service interfaces – Gateway Concepts.
Unit III COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS 10
Physical Layer and Transceiver Design Considerations – MAC Protocols – Low Duty Cycle Protocols and Wakeup
Concepts – Schedule – based protocols – Address and Name Management – Assignment of MAC Addresses – Time
synchronization, Routing Protocols – Energy Efficient Unicast, Broadcast and multicast, Geographic routing – Data–
centric Routing.
Unit IV LOCALIZATION AND POSITIONING 9
Properties of localization and positioning – Proximity – Trilateration and Triangulation – Single–hop localization –
Positioning in multi–hop environments, Topology Control – Controlling topology in flat networks – Hierarchical
networks by dominating sets and clustering – Combining hierarchical topologies and power control – Adaptive node
activity
Unit V TRANSPORT LAYER AND QUALITY OF SERVICE 9
Coverage and deployment – Reliable data transport – Single packet delivery – Block delivery – Congestion control
and rate control – Advanced application support – Security and Application specific support
Text Book:
1. Holger Karl & Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley, 2007.
2. Feng Zhao & Leonidas J. Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks– An Information Processing Approach", Elsevier,
2004.
Reference Book:
1. KazemSohraby, Daniel Minoli, &TaiebZnati, “Wireless Sensor Networks Technology, Protocols and
Applications”, John Wiley, 2011.
2. Anna Hac, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley, 2003.
Extensive Reading:
• http://arri.uta.edu/acs/networks/WirelessSensorNetChap04.pdf
• http://ceng.usc.edu/~bkrishna/research/talks/WSN_Tutorial_Krishnamachari_ICISIP05.pdf
• http://www.ece.rochester.edu/courses/ECE586/readings/perillo.pdf
• http://www.ida.liu.se/labs/rtslab/courses/wsn/Basics.pdf
PAGE 209
19ECP08 DATA HIDING TECHNIQUES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To be aware of different cover media available and the ways and means for steganographic embedding
• To know the need for steganalytic–aware steganography
• To be familiar with steganographic and watermarking applications
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the pros and cons of hiding information in various media
• Characterize the steganographic channel created due to different steganographic techniques
• Deploy the right steganographic software for the problem at hand
• Apply the appropriate steganographic and watermarking technique for a given problem scenario
• Apply different steganographic procedures for societal applications
Unit I STEGANOGRAPHIC COVER MEDIA 9
Data Hiding – Properties of Steganographic Communications –Methods for hiding information – Hiding in text – Disk
space – Network Packets – Software and Circuitry – audio and images – Hiding information in images – Hiding data
in the noise – Watermarking Techniques.
Unit II STEGANOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES 9
Stegnaography by Cover Selection – Synthesis and Modification – Naïve Steganography – LSB embedding – LSB
Matching (±1 embedding) – Palette Embedding –Distortionless Embedding – QIM – Spread Spectrum – Model
preserving steganography – Matrix Embedding using binary Hamming Codes.
Unit III STEGANOGRAPHIC CHANNEL AND SOFTWARE 9
The Steganographic Channel – Frameworks for Data Hiding – Signal Processing Framework – Data Hiding from a
Communications Perspective – Relationship between Communications and Signal Processing Frameworks – Issues in
Information Hiding.
EzStego – Hide and Seek – Hide4PGP- Jsteg-Jpeg – Mandelsteg- Steganos- Stego Dos- S-Tools.
Unit IV ATTACKS ON STEGANOGRAPHY AND WATERMARKING 9
Techniques for detecting hidden information – Code words, Typical approaches – Visual attacks, aural attacks,
statistical attacks, structural attacks – Detecting signatures in stego images – Removal attacks –Desynchronization
attacks – Cryptographic Attacks – Protocol Attacks.
Unit V STEGANOGRAPHIC APPLICATIONS 9
Covert Communication – Privacy with Electronic Patient Record(EPR) – Content Authentication – Copyright
Protection –Steganalysis for Forensic investigation.
Text Book:
1. Husrev T. Sencar, Ramkumar Mahalingam, Ali N. Akansu, “Data Hiding Fundamentals and Applications: Content
Security in Digital Media”, Academic Press Inc, 2004.
2. Neil F. Johnson, ZoranDuric and SushilJajodia, “Information Hiding: Steganography and Watermarking –Attacks
and Countermeasures”, Springer, 2001.
3. Jessica Fridrich, “Steganography in Digital Media: Principles, Algorithms and Applications”, Cambridge
Reference Book:
1. Peter Wayner, “Disappearing Cryptography: Information hiding: Steganography & watermarking”, 3rd Edition,
Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2009.
Extensive Reading:
• nptel.ac.in/courses/106105031/2
• www.ws.binghamton.edu/fridrich/
• http://www.jjtc.com/neil/
PAGE 210
19ECP09 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the operation of automotive sub systems
• To learn about sensors in automotive systems and vehicle development process
• To develop skills in automotive communication, instrumentation and control
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the operation of automotive sub system.
• Interface and control various sensors, actuators and displays in automotive systems.
• Establish communication between various electronic peripherals in automobiles.
• Diagnostics the operation of automotive sub system.
• Interface advance instruments and apply vehicle motion control in automobiles.
Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTOMOTIVE SUB-SYSTEMS 9
Automotive functional safety standards –Engine Management System (Gasoline & Diesel) –CRDI – Transmission
(Manual & Automatic) – Suspension Systems – Entertainment Systems – Safety & Warning Systems – Heating and
Air–conditioning – Instrument Clusters.
Unit II AUTOMOTIVE SENSORS & ACTUATORS(QUANTITATIVE TREATMENT ONLY) 9
Electronic Engine Control – Electronic Fuel Control System – Electronic Ignition – Air Flow Rate Sensor – Engine
Crankshaft Angular Position Sensor – Hall Effect Position Sensor – Optical Position Sensor – Temperature Sensors –
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor – Knock Sensors – Actuators: Fuel Injection – Ignition – Hydraulic Actuators – Electrical
Actuators – BLDC Motors & Drive amplifiers – MEMS based Sensors and Actuators.
Unit III AUTOMOTIVE COMMUNICATIONS AND DIAGNOSTICS 9
Network topologies for new generation vehicles – CAN, LIN, MOST and Flexray – Diagnostics –Fault codes & Freeze
Frames – Automotive On–board and Off–board Diagnostics – Expert Systems.
Unit IV AUTOMOTIVE INSTRUMENTATION 9
Computer Based Instrumentation System – Fuel Quantity Measurement – Display Devices: LED, LCD, vacuum–
fluorescent display – Integrated Vehicle electronic Systems –trip information system
Unit V VEHICLE MOTION CONTROL 9
Cruise Control Configuration – Stepper Motor Based Actuator – Vacuum Operated Actuator –Antilock Braking
System – Electronic Suspension System – Electronic Steering Control.Case Study: Autonomous Vehicles.
Text Book:
1. William B. Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 6th Edition, Elsevier, 2017.
2. Robert Bosch Gmbh, “Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics”, John Wiley&Sons, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. Ronald K. Jurgen, “Automotive Electronics Hand Book”, 2nd Edition, McGraw–Hill, 1999.
2. Nathan Ida “Sensors, Actuators, and their Interfaces: A multidisciplinary introduction”, Scitech Publishing, 2013.
3. Vijay K.Varadhan, K.J.Vinay, K.A.Jose, “RF MEMS and Their Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.easi.com/automotive-electronic-systems.htm
• http://www.automotive-electronics.co.uk
• http://www.infineon.com/dgdl/20060309_Automotive_Tutorial_CeBIT.pd
• http://www.ieec.uned.es/investigacion/Dipseil/PAC/archivos/More%20on%20Transducers%20Sensors%20and
%20Actuators.pdf
• https://waymo.com/tech/
• https://www.continental-automotive.com/en-gl/
PAGE 211
19ECP10 QUADCOPTER AND ITS APPLICATIONS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand Flight dynamics and construction of Quadcopter
• To Assemble and Control the operations of Quadcopter
• To design Quadcopter and Implement them for real world applications
Course Outcome:
• Apply the concept of Flight dynamics for building Quadcopter
• Assemble and Program the Quadcopter
• Perform Testing and Control operations on the Quadcopter
• Apply control mechanism to track and control Parallax ELEV-8 Quadcopter
• Build and use Quadcopter for real world applications
Unit I FLIGHT DYNAMICS OF AERIAL VEHICLES 9
Definitions of Drone, UAV, RPA, Quad copters -Basic Components and Categories – Principles of Flight - Flight
Maneuvers – Airframes - Creating a Frame: Materials, Different Frame Shapes – Building Airframes - Flight dynamics
- Applications - Future potential - Comparison with other aerial vehicles
Unit II HARDWARE ANATOMY OF QUADCOPTER 9
Power Train – Propellers, Motors- Total Lift - Electronic Speed Controllers – Flight Battery – Radio transmitter and
receiver – Flight Controller – GPS, Compass, Camera Assembling for Quad copter – Connectors, Mounting of
Propellers and Powering up.
Unit III TESTING AND MAINTENANCE OF QUADCOPTER 9
Key Flight Safety Rules - Preflight Checklist and Flight Log Information – Flight Instructions - Repair and
Maintenance: Crash analysis, Common issues, Voltage testing.
Unit IV PARALLAX ELEV-8 QUADCOPTER 9
Parallax Open Source Project - Building the Elev-8 Quadcoptor – Programming the Parallax Propeller Chip –
Propulsors – Radio Controlled Systems and Telemetry – Servo Control Systems – Tracking and Performance Checks.
Unit V REAL WORLD APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES 9
Beneficial Drones, Aerial Photography, Mapping and Surveying, Precision Agriculture,Search and Rescue,
Infrastructure Inspection, Conservation. Case Studies: Agriculture Weed Classification, Microdrone surveillances.
Text Book:
1. Terry Kilby and Belinda Kilby, “Make:Getting Started with Drones “,Maker Media, Inc, 2016
2. VasilisTzivaras, “Building a Quadcopter with Arduino”, Packt Publishing, 2016.
3. Donald Norris, “Build Your Own Quadcopter -Power Up Your Designs with the Parallax Elev-8” , McGraw-Hill
Education, 2014
Reference Book:
1. Baichtal, “Building Your Own Drones: A Beginners' Guide to Drones, UAVs, and ROVs”, Que Publishing, 2016.
2. Austin, Unmanned Aircraft Systems: UAVS Design, Development and Deployment. Wiley, 2010.
3. Sebbane, Smart Autonomous Aircraft: Flight Control and Planning for UAV. CRC Press, 2015.
4. Zavrsnik, Drones and Unmanned Aerial Systems: Legal and Social Implications for Security and Surveillance.
Springer, 2015.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.dronezon.com/learn-about-drones-quadcopters/
• http://ardupilot.org/copter/docs/advanced-multicopter-design.html
PAGE 212
19ECP11 MULTICORE PROGRAMMING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To develop the skills in writing code for the multi–core architectures
• To acquire essential knowledge about Open MP and parallel programming
• To apply skills of using efficient Message Passing algorithms in parallel processing
• To develop software for these multi–core architectures
Course Outcome:
• Explain the architecture of Multi-Core systems
• Write an efficient algorithm to solve problems related to Multicore architectures using threading
• Implement Parallel Programming using Open MP
• Develop Message Passing algorithms and implement using MPI Programming
• Develop efficient applications for multi–core architectures
Unit I MULTI-CORE ARCHITECTURE AND CONCEPTS OF PARALLEL PROGRAMMING 9
Motivation for Concurrency in Software-Parallel Computing Platforms-Amdahl’s Law, Gustafson’s Law- Defining
Threads - System View of Threads- Application Programming Models and Threading- Virtual Environment: VMs and
Platforms-Designing for Threads-Parallel Programming Patterns
Unit II THREADING AND PARALLEL PROGRAMMING CONSTRUCTS 9
Synchronization- Critical Sections- Deadlock -Synchronization Primitives- Flow Control-based Concepts-
Implementation dependent Threading Feature-Threading APIs for Microsoft Windows- Threading APIs for Microsoft
.NET Framework
Unit III OPENMP PROGRAMMING 9
Open MP – Challenges in Threading a loop – Minimizing Thread overhead – Performance-oriented Programming-
OpenMP Library Functions-OpenMP Environment Variables-Data Races, Deadlocks, and Live Lock - Non-blocking
Algorithms- Memory and Cache Related Issues
Unit IV MPI PROGRAMMING 9
Message Passing Fundamentals- Message Passing Model– MPI Program Structure- Point-to-Point Communication-
Blocking and Non-Blocking- Collective Communications- Communicators- Topologies
Unit V MULTITHREADED APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT 9
Multithreaded Algorithms – Dynamic multithreading – Multithreading Fibonacci, Matrix Multiplication, Merge Sort-
Libraries and Tools for Multithreading.
Text Book:
1. ShameemAkhter and Jason Roberts, “Multi–core Programming”, Intel Press, 2011.
2. Michael J Quinn, Parallel programming in C with MPI and OpenMP, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2003.
Reference Book:
1. John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, “Computer architecture – A quantitative approach”, 4th Edition,
Morgan Kaufmann/Elsevier Publishers, 2007.
2. Rohit Chandra, Leonardo Dagum, Dave Kohr, DrorMaydan, Jeff McDonald, Ramesh Menon, “Parallel
Programming in OpenMP”, Morgan Kaufmann/Elsevier Publishers, 2001
3. David E. Culler, Jaswinder Pal Singh, “Parallel computing architecture: A hardware/ software approach”,
Morgan Kaufmann/Elsevier Publishers, 1999.
4. Message Passing Interface Forum, “MPI: A Message-Passing Interface Standard”, 2015
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.sas.rochester.edu/psc/thestarlab/help/MPI_Course.pdf
• http://faculty.cs.tamu.edu/klappi/csce411-f12/csce411-setMultithreaded.pdf
• https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_cs45/
PAGE 213
19ECP18 SPINTRONICS L T P C
Course Objective:
• To understand the fundamental laws of Spintronics
• To employ Spin for logic processors
• To design and analyse the characteristics of Quantum gates and circuits.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the laws of spintronics and spin orbit.
• Comprehend the Spin relaxation and Transport.
• Design the sprintronics devices using the laws.
• Design of quantum gates using qubits.
• Apply the quantum principles to quantum universal gates.
Unit I LAWS OF SPINTRONICS AND SPIN ORBIT 9
Spin - Pauli spinmatrices, Pauli Equation and spinors - Dirac Equation, qubit - Bloch sphere-Spin Orbit Interaction -
Rashba interaction, Dresselhaus interaction
Unit II SPIN RELAXATION AND SPIN TRANSPORT 9
Spin-independent spin-orbit magnetic field - Spin relaxation mechanisms - Spin relaxation in a quantum dot - The
Spin Galvanic Effect
The drift-diffusion model - The semi classical model - Monte Carlo simulation
Unit III MONOLITHIC SPINTRONICS: ALL-SPIN LOGIC PROCESSORS 9
Bit stability and fidelity - Reading and writing single spin - Single Spin Logic - Energy dissipation issues - Comparison
between hybrid and monolithic spintronics
Unit IV ELECTRON SPINS IN QUANTUM DOTS AS QUBITS 9
Quantum Computing - Quantum Communication - Requirements for Quantum Computing - Coupled Quantum Dots
as Quantum Gates - Single-Spin Rotations - Read-Out of a Single Spin
Unit V QUANTUM COMPUTING WITH SPINS 9
The quantum inverter - NAND without energy dissipation - Universal reversible gate: Toffoli-Fredkin gate, A-matrix –
Quantum gate, Superposition states – Quantum parallelism - Universal quantum gates
Text Book:
1. Bandyopadhyay S, Cahay M. Introduction to spintronics. CRC press; 2015.
2. Awschalom DD, Loss D, Samarth N, editors. Semiconductor spintronics and quantum computation. Springer
Science & Business Media; 2013.
Reference Book:
1. Hedin ER, Joe YS, editors. Spintronics in nanoscale devices. CRC Press; 2013 Aug 20.
2. Shinjo T, Nanomagnetism and spintronics. Elsevier; 2013.
3. Yongbing Xu, David D. Awschalom, Junsaku Nitta, Handbook of Spintronics-Springer Netherlands, 2016
Extensive Reading:
PAGE 214
19ECP19 ESSENTIALS OF SEMICONDUCTOR IC TESTING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To acquire knowledge about the architecture of a generic mixed-signal Automatic Test Equipment (ATE)
• To examine the process of test programs generation from device data sheet to test plan.
• To understand the statistical analysis of measurement results and display formats.
Course Outcome:
• Describe the need for IC testing and its associated hardware
• Illustrate the procedures followed in testing IC
• Measure AC and DC parameters for digital circuits.
• Explain the techniques for analog and mixed-signal design for test.
• Write the benchmark program for DUT to identify faulty digital circuits and visualize the results.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO SEMICONDUCTOR IC TESTING 9
Design and manufacturing cycle of an IC – Manufacturing defects in an IC – Mixed-Signal Testing Challenges -
Automated Test Equipment and its components - Load boards, Probe cards, Handlers, Probers, Tester Hardware -
DC Resources, Digital Subsystem, AC Source and Measurement, Time Measurement System, RF Subsystem,
Computing Hardware.
Unit II AUTOMATIC TEST EQUIPMENT ARCHITECTURE 9
Architecture of a mixed signal ATE – Digital subsystem, Clock, Waveform generators, digitizers. Digital subsystem –
Drivers, Comparators, PMU, Timing and formatting units, Sequence controller, ATE Pin Electronics. - Project Plan,
Specifications and Test Program - Test Plan Specifications – Design Test, Devices, Sample Test Program – Types,
Considerations, Test Flow, Binning - Specifications from electronic device data sheets.
Unit III DC AND AC PARAMETRIC MEASUREMENTS 9
Purpose of Continuity Testing and Continuity Test Technique - Purpose of Leakage Testing and Leakage Test
Technique, Importance of Supply Current Tests and Test Technique, DC References and Regulators, DC Tests for
Digital Circuits, VIL/VIH, VOL/VOH, IIL, IIH, IOL, IOH, Short-Circuit Current - AC Timing Tests - Setup Time, Hold Time,
Propagation Delay - ATE Time Measurement Subsystem - Timing Calibration.
Unit IV MIXED SIGNAL TESTING 9
Sampling Theory – Nyquist Theorem, Coherency Formula - Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) – Frequency Domain
Analysis - Generic Mixed Signal Tester Architecture – AWG and Digitizer - ADC and DAC Basic - Static Test –
Histogram method (INL, DNL) - Dynamic Test – SNR, THD, SINAD
Unit V DATA ANALYSIS AND VISUALIZATION 9
Debug Tools and data analysis, Characterization methods – Tools – Datalog, Histogram,Shmoo, pin margin, Pattern
Debugger, Waveform Tool. Trouble Shooting Techniques –Statistical process control, process capability (CP),
Process capability index (CPK), Standarddeviation, mean, six sigma quality, gauge repeatability and reproducibility,
guard banding,Gaussian statistics
Text Book:
1. Mark burns & Gordon W Roberts, “An Introduction to mixed-signal IC test and measurement”, Oxford
University Press, 2nd Edition, 2008.
2. Michael L. Bushnell &Vishwani D. Agrawal, “Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and Mixed-
Signal VLSI Circuits” Springer, 2013
Reference Book:
1. William J. Greig, “Integrated Circuit Packaging, Assembly and Interconnections”, Springer, 2007.
2. ArturBalasinki, “Semiconductors: Integrated Circuit Design for Manufacturability”, CRC Press, 1st Edition, 2011.
Extensive Reading:
PAGE 215
19EEP07 WIRING, ESTIMATION AND COSTING L T P C

Offered by EEE (Open Elective offered to BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Wires and types and installation of wiring system.
• Fuse, MCB, ELCB, RCBO.
• Internal wiring system.
• Cable Laying, Electrical Control Panels
• Estimating and Costing of Internal and External Wiring System
Course Outcome:
• Test Residential, commercial and Industrial Electrical Installation.
• Prepare estimates for repairs and maintenance of electrical devices and equipment.
• Prepare detail estimate and costing of Residential and commercial Electrical Installations.
• Prepare detail estimate and costing of a transmission line/Overhead and underground distribution project.
• Prepare an estimate of quantity and cost of the material for an electrical project.
Wires, Wire Splicing and Termination, Types and Installation of Wiring Systems, Lighting Accessories. Electrical
Symbols.
Unit II PROTECTIVE DEVICES 6
Introduction, Protective devices used in Residential, Commercial and Industrial buildings for protection of wiring
system, Fuse, MCB, MCCB, ELCB/RCCB, RCBO, SPD and other Circuit Breakers.
Unit III INTERNAL WIRING SYSTEM AND LAMP CIRCUITS 9
Design and Drawing of Internal wiring system for various types of Residential, Commercial and Industrial buildings,
Electrical layout, Different types of circuits, Light circuit, Power circuit, Sub-main wiring, Main wiring, Single Line
diagram. Load Calculation.
Unit IV EXTERNAL WIRING SYSTEM 9
Introduction, Different types of Under Ground (UG) Cables, Cable Laying, Electrical Control Panels, Feeder Pillar,
External Electrical Distribution System, Single Line Diagram, Load Calculations, General Specifications of Generating
Set, Transformer, Circuit Breakers.
Unit V ESTIMATING AND COSTING -9
Introduction, Estimating and Costing of Internal and External Wiring System (a) based upon actual measurement
and prevailing market rate and rate analysis (b) based upon Government Schedule of rates
Text Book:
1. Dr. S L Uppal and G C Garg, “Electrical Wiring, Estimating and costing”, Khanna publishers, 6th Edition, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. J.B. Gupta, “A Course in Electrical Installation Estimating and Costing”, S K Kataria & Sons, 2013.
2. K. B. Raina, “Electrical Design Estimating and Costing”, New Age International, 2 nd Edition, 2017.
3. William E. Steward, T. A. Stubbs, Trevor E. Marks, Steve Clarke, Modern Wiring Practice: Design and Installation,
Taylor and Francis, 22 nd Edition, 2012.
4. M. A. Laughton D.F. Warne, “Electrical Engineers Reference Book”, Elsevier, 2002
PAGE 216
19EEP08 ADVANCED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES L T P C

Course Objective:
• The various classical optimization techniques
• The different advanced optimization techniques to solve engineering problems.
• Multi-objective optimization to solve real world problems.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the concepts of classical optimization techniques and apply them for solving engineering problems.
• Explain the concept of Genetic Algorithm and apply it for solving optimization problems.
• Explain the concept of Particle Swarm Optimization and apply it for solving optimization problems.
• Explain the concepts of Tabu search algorithm, Ant colony optimization, Bacteria Foraging optimization and
Artificial immune system.
• Explain the concept of Multi-objective optimization and apply it for solving real world problems.
Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF OPTIMIZATION 9
Definition - Classification of optimization problems - Unconstrained and Constrained optimization - Optimality
conditions - Classical Optimization techniques - Linear and non - linear programming - Quadratic programming -
Mixed integer programming.
Unit II EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTATION TECHNIQUES 9
Evolution in nature - Fundamentals of Evolutionary algorithms - Principle of Genetic Algorithm - Evolutionary
Strategy and Evolutionary Programming - Genetic Operators - Selection, Crossover and Mutation - Issues in GA
implementation – GA applications.
Unit III PARTICLE SWARM OPTIMIZATION 9
Fundamental principle - Velocity Updation - Parameter selection- Binary, discrete and combinatorial PSO -
Implementation issues - Convergence issues - applications.
Unit IV OTHER OPTIMIZATION METHODS 9
Principle, Algorithm, Flowchart -Tabu search algorithm - Ant colony optimization - Bacteria Foraging optimization -
Artificial immune system.
Unit V MULTI-OBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION 9
Concept of pareto optimality - Conventional approaches for MOO - Weighted Sum and Constrained methods –
Multi-objective GA - Fitness assignment - Multi-objective PSO - Necessity for multi-criteria decision making.
Text Book:
1. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design - Algorithms and Examples”, Prentice Hall of India, 1995.
2. KwangY.Lee, Mohammed A.El Sharkawi, “Modern heuristic optimization techniques”, John Wiley and Sons,
2008.
Reference Book:
1. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Multi objective optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008.
2. Carlos A.CoelloCoello, Gary B.Lamont, David A.VanVeldhuizen, “Evolutionary Algorithms for solving Multi
Objective Problems”, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2007.
PAGE 217
19EEP09 ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND AUDITING L T P C

Course Objective:
• Electrical energy management and energy auditing.
• Principle and design of illumination systems and methods of managing energy.
• The various systems in industries for optimal energy consumption & energy saving potentials.
Course Outcome:
• Deliver the impact of energy conservation on current energy scenario
• Demonstrate the effects of energy management in electric motors
• Demonstrate the effects of energy management in lighting
• Illustrate the Energy Efficient Technologies in Electrical Systems.
• Get familiarized with the theoretical aspects of energy audit.
Unit I ENERGY SCENARIO 9
Introduction – Primary and Secondary Energy – Commercial and Non Commercial Energy – Renewable and Non
Renewable Energy – Energy needs of Growing Economy – Energy and Environment – Energy Security – Energy
Conservation and its Importance - BEE Star ratings.
Unit II ENERGY MANAGEMENT IN ELECTRIC MOTORS 9
Losses in electric motors, Motor efficiency, Factors affecting motor performance, Rewinding and motor replacement
issues, Energy saving opportunities with energy efficient motors - Motor Efficiency Management.
Unit III ENERGY MANAGEMENT IN LIGHTING 9
Light source, Choice of lighting, Luminance requirements, Energy conservation methods – Lighting Energy
Management Steps – Day lighting - Maintenance - Energy Efficiency in Lighting – Case studies.
Unit IV ENERGY EFFICIENT TECHNOLOGIES IN ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9
Maximum demand controllers, Automatic power factor controllers, Energy efficient motors, Soft starters with
energy saver, Variable speed drives, Energy efficient transformers, Electronic ballast, Occupancy sensors, Energy
efficient lighting controls, Energy saving potential of each technology.
Unit V ENERGY AUDIT 9
Definition, Energy audit - need, Types of energy audit, Methodology of Energy Audit - Energy costs, Benchmarking
and Energy performance, Maximizing system efficiencies, Energy Audit Instruments – Energy Monitoring and
Targeting.
Text Book:
1. Barney L. Capehart, Wayne C. Turner, and William J. Kennedy, “Guide to Energy Management”, Fifth Edition,
The Fairmont Press, Inc., 2006.
2. Amit K. Tyagi, “Handbook on Energy Audits and Management”, The Energy and Resources Institute, 2003.
Reference Book:
1. Sonal Desai, Handbook of Energy Audit, McGraw-Hill Education, 2017.
2. Wayne C. Turner, Energy Management Handbook, The Fairmont Press, Inc., 2007.
3. Larry C. Witte, Philip S. Schmidt & David R. Brown, “Industrial Energy Management & Utilization”, Hemisphere
Pub. Corp., 1988.
4. D P Kothari, I J Nagrath, “Power System Engineering” 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill Co., 2008.
5. National Productivity Council of India, Energy Audit Manual and Reports.
6. Eastop T.D & Croft D.R, Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists, Logman Scientific & Technical, ISBN-
0-582-03184, 1990.
7. IEEE Recommended Practice for Energy Management in Industrial and Commercial Facilities, IEEE, 1996.
PAGE 218
19EEP10 ELECTRIC VEHICLES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To provide the fundamental concepts, principles, analysis and design of hybrid and electric vehicles.
Course Outcome:
• Identify the importance of hybrid electric vehicle
• Explicate the different train topologies and power flow control in electric vehicles
• Choose a suitable drive scheme for developing an electric hybrid vehicle depending on resources
• Choose proper energy storage systems for vehicle applications
• Design and develop basic schemes of electric vehicles and hybrid electric vehicles.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES
History of hybrid and electric vehicles, social and environmental importance of hybrid and electric vehicles, impact
of modern drive-trains on energy supplies.
Conventional Vehicles: Basics of vehicle performance, vehicle power source characterization, transmission
characteristics, mathematical models to describe vehicle performance.
Unit II HYBRID ELECTRIC DRIVE-TRAINS
Electric Drive-trains: Basic concept of electric traction, introduction to various electric drive-train topologies, power
flow control in electric drive-train topologies, fuel efficiency analysis.
Hybrid Electric Drive-trains: Basic concept of hybrid traction, introduction to various hybrid drive-train topologies,
power flow control in hybrid drive-train topologies, fuel efficiency analysis.
Unit III ELECTRIC PROPULSION UNIT
Introduction to electric components used in hybrid and electric vehicles, Configuration and control- DC Motor
Drives, Induction Motor drives, Permanent Magnet Drives, Switched Reluctance Drives.
Unit IV ENERGY STORAGE AND SIZING
Introduction to Energy Storage Requirements in Hybrid and Electric Vehicles, Energy Storage and Analysis- Battery,
Fuel, Super Capacitor, Hybridization of different energy storage devices, Power Electronic Converter for Battery
Charging
Sizing- Propulsion motor, Power Convertors, Energy Storage
Unit V CONTROL SYSTEM FOR ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLE
Function of the Control System in HEVs and EVs-Different Operational Modes- Overview of Control System-Control
Variables-Principle of Rule based Control Methods for ECU Design-State Machine based ECU Design- Fuzzy Logic
Based Control System- Case study of torque control and battery recharging control based on fuzzy Logic
Text Book:
1. Iqbal Hussein, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2 nd Edition, 2003
Reference Book:
1. MehrdadEhsani, Yimi Gao, Sebastian E. Gay, Ali Emadi, Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles:
Fundamentals, Theory and Design, CRC Press, 2004.
2. James Larminie, John Lowry, Electric Vehicle Technology Explained, John Wiley & Sons, 2003
PAGE 219
19ITP09 SOFTWARE TESTING L T P C

Offered by IT (Open Elective offered to BBE, BBT, BCI, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To explore the basics and goals of software testing.
• To discuss various types of software testing and its techniques
• To describe the strategies for generating system test cases
• To develop a good understanding of issues, techniques and tools for software testing.
• To have a keen awareness of the open problems in software testing and maintenance
• To enable students to gain a working knowledge of techniques for management of testing projects.
Course Outcome:
• Apply software testing principles
• Apply software testing techniques for various projects
• Formulate the strategies for generating system test cases.
• Use software metrics to manage the testing process
• Automate the testing process by using several testing tools
Evolution of software testing – Software Testing myths and facts – Goals of Software Testing – Psychology for
Software testing – Software Testing Definitions – Model for Software Testing– Effective Vs Exhaustive Software
Testing – Software Testing – Terminology- Life Cycle - Methodology – Verification and Validation – Activities –
Verification of Requirements – Verification of High Level Design – Low Level Design – Verify Code - Validation
Unit II TESTING TECHNIQUES 9
Dynamic Testing – Black Box Testing Techniques – Boundary Value Analysis – Equivalence Class testing – State Table
based Testing – Decision Table based Testing - Cause Effect Graphing based Testing - White Box Testing Techniques
– Need – Logic Coverage Criteria – Basis Path testing – Graph Matrices – Loop Testing – Data Flow Testing -
Mutation Testing – Static Testing – Inspections – Structured Walkthroughs – Technical Reviews
Unit III SYNTAX AND LOGIC BASED TESTING 9
Syntax Testing – Casual and Malicious Users – Operators – The Internet World – Application and Hidden Languages –
A Grammar for Formats – BNF Notations – Test Case Generation – Generators – Recognizers – Test Case Design –
Sources of Syntax – Ambiguities and contradictions - Implementation and Application – Execution Automation -
Design Automation - Logic Based Testing – Decision Tables – Path Expressions – KV Charts
Unit IV MANAGING THE TESTING PROCESS 9
Test Management – Test Organization – structure of Testing Group – Test Planning – Detailed Test Design and Test
Specifications - Software Metrics – Need of Software Measurement - Definition – Classification of Software Metrics
–Entities to be measured – Size Metrics - Testing Metrics for Monitoring and Controlling - Attributes – Architectural
Design Metric - Information Flow Metrics – Function Point Metrics – Test Point Analysis – Efficient Test Suite
Management – Test suite Prioritization - Types – Prioritization techniques
Unit V TESTING SPECIALIZED SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS 9
Automation and Testing Tools – Need – Categorization of Testing Tools – Selection of Testing Tools - Testing Client
Server System – Input - Assess readiness – assess key components – test the System- check Procedures – Output -
Testing Object Oriented Software – OOT Basics – Object oriented testing - Testing Web Based Systems – Web
Technology Evolution – traditional software and Web based Software – challenges -Debugging – Tools – Junit -
JwebUnit – SQLStress – Total Validator
Text Book:
1. Naresh Chauhan, “Software Testing Principles and Practices”, Third Edition, Oxford University Press, 2012
Reference Book:
1. Boris Beizer, “Software Testing Techniques”, 2nd Edition, Wiley Dreamtech Press, 2004.
2. Srinivasan Desikan, Gopalaswamy Ramesh, “Software Testing: Principles and Practices”, Prentice Hall, 2007
3. William E .Perry, “Effective Methods for Software Testing”, 2nd Edition ,Wiley, 2000
Extensive Reading:
• http://ebookily.org
• http://ebookily.org/doc/software-testing-principles-and-practices-by- srinivasan-desikan-and-gopalaswamy-
ramesh
• http://www.softwaretestinggenius.com
PAGE 220
19ITP10 BIOMETRIC RECOGNITION L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the fundamentals and principles used in biometric systems
• To gain knowledge about Fingerprint recognition
• To understand the principle of Iris recognition
• To impart knowledge on Face recognition
• To gain knowledge about Speaker recognition
Course Outcome:
• Identify a suitable model for biometric authentication system.
• Apply fingerprint, Iris, and face recognition in different applications.
• Recognize speech and verify the speaker using suitable model.
Unit I BIOMETRIC AUTHENTICATION SYSTEMS 9
Introduction – Applications – Taxonomy of uses – Taxonomy of application environments – System model –
Biometrics and Privacy.
Unit II FINGERPRINT RECOGNITION 9
Applications of fingerprints – Criminal applications – Civil applications - Commercial applications - Early systems-
Automation efforts- Technology.
Unit III IRIS RECOGNITION 9
Anatomical and physiological underpinnings - Sensing – Iris signature representation and matching – Systems and
performance.
Unit IV FACE RECOGNITION 9
Face detection – Face recognition – Representation and classification – Kernel based methods – 3D model based
methods – Face space – Face recognition evaluation.
Unit V SPEAKER RECOGNITION 9
Speaker verification problem – Features and models – Managing variability – Performance measure – Alternative
approaches.
Text Book:
1. James L. Wayman, Anil K. Jain, Davide Maltoni, Dario Maio, “Biometric Systems: Technology, Design and
Performance Evaluation”, Springer, 2005.
Reference Book:
1. Anil K. Jain, Patrick Flynn, Arun A. Ross, “Handbook of Biometrics”, Springer, 2008.
2. Christian Rathgeb, Christoph Busch, “Iris and Periocular Biometric Recognition”, The Institution of Engineering
and Technology, 2017.
Extensive Reading:
• https://heimdalsecurity.com/blog/biometric-authentication/
• https://www.bayometric.com/all/fingerprint-recognition/
• https://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/~jgd1000/iris_recognition.html
• www.face-rec.org/
• http://web.science.mq.edu.au/~cassidy/comp449/html/ch08s03.html
PAGE 221
19ITP11 DATA VISUALIZATION WITH PYTHON L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the concepts of data visualisation
• To learn to use Ipython for visualisation
• To study concepts of numpy and pandas objects
• To visualize the data using matplotlib
• To expose machine learning techniques in python using scikit
Course Outcome:
• Introduce the necessity of data visualization
• Use Ipython for data visualisation
• Apply numpy and Pandas for data visualisation
• Apply matplotlib for visual analytics
• Apply tools for data analytics
Object Visualization – need of visualization - Data abstraction –big picture –Data semantics – data types -data set
types –attribute types – semantics – Task Abstraction – Levels of Validation – Marks & Channels – Rules of Thumb –
Arrange Tables – Spatial Data – Reduce Items
Unit II IPYTHON 9
Introduction to Ipython - Help and Documentation in IPython - Keyboard Shortcuts in the IPython Shell - IPython
Magic Commands - Input and Output History - IPython and Shell Commands - Shell-Related Magic Commands -
Errors and Debugging - Profiling and Timing Code
Unit III NUMPY AND PANDAS 9
Understanding Data Types in Python - The Basics of NumPy Arrays - Computation on NumPy Arrays: Universal
Functions - Aggregations: Min, Max, and Everything in Between - Computation on Arrays: Broadcasting -
Comparisons, Masks, and Boolean Logic - Fancy Indexing - Sorting Arrays - Structured Data: NumPy’s Structured
Arrays - Introducing Pandas Objects - Data Indexing and Selection - Operating on Data in Pandas - Handling Missing
Data - Hierarchical Indexing - Combining Datasets: Concat and Append - Combining Datasets: Merge and Join -
Aggregation and Grouping - Pivot Tables - Vectorized String Operations - Working with Time Series - High-
Performance Pandas: eval() and query()
Unit IV VISUALIZATION WITH MATPLOTLIB 9
Simple Line Plots - Simple Scatter Plots - Visualizing Errors - Density and Contour Plots – Histograms – Binnings –
Density - Customizing Plot Legends - Customizing Colorbars - Multiple Subplots - Text and Annotation - Customizing
Ticks - Customizing Matplotlib: Configurations and Stylesheets - Three-Dimensional Plotting in Matplotlib -
Geographic Data with Basemap - Visualization with Seaborn
Unit V MACHINE LEARNING 9
Introduction to Machine Learning - Scikit-Learn - Hyperparameters and Model Validation - Feature Engineering -
Naive Bayes Classification - Linear Regression - Support Vector Machines - Decision Trees and Random Forests - k-
Means Clustering
Text Book:
1. Jake VanderPlas, “Python Data Science Handbook: Essential Tools for Working with Data”, Oreilly Media, 2016
2. Tamara Munzner, “Visualization Analysis and Design”, CRC Press, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. Kirthi Raman, ”Mastering Python Data Visualisation”, Packt Publishing, 2015
2. Chad Adams, “Learning Python Data Visualisation”, Packt Publishing, 2014
3. Scott Murray, “Interactive Data Visualization for the Web”, O'Reilly Media, First Edition, 2013
4. Isabel Meirelles, “Design for Information”, Rockport Publishers, 2013
5. Colin ware, “Information Visualization”, Elsevier, Third Edition, 2013
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.datacamp.com/courses/introduction-to-data-visualization-with-python
• https://machinelearningmastery.com/data-visualization-methods-in-python/
• https://www.kaggle.com/benhamner/python-data-visualizations
PAGE 222
19ITP17 TAMIL COMPUTING L T P C

Offered by IT (Open Elective offered to BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To know the basic concepts of natural language processing and language modeling
• To learn the word level and syntax analysis techniques
• To know the basics of Tamil grammar, computational linguistics and basic programming knowledge for Tamil
computing
• To identify the various computing tools available for Tamil computing
• To know about Tamil computing applications
Course Outcome:
• Construct the various language models
• Analyze the natural language text using word level and syntactic methods
• Gain basic programming knowledge for Tamil computing and analyze the computational Linguistics.
• Use various Tamil computing tools and resources.
• Develop various applications on Tamil computing
Unit I INTRODUCTION AND LANGUAGE MODELING 9
Introduction: Origins and challenges of NLP - Language and Grammar - Processing Indian Languages - NLP
Applications - Information Retrieval. Language Modeling: Various Grammar-based Language Models - Statistical
Language Model
Unit II WORD LEVEL AND SYNTACTIC ANALYSIS 9
Word Level Analysis: Regular Expressions - Finite-State Automata - Morphological Parsing - Spelling Error Detection
and correction - Words and Word classes - Part-of Speech Tagging. Syntactic Analysis: Context- free Grammar –
Constituency – Parsing - Probabilistic Parsing
Unit III TAMIL GRAMMAR AND PROGRAMMING BASICS FOR TAMIL COMPUTING 9
Alphabets : Classification & Properties - Words: classification and components - Sentences : Structures and word
ordering History of Tamil Computing - Standards & Fonts - UNICODE - Object Oriented Tamil Computing Phonology
– Morphology – lexicography – syntax – semantics – pragmatics
Unit IV TAMIL COMPUTING TOOLS & RESOURCES 9
POS Tagger - Morphological Analyser - Morphological Generator - Sentence Parser - Named Entity Recognizer -
Word Sense Disambiguator - Ontologies – Universal Networking Language - UNLEnconvertor
Unit V TAMIL COMPUTING APPLICATIONS 9
Machine Translation – Speech : Synthesis & Processing - Information : retrieval & Extraction – Question
Answering – Text Summarization – Automatic Indexing – Text Mining – Conceptual Search.
Text Book:
1. Tanveer Siddiqui, U.S. Tiwary, “Natural Language Processing and Information Retrieval”, Oxford University
Press, 2008.
2. Tholkaappiyam : Phonology & Morphology, Albert, International Institue of Tamil Studies, First Edition, 1985.
3. The Oxford Handbook of Computational Linguistics, Edited by RuslanMitkov, Oxford University Press, 2003
Reference Book:
1. Translation - Theory and Application, Valarmathi, International Institute of Tamil Studies, First Edition, 2001.
2. Tholkaappiyam -Thodariyal, Shanmugam, International Institute of Tamil Studies, First Edition, 2004.
3. Conference Papers, Tamil Internet, Government of Tamilnadu, 2003.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.tamilvu.org/en/content/tamil-computing-tools
• https://www.shaalaa.com
PAGE 223
19MEP13 SOCIOLOGY AND INDIAN HISTORY FOR ENGINEERS L T P C

Offered by MECH (Open Elective offered to BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To introduce students to the basic concepts in sociology.
• To familiarize students with the theoretical aspects of different concepts.
• To analyse critically the social processes of globalization, environment, modernization and social change.
• To help the students imbibe such skills.
• To enhance them to be better citizens and human beings at their work place or in the family or in other social
institutions.
Course Outcome:
• Know the fundamental concepts of sociology.
• Know about the environmental impact, and globalization on sociology.
• Understand the various theories and perspectives of sociology, social issues.
• Gather knowledge about the freedom struggle of India and its culture.
• Gather knowledge in scientific achievements of India.
Unit I FOUNDATIONS OF SOCIOLOGY 9
Introduction - nature, scope and significance of sociology- Relationship Between Engineers and Society- Impact of
Engineering Solutions on Society - Social institutions- Social stratification & social class - social change - factors of
social change - resistance to change- culture- society and group- social interaction- child socialization-Families and
intimate relationships- Social movements.
Unit II PERSPECTIVES IN SOCIOLOGY AND SOCIAL ISSUES 9
Perspectives of August Comte, Marx, Weber & Durkheim- Perspectives in sociology - Functionalist perspective -
Conflict perspective, Interactionist perspective, Critical perspective. Social process-Processes of social exclusion and
inclusion - Changing nature of work and organization - Education as socialization- Job insecurity - unemployment,
crime.
Unit III GLOBALISATION, ENVIRONMENT, URBANISATION 9
Modernization and globalization - Non industrialized & industrialized society - Factors contributing to globalization -
The impact of globalization - Population growth – global culture- the environment and sociology-environmental
issues in society-ecological sustainability- Urban ecology- The development of the City- Urbanization in the
developing world- contribution of Media & social network - Controlling the global media.
Unit IV HISTORY OF MODERN INDIA AND INDIAN CULTURE 9
Impact of British rule in the cultural and social fields- development of education in modern India- Indian national
movement from 1857 to 1947-policies after 1858 – India after independence- fundamentals of Indian culture:
preview of Indian culture, Indian art, music, dances, festivals – cultural movements in India- promotion of cultural
activities.
Unit V SOCIAL CONSEQUENCES OF THE TRANSFORMATION OF INDIAN AGRICULTURE 9
Emergence of National Agriculture—Growth of Sub division and Fragmentation of Land— Effects of
Fragmentation—New Land Revenue System—Commercialization of Agriculture— Growth of Poverty—Growth of
Rural Indebtedness—Transfer of Land From Cultivating to Non cultivating Owners—Rise of Serfdom—Growing
Polarization of Classes in Agrarian Areas— Rise of Agrarian Proletariat—Rise of Parasitic Land-Owning Class—
Colonial Character of Indian Agriculture—Reconstruction of Agriculture, its pre-Requisites.
Text Book:
1. Anthony Giddens, “Sociology”, Polity, 8th Edition, 2017.
2. Desai, A.R, “Social Background of Indian Nationalism”, Popular Prakashan, 6th Edition, 2016.
Reference Book:
1. Chopra J K, “History of modern India and Indian culture”, for PCS/UPSC/civil service examination, unique
publishers (I) pvt, ltd, Delhi, 2013.
2. Bipan Chandra, “Indian National Movement”, ISBN: 9788124116258, 8124116253, Har Anand Publication,
2011.
3. Introduction to sociology, 2nd edition, OpenStax, Rice University, 2017.
4. Nitin Singhania, Indian Art and Culture : For Civil Services Preliminary and Main Examinations, ISBN:
9789387067547, 9387067548, Publisher: Mcgraw hill, 2nd edition, 2017.
PAGE 224
19MEP14 ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES L T P C

Course Objective:
• Fundamental of electric and hybrid vehicle
• Working principle of electric propulsion system
• Energy storage
• Concept of fuel cell vehicle
Course Outcome:
• Determine performance of electric vehicle
• Explain hybrid electric vehicle
• Comprehend different types of Electric Propulsion Systems
• Understand different concept of energy storage
• Explain the fuel cell technologies
Unit I ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9
Configurations of Electric Vehicles, Performance of electric vehicles – Traction motor characteristics, tractive effort,
transmission requirements, vehicle performance, Tractive Effort in Normal Driving, energy consumption, advantage
and limitations.
Unit II HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9
Architectures of Hybrid Electric Drive Trains- Series Hybrid Electric Drive Trains- Parallel Hybrid Electric Drive Trains-
Torque-Coupling, speed-Coupling and both
Unit III ELECTRIC PROPULSION SYSTEMS 9
DC motor drives- Principle of Operation and Performance- induction motor drives- Basic Operation Principles &
Steady-State Performance- permanent magnet motor drives- Basic Principles, Construction & Classification -
switched reluctance motor drives- Basic Magnetic Structure, Torque Production, SRM Drive Converter, Modes of
Operation.
Unit IV ENERGY STORAGES 9
Electrochemical batteries – Reactions, thermodynamic voltage, Specific energy & Power, Energy efficiency-Battery
technologies- lead-acid batteries, nickel based batteries, lithium based batteries-Ultra-capacitors- Ultra high-Speed
Flywheels
Unit V FUEL CELL 9
Principles of Fuel Cells-Fuel Cell Technologies- Proton Exchange Membrane, Alkaline, Phosphoric Acid, Molten
Carbonate, Solid Oxide, Direct Methanol- Fuel Supply- Hydrogen Storage, Hydrogen Production- Non hydrogen Fuel
Cells
Text Book:
1. Mehrdad Ehsani, Yimin Gao, sebastien E. Gay and Ali Emadi, ―Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell
Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory and Design‖, CRC Press, 2009.
Reference Book:
1. Iqbal Husain, ―Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2011.
2. Seref Soylu ―Electric Vehicles - The Benefits and Barriers‖, InTech Publishers, Croatia, 2011.
3. Aulice Scibioh M. and Viswanathan B., ―Fuel Cells – Principles and Applications‖, University Press, India, 2006.
4. Barbir F., ―PEM Fuel Cells: Theory and Practice‖ Elsevier, Burlington, 2005.
5. James Larminie and John Loury, ―Electric Vehicle Technology-Explained‖, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2003.
PAGE 225
19MEP15 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To achieve an understanding of principles of safety engineering.
• To enable the students to learn about various functions and activities of safety department.
• To have knowledge about various hazard identification and risk assessment techniques.
• To familiarize students with evaluation of safety performance.
• To provide wide exposure to the students about various legislations applicable to an industrial unit.
Course Outcome:
• To understand the functions and activities of safety engineering department.
• To conduct hazard analysis for a given activity or task and suggest suitable suggestions for hazard prevention
and control.
• To prepare safe procedure for operation of machine tools , vehicles and hazardous activities.
• To evaluate the safety performance of an organization from accident records.
• To list out requirements mentioned in various acts and rules for the prevention of accidents.
Unit I CONCEPTS OF SAFETY MANAGEMENT AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION 9
History of Safety movement – Evolution of modern safety concept-safety management functions– safety
organization, safety department-safety committee-line and staff functions for safety-budgeting for safety-safety
policy–accident causes-unsafe act and condition-principles of accident prevention–accident investigation and
analysis–records for accidents – form 18 and 18A-cost of accident.
Unit II HAZARD IDENTIFICATION, RISK ASSESSMENT AND CONTROL 9
Hazard- classification - chemical, physical, mechanical, ergonomic, biological hazards-Identification and Control
measures -Electrical hazards – Shock Protection methods-Fire hazards of flammable and explosive materials-Fire
prevention and control – hazard evaluation techniques-job safety analysis, safety inspection, safety sampling - fault
tree analysis– event tree analysis –failure modes and effect analysis–risk estimation–Hierarchy of Hazard control -
Personal Protective equipment
Unit III SAFETY IN ENGINEERING INDUSTRY 9
Safety in the use of metal cutting machine tools - wood working machinery- Power presses- Grinding machines -
Confined Space entry -Principles of machine guarding -guarding during maintenance, work permit systems, zero
mechanical state(ZMS), Safety in the operation of industrial trucks and cranes - safety in welding and gas cutting-
safety in cold forming and hot working of metals-safety in finishing, inspection and testing- occupational diseases-
Lead, Nickel, Chromium and Manganese toxicity.
Unit IV SAFETY PERFORMANCE MONITORING 9
ANSI (Z16.1) Recommended practices for compiling and measuring work injury experience–permanent total
disabilities, permanent partial disabilities, temporary total disabilities-Calculation of accident indices, frequency
rate, severity rate, frequency severity incidence, incident rate, accident rate, safety “t” score, safety activity rate–
Total Injury illness incidence rate, Lost work day cases Incidence rate (LWDI), Number of lost work days rate–
problems-OSHA forms 300, 301 and 300 A- safety audit.
Unit V SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS 9
History of legislations related to safety – Factories act 1948 with special reference to safety, Health and welfare
provisions - Indian boiler act– SMPV rules – The environmental protection act – Electricity act –Explosive act –
Health and Safety at work act (HASAWA) UK,-Occupational Safety health act (OSHA)
Text Book:
1. C.Ray Asfahl, David W. Rieske, “Industrial Safety and Health Management”, Prentice Hall, 7th Edition, 2018.
Reference Book:
1. John V.Grimaldi and Rollin H.Simonds, “Safety Management”, Richard D. Irwin publisher,1994.
2. R.K.Mishra, “Safety Management”, AITBS Publishers, 2012.
3. Dan Petersen, “Techniques of Safety Management”, American Society of Safety Engineers, 4th Edition, 2003.
4. Blake R.B., “Industrial Safety” Prentice Hall, Inc., New Jersey, 1973.
5. Philip Hagan, John F. Montgomery & James T. O Reilly “Accident Prevention Manual for Business and Industry”,
N.S.C.Chicago, 14th Edition, 2015.
6. Lees, F.P &M. Sam Mannan, “Loss Prevention in Process Industries: Hazard Identification, Assessment and
Control", Butterworth-Heinemann publications, London, 4th Edition, 2012.
7. John Ridley, “Safety at Work”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 7th Edition, 2007.
8. “Safe use of wood working machinery”, HSE, UK, 2nd Edition, 2014.
9. Subramanian. V., “The Factories Act 1948 with Tamilnadu factories rules1950”, Madras Book Agency, 21st
Edition, Chennai, 2000.
PAGE 226
PAGE 227
19MEP16 IMAGING TECHNIQUES L T P C

Course Objective:
• Understanding the concept of imaging techniques used for the purpose of characterizing the materials.
• Different techniques of specimen preparation for the imaging of materials.
• Envisaging the imaging techniques for bulk and nanomaterials using electron, probe microscope.
• Learning about imaging formats in medical hospitals.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the concept and classification of optical imaging system.
• Study of electron microscopy and its applications.
• Exposure of various scanning probe imaging techniques.
• Know about the tunnelling microscope.
• Knowledge on medical imaging concepts
Unit I OPTICAL MICROSCOPE 9
Introduction – Depth of field and depth of focus - resolution – magnification - Light microscope - Polarized light
microscope – Phase contrast microscope – Interference microscope – morphology – Confocal microscope.
Unit II ELECTRON MICROSCOPE 9
Basic design of scanning electron microscopy – Modes of operation – Backscattered electrons – Secondary electrons
- X-rays – Resolution and contrast enhancement – replicas – various applications – TEM basic principle - modes of
operation – specimen preparation.
Unit III SCANNING PROBE MICROSCOPE 9
Basic concepts - interaction force - AFM and the optical lever - AFM tip on nano meter scale structures - force curves
- contact and non-contact mode - imaging and manipulation of samples in air/liquid environments - shear force
microscopy - LFM - MFM - EFM.
Unit IV SCANNING TUNNELLING MICROSCOPE 9
Principle - instrumentation - importance of STM for nanostructures – Scanning tunnelling spectroscopy – FMM -
surface and molecular manipulation using STM – Scanning tunnelling spectroscopy- 3D map of electronic structure -
limitations.
Unit V MEDICAL IMAGING SYSTEM 9
Basics of Medical Image Sources: Radiology - Computed Tomography- Magnetic Resonance Tomography – Medical
Image Representation: Pixels and voxels - image file formats- DICOM- other formats- Medical image analysis: Image
segmentation - Image representation and analysis - Feature extraction and representation.
Text Book:
1. Peter J. Goodhew, John Humphreys and John Humphreys, “Electron microscopy and analysis”, Taylor & Francis,
3rd edition, 2000.
2. Wolfgang Birkfellner, “Applied Medical Image Processing – A Basic course‟, Taylor & Francis, 2nd edition, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. R.Haynes, D.P.Woodruff and T.A.Talchar, “Optical Microscopy of Materials”, Cambridge University press, 1986.
2. Bert Voigtlaender, “Scanning Probe Microscopy: Atomic Force Microscopy and Scanning Tunneling microscopy”,
Springer, 2015.
3. J.Goldstein, D. E. Newbury, D.C. Joy and C.E. Lym, “Scanning electron microscopy and X-ray microanalysis”, 3rd
edition, Springer, 2003
PAGE 228
19MEP17 MODERN SENSOR TECHNOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To impart the fundamentals of sensor technology and its significance in industrial applications.
• To provide in depth knowledge in different types of Sensors.
• To implement the sensors for monitoring of Industrial Equipment.
• To provide knowledge in measuring various physical variables during industrial and scientific activities.
• To impart understanding of intelligent sensors, micro-sensors and Nano-sensors in physical, chemical and
biomedical applications.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the various elements in sensor measurement.
• Learn about the various sensors for motion, vibration, force and power.
• Familiarize with pressure, temperature and flow measurements.
• Find innovative solutions in monitoring physical parameters during on-line and off-line conditions.
• Understand the fundamental principles of advancement in sensor technology.
Unit I CHARACTERISTICS OF SENSORS 9
Introduction to Instrument and their representation – Static performance characteristics of instruments – Dynamic
characteristics of instruments – Transducer elements – Intermediate elements – Indicating, Recording and display
elements
Unit II MEASUREMENT OF MECHANICAL COMPONENTS 9
Motion and vibration measurements – Relative, absolute type vibration measurement devices - Dimensional
metrology – Mechanical, Electromechanical, Pneumatic, Hydraulic dimensional gauging devices - Force
measurement - Balance principle of force measurement – Hydraulic load cell – Pneumatic load cell – Elastic force
devices – Electromechanical methods – Torque and power measurements – Transmission, Torsion, Driving,
Absorption type dynamometer
Unit III SENSORS FOR EQUIPMENT MONITORING 9
Pressure measurement – Moderate pressure measurement – High pressure Bridgeman Gauge – Low pressure
measurement – Calibration of pressure gauges – Temperature measurement – Measurement of temperature – Non
electrical methods of Temperature Measurement – Electrical Methods of Temperature measurement – Radiation
Methods – Flow measurement – Acoustics measurement
Unit IV SENSORS FOR CONDITION MONITORING 9
Vibration and Noise monitoring – Temperature monitoring – Wear behavior monitoring – Corrosion monitoring –
Material defect monitoring - Acoustic emission monitoring technique – Performance trend monitoring – Selection of
condition monitoring techniques – Expert system technique in fault diagnostics.
Unit V ADVANCEMENT IN SENSING TECHNOLOGY 9
Specific gravity measurements – Measurements of liquid level – Viscosity – Humidity and Moisture – pH value –
Biomedical measurements – Environmental air pollution measurement devices - Smoke density measurement –
Fibre optic Transducers – Microsensors – Smart Sensors – Virtual Instrumentation
Text Book:
1. Nakra B.C. and Chaudhry K.K., “Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 4th Edition,
2017.
Reference Book:
1. John Vetelino, AravindReghu, “Introduction to Sensors”, CRC Press, 2017.
2. Sinclair I.R., “Sensors and Transducers”, Elsevier India Private Limited, 2001.
3. Wang L. and Gao R.X., “Condition Monitoring and Control for Intelligent Manufacturing”, Springer - Verlog
London Limited, 2006.
4. Tonshoff H. K. and InasakiI, “Sensors in Manufacturing: Sensors Applications”, 2001.
5. Venkatesh V.C. and Chandrasekaran H., “Experimental Techniques in Metal Cutting”, Prentice-Hall of India
Private Limited,1987.
6. Considine D.M. and Glenn D., “Standard Handbook of Industrial Automation: Advanced Industrial Technology
01”, Springer, 1987.
PAGE 229
19MEP18 NUCLEAR ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• Gaining knowledge about nuclear physics, nuclear fuels and its life cycle
• Gaining knowledge on different types of nuclear reactor and safe disposal techniques of nuclear wastes.
Course Outcome:
• Students will be able to understand about nuclear physics.
• Outline on nuclear materials and its processing techniques.
• Appreciate nuclear fuel reprocessing, methods and challenges for nuclear fuel reprocessing.
• Gain an understanding about different types of nuclear reactors.
• Demonstrate about safe disposal of nuclear wastes.
Unit I NUCLEAR PHYSICS 9
Nuclear model of an atom-nuclear energy: the primary source of power-role of nuclear engineer-equivalence of
mass and energy-binding- radio activity-half life-neutron interactions-cross sections-neutron flux and reaction rate-
neutron transport. Nuclear Power Scenario in the World, Nuclear Power Scenario in India.
Unit II NUCLEAR REACTIONS AND REACTION MATERIALS 9
Nuclear fission and fusion: mechanism and energy released- the plasma-magnetic pinch - chain reactions-critical
mass and composition-nuclear fuel cycles and its characteristics-uranium production and purification-Zirconium,
thorium, beryllium. Moderator, Coolant & Control materials, their material properties and irradiation effects.
Unit III REPROCESSING 9
Reprocessing: nuclear fuel cycles-spent fuel characteristics-role of solvent extraction in reprocessing-solvent
extraction equipment-issues and challenges related to spent fuel reprocessing: proliferation risk reduction-physical
protection-environmental impact issues.
Unit IV NUCLEAR REACTOR 9
Nuclear reactors: types of fast breeding reactors-design and construction of fast breeding reactors-heat transfer
techniques in nuclear reactors- reactor shielding. Fusion reactors - Fluid fuelled reactor-types
Unit V SAFETY AND DISPOSAL 9
Safety and disposal: Nuclear plant safety-safety systems-changes and consequences of accident-criteria for safety-
nuclear waste-types of waste and its disposal-radiation-hazards and their prevention-weapons proliferation.
International convention on safety aspects.
Text Book:
1. Thomas J.Connoly, “Fundamentals of nuclear Engineering”, John Wiley, 1st edition, 1978.
2. Duderstadt, J.J. and L.J. Hamilton, “Nuclear Reactor Analysis”, John Wiley, 1st edition, 1976.
Reference Book:
1. M.M.Ei.Wakil, “Nuclear power Engineering”, McGraw hill book Company, New York, 1999.
2. Collier J.G., and Hewitt G.F, “Introduction to Nuclear power”, Hemisphere publishing, New York. 2000.
3. “Spent fuel reprocessing option,” International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), August 2018.
4. Wakil M.M.El., “Power Plant Technology”, McGraw-Hill International, 2002.
PAGE 230
19MEP19 SMART MATERIALS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To provide in depth knowledge in the evolution of material science.
• To give understanding of concept of smart materials.
• To get exposed to the various engineering applications of smart materials.
• To develop a Smart Structure using various smart materials for a practical engineering application in the field of
inter-discipline.
• To analyse the current research issues in the field of smart materials.
Course Outcome:
• This course would make familiar of basic concepts of different types of structural materials and intelligent
materials.
• Course would be helpful to understand the basic principle behind the Smart Material system.
• Students would be trained in the current research issues in the field of smart materials.
• One would be able to make use of smart material for the design of Smart Structure in the field of inter-
discipline.
• This Course would equip the students to effectively employ the concepts of smart material in order to launch a
new smart product to the market.
Unit I INTELLIGENT MATERIALS 10
Evolution of material science - Structural materials: Steel, Concrete, FRP. Functional materials, Multi-functional
materials Active materials.
Smart materials and structural systems - Actuator materials - Sensing technologies - Sensing materials - Micro
sensors - Intelligent systems - Smart skins - Applications of smart materials and smart structures.
Unit II PIEZOELECTRIC MATERIALS 6
Background -Piezoelectricity - Direct Piezoelectric effect - Indirect Piezoelectric effect - Industrial piezoelectric
materials - Smart material featuring piezoelectric elements - Applications of piezoelectric materials in Air bags,
Piezoelectric sensors industrial applications - Piezoelectric actuators industrial applications - Piezoelectricity in
Defence Applications.
Unit III SHAPE MEMORY MATERIALS 10
Background on shape memory alloys - Shape Memory effect - Shape memory materials - Applications of shape
memory alloys - Continuum applications: structures and machine systems - Discrete applications - Impediments
to applications of shape memory alloys - shape memory plastics - SMA Fasteners – SMA Temperature fuse –
Micro robot actuated by SMA - Deployment of Satellite Antenna using SMA - SMA Pipe Coupling - SMA in
Automotive applications - Fire Sprinklers using SMA.
Unit IV ER/MR FLUIDS 10
Electro-rheological fluids -The Electro-rheological phenomenon- Charge migration mechanism for the dispersed
phase - Electro-rheological fluid actuators -Applications of ER fluids - ER fluids applications in Fixtures, Engine
Mount, Robot arm, valve design.
Magneto-rheological fluids-The Magneto-rheological phenomenon- Magneto-rheological fluid actuators-
Applications of MR fluids- MR fluid applications in damper, clutch, and engine mount.
Unit V FIBER OPTIC SENSORS 9
Fiber-Optics; an overview - Advantages of fiber-optics - Applications of fiber optic sensors-Light propagation in an
optical fiber-Embedding optical fibers in fiberous polymeric thermosets-Fiber-optic strain sensors-FBG sensors -
Applications of fiber optics in bridges, composite laminates, aircraft structures, smart skins - structural health
monitoring – Military applications of fiber optics.
Text Book:
1. Srinivasan AV, Michael McFarland D, "Smart Structures: Analysis and Design", Cambridge University Press, CRC
Press, 2001.
2. Gandhi M V and Thompson B S, "Smart Materials and Structures", 1st Edition, Springer Science & Business
Media, 1992.
Reference Book:
1. Mel Schwartz, "Encyclopaedia of Smart Materials", Vo.1 and Vol.2, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2002.
2. Vijay K Varadan, Vinoy KJ and Gopalakrishnan S, “Smart Material Systems and MEMS: Design and
Development Methodologies”, ISBN: 978-0-470-09361-0, Wiley, 2006.
PAGE 231
19BTP09 DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Developmental Biology Concepts
• Molecular understanding of Plant Development
• Embryogenesis / early development and tissue development and regeneration in Mammals
• Late development and tissue development and regeneration in Mammals
• Processes leading to senescence and evolution ultimately
Course Outcome:
• Comprehend the basic aspects behind the field of developmental biology
• Expose the plant developmental process
• Comprehend the early developmental processes involved in mammalian development
• Reveal the late development processes like tissue maturation and regeneration
• Extrapolate the importance of development processes in understanding aging, cancer and evolution of species
Unit I OVERVIEW 9
Development Biology; Developmental genetics; Cell fate determination in C. elegans; Gametogenesis, Fertilization,
Cleavage, Gastrulation, Axis formation in amphibian, Anterior posterior patterning in amphibians, Anterior posterior
patterning in drosophila.
Unit II PLANT DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY 9
Plant embryogenesis; Patterning in early embryo; Root and Shoot Meristems; Transition to Floral Meristem; Floral
Development; Plant homeotics in flowers, Gene Activity Model (ABC model); The floral identity genes encode
homeotic proteins; Developmental map of Arabidopsis
Unit III MAMMALIAN DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY - I 9
Hox gene and dorsoventral patterning, Early mammalian development, Left right patterning; Patterning in Central
nervous system, Ectoderm-eye development, epidermis, hair development, neural crest, tooth development and
axon guidance
Unit IV MAMMALIAN DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY - II 9
Mesoderm-somites, development of muscle, bone, kidney, heart and vessels, formation of limbs; Endoderm, Sex
determination in Drosophila, mammals and other species, Regeneration
Unit V ENVIRONMENT AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Environmental regulation and development, Aging & Senescence, Infertility; Cancer as a developmental disease;
Modularity in Development and Evolution
Text Book:
1. Gilbert S. F., “Developmental Biology” Sinauer Associates, 2013.
2. Jonathan M. W. Slack. “Essential Developmental Biology” Blackwell Science Ltd, Oxford. 2012
3. Wolpert L and Tickle C., “Principles of Development”, Oxford University Press, New York, 2010
Reference Book:
1. Gilbert S. F. and Epel D, “Ecological Developmental Biology: The Environmental Regulation of Development,
Health, and Evolution”, Sinauer Associates, Inc., 2015
2. Raghavan, V., “Developmental Biology of Flowering Plants”, Springer-Verlag New York, 2000
Extensive Reading:
• “Current Opinion in Genetics & Development”, Journal Series, Elsevier Ltd.
• “Annual Review of Cell and Developmental Biology”, Journal Series
PAGE 232
19CEP12 COMPOSITE MATERIALS L T P C

Course Objective:
• The fundamentals of composite materials and their applications
• The constituent materials of polymer matrix composites
• The comparison of metal matrix composites with other types
• The ceramic matrix composites
• The application of concepts of mechanics of composites in their analysis
Course Outcome:
• Choose a composite based on the required application
• Describe the fabrication of polymer matrix composites
• Proportion the metal matrix composites
• Use ceramic and other special composites over traditional materials
• Analyze a composite lamina
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO COMPOSITES 9
Fundamentals of Composites - Need For Composites - Enhancement of Properties - Classification of Composites -
Matrix-Polymer Matrix Composites (PMC), Metal Matrix Composites (MMC), Ceramic Matrix Composites (CMC) -
Reinforcement - Particle Reinforced Composites, Fibre Reinforced Composites - Applications of Various Types Of
Composites.
Unit II POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES 9
Polymer Resins - Thermosetting Resins, Thermoplastic Resins - Reinforcement Fibres - Rovings - Woven Fabrics -
Non Woven Random Mats - Various Types of Fibres - PMC fabrication Processes - Fibre Reinforced Plastics (FRP),
Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (GFRP) - Laminates.
Unit III METAL MATRIX COMPOSITES 9
Characteristics of MMC, Various Types of Metal Matrix Composites Alloy Vs. MMC, Advantages of MMC, Limitations
of MMC, Reinforcements - Particles - Fibers - Effect of Reinforcement - Volume Fraction – Rule of Mixtures.
Unit IV CERAMIC MATRIX COMPOSITES AND SPECIAL COMPOSITES 9
Engineering Ceramic Materials - Properties - Advantages - Limitations - Monolithic Ceramics - Need For CMC -
Ceramic Matrix - Various Types of Ceramic Matrix Composites- Oxide Ceramics - Non Oxide Ceramics - Aluminum
Oxide - Silicon Nitride - Reinforcements - Particles - Fibers - Whiskers.
Unit V BASICS OF MECHANICS OF COMPOSITES 9
Lamina Assumptions - Macroscopic Viewpoint - Generalized Hooke’s Law - Reduction to Homogeneous Orthotropic
Lamina - Isotropic Limit Case, Orthotropic Stiffness Matrix (Qij) - Strain Displacement Relations - Basic Assumptions
of Laminated Anisotropic Plates - Laminate Constitutive Equations.
Text Book:
1. Krishan K .Chawla, “Composite Materials”, Springer Publications 4th edition, 2019.
2. Mathews F. L. and Rawlings R. D., “Composite Materials: Engineering And Science”, 1st Edition, Chapman And
Hall, London, England, 1994.
Reference Book:
1. G.Piatti, “ Advances in composite materials”, Applied Science Publishers Ltd., London, 1978.
2. Clyne, T. W. And Withers, P. J., “Introduction To Metal Matrix Composites”, Cambridge University Press, 2003.
3. Strong, A.B., “Fundamentals of Composite Manufacturing”, SME, 2008.
4. Sharma, S.C., “Composite Materials”, Narosa Publications, 2000.
5. Broutman, L.J. And Krock,R.M., “ Modern Composite Materials”, Addison-Wesley, 1967.
6. ASM Hand Book, “Composites”, Vol.21, ASM International, 2001.
PAGE 233
19CEP13 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM FOR DISASTER MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• Classification of disasters.
• The fundamentals of remote sensing.
• The skill of mapping and projections.
• The application of spatial data for disaster management.
• The mitigation measures with the help of GIS.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the various disasters and its principles.
• Implement the remote sensing techniques.
• Map the disaster thematic maps based on requirements.
• Understand the basics concepts of cartography.
• Plan the disaster relief activities.
Unit I DISASTER PRINCIPLES 9
Disaster - Concepts and principles - Classification - Causes, characteristics and effects of various types of natural and
manmade disasters – Global scenario - Vulnerability profile in India - Institutional frame work for disaster
management - Role of government administration and NGOs - International disaster assistance - Sharing technology
and technical expertise.
Unit II REMOTE SENSING TECHNIQUES 9
Principles - Electro Magnetic Spectrum - Optical remote sensing – Thermal remote sensing – Hyperspectral remote
sensing - Spectral signature – Spectroradiometer – Spectral reflectance of vegetation, soil and water - Various
satellites.
Unit III FUNDAMENTALS OF CARTOGRAPHY 9
Definition of Map - Mapping Organizations in India - Ellipsoid and Geoid – Co-ordinate Systems - Rectangular and
Geographic Coordinates – UTM and UPS – Projection – Function - Types of Map Projections – Transformations –
Function - Affine transformation.
Unit IV SPATIAL DATA FOR DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9
Point, Line Polygon / Area, elevation and surface –Tessellations - Data Sources – Ground and Remote sensing survey
- Map scanning and digitization and Georeferencing - GCPs – Ground Control Points - Raster Vs. Vector Comparison
– File Formats for Raster and Vector – Data conversion between Raster and vector.
Unit V GIS APPLICATIONS IN DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9
Hazard evaluation – Zonation – Risk assessment and vulnerability – Damage assessment – Land use planning and
regulation for sustainable development - Spatial and non-spatial data bank creation - Pre-disaster and post disaster
planning for relief operations – Disaster mapping.
Text Book:
1. Brian Tomaszewski, “Geographic Information Systems (GIS) for Disaster Management”, CRC press, Taylor &
Francis Group 2nd new edition 2020.
2. C. Emdad Haque, "Mitigation of natural Hazards & disasters", springer, 2010.
3. Linda C. Bottersll & ponald A.wilhite, "From Disaster response to Risk management". springer, 2010..
4. C.P. Lo, Albert K.W. Yeung, "Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems", 2nd Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2009.
5. Lillesand T.M., and Kiefer,R.W. "Remote Sensing and Image interpretation", 7th edition of John Wiley & Sons-
2015.
6. John Jensen, Ryan Jensen, "Introductory Geographic Information Systems", International Edition, Pearson
Publishers, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Sisi zlatanova & Andrea Fabbri jonathanli, "Geomatic solutions for Disaster management, Springer Verlag, 2010.
2. Gerard Blokdijk, Disaster recovery planning and services, Gennaio publishers, 2008.
3. Mohamed Gad "Large scale disasters : prediction, control and mitigation", Cambridge university press, 2008.
4. Kang-tsung Chang, "Introduction to Geographic Information Systems" 9th Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2018.
PAGE 234
19CEP14 GEOTECHNICAL FUNDAMENTALS OF EARTHQUAKE L T P C

Course Objective:
• The fundamentals of earthquake vibrations.
• The dynamics of earth and to estimate dynamic properties of soils.
• The site specific design spectrum for design of sub structure and evaluation of liquefaction potential.
• Buildings for earthquake forces and introduce design concepts.
• The concepts of engineering seismology.
Course Outcome:
• Categorize the various components of engineering seismology.
• Identify the different types of seismic recording instruments.
• Classify the various earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment.
• Do the various seismic hazard analysis.
• Analyze the types of risk and vulnerability.
Unit I SEISMOLOGY AND EARTHQUAKES 9
Internal Structure of the Earth - Elastic rebound theory - Different sources of Seismic Activity - Geometric Notation -
Zones and Location of Earthquakes - Magnitude and intensity- Classification of Earthquakes.
Unit II DYNAMIC PROPERTIES OF SOILS 9
Measurement of Dynamic Properties of soils - Field Tests - Low strain - Seismic Reflection - Seismic Refraction -
Horizontal layering - Steady State Vibration - Spectral analysis of surface wave - Seismic cross hole - Down Hole & Up
hole tests - Laboratory tests - Resonance Column Test - Bender Element - Cyclic Tri-axial test.
Unit III SEISMIC HAZARD ANALYSIS 9
Identification and Evaluation of Earthquake Sources - Geologic Evidence - Tectonic Evidence - Historical Seismicity -
Instrumental Seismicity - Deterministic Seismic Hazard Analysis - Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis
Unit IV GROUND RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9
Ground Response Analysis - One Dimensional Linear - Evaluation of Transfer Function - Uniform undamped soil on
rigid rock - Uniform damped soil on Rigid Rock - Uniform damped soil on elastic rock - Layered damped soil on
elastic rock - Equivalent linear Approximation – Deconvolution.
Unit V LIQUEFACTION ANALYSIS 9
Liquefaction - Flow liquefaction - Cyclic Mobility - Evaluation of liquefaction Hazards - Liquefaction Susceptibility -
Criteria - Historical geologic - Compositional - State - Evaluation of initiation of liquefaction - Cyclic stress approach -
Characterization of Liquefaction Resistance - Various correction factors - Factor of Safety.
Text Book:
1. Krammer S.L., "Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering", Prentice Hall, International Series, Pearson Education Inc
and Donling Kindersley Publishing Inc. 2013.
2. Shivsharan Sharma, “Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”, RANDOM PUBLICATIONS; First Edition, 2017.
3. Roberto Villaverde, “Fundamental Concepts of Earthquake Engineering”,CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group,
2009.
Reference Book:
1. Ayothiraman R. & Hemanta Hazarika, “Earthquake Hazards and Mitigation”, I K International Publishing House
2013.
2. Robert W. Day, “Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”, McGraw Hill Professional Second edition 2012.
Extensive Reading:
• Kameswara Rao, N.S.V., "Dynamics soil tests and applications", Wheeler Publishing - New Delhi, 2000.
PAGE 235
19CEP15 METRO SYSTEMS AND ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• The basic concepts related to Metro systems.
• The various construction methods of Metros.
• The planning of Depots and service buildings of Metros.
• The multi-modal integration of various modes.
• The planning of track systems.
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate the need for planning of metro systems.
• Deliver the impact of construction methods of Metros.
• Plan and design the Depots, service buildings of Metros.
• Plan and manage the permanent way and terminal facilities of Metros.
• Analyze the track systems efficiency.
Unit I OVERVIEW OF METRO SYSTEMS 9
Need for metros - Basic planning and financials - Scope and limitations of Metro Systems - Role of various modes -
Problems and their Impact - Policy.
Unit II CONSTRUCTION METHODS 9
Overview - Types - Construction methods for elevated, underground stations - Viaduct Spans - Bridges -
Underground Tunnels.
Unit III DEPOTS,COMMERCIAL AND SERVICE BUILDINGS 9
Initial Surveys - Investigations - Basics of Construction Planning - Management - Construction quality & safety
systems.
Unit IV TRAFFIC INTEGRATION 9
Traffic Integration - Multimodal Transfers - Pedestrian Facilities - Parking facilities and its importance -
Environmental and social safeguards.
Unit V TRACK SYSTEMS 9
Track systems - Permanent way - Efficiency, capacity, productivity and utilization - Performance evaluation
techniques - Terminal planning and design - Facilities management.
Text Book:
1. Prathibha Deshmukh,“Urban transport planning and management”, SBS publishers, 2010.
2. Christos N. Pyrgidis, “Railway Transportation Systems: Design, Construction and Operation”,CRC Press,2018.
Reference Book:
1. Flammini, Francesco, “Railway Safety, Reliability, and Security: Technologies and Systems Engineering“, IGI
Global, 2012.
2. Fumitaka Kurauchi, “Public Transport Planning with Smart Card Data”, CRC press,2017.
Extensive Reading:
• M.Ramachandran, “ Metro rail projects in India: a study in project planning”, Orxford university press, 2011.
• Operations And Maintenance Systems for metro Railways -
http://mohua.gov.in/upload/uploadfiles/files/Report%203%20Operations%20and%20Maintenance%20systems
.pdf.
PAGE 236
19CEP16 WASTE MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• The types of waste and its characteristics.
• The technology and management for the safe disposal of waste generated by a community.
• The economic aspects of waste management.
• The waste minimization.
• The methods of recycling the plastic waste.
Course Outcome:
• Illustrate the status of environmental challenges in Waste Management.
• Suggest appropriate options for the safe disposal of waste.
• Analyze economical aspects of waste management and adopt the suitable approach for effective waste
management.
• Apply the theoretical concept to minimize the waste.
• Evaluate the best practices in waste management.
Unit I OVERVIEW OF WASTE MANAGEMENT 9
Sources and types of waste - Status of waste management - Environmental and challenges of Waste Management -
Role of informal sector Legislative framework - Governing bodies and organizational structure of responsible
authorities.
Unit II TECHNOLOGY FOR WASTE MANAGEMENT 9
Processing technologies - Biological and thermal conversion technologies - Energy recovery from conversion
products - Hazardous waste, Biomedical waste and plastic waste treatment - Disposal of nuclear waste.
Unit III FINANCE FOR WASTE MANAGEMENT 9
Understanding Decentralized waste management concept - Economic aspects of waste management - Finance plan
for waste management - PPP model - Case studies.
Unit IV WASTE MANAGEMENT APPROACH 9
Preventing environmental management - Environmental auditing - Environmental management system - ISO14001 -
Life cycle assessment - Waste minimization and 3R concept.
Unit V BEST PRACTICES IN WASTE MANAGEMENT 9
Challenges and approaches in plastic waste management - Different Methods of plastic waste recycle - Concept of
zero waste management - Case studies.
Text Book:
1. George Tchobanoglous, Hilary Thiesen and Samuel A Vigil, “Integrated Solid Waste Management: Engineering
Principles and Management Issues”, McGraw Hill Publishers, New York, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. Manual on "Municipal Solid Waste Management”, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development, Government of
India, New Delhi, 2016.
2. Bhide, A. D. and Sundaresan, B. B. “Solid Waste Management Collection, Processing and Disposal”, ISBN 81-
7525-282-0, 2001.
3. Paul T Williams, “Waste Treatment and Disposal”, John Wiley and Sons, England, 2005.
PAGE 237
19CSP10 GAMIFICATION L T P C
Course Objective:
• To build a conceptual Gamification 2.0 framework.
• To introduce gamification in enterprises and education.
• To code the basic game mechanics.
• To learn to implement gamification.
• To manage game-based activities.
Course Outcome:
• Visualize the concept and motivation of gamification.
• Apply gamification in enterprises and education.
• Experiment different gamification mechanisms adapted.
• Implement game design in gamification.
• Develop game-based applications.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO GAMIFICATION 8
Introduction to gamification – Definition – Intrinsic and extrinsic motivation – Bartles Player Types - Concept of flow
- Structural & Content Gamification - Game Analytics - Gamification 2.0 – Concepts: Curiosity – Joy – Hate – Pride –
Fear – Effort – Voluntariness.
Unit II BRIDGING GAMIFICATION 9
Issues faced by IT managers, educators and policy makers: Areas of expertise – Causes of issues – Bridging the gap.
Gamification in enterprises: Two-factor theory - Gamification for businesses to cooperate - Gamification for
Businesses to compete. Gamification in informal education environments: Approach - Requirements - Game context
and story – Game art, mechanics and technology. Advantages of gamification - Hurdles and challenges to overcome.
Unit III GAME MECHANICS 9
Player Motivation: Powerful human motivators – Motivation to play games – Social games - Progression to Mastery
- Game Mechanics: Designing for Engagement: MDA framework – Game mechanics – points, levels, leaderboards,
badges, onboarding, challenges, quests, and social engagement loops – Customization – Gaming the system - Agile
and Gamification Design – Dashboards.
Unit IV GAMIFICATION IMPLEMENTATION WITH UNITY 5.X 10
Creating a game design document-Creating a prototype-Methods of prototyping-Tools for prototyping in Unity 5.x-
Getting basic core components into Unity-Designing the application-Creating the game elements-An introduction to
Illustrator-Importing and setting our assets in Unity-Creating the application interface-Defining the tasks-Dealing
with tasks.
Unit V GAMIFICATION APPLICATIONS 9
Gamification-based framework for developing learning activities of computational thinking - The development and
assessment of a team-based management game - Theoretical considerations for game-based e-learning analytics.
Text Book:
1. Eamonn Killian, “Briefing: An introduction to Gamification”, 2013 [Study material – Courtesy:
http://www.eamonnkillian.com]. (for Unit I)
2. Edmond C. Prakash and Madhusudan Rao, “Transforming Learning and IT Management through Gamification”,
Springer, 2015. (for Unit II)
3. Gabe Zichermann and Christopher Cunningham, “Gamification by Design - Implementing Game Mechanics in
Web and Mobile Apps”, O’Reilly Media, Inc., 2011. (for Unit III)
4. Lauren S. Ferro “Gamification with Unity 5.X”Packt Publishing; 1 edition.2017 (for Unit IV)
5. Torsten Reiners and Lincoln C. Wood, “Gamification in Education and Business”, Springer, 2015. (for Unit V)
Reference Book:
1. Karl M. Kapp, “The Gamification of Learning and Instruction: Game-based Methods and Strategies for Training
and Education”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.gamification.co/
• https://www.coursera.org/learn/gamification
PAGE 238
19CSP11 GREEN COMPUTING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To gain knowledge in Green IT fundamentals and strategies
• To study about Green business process management and green enterprise architecture
• To understand the structure of green grid framework
• To learn the Socio-cultural aspects of green IT
• To figure out environmentally responsible business strategies.
Course Outcome:
• Realize the impact of green computing in IT
• Identify green assets and model them
• Analyze the green grid framework.
• Work with green compliance and standards
• Work with green business management tools
Unit I FUNDAMENTALS 9
Green IT fundamentals: Business, IT, and the environment – Green computing: Carbon foot print – scoop on power
– Green IT strategies: Drivers, Dimensions, and Goals – Environmentally responsible business: Policies, Practices and
Metrics.
Unit II GREEN ASSETS AND MODELING 9
Green Assets: Buildings, data centers, networks and devices – Green business process management: Modelling,
optimization and collaboration – Green enterprise architecture – Environmental intelligence – Green supply chains –
Green information systems: Design and development models.
Unit III GRID FRAMEWORK 9
Virtualizing of IT systems – Role of electric utilities, telecommuting, teleconferencing and teleporting – Materials
recycling – Best ways for green PC – Green data center – Green grid framework
Unit IV GREEN COMPLIANCE 9
Socio-cultural aspects of green IT – Green enterprise transformation roadmap – Green Compliance: protocols,
standards and audits – Emergent carbon issues: technologies and future.
The Environmentally Responsible Business Strategies (ERBS) – Case study scenarios for trial runs – Case studies –
Applying green IT strategies and applications to a home, hospital, packaging industry and telecom sector.
Text Book:
1. BhuvanUnhelkar, “Green IT Strategies and Applications-Using Environmental Intelligence”, CRC Press, June
2011.
2. Woody Leonhard, Katherrine Murray, “Green Home computing for dummies”, August 2009.
Reference Book:
1. Alin Gales, Michael Schaefer, Mike Ebbers, “Green Data Center: steps for the Journey”, Shoff/IBM rebook, 2011.
2. John Lamb, “The Greening of IT”, Pearson Education, 2009.
3. Jason Harris, “Green Computing and Green IT- Best Practices on regulations & industry”, Lulu.com, 2008.
4. Carl speshocky, “Empowering Green Initiatives with IT”, John Wiley & Sons, 2010.
5. Wu Chun Feng (editor), “Green computing: Large Scale energy efficiency”, CRC Press, 2012.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.studyhelpline.net/hot_it_topics/green_computing/
• http://shodhganga.inflibnet.ac.in/bitstream
• www.citi.umass.edu/ghpc/GHPCC-green-computing-v3.pdf
• www.green-compute.com
PAGE 239
19CSP12 CYBER FORENSICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn the fundamentals of Cyber forensics and Data Acquisition
• To understand the working of Windows, and Linux based systems.
• To understand the procedure for processing , analysis and validation of digital evidence
• To learn the principles of network forensics
• To gain knowledge on email investigation, mobile device forensics and cloud forensics.
• To study the Indian and International cyber laws.
• To learn the fundamentals of Cyber forensics and Data Acquisition
• To understand the working of Windows, and Linux based systems.
• To learn the principles of network forensics
• To gain knowledge on email investigation, mobile device forensics and cloud forensics.
• To study the Indian and International cyber laws.
Course Outcome:
• Determine how to perform data acquisition.
• Analyse the working of Windows and Linux based systems.
• Analyze and validate evidences collected from various sources.
• Perform network forensics.
• Identify issues in email investigation, mobile device forensics and cloud forensics.
• Apply cyber law for different case studies.
Unit I INTRODUCTION, DATA ACQUISITION 9
An Overview of Digital Forensics- Preparing for Digital Investigations- Maintaining Professional Conduct - Preparing a
Digital Forensics Investigation - Procedures for Private-Sector High-Tech Investigations- Understanding Data
Recovery Workstations and Software- Conducting an Investigation. Data Acquisitions: Understanding Storage
Formats for Digital Evidence - Determining the Best Acquisition Method- Contingency Planning for Image
Acquisitions- Using Acquisition Tools- Validating Data Acquisitions- Performing RAID Data Acquisitions- Using
Remote Network Acquisition Tools- Using Other Forensics Acquisition Tools.
Unit II UNDERSTANDING WINDOWS AND LINUX, NEED FOR FORENSIC TOOLS. 9
Working with Windows and CLI Systems: Understanding File Systems- Exploring Microsoft File Structures -
Examining NTFS Disks- Understanding Whole Disk Encryption- Understanding the Windows Registry- Understanding
Microsoft Startup Tasks- Understanding Virtual Machines. Current Digital Forensics Tools: Evaluating Digital
Forensics Tool Needs- Digital Forensics Software Tools- Digital Forensics Hardware Tools- Validating and Testing
Forensics Software. Examining Linux File Structures- Using Linux Forensics Tools
Unit III EVIDENCE PROCESSING, DIGITAL FORENSICS ANALYSIS, NETWORK FORENSICS 9
Processing Crime and Incident Scenes: Digital evidence – Identification - Collection in private sector incident scenes -
Processing law enforcement crime scenes - Preparing for a search - Securing a digital incident - Seizing digital
evidence - Storing digital evidence - Obtaining a digital hash - Reviewing a case. Digital Forensics Analysis and
Validation: Determining What Data to Collect and Analyze- Validating Forensic Data- Addressing Data-Hiding
Techniques- An Overview of Virtual Machine Forensics- Performing Live Acquisitions- Network Forensics Overview
Unit IV EMAIL, MOBILE AND CLOUD FORENSICS 9
E-mail and Social Media Investigations: Exploring the Role of E-mail in Investigations- Exploring the Roles of the
Client and Server in E-mail- Investigating E-mail Crimes and Violation- Understanding E-mail Servers- Using
Specialized E-mail Forensics Tools- Applying Digital Forensics to Social Media. Mobile Device Forensics and the
Internet of Anything: Understanding Mobile Device Forensics-Understanding Acquisition Procedures for Mobile
Devices- Understanding Forensics in the Internet of Anything. Cloud Forensics: An Overview of Cloud Computing-
Legal Challenges in Cloud Forensics- Technical Challenges in Cloud Forensics- Acquisitions in the Cloud- Conducting
a Cloud Investigation- Tools for Cloud Forensics
Unit V CYBER LAWS AND CASE STUDIES 9
Cybercrime Case Studies: Cybercrime against individuals- Cybercrime against property- Cybercrime against Nation.
Introduction to Cyber Laws- Cyber Laws in India and case studies-International Cyber laws and case studies:
Cybercrime Legislation in the Netherlands - Cyber laws in Malaysia - Cybercrime laws in the UK - Cybercrime laws of
the USA - Australian laws related to privacy.
Text Book:
1. Nelson, Phillips, Steuart, “Computer Forensics and Investigations”, Cengage Learning, Sixth Edition, 2018
2. Dejey, Murugan, “ Cyber Forensics”, Oxford University Press, 2018
PAGE 240
Reference Book:
1. John R. Vacca, “Computer Forensics”, Firewall Media, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Keith J. Jones, Richard Bejtlich, Curtis W. Rose, “Real Digital Forensics”, Addison Wesley Pearson Education,
2005.
3. Christopher L.T. Brown, “Computer Evidence – Collection & Preservation”, Firewall Media, Second Edition, 2009
4. Jesus Mena, “Homeland Security – Techniques & Technologies”, Firewall Media, 2007.
5. Robert M. Slade, “Software Forensics Collecting Evidence from the scene of a Digital Crime”, Tata McGraw Hill,
2005.
6. Chad Steel, “Windows Forensics”, Wiley India Edition, 2006.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.cyberforensics.in
• http://www.porcupine.org/forensics/forensic-discovery/
• http://www.securestate.com/Services/Incident%20Response/Pages/Forensic-Analysis.aspx
• http://www.brandeisdl.discom.com/Forensics/02Modules/07/01Overview/
• http://www.mobilephoneinvestigations.net/
PAGE 241
19CSP13 USABILITY ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn about user experience and design models.
• To know about the social and emotional user interactions
• To Know how data can be gathered, analysed, interpreted and presented
• To understand the interaction design process
• To understand the evaluation of usability
Course Outcome:
• Model user interaction
• Capture user interactions through different types of interactions
• Gather, analyze, interpret and present data
• Do an interaction design
• Perform usability testing
Unit I INTERACTION DESIGN 9
Interaction Design Process – User Experience-Good and Bad Design-Problem Space and conceptualization -
Conceptual models - Interface metaphors - Interaction Types - Paradigms ,Visions, Theories, Models and Framework
Unit II SOCIAL AND EMOTIONAL INTERACTION 9
Cognitive Aspects-Cognitive Frameworks-Social interaction – Face to face conversation-Remote Conversation –
TelePresence – CoPresence - Emotional Interaction-Emotions and User Experience-Expressive interfaces-Annoying
interfaces-Detecting Emotions and Emotional Technology-Persuasive Technologies and Behavioral Change-
Anthropomorphism and Zoomorphism
Unit III DATA GATHERING, ANALYSIS, INTERPRETATION AND PRESENTATION 9
Key Issues - Data Recording – Interviews – Questionnaires – Observation - Choosing and Combining Techniques -
Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis - Simple Quantitative Analysis - Simple Qualitative Analysis -Tools to Support
Data Analysis - Using Theoretical Frameworks - Presenting the Findings
Unit IV INTERACTION DESIGN PROCESS 9
Steps in Interaction Design – Requirements - gathering Requirements - Data Gathering, analysis, interpretation and
presentation -Task Analysis – Prototyping - Conceptual Design - Using Scenarios - Generating Prototypes –
Construction - Agile UX – Design Patterns
Unit V EVALUATION 9
Understanding Evaluation - Types of evaluation - issues considered during evaluation - Usability testing -Conducting
experiments - Field Studies – Inspections – Analytics - Predictive Models
Text Book:
1. Jenny Preece, Helen Sharp, Yvonne Rogers, “Interaction Design: Beyond Human-Computer Interaction”,
Wiley,4th Edition.2015
2. Mary Beth Rosson and John M. Carroll, “Usability Engineering Scenario-Based Development of Human–
Computer Interaction”, Elsevier, 2002
Reference Book:
1. Jakob Nielsen,” Usability Engineering”, Morgan Kaufmann,1994
2. Robert J. Torres, “Practitioner's Handbook for User Interface Design and Development”,PHI,2002
3. Donald A. Norman, “The Design of Everyday Things” ,Basic Books,2013
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.udemy.com/ultimate-guide-to-ux/
• https://uxtraining.com/
• https://uxpin.com/knowledge.html
• http://thehipperelement.com/post/75476711614/ux-crash-course-31-fundamentals
PAGE 242
19ECP12 PATTERN RECOGNITION L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand Supervised and Unsupervised Learning
• To get familiar with Linear Discriminant Functions
• To Gain knowledge on Parametric and Non parametric approaches
Course Outcome:
• Explain the concepts of Pattern Recognition
• Implement Supervised learning
• Apply Parametric and Non- Parametric approaches for real world problems
• Decide appropriate Discriminant functions for Image Applications
• Compare different types of clustering methods
Unit I PATTERN RECOGNITION CONCEPTS 9
Patterns and Pattern Recognition – Pattern Recognition System – significance – Configurations – Representation of
Patterns and Machine recognition – Pattern Recognition approaches
Unit II SUPERVISED LEARNING USING PARAMETRIC APPROACH 10
Bayesian Decision Theory – Minimum–Error Rate Classification – Classifiers – Discriminant Functions – Decision
Surfaces – Discriminant Functions for the Normal Density – error Bounds for Normal Densities – Maximum
Likelihood estimation – Bayesian estimation – Bayesian Parameter estimation – Gaussian case – Problems of
Dimensionality – Component analysis and Discriminants
Unit III SUPERVISED LEARNING USING NON PARAMETRIC APPROACH 8
Non parametric density estimation – Parzen Windows – K-Nearest Neighbor Estimation – The Nearest Neighbor rule
– Metrics and Nearest Neighbor Classification – Properties of Metrics – Tangent Distance.
Unit IV LINEAR DISCRIMINANT FUNCTIONS 9
Linear Discriminant Functions and Decision Surfaces – Generalized Linear Discriminant Functions – The two
category: Linearly Separable Case – Minimizing the Perceptron Criterion function – Relaxation Procedures – Non
separable Behavior – Minimum Squared–Error Procedure – The Ho–Kashyap procedures.
Unit V UNSUPERVISED LEARNING AND CLUSTERING 9
Unsupervised learning – Mixture Densities and Identifiability – Maximum Likelihood estimates – application to
Normal Mixtures – Unsupervised Bayesian learning – Data Description and Clustering – Criterion function for
clustering – Hierarchical clustering – Graph theoretic approach to pattern clustering –Component Analysis.
Text Book:
1. Richard O.Duda, Peter E.Hart and David G.Stork, “Pattern Classification”, 2nd Edition, Wiley India, 2006.
2. Earl Gose, R.JohnsonBaugh and Steve Jost , “Pattern Recognition and Image Analysis”, Pearson,2015.
Reference Book:
1. Sing–tze Bow, "Pattern Recognition and Image Preprocessing”, 2nd Edition, Marcel Dekker, Inc , 2002.
2. Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac, Roger Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis and Machine Vision”, PWS Publishing,
1999.
3. Robert J.Schalkoff, “Pattern Recognition Statistical, Structural and Neural Approaches”, John Wiley & Sons Inc.,
New York, 1992.
4. Morton Nadier and Eric Smith P., “Pattern Recognition Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1993.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.cs.rit.edu/~rlaz/prec20092/slides/Overview.pdf
• http://eml.berkeley.edu/~powell/e241a_sp10/ndnotes.pdf
• http://www.ssc.wisc.edu/~bhansen/718/NonParametrics1.pdf
• http://www.cs.utah.edu/~piyush/teaching/EM_algorithm.pdf
• https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_ee56/
PAGE 243
19ECP14 VIDEO ANALYTICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To acquire the knowledge of extracting information from surveillance videos.
• To learn Event Modeling for different applications.
• To understand the models and techniques used for recognition of objects in videos.
Course Outcome:
• Apply adaptive background modelling for different scenarios.
• Analyze different features for effective representation of video content and classify them.
• Develop a suitable algorithm to track multiple objects for intelligent surveillance applications.
• Model a framework for recognizing Human and their activities.
• Apply mathematical models and algorithms to real problems in video analysis.
Unit I VIDEO PRE-PROCESSING 9
Worldwide Video Standards (NTSC, PAL, SECAM), Interlaced and Progressive Scan, Resolution, Colour models in
video - YUV, YIQ, YCbCr, Scene Change detection, Spatiotemporal Change detection - Change detection using two
frames - Temporal integration - Combination with spatial segmentation - Motion Segmentation - Dominant Motion
Segmentation - Multiple Motion Segmentation.
Unit II FRAMEWORK FOR VIDEO ANALYSIS AND OBJECT CLASSIFICATION 9
Image and Video features- Statistical, Content based, Compressed domain- Video Shot analysis- Shot boundary
detection, key frame extraction, Play/Break segmentation, Audio Marker detection, Video Marker Detection, Video
representation for scripted and unscripted contents- Motion based object classification – Silhouette Based Method
for Object Classification – Multiclass boosting classifier - Viola Jones object detection framework.
Unit III MULTI–OBJECT TRACKING 9
Classification of multiple interacting objects from video – Region–based Tracking – Contour–based Tracking –
Feature–based Tracking – Model–based Tracking – Hybrid Tracking – Particle filter based object tracking – Mean
Shift based tracking – Tracking of multiple interacting objects.
Unit IV RECOGNITION OF HUMANS AND THEIR ACTIVITIES 9
Human Recognition using Face – Principal Component Analysis - Feature Based Approaches - Human Recognition
Using Gait – HMM Framework for Gait Recognition – View Invariant Gait Recognition– Template based activity
recognition – Human interactions – Group activities – Applications and challenges.
Unit V VIDEO ANALYTICS APPLICATIONS 9
Auto–calibration of Non–overlapping Multi–camera CCTV Systems – Human age estimation and gender
classification – People Counter – Counting of Mostly Static People in Indoor Conditions – Scene Invariant Crowd
Counting and Crowd Occupancy Analysis – Identifying customer behavior and dwell time using soft biometrics.
Text Book:
1. Al Bovik, “Essential Guide to Video Processing”, Academic Press, First Edition, 2009.
2. Caifeng Shan, FatihPorikli, Tao Xiang, Shaogang Gong, “Video Analytics for Business Intelligence”, Studies in
Computational Intelligence, Springer, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Murat A. Tekalp, “Digital Video Processing”, Prentice Hall, 2015.
2. Amit K. Roy-chowdhury, Rama Chellappa, Al Bovik, S. Kevin Zhou, "Recognition of humans and their activities
using video", Morgan & Claypool Publishers, 2005.
3. Hamid Aghajan, Andrea Cavallaro “Multi–Camera Networks: Principles and Applications”, Academic Press,
May 2009.
4. Anthony C Caputo, “Digital Video Surveillance and security” Elsevier Inc, Second Edition, 2014.
5. Yunqian Ma, Gang Qian, “Intelligent Video Surveillance: Systems and Technology”, CRC Press (Taylor and
Francis Group), 2009.
Extensive Reading:
• YiHuang, DongXu and Tat–Jen Cham, “Face and Human Gait Recognition Using Image–to–Class Distance”
IEEE Transactions On Circuits And Systems For Video Technology, Vol. 20, No. 3, March 2010.
• Changhong Chen, Jimin Liang, Heng Zhao, Haihong Hu, and JieTian, “Factorial HMM and Parallel HMM for Gait
Recognition”, IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics—Part C: Applications and Reviews, Vol. 39,
No. 1, January 2009.
• https://www.3xlogic.com/sites/default/files/Understanding%20Video%20Analytics.pdf
PAGE 244
19ECP15 MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• To establish multimedia file formats, multimedia network standards which are used for communication
everywhere.
• To develop the skills to operate and maintain the multimedia communication system.
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the streaming characteristics of multimedia communication systems.
• Explain the technologies used for multimedia processing, coding and communications.
• Explain different standards for multimedia communication.
• Explain how multimedia data can be communicated across networks.
• Analyze the networking requirements in terms of QoS provisioning and traffic management.
Unit I MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION CHARACTERISTICS 9
Evolution, services, trends and driving forces in Multimedia Communication- Digital network Library system-
Multimedia Teleconferencing system-Super High Definition Image system-Multimedia 0n-demand system-
Streaming characteristics for continuous media- Statistical and content related analysis.
Unit II MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES 9
Multimedia Communication Model – Elements of Multimedia Systems – User and – Network requirements –
Multimedia processing in communications – digital media, signal processing elements – digital audio file formats –
digital image file formats – digital video file formats – Distributed Multimedia Systems – main features and resource
management – Distributed Multimedia application ITV – VOD.
Unit III MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION STANDARDS 9
MPEG approach to multimedia standardization, MPEG–1 encoding and decoding –MPEG–4 coding of audio and
video –JPEG 2000 –ITU -T standardization of audiovisual communication systems –RTSP, RTP/RTCP – SIP and H.263.
Unit IV MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION ACROSS NETWORKS 9
Multimedia across IP Networks – audio and video transmission across IP network – Multimedia across DSLs – VODSL
architecture – voice services – Multimedia across ADSL – Multimedia Across Wireless – Speech transmission in GSM
– Video across GSM – Mobile ATM – Mobile IP – Wireless multimedia delivery.
Unit V MULTIMEDIA QOS AND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT 9
Source traffic modeling – Mathematical models-Multimedia traffic management-connection admission control- QoS
principles, mechanisms, QoS based routing-Policing- Selective discard mechanism-scheduling-ABR flow control- QoS
Architecture-Int-Serv and Tenet.
Text Book:
1. K. R. Rao, Zoran S. Bojkovic, Dragorad A. Milovanovic, “Multimedia Communication Systems: Techniques,
Standards, and Networks”, Prentice Hall, 2002.
2. MallikarjunTatipamula, BhumipKhasnapish, “Multimedia Communication Networks-Technologies and Services”,
Artech House Publishing, 1998.
Reference Book:
1. Ohm, Jens, “Multimedia Communication Technology-Representation, Transmission and Identification of
Multimedia Signals”, Springer-Verlag, 1st edition, 2004.
2. Aura Ganz, ZviGanz and KittiWongthawaravat, “Multimedia Wireless Networks: Technologies, Standards and
QoS”, Prentice Hall, 2003.
Extensive Reading:
• www.eie.polyu.edu.hk/~enyhchan/mt_intro.pdf
• https://www.cs.cmu.edu/~ref/mlim/chapter9.html
PAGE 245
19ECP16 ELECTRONIC PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To make systematic just-in-time transfer of state of the art knowledge derived from the latest research results
• To understand Electronics Packaging with Emphasis on solids, thermal engineering and mechanics of materials
• To understand different types of Electronic Product development life cycle
Course Outcome:
• Synthesize the electronic products with the help of interdisciplinary knowledge from many diverse sources:
electrical, mechanical, thermal, materials, manufacturing and business.
• Build reliable electronic products
• Effectively communicate (verbally and in writing), as well as be adept at working on teams
• Design, test and fabricate using PCB
• Analyze various available IC packing technologies
Unit I ELECTRONIC PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LIFE CYCLE 9
Different types of Electronic Product development (Using Modules, Customizing Reference design, Custom Board
development, Board development with new ASIC developed); Product volume and its effect on the type of product
development; Different types of ASIC development – FPGA, Gate Array, Standard Cell; Product level Life Cycle &
Stage gates; Generic Electronic Product Organization structure; Documentation control and stake holders
Unit II DESIGN MANAGEMENT 9
Product costing variables and their control, Technology risks in electronic development, Quality function
deployment, Methods of idea generation, Requirements Management, Development process - V model; Computer
Tools used in design (Computer Aided Analysis [CAA], Computer Aided Simulation/Modeling, Computer Aided
Design[CAD], Product Lifecycle Management[PLM], tools); Product characteristics for different domains; Regulated
industry (Medical/Aerospace/Functional Safety) design controls.
Unit III BUILDING RELIABLE PRODUCTS 9
Safety in circuits – Intrinsic safety; Product Reliability curve (Bath tub curve); MTBF prediction by Part count method
and Part stress method; Reliability Testing methods like ESS, HASS, HALT; Component failures of common discrete,
Component De-rating; Introduction to Failure Mode & Effect Analysis (FMEA); Reliability Block Diagram of a Circuit;
FMEA Analysis of a simple Circuit; Worst Case Circuit analysis (WCA) of simple circuits.
Unit IV BEYOND DESIGN 9
PCB Layout; PCB Fabrication technology for Single and Multilayer PCBs; PCB Assembly process; Signal Integrity and
High speed digital circuit challenges; Cable harness development; Design Validation Testing; Certification Testing
(FCC & CE); Production/Manufacturing testing – PCBA level and full assembly level ASIC Fabrication, Wafer
packaging, Silicon Testing, Characterization Design for X - Design for Manufacturing , Assembly, Testing,
Environment, Usability, Safety, maintainability, Reliability, Packaging & shipping.
Unit V ELECTRONIC PACKAGING 9
Component packages : Discrete Component Packages, Standard IC Packages, Ball Grid Array (BGA) Package types,
Advances in Package technology, Package on Packages (POP), Multichip packages (MCP), and other recent advances
Rack systems – 19 rack systems; VME racks; DIN Rail system; VXI chassis, Indoor / Outdoor Enclosures - NEMA
enclosures, Ingress protection (IP) enclosures, Explosive proof enclosures - Thermal elements used in Electronics -
Heat sinks, Heat pipe, Fan - Airflow, Coolant circulation, Thermo Electric Cooler (TEC); Design of Heat sink.
Text Book:
1. Donald G. Reinertsen, “The principles of Electronic Product Development Flow: Second generation lean Product
Development”, Celeritas Publishing, 2009
2. R.G. Kaduskar, V.B. Baru, “Electronic Product Design”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2011
Reference Book:
1. Bert Haskell, “Portable Electronics Product Design and Development: For Cellular Phones, PDAs, Digital
Cameras, Personal Electronics, and More”, McGraw Hill Professional, 2004
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.biodigital.co.uk/documents/The%20Beginners%20Guide%20to%20Developing%20a%20New%20Pr
oduct.pdf
• http://citeseerx.ist.psu.edu/viewdoc/download?doi=10.1.1.96.3556 &rep=rep1&type=pdf
PAGE 246
19ECP17 BIO SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To characterize different biosignals& systems
• To apply compression techniques for signal analysis
• To analyze signals in time series domain & estimate the spectrum
Course Outcome:
• Examine the characteristics of various bio signals.
• Analyze bio signals in noisy environment for diagnosis.
• Compress the bio signal for reduced representation.
• Apply techniques for automated cardio vascular signal processing and decision making to aid diagnosis.
• Apply techniques for neurological signal processing and brain-computer interface
Unit I ELEMENTS OF BIO-SIGNALS 9
Nature of bio-signals, characteristics of various bio-signals: ECG, EMG, EEG, ERG, ERP, EGG, CP, ENG, EOG, Speech
signal and VAG-Interference associated with bio-signal, objective and difficulties in biomedical signal analysis,
computer aided diagnosis.
Unit II FILTERING FOR REMOVAL OF ARTIFACTS 9
Time domain: synchronous averaging, moving average filters, derivative based - Frequency domain: Removal of
high-frequency noise: Butterworth lowpass filters, Removal of low-frequency noise: Butterworth highpass filters,
Removal of periodic artifacts: Notch and comb filters - optimal filtering - Adaptive Filters for Removal of
Interference: adaptive noise canceler- LMS adaptive filter- RLS adaptive filter.
Unit III DATA COMPRESSION 9
Lossless &Lossy Compression – Direct method, Transform based method – Redundancy – Quantization – Heart
Rate Variability – Time Domain measures – Heart Rhythm representation – Spectral analysis of heart rate
variability – interaction with other physiological signals.
Unit IV CARDIO VASCULAR APPLICATIONS 9
Electrical Activity of the heart ECG data acquisition – ECG parameters estimation – multiscale analysis for ECG
parameters estimation – Noise & Artifacts – ECG Signal Processing : Baseline Wandering , Power line
interference , Muscle noise filtering – QRS detection – Arrhythmia analysis
Unit V NEUROLOGICAL APPLICATIONS 9
Electroencephalogram – EEG rhythms & waveform – categorization of EEG activity – recording techniques – EEG
applications – Epilepsy – sleep disorders – brain computer interface – EEG modeling – artifacts in EEG & their
characteristics and processing
Text Book:
1. Rangaraj M. Rangayyan, “Biomedical Signal Analysis–A case study approach”,2nd Edition, Wiley Interscience
/IEEE Press, 2012.
2. Leif Sornmo, Pablo Laguna, “Bioelectrical Signal Processing in Cardiac & Neurological Applications”, Elsevier,
2005.
Reference Book:
1. D.C.Reddy, “Biomedical Signal Processing: Principles and Techniques”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Willis J. Tompkins, “Biomedical Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Arnon Cohen, “Bio–Medical Signal Processing”, Vol I and Vol II, CRC Press Inc., 1999.
4. Bruce, “Biomedical Signal Processing & Signal Modeling”, Wiley, 2001.
5. Semmlow, “Bio–signal and Biomedical Image Processing”, 3rd Edition, CRC press, 2014.
6. “Marcel DekkerEnderle, “Introduction to Biomedical Engineering,” 2nd Edition, Elsevier, 2011.
Extensive Reading:
• www.embs.org/about–biomedical.../our.../biomedical–signal–processing/
• users.ece.cmu.edu/.../hsunhsien–chang–moura–biomedicalsp–2010.pdf
• www.ocw.mit.edu
• www.openbiomedical.org
• https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee41/
PAGE 247
19EEP11 FIBER OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basic concepts of optical fibers and their properties.
• Different types of optical sensors for industrial applications.
• Laser fundamental and Industrial application of lasers.
• Working principle of holography and Medical applications of Lasers.
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate the working of fiber optic sensor.
• Apply fiber optic instrumentation for industrial process.
• Understand the working of laser instruments.
• Apply laser for industrial applications.
• Apply laser for medical applications.
Unit I OPTICAL FIBRES AND THEIR PROPERTIES 9
Principles of light propagation through a fibre - Different types of fibres and their properties, fibre characteristics –
Absorption losses – Scattering losses – Dispersion – Connectors and splicers – Fibre termination – Optical sources –
Optical detectors.
Unit II INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF OPTICAL FIBRES 9
Fibre optic sensors – Fibre optic instrumentation system – Different types of Modulators – Interferometric method
of measurement of length – Moire fringes – Measurement of pressure, temperature, current, voltage, liquid level
and strain .
Unit III LASER FUNDAMENTALS 9
Fundamental characteristics of lasers – Three level and four level lasers – Properties of laser – Laser modes –
Resonator configuration – Q-switching and mode locking – Cavity damping – Types of lasers – Gas lasers, solid
lasers, liquid lasers, semiconductor lasers.
Unit IV INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF LASERS 9
Laser for measurement of distance, length, velocity, acceleration, current, voltage and Atmospheric effect –
Material processing – Laser heating, welding, melting and trimming of material – Removal and vaporization.
Unit V HOLOGRAM AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9
Holography – Basic principle - Methods – Holographic interferometry and application, Holography for non-
destructive testing – Holographic components – Medical applications of lasers, laser and tissue interactive – Laser
instruments for surgery, removal of tumors of vocal cards, brain surgery, plastic surgery, gynaecology and oncology.
Text Book:
1. J.M. Senior, ‘Optical Fiber Communications: Principles and Practice’ Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
2. J. Wilson and J.F.B. Hawkes, ‘Introduction to Opto Electronics’, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
Reference Book:
1. G. Keiser, ‘Optical Fibre Communication’, McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. M. Arumugam, ‘Optical Fibre Communication and Sensors’, Anuradha Agencies, 2002.
3. John F. Read, ‘Industrial Applications of Lasers’, Academic Press, 1997.
4. Sunita P. Ugale, Vivekanand Mishra, “Fiber-Optic Communication: Systems and Components”, Wiley, 2012.
PAGE 248
19EEP12 ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the basics of electrical fire and statutory requirements for electrical safety.
• To be familiar with the causes of accidents due to electrical hazards and preventions.
• To acquainted with the various protection systems in Industries from electrical hazards and the importance of
earthing.
• To recognize the various hazardous zones and applicable enclosures for electrical devices.
• To be aware of the principles of safety management.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the concepts of electrical safety and statutory requirements.
• Elucidate the basic concepts of electrical hazards and preventive methods.
• Expound the operation of various protection systems to inhibit electrical hazards.
• Recognize different hazardous zones in Industries and enclosure for protection.
• Explicate the Principles of Safety Management.
• clarify the statutory requirements related to electrical safety
• Elucidate the basic concepts in electrical circuit and hazards involved in it.
• Explicate the electrical hazards in Industries.
• Expound the operation of various protection systems from electrical hazards.
• Recognize different hazardous zones in Industries.
Unit I INTRODUCTION ABOUT ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction – electrostatics, electro magnetism, stored energy, energy radiation and electromagnetic interference
–Indian electricity act and rules-statutory requirements from electrical inspectorate-international standards on
electrical safety – first aid-cardio pulmonary resuscitation (CPR).
Unit II ELECTRICAL HAZARDS 9
Primary and secondary hazards - shocks, burns, scalds, falls - Human safety in the use of electricity - Classes of
insulation-voltage classifications -current surges- over current and short circuit current-heating effects of current-
electrical causes of fire and explosion. Lightning hazards, lightning arrestor, installation – earthing, specifications,
earth resistance, earth pit maintenance.
Unit III PROTECTION SYSTEMS 9
Fuse, circuit breakers and overload relays – protection against over voltage and under voltage – safe limits of
amperage – voltage –safe distance from lines - overload and short circuit protection. Earth leakage circuit breaker
(ELCB)- use of low voltage-electrical guards-Personal protective equipment - Lock Out and Tag Out system - work
permit system - preventive maintenance.
Unit IV ELECTRICAL SAFETY IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 9
Classification of hazardous zones - Functional Requirements and specifications of Electrical plants and Equipments
for Hazardous Locations – Classification of equipment enclosure for various hazardous gases and vapours –
Classification of Equipment/Enclosures for hazardous locations – Maximum surface temperature classification of
electrical equipments.
Unit V SAFETY MANAGEMENT OF ELECTRICAL PLANTS 9
Principles of Safety Management – Definitions – Management’s Safety Policy – Safety Organization – Safety Auditing
– Training and Supervision – Economic Aspects – Annual Reports – Motivation to Managers and Supervisors –
Motivation to Employees.
Text Book:
1. Rao .S,”Electrical Safety Fire Safety Engineering and Safety Management”, Khanna Publications, 2nd Edition,
2012.
Reference Book:
1. Fordham Cooper, W., “Electrical Safety Engineering” Butterworth and Company, London, 2006.
2. Indian Electricity Act and Rules, Government of India.
3. Power Engineers – Handbook of TNEB, Chennai, 2009.
4. Martin Glov, ‘Electrostatic Hazards in powder handling’, Research Studies Pvt.LTd., England, 2008.
5. Dr.Massim A.G.Mitolo, ‘Electrical safety of Low voltage systems’, Mc Graw Hill 2009
6. John Cadick et al., ‘Electrical safety Handbook’, Third Edition, Mc Graw Hill 2006
PAGE 249
19EEP13 ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basic concepts on different energy storage systems
• Hydrogen storage methods
• Energy storage using batteries
• Power Production using fuel-cell
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate the concepts of different energy storage systems.
• Comprehend different Hydrogen extraction schemes
• Describe about different battery technologies
• Analyze the performance of battery charge controllers and their application
• Conceptualize the operation of different Fuel cell
Unit I ENERGY STORAGE METHODS 9
Need for Energy storage-Different energy storage Methods- Mechanical energy storage: Pumped storage,
Compressed air storage - Electromagnetic storage-Electrostatic storage-Thermal energy storage: Sensible heat
storage, Latent heat storage-Different methods of chemical Energy storage-Reversible Chemical Storage
Unit II HYDROGEN ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS 9
Block diagram of Hydrogen energy systems - Properties of Hydrogen - Extraction methods of Hydrogen: Thermo-
chemical methods - Electrolysis of water-Thermolysis of water- Biophotolysis - Hydrogen storage techniques-
Delivery of Hydrogen-Conversion of Hydrogen - Applications-Safety Issues
Unit III ENERGY STORAGE USING BATTERIES 9
Batteries - Construction and working - Elements of Electrochemical cell-operation of Electrochemical cell-Theoretical
cell voltage and capacity-Losses in a cell-Battery classification-Constructions and working principle of Lead Acid
battery-Nickel Cadmium batteries-Lithium-ion batteries-Battery parameters: Battery capacity, Battery Voltage,
Depth of discharge-Battery life cycle-Discharge/charge rate, Self discharge-Ragone Plots
Unit IV BATTERY CHARGING AND CHARGE CONTROLLERS 9
Factors affecting battery performance: Battery voltage level, Battery Discharge current, Battery Temperature during
discharge-Factors affecting Choice of a battery-Battery charging and discharging methods-Charge controllers for
stand-alone PV system-Types of charge controllers for stand-alone PV system: Shunt type, Series type, DC-DC
converter type, MPPT charge controller –Power stage and control scheme for battery charging using DC-DC
converter-Flow chart for battery charging
Unit V FUEL CELL 9
Introduction-Advantages-Applications-Classification of fuel cells- Construction and working of Phosphoric Acid fuel
cell-Alkaline Fuel cell-Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Fuel cell-Fuels for Fuel Cells-Efficiency of Fuel cell-VI
characteristics of Fuel Cell-MPPT controller for fuel cell
Text Book:
1. Khan B.H.,”Non-Conventional Energy Resources”, Tata McGraw Hill Publication, 2nd Edition, 2009.
2. Sandeep Dhameja, “Electric Vehicle Battery Systems”, Elsevier Science,2001
3. Thomas B. Reddy,”Linden’s Handbook of Batteries”, Fourth Edition,McGrawHill,2011
4. EG&G Technical Services, Inc. “Fuel Cell Handbook”, Seventh Edition, 2004
Reference Book:
1. Robert A. Huggins, “Energy Storage”, Springer Science & Business Media, 2010.
2. Vladimir S. Bagotsky, “Fuel Cells- Problems and Solutions”, Second Edition, Wiley, 2012
PAGE 250
19ITP12 USER EXPERIENCE DESIGN L T P C

Course Objective:
• Learn the basics of UX, and user-centered design
• Understand users’ problems through research and empathy
• Communicate designs through deliverables like personas, sitemaps, user flows, wireframes etc.
• Explore the core research techniques professionals use to gain customer insight, and get experience by working
on hands-on projects
• Present, defend and critique design decisions
• Develop your UX portfolio, creating deliverables like personas, storyboards, customer journey maps, & empathy
maps
Course Outcome:
• Explore issues in human-centered design process with respect to user experience
• Employ competent design methods such as sketching, video scenarios, and experience prototyping
• Develop an appreciation for the use of storytelling as a means of designing and evaluating user experience
• Perform a real world design of a user experience
• Extend design standards, guidelines, and patterns focusing on animating the user experiences
Unit I UX DESIGN 9
Design for the wild – Case Study – Apple, Design and Business – Bossy rule – Snapshot of Today - Sketch of the
process – Cycle of innovation – Question of Design – Anatomy of Sketching – Clarity – Family of Renderings
Unit II DESIGN AS DREAMCATCHER 9
Experience Design Vs Interface Design - Sketching Interaction – Sketches Vs Prototypes – User - Sound like a
Negative Thing – Unviewed Sketches - The Object of Sharing - Annotation: Sketching on Sketches - Design Thinking
& Ecology -The Second Worst Thing that Can Happen-A River Runs Through It
Unit III STORYBOARDING 9
From thinking to Acting - Chameleon – Cobbling – Case Study Visual Story Telling - Simple Animation - Shoot the
Mime – Sketch-a-Move - Extending Interaction: Real and Illusion- The Bifocal Display - Video Invisionment -
Interacting with Paper – Interacting with Person
Unit IV SAMPLING THE REAL WORLD 9
Scribble Sketching – Sampling with Cameras – Collecting images and clippings – Toy boxes – Physical Collections –
Sharing Found Objects – Warm up to Sketching – Sketching what you see - Vanilla Sketching – Collaborative
Sketching – Sketching With Office Supplies – Photo Traces - Hybrid Sketches
Unit V ANIMATING THE USER EXPERIENCE 9
Animated Sequence – Motion Paths – Branching Animations – Key Frames – Tweening – Linear Video – Uncovering
Mental Model - Wizard of Oz – Think Aloud – Sketch Boards – Case Study – Descending the Design Tunnel – Recent
trends in User Experience Design – Product Design
Text Book:
1. Luke Miller, “The Practioner’s Guide to User Experience Design”, Grand Central Publishing, First Edition, 2015
2. Steve Kurg, Don’t Make me Think, Revisited, New Riders, Third edition, 2014.
3. Greenberg, S., Carpendale, S., Marquart, N., and Buxton, B. Sketching User Experiences: The Workbook, San
Francisco: Morgan Kaufmann, 2011.
4. Bill Buxton, Sketching User Experiences, Morgan Kaufmann, 2007
Extensive Reading:
• http://uxdesign.com/
• https://www.lynda.com/learning-paths/Web/become-a-user-experience-designer
PAGE 251
19ITP13 MOBILE 3D GRAPHICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To provide a better, faster and cheaper mobile in 3D
• To analyse a creative process when designing solutions to a problem
• To model a framework to succeed rapidly changing mobile space
• To define API’s for 3D computer graphics
• Tomeet the needs of mobile devices, which are constricted in terms of memory, and processing power,
graphics hardware such as a GPU
Course Outcome:
• Explore the fundamental concepts of mobile 3D graphics
• Analyze the techniques to perform 3D transformations on objects
• Apply various techniques for textures, blending and transparency
• Design scene graphs and animations in M3G
• Explore the usage of Open GL for developing 3D graphics
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE 3D GRAPHICS 9
Rise Of Mobile Graphics – Mobile Devices – Platforms – Software – Usability – Mobile Devices And Graphics –
Pipeline – Wire Frame – Depth Cuing – Hidden Surface – Lighting Models – Textures – Scenarios And Challenges –
Application Scenario – Multimedia And Graphics Usability Challenges – Algorithms And Architectural Challenges –
Fixed Point Maths – Graphics Hardware – Tile Rendering – Mobile 3D Graphics API – M3G Feature Overview –
Developing A Midlet
Unit II 3D FUNDAMENTALS 9
Rendering Geometric Objects – Co-Ordinate Systems – Creating Meshes – Immediate Mode Rendering – Shapes
Library – Transformations – Transforming Vectors – Stages Of Vertex Transformation - Modelling And Viewing
Transformation – Projection Transformation – Viewport – Depth Buffer – Transforming 3D Co-Ordinates
Unit III TEXTURES, BLENDING AND TRANSPARENCY 9
Image 2D – Using Textures – Sprite3D – Environment Mapping –Blending And Transparency – Compositing – Multi-
Texturing – Adding Fog For Realism – Creation Of Emboss Effect – Lighting In M3G – Light Sources – Materials –
Emulating Light
Unit IV ADVANCES IN M3G 9
Scene Graphs – Retained Vs Immediate Mode – Selecting Nodes – M3G File Format – Using M3G In An Application –
Keyframe Animations – Keyframes – Controlling Animation – Moving Images – Dynamic Meshes – Morphing –
Skinned Meshes – Articulated Robot
Unit V WORKING WITH OPEN GL 9
Introduction – Design Principles – API Overview – Transformation And Lighting – Drawing Primitives – Vertex
Transformation Pipeline – Colors And Lighting – Rasterisation And Fragment Processing – Texture Mapping – Fog –
Opengl Features – Frame Buffer Operations –State Queries
Reference Book:
1. Claus Hofele,”Mobile 3d Graphics: Learning 3D Graphics with the Java Micro Edition”, Course Technology Inc;
Pap/Cdr edition, 2007
2. Alessio Malizia,”Mobile 3D Graphics”, Springer, First Edition, 2006
3. Kari Pulli, Tomi Aarnio, Ville Miettinen, Kimmo Roimela, Jani Vaarala, “Mobile 3D Graphics: with OpenGL ES and
M3G”, Elseveir, 2008
4. Hoi-Jun Yoo, Jeong-Ho Woo, Ju-Ho Sohn, Byeong-Gyu Nam, “Mobile 3D Graphics SoC: From Algorithm to Chip”,
Wiley Publication, 2010
5. Kouichi Matsuda, Rodger Lea,” WebGL Programming Guide: Interactive 3D Graphics Programming with
WebGL”, Pearson Education, 2013
6. Chih-Chieh Hsiao, Slo-Li Chu, and Chiu-Cheng Hsieh, “An Adaptive Thread Scheduling Mechanism With Low-
Power Register File for Mobile GPUs”, IEEE Transactions On Multimedia, Vol. 16, No. 1, January 2014
PAGE 252
19ITP14 SURFACE COMPUTING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the basics of natural interface design
• To get fundamental ideas on touch technologies
• To understand the concept of voice recognition
• To study the real time 3D sensing techniques
• To learn application development process and frameworks
Course Outcome:
• Familiarize the basics of natural user interface design
• Explore the fundamentals of touch sensing
• Investigate voice based interactions.
• Use real time 3D sensing for surface applications.
• Familiarize with different application development frameworks
Unit I NATURAL USER INTERFACE 9
Introduction -The Natural User Interface - Human Senses and Perception – Human Interface Technologies - The
State Transition Model of Input - Fat Fingers - Interactive with Surface Technologies: Pointing and Selecting-
Gesturing- Hovering- Text.
Unit II TOUCH SENSING 9
Introduction to Touch Technologies-Touch Screens – History of Touch Technologies – Capacitive Touch Technologies
- Resistive Touch Technologies - Acoustic Touch Technologies - Optical Touch Technologies - Embedded Touch
Technologies - Other Touch Technologies.
Unit III VOICE IN THE USER INTERFACE 9
Introduction – Voice Recognition – Deep Neural Networks for Voice Recognition – Hardware Optimization - Signal
Enhancement Techniques for Robust Voice Recognition – Voice Biometrics – Speech Synthesis - Multi-turn Dialog
Management – Planning and Reasoning – Technical Challenges - Distributed Voice Interface Architecture.
Unit IV GESTURE INTERACTIONS AND REAL TIME 3D SENSING 9
Creating an Interaction Language: The anatomy of Gesture - Properties of a Gesture Language –Imaging
Technologies: 2D and 3D - Structured Pattern Codifications - Structured Light System Calibration - Real-Time 3D
Sensing Techniques - Real-Time 3D Sensing for Human Computer Interaction Applications – Eye Gaze Tracking.
Unit V DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACE APPLICATIONS 9
Theories and frameworks - Models of individual analysis - Models for collaborative analysis - Understanding of
collaborative work - Role of theory enable understandings for design - Application Development Processes -
Application Development Frameworks - Case study: Depth Touch, Sphere, Pinch-the-Sky Dome
Text Book:
1. Daniel wigdor, Dennis Wixon,”Brave NUI World Designing Natural User Interfaces for Touch and Gesture ”,
Morgan Kaufmann Publishers,2011
2. Judith Brown, Jeff Wilson, “Surface Computing and Collaborative Analysis Work”, Synthesis Lectures on
Human-Centered Informatics,Morgan & Claypool Publishers Series,2013.
3. Achintya K. Bhowmik, “Interactive Displays: Natural Human-Interface Technologies”, Wiley Publications, 2014.
Extensive Reading:
• http://research.microsoft.com/enus/um/redmond/groups/cue/publications/Interact2009-MultiTouch.pdf
• https://faculty.washington.edu/wobbrock/pubs/chi-09.02.pdf
• http://research.microsoft.com/en-us/um/people/benko/publications/2009/benko_mm09bnt236.pdf
PAGE 253
19ITP15 DIGITAL MARKETING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the basic concepts of Digital Marketing
• To study various online process
• To understand theory of B2Cand B2B online presence
• To understand the principles of search engine optimization and online advertising
• To understand the need of Permission and Social media marketing
Course Outcome:
• Examine the various marketing strategies
• Analyze the different ways of online presence
• Use online presence for business applications
• Use different techniques of search engine optimization
• Apply the various social media marketing strategies
Introduction about Digital Marketing- A Background to the Internet – The impact of the Internet on society and
business and nonprofit business organizations- Online buying behavior – The internet goes Mobile – Online
Marketing objectives – Legal Considerations
Unit II DEVELOPING THE ONLINE PRESENCE 9
Domain names – Website hosting – Website analytics and e- metrics – The internet as a tool for market research –
Web presence management and development – Online credibility- Content development – The global web presence
Unit III B2C AND B2B ONLINE PRESENCE 9
Multi-channel retailing – The retail website – The checkout process – Fulfilment – e- marketplaces and comparison
shopping sites – Third party real web sites – B2B buying practices – The B2B websites – Lead generation –E-market
places – Online auctions and tendering
Unit IV SEARCH ENGINE OPTIMIZATION AND ONLINE ADVERTISING 9
Search engine working principles – Keyword selection – On-site optimization – Off-site Optimization – Strategic SEO
– Objectives and Management of Online advertising – Online ad formats – Search engine advertising – Network
advertising – Affiliate programmes – Landing paging
Unit V PERMISSION AND SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING 9
Personalization – Email as a medium for direct marketing - – Email as a medium for marketing messages –
Newsletters Consumer generated content – Social networks and online communities – Blogging – Viral marketing –
Online public relations and reputation management – Strategic social media marketing-An Introduction to Digital
Marketing tools.
Text Book:
1. Alan Charles worth, “Digital Marketing A Practical Approach” 2nd Edition 2014
Reference Book:
1. Ian Dodson ''The Art of Digital Marketing”Wiley Publication,First Edition, 2014.
2. Robert W.Bly, 'The Digital Marketing Handbook', Entrepreneur Press Publisher , First Edition , 2018.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.marketo.com
• https://www.digitalmarketer.com/digital-marketing/social-media-marketing-strategy/
• https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/social-media-more-effective-for-b2c-than-b2b-companies-
300519535.html
PAGE 254
19ITP16 COGNITIVE IOT L T P C

Offered by IT (Open Elective offered to BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To introduce the concepts of cognitive computing
• To study the various strategies of cognitive node deployment
• To study the various cognitive data delivery framework
• To understand the system model of cognitive IoT
• To study the various caching techniques
Course Outcome:
• To Integrate the Artificial Intellligence and Learning in the IoTsystem design
• To apply different Cognitive node deployment strategy
• To work with data delivery framework
• To apply Cognitive Routing Protocol
• To work with fog based learning
Cognitive IoT, Need for Cognitive IoT, Current and Future trends of IoT,-WSN Design issues in IoT applications-user
Expectation from the Network-Adaptation at Network Level - Artificial Intelligence and Learning in IoT-A hybrid
Solution platform
Unit II COGNITIVE NODE DEPLOYMENT 9
System Model-Cognitive deployment strategy for ICSN-Quality of Information Attributes-Quantifying connectivity in
WSN with Grid deployments
Unit III DATA DELIVERY FRAMEWORK 9
Cognitive Information Centric Sensor Networks in Smart outdoor Monitoring-System Models-The COGNIENSE
Framework-Knowledge representation-Learning-Reasoning
Unit IV COGNITIVE ROUTING PROTOCOL 9
Network Architecture- Lifetime of IoT Network- Energy conservation and Dead Node Issue-Communication Model-
Cognitive Energy Efficient Approach(CEEA) -Price Based Data Delivery Framework –IoT System Model- ARA Routing
approach-Use case and Theoretical analysis
Unit V FOG BASED CACHING AND LEARNING 9
Location based Caching- Content based Caching –Node functionality based caching-ICSN Network Model- Delay
Model- Age Model-Popularity of on demand Request-Channel Communication Model- VoI Cache Replacemnt –
Performance Evaluation
Text Book:
1. Fadi Ai-Turjman ,Cognitive Sensors and IoT, Architecture, Deployment and Delivery,First Edition ,CRC Press,2017
Reference Book:
1. ArshdeepBahga and Vijay Madisetti, Cloud Computing: A Hands-on Approach, 1 st edition, CreateSpace
Independent Publishing Platform, 2013.
2. John MutumbaBilay, Peter Gutsche, Mandy Krimmel and Volker Stiehl, SAP Cloud Platform Integration: The
Comprehensive Guide, 2nd edition, Rheinwerg publishing.2019.
3. Mahalle, Parikshit Narendra, and Poonam N. Railkar, Identity management for internet of things, 1st edition ,
River Publishers, 2015.
PAGE 255
19MEP20 CARBON NANO STRUCTURES AND ITS APPLICATIONS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Carbon nano tube structure, its occurrence, types and its properties.
• The various synthesis techniques of CNT.
• The functionalization of CNT.
• Various applications of CNT.
• Graphene and diamond like thin films.
Course Outcome:
• Acquire knowledge on the significance of carbon nano structures and its applications.
• Ability to prepare carbon nanotubes with various synthesis techniques.
• Gain knowledge on the functionalization techniques of CNT.
• Perceive the important applications of CNT in almost all fields.
• Gain knowledge about Graphene, Graphene oxide and Diamond like films.
Unit I CARBON NANOTUBES: STRUCTURE AND PROPERTIES 9
The element carbon: Allotropes of carbon – Fullerenes - Structure - Single wall - Multi wall nano tubes - Filled tubes:
Physical properties - Thermal properties - Optical, Mechanical, Vibrational properties.
Unit II PREPARATION OF CARBON NANOTUBES 9
Different methods of synthesis of CNTs: laser evaporation - carbon arc method - Chemical vapor deposition – PECVD
- Solid state formation of CNT - Flame synthesis – Hipco method: Mechanism of growth.
Unit III FUNCTIONALIZATION OF CARBON NANOTUBES 9
Carbon Nanotubes - Functionalization of Carbon Nanotubes - Covalent, Non-covalent - Reactivity of Carbon
Nanotubes – Purification methods: Oxidation, Acid treatment – Annealing – Ultrasonication - Micro filtration -
Ferromagnetic separation – Cutting - Chromatography techniques.
Unit IV APPLICATIONS OF CARBON NANOTUBES 9
Field emission - Fuel cells - Display devices - CNT based chemical & biological sensors – automobile - composite
materials - space elevators - Electron and probe microscopy – Nano tweezers – nano gears etc.
Unit V OTHER IMPORTANT CARBON-BASED MATERIALS 9
Preparation and characterization fullerene and other associated carbon clusters/molecules – Graphene -
preparation - characterization and properties - DLC and nano diamonds.
Text Book:
1. Yury Gogotsi, “Carbon nanomaterials”, CRC, Taylor & Francis, 2017.
2. Ado Jorio, Gene Dresselhaus & Mildred S. Dresselhaus, “Carbon Nanotubes”, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg,
2008.
Reference Book:
1. S. Reich, C. Thornsen & J. Maultzsch, “Carbon nanotubes, basic concepts and physical properties”, Wiley-VCH
Verlag GmbH & Co., 2017.
2. R. Saito, G. Dresselhaus & M.S. Dresselhaus, “Physical properties of carbon nanotube”, Imperial College Press,
2000.
3. Rotkin, Slava V., Subramoney & Shekhar, “Applied physics of carbon nanotubes: Fundamentals of theory, optics
and transport devices”, Springer Berlin Heidelberg, 2006.
4. Michael J. O'Connell, “Carbon Nanotubes: Properties and applications”, CRC, Taylor and Francis, 2006.
5. Liming Dai, “Carbon nanotechnology”, Elsevier, 2006.
6. CNR Rao & A. Govindaraj, “Nanotubes and nanowires”, RSC Publisher, 2011.
PAGE 256
19MEP21 ERGONOMICS L T P C
Course Objective:
• This course will help the student to understand about ergonomics and Human anatomy.
• To know the importance of anthropometry and designing the machine for man.
• To know the role of ergonomics in repetitive works and manual handling task.
• To understand the importance of ergonomics in display, controls and virtual environments
Course Outcome:
• Student will have a deep understanding about human anatomy and ergonomics.
• Student will able to design a work environment with proper lighting and acoustics.
• Student will gain knowledge about anthropometry and work design for standing and seated works.
• Student will have a deep understanding about the role of ergonomics in repetitive works and manual handling
task.
• Student will understand the importance of ergonomics in display, controls and virtual environments.
Unit I ERGONOMICS AND ANATOMY 9
Introduction to ergonomics: The focus of ergonomics, ergonomics and its areas of application in the work system, a
brief history of ergonomics, attempts to humanize work, modern ergonomics, Anatomy, Posture and Body
Mechanics: Some basic body mechanics, anatomy of the spine and pelvis related to posture, posture stability and
posture adaptation, low back pain, risk factors for musculoskeletal disorders in the workplace.
Unit II WORK CAPACITY, DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR LIGHTING AND SOUND 9
Stress and fatigue – Muscles, structure, function and capacity – cardiovascular system – respiratory system –
physical work capacity – factors affecting work capacity – effectiveness and cost effectiveness – lighting design
considerations – visual fatigue, eye strain – measurement of sound - ear protection - design of acoustic environment
Unit III ANTHROPOMETRY AND WORK DESIGN FOR STANDING AND SEATED WORKS 9
Designing for a population of users, percentile, sources of human variability, anthropometry and its uses in
ergonomics, principles of applied anthropometry in ergonomics, application of anthropometry in design, design for
everyone, Fundamental aspects of standing and sitting, an ergonomics approach to work station design, design for
standing workers, design for seated workers, work surface design, visual display units, guidelines for design of static
work.
Unit IV REPETITIVE WORKS AND MANUAL HANDLING TASK 9
Introduction to work-related musculoskeltal disorders - Injuries to the upper body at work -Disorders of the neck-
Disorders of the shoulder - Ergonomic interventions - Anatomy and biomechanics of manual handling - Prevention
of manual handling injuries in the workplace -Design of manual handling tasks.
Unit V COGNITIVE SYSTEM, DISPLAY, CONTROLS AND VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENTS 9
Cognitive system: Cognitive systems and intelligent action - Cognitive models of the human operator - problem
solving, Principles for the design of visual displays- Computer-generated displays - auditory displays- design of
controls - combining displays and controls- virtual (synthetic) environments.
Text Book:
1. R.S. Bridger, Taylor and Francis. “Introduction to Ergonomics", CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2008.
Reference Book:
1. Michael O’ Neill, “Ergonomic design for organizational effectiveness”, CRC Press, 2nd Edition, 1998.
2. Mark S Sanders, Ernest J. McCormick. “Human factors in engineering and design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 7th
Edition, 1993.
3. Dan MacLeod, Roderick MacLeod, “The Ergonomics Edge: Improving Safety, Quality and Productivity”, John
Wiley and Sons, 1st Edition, 1994.
PAGE 257
19MEP22 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR L T P C

Course Objective:
• Be able to understand and analyze the individual needs, feelings, aspirations;
• Develop skills needed to plan for the implementation of change in an organization;
• Identify and develop effective motivational and leadership skills.
Course Outcome:
• To understand the basics concept of organizational behaviour
• To understand the behaviour of individual in an organization
• To know the behaviour of person in a group and behaviour of group of people
• To understand the concept of organizational structure and culture
• To realize organizational change and manage stress
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 9
Introduction to organization, organization and managers, manager’ roles and skills, behaviour at work, introduction
to organization behaviour, major behavioural science disciplines contributing to OB, challenges and opportunities
managers have in applying OB concepts, OB model (including motivation models) and levels of OB model, ethical
dilemma
Unit II INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOUR 9
Introduction to individual behaviour, values, attitudes, job satisfaction, personality, perception and individual
decision making, learning, motivation at work, managing emotions and stress (Meaning-Definition Stress and job
performance relationship Approaches to stress management (Coping with stress)
Unit III GROUP BEHAVIOUR 9
Introduction to group behaviour, foundations of group behaviour, concept of group and group dynamics, types of
groups, formal and informal groups, theories of group formation, group norms, group cohesiveness, group decision
making, intergroup behaviour, concept of team vs. group, types of teams, building and managing effective teams,
leadership theories and styles, power and politics, conflict and negotiation.
Unit IV ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE AND CULTURE 9
Organizational structure - work specialization, departmentalization, chain of command, span of control,
centralization and decentralization, formalization, Common organizational designs, new design options,
organizational designs and employee behaviour, global implications
organizational culture – seven characteristics, function of culture, creating and sustaining culture, employees – learn
culture, creating – ethical, positive organizational culture, spirituality and organizational culture – criticisms
Unit V ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE AND STRESS MANAGEMENT 9
Forces for change, resistance to change, managing organizational change – approaches, kotter’s eight step plan for
implementing change, creating a culture for change
Stress, work stress and its management, sources of stress – potential sources – environmental factors,
Organizational factors, personal factors, individual differences, experimental stress, consequences – physiological
symptoms, behavioural symptoms, managing stress
Text Book:
1. Stephen P. Robbins, “Organizational Behaviour”, Pearson publication, 18th edition, 2013.
Reference Book:
1. Aswathappa, K., ORGANIZATIONAL Behaviour– Text and Problem, Himalaya Publication, 13th edition, 2018.
2. Pardeshi, P. C., Organizational Behaviour & Principles & Practice Of Management,Nirali publication, 2016.
PAGE 258
19MEP23 PRINTING TECHNOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the basic Principles of Contact and Non-Contact Printing.
• To enable the students to learn about various processes involved in screen printing.
• To enable the students to understand the concepts and methodology adopted in the Sheet- Fed Offset
Machines
• To enable the students to understand the concepts of Digital Printing
• To understand the basics of 3D Printing and its applications.
Course Outcome:
• Be familiar the basis of printing and its evolution.
• Understand the basic operations in screen printing.
• Get the clear domain knowledge about the various machineries involved in Sheet- Fed Offset.
• Be familiar the Digital Printing, Important Features of Laser Printer.
• Get the clear domain knowledge and understand the basics of 3D Printing.
Unit I PRINCIPLES OF CONTACT AND NON CONTACT PRINTING 9
Introduction - Printing Methods - The Printing System - Halftone Photography – Platemaking – Printing - Binding and
Finishing - Inks for Letterpress and Lithography - Principles of Noncontact Printing.
Unit II SCREEN PRINTING 9
Select Correct Screen Printing Fabric - Screen Printing Frames - Stretching Equipment - Correct Stretching -
Adhesives - The Manufacture of Diapositives – Stencils - The Diapositive - Screen Printing Accessories - Common
Faults – Screen Printing on Different Surfaces - Inks for Screen Printing.
Unit III SHEET- FED OFFSET MACHINES 9
Mechanical Features – Lubrication - Sheet feeding mechanism - Sheet board - Functions of blowers - Sheet lifting
and forwarding - Inking System - Distribution System - Multiroll System - Wash-up device - Plate Cylinder - Blanket
Cylinder - Impression Cylinder - Adjustment of Cylinders - Advantages of Both Principles - Delivery Mechanism.
Unit IV DIGITAL PRINTING 9
Introduction to Digital Printing - Types of Digital Printing - Important Features of Laser Printer - Advantages of Digital
Printing – Benefits - Comparison between Digital Printing, screen printing and Press Printing - Trouble shooting and
Maintenance.
Unit V 3D PRINTING 9
History of 3D Printing Technology – types - 3D Printing Applications - Complex Designs - Weight Reduction -
Improved Strength and Durability - Major Savings: Automotive/Jewellery/Art/Design/Sculpture - Benefits of 3D
Printing - Advantages of 3D Printing in Manufacturing.
Text Book:
1. NIIR Board of Consultants & Engineers “Handbook on Printing Technology - Offset, Flexo, Gravure, Screen,
Digital, 3D Printing”, Asia Pacific Business Press Inc. 3rd Revised Edition.2017
Reference Book:
1. J. Michael Adams, Penny Ann Dolin, “Printing Technology”, Delmar Publications Inc., 2002.
2. William Appleton, “Screen Printing”, PIRA International, 1994.
3. Harry B. Smith, “Modern Gravure Technology”, Pira reviews of Printing, Pira International, 1994
4. NIIR Board of Consultants & Engineers “The Complete Book on Printing Technology”, Asia Pacific Business Press
Inc. 2003
5. C.S. Misra, “Letter Press Printing” Allahabad Anupam, 1992.
6. Prakash Shetty, “Science and Technology of Printing Materials”, MJP Publisher, 2019.
7. FFTA “Flexography: Principles & Practices”, 6th Edition, FTA, 2014.
PAGE 259
19MEP24 SIMULATION MODELLING AND ANALYSIS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the significance of simulation and random numbers.
• To design a mathematical model and study.
• To know about the basics of simulation software’s GPSS and Arena.
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the importance of simulation in predicting complex situations.
• Design simulation experiments using real world data.
• Interpret simulation results and understand their significance.
• Use simulation software’s GPSS and ARENA to model actual systems.
• Analysis of simulation models by using various simulation languages.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO SIMULATION AND RANDOM NUMBERS 8
Simulation, Advantages, Disadvantages, Areas of application, System environment, components of a system, Model
of a system, types of models , general systems theory, concept of simulation, simulation as a decision making tool,
types of simulation, steps in a simulation study, Pseudo random numbers, methods of generating random variates,
testing of random numbers and variates.
Unit II DESIGN OF SIMULATION EXPERIMENTS 9
Problem formulation, data collection and reduction, time flow mechanism, key variables, logic flow chart, starting
condition, run size, experimental design consideration, output analysis and interpretation validation. Discrete event
simulation concepts in event simulation, event scheduling, Time advance algorithm, simulation by using event
scheduling problems
Unit III SIMULATION LANGUAGE – GPSS 9
GPSS – Introduction and History of GPSS, GPSS entities, commands, blocks, simulation by using single server queue
model, Simulation by using multi-server queue model, result generation and interpretation with suitable
applications. Properties, Generations methods, Tests for Random number- Frequency test, Runs test,
Autocorrelation test.
Unit IV SIMULATION LANGUAGE – ARENA 9
ARENA – Introduction, Comparison with GPSS, Modules: Create, Entity, Data, Process, Queue, and Dispose.
Introduction to animation. Simulation by single-server queue model and multi-server queue model by using arena,
result generation and interpretation with industrial applications, Simulation Software, Simulation packages and the
concepts.
Unit V ANALYSIS OF SIMULATION DATA 10
Data collection, Identification and distribution with data, parameter estimation, Goodness of fit tests, Selection of
input models without data, Multivariate and time series analysis, Model Building, Verification, Calibration and
Validation of Models. Stochastic Nature of output data, Measures of Performance and their estimation, Output
analysis of terminating simulation, Output analysis of steady state simulations.
Text Book:
1. Jerry Banks and John S.Carson, Barry L Nelson, David M.Nicol, P.Shahabudeen, “Discrete Event Systems
Stimulation”, Pearson Education, 4th Edition, 2007.
2. David W. Kelton, Randall P. Sadowski, Nancy B. Swets, “Simulation with Arena”, McGraw Hill Education (India)
Private Limited, 5th Edition, 2013.
Reference Book:
1. Averill M. Law, David W. Kelton, “Simulation Modelling and Analysis”, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
Limited, 4th Edition, 2007
2. Thomas J. Schriber, “Simulation using GPSS”, John Wiley & sons, 2nd Edition, 1991.
PAGE 260
19MEP25 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND ENERGY RECOVERY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To provide in depth knowledge in Principles of industrial waste management.
• To have an understanding of characterization of waste.
• To expose the students to various processing technologies of hazardous waste.
• To provide wide exposure to the students about various waste disposal methods.
Course Outcome:
• To list out the sources of industrial waste.
• To understand the various sources of industrial waste and its characterization.
• To understand the need for segregation of waste at source.
• To evaluate the different waste processing technologies.
• To list out various types of waste disposal methods.
Unit I SOURCES, CLASSIFICATION AND REGULATORY FRAMEWORK 9
Types and Sources of solid and hazardous wastes - need for solid and hazardous waste management – elements of
integrated waste management and roles of stakeholders - Salient features of Indian legislations on management
and handling of municipal solid wastes, hazardous wastes, biomedical wastes, lead acid batteries, electronic wastes
, plastics and fly ash –financing waste management
Unit II WASTE CHARACTERIZATION AND SOURCE REDUCTION 9
Waste generation rates and variation – composition- physical, chemical and biological properties of solid waste-
moisture content chemical composition-heat value Bulk and material density-Mechanical properties -
biodegradability– hazardous characteristics – TCLP tests – waste sampling and characterization plan - source
reduction of wastes –waste exchange – extended producer responsibility - Recycling and reuse.
Unit III STORAGE, COLLECTION AND TRANSPORT OF WASTES 9
Handling and segregation of wastes at source – storage and collection of municipal solid wastes – Analysis of
Collection systems - need for transfer and transport – Transfer stations Optimizing waste allocation– compatibility,
storage, labelling and handling of hazardous wastes – hazardous waste manifests and transport.
Unit IV WASTE PROCESSING TECHNOLOGIES 9
Objectives of waste processing – material separation and processing technologies-Conveying –shredding – pulping -
crushing –Binary separators-trommel screens-Reciprocating and disc screens-Float / sink separators-air classifiers-
magnet and electromechanical separators -biological and chemical conversion technologies – methods and controls
of composting- thermal conversion technologies and energy recovery – incineration – solidification and stabilization
of hazardous wastes - treatment of biomedical wastes.
Unit V WASTE DISPOSAL 9
Waste disposal options – Disposal in landfills - Landfill Classification, types and methods – site selection - design and
operation of sanitary landfills, secure landfills and landfill bioreactors – leachate and landfill gas management –
landfill closure and environmental monitoring – Rehabilitation of open dumps – landfill remediation-Integrated
waste management.
Text Book:
1. William A.Worrell W, P.Aarne Vesilind and Christian Ludwig”, Solid waste engineering”, CL Engineering, 3rd
Edition, 2016.
2. T. V. Ramachandra, "Management of Municipal Solid Waste ", The Energy and Resources Institute, TERI (1
December 2009).
Reference Book:
1. George Tchobanoglous, Hilary Theisen and Samuel A, Vigil, “Integrated Solid Waste Management”, 1993.
2. Michael D. LaGrega, Philip L Buckingham, and Jeffrey C. Evans “Hazardous waste Management”, Waveland
press, 2nd edition, Reissued, 2010.
3. CPHEEO, “Manual on Municipal Solid waste management, Central Public Health and Environmental Engineering
Organisation, Government of India, New Delhi,2000.
4. George Tchobanoglous and Frank Kreith,”Handbook of solid waste management” Mc-Graw Hill, 2ndEdition,
2002.
PAGE 261
19ADA01 INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE LEARNING L T P C

Offered by AID (Allied Elective offered to BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To Various types of machine learning and fundamental mathematical concepts
• To Supervised Learning techniques like regression, classification tree
• To Neural network based Classification and Clustering techniques
• To Evaluating various classifications and clustering algorithms
• To Implementation of various models using Python
Course Outcome:
• Apply the basic mathematical foundation for various Machine learning techniques
• Implement supervised learning techniques for various data sets
• Implement and analyse data sets for clustering
• Apply various reinforcement learning algorithms on data sets
• Design Bayesian Network and deep learning networks for different applications
Definition and Need for Machine Learning – Type – Supervised – Unsupervised Learning – Reinforcement –Basics
Maths and Background – Probability – Linear Algebra – Statistical Decision Support Theory – Bayesian– Data set –
Training – Testing – Validation – Models – Evaluation
Unit II SUPERVISED LEARNING 9
Regression – Linear – Ridge – Lasso – Logistic regression – Regularizations; Classification algorithms: K–Nearest
Neighbour – Decision Trees – Support Vector Machine – Kernel trick – Artificial Neural Networks – Feedforward –
Back propagation– Case study on various classification applications
Unit III UNSUPERVISED LEARNING 9
Clustering algorithms – K-Means – K-Medoids – DBSCAN –Hierarchical clustering – Spectral Clustering– Cluster
Analysis – Objective Functions – Case study on various clustering applications
Unit IV REINFORCEMENT LEARNING 9
Markov Decision process model – Policy – value – optimal –evaluation– Planning algorithms – value iteration –policy
iteration – linear programming– Learning algorithms – Stochastic approximation – Q-Learning – SARSA – Case
study on various reinforcement applications
Unit V ADVANCED MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES 9
Adaptive Resonance Theory – Graphical Models – Bayesian Networks – Expectation Maximization – Model
Optimization techniques- Evolutionary optimization techniques – Particle swarm – Genetic algorithms
Text Book:
1. MohriMehryar, AfshinRostamizadeh, and AmeetTalwalkar. “Foundations of machine learning”, MIT press, 2018
2. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber and Jian Pei, “Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2011
3. Müller Andreas C. and Sarah Guido. “Introduction to Machine Learning with Python: A Guide for Data
Scientists”, O’Reilly, 2016
Reference Book:
1. Sammut, Claude, and Geoffrey I. Webb. “Encyclopaedia of machine learning and data mining”, Springer,2017
2. Christopher M. Bishop. “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2013
3. Ethem A lpaydin. “Introduction to Machine Learning” Second Edition, PHI Learning,2012
4. Mitchell Tom M. “Machine Learning”, Tata McGraw–Hill,1997
5. Witten Ian H., Eibe Frank, Mark A. Hall, and Christopher J. Pal. “Data Mining: Practical machine learning tools
and techniques”, Morgan Kaufmann,2016
Extensive Reading:
• SVM,MIT OpenCourseWare, https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_PwhiWxHK8o
• Data sets repository: https://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/index.php
• towards data science : https://towardsdatascience.com/
• Google colab: https://research.google.com/colaboratory/
• Adaptive Resonance Theory: https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/adaptive–resonance–theory–art/
• Self Organizing maps: https://www.cs.hmc.edu/~kpang/nn/som.html\
PAGE 262
19ADA02 FUNDAMENTALS OF ARTIFICIAL INTELIIGENCE L T P C

Course Objective:
• To Fundamental concepts of Artificial Intelligence
• To Searching methods to solve problems using Artificial Intelligence
• To Representation of problems using logic
• To Various Planning strategic for solving real world problems
• To Different machine learning techniques to solve problems
Course Outcome:
• Illustrate the various characteristics of Intelligent agents
• Formulate a problem and find the solution using search techniques and probabilistic methods
• Apply various knowledge representation to define problems
• Use various planning strategy to solve problems
• Design machine learning model for real world problems
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO AI AND INTELLIGENT AGENTS 9
Introduction – Foundation and History of AI – State of the Art – Agent and Environments – Good Behavior:The
Concept of Rationality – Nature of Environments - Structure of Agents
Unit II PROBLEM SOLVING AND SEARCHING TECHNIQUES 9
Problem Solving Agents – Searching for Solutions – Uninformed Search :Breadth First Search – Depth First Search –
Uniform Cost Search – Depth Limited Search – Iterative deepening Depth – First Search – Bidirectional Search –
Informed search : Greedy Best First Search – A* Search – Memory bounded heuristic Search – Heuristic Functions –
Constraint Satisfication Problem
Unit III LOGICAL REASONING 9
Knowledge based Agents – Propositional Logic :Synatx and Semantics – Inference in Propositional Logic – First Order
Logic : Synatx and Semantics – Inference in First Order Logic : Unification – Forward Chaining – Backward Chaining -
Resolution
Unit IV PLANNING 9
Planning With State Space Search – Partial Order Planning – Total Order Planning – Planning Graph – Classical
Planning approaches – Planning and Acting in the Real World
Unit V LEARNING 9
Learning from observation – Inductive learning – Decision trees – Explanation based Learning – Statistical Learning
methods – Supervised Learning – Unsupervised Learning - Reinforcement Learning
Text Book:
1. Stuart Russel and Peter Norvig, “AI – A Modern Approach”, 4thEdition, Pearson Education, 2014
Reference Book:
1. Kevin Night and Elaine Rich, Nair B, “Artificial Intelligence (SIE)”, McGraw Hill- 2008
2. Richard E Neapolitan, “Artificial Intelligence: With an Introduction to Machine Learning”, CRC Press, Second
Edition, 2018
3. Nils.J.Nilsson, "Artificial Intelligence: A new synthesis", Elsevier, July 2003
4. AndriesP.Engelbrecht, "Computational Intelligence: An Introduction", John Wiley & Sons, 2nd edition, 2007
5. ohnFulcher, L.C. Jain, “Computational Intelligence: A Compendium, Studies in Computational Intelligence”,
Vol.115, Springer, 2008
Extensive Reading:
• http://nptel.ac.in
• http://www.formal.stanford.edu/jmc/whatisai/
• http://www.sciencedaily.com/news/computers_math/artificial_intelligence/
PAGE 263
19ADA03 DATA VISUALIZATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the basic concepts of data visualisation
• To learn Ipython for visualisation
• To study concepts of numpy and pandas objects
• To understand the concepts of matplotlib
• To expose machine learning techniques in python using scikit
Course Outcome:
• Explore the data visualization concepts for applications
• Use Ipython commands for data visualisation
• Apply numpy and Pandas for data visualisation
• Use matplotlib for visual analytics
• Apply machine learning techniques in python
Unit I FOUNDATIONS FOR DATA VISUALIZATION 9
Introduction to Visualization – Visualization stages – Experimental Semiotics based on Perception – Gibson‘s
Affordance theory – A Model of Perceptual Processing – Costs and Benefits of Visualization – Types of Data
Unit II IPYTHON 9
Introduction to Ipython –IPython Shell –Keyboard Shortcuts in the IPython Shell – Ipython Magic Commands – Input
and Output History – IPython and Shell Commands – Shell–Related Magic Commands – Errors and Debugging –
Controlling exceptions – Debugging – Profiling and Timing Code
Unit III NUMPY AND PANDAS 9
Data Types – Basics of NumPy Arrays – Computation– Universal Functions –Aggregations –Broadcasting –
Comparisons – Masks and Boolean Logic – Fancy Indexing – Sorting Arrays – Structured Data: NumPy’s Structured
Arrays –Pandas Objects –Data Indexing and Selection – Operating on Data in Pandas – Handling Missing Data –
Hierarchical Indexing –Concat and Append –Merge and Join – Aggregation and Grouping – Pivot Tables – Vectorized
String Operations – Working with Time Series – High Performance Pandas
Unit IV VISUALIZATION WITH MATPLOTLIB 9
Importing matplotlib –Line Plots –Scatter Plots – Visualizing Errors – Density and Contour Plots – Histograms –
Binnings – Density –Customizing Plot Legends – Customizing Color bars – Multiple Subplots – Text and Annotation –
Customizing Ticks –Customizing Matplotlib: Configurations and Stylesheets – Three–Dimensional Plotting in
Matplotlib – Geographic Data with Basemap – Visualization with Seaborn
Unit V MACHINE LEARNING 9
Introduction to Machine Learning – Scikit–Learn – Hyperparameters and Model Validation – Feature Engineering –
Naive Bayes Classification – Linear Regression – Support Vector Machines – Decision Trees and Random Forests –
kMeans Clustering
Text Book:
1. Jake VanderPlas, “Python Data Science Handbook: Essential Tools for Working with Data”, Oreilly Media, First
Edition 2016
2. Colin Ware “Information Visualization Perception for Design”,Morgan Kaufman, Third edition, 2012
Reference Book:
1. Chad Adams, “Learning Python Data Visualisation”, Packt Publishing, 2014
2. Scott Murray, “Interactive Data Visualization for the Web”, O'Reilly Media, First Edition, 2013
3. Isabel Meirelles, “Design for Information”, Rockport Publishers, 2013
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.datacamp.com/courses/introduction–to–data–visualization–with–python
• https://machinelearningmastery.com/data–visualization–methods–in–python/
• https://www.kaggle.com/benhamner/python–data–visualizations
PAGE 264
19ADA04 WEB DEVELOPMENT USING NODE AND REACT JS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn the basics of React JS
• To study the various React Components and programming
• To learn about writing simple applications with Node JS and Mongo DB
• To understand the Controllers and View Models in Node JS
• To adopt persisting data to applications
Course Outcome:
• Perform Functional programming with JavaScript
• Create web pack with React JS.
• Write simple applications with Node JS and Mongo DB
• Apply Controllers and View Models with Node JS.
• Use persisting data to applications with Mongo DB
Unit I REACT ECO SYSTEM 9
Welcome to React –History –React is not a Framework –React and MVC – React Ecosystem – File Repository – React
Developer Tools –Installing Node.js. Emerging JavaScript: Declaring Variables in ES6 – Arrow Functions – Transpiling
ES6 –ES6 Objects and Arrays – Module Imports and Exports –Promises –Classes. Functional Programming with
JavaScript : Functional – Imperative vs Declarative – Functional Concepts –Data Transformations –Higher Order
Functions –Composition
Unit II REACT JS 9
Pure React: Page Setup – Virtual DOM – React Elements – ReactDOM – Children – Constructing Elements with Data
– React Components – DOM Rendering – Factories. React with JSX: React Elements as JSX – Babel – Recipes as JSX –
Babel Presets – web pack –Web pack Loaders
Unit III NODE AND MONGODB BASICS 9
Full Stack: Introduction to Node.js – npm – the Node Package Manager – Sharing and reusing JavaScript –simple
server with Node.js – NoSQL movement – MongoDB – Node and MongoDB . Installing Node.js – Installing MongoDB
–Writing applications – Adding the application code. Node and MongoDB : JavaScript – Data types – Operators and
flows –objects –arrays –functions –JSON – Event–driven –Installing modules using npm – basics of MongoDB
Unit IV TEMPLATING, CONTROLLER AND VIEW MODEL 9
Introducing Express: Web application frameworks – Express.js–Building web – Using and understanding middleware
– configure module – Routers and controllers – Custom middleware – Handlebars as view engines. Templating with
Handlebars: Templating engines –Server–side and client–side templating – Views – Layouts – Partial views –
Handlebars – Handlebars helpers – Rendering the views. Controllers and View Models : Controllers – View models –
Updating the home controller – image controller – Helpers for reusable code
Unit V PERSISTING DATA WITH MONGODB 9
Using MongoDB with Node.js – Connecting to MongoDB – Inserting, Retrieving document – Introducing Mongoose –
Static methods – schemas and models – Adding CRUD to the controllers – home controller – image controller –
Helpers – Iterating by adding an image removal capability – Updating jQuery – Refactoring and improvements
Text Book:
1. Alex Banks and Eve Porcello, “Learning React Functional Web Development with React and Redux”, O’Reilly,
First Edition, 2016
2. Mithun Satheesh, Bruno Joseph D'mello, Jason Krol, “Web Development with MongoDB and NodeJS”, Packt
Publishing, Second Edition, 2015
Reference Book:
1. AzatMardan , “Practical Node.js: Building Real-World Scalable Web Apps”, Apress, 2018
2. Vipul A M, Prathamesh Sonpatki, “ReactJS by Example -Building Modern Web Applications with React”, Packt
Publishing, 2016
3. Pedro Teixeira, “Professional Node.js :Building Javascript Based Scalable Software”, Wiley, 2012
4. Marc Harter, Alex Young, “Node.js in Practice”, Manning, 2014
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/reactjs-tutorials/
• https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/nodejs-tutorials/
• https://www.w3schools.com/nodejs/
• https://www.w3schools.com/react/
PAGE 265
19ADA05 PROBLEM SOLVING USING PYTHON L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn about the basic programming techniques, control flow and strings
• To understand the usage of functions and modules
• To familiarize with all the data structures supported in Python
• To study the usage of file handling and exception handling
• To appreciate the object oriented programming support in Python
Course Outcome:
• Apply appropriate Python control flow structure
• Implement user defined python functions and modules
• Develop basic programs using fundamental structures
• Create programs using file handling and exception handling mechanism
• Design programs using object oriented programming concepts
Unit I BASICS, CONTROL FLOW AND STRINGS 9
Introduction: Features – History – Future of Python – Writing and Executing Program – Literal Constants – Variables
and Identifiers – Data Types – Input Operation – Comments – Operators and Expressions – Operations on Strings –
Other Data Types – Type Conversion. Decision Control Statements: Introduction– Selection/Conditional Branching
Statements – Basic Loop Structures/Iterative Statements – Nested Loops – break, continue, pass –else with Loops. –
Strings:String operations – Immutableproperty – String Formatting Operator – Built-in Methods and Functions –
Slicing – String Module – Regular Expressions – Meta-characters in Regular Expression
Unit II FUNCTIONS AND MODULES 9
Introduction – Function Definition – Function Call – Variable Scope and Lifetime – The return statement – More on
Defining Functions – Lambda Functions or Anonymous Functions – Documentation Strings – Good Programming
Practices – Recursive Functions – Modules – Packages in Python Standard Library modules – Globals(), Locals(), and
Reload() – Function Redefinition
Unit III DATA STRUCTURES 9
Sequence – Lists – operations, methods – list comprehension - Functional Programming – Tuple – operations –
handling multiple values - Sets – Dictionaries – operations – functions – Iterator and generator
Unit IV FILES AND EXCEPTION HANDLING 9
Introduction : File Path – Types of Files –File operations –Renaming and Deleting Files – Directory Methods – Error
and Exception Handling: Introduction– Handling Exceptions – Multiple Except Blocks – Multiple Exceptions– Except
Block Without Exception – The else Clause – Raising Exceptions – Instantiating Exceptions Built-in and User-defined
Exceptions – The finally Block –Clean-up Action – Re-raising Exception – Assertions
Unit V OOPS 9
Classes and Objects: Introduction – Class Method and self Argument – The__init__() Method – Class Variables and
Object Variables – Public and Private Data Members, Methods –Method Invocation –Check, Get, Set and Delete
Class Attributes – Built-in Class Attributes – Garbage Collection – Static Methods. Inheritance: Introduction –
Inheriting Classes– Types of Inheritance – Composition or Containership or Complex Objects – Abstract Classes and
Interfaces. Operator Overloading: Introduction – Implementing– Overriding __getitem__() and __setitem__()
Methods
Text Book:
1. Reema Thareja, “Python Programming – using problem solving approach”, Oxford University Press, 2017
Reference Book:
1. Mark Lutz , “Learning Python” , Fifth Edition, O,Reilly, 2013
2. David Beazley, Brain K Jones “Python CookBook” Third edition,2013
3. CHUN, WESLEY J, “Core Python Programming”, Pearson Education 2012
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.python.org/
• https://www.w3schools.com/python/
• https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/python-programming-language/
PAGE 266
19BMA01 BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C

Offered by BME (Allied Elective offered to BAD, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To familiarise the basics of cell biology.
• To understand the concepts of protein synthesis.
• To describe the metabolism of Biological Enzymes
• To demonstrate the industrial Applications of microbiology.
Course Outcome:
• Describe the basic concepts of cell biology
• Understand the biochemical aspects of human biology.
• Explain the fundamental concepts of metabolism and enzymes
• Discuss the inheritance concepts of genes.
• Describe the applications of microbiology in industries.
Unit I BASIC CELL BIOLOGY 9
What is a Cell? Basic Properties of Cells, An Overview of Cell, Chemical composition of cell, Prokaryotic Cells,
Eukaryotic Cells, cell membrane models, Cell wall, Cell Cycle and Cell Division, M Phase, Meiosis, Cell Differentiation
Unit II BIOCHEMISTRY 9
Biological Diversity --Chemistry of life: chemical bonds--Biochemistry and Human biology, Transcription and
translation factors play key roles in protein synthesis, Protein synthesis—DNA,RNA, Stem cells and applications,
Tissue engineering
Unit III ENZYMES AND INTRODUCTION TO METABOLISM 9
Enzymes, Classification and Nomenclature of Enzymes, Co-Factors, Importance of Enzymes, Metabolism and Its
Concepts, Metabolic Basis for Living—Anabolic and Catabolic Pathways, Concept of Non-Equilibrium and Steady
State, Photosynthesis, Photorespiration (C2 Cycle), C4 Pathways, CAM Cycle (In Succulent Plant), Factors Affecting
Photosynthesis, Respiration, Glycolysis, Fermentation, Aerobic Respiration.
Unit IV GENETICS 9
Mendelian inheritance-Multiple alleles-Gene Mapping-Gene Interaction-Epistasis-Mutation-Law of Dominance and
Recessiveness-Human Genetics, Genetic Disorders.
Unit V MICROBIOLOGY AND ITS INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 9
Microorganisms, Growth Kinetics, Culture Media, Sterilization, Microscopy, Applications of Microbiology,
Immunology and Immunity, Cancer Biology, Stem Cell
Text Book:
1. Thyagarajan S., Selvamurugan N., Rajesh M.P., Nazeer R.A., Thilagaraj W., Barathi S., and Jaganthan M.K.,
"Biology for Engineers", Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Dr. Sohini Singh and Dr. Tanu Allen, “Biology for Engineers”, Vayu Education of India, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Dr.Suraish Kumar,” Biology for Engineers”, oxford University press
Reference Book:
1. Arthur T. Johnson, “Biology for Engineers” CRC Press, 2011
2. N. A. Campbell, J. B. Reece, L. Urry, M. L. Cain and S. A. Wasserman, “Biology: A global approach”, Pearson
Education Ltd, 2014.
3. L. M. Prescott, J. P. Harley and C. A. Klein, “Microbiology”, McGraw Hill Higher Education, 2005.
Extensive Reading:
PAGE 267
19BMA02 HOSPITAL PLANNING AND EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the overview of hospital management aspects of various sectors of hospital.
• To familiarize the duties and responsibilities of a clinical engineer.
• To learn the different types of equipment management procedures
Course Outcome:
• Explain the details of basics of hospital Management.
• Summarize the health sectors in India.
• Understand the various challenges in hospital Management.
• Describe the duties of clinical engineers in hospitals.
• Develop different procedures for equipment management.
Unit I HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT – AN INTRODUCTION 9
History of Hospital In India – Classifications of Hospitals – Role of hospitals in Primary Health care –Medical Staff and
Hospital Organization – Planning A Modern hospital – health and National Economy – health system performance.
Unit II HEALTH SECTOR IN INDIA 9
Health Sectors in India – Health financing - Health Infrastructure - Human Resource in Health, National Health
Policies - NHP 1986, NHP 2000.
Unit III CHALLENGES IN HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT 9
Managing A Service Organization - Hospital Service Delivery – Quality Control – Six Sigma, NABH Hospital Queuing
Systems – Simple Queuing Systems, Interdependent Queuing Systems, - Hospital Management Functions –
Operation Management, Finance And Cost Management, HR Management , Materials Management - Case Studies
Unit IV TRAINED TECHNICAL PERSONNEL 9
Function of Clinical Engineer, Role to be performed in Hospital, Manpower requirement for different types of
hospitals, Professional Registration, Structure in Hospital.
Unit V EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT 9
Organizing Maintenance Operations, Paper Work Control, Maintenance Job Planning, Maintenance Work
Measurement and Standards, Preventive Maintenance, Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS),
Maintenance Budgeting and Forecasting, Maintenance Training, Contract Maintenance
Text Book:
1. Ramani K V, “Hospital Management-Text and Cases”, Pearson education, New Delhi, 2013.
2. R.C.Goyal, “Human Resource Management in Hospital”, Prentice Hall of India, 3rd edition.
Reference Book:
1. Malhotra A K, "Hospital management - An Evaluation", Global India Publications, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Cesar A. Caceres and Albert Zara. m,"The Practice of Clinical Engineering", Academic Press, New York, 1977
3. Jacob Kline, "Handbook of Bio Medical Engineering", Academic Press Inc., San Deigo, 1988.
4. Webster J.G. and Albert M.Cook, "Clinical Engineering Principles and Practices"', Prentice Hall Inc.,Englewood
Cliffs, New Jersey, 1979.
5. Syed Amin Tabish, "Hospital and Health services Administration Principles and Practices", Oxford Press, New
Delhi, 2001.
6. Hans Pfeiff and VeraDammann (Ed.), "Hospital Engineering in Developing Countries", Z Report, Eschbom, 1986.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.coursera.org/browse/health/healthcare-management
PAGE 268
19BTA01 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS L T P C

Offered by BT (Allied Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• importance of origin of biological classification based on Evolution, morphology, biochemistry and ecology
• biomolecules are building blocks of life.
• importance of genetics and genes as basic units of inheritance.
• energy transactions in biological system.
• microbial world and its application in various fields.
Course Outcome:
• Relate the complexity of hierarchy of organization of organisms and evolution.
• Apply the knowledge on basics of chemical bonding and reactions to biomolecules.
• Evaluate the inheritance pattern of characters and diseases.
• Adapt the knowledge on energy production in biotic systems to chemical synthesis of energy.
• Harness the potential microbes for industrial purposes.
Unit I EVOLUTION AND CLASSIFICATION OF ORGANISMS 9
Outline on theories of Evolution - Natural selection - evidences for evolution, Taxonomy - basis of classification of
organisms, taxonomic hierarchy, Five kingdom classification, Eukaryotic classification – Outline of phyla under the
various kingdoms protista, fungi, animalia, plantae.
Unit II CELL AND BIOMOLECULES 9
Structure of prokaryotic and eukaryotic cell (animal and plant cells), cellular organelles and their functions,
difference between eukaryotic and prokaryotic cell, Molecules found in cell- Carbohydrates - Monosaccharide,
glycosidic linkage, disaccharides and polysaccharides, Proteins- Amino acids, Peptide bond, Polypeptides, structure
of proteins (Primary, secondary and tertiary structures), enzymes, lipids: nucleotides, nucleic acids.
Unit III GENES AND INHERITANCE 9
Chromosome organisation, Double helical structure of DNA, replication, transcription, translation, outline of gene
regulation, mutations, mendelian inheritance- inheritance of one gene, inheritance of two genes, Genes and sex
determination: ploidy and syndromes.
Unit IV ENERGY IN LIVING SYSTEMS 9
Energy and chemical reactions - Entropy, activation energy, phosphorylation energy. Energy stores of the cell: ATP,
NADH, NADPH, FAD. Energy making processes in cells - respiration (Glycolysis and Krebs cycle-oxidative
phosphorylation), Photosynthesis (Light and Dark reaction), ATP yield in the processes.
Unit V MICROBIAL WORLD 9
Viewing microbes-Microscopy and staining, bacterial classification (outline), microbes in industry (pharma, food,
leather, tannery, textiles), health and disease, environment, bioremediation, biosensors, biofuels
Text Book:
1. Sutton J., “ Biology”, Macmillan Foundations, Macmillan Press Ltd, Hampshire RG21 6XS, London, 1998
2. Verma P. S., Agarwal V.K. “Cell Biology, Genetics, Molecular biology, Evolution and Ecology”, S. Chand and
Company Ltd, Ram Nagar, New Delhi. 14th Edition, 2006.
Reference Book:
1. Biology: A global approach: Campbell, N. A.; Reece, J. B.; Urry, Lisa; Cain, M, L.; Wasserman, S. A.; Minorsky, P.
V.; Jackson, R. B. Pearson Education Ltd, 11 th Edition, 2018
2. Outlines of Biochemistry, Conn, E.E; Stumpf, P.K; Bruening, G; Doi, R.H., John Wiley and Sons, 5th Edition, 2006
3. PrescottL.M.,HarleyJ.P.,KleinD.A.,“Microbiology”,Wm.C.Brown Publishers,7th Edition 2008.
PAGE 269
19BTA02 BASIC MICROBIOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• History of microbiology and techniques used in microbiology
• Characteristic feature of prokaryotes and eukaryotes and viruses
• Impact of microbes on environment, health and disease
Course Outcome:
• Upon completion of the course students will
• Be able to view and identify microbes
• Differentiate eukaryotes and prokaryotes
• Become proficient in culturing microbes and control their growth
• Use microbes to control environment pollution
• Know the role of microbes in disease and ways to control them
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO MICROBIOLOGY 9
History & Development of microbiology, Microscopy: Simple, Compound Microscopy: Staining: Principle and
technique of simple & differential staining, (Gram, Acid-fast & Endospore staining).
Unit II STRUCTURE OF MICROORGANISMS 9
Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes Virus; Bacteria: Bacterial morphology & subcellular structures (General morphology of
bacteria, shapes & sizes), Slime layer & capsule, Cell wall structure of gram positive and gram negative cells,
General account of Ribosome, Flagella & Fimbriae, Chromatin materials, plasmids and episomes,
Unit III BACTERIAL GROWTH AND NUTRITION 9
Cultivation of microbes, Nutritional types of microbes, Culturing bacteria, Sterilization – Physical and chemical
sterilizing agents – Principle, Mode of action and application. Culturing techniques.
Unit IV ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY 9
Biodegradation of xenobiotics (pesticides) – Microbes in waste treatment: solid and liquid wastes – sewage
treatment (Primary, secondary & tertiary treatments) – COD & BOD
Unit V MICROBES IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 9
Pathogenic microbes:, principles of infectious diseases: disease caused by viruses, bacteria, fungi and protists, food
borne and water borne diseases - an overview, epidemiology, infectious disease cycle, pathogen transmission,
control of epidemics (Cholera, Plague, Dengue, Bird flu) – Case study,
Text Book:
1. Pelczar M.J., Chan E.C.S., Krein N.R., “Microbiology”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition,5th edition, 2001.
2. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein D.A., “Microbiology”, Wm. C. Brown Publishers,10th edition 2010.
Reference Book:
1. Black, J.G., Black, L.J. “Microbiology - Principles and Explorations”, Wiley, 9th edition,2014
2. Murray R., “Manual of Clinical Microbiology: Illustrations”, American Society for Microbiology, 9th edition, 2007
PAGE 270
19BTA03 BASIC BIOCHEMISTRY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Describe the chemical basis of living organisms.
• Classify the biomolecules
Course Outcome:
• Describe the chemical basis of organisms and the laws of thermodynamics.
• Classify carbohydrates and explain their biological role.
• Summarize the structure and functions of proteins.
• Comprehend the chemistry of lipids and their properties
• Discriminate the structure and function of DNA and RNA
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO BIOMOLECULES 9
Definition and aim of Biochemistry, Biochemical process as the basics of life sciences and health, Biochemical basis
of diseases, Biological significance of water, water as an ideal biological solvent pH and Buffers, biomolecules and
their functional groups, Transformation of energy in living organisms and laws of Thermodynamics-Entropy and
enthalpy.
Unit II CARBOHYDRATES 9
Definition, Classification of carbohydrates based on the number of monomers, number of carbon atom and ,
functional groups, Structure of glucose, fructose, sucrose, maltose, starch, glycogen and cellulose, Functions and
physiological significance of hexose.
Unit III PROTEINS 9
Amino acids-general structure and classification and three-letter abbreviation, peptide bond formation and
peptides, proteins, Biologically Active Peptides and Polypeptides, classification of proteins, hierarchy of protein
structure, function of proteins, - enzymes, influence of pH, temperature, substrate concentrations on enzyme
activity.
Unit IV LIPIDS 9
Definition, physiological significance, classification, fatty acids: classification- saturated and unsaturated fatty acids,
essential and non essential fatty acids. triacylglycerols: nomenclature, physical properties, chemical properties and
characterization of fats - hydrolysis, saponification, acid value, rancidity of fats.
Unit V NUCLEIC ACIDS 9
Definition, purine and pyrimidine bases, types of nucleic acids-RNA and DNA, experimental evidences to prove DNA
as the genetic material, Double helical structure of DNA, types and functions of RNA, difference between DNA and
RNA.
Text Book:
1. Moran L. A., Horton R.A., Scrimgeour G., Perry M., Rawn D., “Principles of Biochemistry” 5th Edition, Pearson
New international Edition,2014.
2. Nelson D.L., Cox M.M., “Lehninger’s Principles of Biochemistry”, 7th Edition. Macmillan Publisher, 2017.
3. Berg J. M., Tymoczko J. L., Stryer, L., “Biochemistry” 7th Edition, Macmillon, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Voet D., Prat W.C., Voet J., “Principles of Biochemistry”, John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition 2012.
2. Rodwell V., Bender D., Botham K., Kennelly P., Anthony Weil P., “Harpers Illustrated Biochemistry” McGrawHill,
31th Edition 2018.
PAGE 271
19BTA04 FUNDAMENTALS OF IMMUNOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• organization of immune system.
• basic components in innate immunity.
• role of adaptive immune system and vaccination concepts.
• immune system disorders.
• importance of transplantation and immunotherapy
Course Outcome:
• explain the various types of cells and organs involved in immune system.
• illustrate the various barriers of innate immunity and importance of complement system.
• understand the various concepts and molecules of adaptive immunity and methods involved in vaccine
designing.
• analyze the reason behind the various autoimmune disorders.
• apply the concepts of immunotherapy of infectious diseases and transplantation
Unit I ORGANIZATION OF IMMUNE SYSTEM 9
History, Hematopoiesis, primary & secondary lymphoid organs, myeloid cells, lymphoid cells, dendritic cells and
natural killer cells.
Unit II INNATE IMMUNITY 9
Innate immunity: Anatomical, physiological, phagocytic and inflammatory barriers, The complement system:
overview, Induced innate responses to infections.
Unit III THE ADAPTIVE IMMUNE AND INFECTION 9
Cell-Mediated Immune response: T cell mediated response, Humoral Immune Response, Antibodies: structure of
immunoglobulins, immunoglobulin subtypes, T cell receptor, cytokines: functions, Infectious agents and how they
cause disease: Bacterial (Tuberculosis), viral (Influenza) and parasitic infection (helminthes), vaccines: history,
principle of vaccination, Conventional and recombinant vaccines.
Unit IV IMMUNE DISORDERS 9
Inherited immunodeficiency diseases: SCID, DiGeorge’s syndrome, X-linked agammaglobulinemia, Acquired immune
deficiency syndrome:AIDS, Hypersensitivities: Type I, II, III and IV, Autoimmune responses: Graves disease,
Rheumatoid Arthritis, Diabetes Mellitus Type I, II. myesthenia gravis.
Unit V TRANSPLANTATION AND IMMUNOTHERAPY 9
Tissue typing and matching transplantation: heart, liver, kidney, immunosuppression, transplant rejection,
immunotherapy: Infections, cancer.
Text Book:
1. Peter J. Delves., Seamus J. Martin., Dennis R. Burton., Ivan M. Roitt., “Essential Immunology”, Wiley-Blackwell;
13th edition, 2017.
2. Abbas, K.A., Litchman, A.H., Pober, J.S., “Cellular and Molecular Immunology”, Elsevier., 9th Edition, 2017.
3. William E.P., “Fundamental Immunology”, Lippinkott Williams and Wilkins a Wolters Kluwer business, 7th
Edition, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Ashim K.C., “Immunology and Immunotechnology”, Oxford University Press, 1st Edition, 2006.
2. Kuby J., “Immunology”, WH Freeman & Co., 8th Edition, 2018.
3. Christine D., “Clinical Immunology and Serology: A laboratory Perspective”; F.A. Davis Co.; Philadelphia 3rd
Edition, 2009.
PAGE 272
19CEA01 BUILDING PLANNING AND DRAWING L T P C

Offered by CIV (Allied Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• The fundamentals of building planning.
• The climate and weather suitability for buildings.
• Statutory requirements of buildings.
• Basic drawing principles.
• Preparation of building drawing and utility layouts.
Course Outcome:
• Read out the building blueprints.
• Adopt climate and weather suitability in buildings.
• Employ appropriate statutory requirements of buildings.
• Draw basic building layouts.
• Prepare building and utility drawings.
Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF BUILDING PLANNING 9
Principles of planning - Classification of buildings - Dimensions of buildings and components - Marking and Setting
out.
Unit II CLIMATE AND WEATHER SUITABILITY FOR BUILDINGS 9
Climatology - Elements of climate - Sun, Wind, Relative Humidity, Temperature effects - Comfort conditions for
house - Types of macro climatic zones - Design of houses and layouts based on climatic conditions - Orientation of
buildings - Solar Charts - Ventilation.
Unit III STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS OF BUILDINGS 9
Basic requirements of building elements as per NBC - Building Bye-laws - Set back distances and calculation of
carpet area, plinth, floor area ratio and open spaces.
Unit IV BASIC DRAWING PRINCIPLES 9
Conventional signs in building drawing - Development of plan, elevation and section - Schedule of openings from the
given line diagram of residential buildings (not to scale).
Unit V PREPARATION OF BUILDING DRAWING AND UTILITY LAYOUTS 9
Functional design of building using inter connectivity diagrams (bubble diagram) - Development of line diagram for
non-residential buildings - Preparation of water supply, sanitary and electrical layouts using line diagrams.
Text Book:
1. Swamy N.K, Rao K, “Building Planning and Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. - Anand; 8th Edition,
2015.
2. S. S. Bhavikatti, M. V. Chitawa, “Building Planning and Drawing”, I K International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd,
2014.
Reference Book:
1. B. P. Verma, “Civil Engineering Drawing and House Planning”, Khanna publishers, 2016.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.bepls.com/dec2013/34a.pdf
• https://www.designingbuildings.co.uk/wiki/Types_of_drawings_for_building_design
• https://classes.engineering.wustl.edu/2009/spring/jme4900/Blueprint%20Reading%20Material.pdf
• http://navybmr.com/study%20material/14069a/14069A_ch11.pdf
PAGE 273
19CEA02 INDUSTRIAL POLLUTION PREVENTION AND CONTROL L T P C

Course Objective:
• The types of environmental pollution.
• The air pollution control methods.
• The principles of water treatment.
• The concept of sustainability.
• The environmental regulations
Course Outcome:
• Familiarize the pollution and its regulating standards.
• Apply the different air pollution control methods gases and particulates.
• Apply the principles of water treatment and recovery methods.
• Understand the importance of sustainability and its indicators, strategies and barriers.
• Implement the environmental regulations, policies for clean environment.
Unit I TYPES OF POLLUTION 9
Definition of pollutant - Types of pollution - Air, water, land & Noise - Adverse effects of pollutants eco system and
human health - Need for effluent treatment and toxicity control - Standards for portable water - Agricultural and
left-off streams - Industrial areas and Resorts - Noise pollution measurements and its control.
Unit II AIR POLLUTION CONTROL METHODS 9
Particulate Emission Control - Gravitational Settling Chambers - Cyclone separators - Fabric filters - Electrostatic
Precipitators - Wet scrubbers - Absorbers - Control of sulphur - di-oxide - Oxides of nitrogen - Carbon monoxide and
hydrocarbons - Predicting concentrations of air pollutants.
Unit III PRINCIPLES OF WASTE WATER TREATMENT 9
Preliminary treatment, Primary Treatment - Sedimentation tanks, Imhoff tanks, coagulation, secondary treatment -
Intermittent sand filters, Trickling filters, Activated Sludge Process, Oxidation ponds & tertiary treatments -
Chlorination & disinfection systems - Advanced waste water treatments - Recovery of metals from process effluents
(Theoretical concepts only).
Unit IV SUSTAINABILITY 9
Industrial activity and environment - Industrialization and sustainable development - Indicators of sustainability-
Sustainability strategies - Barriers to sustainability - Pollution prevention in achieving sustainability.
Unit V ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS 9
Prevention vs. control of industrial pollution - Environment policies and Regulations to encourage pollution
prevention - Environment friendly chemical processes (Sources of waste and principles) - Air standards for cities -
Regulations for clean environment and implications for industries.
Text Book:
1. Freeman.H.M, "Industrial Pollution Prevention Hand Book", McGraw Hill, 1995.
2. Garg, S.K., “Environmental Engineering I & II”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2013 (39th edition)
Reference Book:
1. Pandey.G.N and Carney.G.C, “Environmental Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017.
2. James. G. Mann and Liu.Y.A, "Industrial Water Reuse and Waste Water Minimization", McGraw Hill, 2002.
3. Bishop.P, "Pollution Prevention: Fundamentals and Practice", McGraw Hill International, McGraw Hill Book Co.,
Singapore, 2010.
Extensive Reading:
• Kapoor.B.S, “Environmental Engineering”, 5th Edition, Khanna publishers,2012.
• https://sustainabledevelopment.un.org/resources/sd21
PAGE 274
19CEA03 INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• The fundamentals of about Engineering Seismology.
• The awareness about the earthquake recording instruments and seismic records.
• The earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment.
• The various seismic hazard analysis.
• The different types of risk and vulnerability assessment.
Course Outcome:
• Categorize the various components of engineering seismology.
• Identify the different types of seismic recording instruments.
• Classify the various earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment.
• Do various seismic hazard analysis.
• Analyze the types of risk and vulnerability.
Unit I ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY 9
Introduction to engineering seismology - Terminologies and definitions - Earthquake types - Overview of plate
tectonics - Earthquake source mechanisms - Source models - Types of faults - Activity and fault studies - Concepts of
seismic magnitudes and intensity -Earthquake size, different magnitude scales and relations, Theory of wave
propagation - Seismic waves, body and surface waves.
Unit II EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTS 9
Earthquake recording instrumentations - Concept of seismograph - Seismic station - Sensors and data loggers -
Mechanical and digital sensors - Interpretation of Seismic Records - Acceleration, Velocity and Displacement -
Frequency and Time Domain parameters - Response spectrum and spectral parameters - Epicentre and magnitude
determination.
Unit III SEISMIC HAZARD ASSESSMENT 9
Introduction to seismic hazard - Strong ground motions and site effects - World great Earthquakes - Large and
Damaging Earthquakes of India - Instruction to seismic zones and codes - Global and National seismic hazard
assessment mapping programs - Safety of individual site - Concept of seismic microzonation - Types and Scale -
Methodology.
Unit IV SEISMIC HAZARD ANALYSIS 9
Introduction to Seismic Hazard Analysis- Methods - Deterministic and Probabilistic - Attenuation models and
Simulation of Strong Ground Motion - Introduction to Site characterization - Different methods and experiments -
Geotechnical properties - Site classification and worldwide code recommendation.
Unit V RISK CLASSIFICATIONS AND MAPPING 9
Concept of site response - Local site effects and evaluation methods - Ground motion amplifications and estimation
- Development of response /design spectrum - Introduction to liquefaction - Mechanism and factors causing
liquefaction - estimation methods and procedures- Mapping - Earthquake induced landslide - Landslide hazard
mapping - Tsunami hazard - Consideration for Tsunami hazard mapping.
Text Book:
1. Seth Stein and Michael Wysession, “An Introduction to Seismology, Earthquakes and Earth Structure”, 1st
edition, Wiley Blackwell publishers, 2008.
2. Steven L Kramer, “Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2009.
Reference Book:
1. Bozorgnia Y and Bertero V.V “Earthquake Engineering - From Engineering Seismology to Performance - Based
Engineering” CRC Press, Washington, 2004.
2. Leon Reiter, “Earthquake hazard Analysis - Issues and Insights”, Columbia University Press, New York, 1990.
3. Havskov J and Alguacil G “Instrumentation in Earthquake Seismology”, Springer, The Netherlands, 2010.
Extensive Reading:
• Recent Advances in Earthquake Geotechnical Engineering and microzonation edited by Ansai Kluwar Academic
Publishers, Netherlands, 2004.
• Assessing and managing Earthquake risks edited by Oliveira C.S and Roca and Goula.X, Springer, Netherlands,
2006.
PAGE 275
19CEA04 PRINCIPLES OF GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM L T P C

Course Objective:
• The basic principles of Global Positioning System.
• GPS signals and data.
• Collection of GPS data and its processing.
• Various errors in GPS data.
• The skills required to link locational data to certain projections and present same as maps.
Course Outcome:
• Acquaint with the fundamentals of Global Positioning System.
• Employ various methods to collect GPS data by receiving signals from receiver.
• Perform basic GPS receiver operation and data processing.
• Check the accuracy of GPS data and able to do necessary adjustments.
• Produce a simple map from field data acquired using hand-held GPS.
Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF GPS 9
Components of GPS - GPS receivers - Reference coordinates systems - Datum, geoid, ellipsoid, WGS 84 system -
Time and signal propagation through atmosphere- Their modelling and estimation - Satellite orbit and Engineering
Applications.
Unit II GPS SIGNALS AND DATA 9
Navigational data - Collection methods - Static positioning, kinematic positioning, Pseudo - Kinematic and stop and
go methods - Observation planning and strategy.
Unit III GPS OBSERVABLES 9
Pseudo range and carrier phase parameters - Estimations, data handling, cycle slip detection and correction,
ambiguity resolution - GPS data processing - Single, Double and Triple differences.
Unit IV ERRORS IN GPS DATA 9
Satellite geometry - Errors in different segments - Multipath errors - Accuracy of GPS data and measures - Network
adjustments.
Unit V DATUM TRANSFORMATION AND DIFFERENTIAL GPS 9
Reduction of observation - Transformation to various map projection systems - Real time kinematic GPS - Multiple
reference stations - Virtual reference stations.
Text Book:
1. Satheesh, Gopi, “Global Positioning System and its Applications”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
2. Kaplan, E.D. and Hegarty, C.J., “Understanding GPS: Principles and Applications”, Artech House, 2006.
Reference Book:
1. Leick, A., “GPS Satellite Surveying”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
2. Gunter, S., "Satellite Geodesy:Foundation, Methods and Applications“, 2nd Ed., De Gruyter, 2008.
PAGE 276
19CEA05 WATER RESOURCES PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• Water resources of the country.
• Various components of hydrological cycle.
• The importance of utilizing water judiciously.
• Various flood control techniques.
• Various cost benefit analysis.
Course Outcome:
• Collect all kinds of hydrological data and perform the analysis.
• Design the optimum rain gauge network.
• Prepare the water budget and development plan.
• Estimate the sediment load in reservoirs.
• Perform economic analysis of water resource projects.
Water resources survey - Water resources of India and Tamilnadu - Description of water resources planning -
Economics of water resources planning, physical and socio economic data - National Water Policy - Collection of
meteorological and hydrological data for water resources development.
Unit II HYDROLOGIC CYCLE 9
Components of Hydrological cycle - system representation - Historical development of hydrology - Weather system -
Cloud and cloud seeding - General atmospheric circulation - Types and forms of precipitation - Measurement of
rainfall - Optimum rain gauge network design.
Unit III WATER RESOURCE NEEDS 9
Consumptive and non-consumptive water use - Estimation of water requirements for irrigation, for drinking and
navigation - Water characteristics and quality -Scope and aims of master plan - Concept of basin as a unit for
development - Water budget and development plan.
Unit IV RESERVOIR PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT 9
Reservoir - Single and multipurpose - Multi objective - Fixation of Storage capacity - Strategies for reservoir
operation - Sedimentation of reservoirs - Design flood -levees and flood walls - Channel improvement - Flood
warning - Mitigation measures.
Unit V ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 9
Estimation of cost and Evaluation of Benefits - Discount rate - Discounting factors - Discounting techniques -
Computer Applications.
Text Book:
1. Linsley R.K. and Franzini J.B, “Water Resources Engineering”, McGraw-Hill Inc, 2000.
2. Douglas J.L. and Lee R.R., “Economics of Water Resources Planning”, Tata McGraw-HillInc. 2000.
Reference Book:
1. Chaturvedi M.C., “Water Resources Systems Planning and Management”, Tata McGraw-Hill Inc., New Delhi,
1997.
2. Goodman Alvin S., “Principles of Water Resources Planning”, Prentice-Hall, 1984.
3. Maass et al, “Design of Water Resources Systems”, Macmillan, 1968.
Extensive Reading:
• https://ascelibrary.org/journal/jwrmd5
• https://www.worldbank.org/en/topic/water
• https://www.un.org/waterforlifedecade/
PAGE 277
19CSA01 INTERNET PROGRAMMING L T P C

Offered by CSE (Allied Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BEC, BEE, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To identify the basics of Internet and its protocol
• To learn HTML5 controls for the creation of static web pages
• To present HTML documents using Cascading Style Sheets (CSS).
• To learn to create user interactive web pages using JavaScript and DOM
• To build web application using Ruby on Rails
Course Outcome:
• Exploit the basics of Internet and realize the significance of HTTP protocol in the WWW.
• Develop website using HTML5
• Design interesting and appealing HTML pages using CSS
• Validate the users’ data using JavaScript and process various elements of web pages using DOM
• Develop Web Application using Ruby on Rails
Unit I BASICS OF NETWORK AND WEB CONCEPTS 9
Types of network – Reason for networks – Communication between computers – Serial and parallel communication
– Asynchronous and synchronous communication – Simplex, half-duplex, full-duplex communications – Data rate,
bandwidth and throughput – Switched connections – Topologies used in networking. Basic Internet protocols – The
World Wide Web – HTTP request message – HTTP response message – Web clients – Web servers.
Unit II HTML5 9
Introduction to HTML5 – Editing HTML5 – W3C HTML validation service – Headings – Linking - Internal linking -
Images – Special characters and horizontal rules – Lists – Tables – Forms – Meta elements – New HTML5 Form input
types – Input and datalist elements and auto complete attribute – Page structure elements.
Unit III CSS3, JAVASCRIPT 9
Types of CSS – Conflicting style sheets – Positioning elements – Element dimension – Box model and Text Flow –
Drop-Down menus – Text shadows – Rounded corners – Color – Box Shadows. JavaScript: Introduction – Syntax -
Variables and data types – control statements – operators – literals - functions –objects – arrays – Built-in objects.
Unit IV DOCUMENT OBJECT MODEL 9
Introduction to the Document Object Model – Intrinsic event handling – Modifying element style – The Document
tree – DOM collections – Using Timer and dynamic styles to create animated effects – JavaScript event handling –
Reviewing the load, mousemove, mouseover, mouseout events – Form processing with focus, blur, submit, reset –
Event bubbling.
Unit V RUBY ON RAILS 9
Introduction to Ruby : Data types - Simple input and output - Control statements - Fundamentals of arrays – Hashes
– Methods – Classes - Code blocks and Iterators - Pattern matching. Introduction to Ruby on Rails: Overview of Rails
– Document requests – Rails applications with databases.
Text Book:
1. P.J. Deitel, H.M. Deitel, “Internet and World Wide Web – How to program”, Fifth Edition, Pearson Education
Publishers, 2009.
2. Robert. W. Sebesta, "Programming the World Wide Web", Eighth Edition, Pearson Education, 2015
3. John Cowley, "Communications and Networking An Introduction", Second Edition, Springer, 2013
Reference Book:
1. Jeffrey C. Jackson, "Web Technologies - A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2011
2. Chris Bates, “Web Programming: Building Internet Applications”, Wiley, 2006
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.w3schools.com/html/html5_intro.asp
• https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/javascript-tutorial/
• https://www.w3schools.com/css/
• https://www.tutorialspoint.com/ruby-on-rails/index.htm
PAGE 278
19CSA02 FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To explore the fundamental concepts of software engineering process
• To learn the requirements engineering process
• To understand the software design principles
• To know the different testing strategies
• To learn the project management techniques
Course Outcome:
• Apply software engineering process for software development.
• Formulate software requirement specification
• Design software according to the specification
• Test the software under development
• Manage and maintain the software projects
Unit I SOFTWARE ENGINEERING PROCESS 9
The Nature of Software - Software Engineering Practice - Software Myths – Generic Process Models: Prescriptive
Process Models, Specialized Process Models, The Unified Process, Personal and Team Process Models – Overview of
Agile Process – Extreme Programming –Agile Process Models
Unit II REQUIREMENT ENGINEERING AND MODELING 9
Requirements Engineering: Establishing the Groundwork - Eliciting Requirements – Building the Requirements
Model - Negotiating and Validating Requirements - Requirements Analysis using scenario based modeling – UML
Models – Modelling: Data Modeling Concepts - Class-Based Modeling - Flow-Oriented Modeling - Creating a
Behavioral Model
Unit III DESIGN 9
Design Concepts - Architectural Design: Software Architecture, Architectural Styles, Architectural Design,
Architectural Mapping Using Data Flow - User Interface Design: The Golden Rules, User Interface Analysis and
Design Steps – Design Evaluation
Unit IV SOFTWARE TESTING 9
Testing: Strategic approach to Software Testing - Test Strategies for Conventional and object oriented Software -
Validation Testing - System Testing – Debugging – White-box Testing - Basis Path Testing - Control Structure Testing
- Black-box Testing
Unit V PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9
Project Management Concepts – Process and Project Metrics - Estimation for Software Projects - Project Scheduling
Text Book:
1. Roger S. Pressman, “Software Engineering – A practitioner’s approach”, McGraw Hill Publications, Ninth
Edition, 2019
Reference Book:
1. PankajJalote, ”An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering”, Springer, Third Edition, 2005
2. Ian Sommerville, “Software engineering”, Pearson Education Asia, Ninth Edition, 2011.
3. Watts S.Humphrey, ”A Discipline for Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2008.
4. James F.Peters and WitoldPedrycz,”Software Engineering, Engineering Approach”, Wiley-India, 2007.
5. Stephen R.Schach, “Software Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
6. S.A.Kelkar, ”Software Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt, 2007
Extensive Reading:
• www.mhhe.com/pressman
• www.rspa.com/spi/
• https://www.tutorialspoint.com/software_engineering/index.htm
PAGE 279
19CSA03 INTRODUCTION TO DATABASE L T P C

Course Objective:
• To correlate the role of database management systems in information technology applications
• To reduce the anomalies using Normalization
• To structure data using relational model
• To explore the features of structured query language
• To manage transaction and concurrency control techniques
Course Outcome:
• Draw ER Diagrams for enterprise applications
• Apply normalization techniques on the databases
• Design databases using relational model
• Query the database using SQL
• Perform transaction and concurrency control techniques
Unit I DATABASE FUNDAMENTALS 9
Purpose of Database Systems – View of Data - Database System Architecture – Database Users and Administrators –
Data Models – Structure of Network Model – Structure of Hierarchical Model – Entity Relationship Model –
Constraints – Removing Redundant Attributes in Entity Sets – ER Diagrams – Design Issues – Extended ER Features –
ER Reduction to Relational Schemas
Unit II NORMALIZATION 9
Functional Dependencies – Decomposition using Functional dependencies – Dependency Preservation –Closure of
attributes–Atomic domains and First Normal Form – Second Normal Form – Third Normal Form – Boyce Codd
Normal Form
Unit III RELATIONAL DATABASE MODEL 8
Introduction of Relational Model – Structure of Relational Databases – Database Schema – Schema Diagrams –Set
Theory – Equivalence Operations – Relational Query Languages – Relational Algebra – Tuple Relational Calculus -–
Domain Relational Calculus
Unit IV STRUCTURED QUERY LANGUAGE 10
Overview of SQL query language – SQL Data definition – Integrity Constraints – Basic Structure of SQL Queries –
Additional Basic Operations – Set Operations – Null values – Aggregate Operations – Nested Sub queries – Joins –
Views – Authorization – Introduction to Advanced SQL – Functions and Procedures – Triggers
Unit V TRANSACTION AND CONCURRENCY CONTROL 9
Transaction Model – ACID properties – Transaction States – Serializability - Conflict Serializability – View
Serializability – Testing Serializability – Concurrency Control – Lock Based Protocols – Deadlocks – Multiple
Granularity – Time Stamp Based Protocols
Text Book:
1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, McGraw Hill, Sixth Edition,
2013.
2. C.J. Date, A. Kannan and S. Swamynathan,”An Introduction to Database Systems”, Pearson Education, Eighth
Edition, 2006.
Reference Book:
1. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education/Addison Wesley, Sixth
Edition, 2010.
2. Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design, Implementation and
Management”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2009.
3. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, “Database Management Systems”, McGraw Hill, Third Edition 2004.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.1keydata.com/datawarehousing/data-modeling-levels.html
• http://www.cs.uwaterloo.ca/~gweddell/cs448/Arch.pdf
• http://www.sql-tutorial.net/SQL-tutorial.asp
• http://www.service-architecture.com/database/articles/ acid_properties.html
PAGE 280
19CSA04 FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATING SYSTEMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To acquire basic knowledge of operating system structures and its functioning
• To study the concept of process management
• To learn the basics of memory management
• To understand the structure of file systems
• To familiarize with different operating systems
Course Outcome:
• Identify the components of operating system and their functionalities
• Analyze the various process management algorithms
• Evaluate the performance of various memory management techniques
• Design a simple file system and analyze the performance
• Work with some popular operating systems like Linux, Windows
Unit I OPERATING SYSTEMS OVERVIEW 9
Introduction to operating systems – Computer system organization - Architecture – Operating system structure -
operations – Process, memory, storage management – Open source operating systems – OS services – User
interface – System calls – System programs – Process concept - scheduling – Operations on processes –Inter-process
communication.
Unit II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 10
Basic concepts – Scheduling algorithms – Algorithm evaluation – The critical section problem – Classic problems of
synchronization – Deadlocks – Deadlock characterization – Methods for handling deadlocks – Deadlock prevention –
Deadlock avoidance – Deadlock detection – Recovery from deadlock.
Unit III MEMORY MANAGEMENT 9
Memory management – Swapping – Contiguous memory allocation – Paging – Segmentation - Virtual memory:
Background – Demand paging – Copy on write – Page replacement – Thrashing
Unit IV FILE MANAGEMENT 8
File concept – Access methods – Directory structure – Protection – Directory implementation – Allocation methods
– Free space management
Unit V MASS STORAGE AND I/O SYSTEM 9
Disk scheduling – Disk management – Swap-Space management – RAID structure – Application I/O subsystem –
Kernel I/O subsystem
Text Book:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts Essentials”, John Wiley & Sons
Inc., 9th Edition, 2013.
Reference Book:
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Addison Wesley, Second Edition, 2001.
2. Charles Crowley, “Operating Systems: A Design-Oriented Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 1996.
3. D M Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems: A Concept-based Approach”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, Second
Edition, 2007.
4. William Stallings, “Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition, 2011.
Extensive Reading:
• www.nptel.ac.in
• http://cseweb.ucsd.edu/classes/fa06/cse120/lectures/120-fa06-l13.pdf
• http://www.cs.kent.edu/~farrell/osf03/oldnotes/
PAGE 281
19ECA01 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS L T P C

Offered by ECE (Allied Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To introduce analog and digital communication techniques.
• To impart knowledge on data and pulse communication techniques.
• To introduce source and Error control coding.
• To develop knowledge on multi–user radio communication
Course Outcome:
• Identify and apply different analog communication techniques and compare its performance
• Analyze the performance of digital modulation and demodulation techniques in various transmission
environments
• Apply data and pulse communication techniques.
• Apply baseband encoding & decoding techniques in the storage / transmission of signals.
• Utilize multi–user radio communication.
Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALOG COMMUNICATION 9
Principles of amplitude modulation – AM envelope, frequency spectrum and bandwidth – modulation index and
percent – modulation, AM Voltage distribution, AM powerdistribution – Angle modulation – FM and PM waveforms
– phase deviation and modulation index – frequency deviation and percent modulation – Frequency analysis of
angle modulated waves – Bandwidth requirements for Angle modulated waves.
Unit II DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES 9
Amplitude shift keying – frequency shift keying – FSK bit rate and baudrate – FSK transmitter –– FSK receiver –
phase shift keying – binary phase shift keying – BW consideration of BPSK- QPSK – Quadrature Amplitude
modulation – bandwidth efficiency – DPSK.
Unit III DATA AND PULSE COMMUNICATION 9
Open Systems Interconnection– Data Communication Circuit arrangements - Data Communication Codes – ASCII
and Bar Codes- Error Detection and Correction Techniques – Data communication Hardware – serial and parallel
interfaces.
Pulse Communication: Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) – Pulse Time Modulation (PTM) – Pulse code Modulation
(PCM) – Comparison of various Pulse Communication System (PAM – PTM – PCM).
Unit IV SOURCE AND ERROR CONTROL CODING 9
Entropy – Source encoding theorem – Shannon Fano coding – Huffman coding – mutual information – channel
capacity – channel coding theorem – Error Control Coding – linear block codes.
Unit V MULTI–USER RADIO COMMUNICATION 9
Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS) – Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) – Code Division
Multiple Access (CDMA) – Cellular Concept and Frequency Reuse – Channel Assignment and Hand off – Bluetooth.
Text Book:
1. Wayne Tomasi, “Advanced Electronic Communication Systems”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
Reference Book:
1. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2009.
2. Rappaport T.S, "Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice", 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
3. Martin S.Roden, “Analog and Digital Communication System”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall of India
4. B.Sklar,”Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications” 2nd Edition Pearson Education, 2007.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.wirelesscommunication.nl/reference/chaptr01/telephon/amps.html
• http://ecee.colorado.edu/~liue/teaching/comm_standards/gsm/index.html
• http://edu.eap.gr/pli/pli23/documents/Parallila_Keimena/GSM.pdf
• https://www.eff.org/files/filenode/global_system_for_mobile_communication_technology.pdf
• http://users.ece.utexas.edu/~jandrews/publications/cdma_talk.pdf
• http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105080/pdf/M5L8.pdf
• www.intel.com/education/.../lectures/lecture_06_80211bandBT.ppt
PAGE 282
19ECA02 INTRODUCTION TO IMAGE PROCESSING L T P C

Offered by ECE (Allied Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BEE, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To understand image fundamentals and different image enhancement techniques.
• To analyze image restoration process and segmentation techniques
• To analyze the variousimage compression algorithms
Course Outcome:
• Simulate basic image processing algorithms.
• Develop algorithms for image enhancement.
• Analyze the algorithms for image restoration.
• Develop algorithms for image segmentation, representation and description.
• Analyze the techniques for image compression.
Unit I DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9
Elements of digital image processing systems, Elements of visual perception, brightness, contrast, hue, saturation,
machband effect, Color image fundamentals - RGB, HSI models.
Unit II IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9
Intensity Transformation - Spatial filtering - Histogram equalization and specification techniques, Noise
distributions, Image Smoothing, Image sharpening– Homomorphic filtering.
Unit III IMAGE RESTORATION 9
Image Restoration - degradation model, Restoration in the presence of Noise only situations, Mean Filter, Order
Statistics Filter- Inverse filtering –LMS filter- Geometric transformations - spatial transformations
Unit IV IMAGE SEGMENTATION, REPRESENTATION AND DESCRIPTION 9
Edge detection-Edge linking via Hough transform –Thresholding -Region based segmentation Region growing –
Region splitting and merging – Simple image Representation and Description Schemes.
Unit V IMAGE COMPRESSION 9
Need for data compression - Huffman, Run Length Encoding, Arithmetic coding, Vector Quantization, Transform
coding, JPEG standard, MPEG.
Text Book:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing', Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition, 2014.
2. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, 2003.
Reference Book:
1. Kenneth R. Castleman, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson, 2006
2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods,StevenEddins, “Digital Image Processing using MATLAB”, Pearson
Education, Inc., 2004
3. D,E. Dudgeon and RM. Mersereau, “Multidimensional Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall Professional
Technical Reference, 1990
4. William K. Pratt, , “Digital Image Processing”, John Wiley, New York, 4th Edition, 2007
5. Milan Sonka et aI, “Image Processing, Analysis And Machine Vision”, Brookes/Cole, Vikas Publishing House, 3rd
edition, 2007
Extensive Reading:
• www.digitalimageprocessingplace.com
PAGE 283
19ECA03 ARDUINO FOR ENGINEERS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To describe the structure of embedded system
• To examine the hardware of Arduino board
• To apply skills on programming and interfacing of peripheral devices with Arduino
• To utilize the Arduino board for practical applications
Course Outcome:
• Elucidate the core structure of embedded system
• Describe the hardware architecture of Arduino
• Program Arduino board with memory and libraries
• Interface peripherals with Arduino board
• Design Arduino based practical real life applications.
Unit I EMBEDDED COMPUTING PLATFORM 9
Introduction to Embedded System – History of Embedded Systems, Classification – Purpose of Embedded Systems –
Application Areas – Core of Embedded System – Memory – Sensors and Actuators – Arduino Family – Types of
Arduino Devices – Arduino-Compatible Devices – Arduino Application Areas.
Unit II ARDUINO HARDWARE 9
AVR Microcontroller – Internal Architecture – Peripheral Functions – Analog Comparator – Analog-to-Digital
Converter – Serial I/O – Watchdog Timer – Interrupts – Overview of ATmega168/328 – ATmega1280/ATmega2560 –
ATmega32U4
Unit III ARDUINO PROGRAMMING 9
Overview of Arduino IDE – Building an Arduino Sketch – Using the Header Sockets – Working with Strings –
Implementing Structures – Creating Functions - Creating Dynamic Variables – Using Flash to Store Data – Using the
EEPROM Memory - Using Libraries – Creating Your Own Libraries
Unit IV ARDUINO INTERFACING 9
Working with Digital Interfaces – Digital Interface Layout – Using Digital Outputs – Working with Digital Inputs –
Working with Analog Interfaces – Analog Interface Layout – Interfacing with Analog Sensors – Working with Motors
– Working with the Ethernet Shield
Unit V SYSTEM DESIGN WITH ARDUINO 9
Digital Code Lock – Temperature Monitoring System – Automatic Light System – Ultrasonic Distance meter –
Automatic Irrigation System – Home Automation – Line follower Robot – Room Cleaning Robot with ultrasonic
sensors
Text Book:
1. J. M. Hughes, “Arduino: A Technical Reference”, 1st Edition, O’Reilly Media, Inc, USA, 2016.
2. Richard Blum, “Arduino Programming in 24 Hours, Sams Teach Yourself”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, Inc,
USA, 2015.
Reference Book:
1. Shibu K V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, India,
2009.
2. Michael Margolis, “Arduino Cookbook”, 2nd Edition, O’Reilly Media, Inc, USA, 2012.
3. Jeremy Blum, “Exploring Arduino: Tools and Techniques for Engineering Wizardry”, 1st Edition, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc. Publishing, USA, 2013
4. Simon Monk, “Programming Arduino Getting Started with Sketches”, 1st Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, USA,
2012
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.arduino.cc/en/Tutorial/HomePage
• https://circuits4you.com/arduino-projects-vol-1/
• https://www.electronicshub.org/arduino-tutorial/
PAGE 284
19ECA04 MATLAB PROGRAMMING FOR ENGINEERS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To apply knowledge of the MATLAB functions to manipulate complex values, arrays and matrices.
• To develop skills in M File Programming and Elementary Solution Methods
• To develop skills in MATLAB Simulink.
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the MATLAB Concepts and various input output methods.
• Manipulate operators and functions.
• Create M-files using IF, FOR, WHILE statements.
• Evaluate the results of Elementary Solution Methods.
• Simulink signals and systems.
Unit I MATLAB CONCEPTS 9
Directory and Defined Path - Menus and the toolbar - Saving & Loading Files - Using the command line to call
functions - Computing with MATLAB - Reading and Writing from a file: Reading and Writing data from/to a .mat file,
Reading and Writing from an Excel spreadsheet, Reading and Writing from and to other text files, MATLAB Help
System.
Unit II DATA STORAGE AND MANIPULATION 9
Rational Operators on Single Values - Boolean Operators on Single Values - Relational Operators - Strings - Inline
functions - complex number declaration - MATLAB functions to manipulate complex values – Arrays and Matrices -
Declaring a vector - Dot product - Cross Product.
Unit III M FILE PROGRAMMING AND GRAPHICS 9
M-files - syntax - Nested functions - Placing comments - Control Flow: IF statement, FOR statement, WHILE
statement - Program Flow: Arithmetic errors - Indexing errors, Assignment errors, Struct array errors, Syntax errors.
2D Graphics: XY- plotting functions, Subplots and Overlay plots - Special Plot types, Regression - 3D Graphics –
Mesh – Contour.
Unit IV MATHEMATICAL MANIPULATIONS 9
Operations - Linear Algebraic Equations : Elementary Solution Methods, Statistics and probability, Special Matrices-
Row reduced echelon form – Inverse, Coffactor, minor, Differential equation solver- advanced I/O.
Unit V MATLAB SIMULINK 9
Resources in Simulink, Create and run simple model in Simulink, modifying a model, Design of Models: Multiplying
two Sinusoids- Adding derivative of sine and cosine Waves-Passing a sinusoid through a Gaussian channel-
Generating an AM signal.
Programming Exercises
1. Let x = [3 2 6 8]' and y = [4 1 3 5]'
a. Add the sum of the elements in x to y
b. Raise each element of x to the power specified by the corresponding element in y.
c. Multiply each element in x by the corresponding element in y, calling the result "z".
d. Add up the elements in z and assign the result to a variable called "w".
e. Compute x'*y - w and interpret the result
2. Create an M-by-N array of random numbers. Move through the array, element by element, and set any value
that is less than 0.2 to 0 and any value that is greater than (or equal to) 0.2 to 1.
3. The Fibonacci numbers are comuted according to the relation Fn = Fn-1 + Fn-2 with F0=F1= 1
Compute the first 10 Fibonacci numbers.
4. Plot the graph of f(x) = exp(−2x2−3y2 ). Choose appropriate intervals for x and y.
5. Show that if a matrix M can be written as M = P−1DP, where D is diagonal and P is invertible, then exp(M) =
P−1 exp(D)P. [ Define the matrices P = [ 1 2 : 3 7 ], P−1 = [ 7 −2 : −3 1 ] , D = [ 1 0 : 0 4 ]
6. Write a program to calculate N! ("N factorial"), where N is a non-negative integer.
7. Simulink Multiplying integration of sine and cosine waves
8. Simulate a second order closed loop system
Text Book:
1. Linda Coulson, ‘MATLAB Programming’,First Edition, 2009, Global Media, Delhi, ISBN 978 93 80168 38 8.
2. K KSarma, ‘MATLAB Demystified – Basic concepts and applications’, First Edition, 2010, Vikas Publishing house
Pvt Ltd., Noida.
Reference Book:
PAGE 285
1. William J. Palm III, Introduction to Matlab 7 for Engineers, McGraw Hill 2005.
2. G. H. Golub and C. F. Van Loan, Matrix Computations, 3rd Ed., Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996.
3. Stephen J. Chapman, ‘MATLAB Programming for Engineers’, Fourth Edition, Thomson Learning, 2007
Extensive Reading:
• www.mathworks.com/academia/student_center/tutorials/launchpad.html
PAGE 286
19ITA01 WEB DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT L T P C

Offered by IT (Allied Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To develop an understanding in the basics of html like forms, lists etc
• To develop an insight in PHP
• To develop a Webpage design with CSS
• To understand the basics of JavaScript
• To acquire knowledge about Ajax and MySQL
Course Outcome:
• Design a website in HTML
• Apply concepts of PHP
• Create styles for the HTML document
• Perform validation using JavaScript
• Connect with the Web server and perform database operations.
Unit I INTRODUCTION : MARKUP WITH HTML 9
Introduction-Document background color and image – Text Structuring –Character Formatting – Lists – Ordered –
Unordered – Definition Lists – Links to a web page – Tables – Borders and Rules – Rows and Cells – Formatting with
Tables –Form handling-Building Forms-HTML5 Features
Unit II PHP INTRODUCTION 9
Incorporating PHP Within HTML-The Structure of PHP -Expressions and Control Flow in PHP-Operators-Conditionals
Unit III PRESENTATION WITH CSS 9
Introduction to CSS- Importing a Style Sheet –CSS Rules-Style Types-CSS Selectors -The CSS Cascade - Measurements
- Fonts and Typography -Managing Text Styles -CSS Colors - Positioning Elements –Pseudo-classes- The Box Model
and Layout -Advanced CSS with CSS3- Attribute Selectors -CSS3 Backgrounds - CSS3 Borders –Text Effects-
Transformations
Unit IV JAVASCRIPT INTRODUCTION 9
Exploring JavaScript-Using Comments-Semicolons-Variables-Operators-Variable Typing-Functions - Global Variables-
Local Variables-The Document Object Model-Expressions and Control Flow in JavaScript-Expressions-Literals and
Variables- Operators -The with Statement -Using try ... catch -Conditionals -Looping - JavaScript Arrays -JavaScript
and PHP Validation and Error Handling-Validating User Input with JavaScript-Regular Expressions -Redisplaying a
Form After PHP Validation
Unit V MYSQL AND AJAX 9
Accessing MySQL Using PHP- Querying a MySQL Database with PHP -A Practical Example -Practical MySQL -
Performing Additional Queries-Preventing SQL Injection -HTML Injection -Using Ajax- Using XMLHttpRequest
Text Book:
1. Steven M.Schafer, “ HTML, XHTML and CSS”, Wiley Publishing, Inc., Fifth edition 2010.
2. Nixon Robin “Learning PHP, MySQL, JavaScript, CSS & HTML5 A step- by-step guide to creating Dynamic
Websites” , O'Reilly Media, Inc, USA,June 2014..
Reference Book:
1. Chuck Musciano Bill Kennedy, “HTML & XHTML: The Definitive Guide”, O’Reilly, 6th Edition, October 24, 2006
2. Thomas A. Powell, “Web Design: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, June 2000
3. Jeffrey C.Jackson, "Web Technologies--A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2006
4. Thomas Powell,”HTML & CSS: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, Mar 2010
5. Lemay Laura ,”Mastering HTML, CSS & Javascript Web Publishing” BPB Publishers,July 2016.
6. Jon Duckett ,”Beginning Web Programming with HTML, XHTML, and CSS”, Wrox Publications, 2008
Extensive Reading:
• www.codecademy.com
• http://www.w3schools.com/html/
• http://www.w3schools.com/css/
• https://www.khanacademy.org/computing/computer-programming/html-css
• http://tutorialehtml.com/en/
• http://www.alternetwebdesign.com/htmltutorial/lesson1.htm
• http://www.htmlhelp.com/reference/css/
PAGE 287
19ITA02 INTRODUCTION TO JAVA L T P C

Offered by IT (Allied Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BEC, BEE, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution, methods, etc.
• Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in Java, including defining classes, invoking
methods, using class libraries, etc
• Have the ability to write a computer program to solve specified problems
• Be able to use the Java SDK environment to create, debug and run simple Java programs
Course Outcome:
• Write basic programs using fundamental structures.
• Create basic programs using object oriented concepts.
• Create classes that can handle exception and various errors handling mechanism.
• Create Simple applications with GUI
• Develop applications using applet and graphics.
Unit I JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 9
Overview of JDK framework – Identifiers – variables – Assignment statements and Expressions – Constants -
Numeric data types, operations and conversions – String Type – Scanner class – if switch statements – while – do
while – for loop – nested loop- Defining a method- Calling a method – Passing parameters by values – Overloading
methods.
Unit II OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS 9
Class Fundamentals-Using predefined classes--Constructors-Access control-Modifiers -Methods-Dealing with Static
Members and Methods-Method Overloading-Interfaces-Importing Packages-Understanding Class Path-
Implementing Packages-Java Doc Comments-Inheritance-Polymorphism.
Unit III EXCEPTION / ERROR HANDLING 9
Garbage Collection-Finalize () Method-Exceptions & Errors-Types of Exception-Control Flow In Exceptions-Use of try
-catch-finally-throw-throws in Exception Handling -In-built and User Defined Exceptions-Checked and Un Checked
Exceptions
Unit IV APPLICATION PROGRAMMING WITH GUI 9
Event-Driven Programming- Event and Event Sources – Listeners, Registration and handling events – Mouse events
– Key events -Introduction to Swings-Frame-Components-Text Input-Choice Components-Menus-Dialog Box-Layout
Management
Unit V APPLETS AND GRAPHICS 9
Applet class – JApplet class – Enabling applets to run as application – Passing string to applets – Html file and applet
tag- Graphics class – paint component method – Drawing graphics on panels – Drawing strings , lines, Rectangles,
and Ovals, Polygons , Polylines, FontMetrics class.
Text Book:
1. Y.Daniel Liang “ Introduction to Java Programming” 7th Edition, Pearson Education,2013
Reference Book:
1. P.J.Deitel&H.M.Deitel, “Java: How to Program Java 2”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition, 2011.
2. Herbert Schildt, “Java The Complete Reference“,TataMcgrawHill, Eight Edition, 2011.
3. E.BalaGurusamy, “Programming with java A Primer”, Tata McGraw, Hill Education, Fourth Edition, 2009
4. Cay S. Horstmann and Gary Cornell, “Core Java:Volume I –Fundamentals”, Prentice Hall, Ninth Edition, 2015
Extensive Reading:
• http://mark.random-article.com/weber/java/schedule.html
• http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index.html
• http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/ -
• http://horstmann.com/corejava
• www.deitel.com
• http://www.kodejava.org/
• http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java
PAGE 288
19ITA03 PYTHON SCRIPTING L T P C

Course Objective:
• Understand fundamental programming constructs of scripting
• Understand debugging and testing options
• Understand fundamentals of file handling and text processing functions
• Develop graphical user interfaces for interactive modules
• Understand database connectivity in python
Course Outcome:
• Apply control structures in Python scripting
• Implement debugging and testing functions
• Design functions and modules for file handling and text processing
• Use graphical user interface for design
• Implement statistics and database concepts
Unit I SCRIPTING OVERVIEW 9
Python Installation – Jupyter Notebook – Geany & Pycharm – Python Interpreter – Interactive console – Importing
Modules - Strings – String Operations – Lists – Basic Lists Operations – Tuples – Sets – Dictionaries – Command Line
Arguments – Decision Making – Loops – Iterators – Generators – Functions - Modules
Unit II DEBUGGING AND TESTING 9
Debugging- Error Handling – Debuggers Tools – Debugging Basic Program Crashes – Profiling and timing Programs –
Unit Test – Unit Test Creation – Methods – Accepting Input – Handling password – Executing External Commands –
Capturing Output – Prompting for Passwords – Reading Configuration Files – Adding Warning Code – Launching
Web Browser- OS Module – Making Backups
Unit III FILE HANDLING AND TEXT PROCESSING 9
Handling Directories – Handling Data – Working Paths – Comparing Data – Merging Data – Pattern Matching –
Metadata – Compressing and Restoring – File Archiving – Encryption – Decryption – Text Wrapping – Regular
Expressions – Unicode Strings – Documentation and Reporting – Working with Various Files
Unit IV NETWORKING AND GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACES 9
Socket Programming – http package – ftplib module – urllib package – Email Handling – Remote Monitoring –
telnetlib – SSH – Building Graphical User Interfaces – Working with Apache and other Log Files – SOAP and REST API
Communication – Web Scraping
Unit V STATISTICS AND DATABASE ADMINISTRATION 9
NumPY Module – Pandas Module – Data Visualization – Matplotlib – Plotly – MySQL Database Administration -
SQLite Database Administration
Text Book:
1. Ganesh Sanjiv Naik, “Mastering Python Scripting for System Administartors”, Packt Publisher, First Edition,
2019.
Reference Book:
1. Narendra Polu, “Complete Python Scripting for Automation”, Packt Publishers, First Edition 2020.
2. Hans Petter Langtangen, “Python Scripting for Computational Science”, Springer, First Edition 2004
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.coursera.org/specializations/introduction-scripting-in-python
• https://www.python-course.eu/python3_execute_script.php
PAGE 289
19MEA01 AUTOMOTIVE MAINTENANCE AND POLLUTION CONTROL L T P C

Offered by MECH (Allied Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• The concepts of automobile maintenance
• The methods of pollution control in automobiles
Course Outcome:
• Understand the basic concept of engine maintenance
• Acquire knowledge about the Chassis Drive-line Maintenance
• Understand the Maintenance and servicing of auxiliaries
• Understand concept of Air Pollution due to Automobile Exhaust and its control methods
• Understand about Exhaust Emission Control
Unit I ENGINE MAINTENANCE 9
Engine removal and disassembly-Engine cleaning and repair-Smoke diagnosis-Noise diagnosis-Engine block service-
Cylinder liner fitting-Valve diagnosis and repair-Engine balance – Engine testing.
Unit II CHASSIS DRIVE-LINE MAINTENANCE 9
Manual and automatic transmission system-testing, faults and services-Drive shafts-Faults and services-Diagnosing
brake system-Calliper and brake pad- Overhauling and Replacement-Brake inspection after repair-Suspension
system, Shock absorbers and struts, Coil springs , steering knuckles-Diagnosis, inspection and service- defects in
vehicle chassis and body- Service, repair and overhaul.
Unit III MAINTENANCE, SERVICING OF AUXILIARIES 9
Air conditioning system- service and performance test- leak detection and repair-Servicing of lubricating system-
Petrol and diesel injection systems-Symptoms, possible faults and services – Battery failure- Battery test-Ignition
system- Symptoms, possible faults and services. Tyre –inspection and maintenance-Tyre pressure monitoring
system- Retreading and wheel balancing
Unit IV AIR POLLUTION DUE TO AUTOMOBILE EXHAUST 9
Air pollution due to IC engines-Emission norms- Bharat stage and EURO norms-Engine emissions-Hydrocarbon-
Carbon monoxide- Oxides of Nitrogen-Particulates- Smog-Other emissions – Sources and effects of pollution
Unit V EMISSION CONTROL 9
Basic methods of emission control, catalytic converter-particulate traps-Ammonia injection system- Exhaust gas
recirculation- Fuel additives -Non Exhaust emission control-Crank case blow by control- Measurement devices for
HC, CO, NOX, Smoke.
Text Book:
1. Doshi J.A,”Vehicle Maintenance and Garage Practice”,Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited (2014)
2. Ganesan V, “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 4th Edition, 2017.
Reference Book:
1. Tim Gilles,”Automotive Service: Inspection, Maintenance, Repair”, Delmar Cengage Learning; 4th edition.
2. B.P. Pundir ,”Engine Emissions: Pollutant Formation and Advances in Control Technology, Narosa publishing
3. Newton, Steeds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Society of Automotive Engineers, U.S., 13th revised Edition, 2002.
4. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics”, East-West Press, 2nd Edition, 2004.
5. Martin W. Stockel and Martin T Stockel, “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” Goodheart-Willcox.
PAGE 290
19MEA02 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C

Course Objective:
• The fundamentals of Direct Digital Manufacturing technology and the associated Aerospace, Architecture, Art,
Medical and industrial applications.
• Various geometric modeling and meshing techniques.
• The different processes and be able to develop prototypes of products
Course Outcome:
• Understand history, concepts and terminology of additive manufacturing
• Apply the reverse engineering concepts for design and development of products
• Comprehend the variations of additive manufacturing techniques and their respective applications
• Study the know-hows of processes suitable for making metal prototypes
• Design and develop cost-effective temporary tooling for making prototypes in less time.
Need - Development of Additive Manufacturing systems – Additive Manufacturing process chain - Impact of
Additive Manufacturing on Product Development- Virtual Prototyping- Rapid Prototyping to Additive Manufacturing
-Classification of Additive Manufacturing processes – Benefits- Applications.
Unit II REVERSE ENGINEERING AND CAD MODELING 9
Basic concept- Digitization techniques – Model reconstruction – Data Processing for Rapid Prototyping: CAD model
preparation, Data requirements – Geometric modeling techniques: Wire frame, surface and solid modeling – data
formats - Data interfacing, Part orientation and support generation, Support structure design, Model Slicing, Tool
path generation-Software for AM- Case studies.
Unit III LIQUID BASED AND SOLID BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 11
Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA): Principle, pre-build process, part-building and post-build processes, photo
polymerization of SL resins, part quality and process planning, recoating issues, materials, advantages, limitations
and applications. Solid Ground Curing (SGC): working principle, process, strengths, weaknesses and applications.
Fused deposition Modeling (FDM): Principle, details of processes, process variables, types, products, materials and
applications. Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM): Working Principles, details of processes, products, materials,
advantages, limitations and applications - Case studies.
Unit IV POWDER BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 9
Selective Laser Sintering (SLS): Principle, process, Indirect and direct SLS- powder structures, materials, post
processing, surface deviation and accuracy, Applications. Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS): Processes, materials,
products, advantages, limitations and applications– Case Studies.
Unit V RAPID TOOLING & APPLICATIONS 7
Classification, Soft tooling, Production tooling, Bridge tooling, direct and indirect tooling, Fabrication processes,
Applications& Case studies in automotive, aerospace and electronics industries
Text Book:
1. Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications, 3rd edition, Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., World Scientific
Publishers, 2008.
2. Gebhardt, Andreas, Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid Tooling, Rapid
Manufacturing, Hanser Publications, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen, Brent Stucker, Additive Manufacturing Technologies: 3D Printing, Rapid Prototyping,
and Direct Digital Manufacturing, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2014.
2. LiouW.Liou, Frank W.Liou, Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for prototype
development, CRC Press, 2007.
3. Ali K. Kamrani, EmadAbouel Nasr, Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice, Springer, 2006.
4. Peter D.Hilton Hilton, Paul F.Jacobs, Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications, CRC press, 2000.
5. D. T. Pham and S.S. Dimov, Rapid Manufacturing, Springer-Verlag London Limited 2001.
PAGE 291
19MEA03 DECISION SUPPORT AND INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To review and clarify the fundamental terms, concepts associated with Decision Support Systems,
computerized decision aids, expert systems, group support systems and executive support systems.
• To discuss the modelling and analysis of the Decision Support Systems.
• To understand the enterprise DSS and knowledge management.
• To understand the intelligent systems used in DSS.
• To discuss organizational and social implications of Decision Support Systems
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate an understanding of the theory of decisions and decision analysis including probability, decisions
under uncertainty, risk taking, and real-world problems.
• Demonstrate the different models used in the DSS.
• Analyze, design and build an information system using emerging tools and technologies for a given business
problem.
• Describe the role of expert systems.
• Illustrate the implementation, integration and impacts of Decision Support Systems.
Unit I DECISION MAKING AND COMPUTERIZED SUPPORT 9
Decision Making: Introduction and Definitions - Managers and Decision Making - Managerial decision making and
Information Systems - Managers and computerized support Need - framework for decision support – concept of
decision support systems (DSS) –executive support systems - preview of the modeling process-phases of decision
making process.
Unit II MODELING AND ANALYSIS 9
DSS components- DSS classifications - Data warehousing, access, analysis, mining and visualization - modeling and
analysis- Static and dynamic models – influence diagrams – Optimization via mathematical programming – Heuristic
programming – simulation – multidimensional modeling – model base management.
Unit III ENTERPRISE DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS AND KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT 10
Group decision making – Group support systems- Technologies – Creativity and Idea generation - enterprise
information systems (EIS) – Comparing and Integrating EIS and DSS - supply and value chain and DSS- supply chain
problems and solutions – Computerized systems - knowledge management methods, technologies and tools.
Unit IV INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS 10
Artificial intelligence (AI) – Concepts and Definitions – AI versus natural intelligence - expert systems-concepts,
structure, types and benefits and problems – knowledge Engineering - knowledge acquisition and validation -
knowledge representation – Techniques – Inference techniques
Unit V IMPLEMENTATION, INTEGRATION, AND IMPACTS 7
Implementation – Major issues of implementation – implementation strategies – Models of integration – Intelligent
DSS – Intelligent modelling and model management – problems and issues in integration - impact of management
support systems - overview – personnel management issues – impact of Individuals – Impacts on productivity,
quality and competitiveness – Issues of legality, privacy and ethics – Other societal impacts.
Text Book:
1. Efraim Turban and Jay E Aronson, “Decision Support and Intelligent Systems”, Prentice Hall, 9thEdition, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. George M. Marakas, “Decision Support Systems”, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2002.
2. Daniel J. Power, “Decision Support Systems: Concepts and Resources for Managers”, Greenwood
Publishing Group, 1st Edition, 2002.
3. Quazi Khabeer, “Business Process Management and Decision Support Systems”, Alpha Science
International Limited, 1stEdition, 2013.
4. Elain Rich, Kevin Knight and Shivashankar B. Nair , “Artificial intelligence”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, 3rd Edition, 2009.
PAGE 292
19MEA04 ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDINGS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Impact of solar radiation in buildings.
• Utilization of energy efficient technologies.
• Concept of indoor air quality.
• Design, construction and operation of energy efficient buildings.
• Significance of green buildings and its operation.
Course Outcome:
• Be familiar about basic concepts of energy efficient buildings.
• Understand the operation of various energy efficient technologies.
• Know about the different components inside building environment.
• Calculate the different energy transfer in buildings.
• Understand the concept of green buildings and codes.
The sun-earth relationship - Energy balance on the earth's surface - climate, wind, solar radiation and solar
temperature - sun shading and solar radiation on surfaces - Energy impact on the shape and orientation of buildings
- Thermal properties of building materials - Technology Roadmap on Energy efficient Buildings.
Unit II ENERGY EFFICIENT TECHNOLOGIES 9
Passive cooling and day lighting - active solar and photovoltaic building energy analysis methods - building energy
efficiency standards - different lighting technologies - Energy conservation in pumps, fans and blowers - heat
rejection equipment - energy efficient motors and insulation - Energy Efficiency in Residential and Commercial
Buildings.
Unit III ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS INSIDE BUILDING 9
Psychrometry - comfort conditions - thermal comfort - ventilation and air quality - air conditioning requirement -
visual perception - auditory requirement - illumination requirement - choice of lighting - lighting standards - control
of lighting - lighting economics and aesthetics - energy saving - impacts of lighting efficiency - electronic ballast -
Ventilation – Requirements – Minimum standards for ventilation – Ventilation Design – Energy conservation in
ventilating systems
Unit IV ENERGY TRANSFER IN BUILDINGS 9
Concepts of energy efficient buildings - Energy efficient HVAC systems - Heating and Cooling Equipment - Building’s
energy balance accounting for solar energy gain – Heat losses - Internal heat sources - Study of climate and its
influence in building design for energy requirement - Low energy and zero energy buildings.
Unit V GREEN BUILDINGS 9
Ecological sustainable design - Barriers to green buildings - green building rating tools - material selection -
embodied energy - operating energy - facade systems – transportation - water treatment systems - water efficiency
- building economics - LEED and IGBC codes.
Text Book:
1. John Littler and Randall Thomas, “Design with Energy: The Conservation and Use of Energy in
Buildings”, Cambridge University Press, 1984.
Reference Book:
1. Colin Porteous, “The New Eco-Architecture”, Spon Press, 2002.
2. Lever More G J, “Building Energy Management Systems”, E and F.N Spon, London, 2000.
3. Means R.S., “Green building: project planning and cost estimating”, Kingston, 3rd Edition,2010.
4. Kibert C.J. “Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design”, Wiley, 4th Edition, 2016.
5. Eicker U., “Low Energy Cooling for Sustainable Buildings”, Wiley, 2009.
6. Attmann O., “Green Architecture”, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.bee-india.nic.in
• http://www.iea.org
• http://www.unep.org
PAGE 293
19MEA05 ELECTRONICS PACKAGING TECHNOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• The importance of electronics packaging.
• The basics of electronic component packaging.
• Key areas of usage of electronic packages.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the necessity and the basics of Electronics packaging.
• Design basic circuit component packages.
• Understand the role of package subassemblies
• Explain the role of interconnections and enclosures
• Design packages considering thermal issues and list the applications of electronics packaging.
Unit I PACKAGING IMPLEMENTATION 9
Requirements of electronics packaging – levels of packaging – packaging priorities – general packaging issues –
product applications –Integrated Circuit process technologies – Application Specific Integrated Circuits packaging
Unit II CIRCUIT COMPONENT PACKAGING 9
Electronic and electro-mechanical circuit components – Bare die termination techniques (Chip and wire bonding,
controlled collapse soldering and Tape Automated Bonding) – Hybrid microcircuits – Chip on board technology – Die
attachment and protection – Multichip modules.
Unit III PACKAGE SUB ASSEMBLIES 9
Electrical performance requirements – Materials for packaging and interconnecting structures –general assemble
selection considerations – Through hole mount and surface mount technologies (process and advantages) - rework
considerations.
Unit IV INTERCONNECTIONS, CABLING AND ENCLOSURES 9
Backplane structures and connectors – solder less wrap backplane wiring – electrical characteristics of wiring – Wire
and cable materials, configurations – cabling connectors –wire terminations.
General Enclosure Selection Considerations – Cabinets – Small Equipment Enclosures – Portable Carrying Cases -
Printed Board Enclosures.
Unit V THERMAL MANAGEMENT AND APPLICATIONS 9
Basic Thermal Management Considerations - General Thermal Analysis - Heat Sinks and Air movers – Liquid cooling
– Thermoelectric pump modules – case studies.
End product applications in Consumer Electronics, Data Processing Equipment, Avionics, Military Shipboard
Electronics and Biomedical Electronics.
Text Book:
1. Gerald L Ginsberg, “Electronic Equipment Packaging Technology”, Springer Science + Business Media,1992
2. Glenn R Blackwell, “The Electronic Packaging Handbook, CRC Press LLC”, 2000. E book published on 2017
Reference Book:
1. Charles A Harper, “Electronic Packaging and Interconnection Handbook”, McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2004.
2. Puligandla Viswanadham, “Essentials of Electronic Packaging: A Multidisciplinary Approach”, ASME Press,2011.
3. C. P. Wong, “Electronic Packaging: Design, Materials, Process, and Reliability”, McGraw-Hill, 1998.
PAGE 294
19MEA06 FUNDAMENTALS OF ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C

Course Objective:
• Understanding the basics of Conventional and non-conventional energy resources.
• Learning the basic principles and methods of utilizing Biomass.
• Energy conservation techniques.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the basics of energy systems.
• Apply the fundamentals of energy conversion for practical applications.
• Realize the importance of non-conventional energy systems.
• Understand the concepts of Biomass energy.
• Know about energy conservation techniques.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ENERGY 9
Introduction to energy – Global energy scene – Indian energy scene - Atmospheric Pollution, general classification of
energy, energy crisis, energy alternatives.
Unit II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 9
Conventional energy resources, Thermal power plant - combustion processes, fluidized bed combustion, hydel and
nuclear power plants, Efficiency, merits and de-merits.
Unit III NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 9
Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water heating, solar cooling, solar
distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar thermal power generation. Wind energy, types of
windmills, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean thermal energy conversion, tidal energy conversion, geothermal
energy.
Unit IV BIOMASS ENERGY 9
Biomass origin - Resources – Biofuels. Thermochemical conversion – Biological conversion, Chemical conversion –
Hydrolysis & hydrogenation, Biodiesel, biodiesel power generation, gasifier, biogas - Classification of biogas plant
Unit V ENERGY CONSERVATION 9
Energy conservation - Act; Energy management importance, duties and responsibilities; Energy audit – Types and
methodology, reports, instruments. Material and energy balance, thermal energy management.
Text Book:
1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., “Energy Technology: Non-conventional, Renewable and Conventional”, Khanna
Publishers, 2007.
2. Nagpal, G.R., “Power Plant Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, 2008.
Reference Book:
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press, U.K., 3rd Revised
Edition 2012.
2. Rai, G.D., “Non-conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010
3. Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., “Renewable Energy Sources”, EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 2006.
4. Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Narosa Publishing House, New
Delhi, 2002.
5. Freris L.L., “Wind Energy Conversion systems”, Prentice Hall, UK, 1990.
PAGE 295
19MEA07 FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To provide an in depth knowledge about the fundamentals of fire and explosion.
• To understand the causes and effects of fire and explosion.
• To know the various fire and explosion prevention systems and protective equipment.
• To understand the protection of building from fire.
• To understand the various fire prevention techniques to be followed in a building.
Course Outcome:
• Make familiar about basic concepts of fire science.
• Understand the operation of various types of firefighting equipment.
• Know the different causes and effects of fire.
• Equip the students to effectively employ fire protection techniques in building.
• Understand the technics of prevention of explosion.
Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE 9
Combustion process & concepts, combustion in solids, liquid, gases- smouldering fires- Spontaneous combustion -
rapid fire progress phenomena- Properties influencing fire hazard – properties of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels -
classification of fires.
Unit II FIRE CONTROL 9
Fire extinguishers – Location and operation of extinguishers - Extinguishing methods- extinguishing agents: water,
foam, chemical powder, CO2, sand, steam, saw dust – Fire detectors – Fire tender - Automatic fire extinguishing
system - Fixed firefighting installations - Risk analysis: risk assessment, consequence analysis, risk reduction – Fire
drill – Emergency procedures.
Unit III PRODUCTS AND EFFECTS OF COMBUSTION 9
Heat: Conduction, convection, radiation- effects of heat- effects of flames – different fire gases and their effects –
effects of smoke on humans– Smoke movement control and venting
Unit IV BUILDING FIRE SAFETY 9
Objectives of fire safe building design, Fire load, fire resistant material and fire testing – concept of egress design -
exits – width calculations -– fire safety requirements for high rise buildings – Behavior of materials & structures in
fire – Concrete and steel. Flame spread in high rise building – Statutory requirements.
Unit V FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPLOSION 9
Introduction – Explosion fundamentals – Types – - Effects of explosion – Negative pressure wave – Fragmentation –
Physical, Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapour Explosion, Chemical explosion – Vapour cloud explosion – Dust explosion
– Explosion prevention – Explosion mitigation, case studies.
Text Book:
1. Purandare D.D., Abhay D. Purandare, “Hand Book on Industrial Fire Safety”, P & A Publications, 1st Edition,
2006.
2. Jain V.K., Fire Safety in Building, Taylor & Francis, 2nd edition, 2016.
Reference Book:
1. Gupta, R.S., “Hand Book of Fire Technology” Orient Longman, Bombay, 2010.
2. “Accident Prevention manual for industrial operations” N.S.C., Chicago, 1988.
3. Dinko Tuhtar, “Fire and explosion protection – A system approach”, Ellis Horwood Ltd, 1989.
4. “Fire fighters hazardous materials Reference Book Fire Prevention in Factories”, Nostrand Rein Hold, New York,
1991.
5. “Fire Prevention Hand Book”, NFPA, 20th edition, 2008.
6. “Fire Prevention and fire fighting”, International Maritime Organisation, London, 2000.
PAGE 296
19MEA08 RELIABILITY ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• The aim of the course is to provide students with knowledge in concepts, methodology, and tools of reliability
engineering.
• On completion of the course, the students should be able to construct models for the estimation and
improvement of reliability parameters of manufactured products and components
Course Outcome:
• Recognize the concepts of reliability and hazard rate models.
• Perform reliability analysis of a system and designing the same.
• Get familiar with design for reliability.
• Apply the concepts of various reliability test and analyse the failure data.
• Gain the knowledge about maintainability and system availability.
Unit I RELIABILITY ENGINEERING 8
Definition of reliability - Reliability functions – Failure Data – Mean Time to failure (MTTF) – Mean Time between
Failures (MTBF) – Hazard Rate Function - Bath tub curve – Conditional Reliability - Constant Failure Rate Model:
Exponential distribution - CFR Model Time dependent Failure models – Weibull distribution – Normal Distribution –
Lognormal distribution .
Unit II RELIABILITY OF SYSTEMS 8
Introduction – Series, Parallel and Combined Series-Parallel Configuration – System Structure function, Minimal cuts
and Minimal paths – Markov analysis – Load sharing Systems – Stand-by systems – Degraded systems- Three state
devices – Physical Reliability models: Covariate, Static and Dynamic models
Unit III DESIGN FOR RELIABILITY 9
System effectiveness, Economic analysis and Life cycle costs. - Design Methods: Parts and material selection –
Derating – Stress strength analysis – Complexity and technology – Redundancy - Failure Analysis: Identification of
failure modes – determination of cause – assessment of effect – Estimation of probability of occurrence –
Computation of criticality index – Determination of corrective action - System Safety and Fault tree analysis
Unit IV FAILURE DATA ANALYSIS 12
Data collection – Empirical methods: Ungrouped / Grouped Complete Data – Ungrouped / grouped Censored data –
Static Life Estimation - Reliability Life testing – Test time calculations – Burn – In – Testing – Acceptance Testing
Accelerated Life testing – Reliability Growth Testing - Identifying Failure and Repair Distributions - Goodness of fit
tests – Chi square Test – Bartlett’s Test – Mann’s test – Kolmogorov-Smirnov test
Unit V MAINTAINABILITY 8
Analysis of downtime – Repair time distribution – System Repair time – Reliability under preventive maintenance -
Design for Maintainability: Maintenance requirements – Design methods – Fault isolation and self-diagnostics –
Parts standardization and interchangeability – Modularization and Accessibility – Repair Vs Replacement – Proactive
Maintenance –– Maintenance prediction and Spares provisioning – System availability
Text Book:
1. Charles E. Ebeling, “An introduction to Reliability and Maintainability engineering”, overseas Press (2011).
2. L.S.Srinath, “Reliability Engineering”, East west press, 4thEdition, 2005.
Reference Book:
1. Connor P.D.T.O. “Practical Reliability Engineering”, John Wiley, 5th Edition, 2012.
2. Sharma S.C. “Inspection Quality Control and Reliability”, Khanna Publishers, 1998.
3. Roy Billington and Ronald N. Allan, “Reliability Evaluation of Engineering Systems”, Springer, 2013
PAGE 297
19MEA09 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL L T P C

Course Objective:
• To introduce the concept of Statistical Quality Control.
• To understand about process control and acceptance sampling procedures
Course Outcome:
• Grasp the importance of quality and the means to control it using SQC.
• Understand and interpret the mean, variance, and standard deviation of distributions for modelling process
quality.
• Apply the concepts of various control chart methods in statistical process control.
• Perform analysis of process capability and measurement system capability.
• Appreciate the role of various acceptance sampling procedure in quality control.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO QUALITY CONTROL 7
The Meaning of Quality and Quality Improvement; Brief History of Quality Methodology; Statistical Methods for
Quality Control and Improvement; Total Quality Management (quality philosophy, links between quality and
productivity, quality costs, legal aspects of quality implementing, quality improvement).
DMAIC PROCESS - Examples of DMAIC
Unit II MODELING PROCESS QUALITY 9
Describing Variation - Discrete Distributions - Continuous Distributions – Normal. Lognormal, Exponential, Weibull,
Gamma distribution – Central Limit theorem Probability Plots - Some Useful Approximations - Statistics and
Sampling Distributions - Statistical Inference for a Single and Two Samples - Type I and Type II errors, the probability
of Type II error - Linear Regression Models - Simple Numerical Problems
Unit III METHODS OF STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL 10
Chance and assignable causes, Statistical Basis of the Control Charts - Control Charts for X-Bar and R- Charts, Control
Charts for –x and s - The Control Chart for Fraction Nonconforming - Variable Sample Size - Operating-Characteristic
Function and Average Run Length Calculations - p chart and np chart - Control Charts for Nonconformities (Defects)
- C and U charts - State of control and process out of control identification in charts
Unit IV PROCESS MEASUREMENT AND MONITORING TECHNIQUES 9
Process Capability Analysis Using a Histogram or a Probability Plot, Control Chart, Designed Experiments, Attribute
Data - Gauge and Measurement System Capability Studies - Cumulative Sum Control Chart - Exponentially Weighted
Moving Average Control Chart - The Moving Average Control Chart - other univariate statistical Process monitoring
and Control techniques - multivariate process Monitoring and control
Unit V ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING 10
Lot-By-Lot Acceptance Sampling problem, single sampling plan for attributes, Double, Multiple, and Sequential
sampling, OC curves, Military Standard 105E, the Dodge-Roaming sampling plans Average Outgoing Quality Limit
(AOQL), Lot Tolerance Percent Defective (LTPD) -Acceptance Sampling by Variables - Designing a Variables Sampling
Plan with a Specified OC Curve - MIL STD 414 - Other Variables Sampling Procedures - Chain Sampling - Continuous
Sampling - Skip-Lot Sampling Plans
Text Book:
1. Douglas.C.Montgomery. “Statistical Quality Control: A Modern Introduction”, John Wiley, 7thEdition, 2013.
Reference Book:
1. John.S. Oakland. “Statistical process control”, A Butterworth-Heinemann Title, 6thEdition, 2007.
2. Eugene L. Grant, Richard S. Leavenworth “Statistical Quality Control”, McGraw-Hill, 7thEdition 2008
3. Monohar Mahajan. “Statistical Quality Control”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 3rdEdition, 2012.
4. Gupta. R.C.. “Statistical Quality control”, Khanna Publishers, 8th Edition, 2008.
PAGE 298
19ADA06 INTRODUCTION TO DEEP LEARNING TECHNIQUES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To Fundamental techniques and principles of Neural Networks
• To Different models in ANN and their applications
• To Explore the machine learning algorithms
• To Deep learning techniques
• To Convolutional Neural Network to solve real world probelms
Course Outcome:
• Interpret the basic concepts in Neural Networks and applications
• Apply Machine Learning techniques for solving real world problems
• Use various architectures of Artificial Neural Network
• Design Deep Learning models for solving huge Data set problems
• Implement various CNN techniques to solve problems
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Fundamentals Of Neural Networks – Model of Artificial Neuron – Neural Network Architectures – Learning Methods
– Taxonomy Of Neural Network Architectures – Applications
Unit II PROBABILISTIC AND BAYESIAN NETWORKS 9
Introduction – Bayesian Network Model – Learning Bayesian Network – Bayesian Network Inference – Sampling
Methods – Hidden Markov Models – Mixture Models –Bayesian approach to Neural Network learning – Boltzman
Machines
Introduction to Machine Learning – Learning Algorithms – Supervised Learning – Unsupervised learning –
Reinforcement Learning – Capacity, Overfitting and Underfitting – Hyperparameters and Validation Sets
Unit IV DEEP LEARNING 9
Feed Forward network– Recurrent Network – Regularizations - Training deep models – Dropouts, Training Deep
Neural Networks using Back Propagation - Setup and initialization issues, vanishing and exploding Gradient
problems, Gradient– Descent Strategies
Unit V CONVOLUTIONAL NEURAL NETWORK 9
Convolutional Neural Network, Basic structure of Convolutional Network, Case studies: Alex net, VGGNet, Google
Net, Applications of CNN– Object Detection, Content based image Retrieval
Text Book:
1. YoshuaBengio and Ian J.Goodfellow and Aaron Courville, "Deep Learning", MIT Press, 2015
Reference Book:
1. Bishop, Christopher M,“Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2006
2. CharuC.Aggarwal, “Neural Networks and Deep learning”, Springer International Publishing, 2018
3. Satish Kumar, “Neural Networks, A Classroom Approach”, Tata McGraw -Hill, 2007
4. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks, A Comprehensive Foundation”, 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley Longman, 2001
5. Duda, Richard, Peter Hart, and David Stork,“Pattern Classification”, 2nd edition,wiley, 2000
Extensive Reading:
PAGE 299
19ADA07 IOT AND ITS APPLICATIONS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To Fundamental concepts of IoT and its necessary towards society
• To Use of different protocols
• To Familiarize with IoT architectures
• To Sensors, actuators, development boards and Arduino programming
• To Understand the concepts of web of things and applications
Course Outcome:
• Identify the fundamentals of IoT
• Illustrate various IoT Protocols for establishing communication between things
• Design and Develop IoT application using IoT architecture
• Build simple IoT Systems using Arduino and Raspberry Pi
• Create IoT solutions using sensors, actuators and Devices
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO IOT 9
Introduction – Elements of an IoT ecosystem – Technology drivers – Business drivers – Trends and implications –
Overview of Governance – Privacy and Security Issues
Unit II IOT PROTOCOLS 9
Protocol Standardization for IoT – Efforts – M2M and WSN Protocols – SCADA and RFIDProtocols – Issues with IoT
Standardization – Unified Data Standards – Protocols – IEEE802.15.4–BACNet Protocol– Modbus – KNX – Zigbee–
Network layer – APS layer – Security
Unit III IOT ARCHITECTURE 9
IoT Open source architecture (OIC) – OIC Architecture & Design principles– IoT Devices and deployment models–
IoTivity : An Open source IoT stack - Overview– IoTivity stack architecture– Resource model and Abstraction
Unit IV IOT HARDWARE AND PROGRAMMING 9
Basics of sensors and actuators – Examples and working principles of sensors and actuators – Arduino Programming
for IOT – Raspberry Pi– Reading from Sensors. Communication: Connecting microcontroller with Bluetooth and USB
– Connection with the Internet using Ethernet
Unit V APPLCIATIONS AND CASE STUDY 9
Connected vehicles – Traffic management - Smart grids – Environmental monitoring – Smart buildings/smart homes
– Smart cities – Supply chain management – Industrial, agricultural and commercial management
Text Book:
1. Honbo Zhou, “The Internet of Things in the Cloud: A Middleware Perspective”, CRC Press,2012
Reference Book:
1. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”, Universities Press, 2015
2. David Easley and Jon Kleinberg, “Networks, Crowds, and Markets: Reasoning About a Highly Connected World”,
Cambridge University Press, 2010
3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things – Key applicationsand Protocols”,
Wiley, 2012
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles, Florian (Eds), “Architecting the Internetof Things”, Springer,
2011
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.survivingwithandroid.com/iot-protocols-list/
• https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/architecture-of-internet-of-things-iot/
PAGE 300
19ADA08 ESSENTIALS OF BIG DATA L T P C

Course Objective:
• To Study about Map reduce concept
• To Study about applying Machine Learning using Spark and Mahout
• To Study about applying clustering algorithms using Spark
• To Study about mining web big data and analyze using deep and extreme learning
Course Outcome:
• Apply map reduce concept for parallel processing
• Perform classification on big data using Spark
• Perform clustering on big data Spark
• Apply Bigdata analytics algorithms to analyze social network
• Apply concepts of deep and extreme learning on big data
Unit I MAP REDUCE BASED MACHINE LEARNING 9
Introduction – Need for Big data Analytics – K-Means – PLANET – Parallel SVM –Association Rule Mining in
MapReduce, Inverted Index – Page Ranking – Expectation Maximization – Bayesian Networks
Unit II CLASSIFICAITON AND REGRESSION USING SPARK AND MAHOUT 9
Linear support vector machines – Naive Bayes model – Decision Trees – Least square regression – Decision trees for
regression
Unit III CLUSTERING IN SPARK AND MAHOUT 9
Hierarchical Clustering in a Euclidean and Non-Euclidean Space – The Algorithm of Bradley, Fayyad, and Reina – A
variant of K-means algorithm – Processing Data in BFR Algorithm – CURE algorithm – Clustering models with Spark –
Spectral clustering using Mahout Linear support vector machines – Naive Bayes model – Decision Trees – Least
square regression – Decision trees for regression
Unit IV MINING SOCIAL-NETWORK GRAPHS 9
Clustering of Social-Network Graphs – Direct Discovery of Communities – Partitioning of Graphs – Finding
Overlapping Communities – Counting Triangles using MapReduce – Neighbourhood Properties of Graph
Unit V DEEP LEARNING AND EXTREME LEARNING 9
Introduction – Deep Neural Networks – Deep Belief Networks – Auto Encoders – Recurrent NetworksExtreme
Learning Machines (ELM) – ELM auto encoder – Extreme Support Vector Regression
Text Book:
1. JureLeskovec, AnandRajaraman, Jeff Ullman, “Mining of Massive Datasets”, Standford Press, 2011
2. NickPentreath, “Machine Learning with Spark”, Packt Publishing, 2015
Reference Book:
1. OlivierChapelle, Bernhard Scholkopf, Alexander Zien "Semi-Supervised Learning", The MIT Press, 2006
2. RonBekkerman, Mikhail Bilenko, John Langford "Scaling Up Machine Learning: Parallel and Distributed
Approaches", Cambridge University Press, 2012
3. Jimmy Lin, Chris Dyer, "Data-Intensive Text Processing with MapReduce", Morgan & Claypool Publishers, 2010
4. Li Deng, Dong Yu, “Deep Learning: Methods and Applications”, Now Publisher, 2014
5. ChandramaniTiwary "Learning Apache Mahout", Packt Publishing, 2015
6. Fuchen Sun, Kar-Ann Toh, Manuel Grana Romay, KezhiMao,"Extreme Learning Machines:Algorithms and
Applications", Springer, 2014
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.tutorialspoint.com/hadoop/hadoop_big_data_overview.htm
• https://www.ibm.com/in-en/analytics/hadoop/big-data-analytics
• https://www.javatpoint.com/hadoop-tutorial
• https://www.analyticsvidhya.com/blog/2020/12/big-data-with-spark-and-scala/
• https://spark.apache.org/
PAGE 301
19ADA09 DATA ANALYTICS USING R L T P C

Course Objective:
• To Explore the need of R tool
• To Apply various Data manipulation techniques in R to import and export data
• To Work on applications, implementing R Analytics to create Business Insights
• To Use concepts of object oriented programming in R
• To Apply graphics interface and create packages in R
Course Outcome:
• Apply the basics of R programming with its datatypes
• Apply the functional programming and data manipulation statements in
• Identify packages to implement machine learning techniques in R
• Apply concepts of object oriented programming in R
• Implement graphics and create new packages with R
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO DATA SCIENCE & R 9
Introduction to Data Science – Data Science Lifecycle - Introduction – R environmental setup – Installation – RStudio
– Programming with R – R as a calculator – Dealing with Missing Values – Using R Packages – Expression – Data
Types – Data Structures – Control Structures – Functions – Lazy Evaluation – Recursive Functions – Exercises
Unit II DATA MANIPULATION & FUNCTIONAL PROGRAMMING 9
Creating a R Markdown – YAML – Markdown language – R Code in Markdown documents – Data Manipulation –
Data Import and Export – Manipulation data with dplyr – Vectorizing Functions – Apply Family – Infix operator –
Replacement Functions – Function with arguments & return – Filter, Map and Reduce
Dealing with large dataset – Sampling – Regression – Linear Regression – Logistic Regression – Evaluating and
Validating Models – Cross Validation – Classification – Decision Trees– Neural Network – Support Vector Machine –
Unsupervised Learning - Clustering - Association Rule Mining
Unit IV CLASS AND OBJECTS 9
Immutable objects and Polymorphic functions – Data structures – Classes Introduction: Classes - Programming with
New Classes - Inheritance and Inter-class Relations - Virtual Classes - Creating and Validating Objects - Programming
with S3 Classes – Class Hierarchies – Exercises
Unit V DATA VISUALIZATION AND PACKAGES 9
XY Plot – Graphics Package – ggplot2 - Package concept and tools – Creating an R package – Description –
Namespace – Roxygen – Adding data to Package - Documentation for Packages – Building an R Package
Text Book:
1. Thomas Mailund, “Beginning Data Science in R – Data Analysis, Visualisation and Modelling for the Data
Scientist”, Apress Publication, 2017
2. John Chambers, “Software for Data Analysis: Programming with R”, Springer; 1st ed. 2008. , 2nd printing 2009
edition
Reference Book:
1. TorstenHothorn, Brian S. Everitt, “ A Handbook of Statistical Analyses Using R “,Chapman and Hall/CRC; 2nd
edition ,2009
3. Nicholas J. Horton, Ken Kleinman,” Using R and Rstudio for Data Management, Statistical Analysis, and
4. JohnMaindonald, W. John Braun,”Data Analysis and Graphics Using R: An Example-Based Approach”, University
Press, Cambridge, Third edition, 2010
5. John M. Quick,” Statistical Analysis with R”, Packt Publishing, 2010
6. K.G.Srinivasa, G M Siddesh, ChetanShetty, “Statistical Programming in R”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi,
2017
Extensive Reading:
• R Programming tutorials:https://www.tutorialspoint.com/r/index.htm
• R Programming:https://www.w3schools.com/r/
• https://www.javatpoint.com/r-tutorial
• https://data-flair.training/blogs/r-tutorials-home/
• https://www.datacamp.com/community/tutorials/machine-learning-in-r
PAGE 302
19ADA10 DESIGN THINKING IN ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn the different views of learning
• To study the various search strategies
• To study the knowledge representation framework
• To understand the transition from micro world to knowledge representation
• To learn the brain architecture
Course Outcome:
• Recognize mind by its design
• Perform various search strategies
• Prepare various learning frameworks
• Represent Knowledge using KRL
• Adopt connectionist approach for problem solving
Mind Design – Perspectives and Things – Turing Test – Intentionality –Formal systems – Automatic Formal systems
– Computers and Intelligence – GOFAI – Interpreted Formal systems – New Fangled AI – Connectionist Networks –
Embodied and Embedded AI – Imitation Game– Critique of the new problem – Machines Concerned – Digital
Computers – Universality – Contrary Views – Learning Machines
Unit II SEARCH STRATEGIES 9
Intentional Strategy –Working – True Believers – Computer Science as Empirical Inquiry: Symbols and Search –
Symbols and physical symbol systems – Laws of Qualitative Structure – Development of the symbol–system
hypothesis – Evidence –Heuristic Search – Problem Solving – Search Trees – Forms of Intelligence – Intelligence
without much Search
Unit III FRAMEWORK FOR REPRESENTING KNOWLEDGE 9
Frames – Artificial intelligence and human problem solving – Language, understanding, and scenarios – Words,
sentences, and meanings – Scenarios and questions – Questions, systems, and cases – Learning, memory, and
paradigms – Requests to memory – Clusters, classes, and a geographic analogy – Analogies and alternative
descriptions – Frames and paradigms
Unit IV KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION: AI AT AN IMPASSE 9
Micro–worlds – SHRDLU: Understanding Natural Language – Scene Parsing And Computer Vision – Learning New
Concepts or Categories – Knowledge Representation –Scripts and Primitive Actions – KRL: A Knowledge –
Representation Language – Minds, Brains, and Programs
Unit V THE ARCHITECTURE OF MIND: A CONNECTIONIST APPROACH 9
Brain–Style Computation –The Connectionist Framework – Computational Features Of Connectionist Models – State
Of The Art –Architectures – Scaling Problem – Generalization Problem – Connectionist Modeling: Neural
Computation / Mental Connections – Levels Of Analysis: Neural And Mental Structures – Symbolic Paradigm –
Subsymbolic Paradigm – Semantic Interpretation – The Subsymbolic Level – Subsymbolic Computation –
Subsymbolic Inference And The Statistical Connection – Higher–Level Descriptions – The Best–Fit Principle –
Productions, Sequential Processing, And Logical Inference – Dynamics Of Activation Patterns – Schemata
Text Book:
1. John Haugeland, “Mind Design II – Philosophy Psychology Artificial Intelligence”, The MIT Press, Second Edition,
1997
Reference Book:
1. Denis Rithman , “Artificial Intelligence By Example”, Packt Publishers, First Edition, 2018
2. Melanie Mitchell,“Artificial Intelligence: A Guide for Thinking Humans”, Penguin Publishers, First Edition, 2019
3. Michael Lewrick, Patrick Link and Larry Leifer, “ The Design Thinking Playbook”, Wiley Publishers, First Edition,
2019
Extensive Reading:
• https://medium.com/udacity/tagged/design-thinking
• https://www.cuelogic.com/blog/design-thinking-for-ai
• https://www.ibm.com/design/thinking/page/badges/ai
PAGE 303
19BMA03 BIOSENSORS AND ITS APPLICATIONS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To gain knowledge of fundamentals and significance of biosensors.
• To learn the applications of biosensor technology in medical field.
• To be trained to utilize the principles of nanotechnology in biosensing technology
Course Outcome:
• Understand the insights of the basics of bio sensing technology.
• Explain the different surface modification process in the immobilization techniques.
• Classify biosensors based on transducer and design accordingly.
• Explain the various applications of biosensors.
• Explain the uses of different types of nanomaterials used in biosensors.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO BIOSENSORS 9
Definitions, biological inspiration, types of sensors, target analytes, various recognition, Recognition event: Catalytic,
Single and multiple enzyme, Bio Affinity: Labeled and Label free, whole cell sensing – bacteria, yeast, mammalian
cell, Generation of Biosensor; Biomolecule Immobilization Techniques, Enzyme Kinetics.
Unit II MODIFICATION OF SENSOR SURFACES AND IMMOBILIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
Covalent modification and activation of surfaces using surface chemistry covalent coupling, Covalent attachment of
biomolecules on electronic transducer surfaces using homo and hetero bi-functional crosslinkers, corbodiimide
mediated chemical coupling, polymerization using soluble (acrylic/glycol) pre-polymers, Self Assembled Monolayers
(SAM) and adsorption phenomenon, Other ways to immobilize biological macromolecules includes, entrapment,
encapsulation, and cross-linking on various solid surfaces
Unit III BASIC DESIGN AND TRANSDUCER 9
Various types of transducers; principles and applications - Calorimetric, Optical, Potentiometric / Amperometric,
Conductometric / Resistometric, Piezoelectric, Semiconductor, Impedimetric, Chemiluminiscene - based Biosensors.
Unit IV APPLICATION AND USES OF BIOSENSORS 9
Biosensors in clinical chemistry, medicine and health care, biosensors for veterinary, agriculture and food Low cost -
biosensor for industrial processes for online monitoring; biosensors for environmental monitoring. Application of
enzymes in analysis; design of enzyme electrodes and their application as biosensors in industry, healthcare, food
and environment.
Unit V APPLICATIONS OF NANOMATERIALS IN BIOSENSORS 9
Nano Materials in biosensors; Carbon based Nano Material, Metal oxide and nano particle, Quantum dots, Role of
nano material in Signal Amplifications, Detection and Transducer Fabrication
Text Book:
1. Jeong-Yeol Yoon, “Introduction to Biosensors”, Springer, 2nd Edition, 2016.
2. Mohammed Zourob, “Recognition Receptors in Biosensors”, Springer, 1st Edition, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. Graham Ramsay, “Commercial Biosensors”, John Wiley, 1st edition 1998.
2. Tran Minh Canh, “Sensor Physics & Technology – Biosensors”, Champan &Hall, 1st Edition, 1993.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.edx.org/course/principles-of-electronic-biosensors
• https://www.news-medical.net/health/Biosensor-Applications.aspx
• https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_ph13/preview
• https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc16/SEM2/noc16-bt06/
PAGE 304
19BMA04 INTRODUCTION TO BIOMEDICAL DEVICES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the function of different sensors and bio-potential electrodes.
• To describe the different Cardiac function measuring devices.
• To describe the respiratory, electrosurgical and clinical lab devices
Course Outcome:
• Understand the functions of different biomedical sensors
• Explain the functions of different bio-potential electrodes.
• Explain the cardiac function measurement devices and its functions
• Describe the frequency domain specifications of the different systems.
• Explain the concept and model of physiological control systems.
Introduction to biomedical sensors, physical sensors- linear and Angular displacement sensors, Measurement of
Fluid Dynamic Variables, Force Measurement, Velocity Measurement, Accelerometers, temperature measurement,
Biomedical Applications of Physical Sensors.
Unit II BIOPOTENTIAL ELECTRODES 9
Sensing Bioelectric Signals, Electrical Characteristics, Body-Surface Bio potential Electrodes, Metal Electrode,
Electrodes for Chronic Patient Monitoring, Intra-cavitary and Intra-tissue Electrodes, Transparent Electrodes,
Microelectrodes, Biomedical Applications
Unit III CARDIAC FUNCTIONS MEASUREMENT DEVICES 9
Introduction Indicator–Dilution Method, Fick Method, Ejection Fraction, External Defibrillators, Mechanism of
Fibrillation and Defibrillation, Clinical Defibrillators ,Electrodes Synchronization, Defibrillator, Implantable
Defibrillators, Implantable Cardiac Pacemakers
Unit IV RESPIRATORY AND ELECTROSURGICAL DEVICES 9
Lung Volume, Pulmonary Function Tests, Physiological Dead Space, Positive-Pressure Ventilators, Ventilation
Modes, Theory of Operation of ES unit, Monopolar Mode, Dispersive Electrodes, Bipolar Mode, ESU Hazards .
Unit V CLINICAL LAB EQUIPMENTS 9
Introduction to Separation Methods, Chromatographic Separations, Gas Chromatography, High-Performance Liquid
Chromatography, Basis for Spectral Methods, Fluorometry, Flame Photometry, Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy,
Turbidimetry and Nephelometry, Nonspectral Methods and Automation, Particle Counting and Identification,
Electrochemical Methods, Ion-Specific Electrodes, Radioactive Methods, Coagulation Timers, Osmometers
Text Book:
1. Joseph D Bronzonio and Donald R Peterson, "Medical Devices and Human Engineering”, CRC press,Taylor and
Francis group,4th edition.
2. R S Khandpur, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1994.
Reference Book:
1. L A Geddes,L A Baker, "Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation”, Wiley India edition,3rd edition.
2. Joseph J. Carr and John M Brown, "Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”, Pearson; 4th edition,
2000.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.coursera.org/learn/bioengineering
PAGE 305
19BTA05 CHEMICALS IN ENVIRONMENT AND PUBLIC HEALTH L T P C

Course Objective:
• Define the major sources and types of environmental agents and discuss the transport and fate of these agents
in the environment.
• Identify the carriers or vectors that promote the transfer of these agents from the environment to the human.
• To understand the procedures and requirement for hazardous waste management and gain the knowledge on
the policies, legislations.
Course Outcome:
• Learn the relationship between environment and human health
• Discuss the impact of hazardous waste on environment and human health
• Explain the impact of biomedical waste, radioactive waste and nuclear waste
• Learn about different risk assessment methods and their use in environmental health studies
• Acquire the knowledge about the Environmental Management Policies and Practices
Unit I ENVIRONMENT AND HEALTH 9
Human impact on the environment, Environment-human interaction, Environmental impact on humans, Indoor and
outdoor air, water & soil pollution, Exposure, dose, response, Food- and water-borne disease.
Unit II IMPACT OF INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS AND HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Non Hazardous wastes, Hazardous wastes: Metals, chemical, drugs, lather, pulp, electroplating, dye, rubber;
Hazardous wastes on environment and human heath: case studies (chemical accumulation in plants: Cadmium in
rice, Hexachlorobenzene in seed grains; Carbamate pesticide in watermelons, Lead in paint), food adulterants and
their impact on human health.
Unit III IMPACT OF BIOMEDICAL WASTES 9
Characteristics & sources, BMW – Segregation, collection, transportation, disposal, Liquid BMW, Radioactive waste,
Metals / Chemicals / Drug waste, Modern technology for handling BMW Monitoring & controlling of cross infection,
Health and Environmental effect: case studies.
Unit IV IMPACT OF NUCLEAR WASTES 9
Sources, Types of Nuclear waste, nuclear power plants and fuel production; waste generation from nuclear power
plants; disposal options, Defining risk and environmental risk; methods of risk assessment; measures and health
effects: case studies.
Unit V ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT POLICIES AND PRACTICES 9
Environment and pollution - definition as per Environmental law, General powers of Central and state Government
under EPA, Important Notification in EPA 1986, Constitution of Pollution Control Boards - Powers, functions,
Accounts, Audit etc. Equitable remedies for pollution control. Solid waste management–Hazardous Wastes
(Handling and Management) Rules 1998, Biomedical Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998.
Text Book:
1. Joseph V. Rodricks, “Calculated Risks- The Toxicity and Human Health Risks of Chemicals in Our Environment”,
Cambridge University press, 2nd Edition, 2007.
2. Lippmann, M. (Ed.), “Environmental toxicants: Human exposures and their health effects”, John Wiley & Sons,
2008.
Reference Book:
1. Philp, R. B. (1995). “Environmental hazards and human health”, Boca Raton: Lewis Publishers, 1995.
2. Eckenfelder,W.W. Jr., “Industrial Water Pollution Control”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 3rd edition,
2000.
3. Michel, Mckinney, Robert and Logan, “Environmental Science – Systems & Solutions”, Jones & Barlett
Publishers, Canada, 4th revised edition, 2007.
PAGE 306
19BTA06 BIOLOGICAL WASTE MANAGEMENT L T P C

Offered by BT (Allied Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Hazardous wastes and its effects.
• Classification and Risks associated with bio hazardous wastes.
• Regulatory and policy aspects of health care wastes.
• Disposal of biological wastes.
• Safe handling and management of biological wastes.
Course Outcome:
• Upon completion of the course students will be able
• To explain about hazardous wastes, its origin and effects on public health.
• To impart knowledge about sources of biohazardous wastes and risks associated with it.
• To know the Legislative, Regulatory and Policy Aspects Of Health-Care Waste
• To apply the methods for treatment and safe disposal of wastes.
• To study the concepts of waste minimization, reducing and recycling.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Hazardous waste - Classifications of hazardous waste and its sources - Effects on public health and environment.
Unit II BIO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9
Biological, biomedical and healthcare wastes – Sources - Bio hazardous wastes classification - Risks associated with
bio hazardous waste - Need for control.
Unit III LEGISLATIVE, REGULATORY AND POLICY ASPECTS OF HEALTH-CARE WASTE 9
National policies and its five guiding principles - Available guidance – World health organization (WHO), The
International Solid Waste Association (ISWA) and its policy document.
Unit IV BIOLOGICAL WASTE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL 9
Segregation, storage and transport of healthcare and biological wastes - Treatment and disposal method healthcare
waste - Disposal of biological and sharp wastes - Health and safety practices for health-care personnel and waste
workers.
Unit V MANAGEMENT OF BIO HAZARDOUS WASTES 9
Healthcare waste-management planning - Infectious waste management plans - Healthcare waste minimization,
reuse and recycling.
Text Book:
1. Blackman W. C., “Basic Hazardous Waste Management”, CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2001.
2. Henry J. G., Heinke G. W., “Environmental Science and Engineering”, Prentice Hall India Learning Private
Limited, 2nd Edition, 2004.
3. Cheremisinoff, N. P., Cheremisinoff P. N., “Hazardous Materials and Waste Management: A Guide for the
Professional Hazards Manager”, Noyes Publications, 1995.
Reference Book:
1. Panda H., “The Complete Book on Biological Waste Treatment and their Utilization”, NIIR Project Consultancy
Services, 2013.
Extensive Reading:
• Safe Management of Wastes from Health-Care Activities, 2nd Ed., WHO, 2014.
• Biomedical waste (Management and Handling) Rules, Ministry of Environment & Forests, 1998.
PAGE 307
19BTA07 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY L T P C
Course Objective:
• To provide the knowledge in basics of nanobiotechnology.
• To learn the application of nanomaterials in biotechnology and acquire the knowledge about the DNA, proteins,
amino acids, drug delivery, biomedicine etc.,
• To make the students understand about the functional principles of bionanotechnology
Course Outcome:
• Learn physicochemical properties of nanomaterials and the unique changes that happen at nanoscale.
• Know the properties and measurements of nanomaterials.
• Learn the DNA based nanostructures.
• Learn the protein based nanostructures.
• Know the application of nanomaterials to biological problems including nanomedicine.
Unit I NANOSCALE AND NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY 9
Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology; Milestones in Nanotechnology; Overview of Nanobiotechnology
and Nanoscale processes; Lessons from Nature on making nanodevices.
Unit II PROPERTIES AND MEASUREMENT OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Optical Properties: Absorption, Fluorescence, and Resonance; Methods for the measurement of nanomaterials;
Microscopy measurements: SEM, TEM, AFM and STM. Confocal and TIRF imaging.
Unit III DNA BASED NANOSTRUCTURES 9
DNA based nanostructures –Topographic and Electrostatic properties of DNA and proteins –Hybrid conjugates of
gold nanoparticles –DNA oligomers –Use of DNA molecules in nanomechanics and Computing.
Unit IV PROTEIN BASED NANOSTRUCTURES 9
Protein based nanostructures building blocks and templates – Proteins as transducers and amplifiers of
biomolecular recognition events –Nanobioelectronic devices and polymer nanocontainers –Microbial production of
inorganic nanoparticles –Magnetosomes.
Unit V APPLICATIONS 9
Nanoparticles as carrier for genetic material – Nanomedicine, Drug delivery, DNA computing, Molecular design
using biological selection, Harnessing molecular motors, Artificial life, Hybrid materials, Biosensors, Future of
Bionanotechnology.
Reference Book:
1. Christof M. Niemeyer (Editor), Chad A. Mirkin (Editor) “Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and
Perspectives”, Wiley VCH; 1 Edition , 2004.
2. Oded Shoseyov and Ilan Levy “NanoBioTechnology: BioInspired Devices and Materials of the Future”, Humana
Press; 1 Edition 2007.
3. Sandra J Rosenthal and David W. Wright, “NanoBiotechnology Protocols (Methods in Molecular Biology)”,
Humana Press; 1 Edition, 2005.
4. Clarke. A.R. and Eberhardt C. N. (Editors), “Microscopy Techniques for Material Science”, CRC Press. 1st Edition,
2002.
5. David S.G., “Bionanotechnoology: lessons from nature”, John Wiley & Sons, 1st edition, 2004
PAGE 308
19BTA08 INTRODUCTION TO BIOINFORMATICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• building blocks of biological molecules  
• use of computers and operating systems in studying biological databases
• features of understanding sequence analysis
• alignment of sequences for comparison through various algorithms  
• concepts and algorithms in phylogenetic analysis.
Course Outcome:
• interpret the biomolecules in mathematical expressions.
• use computers to analyse biological databases
• decode the methodology of sequence analysis
• perform different types of sequence alignments
• analyse methods to be used for phylogenetic tree generation.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGICAL MACROMOLECULES
Mathematical and Computational Approach in understanding following basic concepts of molecular biology: nucleic
acids, proteins – Central Dogma of Molecular Biology – Replication – Transcription – Translation – Protein Structural
hierarchy – 3 dimensional visualization of protein.
Unit II COMPUTERS AND DATABASES
Introduction to Operating systems, Linux commands, File transfer protocols ftp and telnet, interfacing Computers
and Biology - Data file formats, Data life cycle, Database management system models, Biological sequences and
structure databases.
Unit III SEQUENCE ANALYSIS
DNA and Protein Sequence, Sequence Analysis - substitution matrices, string similarity, Dynamic programming
algorithms for computing edit distance, Pairwise alignment, Multiple sequence alignment, Generating motifs and
profiles
Unit IV SEQUENCE ANALYSIS ALGORITHMS
Local and Global alignment, Needleman-Wunsch algorithm, Smith-Waterman algorithm. Tools: BLAST, ClustalX
Unit V PHYLOGENETIC ANALYSIS ALGORITHMS
Introduction to phylogenetics, Distance based trees UPGMA trees, Molecular clock theory, Ultrametric trees,
Parsimonious trees, Neighbour joining trees, trees based on morphological traits, Bootstrapping.
Text Book:
1. Neil J. Jones (Author), Pavel A. Pevzner Introduction to Bioinformatics Algorithms, ANE Books; 1st Edition, 2009
2. David W. M., “Bioinformatics Sequence and Genome Analysis”, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2nd
Edition, 2008.
3. Pavel A Pevzner, “Computational Molecular Biology: An Algorithmic Approach”, Prentice Hall India Learning
Private Limited; 2nd Edition, 2004.
Reference Book:
1. Durbin R., Eddy S. R., Krogh A., Mitchinson A., “Biological Sequence Analysis Probabilistic Models of proteins
and nucleic acids”, Cambridge University Press, 7th Reprint, 2003.
Extensive Reading:
• http://web.stanford.edu/class/cs173/papers/bioprimer.pdf
PAGE 309
19CEA06 ENVIRONMENTAL GEOTECHNOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Physics and chemistry of soil.
• Inorganic and organic geochemistry.
• Contaminant fate and transport in soil.
• Soil remediation technologies.
• Principles behind site selection and methods of disposal.
Course Outcome:
• Classify the soil based on Index properties and exchange capacity.
• Analyse the inorganic and organic geochemistry and Distribution of metals in soils.
• Identify the contaminant fate and transport in soil.
• Apply the soil remediation technologies available in the affected soil.
• Procure idea in site selection and disposal methods.
Unit I PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY OF SOIL 9
Soil formation - Composition - Mass volume relationship - Index properties and soil classification - Hydraulic and
consolidation characteristics - Chemical properties - Soil pH - Surface charge and point of zero charge - Anion and
Cation exchange capacity of clays - Specific surface area - Bonding in clays - Soil pollution - Factors governing soil -
Pollutant interaction.
Unit II INORGANIC AND ORGANIC GEOCHEMISTRY 9
Inorganic Chemistry - Metal contamination - Distribution of metals in soils - Geochemical processes controlling the
distribution of the metals in soils - Chemical analysis of metal in soil - Organic geochemistry - Organic contamination
- Distribution of NAPLs in soils - Process controlling the distribution of NAPLs in soil - Chemical analysis of NAPLs in
soils.
Unit III CONTAMINANT FATE AND TRANSPORT IN SOIL 9
Transport processes - Advection - Diffusion - Dispersion - Chemical mass transfer processes - Sorption and
desorption - Precipitation and dissolution - Oxidation and reduction - Acid base reaction - Complexation - Ion
exchange - Volatilization - Hydrolysis - Biological process - Microbial transformation of heavy metals.
Unit IV SOIL REMEDIATION TECHNOLOGIES 9
Contaminated site characterization - Containment - Soil vapour extraction - Soil washing - Solidification and
stabilization - Electro-kinetic remediation - Thermal desorption - Vitrification - In-situ and Ex-situ Bioremediation -
Phytoremediation - Soil fracturing - Bio stimulation - Bio augmentation - Chemical oxidation and reduction.
Unit V SITE SELECTION AND METHODS OF DISPOSAL 9
Criteria for sites for waste disposal facilities - Current practices for waste disposal - Sub surface techniques - Passive
contaminant system - Leachate contamination - Application of geo-membranes - Rigid and flexible membrane liners.
Text Book:
1. Hilary I. Inyang Lakshmi Reddi ,“ Geoenvironmental Engineering: Principles and Applications”, CRC Press 2018.
2. Hari D. Sharama and Krishna R.Reddy, “Geo-Environmental Engineering: Site Remediation, Water
Contamination and Emerging Water Management Technologies”, John Wiley & Sons Limited, 2004.
Reference Book:
1. Paul Nathanail C. and Paul Bardos R., “Reclamation of contaminated Land”, John Wiley & Sons Limited, 2004.
2. Marcel Vander Perk, “Soil and Water contamination from Molecular to catchment Scale”, Taylor & Franncis,
2006.
Extensive Reading:
• William J. Deutsch, “Groundwater Geochemistry: Fundamentals and Applications to Contamination”, Lewis
Publishers, 1997.
PAGE 310
19CEA07 FUNDAMENTALS OF SMART CITY PLANNING L T P C

Course Objective:
• The fundamentals of smart city planning.
• The policies related to smart city planning.
• The various types of urban smart city patterns.
• The planning of smart infrastructure facilities.
• The development control and management of smart cities.
Course Outcome:
• Plan for urban infrastructure and other developments in a smart city.
• Design the facilities in a smart city using the knowledge of planning policies.
• Apply strategies for design of the components of the smart city.
• Plan and manage the infrastructure facilities of a smart city.
• Evolve the required policies for controlling the smart city development.
Unit I SMART URBAN INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Urbanization - Urbanization trends in 20th century & growth of cities land uses - Conceptual foundations of
sustainability in city planning - Smart city - Definition, conceptual approaches to smart cities - Energy efficiency,
renewable energy and sustainable urbanism.
Unit II SMART CITY PLANNING PROCESSES 9
Planning policies - Theories - Standards of planning facilities for the city - Social issues in planning - Various
development plans - Various development plans - Master plan - Role of external funding in planning of cities -
Dimensions of smart cities - Global experience of smart cities.
Unit III STRATEGIES FOR SMART CITY DESIGN 9
Urban growth - Urban sprawl - Urban renewal and community development - Urban design - Types of cities -
Sustainable Design of cities - Smart cities - Global standards and performance benchmarks - Case studies of smart
cities - Chandigarh and Pondicherry - Strategies for smart growth.
Unit IV INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING 9
Need and importance of infrastructure planning - 100 smart cities policy and mission implemented in India -
Internet of things and smart infrastructure - Housing - Intelligent and sustainable mobility planning - Smart city
sensors - Smart parking development - Projects of infrastructures and services in the smart cities - Financing smart
cities - Case studies of Chennai & Delhi cities.
Unit V DEVELOPMENT AND MANAGEMENT OF SMART CITIES 9
Sustainable development - Environmental and energy planning - Conservation - Development control regulations -
Bye laws in planning - Natural hazards & disasters - Smart city networks - Security at the smart city - Governance of
smart cities - Case studies of Chennai city & Delhi city development.
Text Book:
1. Amitabh Satyam & Igor Calzada “The Smart City Transformations: The Revolution of The 21st Century”,
Bloomsbury, New delhi.2017.
2. McClellan, Stan, Jimenez, Jesus, Koutitas, George (Eds.), “ Smart Cities-Applications, Technologies Standards,
and Driving Factors”, Springer International Publishing 2018.
Reference Book:
1. Carol L. Stimmel, “Building Smart Cities: Analytics, ICT, and Design Thinking”, Auerbach Publications; 1 edition
(August 13, 2015.
2. Houbing Song, Ravi Srinivasan,Tamim Sookoo,Sabina Jeschke , “Smart Cities: Foundations, Principles, and
Applications”, Wiley Publications; 1 edition,2017.
3. Ingram, G., A. Carbonell, Y. Hong and A. Flint. “Urban Development Patterns and Smart Growth Policies”,
Cambridge, MA, 2009.
Extensive Reading:
• Smart Cities Mission - http://smartcities.gov.in/content/
• Chennai Smart City - https://cscl.co.in/
• Building a Smart India - https://www.india.gov.in/spotlight/smart-cities-mission-step-towards-smart-india.
PAGE 311
19CEA08 HYDROPOWER ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• basic aspects of hydropower.
• various types of hydropower plants.
• design of various elements of power.
• site selection for construction of dams.
• financial implications of hydropower plants.
Course Outcome:
• Analyse and estimate hydropower potential.
• Select a suitable type of hydropower required for the site.
• Design a power canal based on power requirement.
• Select a suitable type of Dam.
• Analyse the economic aspects of hydropower plants.
Development of Water Power - Estimation of Hydropower potential - Comparison of hydro, Thermal and Nuclear
power - Sources of energy - Status of hydropower - Advantages of hydropower - Place of hydropower in power
system - Analysis of stream flow and demand - Flow duration curve - firm power, Secondary power - Load and Load
duration curves - Load factor, etc.,
Unit II TYPES OF HYDRO POWER PLANTS 9
Basic features of Hydropower plants - Classification of hydro power plants - Run-of-river plants - General lay out of
run of river plants - Valley dam plants - Storage and pondage - Examples - High head diversion plants - Diversion
Canal Plants - Pumped storage plants - Tidal power plants.
Unit III WATER CONVEYANCE SYSTEM 9
Power Canals - Alignment, Design of Power canals - Flumes - Covered conduits and Tunnels - Penstocks - Alignment,
types of penstocks - Design criteria of penstocks - Economic Diameter of penstocks - Water hammer - Anchor blocks
- Surge tanks- Types - Surge analysis - Types of valves.
Unit IV DAMS & SPILLWAYS 9
Selection of site - Preliminary Investigations - Final Investigations - Types of Dams - Rigid Dams - Gravity dams - Arch
and buttress dams - Basic principles of design and details of construction - Earthen dams, Design considerations -
Spillways - Types - Spillway gates, Design of stilling basins.
Unit V POWER HOUSE DETAILS 9
Fore bay - Intakes - General layout of power house and arrangement of hydropower units - Underground Power
stations - Advantages - Ventilations - Transmission systems - Financial implications of Hydro Power plants.
Text Book:
1. Dandekar and Sharma, “Water power Engineering", Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2013.
2. Madanmohan das, Mimi Das sakia, “Irrigation And Water Power Engineering”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
Reference Book:
1. R S Varshney, “Hydropower structures “, Volume III, Jain book depot, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Dr. Darde P N, “Treatise on Hydropower Engineering edition” JBC Press 2012.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.gomezandsullivan.com/service/engineering
• https://www.pietrangeli.com/hydropower/engineering
• https://www.stantec.com/uk/services/dams-hydropower-engineering-services
PAGE 312
19CEA09 RESOURCES AND ENERGY RECOVERY FROM WASTE L T P C

Course Objective:
• The toxic materials which pollute the environment and underground water.
• The different biological conventional methods to process the waste.
• Different treatments for converting waste to energy.
• Recycling of the usable materials recovered from solid waste with its socio-economic and legal considerations.
• Application of recovery process of the recyclable materials and energy recovery by various transformation
processes from the solid waste.
Course Outcome:
• Deal with recovery of resources and energy from the waste for sustainable development.
• Develop biological process for transformation of solid waste to useful by-products.
• Develop Bio-chemical process for transformation of solid waste to useful by-products.
• Develop Thermo-chemical process for transformation of solid waste to useful by-products.
• Analyze the recycling and recovery concepts of various solid wastes and e-waste.
Unit I MECHANICAL PROCESSING FOR MATERIAL RECYCLING 9
Resource recovery for a sustainable development - Material and energy flow management and analysis - Systems
and processes for reduction, reuse and recycling - Source Segregation and Hand Sorting-Waste Storage and
Conveyance - Shredding - Pulping - Size Separation by Screens - Density Separation by Air Classification - Magnetic
and electromechanical separation processes.
Unit II BIOLOGICAL PROCESSING FOR RESOURCE RECOVERY 9
Mechanisms of Biological Processing - Aerobic Processing of Organic fraction - Composting methods and processes -
factors affecting - Design of Windrow Composting Systems - In Vessel Composting - Compost Quality Control -
Vermiculture: definition, scope and importance - Common species for culture - Culture methods - Applications of
vermiculture.
Unit III BIO-CHEMICAL CONVERSION OF WASTE TO ENERGY 9
Principles and Design of Anaerobic Digesters - Process characterization and control - The biochemistry and
microbiology of anaerobic treatment - Toxic substances in anaerobic treatment - Methane generation by Anaerobic
Digestion - Single stage and multistage digesters - Gas collection systems-Methane Generation and Recovery in
Landfills - Biofuels from Biomass.
Unit IV THERMO-CHEMICAL CONVERSION OF WASTE TO ENERGY 9
Incinerator - Mass Burn and RDF Systems- Composition and calorific value of fuels and waste, Determination of the
stoichiometric air consumption, removal of bottom ash, heat recovery - Emission Controls - Flue gas cleaning, de-
dusting, flue gas scrubbers, DeNOx processes, dioxins and furans - Alternative thermal processes: co-incineration,
pyrolysis and gasification - Process characterization and control - Waste heat recovery- Planning and construction of
incineration plants.
Recycling technologies for paper, glass, metal and plastic - Used Lead Acid Battery Recycling - End of Life Vehicle
Recycling - Electronic Waste Recycling - Waste Oil Recycling.
Text Book:
1. Resource recovery from waste : Business models for energy, nutrient and water reuse in low & middle-income
countries, Routledge 2018.
2. Operation of water resource recovery Facilities , Manual Practice No 11 seventh edition McGraw-Hill Education
, 2016.
Reference Book:
1. Saeid Mokhatab “Handbook of Liquefied Natural Gas”, Gulf Professional Publishing 2016.
2. Chiumenti, Chiumenti, Diaz, Savage, Eggerth, and Goldstein , Modern Composting Technologies , JG Press
October 2005.
3. Gary C. Young, "Municipal Solid Waste to Energy Conversion Processes: Economic, Technical, and Renewable
Comparisons", John Wiley & Sons, 2010.
4. Manser A G R, Keeling A A, "Practical handbook of processing and recycling on municipal waste", Pub CRC
Lewis London, 1996.
PAGE 313
19CEA10 ROAD AND RAIL TRANSPORT L T P C

Course Objective:
• The various aspects of planning and design of Road Transportation Systems.
• The importance of maintenance operation and safety systems.
• The various aspects of planning and design of Rail Transportation Systems.
• The rail sections, its properties and to plan for the maintenance operation.
• The various components in development of rail infrastructure.
Course Outcome:
• Design and prepare detailed Road transport project report.
• Plan for safety measures, signal implementation and carry over the maintenance operation in road transport
system.
• Prepare detailed Rail transport project report.
• Plan the maintenance operation in rail transport system.
• Prepare layout of railway station for effective transit with needed infrastructure.
Unit I ROAD TRANSPORT 9
Road Transport - Role of Roads in India’s Economy - Road Development Plan - Highway Administration and Finance -
Long Term Highway and Transport Planning - Surveys - Design, Drawings, Estimates and Project Report - Tenders,
Contracts and Specifications.
Unit II ROADS MAINTANENECE & SAFETY 9
Highway Maintenance - Need for Maintenance - Maintenance of Roads - Maintenance of Surfaces - Maintenance of
Shoulders - Maintenance of Bridges and Culverts - Hill Road Maintenance - Maintenance Practice in India -
Maintenance Management System - Highway Safety - Road Accidents and Highway Design - Road Signs - Road
Markings - Traffic Signals - Road Making Machinery - Role of Labours in Road Construction.
Unit III RAIL TRANSPORT 9
Rail Transport - Basics - Future of Railways - Indian Railways - Railway Surveys - New Railway Lines - Factors
Influencing - Categories - Project Report and Drawing - Construction of New Lines - Train Resistances - Rolling Stock -
Locomotives - Coaches - Wagons - Train Brakes - Rail Gauges.
Unit IV RAIL MAINTANENCE 9
Rails - Basic Requirements - Functions - Types - Weight and Section of Rails - Length of Rail - Welding and Wear of
Rails - Renewal and Failure of Rails - Maintenance - Necessity for Track Maintenance - Maintenance of Track,
Railway Bridges and Rolling Stock - Accidents - Signalling during Maintenance - Tools Required during Maintenance.
Unit V RAIL INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Stations - Definition, Purpose and site selection - Platforms and Yard - Definition and Types - Level Crossing - Station
Machinery - Signalling - Objectives and Types - Typical Layout - Control of Movements of Trains -
Telecommunication - Materials Management.
Text Book:
1. Dr. L.R. Kadyali, Dr. N.B. Lal, “Principles and Practices of Highway Engineering”, 7th Edition, Khanna Publishers,
2013.
2. Rangwala, “Railway Engineering”, 20th Edition, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2017.
Reference Book:
1. C. Jotin Khistya and B. Kent Lall, “Transportation Engineering”, by Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, 2006.
2. C A O’Flaherty, “Transport Planning and Traffic Engineering”, Butterworth Heinemann, Elsevier, Burlington, MA,
2006.
3. Subramanian K.P., “Highways, Railways, Airport and Harbour Engineering”, Scitech Publications (India),
Chennai, 2010.
Extensive Reading:
• Transportation Engineering I - https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105/101/105101087/
• Transportation Engineering II - https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105/107/105107123/
PAGE 314
19CSA05 FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn the basics and challenges of Cloud Computing
• To introduce the virtualization concepts and cloud file system
• To get an exposure on third-party cloud solutions
• To understand the cloud security and efficiency issues
• To explore the possibilities of applying cloud solutions in various applications
Course Outcome:
• Identify the challenges in Cloud Computing adoption
• Implement virtualization and work with cloud file system
• Identify the various cloud-based solutions available with different providers
• Secure and optimize the cloud for delivering better performance
• Identify and provide cloud-based solution for the problem under consideration
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING 9
Overview of Distributed computing - Introduction to Cloud Computing: Definitions - Central idea - Properties and
Characteristics - Benefits - Cloud service and deployment model - Organizational scenario - Architecture -
Vocabulary - Challenges
Unit II VIRTUALIZATION AND FILE SYSTEM 9
Virtualization Techniques: Virtualization Technology - Overview of x86 virtualization - Types of virtualization -
Virtualization products - VLAN - SAN - VM Migration - VM Consolidation and Management - Cloud interoperability
standards
Cloud File System: Distributed file system - GFS - HDFS
Unit III CLOUD SOLUTIONS 9
Different Cloud Providers and service comparison: Infrastructure service providers - Identification of business
requirement - Cloud infrastructure setup procedure - Platform service provide - Identification of business
requirement - Cloud platform setup procedure - Cloud application development - Software service providers -
Cloud Database - Cloud programming model - Private cloud computing platforms-Eucalyptus-Open Nebula
Unit IV CLOUD SECURITY - MIDDLEWARE AND TESTING 9
Cloud Security: Fundamentals - Cloud Risk - Division - Security Architecture - VM Security Challenges - Vulnerability
assessment tool for cloud - Open source security solution products
Cloud Middleware: Need for Cloud Middleware - QoS issues in cloud - Data migration and Streaming - Performance
monitoring tools in cloud - Cloud Testing: Types - Testing strategy
Unit V CLOUD APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES 9
Advanced Cloud Applications - Sharing and Collaborative services in cloud - Outside the cloud services - Cloud
Analytics - Software plus services - Cloud Content Delivery Network services (CDN) - Mobile cloud computing - Sky
computing - Cloud governance
Case Study: Cloud infrastructure adoption case study - Cloud platform adoption case study - Future of cloud
computing
Advanced Cloud Applications - Sharing and Collaborative services in cloud - Outside the cloud services - Cloud
Analytics - Software plus services - Cloud Content Delivery Network services (CDN) - Mobile cloud computing - Sky
computing - Cloud governance
Case Study: Cloud infrastructure adoption case study - Cloud platform adoption case study - Future of cloud
computing
Text Book:
1. Rishabh Sharma, ”Cloud Computing Fundamentals, Industry Approach and Trends”, Wiley India, 2015.
2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox, Jack G Dongarra, “Distributed and Cloud Computing From Parallel Processing to the
Internet of Things”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012
Reference Book:
1. Ronald L. Krutz, Russell Dean Vineqs, “Cloud Security – A comprehensive Guide to Secure Cloud Computing”,
Wiley – India, 2010.
2. John W.Rittinghouse and James F.Ransome, “Cloud Computing: Implementation, Management, and Security”,
CRC Press, 2010.
3. George Reese, “Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and Infrastructure in the Cloud” O'Reilly
Extensive Reading:
PAGE 315
• http://whatiscloud.com/basic_concepts_and_terminology/cloud
• http://www.vmware.com/in/virtualization/overview
• http://www.csoonline.com/article/2125258/cloud-security/cloud-security--the-basics.html
• http://thecloudtutorial.com/cloudvendors.html
• http://thecloudtutorial.com/freecloudcomputingapplications.html
PAGE 316
19CSA06 INTRODUCTION TO IOT L T P C

Offered by CSE (Allied Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BEE, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To introduce the physical, logical design and components of IoT
• To outline the global context of M2M and IoT
• To provide an overview of IoT architecture
• To learn to program Arduino microcontroller for IoT
• To cover real-world implementation examples of IoT.
Course Outcome:
• Identify the components of IoT devices and communication technologies
• Discriminate between M2M and IoT technologies
• Realize the significance of various IoT architectures
• Develop portable IoT applications using appropriate microcontroller
• Develop IoT applications for real-world situations
Definition and characteristics of IoT - Physical and logical design of IoT - IoT enabling technologies - IoT levels &
deployment templates - IoT design methodology - Components of Internet of Thing devices: Control units – Sensors
– Communication modules – Power sources. Communication technologies: RFID – Bluetooth – ZigBee – Wi-Fi –
RFlinks – Mobile Internet – Wired Communication. Safety – privacy – trust - security model.
Unit II M2M AND IOT 9
Machine-to-Machine (M2M) communication – IoT – M2M towards IoT – Main characteristics of M2M and IoT –
Global value chains – Ecosystem – M2M and IoT value chains – Main design principles and needed capabilities - An
IoT architecture outline - Standardizations around M2M and IoT.
Unit III IOT ARCHITECTURE 9
European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) model – International Telecommunication Union-
Telecommunication (ITU-T) IoT model – Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) IoT model – Open Geospatial
Consortium (OGC) architecture – IoT domain model – IoT information model – IoT functional model – IoT
communication model.
Unit IV IOT PROGRAMMING 9
Basics of sensors and actuators – Examples and working principles of sensors and actuators – Arduino/Equivalent
Microcontroller platform – Programming for IoT – Reading from sensors. Communication: Connecting
microcontroller with Bluetooth and USB – Connection with the Internet using Ethernet.
Unit V IOT APPLICATIONS 9
Asset Management: Introduction - Expected benefits - e-Maintenance in the M2M era - Hazardous goods
management in the M2M era. Industrial automation: Service-oriented architecture-based device integration -
SOCRADES: realizing the enterprise integrated Web of Things - IMC-AESOP: from the Web of Things to the Cloud of
Things. Smart Grid: Smart metering - Smart house - Smart energy city. Smart cities: Need – definition – examples -
Roles, actors, engagement - Transport and logistics-an IoT perspective.
Text Book:
1. Arshdeep Bahga and Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things: A Hands-On Approach”, VPT Publisher, 2014. (for Unit
I)
2. Charalampos Doukas, “Building Internet of Things with the Arduino”, Create space, April 2002. (for Unit I and
IV)
3. Jan HÖller, Vlasios Tsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis Karnouskos, Stefan Avesand and David Boyle, “From
Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things Introduction to a New Age of Intelligence”, Academic
Press, 2014. (for Unit I, II, III and V)
Reference Book:
1. Jean-Philippe Vasseur and Adam Dunkels “Interconnecting Smart Objects with IP: The Next Internet”, Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers, 2010.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.internet-of-things-book.com/
• http://www.theinternetofthings.eu/what-is-the-internet-of-things
• http://postscapes.com/internet-of-things-examples/
• https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/92ea/dd2ccae08b62ce4bccbd87ba46899accda2d.pdf
PAGE 317
19CSA07 XML PROGRAMMING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To structure the XML document using DTD
• To understand XML schema creation
• To work with DOM-based and SAX-based parsers
• To work with different technologies related to XML
• To extract data using XQuery and define vector-based graphics using SVG
Course Outcome:
• Design XML document based on DTD
• Design and Validate XML document using XML Schema
• Process XML document using DOM and SAX parsers
• Locate the XML content and perform translation using XPath and XSLT
• Process data from XML document using XQuery and define graphics in XML format using SVG
Unit I XML MARKUP CREATION AND DTD 9
XML Markup introduction – characters – markup – XML namespaces – Parsers, Well-formed and valid XML
documents - Parsing XML document with MSXML –Document Type Declaration - Element type declarations -
Attribute declarations – Attribute types - Simple DTD creation.
Unit II XML SCHEMA 9
Schema versus DTDs – XML Schema basics – Defining simple types: date and time – number – defining element’s
content – Deriving custom simple types – Deriving named custom types – Specifying range and set of acceptable
values – Limiting length and Specifying pattern for an element – limiting number of digits. Defining Complex types:
deriving anonymous, named complex types – Deriving from existing complex types – Defining elements with child
elements - Defining elements in sequence, any order - Creating a set of choices - Defining elements with only text,
empty elements, mixed content – Defining attributes – Defining named model groups, attribute groups.
Unit III DOM AND SAX PARSERS 9
DOM with JavaScript – DOM components – Traversing the DOM – DOM versus SAX - SAX-based parsers – Events –
Simple SAX program
Unit IV XPATH AND XSLT 9
XPath: Nodes – Location paths – Node-set operators and Functions – XSLT: Templates – Creating elements and
attributes – Iteration and sorting – Conditional processing – Copying nodes - Combining stylesheets – Variables
Unit V XQUERY AND SCALABLE VECTOR GRAPHICS (SVG) 9
XQuery: Building blocks of XQuery: FLWOR expression – examples. SVG and bitmaps - SVG graphics model - SVG
and CSS - SVG tools - SVG basic built-in shapes – SVG transforms and groups.
Text Book:
1. H.M. Deitel, P.J. Deitel, T.R. Nieto, T.M. Lin, and P. Sadhu, “XML How to program”, Pearson Education India,
2009 (Reprint).
2. Joe Fawcett, Danny Ayers, Liam R. E. Quin, “Beginning XML”, Fifth Edition, John Wiley & Sons Publisher, 2012.
3. Kevin Howard Goldberg, “XML”, Second Edition, Peachpit Press, 2010
Reference Book:
1. Heather Williamson, “XML: The Complete Reference”, First Edition,Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2001.
2. Erik T. Ray, “Learning XML”, Second Edition, O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2003.
3. Elliotte Rusty Harold, W. Scott Means, “XML in a Nutshell”, Third Edition, O'Reilly Media Inc., 2009.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.xmlmaster.org/en/article/d01/
• http://www.javatpoint.com/xml-tutorial
• https://www.w3schools.com/xml/schema_intro.asp
• https://www.w3schools.com/graphics/svg_intro.asp
PAGE 318
19CSA08 INTRODUCTION TO UML L T P C

Course Objective:
• To gain basic knowledge in object oriented system.
• To study the use case and domain model.
• To assess the requirement using interaction and activity diagrams.
• To gain knowledge on class and package diagrams to solve real world problems.
• To learn the appropriate usage of state, component and deployment diagrams.
Course Outcome:
• Create use case documents that capture requirements for a software system.
• Create use case and domain model and design model for a software system.
• Create interaction and activity diagram for a software system.
• Apply UML tools to address the real world problems through sequence and package diagrams.
• Create state, component and deployment diagrams to address the real world problems with software solutions.
Introduction to Object Oriented Analysis and Design – Iterative, Evolutionary and Agile – Unified Process Phases –
UP Disciplines – Inception and Use Cases – Artifacts of Inception – Evolutionary Vs. Waterfall Requirements – Types
and Categories of Requirements – UP Artifacts - Case Study: NextGenPOS System and Monopoly Game.
Unit II USE CASES AND DOMAIN MODEL 9
Introduction to UML Diagrams: Use Case Diagrams – Guidelines – Requirements – Actors - Notational Components –
Different Formats - Relating Use Cases: Includes, Extends, Generalize - Domain Model – Conceptual Classes –
Domain Class Diagram – Associations – Attributes – Generalization - Case Study: NextGenPOS System and Monopoly
Game.
Unit III INTERACTION AND ACTIVITY DIAGRAMS 9
System Sequence Diagrams – Notational Components of Sequence Diagrams – Iterative and Evolutionary System
Sequence Diagrams - Relationship between System Sequence Diagrams and Use Cases – Communication diagrams -
Activity Diagrams – Notations - States – Transitions – Case Study: NextGenPOS System and Monopoly Game.
Unit IV CLASS AND PACKAGE DIAGRAMS 9
UML class diagrams – Attributes – Associations - Relationship – Operations – Methods - Aggregation – Composition
– Constraints – Discriminators – Singleton Classes - Inheritance – Abstract classes – Polymorphism - Operation
contracts – UML Package Diagram – Logical Architecture – Design with Layers – Model View Separation Principle -
Case Study: NextGenPOS System and Monopoly Game.
Unit V STATE, COMPONENT AND DEPLOYMENT DIAGRAMS 9
State Machine Diagrams – Notational Components – Composite States – UI Navigation Modeling - Component
Diagrams – Components – Dependencies – Deployment Diagrams – Nodes - Communication Associations - Case
Study: NextGenPOS System and Monopoly Game.
Text Book:
1. Craig Larman, "Applying UML and Patterns: An Introduction to object- oriented Analysis and Design and
iterative development”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2016.
Reference Book:
1. Jason T. Roff, “UML A Beginner’s Guide”, Twelfth Reprint, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012.
2. Mike O’Docherty, “Object-Oriented Analysis & Design: Understanding System Development with UML2.0”, John
Wiley & Sons, 2005.
3. Martin Fowler, “UML Distilled – A Brief Guide to the Standard Object Modeling Language”, Third Edition, 2011.
4. Micheal Blaha, James Rambaugh, “Object-Oriented Modeling and Design with UML”, Second Edition, Prentice
Hall of India Private Limited, 2007.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.uml.org/
• http://www.agilemodeling.com/
• http://www.uml.org/
• http://www.uml-diagrams.org/package-diagrams-examples.html
• http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/uml_interaction_diagram.htm
PAGE 319
19CSA09 INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the principles and approaches of artificial intelligence (AI)
• To explore the processes, systems and principles that make intelligent behavior possible
• To expose the real world applications of AI
Course Outcome:
• Explore the fundamental concepts in Artificial Intelligence
• Work with reasoning and uncertainity
• Apply Searching Techniques for the real world applications
• Design a knowledge based system
• Apply Artificial Intelligence to the current trends
Unit I KNOWLEDGE ACQUISITION AND REPRESENTATION 9
Overview of Artificial Intelligence- Turing's Test- Chinese Room- Objectives of AI- Applications of AI- Symbolic Logic-
Machine Intelligence- Procedures for Knowledge Acquisition- Knowledge Representation- Representation Schemes
Unit II REASONING AND UNCERTAINITY 9
Reasoning- Knowledge Representation and Reasoning System- Domain Modeling- Semantic Nets- Frames Based
System- Bayes Theorem- Bayesian Networks- Fuzzy Logic
Unit III SEARCH TECHNIQUES AND AI TECHNOLOGIES 9
Problem Representation and Schemes- Problem Solving in AI- Blind Search Techniques- Heuristic Search Techniques-
Game Searches- Computer Vision- Natural Language Processing- Speech Recognition
Unit IV EXPERT SYSTEMS AND NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Characteristics of an Expert System- Knowledge Engineering- Inferencing- Tools for Expert Systems- Neural
Networks- Learning Algorithms- Network Architectures
Unit V APPLICATIONS OF ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 9
Case-Based Reasoning- Applications of CBR Systems- Constraint Programming- AI Applications: E-Commerce, E-
Tourism, Industry, Medicine
Text Book:
1. RajendraAkerkar, “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence” 2nd Edition, Prentice-Hall India Pvt. Ltd., 2014
Reference Book:
1. MariuszFlasiński, "Introduction to Artificial Intelligence", Springer,2016
2. Wolfgang Ertel, "Introduction to Artificial Intelligence", Springer, 2017.
3. Eugene Charniak, "Introduction to Artificial Intelligence", Pearson Education, 2016
Extensive Reading:
• https://in.udacity.com/course/intro-to-artificial-intelligence--cs271
• https://hackernoon.com/understanding-understanding-an-intro-to-artificial-intelligence-be76c5ec4d2e
PAGE 320
19ECA05 MOBILE COMMUNICATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• To impart the fundamental concepts of mobile communication systems.
• To understand advanced multiple access techniques.
• To give the student an understanding of digital cellular systems.
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the cellular radio concepts such as frequency reuse, handoff and how interference between mobiles
and base stations affects the capacity of cellular systems.
• Explain the frequency management and handoff process in cellular mobile systems.
• Analyze the performance of various digital modulation and error coding techniques
• Apply the concepts on basic diversity, equalization and spread spectrum techniques in mobile communication.
• Analyze the current and future cellular mobile communication systems (GSM, IS95, WCDMA, etc.).
Unit I CELLULAR MOBILE SYSTEMS 9
Historic perspective and overview of Mobile Communication Systems – A basic cellular system – operation of
cellular systems – overview of generations of cellular systems – concept of frequency reuse – co–channel
interference reduction factor – desired C/I from a normal case in an omni directional antenna system – co–channel
interference and Non–co–channel interference – design of antenna system – antenna parameter and their effects –
diversity receiver –Traffic theory – Erlang B system
Unit II CELL COVERAGE, CELL SITE, FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT AND HANDOFF 9
Cell coverage for signal and traffic – cell site and mobile antennas – frequency management and channel
assignment – Handoff – dropped calls and cell splitting
Unit III MODULATION METHODS AND CODING FOR ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION 9
Digital modulation methods in cellular wireless systems – OFDM – Block Coding – convolution coding and Turbo
coding.
Unit IV SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNIQUES 9
Spread Spectrum Techniques – DSSS – FHSS – Frequency division multiple access (FDMA) – Time–division multiple
access (TDMA) – code division multiple access (CDMA) – CDMA capacity – probability of bit error considerations –
CDMA vs TDMA.
Unit V GENERATION OF WIRELESS SYSTEMS (QUANTITATIVE APPROACH) 9
!G, 2G-GSM, IS–136 (D–AMPS), IS–95 – Third generation wireless systems – GPRS – EDGE – WCDMA – 4G- LTE-5G.
Text Book:
1. William, C. Y. Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006.
2. Mischa Schwartz, “Mobile Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press India, 2005
Reference Book:
1. Jerry D. Gibson, “Mobile Communication Hand Book”, 3rd Edition, CRC press, 2017.
2. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communication Principles and Practice”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education,
2010.
3. Lawrence Harte, “3G Wireless Demystified”, McGraw Hill Publications, 2002.
4. KavehPahlavan and Prashant Krishnamurthy”, Principles of Wireless Networks”, Prentice Hall, 2001.
Extensive Reading:
• http://webmail.aast.edu/~khedr/Courses/Graduate/Wireless%20Communications_F08/Lecture
%20four%20channel%20II.pdf.
• http://staff.neu.edu.tr/~fahri/wireless_chp6.pdf.
PAGE 321
19ECA06 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS FOR INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To introduce embedded systems, its hardware and software.
• To introduce devices and buses used for embedded networking.
• To explain embedded system design concepts.
Course Outcome:
• Realize the components in embedded systems
• Recognize the embedded systems design approaches
• Implement RTOS based embedded system
• Realize the importance of distributed embedded system
• Develop embedded control system applications
Unit I COMPONENTS OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 9
Characteristics – Design Challenges – Performance – Hardware components: CPU Core, Memory, I/O –
Communication Interface – Software Components: Firmware, Operating Systems – Other System Components:
Reset Circuit – Brown–out Protection Circuit – Oscillator Unit – Real Time Clock – Watchdog Timer – Embedded
System Design Process.
Unit II EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9
HardwareDevelopment – Embedded Firmware Design approaches –Components of Embedded Programs – Model of
programs – UML– Development and Debugging–Integration of Hardware and Firmware – Hardware Software Co
Design Issues.
Unit III OPERATING SYSTEMS 9
Operating system basics – Real Time Operating systems – Tasks, Processes and Threads – Multiprocessing and
Multitasking – Task scheduling – Task communication and synchronization.
Unit IV DISTRIBUTED EMBEDDED SYSTEMS IN AUTOMOBILES 9
Network abstractions, CAN bus, I2C bus – Distributed computing in cars and airplanes – Design Example: Engine
control unit,Embedded Airbag System&Navigation System, Automated Parking System.
Unit V EMBEDDED CONTROL APPLICATIONS 9
Reconfigurable Embedded Control Systems, Design Example: Optical Tachometer, Electronic sliding puzzle game,
Laser Light Show and Fuzzy logic based security system.
Text Book:
1. Shibu K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems “, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
2. Marylin wolf, “Computer as Components” Elsevier, 2013,
3. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems”, 2 nd Edition, TMH, 2008
Reference Book:
1. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, “Embedded System Design”, John Wiley,2001
2. Lyla B. Das, “Embedded System”, Pearson, 2013.
3. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real Time Systems”, McGraw Hill International Editions, 1997
4. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education, 2007.
5. Rajib Mall, ”Real–time systems: theory and practice”, Pearson Education, 2007
6. Philip.A.Laplante, “Real Time System Design and Analysis”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
7. Jean J Labrosse, “Embedded Systems Building Blocks”, CMP Books, 2005.
8. Barrett,Embedded Systems: Design and Applications, 2008.
Extensive Reading:
• http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102045/
• https://users.ece.cmu.edu/~koopman/lectures/index.html
PAGE 322
19ECA07 VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the characteristics of CMOS systems
• To discuss about the various steps involved in fabrication
• To study the HDL fundamentals
Course Outcome:
• Analyse the characteristics of FET
• Understand the Fabrication process of IC
• Analyse the characteristics of MOS device Characteristics
• Design combinational and sequential circuits.
• Synthesize the combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog HDL.
Unit I FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR 9
JFETs –Drain and Transfer characteristics–Pinch off voltage and its significance –MOSFET Characteristics –DMOSFET
–E MOSFET.s
Unit II IC FABRICATION 9
IC classification –fundamental of monolithic IC technology –epitaxial growth, masking and etching –diffusion of
impurities. Realisation of monolithic ICs and packaging –Fabrication of diodes –capacitance, resistance and FETs.
Unit III MOS DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS 9
Ideal I–V and C–V characteristics –non ideal I–V effects –DC transfer characteristics –Scaling of Devices
Unit IV DIGITAL LOGIC DESIGN 9
Programmable Logic Devices, Design of Combinational and sequential circuits.
Unit V HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE 9
Verilog HDL fundamentals –Types of Modelling –HDL for Logic Gates –Half Adder –Full Adder –Half / Full Subtractor
–Comparators. - Programming with FPGA boards.
Text Book:
1. Donald A Neaman, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices”, 4th Edition, Tata McGrawHill Inc. 2017
2. D.Roy Choudhary, Sheil B.Jani, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, 4th Edition, New Age international, 2015.
3. N.H.E.Weste et al, “CMOS VLSI Design”,4th Edition, Pearson, 2015
4. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL - A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Pearson, 2003.
Reference Book:
1. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA – based System Design”, Pearson, 2004
2. Mark Gordon Arnold, “Verilog Digital –Computer Design”, Prentice Hall (PTR), 1999.
3. Micheal D.Ciletti, “Modeling, Synthesis and Rapid Prototyping with the Verilog HDL”, Pearson, 1999.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.eolss.net/sample chapters/c05/e6195-04.pdf
• http://web.ewu.edu/groups/technology/Claudio/ee430/Lectures/L1-print.pdf
• http://www.circuitstoday.com/integrated-circuits
• http://www.tutorialspoint.com/vlsi_design/vlsi_design_digital_system.htm
PAGE 323
19ECA08 ROBOTICS AND ITS APPLICATIONS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To acquire essential skills in using Robot anatomy for various operations
• To develop the ability to make use of end effectors, sensors, vision systems, kinematics of Robots
• To develop application in Artificial Intelligence and programming of Robots
Course Outcome:
• Integrate sensors and Robotic vision in Robot system
• Control Robot Actuators and motors
• Analyze using Translational Transformation
• Realize the importance of Artificial Intelligence algorithms
• Implement robotics application using Robot Programming Languages
Unit I SYSTEMS OVERVIEW OF A ROBOT 9
Historical Perspective of Robots – Classification by Co-ordinate system – Basic components of a Robot System –
Sensor Classification – Non Optical and Optical position sensors – Encoders – Velocity, Acceleration, force, Torque,
Proximity, touch and slip sensors – Robotic Vision
Unit II CONTROL OF ACTUATORS IN ROBOT 9
End effectors – Hydraulic and Pneumatic Actuators – Stepper Motors – Brushless DC Motors – Direct drive actuator
– Closed Loop control – effect of friction and gravity – Robot Joint Control – Adaptive control – Servo Amplifiers.
Unit III TRANSFORMATIONS AND KINEMATICS 9
Links and joints – Kinematic Chains – Translational and Rotational Transformations – Co-ordinate reference Framer
– Homogeneous Transformations – Forward solution – Inverse solution – Robot arm dynamics.
Unit IV ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS 10
Introduction to Artificial Intelligence - Problem-Solving: Uninformed Search, Informed Search – Knowledge and
reasoning: First-Order Logic and Inference – Overview of Probabilistic Reasoning – Planning: Planning Languages,
Goal Stack Planning – Rule based Expert Systems – Learning: Decision Trees and Reinforcement Learning.
Unit V ROBOT PROGRAMMING 8
AI and Robotics – Robot Programming – Robot Languages – Programming solution for Pick and Place Robot using
VAL – Design example: Egg Packing System, Mars Rover and Farm Drone.
Text Book:
1. R.D.Klafter, Chemieleskio, T.A.and Negin .M, “Robotics Engineering an Integrated approach”, Prentice Hall,
1989.
2. Parag Kulkarni, Prachi Joshi, “Artificial Intelligence – Building Intelligent Systems”, Prentice Hall India Learning
Private Limited, 2015
Reference Book:
1. Russell, S.J. and Norvig, P., “Artificial intelligence – A modern approach”, 3rd edition, Pearson, 2014.
2. Deepak Khemani, “A First Course in Artificial Intelligence”, McGraw Hill Education, 1st Edition, 2015.
3. Subir Kumar Saha, “Introduction to Robotics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd edition, 2014.
4. K.S.FU, R.C. Gonzalez, and C.S.G.Lee., “Robotics control, Sensing, Vision, and Intelligence”, McGraw-Hill, 1987.
5. G.Bekey, “Autonomous Robots”, MIT Press, 2005.
6. J.J.Craig, “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control”, 4th Edition, Pearson, 2018.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.galileo.org/robotics/
• http://www.learnaboutrobots.com/
• http://www.roboanalyzer.com/
• http://timobrien.tech/projects/mars-rover/
• http://blueye.co.kr/skin/page/farmdrone.html
PAGE 324
19ITA04 GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To explore the basic Primitives and attributes in OpenGL
• To study the geometric objects and transformations
• To Understand the various lighting and shading effects
• To gain a proficiency with openGL by applying Modelling Techniques,curves and surfaces
Course Outcome:
• Apply basic Primitives and Attributes for 2D transformations
• Work with 3D transformations using OpenGL
• Implementing Lighting and shading effects
• Applying various Modelling Techniques
• Applying various Curves and Surfaces for different objects
Unit I GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING 9
Introduction-Sierpinski Gasket-Programming 2D Applications-OpenGL Application Programming Interface-Primitives
and Attributes-Color-Viewing-Control Functions-Gasket program-Polygons and Recursions-3D Gasket-Adding
Interaction-Menus
Unit II GEOMETRIC OBJECTS AND TRANSFORMATIONS 9
Scalars points and Vectors-3D primitives-Coordinate systems and Frames-Frames in Open GL-Modelling a colored
cube-Affine Transformations-Translation,Rotation and scaling-Transformation in homogeneous coordinates-
Transformation matrices in OpenGL-spinning of the cube-Interface to 3D applications-quaternions-classical and
computer viewing-parallel,Perspective Projections with OpenGL-Hidden surface Removal
Unit III LIGHTING AND SHADING 9
Light and Matter-Light sources-The Phong Reflection Model-computation of vectors-Polygonal Shading-specifying
Light Parameters-Implementing a Lighting Model-Shading of the sphere Model-Per Fragment Lighting-Vertices to
fragments-Clipping-Line Segment Clipping-Polygon Clipping-Clipping in 3D-Rasterization-Bresenhams Algorithm-
Polygon Rasterization-Hidden Surface Removal
Unit IV MODELING AND HIERARCHY 9
Symbols and Instances-Hierarchical Models-A Robot Arm-Trees and Traversal-Animation –Graphical objects-Scene
Graphs-Open Scene Graphs-Graphics and Internet-Procedural Methods-Algorithmic Models-Newtonion Particles-
Constraints-A Simple Particle System-Language Based Models-Recursive Methods and fractals-Procedural Noise
Unit V CURVES AND SURFACES 9
Representation of curves and surfaces-Design Criteria-Parametric cubic Polynomial Curves-Interpolation-Hermite
curves and surfaces-Bezier curves and surfaces-Cubic B Splines-General B Splines-Rendering curves and surfaces-
Utah teapot-Advanced Renderning-Parallel-volume-Direct Volume-Image Based Rendering
Text Book:
1. Edward Angel ,Dave Shreiner ,”Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top-Down Approach with Shader-Based
OpenGL” ,Sixth Edition,2015
Reference Book:
1. Sumanta Guha Computer Graphics Through OpenGL: From Theory to Experiments, CRC Press, Second
Edition,2015
2. Tom McReynolds, David Blythe ,”Advanced Graphics Programming Using OpenGL”Morgan Kauffmann,2005
3. Clayton Walnum,” 3-D graphics programming with OpenGL,” Que, 1995
Extensive Reading:
• http://learnopengl.com/
• http://www.videotutorialsrock.com/
• http://www.cs.uccs.edu/~ssemwal/indexGLTutorial.html
• http://www.opengl-tutorial.org/
• http://courses.cs.vt.edu/~cs4204/lectures/opengl_basics.pdf
PAGE 325
19ITA05 BIG DATA AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the fundamental concepts of big data and analytics
• To learn various data analysis patterns
• To perform mining on huge data
• To analyze the big data for useful business applications using analytics techniques
• To gain knowledge on various visualization techniques
Course Outcome:
• Identify the need for big data analytics for a domain
• Use NOSQL database for retrieving data
• Develop applications using Hadoop and MapReduce Framework
• Apply various techniques for analytics
• Use techniques to extract the insights of big data through visualization
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA ANALYTICS 9
Analytics – Descriptive Analytics – Diagnostic Analytics – Predictive Analytics – Prescriptive Analytics – Big Data –
Characteristics of Big Data – Examples of Big Data – Analytics Flow for Big Data – Big Data Stack – Analytics Patterns
– Case Study – Data Acquisition.
Unit II BIG DATA PATTERNS & NOSQL 9
Load Leveling with Queues - Load Balancing with Multiple Consumers - Leader Election - Sharding - Consistency,
Availability & Partition Tolerance (CAP) - Bloom Filter - Materialized Views - Lambda Architecture Scheduler – Agent
- Supervisor - Pipes & Filters - Web Service - Consensus in Distributed Systems – Mapreduce Patterns – Document
Databases - MongoDB
Unit III BIG DATA STORAGE AND ANALYSIS 9
HDFS – Architecture – Usage Examples – Mapreduce Programming Model – Hadoop YARN – Hadoop Schedulers –
Mapreduce Examples – Pig – Data Types – Data Filtering & Analysis – Storing Results – Debugging Operators – Pig
Examples
Unit IV MACHINE LEARNING ALGORITHM 9
Analytics Algorithms – Clustering – k-means - Classification – Naïve Bayes – Decision Tree – Random Forest -
Gradient Boosting Machine - Support Vector Machine – Deep Learning – Regression – Linear Model -
Recommendation Systems
Unit V CASE STUDY AND DATA VISUALISATION 9
Case Study – Song Recommendation system – Genome Data Analysis – Classifying Handwritten Digits – Data
Visualisation – Frameworks & Libraries – Types - Line Chart – Scatter Plot - Bar Chart - Box Plot - Pie Chart - Dot
Chart - Map Chart - Gauge Chart - Radar Chart - Matrix Chart - Spatial Graph - Distribution Plot - Violin Plot - Count
Plot - Heatmap - Pair Grid - Facet Grid
Text Book:
1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisettai, “Big Data Science & Analytics”, Vpt Publisher, 2016
2. Tom White, “Hadoop: The Definitive Guide”, O’Reilly, 4th Edition, 2015.
Reference Book:
1. Seema Acharya, SubhashiniChellappan, “Big Data and Analytics”, Wiley Publications, First Edition, 2015.
2. Bart Baesens, “Analytics in a Big Data World: The Essential Guide to Data Science and its Applications”, Wiley,
2014.
3. Jure Leskovec, Anand Rajaraman and Jeffrey David Ullman, “Mining of Massive Datasets”, Cambridge University
Press, 2012.
4. Michael Berthold, David J. Hand, “Intelligent Data Analysis”, Springer, 2007.
5. “Data Science and Big Data Analytics”, EMC2 Education Services, 2013.
Extensive Reading:
• http://inside-bigdata.com/2013/09/19/getting-free-data-science-education/
• http://strata.oreilly.com/2013/10/stream-mining-essentials.html
• https://hadoop.apache.org/docs/r1.2.1/mapred_tutorial.html
• http://www.w3resource.com/mongodb/nosql.php
• http://www.christof-strauch.de/nosqldbs.pdf
• https://www.mongodb.com/
PAGE 326
19ITA06 DECISION MAKING METHODS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the logic of MCDM Methods
• To learn how to do pairwise comparison
• To learn to do normalization of attributes
• To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems
• To understand various MCDM methods to choose the best alternative
Course Outcome:
• Explore various MCDM methods for decision making
• Apply quantification methods for decision making problems
• Evaluate using relative weights for the attributes in order of relative importance
• Apply fuzzy with MCDM methods for decision making
• Evaluate the results of fuzzy with MCDM to choose the best alternative
Multi- Criteria Decision Making – A General Overview – Classification of MCDM Methods – Weighted Sum Model
(WSM) – Weighted Product Model (WPM) – Analytic Hierarchy Process (AHP) – Revised AHP – The Technique for
Order of Preference by Similarity to Ideal Solution(TOPSIS)
Unit II QUANTIFICATION 9
Qualitative data for MCDM problems – Scales for Quantifying Pair wise Comparisons – Evaluating different scales –
Simulation – Analysis of the Computational Results
Unit III EVALUATION OF WEIGHTS 9
Deriving Relative Weights – Sensitivity Analysis – Evaluation of methods – Process a decision matrix – Ranking
abnormalities
Unit IV FUZZY MULTI- CRITERIA DECISION MAKING 9
Fuzzy Operations – Ranking of Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy WSM method – Fuzzy WPM method – Fuzzy AHP method –
Fuzzy Revised AHP method – Fuzzy TOPSIS method
Unit V FUZZY EVALUATION CRITERIA 9
Testing the methods – First Evaluative Criterion – Second Evaluative Criterion - Computational Experiments -
Analysis
Text Book:
1. Evangelos Triantaphyllou, “Multi-criteria Decision Making Methods: A Comparative Study”, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, Springer 2000.
Reference Book:
1. Witold Pedrycz, Petr Ekel, Roberta Parreiras, “Fuzzy Multicriteria Decision-Making: Models, Methods and
Applications” , Wiley 2010
2. Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in Management
Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987
3. Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2015
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.dii.unisi.it/~mocenni/Note_AHP
• http://www.faez.ir/CourseFile/TOPSIS.pdf
PAGE 327
19ITA07 PHP PROGRAMMING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To introduce web development with PHP
• To work with various operations in PHP
• To model the design in a web environment
• To develop a webpage with database
• To test and work with a PHP application
Course Outcome:
• Create simple basic PHP programs
• Create programs using functions and strings
• Explore the usage of arrays and objects
• Implement graphics, security and web techniques in designing
• Implement database connectivity with PHP
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO PHP 9
PHP – History and Evolution – Installation – Language Basics – Lexical Structure – Datatypes – Variables – Expression
& Operators – Flow Control statements – embedding PHP in web pages
Unit II FUNCTIONS & STRINGS 9
Calling a function – Defining a function – Variable scope – function parameters – return values – variable functions –
Strings – Quoting string constants – Printing string – cleaning strings – encoding and escaping – comparing strings –
manipulating and searching strings
Unit III ARRAYS & OBJECTS 9
Indexed versus Associative Arrays – Identifying elements of an array – Storing data in arrays – Multidimensional
arrays –Extracting multiple values – Conversion between arrays and variables – Traversing arrays – Sorting –
Working with arrays – Objects – Creation – Accessing Properties and methods – Declaration of class – Introspection
Unit IV WEB TECHNIQUES, GRAPHICS & SECURITY 9
HTTP basics – Server Information – Processing Forms –Setting Response Headers – Maintaining State – SSL –
Graphics – Embed an image – Create and draw images – Images with text – Dynamic buttons – Color handling –
Security – Cross site scripting – File uploads and Access
Unit V DATABASE ACCESS & APPLICATION 9
PHP to access a database – Relational databases and SQL – MySQL object interface – Connectivity – Direct file level
manipulation – Application techniques – code libraries – handing output - error reporting and suppression –
performance tuning
Text Book:
1. Kevin Tatroe, Peter MacIntyre & Rasmus Lerdorf, “Programming PHP”, Creating Dynamic Web Pages, O'Reilly
Media, 3rd Edition, 2013
Reference Book:
1. Steven Holzner ,”PHP: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill Education,2008
2. Timothy Boronczyk , Martin E. Psinas,”PHP and MYSQL: Create - Modify – Reuse”, Wiley India Private Limited
,2008
3. Matt Doyle,”Beginning PHP 5.3”, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2009
Extensive Reading:
• http://php.net/
• http://www.tutorialspoint.com/php/
• http://www.toves.org/books/php/ch03-first/index.html
• http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/php
• http://www.w3schools.com/php/
PAGE 328
19MEA10 FUNDAMENTALS OF AIRCRAFT AND SPACE TECHNOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To provide knowledge in the evolution of aircrafts.
• To give understanding of concept of aerospace engineering.
• To get exposed to the various aircraft materials and aircraft structures.
• To develop knowledge in satellites and satellite launching vehicles.
• To analyse the current trends in the field of reusable launch vehicle.
Course Outcome:
• This course would make familiar of basic concepts of aviation.
• Course would be helpful to understand the basic principle behind the aircraft structures.
• Students would be trained in the current engineering materials and structures of an aircraft.
• One would be able to make use of basic knowledge of rocket, satellites, and space shuttles in the field of inter-
discipline.
• This Course would equip the students to effectively enhance the concepts of aircrafts and space crafts.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO AVIATION 9
Lighter-than-air aircraft, Heavier-than-air aircraft - Historical perspective of aviation: Balloon flight, Airship,
Ornithopter, Gliders, Monoplane, Biplane, Airbus.
Atmospheric Science: Earth’s atmosphere, structure, classification, constituents – Temperature in atmosphere –
International standard atmosphere (ISA) - Space Debris – Airport METARs.
Unit II AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 9
Aerodynamic forces – lift generation – aerofoils – drag – anatomy of an aircraft – major parts of an aircraft
(Radome, Fuselage, Wings, Landing Gear, Empennage, Jet engines, Black box) – Types of aircraft – helicopters –
aircraft instruments – Cockpit – fatigue failure in aircrafts – Airplane Disasters.
Unit III AIRCRAFT MATERIALS & PERFORMANCE 9
Light-weight materials in aircraft - Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP): Applications of FRP in principal parts of aircrafts.
Aircraft performance: Take-off, Climb, Cruise, Descent, Approach, Landing, Taxiing,Manoeuvres – Research Issues in
aircraft: Bird-strike problem, ice-impact problem, lightening impact problem – Smart skins in aircraft-Structural
Health Monitoring (SHM) of aircrafts.
Unit IV ROCKETS & SATELLITES 9
Introduction to rockets – types of rockets launched by India – rocket engines: elements of liquid propulsion systems
– solid rocket motors – liquid rocket static testing – launch tower, launch pad– Indian space research centers.
Types of satellites- present-day satellites in India- Parts of a satellite - application of shape memory alloy (SMA) in
satellites.
Unit V REUSABLE LAUNCH VEHICLES 9
Recent developments in Reusable Launch Vehicle in India: Present and Future. Overview of Re-entry vehicles and
Manned missions - Shuttle components - Orbiter Vehicle (OV), a pair of recoverable solid rocket boosters (SRBs)-
expendable external tank (ET) – Space shuttle disasters: A case study.
Text Book:
1. Anderson, D. F. and Eberhardt, S., “Understanding Flight”, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2009.
2. Turner, M. J. L., “Rocket and Spacecraft Propulsion: Principles, Practice and New Developments”, 3rd Edition,
Springer, 2009.
Reference Book:
1. Anderson, J. D., “Introduction to Flight”, 7th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
2. Megson, T. H. G., “Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students”, 4th Edition, Butterworth-Hein-emann, 2007.
3. Riccardo Niccoli, “History of Flight-From Leonardo’s Flying Machine to the conquest of space”, Whitestar
Publishers, 2013.
4. Stephen. A. Brandt, Introduction to Aeronautics: A design perspective, 2nd Edition, AIAA Education Series,
2012.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.isro.gov.in/
• https://www.nasa.gov/
• https://www.spacex.com/
PAGE 329
19MEA11 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOMATERIALS L T P C

Course Objective:
• The evolution, uniqueness and properties of nanomaterials.
• The various theories behind the interaction of nanoparticles.
• The various synthesis methods available for producing nano materials.
• The various characterization techniques available for nano materials.
• The special nano materials available and the applications of nano materials.
Course Outcome:
• Gain knowledge on the basic science behind nanotechnology.
• Able to interpret the nano scale phenomena of nano particles
• Capable to prepare nanomaterials.
• Ability to characterize the nano materials.
• Acquire knowledge on the available special nanomaterials and their applications
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO NANOMATERIALS 9
Background to nano technology - scientific revolutions - basic principles of nano scale materials - Comparison with
bulk materials, Classification of Nanomaterials: zero, one, two, and three dimensional nanostructures and its nature
– Surface area and aspect ratio, Length scales involved and effect on properties: Mechanical, Electronic, Optical,
Magnetic and Thermal.
Unit II THEORIES OF NANO SIZED MATERIALS 9
Surface energy – chemical potential as a function of surface curvature - electrostatic stabilization -surface charge
density - electric potential at the proximity of solid surface - Zeta potential - Interaction between two particles:
DLVO theory – Steric Stabilization.
Unit III SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Bottom-up Synthesis - Physical vapour Deposition – Chemical vapour Deposition - Atomic Layer Deposition -
Molecular Beam Epitaxy - liquid phase methods - colloidal and sol gel methods – methods for templating the growth
of nanomaterials – ordering of nano systems - self-assembly - Top-down Approach: Mechanical Milling, Dry etching,
Lithography.
Unit IV CHARACTERISATION OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Characterisation Techniques: X-ray diffraction Technique – Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy -Energy
Dispersive X-ray Analysis - Spectroscopy techniques: Raman spectroscopy– Infrared surface Spectroscopy - Brillouin
Spectroscopy – Ultraviolet-visible Spectroscopy – Photon Correlation Spectroscopy - surface analysis and depth
profiling – Luminescence: Photoluminescence - Thermoluminescence.
Unit V SPECIAL NANOMATERIALS & APPLICATIONS 9
Allotropes of Carbon (Basics only): Fullerenes, Carbon Nanotubes, Graphene-Self-assembled Monolayers - Micro
and Mesoporous Materials – Core Shell Structures – Organic-Inorganic Hybrids – Intercalation Compounds –
Nanocomposites– Bioceramics – Applications of Nanomaterials: Nanomaterials in energy storage–health-
communication sector – environment – textile – safety.
Text Book:
1. Guozhong Cao, “Nanostructures and nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications”, Imperial College
Press, 2011.
2. Charles P. Poole, Jr., Frank J. Owens, “Introduction to Nanotechnology”, John Wiley and Sons Publishers, 2008.
Reference Book:
1. Alan S. Edelstein, Robert C. Cammarata, “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications”, Taylor &
Francis, 1998.
2. Koch C, “Nanostructured materials: processing, properties and applications’, William Andrew Publication, 2008.
3. Joel I. Gersten, “The Physics and Chemistry of Materials”, Wiley, 2003.
4. S. Edelstein & R. C. Cammarata, “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications”, Institute of Physics
Pub., 1998.
PAGE 330
19MEA12 FUNDAMENTALS OF THERMAL SCIENCE L T P C

Course Objective:
• different concepts of thermodynamics and heat transfer.
Course Outcome:
• understand the basic concepts of thermodynamics.
• acquire knowledge about the power plants.
• know the applications of psychrometry.
• understand the basic concepts of Refrigeration and Air conditioning.
• understand the basic concepts of heat transfer.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO THERMODYNAMICS 9
Basic Concepts: System, Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Universe, Types of Systems, Thermodynamic
Equilibrium, Property, Process, Cycle – Reversibility – Quasi-static Process, Irreversible Process, Types, Work and
Heat, Point and Path function, Concept of quality of Temperature, Principles of Thermometry, Steady Flow Energy
Equation, Limitations of First Law of Thermodynamics, Second law of Thermodynamics, entropy (Elementary
treatment only).
Unit II POWER PLANTS 9
Introduction to thermodynamic cycles, Steam, Hydel, Diesel, Tidal, Geothermal, Wind, Solar power plants-schematic
and working.
Unit III PSYCHROMETRY 9
Properties of air-water vapour mixtures: Dry Bulb Temperature, Wet Bulb Temperature, Relative Humidity, dew
point temperature, degree of saturation, thermodynamic wet bulb temperature, enthalpy of moist air, sensible
heating and cooling, Adiabatic humidification and dehumidification, By-pass factor, Cooling load calculations using
psychrometric table and chart.
Unit IV REFRIGERATION AND AIRCONDITIONING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT ONLY) 9
Vapour compression refrigeration cycle- super heat, sub cooling – working principle of vapour absorption system,
Comparison between vapour compression and absorption systems
Simple designs of air conditioning system-summer, winter and Year round air conditioning systems.
Unit V PRINCIPLES OF HEAT TRANSFER 9
Conduction -– Fourier Law of Conduction – Convection - Forced Convection - Free Convection – Boiling – Pool
Boiling and Flow boiling – Condensation - Heat exchangers- Types - Laws of Radiation – Stefan Boltzmann Law,
Kirchhoff’s Law –Wien’s displacement law - Black Body Radiation– Introduction to Gas Radiation – Greenhouse
effects
Text Book:
1. R.S.Khrurmi ,”A Textbook of Thermal Engineering”, S Chand publisher; 15th edition (2018)
2. Yunus A. Cengel, “Fundamentals of Thermal-Fluid Sciences”, McGraw-Hill College; 5th edition (2016)
Reference Book:
1. Nag.P.K, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Nag P.K, “Power Plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw- Hill, 4th Edition, 2017.
3. Rajput. R. K., “Thermal Engineering” S.Chand Publishers , 2015.
4. Cengel, “Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach” TataMcGraw Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2006
5. EI-Wakil M.M, “Power Plant Technology”, Tata McGraw-Hill 2001.
6. Sarkar, B.K, “Thermal Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2007.
7. Kothandaraman.C.P, Domkundwar.S, Domkundwar. A.V., “A course in thermal engineering“, Dhanpat Rai &
sons, 5th Edition, 2012.
PAGE 331
19MEA13 PROPELLANTS, EXPLOSIVES AND PYROTECHNICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To study about the process of conversion of the high energy released by materials due to decomposition into
useful work.
• This course deals with the study of the application of the released energy into different categories like
explosives, propellant and pyrotechnics.
• To understand the background aspects of the different products of explosives, pyro techniques and propellant
by any engineering student.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the classification and properties of explosives
• Understand the basic characteristics and ingredients of Propellants.
• Know the different ingredients of Propellants
• Know about the basic process of pyrotechnics.
• Understand the various processing techniques and tests of explosives in an ethical manner.
Unit I TYPES AND PROPERTIES OF EXPLOSIVE 9
High energetic material – Definition – Classifications – Non permitted explosives- compatibility and stability –
Properties of explosives – Applications – High performance explosives, TNT, Nitro glycerine, dynamite,
nitrocellulose, Lead azide, mercury fulminate, High melting explosives, heat resistant explosives, Binders and
plasticizers.
Unit II PROPELLANTS 9
Classification – Performances - Gun propellant –Force constant, burning rate, thrust and specific impulse,
Formulation and ingredients. Liquid gun propellant Hydroxyl ammonium nitrate and DMAZ. Solid and liquid
propellants, rocket propellants - High energy propellants
Unit III INGREDIENTS OF PROPELLANTS 9
Functions, characteristics and types of Binders, stabilisers, Plasticizers, modifiers, inhibitors. Testing, materials of
ingredients – recent trends, novel systems. Insulators – characteristics, materials and process for insulation.
Unit IV PYROTECHNICS 9
Pyrotechnics – General features - Ingredients of Pyrotechnic Formulations – Fuel, Oxidizers, Binders, Coolants,
Retardants, Dyes, Color Intensifiers, Moderators – Characteristics- Pyrotechnic formulations - Illuminating
formulations - Delay formulations - Smoke formulations - Incendiary formulations, Green Pyrotechnics, performance
assessments.
Unit V PROCESSING TECHNIQUES FOR EXPLOSIVES AND TESTS 9
Extrusion - Casting types– Normal, Sedimentation, squeeze casting, Pressing – Unidirectional, Double Action,
Incremental, Hydrostatic, Iso-static pressing – Vacuum stability test – Heat test – Impact sensitivity test – Friction
sensitivity test, electric spark sensitivity and shock sensitivity, Determination of detonation velocity.
Text Book:
1. “High Energy Materials – Propellants, Explosives and Pyrotechnics” Jai Prakash Agarwal, Wiley-VCH Verlag
GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. "High Energy Oxidisers for Advanced Solid Propellants and Explosives - Advances in Solid Propellant
Technology”, First International HEMSI Workshop, Ranchi, India, 2002.
2. “The Chemistry of Powder and Explosives”, Davis, Tenney L. https://doi.org/10.1021/ed018p500.1
PAGE 332
19UBA01 ESSENTIALS OF FINANCE L T P C

Offered by MBA (Allied Elective offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To develop an understanding of business related finance.
• To have an understanding of finance in order to contribute to the organization’s success.
• To improve the financial skills in order to make critical business decisions involving budgets, cost savings and
growth strategies
Course Outcome:
• understand Goals and Functions of Finance
• make decision on budgeting and investment
• understand about the various Sources of funds
• interpret financial statements
• Understand the financial system of india
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO FINANCE 9
Role for Finance for Individual and Organization – Goals and Functions of Finance - Time Value of Money –
Significance
Unit II FINANCIAL PLANNING AND DECISIONS 9
Financial Planning – Decisions – Investment Decision – Financing Decision - Dividend Decision - Evaluation of
Investment Projects and Financing – Working Capital
Unit III FUNDS MANAGEMENT 9
Funds Mobilization – Sources – Internal and external
Unit IV FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 9
Financial Statements - Balance Sheet – PL account - Cash/Fund Flow - Analysis
Unit V OVERVIEW OF INDIAN FINANCIAL MARKETS 9
Financial System – Bank and Financial Institutions – Capital Market - Money Market
Text Book:
1. I. M. Pandey, “Financial Management”, (10th ed.), Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2013.
Reference Book:
1. Prasanna Chandra, “Financial Management”, (7th ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
2. Khan M Y and Jain P K, “Financial Management”, (6th ed.), McGraw Hill, 2013.
PAGE 333
19UBA02 ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To make the participant understand the role of HR Department in an organization
• To know the various functional areas of HRM
• To understand the recent developments in HR
Course Outcome:
• Understand the basic concepts in HRM
• Aware of human resource requirement for an organization
• Aware of the ways for developing the skills and knowledge of the employees
• Understand the motivation model in an organization
• Aware of present development in HR
Introduction to HRM – Meaning, Importance and Objectives, History of Managing Human Resources, Environment
of HR. Functions and Roles of HR Manager
Unit II PROCUREMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCES 9
Job Analysis – Meaning, Process and Methods, Human Resource Planning – Importance, Process, HR Demand and
Supply Forecasting Techniques. Recruitment – Importance, Recruitment Sources, Selection – Process Socialization /
Induction – Importance and Types
Unit III DEVELOPMENT / TRAINING 9
Training – Purpose, Process – Need Identification, On-the-Job Methods and Off-the-Job Methods. Executive
Development Programmes – Difference from training. Performance Appraisal – Process, Techniques – MBO and 360
Degree Feedback. Job Changes - Promotion, Demotion and Transfer
Unit IV COMPENSATION AND MOTIVATION 9
Job Evaluation – Meaning, Process, Compensation Plan – Deciding factors & Framing Process. Human Needs –
Motivation Theories – Maslow’s Need theory and Herzberg’s two factor theory, Applications – Rewards and
Reinforcement. Grievances – Causes and Redressal methods. Disciplinary Action – Nature and Types
Unit V MAINTENANCE AND SEPARATION 9
The Factories Act, 1948 – Health, Safety and Welfare Provisions. The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act,
1946 – Framing Standing Order. Separation – Retirement, Layoff, Out-placement & Discharge. Latest trends in HRM
- HRIS – Meaning and Implementation Process. E-HRM.
Text Book:
1. Arun Monappa, “Managing Human Resources”, (1st ed.), Trinity Press Publications, 2014.
2. Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, (12th ed.), Pearson Education Limited, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. Aswathappa K., “Human Resource Management”, (7th ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Decenzo and Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, (10th ed.), Wiley, 2010.
3. Mamoria C.B & Mamoria S., “Personnel Management”, Himalaya Publishing Co., 2010.
4. Eugence Mckenna & Nic Beach, “Human Resource Mgmt”, (2nd ed.), Pearson Education Ltd, 2008.
5. Wayne Cascio, “Managing Human Resource”, (9th ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
6. Ivancevich, “Human Resource Management”, (12th ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
PAGE 334
19UBA03 ESSENTIALS OF MARKETING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the basics of Marketing Management as a functional area of an organisation.
• To understand the basic elements that makes up the marketing function.
• To understanding the functions of a marketing department.
• To understand the importance of marketing to an organisation.
Course Outcome:
• Describe a Marketing Department and the functions of a marketing department.
• Choose and understand the needs of the customers.
• Combine the four Ps of marketing to design a marketing model
• Have a basic ideas on how a market segmented and customers are targeted.
• Have a basic understanding on the elements of the marketing mix
Unit I UNDERSTANDING MARKETING MANAGEMENT – AN OVERVIEW 9
Introduction, Marketing department functions, Selling vs Marketing, Marketing concepts (Marketers and Prospects,
Needs, Wants, and Demands, Value and Satisfaction), Basics of Market segmentation, Target markets and
Positioning.
Unit II THE MARKETING MIX ELEMENT – PRODUCT 9
Introduction, Characteristics of the product life cycle and their marketing implications, Facets of the PLC, New
product development, The market diffusion process, Organizing for new product development
Unit III THE MARKETING MIX ELEMENT – PRICE 9
Introduction, Price and the marketing mix, Pricing objectives, Factors affecting pricing decisions, Setting a price,
Pricing industrial goods, Pricing and information technology
Unit IV THE MARKETING MIX ELEMENT – PROMOTION 9
Communications contact techniques (Promotion mix) - Advertising, Direct marketing, Sales promotion, Personal
selling, Sponsorship, Publicity
Unit V THE MARKETING MIX ELEMENT – PLACE: CHANNELS OF DISTRIBUTION 9
Introduction, Intermediaries in channels of distribution - Sales agents, Distributors, Wholesalers, Retailers,
Franchising, Internet marketing
Text Book:
1. Marilyn A. Stone, John Desmond, “Fundamentals of Marketing” (Special Indian Edition), Routledge, Taylor &
Francis Group, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. William J. Stanton, Michael J. Etzel, Bruce J. Walter, “Fundamentals of Marketing”, (10th ed.), TMH, 1994.
2. Philip Kotler, “Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective”, (14th ed.), Pearson India, 2012.
PAGE 335
19UBA04 ESSENTIALS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP L T P C

Course Objective:
• Students should understand the nuances of being an entrepreneur and develop a confidence for
entrepreneurship.
Course Outcome:
• Appreciate the rationale of entrepreneurship
• Develop skills for initiating entrepreneurship
• Deal with the procedural aspects of entrepreneurship
• Identify the financial support available for entrepreneurs
• Identify the institutional support available for entrepreneurs
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Evolution of the Concept of Entrepreneur, Characteristics of an Entrepreneur, Distinction between an Entrepreneur
and a Manager, Functions of an Entrepreneur, Types of Entrepreneur , Intrapreneur
Concept of Entrepreneurship, Growth of Entrepreneurship in India, Role of Entrepreneurship in Economic
Development.
Concept of Women Entrepreneurs , Functions, Growth and Problems of Women Entrepreneurs, Development of
Women Entrepreneurship - Recent Trends
Unit II FACTORS AFFECTING ENTREPRENEURIAL GROWTH 9
Economic Factors, Non-Economic Factors, Government Actions
Motivation, Motivating Factors, Achievement Theory
Meaning of Entrepreneurial Competency or Trait, Major Entrepreneurial Competencies, Developing Competencies
Factors Influencing Mobility, Occupational Mobility, Locational Mobility
Unit III BUSINESS START-UP 9
Meaning of Project, Project Identification and Selection
Project formulation - Significance of Project Report, Contents, Formulation of a Project Report, Planning
Commission's Guidelines, Specimen of a Project Report, Network Analysis, Common Errors.
Project appraisal - Concepts, Methods of Project Appraisal
Ownership Structures, Proprietorship, Partnership, Company, Co-operative, Selection of an Appropriate Form of
Ownership Structure, Ownership Pattern in Small-Scale Enterprises in India
Unit IV FINANCIAL SUPPORT FOR ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Financing of enterprise, Need for Financial Planning, Sources of Finance, Capital Structure, Term-Loans, Sources of
Short-Term Finance, Capitalisation, Venture Capital Export Finance
Institutional finance to Entrepreneurs - Commercial Banks, Industrial Developmental Banks - National Level and
State level Banks – Banks for Large Industries and Small Industries. Universal Banking Concept.
Lease Financing and Hire-Purchase - Advantages of Leasing, Difference between Hire Purchase and Leasing,
Procedure for Hire Purchase
Unit V INSTITUTIONAL SUPPORT FOR ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Need for Institutional Support, Institutional Support to Small Entrepreneurs: National Small Industries Corporation
Ltd. (NSIC), Small Industries Development Organisation (SIDO), Small Scale Industries Board (SSIB), State Small
Industries Development Corporations (SSICS), Small Industries Service Institutes (SISI), District Industries Centres
(DICs), Industrial Estates, Specialised Institutions, Technical Consultancy Organisations (TCOs)
Taxation Benefits to Small-Scale Industry - Need for Tax Benefits, Tax Holiday, Depreciation, Rehabilitation and
Investment Allowance, Expenditure on Scientific Research, Amortisation of Certain Preliminary Expenses, Tax
Concessions to Small-Scale Industries in Rural Areas and Backward Areas
Government Policy for Small Scale Enterprises, Government Support to Small-Scale Enterprises during Five Year
Plans.
Text Book:
1. S.S.Khanka, “Entrepreneurial Development”, S.Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Hisrich, “Entrepreneurship”, (9th ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Cynthia .L.Greene, “Entrepreneurship ideas in action”, (5th ed.), Thompson – Southwestern, 2012.
2. Donald.F.Kurato, “Entrepreneurship”, (8th ed.), Thompson – Southwestern, 2009.
3. HBR on “Entrepreneurship”.
4. Peter.F. Drucker, “Innovation and entrepreneurship”, Harper business, 1993.
5. K.Dennis Chambers, “The Entrepreneur’s guide to writing Business plans and proposals”, Macmillan, 2008.
6. Mathew Manimala, “Entrepreneurship Theory at the Crossroads”, Paradigms & Praxis, (2nd ed.), Biztrantra,
PAGE 336
2005.
7. “Projects: Planning, Analysis, Selection, Financing, Implementation and Review”, (7th ed.), Prasanna Chandra,
Tata McGraw - Hill Education, (2009).
PAGE 337
19EEH01 CONVENTIONAL AND ALTERNATE ENERGY SOURCES L T P C

Offered by EEE (Emerging Area Course offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Operational practices of thermal power plants
• Operational practices of gas turbine and Diesel electric power plants
• the importance and process involved in harnessing power from solar and wind energy
• the importance and process involved in harnessing power from ocean and geo-thermal energy resources
• the importance and process involved in harnessing power from Bio-mass
Course Outcome:
• Explain the process of power generation from Thermal power plants
• Explicate the process of power generation from Gas turbine and Diesel power plants
• Appreciate the importance of alternate energy resources and explain the power harnessing methods from solar
and wind resources
• Demonstrate the concept behind ocean and geo-thermal energy resources
• Enumerate the process involved in the generation of power from Bio-mass
Unit I THERMAL POWER PLANT 9
Types of thermal power plants, Steam power plant based on fossil fuels, Thermal power plant equipment: boilers,
superheaters, re-heaters, economiser, condensers and gas loops, turbines etc. Performance of steam power plant
and its components
Unit II GAS TURBINE AND DIESEL ELECTRIC POWER PLANT 9
Gas turbine power plant: different components, operating principles and design of Gas Turbine power plant,
Gas Turbine‐Steam Turbine combined cycle power plant.
Diesel electric power plant: different components, operating principles and design of Diesel electric power plant.
Unit III SOLAR ENERGY AND WIND ENERGY 9
Fundamentals of Solar Photo Voltaic Conversion, Solar Cells, Solar PV Power Generation, Solar PV Applications.
Wind Energy Estimation, Types of Wind Energy Systems, Performance, Site Selection, Details of Wind Turbine
Generator.
Unit IV OCEAN ENERGY AND GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9
Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC), Principle of operation, development of OTEC plants, Tidal and wave
energy, Potential and conversion techniques, mini-hydel power plants.
Geothermal Energy Resources, types of wells, methods of harnessing the energy, scope in India.
Unit V BIO-MASS ENERGY 9
Principles of Bio-Conversion, Anaerobic/aerobic digestion, types of Bio-gas digesters, gas yield, combustion
characteristics of bio-gas, utilization for cooking.
Practical Course -1
Text Book:
1. Khan B.H, Non-Conventional Energy Resources, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited,
New Delhi, 2011.
2. Sawhney G.S, Non-Conventional Energy Resources, First Edition, PHI Learning Private Limited, Delhi, 2019
3. Nag P. K, Power Plant Engineering, Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill Education, India, 2014.
4. Tiwari G.N and Ghosal M.K,Renewable energy resources: Basic Principles and Applications, Narosa Publishing
House, New Delhi, 2004.
5. RaiG.D,Non-Conventional Energy Sources, Sixth Edition, Khanna Publication, New Delhi.
Reference Book:
1. John Twidell and Tony Weir,Renewable Energy Sources, 3rd Edition, CRC Press, USA, 2006
2. SukhatmeS.P,Solar Energy, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publication, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Mittal K M,Non Conventional Energy Systems, 3rd Edition, A H WheelerPublishing Co Ltd., India, 2006.
4. Ramesh.R, UdayKumar.K and Anandakrishnan.M,Renewable Energy Technologies: Ocean Thermal Conversion
and Other Sustainable Energy Options, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 1997.
5. Sergio Capareda, Introduction to Biomass Energy Conversions, 1st Edition, CRC Press, USA, 2013.
6. Veatch B. Drbal, Lawrence.F, Boston P.G, Westra K.L and Erickson R.B, Power Plant Engineering, CBS HB
Publication, 2005.
PAGE 338
19EEH02 INTRODUCTION TO SMART GRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES L T P C

Course Objective:
• the basics and characteristics of smart grid
• the various Smart Grid Technologies
• the types. Architecture and impact of Electric vehicle on electric utilities
Course Outcome:
• Describe the benefits of smart grid and smart energy resources
• Explain the importance of smart sub stations and Transmission systems
• Enumerate the significance of smart meters for smart grid environment
• Narrate the significance of Electric vehicle to the environment and utility
• Spell out the worthiness of Electric vehicle and its impact on Electricity demand
Unit I OVERVIEW OF SMART GRID 9
Introduction to conventional Grid- Factors affecting the performance of conventional grid- Smart grid – key
characteristics of smart grid – Potential benefits of smart grid - Difference between conventional grid & smart grid -
Smart grid drivers – Global drivers of smart grid - Benefits of smart grid: Utility benefits, consumer benefits &
Environmental benefits-–Architecture of Smart Grid
Unit II SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES - I 9
Overview of Smart Energy Resources - Microgrid-Islanding in Microgrid Environment- Standards for smart grid
system. Smart Transmission systems: Wide Area Monitoring System (WAMS)-Phasor Measurement Systems-
Applications of WAMS-Role of FACTS and HVDC- Components of Smart Substation- Intelligent Electronic Devices
(IEDs): Digital Fault Recorder, Digital Protective Relays, Circuit Breaker Monitors
Unit III SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES - II 9
Demand Side Management and strategies-Demand response Programs- Smart Distribution systems: Distribution
Automation, Distribution Management System, Volt/VAR control, Outage Management System. Smart Meters:
Introduction to Smart Meters, - Advanced Metering infrastructure (AMI) drivers and benefits, Advanced Metering
infrastructure (AMI) Components.
Unit IV INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC VEHICLE (EV) 9
Benefits of Electric vehicle to the environment and electric utility-Myths about electric vehicle – Drawbacks –
Overview about Types of Electric vehicles and its challenges- overview of electric vehicle technologies: Motor Drive
Technologies, Energy Source Technologies, battery charging technologies- Vehicle to Grid and Grid to Vehicle
Technologies
Unit V ELECTRIC VEHICLE:ARCHITECTURE, STORAGE & IMPACT ON SYSTEM DEMAND 9
Components of Electric Vehicle-EV systems and configurations-HEV systems and configurations- Energy Storage
Solutions for Electric Vehicles- Impact of EV charging on system demand: Identification of EV demand – EV’s impact
on system demand
Text Book:
1. Stuart Borlase “Smart Grid: Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions”, CRC Press, 2012.
2. JanakaEkanayake, Nick Jenkins, KithsiriLiyanage, Jianzhong Wu, Akihiko Yokoyama, “Smart Grid: Technology and
Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, March 2012.
3. Seth Leitman and Bob Brant, “Build your own Electric Vehicle”, McGraw Publications, second Edition, 2009.
4. K.T.Chau, “Electric vehicle Machines and drives: Design, analysis and application”, John Wiley & Sons Singapore,
First edition, 2015.
5. Rodrigo Garcia-Valle andJoao A. Pecas Lopes(Editors), “Electric Vehicle Integration into Modern Power
Networks”, Chapter 1 and 3, Springer Science + Business media, New York, 2013.
Reference Book:
1. Lars T. Berger and Krzysztof Iniewski, “Smart Grid Applications, Communications, and Security”, John Wiley &
Sons, March 2012.
Extensive Reading:
• The Smart Grid Vision for India’s Power Sector: A White Paper, Prepared by PA consulting Group, USA, March
2010
PAGE 339
19EEH03 DISTRIBUTED GENERATION AND MICRO GRID L T P C

Course Objective:
• The concept of distributed generation
• The impact of grid integration and its technical aspects
• The concept of Micro grid and its configuration
• The operating modes and control concepts of micro grid
Course Outcome:
• Find the size and optimal placement DGs
• Analyze the requirements for grid integration and standards
• Explain the stability and power quality issues on the system due to DGs
• Explicate the configuration and structure of AC and DC micro grids
• Describe the operational and control concepts of micro grid
Unit I NEED FOR DISTRIBUTED GENERATION 9
Renewable sources in distributed generation – Current scenario in distributed generation – Planning of DGs – Siting
and sizing of DGs – Optimal placement of DG sources in distribution systems.
Unit II GRID INTEGRATION OF DGS 9
Concept of distributed generations, topologies, selection of sources, regulatory standards/ framework, Standardsfor
interconnecting Distributed resources to electric power systems: IEEE 1547. DG installation classes, securityissues in
DG implementations. Basics of Energy storage elements: Batteries, ultra-capacitors, flywheels. Captive power plants
Unit III TECHNICAL IMPACTS OF DGS 9
Requirements for grid interconnection, limits on operational parameters,: voltage, frequency, THD, response to grid
abnormal operating conditions, islanding issues. Impact of grid integration with NCE sources on existing power
system: reliability, stability and power quality issues
Unit IV BASICS OF MICROGRID 1
Concept and definition of microgrid, microgrid drivers and benefits, review of sources of microgrids, typicalstructure
and configuration of a microgrid, AC and DC microgrids, Power Electronics interfaces in DC and ACmicrogrids
Unit V CONTROL AND OPERATION OF MICROGRID 9
Modes of operation and control of microgrid: grid connected and islanded mode, Active and reactive power control,
protection issues, anti-islanding schemes: passive, active and communication based techniques, microgrid
communication infrastructure, Power quality issues in micro grids.
Text Book:
1. H. Lee Willis, Walter G. Scott, ‘Distributed Power Generation – Planning and Evaluation’, Marcel Decker Press,
2000.
2. M.GodoySimoes, Felix A.Farret, ‘Renewable Energy Systems – Design and Analysis with Induction Generators’,
CRC press.
3. Robert Lasseter, Paolo Piagi, ‘Micro-grid: A Conceptual Solution’, PESC 2004, June 2004.
4. Bollen M.H. and Hassan F. (2011); Integration of Distributed Generation in the Power System, Wiley‐IEEE Press
5. Nikos Hatziargyriou, “Microgrids: Architectures and Control”, ISBN: 978-1-118- 72068-4, December 2013, Wiley-
IEEE Press.
6. S. Chowdhury, S.P. Chowdhury and P. Crossley, “Microgrids and Active Distribution Networks”, The Institution
of Engineering and Technology, London, U.K, 2009
7. AmirnaserYezdani, and Reza Iravani, “Voltage Source Converters in Power Systems: Modeling, Control and
Applications”, IEEE John Wiley Publications, 2009.
8. DorinNeacsu, “Power Switching Converters: Medium and High Power”, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis, 2006.
Reference Book:
1. F. Katiraei, M.R. Iravani, ‘Transients of a Micro-Grid System with Multiple Distributed Energy Resources’,
International Conference on Power Systems Transients (IPST’05) in Montreal, Canada on June 19-23, 2005.
2. Z. Ye, R. Walling, N. Miller, P. Du, K. Nelson, ‘Facility Microgrids’, General Electric Global Research Center,
Niskayuna, New York, Subcontract report, May 2005.
3. Jenkins N. Strbac G. and Ekanayake J. (2009); Distributed Generation, The Institution of Engineering and
Technology
4. Keyhani A. (2011); Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems, Wiley–IEEE Press
5. Tester J. W. (et al.) (2012); Sustainable Energy: Choosing among Options, Second Edition, The MIT Press
6. Bhattacharyya S., Rural electrification through decentralisedOff-grid systems in Developing Countries, Springer
, 2013
7. Zerriffi H., Rural Electrification: Strategies for Distributed Generation, Springer, 2011.
PAGE 340
PAGE 341
19EEH04 IOT FOR SMART GRIDS L T P C

Course Objective:
• the emerging area of Internet of Things and Smart Grid.
• Internet of Things and Smart Grid Applications.
Course Outcome:
• Describe the concepts of Internet of Things and Smart Grid
• Explain the IoT technologies and communication technologies
• Explicate the applications of HAN, NAN and WAN
• Spell out the suitable architectures for IoT aided Smart grid systems
• Enumerate the suitable architecture, possible applications and existing prototypes of IoT aided smart grid
systems
Unit I IOT AND SMART GRID 9
Internet of Things - Smart Grid- Importance of Smart Grid in Smart Cities-Integration of the Internet of Things into
a Smart Grid
Unit II IOT TECHNOLOGIES, COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AND STANDARDIZATION 9
IoT Technologies – Communication Technologies: Home Area Network (HAN) - Neighbourhood Area Network
(NAN)- Wide Area Network (WAN) - Standardization:Activities in IoT, Smart Grid and IoT aided Smart grid systems
Unit III EXISTING APPLICATIONS OF IOTAIDED SMART GRID SYSTEMS 9
HAN applications: Smart Home – Electric vehicle – AMI – Integration of DERs – Power demand management- NAN
applications: Smart Distribution – smart patrol – WAN applications: Transmission tower protection – monitoring of
power transmission lines
Unit IV ARCHITECTURES FOR IOT AIDED SMART GRID SYSTEMS 9
Smart Grid Architecture Model – Three layered architecture – Four layered architecture – Cloud based architecture
– Web enabled smart grid architecture – Last meter smart grid architecture
Unit V PROTOTYPES FOR IOT AIDED SMART GRID SYSTEMS 9
A Simple Prototype for Energy Efficiency- Integration of Renewable and Non Renewable energy Sources at Home- In
Home Appliance Monitoring Implementation- Real time Monitoring of Medium Voltage Grid – Open issues &
challenges
Text Book:
1. P. Waher, Learning Internet of Things. Packt Publishing, 2015.
2. N. Ramesh Babu, Smart Grid Systems: Modeling and Control, CRC Press,2018.
3. F. P. Sioshansi, Smart Grid: Integrating Renewable, Distributed and Efficient Energy, Academic Press, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. D. Kellmereit, The Silent Intelligence: The Internet of Things. DnD Ventures, 2013.
2. A. McEwen and H. Cassimally, Designing the Internet of Things. John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
3. S. Borlase, Smart Grids: Advanced Technologies and Solutions, Second Edition. CRC Press, 2017.
4. J. A. Momoh, Smart Grid: Fundamentals of Design and Analysis. John Wiley & Sons, 2012,
Extensive Reading:
• YasirSaleem, Noel Crespi, Mubashir Husain Rehmani and Rebecca Copeland, “Internet of Things-aided Smart
Grid: Technologies,Architectures, Applications, Prototypes, and Future Research Directions”,IEEE, Volume: 7,
2019.
• DOI: 10.1109/ACCESS.2019.2913984
• http://www.smartgridnews.com/story/smart-grid-101-internet-things-and-smart-grid-part-1/2013-11-12
PAGE 342
19EEH05 POWER ELECTRONIC INTERFACES FOR SMART GRID L T P C

Course Objective:
• The importance of Power Electronic devices for smart grid environment
• The basic concepts of Power flow control.
• The concept, benefits and the applications of Power Electronic Interface Devices, i.e., FACTS devices.
Course Outcome:
• Illustrate the importance of Power Electronic Interface for Generation and Distribution
• Demonstrate the concept of basic power flow control and compensation techniques
• Explain the working principle, control strategies and applications of shunt connected FACTS devices
• Narrate the importance of series compensation FACTS devices
• Describe the control objectives and functionality of advanced FACTS devices
Unit I POWER ELECTRONIC INTERFACE FOR GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION 9
Power Electronic Interface for Generation: Block Diagram explanation of Power converter for Solar PV and Wind
Energy Conversion System- Functions and technical trends of power system interconnection: LVRT, Islanding
detection and Operation-Overview of Different Power Quality Issues- Power Quality Issues in smart grid
Environment- Overview of Power Electronics in Distribution System
Unit II POWER FLOW CONTROL & FACTS CONTROLLERS 9
Basics of power transmission networks-Control of power flow in AC transmission line - Introduction to Voltage
source converter based Controller – Benefits with FACTS controllers – Overview of different FACTS devices - Analysis
of uncompensated AC Transmission line - Passive reactive power compensation: Effect of series and shunt
compensation on power transfer capacity
Unit III SVC & STATCOM 9
SVC: Voltage control by SVC – Advantages of slope in the SVC dynamic characteristics – Influence of SVC on system
voltage without Coupling Transformer – Applications of SVC: Transient stability enhancement, Augmentation of
Power System damping - STATCOM: Principle of operation, V-I curve – Applications of STATCOM:SSR mitigation
Unit IV TCSC, SSSC AND DVR 9
TCSC: Concepts of Controlled Series Compensation – Operation of TCSC –VI-characteristics of TCSC– Applications of
TCSC: Improvement of system stability limit - Enhancement of system damping – Voltage collapse prevention - SSSC:
Principle of operation, control system – Applications of SSSC: Power flow control and SSR Mitigation- DVR: Concept
and Control strategy
Unit V UPFC, UPQC AND IPFC 9
UPFC: Principle of operation - modes of operation – Applications of UPFC: Power flow control and oscillation
damping – UPQC: Introduction – control objectives -Working principle – Integration of UPQC - IPFC: Basic
Operational concept- Fault Current Limiting
Text Book:
1. NarainG.Hingorani, Laszio. Gyugyi, “Understanding FACTS Concepts and Technology of Flexible AC Transmission
System”, Standard Publishers, Delhi 2001.
2. Mohan Mathur, R., Rajiv. K. Varma, “Thyristor Based FACTS Controllers for Electrical Transmission Systems”,
IEEE press and John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2002
3. K.R.Padiyar, “FACTS Controllers in Power Transmission and Distribution”, New Age International(P) Ltd.,
Publishers, New Delhi, Reprint 2008
4. JanakaEkanayake, KithsiriLiyanage, Jianzhong Wu, Akihiko Yokoyama, Nick Jenkins, “Smart Grid Technology and
Applications”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. V.K.Sood, “HVDC and FACTS controllers- Applications of Static Converters in Power System”, Kluwer Academic
Publisher, 2004.
Extensive Reading:
• ShinsukeNii, Masaki Kato, “Power Electronics Technology that Supports Smart Grid”, Vol.57, No.4, Fuji Electric
Review
• Laszio. Gyugyi, Kalyan.K.Sen, Colin.D.Schauder, “The Intrerline Power Flow Controller Concept:A New Approach
to Power Flow Management in Transmission Systems”, IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, Vol.14, No.3, pp.
1115-1123, July 1999
• Math H.J. Bollen, , Jin Zhong, FranciscZavoda, Jan Meyer, Alex McEachern, Felipe CórcolesLópez, “Power Quality
aspects of Smart Grids”, International Conference on Renewable Energies and Power Quality(ICREPQ’10)
,Granada (Spain), 23th to 25th March, 2010
PAGE 343
• MdShafiuzzaman. K, KhademMr, MalabikaBasu, Michael F. Conlon, “UPQC for Power Quality Improvement in
DGIntegrated Smart Grid Network – A Review”, International Journal of Emerging Electric Power Systems,
Vol.13, Issue 1, Article 3, 2012
• ShivendraPrakashVerma, Prashant Kumar, Noor-ul-Islam, “Smart Grid, Its Power Quality andElectromagnetic
Compatibility”, MIT International Journal of Electrical and Instrumentation Engineering, Vol. 2, No. 1, pp. 55-64,
Jan. 2012.
• Tao Xia, Jian He, Yu Ye, Weiping Li, Jianmin Huang, Jie Yang, Dexiang Liu, “Application of Advanced Power
Electronic Technology inSmart Grid”, ACMME 2018, IOP Conf. Series: Materials Science and
Engineering,Article394, 2018.
• F. Iov, M. Ciobotaru, D. Sera, R. Teodorescu and F. Blaabjerg, "Power Electronics and Control of Renewable
Energy Systems," 2007 7th International Conference on Power Electronics and Drive Systems, 2007, pp. P-6-P-
28, doi: 10.1109/PEDS.2007.4487668.
PAGE 344
19EEH06 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS, SECURITY AND PROTECTION FOR L T P C

Offered by EEE
SMART GRID 3 0 0 3
(Emerging Area Course offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA)
Course Objective:
• Smart Grid Technologies
• Importance of protection in Smart Grid
• Data Communication for smart grid
• Communication Technologies for smart grid
• Security issues on smart grid
Course Outcome:
• Describe Smart Grid Technologies
• Explicate the importance of protection in smart grid
• Explain the communication requirements of a Smart Grid
• Describe the communication protocols for Smart Grid and the standards available for smart metering and
Communication
• Explain the security challenges in smart grid
Unit I AN OVERVIEW OF SMART GRID IN PROTECTION PERSPECTIVE-I 9
Introduction- Major functions of a smart grid system- Features of the smart grid-Smart grid technologies-Sensing
and measurement-Smart meter-Phasor measurement unit-Distribution energy resources
Unit II AN OVERVIEW OF SMART GRID IN PROTECTION PERSPECTIVE-II 9
Peak load management -Smart grid automation-Grid code-Protection system in the smart grid -Importance of
protection in the smart grid-Challenges of protective devices in the smart grid
Unit III DATA COMMUNICATION FOR SMART GRID 9
Introduction - Dedicated and shared communication channels - Switching techniques - Communication channels -
Layered architecture and protocols
Unit IV COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES, STANDARDS AND PROTOCOLS 9
Introduction - Communication technologies: IEEE 802 series, Mobile communication, Multi protocol label switching,
Power line communication - Standards for information exchange: Standards for Smart metering, Communication
standards and Protocols
Unit V SECURITY AND PRIVACY 9
Cyber Security Challenges in Smart Grid- Load Altering Attacks - False Data Injection Attacks-Defense Mechanisms -
Privacy Challenges – Information security for Smart grid
Text Book:
1. Ramesh Bansal, “Power System Protection in Smart Grid Environment”, CRC Press, 2018.
2. Clark W Gelling, “The Smart Grid, Enabling Energy Efficiency and Demand Side Response”, CRC Press, 2009.
3. JanakaEkanayake, Nick Jenkins, KithsinLiyanage, Jianzhongwu, Akihiko Yokoyama, Smart Grid Technology and
applications, Wiley, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. James Momoh, “Smart Grid- Fundamentals of Design and Analysis”, Wiley Publisher, 2010
2. Stuart Borlase, Smart Grid: Infrature, Technology and solutions, CRC Press 2012
3. Mini S.Thomas, John D McDonald, Power SCADA and Smart Grids, CRC Press, 2015.
4. Kenneth C. Budka, JayantG.Deshpande, Marina Thottan, Communication Networks for Smart Grids, Springer,
2014.
PAGE 345
19EEH21 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING USING JAVA FOR ELECTRICAL L T P C

Offered by EEE
ENGINEERS 3 0 0 3
(Emerging Area Course offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA)
Course Objective:
• the concept of Object Oriented Programming.
• the basic characteristics of Java Programming.
• the principles of Inheritance, Exceptions, and interfaces.
• exceptions and use I/O streams.
• developing java program for Electrical Applications.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the concepts of Object Oriented Programming.
• Write simple java programmes using classes and objects.
• Describe Inheritance and Exception handling concepts in java programming.
• Narrate the concepts of multithreading and Applets in java programming.
• Write java programs for solving electrical circuits and networks.
Unit I OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING 9
Object Oriented Programming – objects and classes – Abstraction – Encapsulation - Inheritance – Polymorphism.
OOPs in Java – Characteristics, Advantages of Java – Java Virtual Machine – Java Source File Structure – Compilation,
Fundamental Programming Structures in Java. Data Types, Variables, Operators, Control Statements, Loops, Arrays
and functions.
Unit II INTRODUCTION TO JAVA PROGRAMMING 9
Objects and classes in Java - defining classes - methods - access specifiers - static members - constructors - Interface,
Defining an Interface, implementing interface, differences between classes and interfaces–Strings - String Buffer -
String Tokenizer.
Unit III INHERITANCE AND EXCEPTION HANDLING 9
Inheritance - class hierarchy - final keyword - polymorphism - dynamic binding - abstract classes - inner classes-
Exceptions - exception hierarchy - throwing and catching exceptions - Try-with Catch Block Handling Multiple
Exceptions.
Unit IV MULTITHREADING AND APPLETS 9
Multi threaded programming - thread states - thread life cycle - thread properties - thread synchronization - Inter
thread Communication - Suspending, Resuming, and Stopping Threads. Introduction to Applet - Applet Life Cycle -
Event handling in Applets.
Unit V APPLICATIONS IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 9
JAVA Program for solving electrical circuits problems using Ohm’s Law – Kirchhoff’s laws. Program for the solution of
DC and AC Circuits – Resistors in series and parallel circuits– Network Theorems- Thevenin’s and Norton’s Theorem
– Superposition – Maximum power transfer Theorem. Programs for the solution of two port networks.
Text Book:
1. E.BalaGurusamy, “Programming with java A Primer”, Tata McGraw, Hill Education, Fourth Edition, 2009.
Reference Book:
1. P.J.Deitel&H.M.Deitel, “Java: How to Program Java 2”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition, 2011.
2. Herbert Schildt, “Java The Complete Reference“,TataMcgrawHill, Eight Edition, 2011.
3. Y.Daniel Liang “ Introduction to Java Programming” 7th Edition, Pearson Education,2013.
Extensive Reading:
• http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/java/
• http://www.java2s.com/Tutorial/Java/CatalogJava.htm
• http://www.javatpoint.com/java-swing/
• https://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/collections/intro/
• http://way2java.com/java-versions-2/jdk-1-8-features/
PAGE 346
19EEH22 DATA ANALYSIS USING PYTHON FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Fundamentals of Object Oriented Programming in Python.
• Python data types Lists, Tuples and Dictionaries.
• Functions in Python.
• OOP’s programming Objects and Classes in Python.
• I/O and Error handling methods in Python.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the fundamental concepts of python programming.
• Explicate python data types Lists, Tuples and Dictionaries.
• Describe python functions.
• Write simple python code using classes and objects.
• Implement I/O and Error handling concepts in Python.
Unit I PYTHON FUNDAMENTALS 9
Introduction to Object Oriented Programming concepts: Objects-Classes-Encapsulation-Inheritance-Data
Abstraction, Message Passing & Dynamic binding.
Started with Python: Keywords and identifiers- Syntax and Semantics- Statements & Comments-Variables-
Operators, Data types, Strings and String Methods, Conditional Looping and Control statements.
Unit II LISTS,TUPLES & DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, Indexing, Slicing, and Matrixes, Tuples: Tuple operations – Dictionaries – Dictionaries in action
– Basic dictionary operations –Dictionary methods. Functions– Nested functions– Recursive functions – Anonymous
functions.
Unit III PYTHON FUNCTIONS 9
Coding functions –Scopes and Nested functions – Non local statement – Argument passing basics –Function design
concepts - Recursive functions –Anonymous functions – Mapping functions.
Unit IV CLASSES,OBJECTS & APPLICATIONS 9
Classes in Python– Creating Classes – Instance Methods– Class Variables–Objects– Constructor, destructors and
Inheritance.
Applications: Simulation & Analysis of – Linear Circuits using R, L & C – non-linear circuits using Diodes–Half wave
and Full wave rectifiers.
Unit V I/O & ERROR HANDLING IN PYTHON 9
Introduction–Data streams –File Operations– Reading Data From a File – Writing Data to a File – Access Modes –
Exceptions– Exception Hierarchy – Handling IO Exceptions.
Text Book:
1. Y. Daniel Liang, “Introduction to Programming Using Python”, Pearson Education 2013.
2. Shivkumar V. Iyer, “Simulating Nonlinear Circuits with Python Power Electronics - An Open-Source Simulator
Based on Python”, 2018.
Reference Book:
1. Jason Cannon, “Python Programming for Beginners”, O,Reilly, 2010.
2. David Beazley, Brain K Jones, “Python CookBook”, Third edition,2013.
3. Chun, Wesley J, “Core Python Programming”, Pearson Education, 2012.
4. Guttag, John V, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python”, PHI Learning Private Limited,
New Delhi, 2014.
5. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist’’, 2nd edition, updated for Python 3’
O’REILLY Shroff Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd, 2016
6. GuidovanRossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, “An Introduction to Python – Revised and updated for Python 3.2,
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.tutorialspoint.com/python/
• http://www.learnpython.org/
• http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/python
• http://www.pyschools.com/
• http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cpPG0bKHYKc&noredirect=1
• http://www.python-course.eu/python3_course.php
PAGE 347
19EEH23 DATA MANAGEMENT FOR SMART GRID L T P C

Course Objective:
• Fundamentals of Database
• management systems in smart grid applications
• features of structured query language
• Contemporary logical design methods and tools for database transactions
• query processing and optimization
Course Outcome:
• Draw the ER diagram for smart grid applications
• Design smart grid databases using relational model
• Query the smart grid database using SQL
• Apply normalization techniques on the database
• Perform transaction and concurrency control techniques
Unit I DATABASE FUNDAMENTALS 9
Purpose of Database Systems – View of Data - Database System Architecture – Database Users and Administrators –
Data Models – Structure of Network Model – Structure of Hierarchical Model – Entity Relationship Model –
Constraints – Entity Sets – Attributes – Keys – E-R Diagrams - Design Issues – Entity Relationship diagram for Smart
Grid applications.
Unit II RELATIONAL DATABASE MODEL 9
Introduction of Relational Model – Structure of Relational Databases – Schema Diagrams – Relational Query
Languages - Relational Algebra – Selection – Projection – Join – Relational database model for Smart Grid
applications.
Unit III STRUCTURED QUERY LANGUAGE 9
Overview of SQL query language – SQL Data definition – Basic Structure of SQL Queries – Additional Basic
Operations – Set Operations – Null values – Aggregate Operations –Views – Integrity Constraints – Authorization
Unit IV NORMALIZATION 9
Functional Dependencies – Non-loss Decomposition – Dependency Preservation - First, Second, Third Normal
Forms – Boyce Codd Normal Form
Unit V TRANSACTION AND CONCURRENCY CONTROL 9
Transaction Model – ACID properties – Transaction States – Serializability – Conflict Serializability – View
Serializability – Testing Serializability. Concurrency Control – Lock Based Protocols – Deadlocks – Multiple
Granularity – Time Stamp Based Protocols – Validation Based Protocols.
Practical Course 0
Text Book:
1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, McGraw Hill, Sixth Edition,
2011.
2. C.J.Date, A.Kannan and S.Swamynathan, ”An Introduction to Database Systems”, Pearson Education, Eighth
Edition, 2006.
Reference Book:
1. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education/Addison Wesley, Sixth
Edition, 2014.
2. Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design, Implementation and
Management”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2009.
3. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, “Database Management Systems”, McGraw Hill, Third Edition, 2004.
Extensive Reading:
• https://ieeexplore.ieee.org/document/5981411
• https://online.stanford.edu/courses/xeiet137-smart-grid-sensing-data-analytics-and-control
• http://www.1keydata.com/datawarehousing/data-modeling-levels.html
• http://www.cs.uwaterloo.ca/~gweddell/cs448/Arch.pdf
• http://www.sql-tutorial.net/SQL-tutorial.asp
PAGE 348
19EEH24 COMMUNICATION AND DATA SECURITY IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• computer network models
• Network access control and Transport level security
• Wireless security and Email security
• IP level security and Firewall
• Program security
Course Outcome:
• brief architecture of the computer network models
• explain the threats in Network access control and Transport level security
• explicate the concept of Wireless security measures and Email security
• expound the IP level security and Firewall
• elucidate the security measures at Program level
Unit I COMMUNICATION 9
Data Communications - Networks – Networks models – OSI model – Layers in OSI model – TCP / IP protocol suite -
Architecture of Wireless LAN – IEEE802.11 Wireless LAN – Bluetooth architecture
Unit II NETWORK ACCESS CONTROL AND TRANSPORT-LEVEL SECURITY 9
Network Access Control and Cloud Security- Network Access Control- Extensible Authentication Protocol- IEEE
802.1X Port-Based Network Access Control- Cloud Computing- Cloud Security Risks and Countermeasures- Data
Protection in the Cloud- Cloud Security as a Service
Transport-Level Security: Web Security Consideration- Transport Layer Security- HTTPS- Secure Shell (SSH).
Unit III WIRELESS NETWORK SECURITY & ELECTRONIC MAIL SECURITY 9
Wireless Network Security: Wireless Security- Mobile Device Security- IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN Overview- IEEE
802.11i Wireless LAN Security
Electronic Mail Security: Internet Mail Architecture- E-mail Formats- E-mail Threats and Comprehensive E-mail
Security- S/MIME- Pretty Good Privacy- Domainkeys Identified Mail.
Unit IV IP SECURITY AND FIREWALLS 9
IP Security: IP Security Overview- IP Security Policy- Encapsulating Security Payload- Combining Security
Associations- Internet Key Exchange
Intruders - Intrusion Detection - Password Management -Firewalls: The Need for Firewalls-Firewall Characteristics
and Access Policy-Types of Firewalls-Firewall Basing-Firewall Location and Configurations.
Unit V PROGRAM SECURITY 9
Secure programs – Non-malicious program errors – Viruses – Targeted malicious code – Controls against program
threat – Control of access to general objects – User authentication – Secure coding practices – Vulnerabilities in
web applications
Practical Course 0
Text Book:
1. William Stallings “Network Security Essentials: Applications and Standards”, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education,
2016.
2. Charles P. Pfleeger, Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Security in Computing”, Pearson Education,Fifth Edition, 2015.
Reference Book:
1. Shuangbao Wang, Robert S.Ledley, “Computer Architecture and Security: Fundamentals of Designing Secure
Computer Systems”, Wiley, 2013.
2. Joachim Biskup,”Security in Computing Systems: Challenges, Approaches and Solutions”, Springer-Verlag,2009.
3. Brook S.E.Schoenfield, “Securing Systems: Applied Security Architecture and Threat Models”,CRC Press 2015.
4. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practices”, Prentice Hall, Fifth Edition,
2010.
5. Matt Bishop, “Introduction to Computer Security”, Addison-Wesley, 2004.
6. Michael Whitman, Herbert J. Mattord, “Management of Information Security”, Course Technology, Third
Edition, 2010
7. Matt Bishop, “Computer Security: Art and Science”, Addison-Wesley, First Edition, 2002
8. Michael Whitman, Herbert J. Mattord, ”Principles of Information Security”, Cengage Learning, Fourth Edition,
2011.
9. Behrouz A. Forouzan , ,”Data Communication and Networking” , McGraw Hill,2013.
10. Behrouz A. Forouzan and DebdeepMukhopadhyay, “Cryptography and Network Security”, McGraw Hill
PAGE 349
Education, 2010
Extensive Reading:
• Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman and Mike Speciner, ―Network Security‖, PrenticeHall of India,2002
• Dr. Wenliang Du, “Computer & Internet Security: A Hands-on Approach”, 2nd Edition, 2019
• Wade Trappe, Lawrence C Washington, “Introduction to Cryptography with coding theory”, 2nd edition,
Pearson, 2007
• Bruce Schneier and Neils Ferguson, ―Practical Cryptography‖, First Edition, Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt Ltd,
2003
• W. Mao, “Modern Cryptography – Theory and Practice”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2007
• https://www.owasp.org/index.php/Top_10_2010
• http://cwe.mitre.org/top25/index.html
• http://www.insecure.org
• http://www.27000.org
• www.intechopen.com/books/cryptography-and-security-in-computing
• https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/seccrypto/cryptography-reference
• https://www.cisco.com/c/en_in/products/security/firewalls/what-is-a-firewall.html
• https://digitalguardian.com/blog/what-email-security-data-protection-101
PAGE 350
19EEH25 OPTIMIZATION STUDIES IN ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• various optimization methods
• non-traditional optimization techniques
Course Outcome:
• elucidate the concept of approaching optimization problem
• explicate the procedure to apply the constraints while solving optimization problem
• solve convex optimization problems.
• apply multiple objectives while solving the optimization problem
• explain various non traditional methods of solving optimization problem
Unit I OPTIMIZATION OVERVIEW 9
Optimization - Optimization Methods For Engineers – Mathematical Models – Characteristics of Optimization
Models – Limitations of Optimization Models – Procedural steps of Optimization – Application areas
Formulation of Optimization problems – Decision variable and Decision vector – Design constraints –Boundary
conditions - Formulation
Unit II CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION ALGORITHM 9
Set Constrained Optimization Problem- Local and Global Optimal Points- Optimality Conditions- Least Square
Optimization- General Optimization Algorithms- Steepest Descent Method
Unit III CONVEX PROGRAMMING 9
Convex set - Convex Function- Standard Optimization Problem – Convex problem - Power Dispatching in
Interconnected Microgrids . DUALITY Lagrangian Function- Dual Problem- Karush–Kuhn–Tucker Conditions-
Lagrangian Algorithm
Unit IV MULTIOBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION 9
Multi-objective Optimization – Surrogate Worth Trade-off approach – Multi-objective Thermal Power Dispatch
sample system – Multi-objective Active and Reactive power Dispatch sample system-
Multi-objective Stochastic Optimal Thermal Power Dispatch : Ɛ-constraint method and Surrogate Worth Trade off
Method
Unit V NON TRADITIONAL OPTIMIZATION METHODS 9
Principle, Algorithm, Flowchart –Genetic Algorithm – Particle Swarm Optimization - Tabu search algorithm - Ant
colony optimization - Bacteria Foraging optimization - Artificial Bee colony – Cuckoo Search Algorithm.
Text Book:
1. Optimization methods for Engineers By N.V.S. Raju PHI Learning Pvt. Limited, 2014
2. Optimization in Electrical Engineering By Mohammad Fathi,HassanBevrani, Springer , 2019
3. Power System Optimization by D.P.Kothari, J.S.Dhillon, PHI, 2006
Reference Book:
1. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Multi objective optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008.
2. Electric Power Systems Applications of optimization, James A. Momoh,Second Edition, CRC Press, 2009.
PAGE 351
19ECH01 SENSORS AND ACTUATORS L T P C

Offered by ECE (Emerging Area Course offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To recognize different types of sensors and actuators for different environments.
• To learn about the different measurements using sensors
• To identify suitable sensors and actuators for developing engineering applications.
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the Performance characteristics of Sensors, and Actuators
• Illustrate the concepts of Thermal sensors and actuators
• Explain the concept of Optical sensors and actuators
• Narrate the concept of Electric and magnetic sensors and actuators
• Apply suitable sensors and actuators for engineering applications.
Unit I CLASSIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9
Classification of Sensors and Actuators - General Requirements for Interfacing - Units and Measures - Transfer
function - Impedance and Impedance matching - Range, Span, Resolution, Accuracy, Errors, Repeatability, Sensitivity
and Sensitivity analysis - Hysteresis , Nonlinearity and saturation - Frequency Response, Response Time and
Bandwidth - Calibration - Excitation - Deadband - Reliability.
Unit II TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND THERMAL ACTUATORS 9
Units of Temperature - Thermo resistive Sensors: Thermistors, Resistance temperature sensors - Silicon resistive
sensors - Thermoelectric Sensors - PN Junction Temperature Sensors - Optical and Acoustical Sensors - Thermo
mechanical sensors and Actuators
Unit III OPTICAL SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9
Optical Units and materials - Effects of Optical Radiation - Quantum-Based Optical Sensors - Photoelectric Sensors -
Coupled Charge (CCD) Sensors and Detectors - Thermal-Based Optical Sensors - Active Far Infrared (AFIR) Sensors -
Optical Actuators.
Unit IV ELECTRIC, MAGNETIC SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9
Units - The Electric Field: Capacitive Sensors and Actuators - Magnetic Fields: Inductive sensors and Hall effect
sensors - Magnetohydrodynamic (MHD) Sensors and Actuators - Magnetometers - Magnetic Actuators - Voltage and
Current Sensors -
Unit V MECHANICAL SENSORS AND ACTUATORS, RADIATION SENSORS, MEMS AND SMART SENSORS 9
Force Sensors – Accelerometers - Pressure Sensors – Gyroscopes - Radiation Sensors - Microwave Radiation -
Antennas as Sensors and Actuators - MEMS Sensors and Actuators - Smart Sensors and Actuators - Sensor Networks
Text Book:
1. Nathan Ida, “Sensors, Actuators and their Interfaces”, Scitech publishing, 2013.
2. Patranabis D, “Sensor and Actuators”, Prentice Hall of India (Pvt) Ltd. 2005
Reference Book:
1. Clarence W. de Silva, “Sensors and Actuators: Engineering System Instrumentation”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press,
2015
2. Ernest O. Doeblin, “Measurement system, Application and design”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,
Fifth Edition, 2004
3. Bradley D.A., Dawson D, Burd N C ,Loader A J,” Mechatronics”, Thomson Press India Ltd., 2004
4. Renganathan.S,”Transducer Engineering”, Allied Publishers (P) Ltd., 2003.
5. Bolton W.,” Mechatronics”, 4th edition, Pearson,2011.
Extensive Reading:
• www.endnote.com/downloads/style/sensors-and-actuators
• www.iav.com/en/engineering/.../sensor-and-actuator-systems
• www.biophysics.org/2015naiwat
PAGE 352
19EEH41 DIGITAL MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• Digital methods of measurements – Current, Voltage and Time measurements.
• Working principle of signal generators and various signal analyzers.
• Concepts of digital display unit and recording devices.
• Concepts of PC based data acquisition system.
Course Outcome:
• Expound the working of various digital meters for measurements of current, voltage and time.
• Explicate the working of various signal and wave generators.
• Explain the working of various signal and wave analyzers.
• Select suitable digital transducers, display and recording devices for modern electronic systems.
• Design a suitable PC based data acquisition system for accurate measurement of physical quantities.
Unit I DIGITAL METHODS OF MEASUREMENTS 9
Digital voltmeters and multimeters – Automation and accuracy of digital voltmeters and multimeters – Digital phase
meters – Digital tachometers – Digital frequency, period and time measurements – Low frequency measurements –
Automatic time and frequency scaling
Unit II SIGNAL GENERATORS 9
Signal Generators: AF, RF Signal Generators, Sweep Frequency Generators, Pulse and Square wave Generators,
Function Generators, Arbitrary Waveform Generator and Specifications.
Unit III SIGNAL ANALYZERS 9
AF, HF Wave Analyzers, Harmonic Distortion, Heterodyne wave Analyzers, Spectrum Analyzers, Power Analyzers,
Capacitance-Voltage Meters, Oscillators. .
Unit IV DIGITAL TRANSDUCERS, DISPLAY & RECORDING DEVICES 9
Digital Transducers: Shaft Encoders- Optical encoder- Sliding contact encoder- Magnetic encoder- Proximity sensor
encoder- Incremental Optical Encoders- Absolute Optical Encoders-Digital storage oscilloscopes – Digital printers
and plotters –LCD and LED display.
Unit V DIGITAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM 9
Digital Data Acquisition System: Interfacing transducers to Electronics Control and Measuring System.
Instrumentation Amplifier, Isolation Amplifier. An Introduction to Computer-Controlled Test Systems.IEEE-488 GPIB
Bus.
Text Book:
1. Doebelin, ‘Measurement System, Application & Design’, IV Ed, McGraw-Hill, Fifth Edition, 2018.
2. Modern Electronics Instrumentation & Measurement Techniques, by Albert D.Helstrick and William D.Cooper,
Pearson Education, 2016.
3. Bouwens, A.J., “Digital Instrumentation”, McGraw Hill, 1997.
Reference Book:
1. Sawhney A K, “A Course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”, DhanpatRai& Sons,
New Delhi, 18th Edition, 2012.
2. Gupta J.B., “A Course in Electronic and Electrical Measurements”, S. K. Kataria& Sons, Delhi, 2009
3. Kalsi H.S, “Electronic Instrumentation”, McGraw Hill Education India, 3rd Edition, 2010
PAGE 353
19EEH42 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• various measuring techniques for acceleration, vibration, force, pressure, temperature, level and flow
• various methods of acceleration, vibration, force and pressure measurement practiced in industries.
• different temperature measurement techniques and its selection.
• different electrical methods of level and flow measurement practiced in industries and to select appropriate
sensor.
Course Outcome:
• Perform characteristics analysis of the various Transducers used in Industries.
• Explain the instruments used for measurement of acceleration, vibration and force
• Describe the instruments used for measurement of pressure and Calibrate the measuring instruments
• Expound the instruments used for measurement of temperature, and design a signal conditioning circuits for
RTD transducers
• Explicate the instruments used for measurement of level and flow and select the instruments according to the
application.
Unit I CHARACTERISTICS, ERRORS & STANDARDS OF INSTRUMENTS 9
Functional elements of generalized instrumentation systems- Static and dynamic characteristics of measuring
instruments- Absolute, gross, systematic, random and limiting errors in measurements - Statistical estimation of
measurements data:- Arithmetic mean, Average deviation, Standard deviation, Variance and Probable error of
mean – Standards and calibration.
Unit II MEASUREMENT OF ACCELERATION, VIBRATION AND FORCE 9
Accelerometers: LVDT, Piezoelectric and Strain gauge type accelerometers - Seismic instruments as accelerometer -
Vibration sensor. Different types of load cells: Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Strain gauge and Piezoelectric load cells.
Unit III PRESSURE MEASUREMENT 9
Units of pressure – Elastic type pressure gauges: Bourdon tube, bellows and diaphragms - Capacitive type pressure
gauge – Piezo-resistive pressure sensor- Thermal conductivity gauges – Ionization gauge - calibration of pressure
gauges. Dead weight tester.
Unit IV LOW AND HIGH TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9
Different types of filled in system thermometers - Bimetallic thermometers-Calibration of thermometers - RTD -
characteristics and signal conditioning- 3 lead and 4 lead RTDs – Thermistors. Thermocouples and their types-
compensation techniques -Radiation methods of temperature measurement - Total radiation pyrometers - Optical
pyrometers.
Unit V ELECTRICAL TYPE LEVEL AND FLOW MEASUREMENT 9
Electrical types of level measurement:– Principle and constructional details of Conductivity sensors – Capacitive
Sensors – Ultrasonic gauge -Differential pressure transmitter-Principle and constructional details of Electromagnetic
flow meter – Ultrasonic flow meters – Target flow meter.
Text Book:
1. Doebellin, E.O.andManik D.N., “Measurement systems Application and Design”, Special Indian Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, 2018.
2. Jones. B.E," Instrument Technology”, Vol.2, Butterworth-Heinemann, International Edition, 2003.
3. A. K. Sawhney, PuneetSawhney, “Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation and Control”,
DhanpatRai& Sons, New Delhi, 2013
Reference Book:
1. Liptak, B.G., “Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement)”, CRC Press, 2005
2. Patranabis,D., “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
3. Eckman D.P., “Industrial Instrumentation”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2003.
4. S.K.Singh., “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw - Hill Education, 2008.
5. Jain, R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1999.
PAGE 354
19EEH43 PROCESS CONTROL L T P C

Course Objective:
• Dynamics of various processes.
• the features associated with Industrial type PID controller.
• characteristics, selection, sizing of control valves.
• various PID tuning methods.
• different types of control schemes such as cascade control, feed forward control and Model Based control
schemes.
Course Outcome:
• Build the mathematical model of Simple systems
• Analyze system design and implement control schemes for various processes.
• Select suitable Final control elements for process control applications.
• Tune the PID Controllers to achieve desired performance for various processes
• Narrate simple control methods with multi-loop control.
Unit I PROCESS DYNAMICS 9
Need for process control – Mathematical model of Flow, Level, and Thermal processes – Interacting and non-
interacting systems –Continuous and batch processes –Servo and regulatory operations – Heat exchanger.
Unit II CONTROL ACTIONS 9
Characteristic of on-off, proportional, single speed floating, integral and derivative controllers – Proportional plus
Integral (PI), Proportional plus Derivative (PD) and Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative (PID) Control modes –
Electronic PID controllers – Auto transfer - Reset windup.
Unit III FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS 9
Current to Pressure (I/P) converter – Pneumatic, Hydraulic and Electric actuators – Valve Positioner – Control Valves
– Characteristic of Control Valves: - Inherent and Installed characteristics,Control Valve Sizing, Control Valve
selection.
Unit IV CONTROLLER TUNING 9
Tuning of PID Controllers – Process reaction curve method – Continuous-cycling method – Damped oscillation
method, Introduction to Auto tuning of PID controllers.
Unit V MULTILOOP CONTROL 9
Methods of process control – Feed-forward control – Ratio control – Cascade control – Inferential control,
Introduction to multivariable control– Model Predictive Control.
Text Book:
1. Myke King, “Process Control: A Practical Approach”, John Wiley & Sons, 2016
2. D. Patranabis, “Principles of Process Control,” Tata McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Bequette, B.W., “Process Control Modeling, Design and Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
2. Stephanopoulos, G., “Chemical Process Control - An Introduction to Theory and Practice”, Prentice Hallof India,
2005.
3. Dale E. Seborg, Duncan A. Mellichamp, Thomas F. Edgar, Francis J. Doyle, “Process Dynamics and Control”,
Technology & Engineering – 2010.
4. Sudheer S. Bhagade, Govind Das Nageshwar, “Process Dynamics and Control”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
5. Curtis D. Johnson “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, eighth Edition, Pearson, 2006.
6. Seborg, D.E., Edgar, T.F. and Mellichamp, D.A., “Process Dynamics and Control”, Wiley John andSons, second
Edition, 2003.
PAGE 355
19EEH44 MEMS SENSORS AND ACTUATORS L T P C

Course Objective:
• the concept of MEMS technology and the materials used.
• new fabrication methods used in MEMS technology.
• differentiating MEMS sensors and actuators based on electrostatic and thermal principles.
• the design of new MEMS devices based on various principles.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the concept of MEMS technology and MEMS materials.
• Express the different fabrication methods used of MEMS technology and issues related to packaging and
reliability.
• Differentiate MEMS sensors and actuators based on electrostatic and thermal principles.
• Find suitable applications of MEMS sensors and actuators working based on thermal principles.
• Explicate the design of new MEMS devices based on various principles.
Unit I MICRO-FABRICATION, MATERIALS AND ELECTROMECHANICAL CONCEPTS 9
Overview of Micro-fabrication Silicon and other material based fabrication processes- conductivity of
semiconductors-crystal planes and orientation-stress and strain-flexural beam bending analysis-torsional
deflections-Intrinsic stress-resonant frequency and quality factor-photolithography
Unit II ELECTROSTATIC SENSORS AND ACTUATION 9
Principle-material-design and fabrication of parallel plate capacitors as electrostatic sensors-capacitive pressure
sensor- comb drive -micro motors- actuators-.Applications.
Unit III THERMAL SENSING AND ACTUATION 9
Principle-material-design and fabrication of thermocouples- thermal bimorph sensors- thermal resistor sensors-
actuators- Applications
Unit IV PIEZOELECTRIC SENSING AND ACTUATION 9
Piezo-electric effect - cantilever piezo electric actuator model - properties of piezo-electric materials- Applications.
Acceleration sensors - gyroscopes-piezo-resistive sensors-magnetic actuation-micro fluids applications-medical
applications- optical MEMS.
Reference Book:
1. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson International Edition, 2012.
2. Tai-Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture”, McGraw Hill, 2002.
3. Stephen Senturia, “Microsystems Design”, Springer, 2006.
4. Marc Madou, “Fundamentals of micro fabrication”, CRC Press, 1997.
5. Boston, “Micro machined Transducers Sourcebook”, WCB McGraw Hill, 1998.
6. M.H.Bao, “Micromechanical Transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers and gyroscopes”, Elsevier, New
York, 2000
7. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, editor, “ The MEMS Handbook”, CRC press Baco Raton, 2001.
8. NadimMaluf,“ An Introduction to Micro Electro Mechanical System Design”, Artech House, 2000
PAGE 356
19EEH45 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Data networks protocol.
• Concepts of PLC programming.
• Architecture of Distributed Control Systems.
• Highway Addressable Remote Transducer communication protocols
Course Outcome:
• Select a suitable Data link control protocol
• Explicate the Architecture of Programmable Logic Controllers and Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
• Do simple programs for simple applications using bit logic instructions and timers & counters
• Use Distributed Control System for controlling the various processes in Industries
• Use Highway Addressable Remote Transducer Communication Protocols for process control applications
Unit I DATA NETWORK FUNDAMENTALS 9
Network hierarchy and switching – ISO/OSI Reference model – Data link control protocol:- HDLC - media
accessprotocol :- Command / response, Token passing and CSMA/CD – TC TCP/IP – Bridges – Routers – Gateways –
Standard ETHERNET and ARCNET Configuration.
Unit II PLC AND SCADA 9
Evolutions of Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) – Sequential and Programmable Controllers – Architecture –
Comparative study of Industrial PLC – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA):- Hardware and software,
Remote terminal units, Master station, Communication architectures and open SCADA protocols.
Unit III PLC PROGRAMMING 9
PLC Programming: - Ladder logic, Functional block programming, sequential function chat, Instruction list.
Unit IV DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9
Distributed Control System (DCS) – Various Architectures – Comparison – Local control unit – Process interfacing
issues – Displace study of any one DCS available in market - case studies in DCS.
Unit V HART AND FIELD BUS 9
Introduction – Evolution of Signal standard – Highway Addressable Remote Transducer (HART) Communication
Protocol – Communication Modes – HART Commands – HART Applications Field Bus-Introduction, General field bus
Architecture, Basic requirements of Field bus standard, Field Bus topology, Interoperability and Interchangeability –
Introduction to OLE for process control(OPC).
Practical Course 0
Text Book:
1. F.D. Petruzella, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, Third edition, 2010
2. Michael P. Lukas, Distributed Control Systems: Their Evaluation and Design, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., 2016.
3. Clarke, G., Reynders, D. and Wright, E., “Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: DNP3,60870.5 and Related
Systems”, Newnes, 1st Edition, 2004.
Reference Book:
1. T.A. Hughes, Programmable Controllers, Fourth edition, ISA press, 2005
2. Krishna Kant, Computer Based Industrial Control, Second edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010
3. John W. Webb and Ronald A. Reis, ‘Programmable Logic Controllers, Fifth edition, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2010
4. John R. Hackworth and Frederick D. Hackworth Jr, Programmable Logic Controllers, Pearson, New Delhi, 2004.
5. Bowten, R “HART Application Guide”, HART Communication foundation, 1999.
6. Berge, J.,“Field Busses for process control: Engineering, operation, maintenance“, ISA press, 2004
PAGE 357
19ECH02 IOT ARCHITECTURE AND FRAMEWORK L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the concepts and perspectives of Internet of Things
• To apply the knowledge on IoT architecture and modules
• To design Internet of Things with Embedded systems using data analytics
Course Outcome:
• Determine the supporting technologies for design of IoT applications
• Apply the architecture and core modules for IoT applications
• Develop IoT applications using embedded systems
• Illustrate the necessary framework required for IoT application
• Apply data analytics for IoT applications
Unit I IOT CONCEPTS AND ENABLING TECHNOLOGIES 9
Introduction – Definition and Characteristics of IoT – Benefits of IoT –Physical design of IoT – Logical design of IoT –
IoT Enabling Technologies–Resource Management – Resource Partitioning – Computation Offloading - Identification
and Resource/Service Discovery – IoT Levels
Unit II IOT ARCHITECTURE AND ITS CORE MODULES 9
Reference architecture for IoT – SOA based & API oriented architecture – Four layer architecture – Seven Layer
architecture – fog computing – Open stack cloud architecture – Gateways,Edge Devices, Data acquisition systems,
Cloud services.
Unit III EMBEDDED PROTOTYPING OF IOT 9
Overview of Raspberry Pi – General-Purpose Input/Outputs – Sensors with Raspberry Pi – Actuators with Raspberry
Pi –Web Server with Raspberry Pi – Raspberry Pi as a Database Server – ESP8266 WiFi Module – Block Diagram,
Features, applications
Unit IV IOT FRAMEWORK & INDUSTRIAL IOT 9
IoT Value Chain – IoT Platforms – Cisco, Salesforce, Azure IoT, Eclipse IoT, Thingworx, GE Predix, AWS IoT, Watson
IoT, Kaa – Introduction to Industrial Internet of Things & Industry 4.0 – IIoT Architecture – Applications and
Challenges
Unit V DATA ANALYTICS & IOT CASE STUDIES 9
IoT Data Management – Analytics –ApacheHadoop–ProgrammingModel,JobExecution,Hadoop Cluster – Case
Studies – Smart Parking, Smart Irrigation Control, Air Pollution Monitoring, Forest Fire Detection, Weather
Forecasting.
Text Book:
1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things, A Hands-on-Approach”, 1st Edition, Universities press Pvt.
Ltd., India, 2015.
2. Mayur Ramgir, “Internet of Things- Architecture, Implementation, and Security”, 1st Edition, Pearson
Education,India, 2019
Reference Book:
1. Rajkumar Buyya, Amir VahidDastjerdi, “Internet of Things: Principles and Paradigms”, 1st Edition, Elsevier, USA,
2016
2. Dimitrios Serpanos, Marilyn Wolf, “Internet-of-things (IoT) systems: architectures, algorithms, methodologies”,
1st Edition, Springer, UK, 2017.
3. Charles Bell, “Beginning Sensor Networks with Arduino and Raspberry Pi” , 1st Edition, Apress Publishers, USA,
2013.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.raspberrypi.org/
• https://nurdspace.nl/images/e/e0/ESP8266_Specifications_English.pdf
• https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_cs24
• https://swayam.gov.in/nd2_arp19_ap52
PAGE 358
19ECH03 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS FOR IOT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To discuss the fundamental concepts of internet protocols an standards
• To examine the protocol standards in data link and networking layers
• To simulate the different protocols through IoT open source tools.
• To describe the security issues of protocols in IoT
Course Outcome:
• Describe the evolving IoT Standards
• Demonstrate and visualize the data link protocols for IoT.
• Elucidate the network protocols and standards for IoT
• Analyse the importance of IoT Edge devices.
• Apply security mechanisms for protocol security.
Unit I EVOLVING IOT STANDARDS 9
Overview and Approaches – IoT Ecosystem – Protocols for IoT- Structural Aspects- Key Technologies-Sensor
Technology-RFID technology – Satellite Technology – CoAP – REST – ETSI M2M
Unit II DATA LINK PROTOCOLS 9
IEEE 802.15.4e - IEEE 802.11 ah – WirelessHART - Z-Wave - Bluetooth Low Energy - Zigbee Smart Energy - DASH7 –
HomePlug - G.9959 - LTE-A – LoRaWAN – Weightless - DECT/ULE
Unit III NETWORK LAYER PROTOCOLS 9
Routing Protocols – RPL – CORPL – CARP - Encapsulation Protocols - 6LoWPAN - 6TiSCH - 6Lo - IPv6 over G.9959 -
IPv6 over Bluetooth Low Energy - Session Layer Protocols – MQTT – SMQTT – XMPP – DDS
Unit IV IOT EDGE COMPUTING 9
Edge Computing – Purpose and Definition– Edge Hardware Architectures – Operating System – Edge Platforms –
Virtualisation – Containers – Use Cases – Ambient Computing – Synthetic Sensing
Unit V SECURITY AND PRIVACY 9
Security Issues in the IoT - Security Mechanisms- Key Agreement, Distribution, and Security Bootstrapping -Key
Agreement Protocols.Privacy Issues in the IoT - Role of Authorization - IoT-OAS: Delegation-based Authorization for
the Internet of Things - IoT-OAS Application Scenarios
Text Book:
1. Geng, Hwaiyu. "Internet of Things and Data Analytics in the Cloud with Innovation and Sustainability." The
Internet of Things & Data Analytics Handbook ,2017.
2. Simone Cirani, Gianluigi Ferrari, Marco Picone, Luca Veltri - Internet of Things_ Architectures, Protocols and
Standards-Wiley ,2018.
3. Perry Lea, “ IoT and Edge Computing for Architects_ Implementing edge and IoT systems from sensors to clouds
with communication systems, analytics, and security, 2nd Edition” ,Packt Publishing, 2020.
Reference Book:
1. Jan Holler, VlasiosTsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stefan Avesand, Stamatis Karnouskos, David Boyle, “From
Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things: Introduction to a New Age of Intelligence”, 1st Edition,
Academic Press, 2014
2. Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on Approach)”, 1st Edition, VPT, 2014
3. Perry Lea , “Internet of Things for Architects_ Architecting IoT solutions by implementing sensors,
communication infrastructure, edge computing, analytics, and security”,Packt Publishing ,2018
4. Daniel Minoli, “Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6: The Evolving World of M2M
Communications”, ISBN: 978-1-118-47347-4, Wiley Publications, 2013.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.postscapes.com/internet-of-things-protocols/
• https://www.edx.org/course/iot-networks-and-protocols
• https://www.experfy.com/training/courses/iot-messaging-with-mqtt-coap
• https://swayam.gov.in/nd2_arp19_ap52
PAGE 359
19ECH04 CLOUD SERVICES FOR IOT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To comprehend the cloud architecture and its services
• To illustrate the various sensors and their cloud interfaces
• To learn the cloud platforms of IoT
• To understand the various cloud services for IoT
• To familiarize the applications security issues
Course Outcome:
• Build an appropriate cloud architecture and identify the cloud services
• Handle various sensors and the technologies
• Develop IoT applications using cloud platforms
• Integrate the IoT applications into the cloud services
• Access the security issues in applications and networks
Unit I CLOUD PLATFORM ARCHITECTURE AND SERVICES 9
Cloud computing and service models: Public, Private and Hybrid clouds-Infrastructure as a service(IaaS)-Platfrom as
a service(PaaS)-Software as a service(SaaS)-Architectural design of compute and storage clouds: Layered cloud
architectural development-Architectural design challenges-Public cloud platforms: GAE,AWS and Azure
Unit II PROGRAMMING IOT DEVICES FOR CLOUD INTERFACE 9
Basics of Sensors and actuators – examples and working principles of sensors and actuators – Cloud computing and
IOT – Arduino/Equivalent Microcontroller platform. IoT Communication Technologies – RFID – Bluetooth – Zigbee –
Wifi –Wired Communication
Unit III CLOUD PLATFORMS FOR IOT 9
Thinkspeak IoT Cloud Platform, Kaa Open Source Iot Cloud Platform, AWS IoT Cloud Platform –AWS IoT Device SDK.
Arduino AWS IoT development. Raspberry Pi 3-AWS IoT development
Unit IV CLOUD SERVICES FOR IOT 9
Service Management in Cloud Computing - Service Level Agreements (SLAs), Managing IoT Data – Looking at Data,
Scalability & Cloud Services, Database & Data Stores in Cloud, Large Scale Data Processing.
Unit V SECURITY AND APPLICATIONS 9
Application Safety and Service Vulnerability in Cloud Network- IoT Security and Privacy Preservation-Security and
Challenges in Mobile Cloud Computing-The vital role of Fog computing in Internet of Things
Text Book:
1. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox, Jack G Dongarra, “Distributed and Cloud Computing, From parallel processing to the
Internet of Things”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012.
2. Raj Kamal, “Internet of Things: Architecture and Design Principles”, McGraw-Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2018.
3. Charalampos Doukas, “Building Internet of Things with the Arduino”, Create Space, April 2002.
4. Agus Kurniawan “Learning AWS IoT”Packt Publishing (January 29, 2018)
Reference Book:
1. Dac-Nhuong Le , Chintan Bhatt , Mani Madhukar “Security Designs for the Cloud, IoT, and Social Networking”
John Wiley & Sons (11 October 2019)
2. Honbo Zhou, “The Internet of Things in the Cloud: A Middleware Perspective”, CRC Press, 2013.
3. Marco Schwatrz, “Internet of Things with Arduino Cookbook”, Packt Publications, 2016.
4. Rajkumar Buyya, Christian Vecchiola. S.ThamaraiSelvi, “Mastering Cloud Computing”, McGraw Hill Education,
2013.
5. Nick Antonopoulos and Lee Gillam, “Cloud Computing: Principles, Systems and Applications”, Second Edition,
Springer, 2017.
Extensive Reading:
• https://azure.microsoft.com/en-in/overview/what-is-cloud-computing/
• https://aws.amazon.com/iot/
• http://postscapes.com/projects
• http://www.theinternetofthings.eu/what-is-the-internet-of-things
• https://www.theinternetofthings.eu/digital-world-iot
• https://cloud.google.com/solutions/iot
PAGE 360
19ECH05 BIG DATA ANALYTICS FOR IOT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn Big data analytics for IoT
• To get exposure on IoT semantics and big data streaming analytics
• To be familiar with Processing IoT data for data analytics
• To identify applications that makes use of multimedia Big Data and IoT
• To implement smart systems using IoT
Course Outcome:
• Integrate big data and IoT for IoT analytics
• Process IoT real-time and linked stream data.
• Process and handle IoT Big data using Apache Hadoop
• Work with multimedia Big Data and IoT
• Design and implement smart IoT systems with big data
Unit I BIG DATA INTEGRATION FOR IOT ANALYTICS 9
Introduction to IoT data and Big data – Challenges of IoT analytics applications – IoT analytics life cycle and
techniques –Searching the Internet of Things: Introduction - Search Architecture for Social and Physical Sensors -
Local Event Retrieval - Using Sensor Metadata Streams to Identify Topics of Local Events in the City – Venue
Recommendation
Unit II IOT SEMANTICS AND DATA STREAMING ANALYTICS 9
Introduction – Linking data - Real-time & Linked Stream Processing - Semantic-based Distributed Reasoning - Cross-
Domain Recommender Systems - Semantic Analytics - Semantic Modelling and Validation Tools - Data Reasoning -
Ethical IoT
Unit III PROCESSING OF IOT BIG DATA 9
Apache Hadoop, Employing Hadoop Map Reduce - Creating the components of Hadoop Map Reduce jobs -
Distributing data processing across server farms –Executing Hadoop Map Reduce jobs - Monitoring the progress of
job flows
Unit IV MULTIMEDIA BIGDATA COMPUTING FOR IOT 9
Introduction - Definition and Characteristics – Relationship between IoT and Multimedia Big Data(MMBD) –
Multimedia Big Data LifeCycle - MMBD for IoT Applications - Data Collection – Technologies used - Analysis of
Various Techniques - Opportunities, Issues, and Challenges
Unit V CASE STUDIES OF IOT DATA ANALYTICS 9
Precision Agriculture and its Cyber-Physical Management, IoT implementation for smart cities and future
Challenges, IoT based Intelligent Transportation System for Global Perspective, IoT based implementations for smart
buildings
Text Book:
1. John Soldatos, “Building Blocks for IoT Analytics”, River Publishers Series In Signal, Image and Speech
Processing, 2017.
2. Sudeep Tanwar, Sudhanshu Tyagi, Neeraj Kumar, “Multimedia Big Data Computing for IoT
Applications:Concepts, Paradigms and Solutions”, Springer, 2020
Reference Book:
1. Valentina E. Balas, Vijender Kumar Solanki, Raghvendra Kumar, ManjuKhari, “Internet of Things and Big Data
Analytics for Smart Generation”, Volume 154.
2. Stackowiak, R., Licht, A., Mantha, V., Nagode, L.,” Big Data and The Internet of Things Enterprise Information
Architecture for A New Age”, Apress, 2015.
3. Andrew Minteer, “Analytics for the Internet of Things (IoT): Intelligent analytics for your intelligent devices”,
Packt Publishing, first edition, July 2017.
4. Nilanjan Dey, Aboul Ella Hassanien, Chintan Bhatt, Amira S. Ashour, Suresh Chandra Satapathy, “Internet of
Things and Big Data Analytics Toward Next-Generation Intelligence”, Springer International Publishing, 2018.
Extensive Reading:
• https://data-flair.training/blogs/data-analytics-tutorial/
• https://www.edureka.co/blog/iot-tutorial/
• https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/106105166/L01.html
• https://www.guru99.com/iot-tutorial.html
• https://www.sas.com/en_us/insights/analytics/big-data-analytics.html
PAGE 361
19ECH06 PRIVACY AND SECURITY IN IOT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the security requirements in IoT.
• To learn the cryptographic fundamentals in IoT.
• To understand the working of authentication credentials and access control.
• To familiarize with privacy protection and trust models.
• To familiarize with the various IoT Attacks.
Course Outcome:
• Identify the security requirements in IoT Architecture.
• Apply different cryptographic techniques in IoT Security.
• Apply different solutions in Identity and Access Management.
• Familiarize the privacy preservation and trust models in IoT.
• Develop solutions for different types of IoT attacks.
Unit I INTRODUCTION: SECURING THE IOT 9
Security Requirements in IoT Architecture - Security in Enabling Technologies -Security Concerns in IoT Applications.
Security Architecture in the Internet of Things -Security Requirements in IoT - Insufficient
Authentication/Authorization – Insecure Access Control - Threats to Access Control, Privacy, and Availability -
Attacks Specific to IoT. Vulnerabilities – Secrecy and Secret-Key Capacity -Authentication/Authorization for Smart
Devices - Transport Encryption – Attack & Fault trees
Unit II CRYPTOGRAPHIC FUNDAMENTALS FOR IOT 9
Cryptographic primitives and its role in IoT – Encryption and Decryption – Hashes –Digital Signatures – Random
Number Generation – Cipher Suites – Key Management Fundamentals – Cryptographic Controls Built into IoT
Messaging and Communication Protocols – IoT Node Authentication
Unit III IDENTITY & ACCESS MANAGEMENT SOLUTIONS FOR IOT 9
Identity Lifecycle – Authentication Credentials – IoT IAM infrastructure – Authorization with Publish / Subscribe
Schemes – Access Control
Unit IV PRIVACY PRESERVATION AND TRUST MODELS FOR IOT 9
Concerns in Data Dissemination – Lightweight and Robust Schemes for Privacy Protection – Trust and Trust Models
for IoT – Self-organizing Things - Preventing Unauthorized Access
Unit V IOT ATTACKS - CASE STUDIES 9
MIRAI Botnet Attack -Iran's Nuclear Facility Stuxnet Attack –Tesla Cryptojacking Attack -The TRENDnet Webcam
Attack -The JeepSUV Attack -The Owlet Wi-Fi Baby Heart Monitor Vulnerabilities -St.Jude_Hackable Cardiac Devices
Text Book:
1. Brian Russell, Drew Van Duren, “Practical Internet of Things Security”, Packt Publishing Limited, 2nd
Edition,2018.
2. Shancang Li and Li Da Xu, “Securing the Internet of Things”, Elsevier, 2017.
Reference Book:
1. Fei Hu, “Security and Privacy in Internet of Things (IoTs): Models, Algorithms, and Implementations”, CRC Press,
1st Edition, 2009
Extensive Reading:
• https://subscription.packtpub.com/book/hardware_and_creative/9781785889639/9
• https://www.businessinsider.com/iot-security-privacy?IR=T
• https://www.peerbits.com/blog/biggest-iot-security-challenges.html
• https://www.coursera.org/learn/iot-cyber-security
• https://tools.cisco.com/security/center/resources/secure_iot_proposed_framework
PAGE 362
19ECH21 ENERGY AWARE SENSORS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn about low power sensor systems
• To understand the working of Environmental sensors
• To learn about the use of energy aware sensors for monitoring applications
Course Outcome:
• Identify the different types of deployment of sensors and their low power circuits
• Analyse the assembly of sensor node systems
• Evaluate the different types of network technologies and bus interfaces
• Select sensors/sensor systems and integrate them into an existing monitoring system, collect sensor data and
visualise it.
• Analyse the different case studies on sensor deployment
Unit I SENSOR DEPLOYMENT 9
Deployment of sensors - Sensor field Analysis - Power Consumption in Sensors, Energy Reduction Techniques - Low
Power Modules - Adaptive Hardware
Unit II SENSOR NODE SYSTEMS 9
Sensor nodes- block level description- packaging and assembly- electrical, thermal, mechanical and reliability issues-
wired sensor nodes- wireless sensor nodes- battery and power issues
Unit III NETWORKED ENVIRONMENTAL SENSORS 9
Network technologies and data bus interfaces in use, serial connection, field bus technologies, M-bus, Modbus,
BACnet, LON- Wireless Technologies, GPRS, ZigBee, 6LoWPAN- Deployment of wireless sensors, considerations,
planning- Commissioning of Networked Sensor Systems, Distributed Sensor Networks, Traffic Analysis on Sensor
Network
Unit IV ENERGY AWARE SENSOR SYSTEMS 9
Designing Energy Aware for Sensor Systems - Operating Systems and Power Management - Energy Optimization
for Data Communications and Micro Sensor Network
Unit V APPLICATION CASE STUDIES -3
Plant monitoring - Designing Distributed sensors - WSN for target tracking - Key Management in Multi-Hop WSN -
Maritime Domain awareness - Environmental Monitoring Applications
Text Book:
1. S.Sitharama Iyengar , Richard Brooks, “Distributed Sensor Network – Sensor Networking Applications”, CRC
Press, 2013.
2. S.Sitharama Iyengar , Richard Brooks, “Distributed Sensor Network – Image and sensor signal processing”, CRC
Press, 2013.
3. Hermann Merz, Thomas Hansemann, Christof Hübner, , “Building Automation: Communication systems with
EIB/KNX, LON and BACnet”, Springer, 2nd Edition,2018.
Reference Book:
1. Shengwei Wang, “Intelligent buildings and building automation”, Routledge, 1st edition, 2009
2. Robert Faludi, “Building Wireless Sensor Networks”, O'Reilly Media, 1st edition, Inc.2010
3. Jon S. Wilson, “Sensor technology handbook”, Elsevier Inc., 2005
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.scribd.com/document/151197312/Energy-Aware-Soft
PAGE 363
19ECH22 MULTIDISCIPLINARY SENSORS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn about different types of sensors for mechanical and acoustical environment
• To understand the design of chemical and radiation environment sensors
• To know about the design of MEMS and Smart Sensors
Course Outcome:
• Analyse the physical quantity measurement and making of sensors and actuators
• Apply suitable sensors and Actuators for Acoustic environment
• Select appropriate sensors and actuators for Chemical environment
• Analyse different types of sensors and actuators used in radiation environment
• Introduce smartness in sensors and Interface the sensor with other processing devices
Unit I MECHANICAL SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9
Force Sensors - Tactile Sensors - Accelerometers - Pressure Sensors - Velocity Sensing - Gyroscopes
Unit II ACOUSTIC SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9
Elastic Waves and Their Properties -Microphones - The Piezoelectric Effect - Acoustic Actuators - Ultrasonic Sensors
and Actuators - Piezoelectric Actuators - Piezoelectric Resonators and SAW Devices
Unit III CHEMICAL SENSOR AND ACTUATORS 9
Electrochemical Sensors - Potentiometric Sensors -Thermochemical Sensors - Optical Chemical Sensors - Mass
Sensors - Humidity and Moisture Sensors -Chemical Actuation
Unit IV RADIATION SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9
Radiation Sensors - Ionization Sensors - Microwave Radiation - Antennas as Sensing Elements - Antennas as
Actuators
Unit V MEMS AND SMART SENSORS 9
MEMS Sensors and Actuators: MEMS Sensors - MEMS Actuators - Smart Sensors and Actuators - Wireless Sensors
and Actuator - Modulation and Demodulation - Encoding and Decoding - Sensor Networks
Text Book:
1. Nathan Ida, “Sensors, Actuators, and their Interfaces: A multidisciplinary introduction (Materials, Circuits and
Devices)”, SciTech Publishing,2013
Reference Book:
1. Ilene J.Busch, “Electromechanical Sensors and Actuators”, Springer 1999
2. D. Ballantine, Jr. Robert White, S. Martin Antonio Ricco, E. Zellers, G. Frye ,H. Wohltjen, “Acoustic Wave
Sensors: Theory, Design and Physico-Chemical Applications”, Academic Press Ltd., 1996
3. Dan Zang , Bin Wei,” Advanced Mechatronics and MEMS devices II”, , Springer, 2017
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.oreilly.com/library/view/polymeric-sensors-and/9781118547625/OEBPS/c06.htm
• https://iopscience.iop.org/article/10.1088/0022-3727/41/12/123002/meta
PAGE 364
19ECH23 ADVANCED SENSOR AND DETECTION MATERIALS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the use of nano materials in sensor technology
• To know about microwave sintering and mesoporous silica
• To learn about sensor processing instruments
Course Outcome:
• Explain the sensors materials and detectors at macroscopic or nanometric scale
• Analyse Sensors materials for Polymeric Nanoparticles and Non-Polymeric Nanoparticles
• Identify Sensor materials for Microwave and Humidity
• Analyse the structure and characteristics of sensor materials
• Use the sensor processing instruments
Unit I SENSORS' NANOTECHNOLOGY AND CONSTRUCTION OF NANOSTRUCTURES 9
Significance of Nanotechnology - Synthesis of Nano structure: Nano particles - Nano wires - Nano tubes - Nano-
arrays - Characterization of Nanostructures and Nano materials - Zinc Oxide Quantum Dots and their Applications
Unit II NANOPARTICLES AND MOLECULARLY IMPRINTED POLYMER 9
Inluence of Shape on Biological Process - Different Shapes of Non‐Polymeric Nano particles and Polymeric Nano
particles - Molecularly Imprinted Chiral Polymers MIP-Based Chiral Sensing Devices
Unit III MICROWAVE SINTERING AND MESOPOROUS SILICA 9
Microwave Material Interactions and Sintering - Microwave Sintering of Ferrites - Garnets and Nanocomposites -
Introduction to Mesoporous Silica Materials - Modification and Characterization of Mesoporous Silica - Humidity
Sensing and Other Applications of Mesoporous Silica Materials
Unit IV STRUCTURE AND CHARACTERISTICS OF SENSOR MATERIALS 9
Porous Nano structures TiO2 and Au/Ag Nano particles synthesis for Environmental Applications - Photocatalytic
Performances of the TiO2-Au/Ag Porous Nano composites for Destroying Water Chemical Pollutants. Glass‐Ceramics
- Superionic Conduction - NASICON Structure and Properties - Principles of Chemical Sensing by Conducting Nano
composite Materials - Synthesis - sensing and Characterization of Graphene and its Nano composites.
Unit V SENSOR PROCESSING INSTRUMENTS 9
Quasi-Elastic Light Scattering (Photon Correlation Spectroscopy) - Scanning Electron Microscopy(SEM) -Transmission
Electron Microscopy (TEM) -X-ray Diffraction (XRD) - UV-visible Spectroscopy - FT-IR Spectroscopy - NMR
Spectroscopy - Mass Spectrometry - Vibrating Sample Magnetometer
Text Book:
1. Ashutosh Tiwari , Mustafa M. Demir, “Advanced Sensor and Detection Materials”, Scrivener Publishing LLC,
2014
Reference Book:
1. Yasir Beeran Pottathara, Sabu Thomas, Nandakumar Kalarikkal, Yves Grohens, Vanja Kokol, “ Nanomaterials
Synthesis: Design, Fabrication and Applications”, Elsevier, 2019
2. Egerton, R.F., “Physical Principles of Electron Microscopy: An introduction to SEM,TEM and AEM”,
Springer,2016
3. Gunter Gauglitz, Tuan Vo- Dinh, “Handbook of Spectroscopy”, Wiley, 2003
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.nap.edu/read/4782/chapter/12
• https://www.nap.edu/read/4782/chapter/6
PAGE 365
19EEH91 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• various methods of acceleration, vibration, force and pressure measurement practiced in industries.
• different temperature measurement techniques and its selection.
• different electrical methods of level and flow measurement techniques practiced in industries and able to
select appropriate sensor.
• the management concepts and strategies used in process industries.
Course Outcome:
• Explain the working principle of instruments used for measurement of acceleration, vibration and force
• Explicate the working principle of instruments used for measurement of pressure and Calibrate the measuring
instruments
• Narrate the working principle of instruments used for measurement of temperature, and design a signal
conditioning circuits for RTD transducers
• Report the working principle of instruments used for measurement of level and flow and select the
instruments according to the application.
• Delineate the management concepts and strategies for the development of instrumentation industries.
Unit I MEASUREMENT OF ACCELERATION, VIBRATION AND FORCE 9
Functional elements of generalized instrumentation systems- Accelerometers: LVDT, Piezoelectric and Strain gauge
type accelerometers - Seismic instruments as accelerometer - Vibration sensor. Force Measurement: Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Strain gauge and Piezoelectric load cells.
Unit II PRESSURE MEASUREMENT 9
Units of pressure – Elastic type pressure gauges: Bourdon tube, bellows and diaphragms - Capacitive type pressure
gauge – Piezo-resistive pressure sensor- Thermal conductivity gauges – Ionization gauge - calibration of pressure
gauges. Dead weight tester.
Unit III LOW AND HIGH TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9
RTD - characteristics and signal conditioning- 3 lead and 4 lead RTDs – Thermistors. Thermocouples and their types-
compensation techniques -Radiation methods of temperature measurement - Total radiation pyrometers - Optical
pyrometers.
Unit IV ELECTRICAL TYPE LEVEL AND FLOW MEASUREMENT 9
Electrical types of level measurement:– Principle and constructional details of Conductivity sensors – Capacitive
Sensors – Ultrasonic gauge - Differential pressure transmitter- Principle and constructional details of
Electromagnetic flow meter – Ultrasonic flow meters – Target flow meter.
Unit V MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS AND STRATEGIES 9
Management and Administration - Human factors in Managing –Steps involved in Planning- Decision-making–
Motivational Theories and Techniques –Leadership Behaviours and Styles- Need for protection of Intellectual
Property- Patents and their types-Copy rights- Trademark- Trade Secret.
Text Book:
1. Doebellin, E.O.and Manik D.N., “Measurement systems Application and Design”, Special Indian Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, 2018.
2. Jones. B.E," Instrument Technology”, Vol.2, Butterworth-Heinemann, International Edition, 2003.
3. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, “Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation and Control”,
Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 2013
Reference Book:
1. Liptak, B.G., “Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement)”, CRC Press, 2005
2. Patranabis,D., “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
3. Eckman D.P., “Industrial Instrumentation”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2003.
4. S.K.Singh., “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw - Hill Education, 2008.
5. Jain, R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1999.
6. Kooniz, “Essentials of Management”, 8th Edition Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
PAGE 366
19MEH21 FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOTICS L T P C

Offered by MECH (Emerging Area Course offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To develop a knowledge in basics of robotics.
• To understand the basic homogeneous transformation matrices
• To study the forward and inverse kinematics.
• To know the various sensors and actuators
• To know the velocity and force feedback
Course Outcome:
• Understand the fundamentals of robotics.
• Explain about rigid body transformations.
• Describe the forward and inverse kinematics.
• Explain about various robotic sensors and actuators.
• Illustrate end effector motion with an example.
Unit I ROBOT FUNDAMENTALS 7
Classification of Robots - History of Robotics - Robot Components - Robot Joints and Degrees of Freedom –
Coordinates and Reference Frames - Robot Workspace – Applications - Social Issues.
Unit II RIGID MOTIONS AND HOMOGENEOUS TRANSFORMATIONS 10
Representation of Positions and rotations in matrix form - Rotational Transformations - Rotation with respect to the
current coordinate frame - Rotation with respect to a fixed frame - Parameterizations of Rotations - Euler Angles -
Roll, Pitch, Yaw Angles - Axis/Angle Representation - Homogeneous Transformations.
Unit III FORWARD AND INVERSE KINEMATICS 10
Forward Kinematics - Kinematic Chains - Denavit Hartenberg Representation - Existence and uniqueness issues -
Assigning the coordinate frames -Inverse Kinematics - Kinematic Decoupling - Inverse Position - Inverse Orientation -
Degeneracy and Dexterity.
Unit IV ROBOTIC SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9
Sensor Characteristics – Position, Velocity, Acceleration Sensors - Force and Pressure Sensors - Torque Sensors -
Visible Light and Infrared Sensors - Touch and Tactile Sensors - Proximity Sensors - Range Finders – other sensors
Characteristics of Actuating Systems - Comparison of Actuating Systems - Hydraulic Actuators - Pneumatic Devices -
Electric Motors and their types - Control of Electric Motors (PWM control and direction control with H bridge) -
Magnetostrictive Actuators - Shape-Memory Type Metals – MEMS based actuators - Other Systems.
Unit V MOTIONS AND VELOCITIES 9
Differential Motions and Velocities - Differential Relationships – Jacobian - Differential Motions of a Frame -
Calculation of the Jacobian - Inverse Jacobian – Force feedback (elementary) – end effector systems – case study
with egg picker.
Text Book:
1. Saeed Benjamin Niku,” Introduction To Robotics: Analysis, Control, Applications”, John Wiley & sons, 2011
2. Mark W. Spong,“ Robot Dynamics and Control”, Wiley,2005
Reference Book:
1. Paul Sandin ,“Robot mechanisms and mechanical devices illustrated”, McGraw-Hill, 2003
2. Jorge Angeles, “Fundamentals of Robotic Mechanical Systems: Theory, Methods, and Algorithms”, Springer
International, 2014
PAGE 367
19EEH92 ROBOT MANIPULATOR CONTROL L T P C

Course Objective:
• State space modelling of robot manipulator arm.
• robot manipulator dynamics.
• computed torque control.
• Robust control of robot manipulator
• adaptive and adaptive robust control of robot manipulator
Course Outcome:
• Form the state space representation of the robot manipulator.
• Derive the Robot Dynamical Equations.
• Describe computed torque control of Robotic Systems.
• Designate and Compare robust and adaptive control of robot manipulator arm.
• Describe adaptive robust control of robot manipulator arm.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ROBOT MANIPULATOR AND MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 9
Introduction – structure of robot manipulator - transfer function approach - State variable representation – Linear
state variable system – double integrator system, Non-linear state variable representation of robot manipulator,
Equilibrium points and Lyapunov stability theorem.
Unit II ROBOT MANIPULATOR DYNAMICS AND STABILITY 9
Lagrange-Euler Dynamics – Force, Inertia, and Energy - Lagrange’s Equations of Motion, Manipulator Dynamics -
Dynamics of two-link planar and planar elbow arm – manipulator arm kinematic energy – manipulator arm potential
energy – Structure and properties of robot equation.
Unit III COMPUTED-TORQUE CONTROL OF ROBOT MANIPULATOR 9
Path Generation – Converting Cartesian trajectories to Joint space trajectories – polynomial path interpolation –
Linear function with parabolic blends – minimum time trajectories, Independent Joint Control – feedback control –
decentralised feedback compensation, Computed Torque Control – PD Outer Loop Design - PID Outer Loop Design -
PD-Plus-Gravity Controller.
Unit IV ROBUST CONTROL OF ROBOT MANIPULATOR 9
Introduction, Feedback-Linearization Controllers – Lyapunov design – Input-Output design, Dynamic Controllers –
Non-linear Controllers - Direct passive controllers – variable structure controllers – saturation type controllers.
Unit V ADAPTIVE CONTROL AND ADAPTIVE ROBUST CONTROL OF ROBOT MANIPULATOR 9
Introduction to Adaptive Control, Computed Torque approach – Approximate computed torque controller -
Adaptive computed torque controller, Adaptive Control by an Inertia-Related Approach - Adaptive Inertia-Related
Controller, Robot Controllers with Reduced on-line Computation - Desired Compensation Adaptation Law -
Repetitive Control Law– Adaptive Robust Control – Compensation for Actuator Dynamics.
Text Book:
1. Frank L Lewis, Darren M. Dawson, Chaouki T.Abdallah,” Robot Manipulator Control – Theory and Practice”,
Marcel Dekker Inc., 2004
Reference Book:
1. Lorenzo Sciavicco and Bruno Siciliano, “Modelling and Control of Robot Manipulators” Springer, Second edition,
6 December 2012.
2. Reza N. Jazar, “Theory of Applied Robotics- Kinematics, Dynamics, and Control “, Springer International, 2007
3. Moshe Shoham“A Text book of Robotics – Structure Control and Operation” EshedRobotec, 1984
PAGE 368
19ECH91 ROBOT OPERATING SYSTEM AND PROGRAMMING L T P C

Course Objective:
• Robotics Operating System Architecture and its commands.
• The ROS concepts and Programming.
• Simulation of Robotic systems.
• Move a robot and navigate it through the environment using navigation stack.
• Application of ROS to develop robots.
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the functions of the components in Robotics Operating Systems and commands used in ROS.
• Develop programming for ROS concepts.
• Develop Robots in Simulation tools.
• Analyze components in ROS Navigation stack.
• Develop ROS based Robotic application.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ROS 9
ROS: components, ecosystem, history and distributions – Configuring ROS Development Environment–Preliminaries
–ROS Commands – ROS tools – ROS architecture: ROS file system level, ROS computational graph level, ROS
community level.
Unit II ROS CONCEPTS AND PROGRAMMING 9
ROS Concepts: Message Communication –Coordinate Transformation –Client Library –Communication between
Heterogeneous Devices– Debugging and visualization – Basic ROS Programming using C++ and python: C++ and
python classes in ROS, Publisher and Subscriber Nodes, Service and Client Nodes, Parameters– using roslaunch.
Unit III ROBOTIC SIMULATION IN ROS 9
Simulators: Stage, simple two-dimensional robot simulator (STDR), Gazebo, MORSE, MATLAB and V-REP –Simulation
in ROS –Robotic arm simulation model for Gazebo– Robot Arm Kinematics – Mobile Robots – Making a Robot Fly –
Sensing and Visualization in ROS – Point Cloud Processing – Vision Sensors using ROS, Open-CV and PCL.
Unit IV ROS MOVEIT AND NAVIGATION STACK 9
Manipulation with MoveIt – Simple motion planning – Motion planning with point clouds – Navigation stack in ROS
–Navigation Components – Navigation Theory: Cost map, AMCL, DWA– Navigation Practice – SLAM Practice and
Application.
Unit V ROS BASED APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT 0
ROS for Industrial Robots –Industrial Manipulator – Pick and place task – Service Robot –ChefBot Application
Example: Hardware block Diagram, Speech recognition system, Applying Artificial Intelligence, Designing a GUI using
Qt and Python, Calibration and Testing.
Text Book:
1. YoonSeokPyo, HanCheol Cho, RyuWoon Jung, TaeHoon Lim, “ROS Robot Programming”, ROBOTIS, 2017.
2. Morgan Quigley, Brian Gerkey, William D. Smart, "Programming Robots with ROS ", Shroff Publishers &
Distributors Pvt Ltd, 2015.
3. Wyatt S. Newman, “A Systematic Approach to Learning Robot Programming with ROS”, CRC press, 2018.
Reference Book:
1. Mahtani Anil, “Effective Robotics Programming with ROS”, Third edition, Packt Publishing Limited, 2016.
2. Fairchild Carol, “ROS Robotics By Example”, Second edition, Packt Publishing Limited, 2016.
3. Lentin Joseph, “Learning Robotics Using Python”, Packt Publishing Limited, 2015.
4. Martinez Aaron, ” Learning ROS for Robotics Programming”, Packt Publishing Limited, 2013.
5. Lentin Joseph, “Mastering ROS for Robotics Programming”, Packt Publishing Limited, 2015.
Extensive Reading:
• http://wiki.ros.org/ROS/Tutorials
• https://www.udemy.com/course/ros-essentials/
• https://www.edx.org/course/hello-real-world-with-ros-robot-operating-system
PAGE 369
19ECH92 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND REINFORCEMENT LEARNING L T P C

Course Objective:
• Importance of AI in problem solving.
• Basics of AI logics and develop plan using AI.
• Probability in AI for decision making.
• Basics of Reinforcement Learning and use it for untrained learning.
• The applications using AI and RL.
Course Outcome:
• Solve problem usingAI.
• Develop AI logics and plan.
• Develop AI based Decision Making.
• Analyze various RL algorithms.
• Develop AI and RL based System.
Unit I ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE BASED PROBLEM SOLVING 9
Intelligent Agents, Problem Formulation, Uninformed Search Strategies, Heuristics Search Strategies (A*), Local
Search Algorithms and optimization problems, Problem Decomposition (AO*) and Rule Based Systems.
Unit II KNOWLEDGE AND PLANNING 9
Logic and inferences: Logic Agents, First Order Logic, Forward and Backward chaining.
Planning: Forward and Backward Search, Goal Stack Planning.
Unit III REASONING AND DECISION MAKING 10
Reasoning: Quantifying Uncertainty and Probabilistic Reasoning–Semantics and Inference in Bayesian Networks,
Probabilistic Reasoning over time – Hidden Markov Models, Kalman filters.
Decision Making: Sequential Decision Problems, Value Iteration, Policy Iteration, Markov Decision Process (MDP).
Unit IV REINFORCEMENT LEARNING 9
Forms of Learning, Elements of Reinforcement Learning (RL), Agent - Environment Interface, Passive RL, Active RL,
Multi- armed Bandit, Monte Carlo Method, Temporal Difference Learning, Eligibility Traces, DQN & Policy Gradient
Approaches.
Unit V AI AND RL APPLICATION 8
Future of AI, RL applications and Case study: Alpha Go, Universal Robots - cobots, Mars Curiosity Rover and Sophia.
Text Book:
1. Russell, S.J. and Norvig, P., “Artificial intelligence – A modern approach”, 3rd edition, Pearson, 2015.
2. Richard S. Sutton, Andrew G Barto, “Reinforcement Learning – An Introduction”, MIT Press, 2018.
Reference Book:
1. M. Nagenevtsky, “Artificial Intelligence – a guide to intelligent systems” Addision Wesley, 3rd Edition, 2011.
2. Sebastian Thrun, Wolfram Burgard, & Dieter Fox, “Probabilistic Robotics” MIT Press. 2005.
3. Deepak Khemani, “A First Course in Artificial Intelligence”,McGraw Hill Education; 1st edition (1 July 2017).
4. Csaba Szepesvari, “Algorithms for Reinforcement Learning”, Morgan and Claypool Publishers; 1st edition, 2010.
Extensive Reading:
• https://towardsdatascience.com/qrash-course-deep-q-networks-from-the-ground-up-1bbda41d3677
• http://pure.au.dk/portal/files/118986058/feo_arenis.pdf
• https://www.grammatech.com/sites/default/files/grammatech-nasa-curiosity-case-study.pdf
PAGE 370
19MEH22 AUTONOMOUS ROBOTS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Learning the basics of autonomous robot control.
• Learning about the kinematics of the mobile robots.
• Understanding the various methods in localization, planning and navigation.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the fundamentals of robotic locomotion.
• Explain about rigid body transformations.
• Describe the sensors and methods for robotic perception.
• Explain about robot position estimation with localization and map generation.
• Use an algorithm to plan the path of an autonomous robot.
Unit I LOCOMOTION 9
Types of locomotion - Key issues for locomotion - Legged Mobile Robots – examples - Wheeled Mobile Robots –
wheel configurations – stability and maneuverability – Case studies
Unit II MOBILE ROBOT KINEMATICS 9
Kinematic Model Constraints – Representation of robot position - Forward kinematic model - Wheel kinematic
constraints - Robot kinematic constraints - differential-drive robot example - omnidirectional robot example -
Mobile Robot Maneuverability - Motion Control (open loop and feed back control)
Unit III PERCEPTION 9
Sensors for Mobile Robots - sensor performance – challenges due to error in mobile robotics - Heading sensors -
Ground-based beacons - Active ranging sensors - Laser rangefinder - Triangulation-based active ranging - Motion
Speed sensors - Vision-based sensors - Statistical representation - Feature Extraction – Edge detection
Unit IV ROBOT LOCALIZATION 9
Localization - Challenge of Localization: Noise and Aliasing - Localization-Based Navigation versus Programmed
Solutions - Belief Representation - Map Representation - Probabilistic Map-Based Localization – case study – Kalman
filter - Autonomous Map Building
Unit V PLANNING AND NAVIGATION 9
Competences for Navigation: Planning and Reacting - Path planning - Obstacle avoidance - Navigation Architectures
– Episodic planning - Case study.
Text Book:
1. Roland Siegwart, Illah Reza Nourbakhsh and Davide Scaramuzza,”Introduction to Autonomous Mobile Robots”,
MIT Press, 2011
2. Nikolaus Correll, “Introduction to Autonomous Robots: Kinematics, Perception, Localization and Planning”, 2nd
edition, 2016.
Reference Book:
1. George A. Bekey,“ Autonomous Robots: From Biological Inspiration to Implementation and Control”, MIT.
Press, 2017
2. Farbod Fahimi, “Autonomous Robots: Modeling, Path Planning, and Control”, Springer, 2008
PAGE 371
19MEH23 ROBOTICS IN MANUFACTURING AUTOMATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• Understanding the applications of robots in Industries.
• Knowing the effect of robots on employment.
• Selection of robot for a given task.
• Understanding the issues in selecting robotic systems for a task.
• Explaining the need for safety in a robotic environment.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the fundamentals of Industrial Automation.
• Explain about the various Automation system components.
• Illustrate the present day applications of robots in industries.
• Describe the process of selecting a robot for a specific task.
• Explain about the various issues in implementation of robotics in manufacturing.
Unit I INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION 9
Scope and Introduction to Industrial Automation - Evolution of Robots - Development of Robot Applications - Robot
Structures - Robot Performance - Robot Selection - Benefits of Robots - Robots Versus Humans and Employment
Unit II AUTOMATION SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9
Handling Equipment - Vision Systems - Process - Grippers and Tool Changers - Tooling and Assembly Automation
Components - System Controls - Safety and Guarding
Unit III APPLICATIONS IN MANUFACTURING 9
Applications and case studies in the following domains - Arc, spot and laser welding - Painting, Adhesive and sealant
dispensing - Mechanical, Waterjet and laser cutting - grinding and deburring - polishing - Casting - Plastic Moulding -
Stamping and Forging - Machine Tool Tending - Measurement, Inspection, and Testing - Palletising - Picking and
Packing.
Unit IV SOLUTION DEVELOPMENT 9
Determining Application Parameters - Initial Concept Design - Controls and Safety Design - Testing and Simulation -
Refining the Concept.
Functional Elements of a Specification - Scope of Supply - Buy-Off Criteria - Covering Letter for off - specification
parts.
Unit V FINANCIAL ISSUES IN IMPLEMENTATION 9
Financial Analysis - Identifying Cost Savings - Developing the Justification - Need for Appropriate Budgets - Project
Planning - Vendor Selection - System Build and Buy-Off - Installation and Commissioning - Operation and
Maintenance - Staff and Vendor Involvement - Avoiding Problems
Text Book:
1. Mike Wilson, “Implementation of Robot Systems: An introduction to robotics, automation, and successful
systems integration in manufacturing”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1st edition, 2014.
2. Mehta, B. R., Reddy, Y. Jaganmohan, “Industrial process automation systems: design and implementation”,
Wiley, Elsevier, 2015.
Reference Book:
1. A.K. Gupta,,“Industrial Automation and Robotics: An Introduction”, Mercury Learning & Information, 2016.
2. Zongwei Luo, “Robotics, Automation, and Control in Industrial and Service Settings”, IGI Global, 2015
PAGE 372
19MEH41 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To know the fundamental of electric and hybrid vehicle.
• To understand working principle of electric propulsion system.
• To know the energy storage techniques for electric and hybrid vehicles.
• To know the concept of regenerative braking system.
• To understand concept of fuel cell vehicle.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the configurations and performance of electric vehicle
• Explain hybrid electric vehicle
• Analyse the different types of electric propulsion systems
• Distinguish different concept of energy storage and regenerative braking.
• Explain the fuel cell technologies.
Unit I ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9
Introduction - Configurations of Electric Vehicles, Performance of electric vehicles – Traction motor characteristics,
tractive effort, transmission requirements, vehicle performance, Tractive Effort in Normal Driving, energy
consumption, advantage and limitations – Autonomous Vehicles.
Unit II HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9
Introduction - Need for HEV - Architectures of Hybrid Electric Drive Trains- Series Hybrid Electric Drive Trains-
Parallel Hybrid Electric Drive Trains - Torque coupling, speed coupling and both – Electric and hybrid vehicles
comparison – Case studies.
Unit III ELECTRIC PROPULSION SYSTEMS 9
DC motor drives- Principle of Operation and Performance- induction motor drives- Basic Operation Principles &
Steady-State Performance - Permanent magnetic BLDC motor drives - Basic Principles & Construction and
Classification - switched reluctance motor drives - Basic Magnetic Structure, Torque Production, SRM Drive
Converter, Modes of Operation.
Unit IV ENERGY STORAGES AND REGENERATIVE BRAKING 9
Basics of Electrochemical batteries - Ultra-capacitors- Ultra high-Speed Flywheels - Regenerative braking - Braking
energy consumed in urban driving – braking energy vs vehicle speed, braking power, vehicle speed, vehicle
deceleration rate – braking energy on front and rear axles – brake system of EV, HEV and FCV.
Unit V FUEL CELLS 1
Principles of Fuel Cells-Fuel Cell Technologies- Proton Exchange Membrane, Alkaline, Phosphoric Acid, Molten
Carbonate, Solid Oxide, Direct Methanol fuel cells - Fuel Supply- Hydrogen Storage, Hydrogen Production- Non
hydrogen Fuel Cells.
Text Book:
1. Mehrdad Ehsani, Yimin Gao, Stefano Longo Kambiz M. Ebrahimi, “Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric, and Fuel Cell
Vehicles”, CRS Press, 2018.
Reference Book:
1. Iqbal Husain “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals” CRC Press, 2011.
2. Seref Soylu “Electric Vehicles - The Benefits and Barriers” InTech Publishers, Croatia, 2011.
3. Aulice Scibioh M. and Viswanathan B “Fuel Cells – Principles and Applications” University Press, India, 2008.
4. Barbir F “PEM Fuel Cells: Theory and Practice” Academic Press, Cambridge, 2012.
5. James Larminie and John Loury “Electric Vehicle Technology-Explained” John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2012.
PAGE 373
19MEH42 ENERGY STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn about the energy storage systems for electric vehicle
• To study the various techniques for battery electric management
• To study the various techniques for battery thermal management
• To study the basics of battery testing and recycling process
• To know the legal issues in battery charging systems and infrastructure
Course Outcome:
• Understand the energy storage system.
• Select the Effective battery electric management system.
• Able to select suitable thermal management application for the Electric vehicle.
• List out the possible ways for testing and disposal of Battery.
• Illustrate the legal issues and the barriers on electric Vehicle charging systems
Unit I ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES 9
Batteries: Fundamental principles- Technical Description – Electrical Performance – Environmental safety of Lead
Acid Battery- Nickel based batteries- Sodium based batteries- Lithium based batteries – Li-ion & Li-poly- Metal Air
Battery; other forms of Energy – Comparision - Battery parameters
Unit II BATTERY ELECTRIC MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
High voltage Battery systems - Components of HV battery packs - Requirements of HV battery packs - Cell balancing,
Types, causes, and effects of imbalances in battery cells- Balancing methods- battery state Estimation, and safety
aspects of battery management systems for electric vehicles.
Unit III BATTERY THERMAL MANAGEMENT 9
Motivation for battery thermal management - Heat sources, sinks, and thermal balance- Design aspects of thermal
management systems - Air-cooled systems - Dielectric liquid-based systems- Indirect liquid-cooled systems-
Refrigerant-based systems- Thermoelectric elements- Phase change material- Operational aspects - Battery aging
overview.
Unit IV BATTERY TESTING AND RECYCLING 9
Standards applicable to EVs- Testing procedures for EV batteries- Testing for battery life- Testing for battery safety-
Future trends in battery testing- Battery recycling - General operational loop for EV battery saving - Recycling
technologies - Lithium-Ion Battery Recycling Process- Sorting- Dismantling and separation Acid leaching - Recent
developments
Unit V CHARGING INFRASTRUCTURE AND REGULATIONS 9
Mobility behaviour and charging infrastructure- Driving behaviour – Pause times – Parking Location - Classification
of battery charging systems and infrastructure – Plug Types - Safety considerations during charging - Standards and
regulations - Licensing regulations for electric vehicles: legal requirements regarding rechargeable energy storage
systems – E Waste Management Rule 2018.
Text Book:
1. Scrosati, Bruno, Jurgen Garche, and Werner Tillmetz, eds. Advances in battery technologies for electric vehicles.
Woodhead Publishing, 2015
Reference Book:
1. Larminie, James, and John Lowry. Electric vehicle technology explained. John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
2. Link, Albert N., Alan C. O'Connor, and Troy J. Scott. Battery Technology for electric vehicles: Public science and
private innovation. Routledge, 2015.
3. Iqbal Hussein, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2011
4. Seref Soylu “Electric Vehicles - The Benefits and Barriers” InTech Publishers, Croatia, 2011
PAGE 374
19EEH93 INTELLIGENT AND AUTONOMOUS VEHICLES L T P C

Course Objective:
• Advanced vision system in vehicles, Autonomous vehicles and Intelligent Transportation System
Course Outcome:
• Explain the intelligent vision system used in Electric Vehicles Transportation.
• Elucidate the communication system used in Electric Vehicle Transportation
• Explicate the architecture of intelligent transportation system
• Outline the adaptive control techniques of an autonomous vehicle
• Narrate the successful autonomous vehicle projects
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO INTELLIGENT VISION SYSTEM 9
Vision Based Driver Assistance System- Non Contact ground velocity detecting Sensor, Road Surface Recognition
Sensor-Vehicle Sensors for Electronic Toll Collection System-Components of a Vision Sensor System , Driver
Assistance on Highways –Lane Recognition, Traffic Sign Recognition, Driver Assistance in Urban Traffic-Stereo Vision,
Shape base analysis and Pedestrian Recognition
Unit II VEHICLE INFORMATION SYSTEM AND INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION 9
Intelligent Transportation System (ITS) – Vision for ITS Communications, Multimedia communication in a car –
Current ITS Communication Systems and Services-Vehicle to Vehicle and Road to Vehicle Communication
Systems- Inter and Intra Vehicle Communication-VANETS-Devices-Optical Technologies and Millimeter Wave
technologies
Unit III ADAPTIVE CONTROL TECHNIQUES FOR INTELLIGENT VEHICLES 9
Automatic Control Of Highway Traffic And Moving Vehicles- Adaptive Control Of Highway Traffic And Moving
Vehicles- Adaptive Control –Gain Scheduling- Model Reference Adaptive Control- Self Tuning Adaptive Control
System Model – System Identification Basics, Recursive Parameter Estimation, Estimator Initialization- Design Of
Self-Tuning Controllers –Generalized Minimum Variance (GMV) Control, Pole Placement Control And Model
Predictive Control.
Unit IV DECISIONAL ARCHITECHTURES FOR AUTONOMOUS VEHICLES 9
Control Architectures And Motion Autonomy –Deliberative Architectures, Reactive Architectures, Hybrid
Architectures-Overview Of Sharp Architecture, Models Of Vehicles-Concepts Of Sensor Based Maneuver, Reactive
Trajectory-Following, Parallel Parking, Platooning-Main Approaches To Trajectory Planning, Non-Holonomic Path
Planning.
Unit V AUTONOMOUS VEHICLE AND CASE STUDIES 9
DARPA Challenge Case Study- ARGO Prototype Vehicle- The Gold System-The inverse Perspective Mapping ,Lane
Detection, Obstacle Detection, Vehicle Detection, Pedestrian Detection- Software systems architecture,
Computational Performances- ARGO Prototype vehicle Hardware –Functionalities, Data acquisition System,
Processing System and Control System
Text Book:
1. Ljubo Vlacic, Michel Parent and Fumio Harashima,“Intelligent Vehicle Technologies”, Butterworth-Heinemann
publications, Oxford, 2001-ISBN 0 7506 5093 1
2. Ronald K Jurgen, “Automotive Electronics Handbook ”, Automotive Electronics Series, SAE, USA, 1998.
Reference Book:
1. Nicu Bizon,Lucian D Ascalescu And Naser Mahdavit Abatabaei “Autonomous Vehicles Intelligent Transport
Systems And Smart Technologies”,Nova Publishers-2014–ISBN-978-1-63321-326-5
PAGE 375
19MEH43 VEHICLE DYNAMICS AND CONTROL L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn about the design of vehicle control system, traction and brake, ride and handling dynamics for each
vehicle are needed.
• To learn about the fundamental theory of vehicle dynamics, vehicle performance as well as related tests.
• To learn about the application of the dynamic modeling and analysis approach in vehicle design.
• To develop students’ capabilities of analysis, evaluation and design based on their acquisition of skills in
modeling dynamic equation and performance analysis.
Course Outcome:
• The students will understand the fundamentals of vehicle dynamics and its controls
• The students will know the tyre and rim fundaments and the tyre mechanism.
• The students will know vehicle mechanism, steering and suspension mechanism.
• The students will know the vertical dynamics of road vehicles and to simulate and analyze vehicle performance
as well.
• The students will understand the concept and anlaysis of vibration and control of the vehicle system
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO VEHICLE DYNAMICS AND CONTROL 9
Definition of the vehicle, virtual four-wheel vehicle model, control of motion, driver assistance systems, active
stability control systems, ride quality, technologies for addressing traffic Congestion. Forward vehicle dynamics:
packed car on a level road, packed car on a level road, accelerating car on a level road, accelerating car on an
inclined road, parked car on a banked road, optimal drive and brake force distribution, vehicles on a crest and dip.
Driveline dynamics: engine dynamics, driveline and efficiency, gearbox and clutch dynamics, gearbox design, vehicle
equations of motion, vehicle steady-state cornering.
Unit II TYRE MECHANICS 9
Tyre and Rim fundamentals: Tyre and sidewall information, Tyre components, Tyre and side-slip angle, Radial and
non-radial tyres, Thread, Hydroplaning, tyreprint, wheel and rim, vehicle classifications. Tyre Dynamics: Tyre
Coordinate Frame and Tyre Force System, Tyre Stiffness, Tyreprint Forces, Effective Radius, Rolling Resistance,
rollover index , rollover prevention , Longitudinal Force, Lateral Force, Camber Force, Tyre Forces, Deformation of
tyre with side slip and lateral force, Tyre camber and lateral force, tyre cornering characteristics, traction, braking,
and cornering characteristics, dynamic characteristics, vehicle dynamic characteristics. Tyre models, Tyre Road
Friction Measurement.
Unit III VEHICLE MECHANISMS AND CONTROL 9
Applied mechanics: Four-Bar Linkage, Slider-Crank Mechanism, inverted Slider-Crank Mechanism, Instant Center of
Rotation, Coupler Point Curve, Universal Joint Dynamics. Steering Dynamics: Kinematic Steering, Ackerman
mechanism, Langensperger steering, rear-wheel steering, Vehicles with More Than Two Axles, Vehicle with Trailer,
Steering Mechanisms & types, Four wheel steering, Trailer-Truck Kinematics, Suspension Mechanisms: Solid Axle
Suspension, active, semi-active, and passive suspension, Independent Suspension, Roll Center and Roll Axis, Car Tyre
Relative Angles, Toe-in and toe-out, Suspension Requirements and Coordinate, Frames, Caster Theory. Lateral
systems under commercial development: Lane departure warning, Lane keeping systems, Yaw stability control
systems.
Unit IV VEHICLE DYNAMICS 9
Applied dynamics: Force and Moment of vehicle, Rigid Body Translational Dynamics, Rigid Body Rotational
Dynamics, Mass Moment of Inertia Matrix, Lagrange’s Form of Newton’s Equations of Motion, Lagrangian
Mechanics, Vehicle Planar Dynamics: Vehicle Coordinate Frame, Rigid Vehicle Newton-Euler Dynamics, Force
System Acting on a Rigid Vehicle, Steady-State Turning, Linearized Model for a Two-Wheel Vehicle, Time Response.
Vehicle Roll Dynamics: Vehicle Coordinate and DOF, Equations of Motion, Vehicle Force System, Two-wheel Rigid
Vehicle Dynamics, Steady-State Motion, time response. Lateral and longitudinal dynamics.
Unit V VIBRATION AND VEHICLE CONTROL 9
Applied Vibrations: Mechanical Vibration Elements, Newton’s Method and Vibrations, Frequency Response of
Vibrating Systems, Time Response of Vibrating Systems. Vehicle Vibrations: Lagrange Method and Dissipation
Function, Quadratures, Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes, Bicycle Car and Body Pitch Mode, Half Car and Body
Roll Mode, Full Car Vibrating Model. Vehicle control: Steering control, Longitudinal controls, anti-lock brake
systems, adaptive cruise control, control architectures, automated highway systems, electronic stability control,
steer-by-wire systems, need for slip angle control.
Text Book:
1. Reza N.Jazar, “Vehicle dynamics: Theory and application”, Springer. 2008.
Reference Book:
PAGE 376
1. Masato Abe, “Vehicle handling dynamics, Theory and applications”, Butterworth-Heinemann of Elsevier. First
Edition, 2009.
2. Rajesh Rajamani, Vehicle Dynamics and Control, Second Edition, Mechanical Engineering Series book series
(MES), Springer, 2012.
3. Hans B. Pacejka , Tyre and vehicle dynamics”, Butterworth-Heinemann of Elsevier, second edition, 2006.
PAGE 377
19MEH44 ELECTRIC VEHICLE DESIGN L T P C

Course Objective:
• To model and design of electric vehicle technology with high efficiencies
• To Evaluate Various choices available to designers to optimise their vehicle design
• To analyse various electric drives and controller suitable for electric vehicles.
• To design and choice of ancillaries such as the heating and cooling system
• To investigate the need for further research in promising areas.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the given design specification and model the various components required for electrical vehicles
with high performance.
• Choose proper drives and control for developing a new electric vehicle
• Describe the behaviour of electric vehicle by sophisticated mechanical and mathematical knowledge.
• To evaluate an electrical vehicle design
• Identify the choice of ancillaries such as the heating and cooling system
Unit I ELECTRIC VEHICLE MODELLING 9
Tractive Effort - Rolling resistance force - Aerodynamic drag - Hill climbing force - Acceleration force - Total tractive
effort - Modelling Vehicle Acceleration – Acceleration performance parameters - Modelling the acceleration of a
small car - Modelling Electric Vehicle Range - Driving cycles - Range modelling of battery electric vehicles - Constant
velocity range modelling - Range modelling of fuel cell vehicles - Range modelling of hybrid electric vehicles
Unit II ELECTRIC VEHICLE DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 9
Transmission Efficiency - Consideration of Vehicle Mass - Electric Vehicle Chassis and Body Design - Body/chassis
requirements - Body/chassis layout - Body/chassis strength, rigidity and crash resistance - Designing for stability -
Suspension for electric vehicles - Chassis used in modern fuel cell electric vehicles
Unit III SERIES HYBRID ELECTRIC DRIVE TRAIN DESIGN 9
Operation Patterns - Control Strategies - maximum state-of-charge of peaking power source (PPS) - Thermostat
Control Strategy (Engine-On–Off) - Sizing of the Major Components - Power Rating Design of the Traction Motor -
Power Rating Design of the Engine/Generator - Design of PPS - Power Capacity of PPS - Energy Capacity of PPS
Unit IV PARALLEL HYBRID ELECTRIC DRIVE TRAIN DESIGN 9
Control Strategies of Parallel Hybrid Drive Train - Maximum State-of-Charge of Peaking Power Source (Max. SOC-of-
PPS) Control Strategy - Engine Turn-On and Turn-Off (Engine-On–Off) Control Strategy Design of Drive Train
Parameters - Design of Engine Power Capacity - Design of Electric Motor Drive Power Capacity - Transmission Design
- Energy Storage Design
Unit V ANCILLARY SYSTEMS AND THE ENVIRONMENT 9
Heating and Cooling Systems - Design of the Controls – stick controller - Power Steering - Choice of Tyres - Electric
Vehicle Recharging and Refuelling Systems - Vehicle Pollution in context with conventional vehicles - Quantitative
Analysis - Alternative and Sustainable Energy
Text Book:
1. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained “ John Wiley & Sons, 2013
2. Mehrdad Ehsani, Yimin Gao, Stefano Longo Kambiz M. Ebrahimi, “Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric, and Fuel Cell
Vehicles”, CRS Press, 2018.
Reference Book:
1. Iqbal Hussein, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2011
2. Seref Soylu “Electric Vehicles - The Benefits and Barriers” InTech Publishers, Croatia, 2011
3. Amir Khajepour, M. Saber Fallah, Avesta Goodarzi “Electric and hybrid vehicles technologies, modeling and
control: a mechatronic approach” John Wiley & Sons Ltd 2014.
PAGE 378
19EEH94 MODELING, SIMULATION AND CONTROL OF ELECTRIC VEHICLES L T P C

Course Objective:
• Modelling of Electric motors, Power Converters, Battery and Ultra capacitor.
• control of Electric Drives
• Energy Management Strategies in Hybrid and Electric Vehicles
Course Outcome:
• Develop mathematical models of electrical and mechanical systems
• Explain the Modelling of Electric Motors used in Hybrid and Electric vehicle.
• Explicate the Modelling of Power Converters and Battery used in Hybrid and Electric vehicle
• Narrate on controlling of Electric Drives
• Develop Energy Management rules to control Hybrid and Electric vehicle
Unit I SYSTEM MODELLING AND REPRESENTATION 9
System concepts- Transfer function Modeling of Electrical systems, Mechanical systems (Translational & Rotational
systems)- Electrical Analogy of Mechanical Systems – Park and Clark transformation.
Unit II MODELLING OF ELECTRIC MOTORS 9
Modelling of DC motor- Modelling of Induction motor- Modelling of PMSM- Modelling of BLDC motor
Unit III MODELLING OF POWER CONVERTERS AND BATTERY 9
Modelling of Buck converter- Modelling of Boost converter- Modelling of Inverter-Modelling of Bidirectional DC- DC
converter- Battery Parameters-Modelling of Lithium ion battery
Unit IV CONTROL OF ELECTRIC DRIVES 9
Scalar control-Field oriented control technique- Direct Torque based control technique-Speed Control of BLDC
Motor
Unit V CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLE 9
Function of the Control System in HEVs and EVs-Energy Management Strategies-Rule and Optimization based
Energy management Strategies-EMS based on deterministic Rules
Text Book:
1. SerefSoylu, “Electric Vehicles: Modellling and Simulations” , InTech Publications, 2011
2. Wei Liu, “Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Modelling and Control”, Second Edition, Wiley Publications, 2017
3. Gopal M, “Control Systems – Principles and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013
Reference Book:
1. Krishnan R., “ Electric Motor & Drives: Modelling, Analysis and Control”, Pearson Education, 2015
Extensive Reading:
PAGE 379
19CEH01 URBAN AND REGIONAL PLANNING REGULATIONS L T P C

Offered by CIV (Emerging Area Course offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• Urban planning concepts and theories.
• Factors responsible for evolution of urban areas.
• Concepts of regional planning and theories.
• Formulation of different regional planning methods.
• Different types of development plans.
Course Outcome:
• Plan the urban area with underlying concepts and theories.
• Propose the development of any urban area with required elements.
• Use the different theories of regional planning during the city level planning.
• Formulate the regional planning process as per the standards and norms.
• Prepare the different types of plans.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO URBAN PLANNING 9
Evolution in planning and physical form - Concept of urban human settlement - Differentiation between rural and
urban settlement - Concept of town - Evolved and Created Town Characteristics - Features of urban planning
process - Role of urban planner - Genesis of urban form - Social, Geographical and Cultural impacts.
Unit II EVOLUTION OF URBAN AREAS 9
Elements of town structure - Town classification - Functional and geographical - City Centre - Walled city and Urban
Fringe areas- Urban growth - Urban sprawl - Urban renewal and community development - Urban design - Types of
cities - Case studies of Chandigarh and Gandhinagar.
Unit III REGIONAL PLANNING CONCEPTS 9
Concept of regional planning - Nature, objectives, levels and aims - Concept of a region, types, and regionalization -
Delineation techniques for various types of regions - Regional interaction - Rank size rule - Settlement patterns -
Central place theory - Loschian theory - Regional networks.
Unit IV REGIONAL PLANNING METHODS 9
Regional planning processes - Identification of plan objectives – Collection, classification and analysis of data -
Norms and standards for regional planning - Formulation of alternative plan proposals -Regional planning efforts in
India - Critical appraisal case studies in regional development - District planning - Metropolitan regions -National
capital region - Mumbai metropolitan region.
Unit V TYPES OF PLANS 9
Definition of development plan - Introduction to types of development plans - Master plan - City development plan -
Structure plan - District plan - Action area plan - Subject plan - Comprehensive planning - Zonal plans.
Text Book:
1. M.Pratap Rao, “Urban Planning: Theory and practice”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2009.
2. Peter Hall, Mark Tewdwr-Jones., “Urban and Regional planning”, Routledge; 5th edition, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. S.K.Kulshrestha, “Urban and Regional Planning in India”, SAGE Publications India Pvt Ltd, 2012.
2. Arthur B. Gallion, “The Urban Pattern” 5thedition, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2003.
3. AEJ Morris, “History of Urban Form before the Industrial Revolution”, 2013.
4. Aidan Southall, “The City in Time and Space”, Cambridge University Press, 1998.
5. R. Ramachandran, “Urbanization and urban systems in India”, Oxford University Press, 1991.
Extensive Reading:
• “Urban and Regional Development Plans Formulation & Implementation Guidelines”, Ministry Urban Affairs &
Employment, Govt. of India, New Delhi, 2014.
• Town and Country Planning organization in India - http://tcpo.gov.in/.
PAGE 380
19CEH02 URBAN CLIMATE CHANGE AND ADAPTATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basics and patterns of global climate change.
• Impacts of climate change on various sectors.
• Climatic changes due to urbanization.
• Climate change adaptation and mitigation measures for the climate change.
• Need for climate resilient cities.
Course Outcome:
• Analyze various dimensions of climate change in India.
• Analyze the several of impacts of climate change in different sectors.
• Plan and control the growth of urban area based on the climate change.
• Prepare the management plan for climate change adaptation and mitigation measures.
• Plan the climate resilient cities as per the need.
Unit I GLOBAL CLIMATIC CHANGE 9
Basics of Climate Change- Greenhouse Gases, Carbon Cycle - Global Warming, key associated planning terms-
Climate variability - Exposure - Mitigation, resilience, adaptation - Inventory of GHGs -Changes in patterns of
temperature, precipitation and sea level rise - Case studies of Changes in Climate and Environment on a Global
Scale and in India.
Unit II IMPACTS OF CLIMATE CHANGE 9
Impacts of Climate Change on various sectors – Agriculture, Forestry and Ecosystem –Water Resources – Human
Health – Industry - Settlement and Society –Projected Impacts for Different Regions– Uncertainties in the Projected
Impact of Climate Change– Risk of Irreversible Changes - Impact of climate change on cities -Need for
mainstreaming climate change in city development strategies.
Unit III URBANIZATION AND CLIMATE CHANGE 9
Urbanization and its impact on microclimates - Urban heat islands – Causes and effects -Energy consumption in
cities - Determinants of energy demand - Phenomenon of climate change -Factors influencing climate change.
Unit IV CLIMATE CHANGE ADAPTATION AND MITIGATION MEASURES 9
Adaptation Strategies in various sectors - Key Mitigation Technologies and Practices -Clean Development
Mechanism –Carbon Trading –Biodiesel - Eco- Friendly Plastic – Alternate Energy – Hydrogen – Bio fuel – Solar
Energy – Wind – Hydroelectric Power – Mitigation Efforts in India and Adaptation funding.
Unit V CLIMATE RESILIENT CITIES 9
Urban vulnerability to climate change - Need for city resilience -Paradigm shift to resilient cities – Renewable energy
cities - Carbon neutral cities -Distributed cities -Eco-efficient cities - Sustainable transport cities - Case studies on
climate resilience in cities of the world.
Text Book:
1. Dash Sushil Kumar, “Climate Change – An Indian Perspective”, Cambridge University Press India Pvt. Ltd, 2007.
2. Harriet Bulkeley, “Cities and Climate change”, Routledge, 2013.
Reference Book:
1. Mohsen M. Aboulnaga, Amr F. Elwan, Mohamed R. Elsharouny, “Urban Climate Change Adaptation in
Developing Countries: Policies, Projects and Scenarios”, Springer books, 2019.
2. Jan C. van Dam, “Impacts of Climate Change and Climate Variability on Hydrological Regimes”, Cambridge
3. Velma. I. Grover “Global Warming and Climate” Change. Vol-I and II. Science Publishers, 2005.
4. Thomas E, Lovejoy, Lee Hannah., “Climate Change and Biodiversity”, TERI publishers, 2005.
Extensive Reading:
• Mainstreaming climate change adaptation in India,
https://www.slurc.org/uploads/1/0/9/7/109761391/climate_change_adaptation_in_indian_cities.pdf.-
• Urban climate change adaptation - https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cities.2018.01.014.
PAGE 381
19CEH03 IOT PLATFORM FOR SMART CITY PLANNING L T P C

Course Objective:
• Concepts of Internet of Things.
• IoT Architecture and Terminologies.
• IoT working platform for different system.
• IoT standards for smart city planning.
• IoT applications on different sectors.
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the different concepts and theories of Internet of Things.
• Assess the various components of IoT architecture.
• Perform the IoT applications in programming platform.
• Adopt the IoT standards for smart city planning.
• Apply the understandings of IoT in different sectors of smart city planning.
Overview and Introduction - Internet of Things (IoT) - Web of Things (WoT) - Cloud of Things - Need for IoT on Cloud
- Services in the Cloud for the Internet of Things - Applications of IoT – Detailed Domain Model.
Unit II IOT ARCHITECTURE 9
IoT Architecture - Sensor Layer - Gateway and Network Layer - Management Service Layer - Application Layer - IoT
Enabling Technologies - Addressing Schemes - Data Storage and Analytics – Visualization - Connected Domains –
Connected Home -Connected Worker - Connected Automobile - Connected Industry.
Unit III IOT PLATFORMS DESIGN METHODOLOGY 9
IoT Systems – Intel IoT Framework - Qualcomm IoT Framework - Microsoft IoT Framework - ARM IoT Framework -
Logical Design - Programming IoT platform (eg: Python, Mono C# , Objective-C, Ruby), Raspberry Pi - Program for
Firmware – Case Studies.
Unit IV IOT STANDARDS 9
Need for the IOT standards - IOT and Smart City Standards and Policies: Global perspective – Policy Research and
Standardization in Europe – Indian Standards formulation – Sectional committee and composition – Challenges in
standardization - Digital infrastructure.
Unit V IOT APPLICATIONS 9
Lighting as service – Smart Parking -Smart metering – Smart water management- Smart energy– Smart solid waste
management - Smart mobility – Smart governance- Challenges in IoT Management.
Text Book:
1. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi, “The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols”,
Second Edition, Wiley Publisher, 2012.
2. Uckelmann, Dieter, Mark Harrison, and Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of Things”. Springer
Science & Business Media, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things: A Hands-on Approach”, 2014.
2. Doukas, Charalampos, Building internet of things with the Arduino, CreateSpace Independent Publishing
Platform, 2012.
3. Lu, Yan, Yan Zhang, Laurence T. Yang, Huansheng Ning. “The Internet of Things: From RFID to the Next-
Generation Pervasive Networked Systems”, CRC Press.
4. Massimo Banzi, “Getting Started with Arduino (Make: Projects)”, O'Reilly Media. 2008.
5. Samuel Greengard, “The Internet of Things (The MIT Press Essential Knowledge series)”, MIT Press, 2015.
Extensive Reading:
• Is the Internet of Things the Future for Smart India? https://iot.electronicsforu.com/content/tech-trends/smart-
india-iot-future.
• IoT policy Document. https://meity.gov.in/sites/upload_files/dit/files/Draft-IoT-Policy%20%281%29.pdf.
PAGE 382
19CEH04 INTELLIGENT TRANSPORT SYSTEMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Fundamentals of intelligent transport systems.
• Concepts of ATIS and its operations.
• Basics of predictive route guidance system.
• Concepts of APTS and its operations.
• General issues related to ITS and environment.
Course Outcome:
• Analyze the various types of traffic and suggesting ITS.
• Plan and design the ATIS.
• Plan the predictive route guidance system.
• Analyze the traffic data and able to suggest suitable APTS.
• Manage the issues arising out of introduction of ITS.
Unit I ITS FUNDAMENTALS 9
Introduction to Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) –Definition of ITS and Identification of ITS Objectives -
Historical Background - Benefits of ITS - ITS Data collection techniques –Detectors - Automatic Vehicle Location
(AVL) - Automatic Vehicle Identification (AVI).
Unit II ADVANCED TRAVELLER INFORMATION SYSTEMS 9
Basic concepts - Models - Simulation - LOS of transportation systems - Static, real time and dynamic information -
Value of information - Topology - Where and When to receive data - Information flows - Travel support - Dynamic
routing.
Unit III PREDICTIVE ROUTE GUIDANCE 9
ITS - Applications - Issues- Information types - Impact on route guidance - Case studies.
Unit IV ADVANCED PUBLIC TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS (APTS) 9
Scope - Components of APTS - Advantages- Limitations of APTS - Case studies - Issues
Unit V ITS AND ENVIRONMENT 9
ITS and Flexibility - ITS and Customer-centricity - ITS and the Environment - General issues and Case studies -
Overview of ITS implementations in developed countries.
Text Book:
1. Pradip Kumar Sarkar, Amit Kumar Jain, “Intelligent Transport Systems”, Paperback, PHI Learning, 2018.
Reference Book:
1. Paolo Baggano, “Intelligent transport Systems Good practices to standards”,CRC press,2016.
2. ITSHand Book 2000: Recommendations for World Road Association (PIARC)by Kan Paul Chen, John Miles.
3. Sussman, J. M., Perspective on ITS, Artech House Publishers, 2005.
4. National ITS Architecture Documentation, US Department of Transportation, 2007 (CD-ROM).
Extensive Reading:
• Delhi Integrated Multi-Modal Transit System Ltd. -
https://www.dimts.in/Services_Transportation_Intelligent_Transport_System.aspx
PAGE 383
19CEH05 INTEGRATED URBAN WATER MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basic concepts of integrated urban water management.
• Urban water resources and its infrastructure system.
• Urban wastewater treatment systems and policy.
• Automation in water supply management.
• Software used in water and wastewater management system.
Course Outcome:
• Relate the basic concepts of integrated urban water management.
• Apply the concepts of urban water management in integrated water planning.
• Analyze the various methods and techniques in the design urban wastewater systems.
• Plan the city level smart water technology system.
• Utilize the different software for urban water drainage and distribution networks
Concept of Integrated Urban Water Management - Influencing Factor and associated issues for the rapid
urbanizations - Principles of IUWM –Introduction to water supply and sanitation - Storm / Flood - Overview and
challenges to urban areas.
Unit II URBAN WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT 9
Water in urban ecosystem – Urban Water Cycle - Storm water management practices – Water quality and treatment
options - Water harvesting Structures – IWRM concepts and applications to Urban Water management - Integrated
urban water planning– Water Resources management models - Water policy of Developed nations- National water
Policy - Water Pricing – Case studies.
Unit III URBAN WASTEWATER MANAGEMENT 9
Status of Wastewater treatment and disposal - Impacts on ecosystem - Eco friendly treatment systems- Concept of
decentralization – Bio remediation - Phytoremediation- Wastewater management policy - Models of Developed
nations –Eco restoration of rivers – Case studies.
Unit IV SMART WATER MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGY 9
Core Elements of smart water management - Automation in water supply – Smart metering - Real time monitoring
and control – SCADA - Case studies of water treatment plant automation - Automation in distribution systems -
Concept of Smart Water Supply System for Indian cities – Case studies.
Unit V DRAINAGE AND WATER DISTRIBUTION NETWORKS 9
Storm water drainage system - Flood routing through channels and reservoir - Sectorization of distribution networks
- DMA Demarcation – Software applications– Recent Initiatives in smart wastewater systems – Case studies.
Text Book:
1. Peavy, Rowe and Tchobanoglous., “Environmental Engineering” McGraw-Hill, 2015.
2. Neil S. Grigg., “Urban Water Infrastructure: Planning, Management and Operations”, Krieger Publishing
Company, 1992.
Reference Book:
1. Policy brief note “Integrated Urban Water Management (IUWM): Toward Diversification and Sustainability”,
Global Water Partnership, 2013.
2. Report on “Integrated Urban Water Management (IUWM) in Peninsular Malaysia”, Academy of Sciences, 2018.
3. UNU/IAS Report, “Defining an Ecosystem Approach to Urban Management and Policy Development” March
2003.
4. Zhifeng Yang, “Eco- Cities: A Planning Guide (Applied Ecology and Environmental Management)” CRC Press,
2017.
Extensive Reading:
• Urban Water Management in India
https://www.waterworld.com/international/wastewater/article/16201696/urban-water management-in-india -
Adopting Integrated Urban Water Management, Poland.
• http://nwm.gov.in/sites/default/files/6.%20%20adopting-integrated-urban-water-management.pdf ToolKit-1
https://www.indiawaterportal.org/sites/indiawaterportal.org/files/tool
kit_for_integrated_urban_water_management_volume_1_tools_irap_2010.pdf –ToolKit
• https://www.indiawaterportal.org/sites/indiawaterportal.org/files/tool-
kit_for_integrated_urban_water_management_volume_2_technical_report_irap_2010.pdf -
PAGE 384
19CEH06 GIS IMPLEMENTATION IN SMART CITY DEVELOPMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• Fundamentals of remote sensing.
• Types of infrastructures in smart city development.
• Concepts of Land use mapping.
• GIS enabled smart transportation techniques.
• Significance of GIS role in smart city.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the principles of GIS of in smart city planning.
• Design the smart city based on the various types of infrastructure requirements.
• Map the existing terrain with the help of satellite images.
• Apply the smart navigation techniques in their smart city design.
• Implement the GIS ideologies across different sectors.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO GIS 9
Geographical Information System – Remote Sensing Concepts - Electro Magnetic Spectrum – Spectral Signature –
Spectroradiometer – Types of Remote Sensing – Optical, Thermal , Hyper spectral , Microwave Remote Sensing.
Unit II FUNDAMENTALS OF URBAN DEVELOPMENT 9
Smart city development – Fundamentals – Sustainability – Infrastructure – Physical Infrastructure - Housing, ,
Sewerage, Transport etc. – Social Infrastructure – Health, Education – Institutional Infrastructure – Planning and
management – Economic Infrastructure – GDP and Employment.
Unit III LAND USE/ LAND COVER MAPPING 9
Acquisition of digital image – Settlement – Land use/Land cover Mapping – Vector data – Digitization – Object
delineation – Digital Elevation Model (DEM) - Urban Sprawl – High resolution remote sensing data.
Unit IV GIS NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES 9
Urban and regional transportation corridors - Optimum route and plans / shortest path – Alignment planning –
Traffic and flow management – Smart Street lights – Efficient Parking
Unit V GIS IMPLEMENTATION 9
Smart governance – Information and Communication Technology (ICT) – Use of sensors - Water management –
Waste management – Energy management– Air Pollution management - GIS Role - Revenue and Tax collection –
Planning Facilities and Amenities – Accident Analysis – Crime Mapping.
Text Book:
1. Lillesand T.M., and Kiefer,R.W. “Remote Sensing and Image interpretation”, VI edition of John Wiley & Sons-
2000.
2. Juliana Maantay, John Ziegler, John Pickles, GIS for the Urban Environment, Esri Press 2006.
Reference Book:
1. Sabins, F.F.Jr, “Remote Sensing Principles and Image interpretation” , W.H.Freeman & Co,1978.
2. George Joseph, “Fundamentals of Remote Sensing”, Universities Press (India) Pvt Ltd, Hyderabad, 2003.
3. Said Easa, Yupo Chan, “Urban Planning and Development Applications of GIS”, Amer Society of Civil Engineers,
1999.
4. Paul Curran P.J., “Principles of Remote Sensing”, ELBS 1995.
5. Juliana Maantay, John Ziegler, John Pickles, “GIS for the Urban Environment”, Esri Press 2006.
6. Allan Brimicombe, “GIS Environmental Modeling and Engineering”, CRC Press, 2009.
Extensive Reading:
• GIS for Smart Cities.https://www.esri.in/~/media/esri-india/files/pdfs/news/arcindianews/Vol9/gis-for-smart-
cities.pdf
• https://www.gislounge.com/how-gis-supports-the-planning-and-development-of-smart-cities/
• https://niti.gov.in/writereaddata/files/document_publication/CSTEP%20Report%20Smart%20Cities%20Framew
ork.pdf.
PAGE 385
19CEH21 MATERIAL PROCUREMENT AND MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• Importance of material management.
• Material classification, coding and purchasing procedure.
• Methods of effective inventory management.
• Quality control and store management.
• Project planning and procurement processes.
Course Outcome:
• Recognize the need and role of material management.
• Classify materials, identify sources of procurement and conduct vendor analysis.
• Perform effective management of inventory control.
• Manage stores and exercise quality control on materials.
• Apply MMS in planning, procurement, inventory, and cost control, evaluate projects and manage risks.
Importance of material management and its role in construction industry – Scope - Objectives and functions -
Integrated approach to materials management - Role of materials manager.
Unit II CLASSIFICATION AND CODIFICATION OF MATERIALS CONSTRUCTION 9
ABC,FSN, VED, SOS analysis - Procedure and its use - Standardization in materials and their management –
Procurement- Identification of sources of procurement - Vendor analysis - Concept of Material requirement
planning and purchase procedure - Legal aspects.
Unit III INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 9
Store Purchase Manual - Contractors Obligation- Inventory Control techniques – EOQ-Advantages and limitation of
use of EOQ - Periodic ordering- Order point control -Safety stock - Stock outs- Concept of (JIT) - Just in time
management - Indices used for assessment of effectiveness of inventory management.
Unit IV STORES MANAGEMENT 9
Receipt and inspection- Care and safety in handling -Loss on storage, wastage - Bulk purchasing - Site layout and site
organization - Scheduling of men, materials and equipment - Quality Control – Conventional methods of quality
control of Construction materials - Statistical method of quality control -sampling techniques.
Unit V PROJECT PROCUREMENT PROCESSES 9
Use of Materials Management Systems (MMS) in materials planning, procurement, inventory control, cost control -
Project evaluation- Project delivery methods - Competitive bidding - Risk allocation and management - Integrated
project delivery - Contract negotiation.
Text Book:
1. Peter Holm Andreasen, “Dynamics of Procurement Management – A Complexity Approach”, Copenhagen
Business School, 2012.
2. Chitale A.K. and R.C. Gupta, “Material Management – Text and Cases”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
Reference Book:
1. "A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide)”- Sixth Edition, An American National
Standard, ANSI/PMI, 2017.
2. Joseph Philips, PMP, “Project Management and Professional” (Certification Study Guides), McGraw Hill
Publication, 2013.
3. Jhamb L.C., “Inventory Management”, Everest Publishing house, 2005.
4. Ministry of Rural Development, GOI, “Procurement Manual”, National Rural Livelihoods Project, 2010.
5. Peter Baily, David Farmer, Barry Crocker, David Jessop & David Jones, “Procurement Principles and
Management”, Pearson, 2015.
6. Denise Bower, “Management of Procurement”, Construction Management Series, Thomas Telford Publishing,
2003.
Extensive Reading:
• Purchasing and Materials Management - http://www.ddegjust.ac.in/2017/Uploads/11/POM-325.pdf.
• Procurement Management - https://opentextbc.ca/projectmanagement/chapter/chapter-13-procurement-
management-project-management/
PAGE 386
19CEH22 STRATEGIC PLANNING FOR INFRASTRUCTURE SECTORS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basic concepts of infrastructure development of different sectors.
• Importance of privatization in infrastructure projects.
• Risks and challenges in infrastructure planning
• Different strategies for effective project implementation.
• Sustainable infrastructure planning for major projects.
Course Outcome:
• Relate the basic concepts of infrastructure management.
• Evaluate the benefits and problems with infrastructure privatization.
• Assess the various risks and execute the infrastructure projects in successful manner.
• Prepare the different strategies and risk management plan for any infrastructure projects
• Analyze the strategy for the sustainable infrastructure development.
Unit I BASIC CONCEPTS RELATED TO INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Introduction to infrastructure- Definition and types - An overview of the Power sector- Water supply and Sanitation
sector - Road, rail, air and port transportation sectors - Telecommunications sector - Urban infrastructure- Rural
infrastructure in India - An introduction to special economic zones - Credit rating of infrastructure projects - Credit
allocation framework for infrastructure projects.
Unit II PRIVATE INVOLVEMENT IN INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Infrastructure privatization - Benefits of infrastructure privatization- Problems with infrastructure privatization-
Challenges in privatization of water supply - Challenges in privatization of power - Privatization of infrastructure in
India - Privatization of road transportation infrastructure in India.
Unit III INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION 9
Mapping and facing the landscape of risks in infrastructure projects - Economic and Demand risks-Political risks -
Socio-Environmental risks - Cultural risks in international infrastructure projects - Legal and contractual issues in
infrastructure - Challenges in construction and maintenance of infrastructure.
Unit IV STRATEGIES FOR PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION 9
Risk management framework for infrastructure projects - Shaping the planning phase of infrastructure projects to
mitigate risks - Designing sustainable contracts -Introduction to fair process and negotiation - Negotiation with
multiple stakeholders on infrastructure projects.
Unit V SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT OF INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Sustainable Development - Information technology and systems for successful infrastructure management-
Innovative design and maintenance of infrastructure facilities- Capacity building and improving the Governments
role in infrastructure implementation - An integrated framework for successful infrastructure planning and
management.
Text Book:
1. Sidney Levy, “Project Management in Construction”, McGraw Hill Series, 7th edition,2018.
2. Jeffrey L. Beard, Edward C. Wundran, Michael C. Loulakis, “Design, Build: Planning through development”,
McGraw Hill Series, 2001.
Reference Book:
1. David I. Cleland and Roland Gareis, “Global Project Management Handbook: Planning, Organization and
Controlling International Projects”, 2nd edition, McGraw Hill Series, 2006.
2. Richard Lambeck, John Eschemuller, “Urban Construction Project Management”, McGraw Hill Series, 2008.
3. Twelfth five year plan (2012-2015) Document. “VISION –TAMILNADU 2023”-Strategic plan for Infrastructure
Development in Tamilnadu.
PAGE 387
19CEH23 GEOTECHNIQUES FOR INFRASTRUCTURE L T P C

Course Objective:
• Different foundations for infrastructure
• Construction of deep foundation techniques
• Suitability of retaining walls
• Characteristics of soft soil and ground improvement techniques
• Special foundations for infrastructure projects.
Course Outcome:
• Select appropriate construction methods for Rafts, Piles, Caissons and Diaphragm walls.
• Analyze the method of construction of deep foundations for Infrastructures.
• Analyze the stability of retaining wall.
• Execute appropriate ground remediation work with the use of Geotextiles and other techniques.
• Recommend the suitable foundations for special structures.
Unit I CONSTRUCTION OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 9
Excavations for Foundations in soft soils – Recommendations – Types of Raft - Construction of Raft Foundations –
Design requirements of shallow foundation used for infrastructure projects – Construction of Diaphragm walls –
Codal provisions.
Unit II CONSTRUCTION OF PILE FOUNDATIONS 9
Introduction - Construction aspects of bored and driven Piles – Micro Piles – Pile groups – Design aspects of piles
and pile cap - Berthing structures and Jetties –Piled raft foundation – Case studies.
Unit III EARTH REINFORCEMENT 9
Earth reinforcement – Principles and basic mechanism of reinforced earth – Construction of reinforced earth
retaining walls – Stability analysis of gravity, cantilever retaining walls.
Unit IV FOUNDATIONS ON WEAK SOILS 9
Engineering properties of soft, weak, and compressible deposits - Soil improvement - Foundation Techniques for
compressible and expansive soils - Geotextiles – Classification and applications - Methods of soil improvement using
mechanical, chemical, Thermal, electrical methods.
Unit V SPECIAL FOUNDATIONS FOR INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Bridge substructures – Forces acting and design considerations – Marine substructures - Types – Design loads -
Recent trends in infrastructure projects - Soil nailing, gabion walls – Case studies.
Text Book:
1. S.Swami saran, “Analysis and Design of Substructures: Limit State Design”, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co Pvt.Ltd,
2nd edition, 2018.
2. Purushothama Raj, P., “Ground Improvement Techniques”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd. New Delhi, 2007.
Reference Book:
1. Venkataramaiah C., “Geotechnical Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Das, B.M., “Principles of Foundation Engineering”, Fourth Edition, PWS Publishing, 2013.
3. Varghese P.C., “Foundation Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
4. M.J.Tomlinson., John Woodward., “Pile Design and Construction Practice”, Fourth Edition, E & FN SPON, an
imprint of Chapman & Hall, 2008.
PAGE 388
19CEH24 PROJECT FORMULATION AND IMPLEMENTATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• Project formulation and report preparation process.
• Project performance and appraisal procedures.
• Financing of infrastructure projects.
• Contracts, bidding process and implementation types.
• Impacts of private sector participation.
Course Outcome:
• Formulate the project for the approval of various authorities.
• Evaluate the project performance and analyse the risks involved.
• Analyse the key financial indicators in project financing.
• Implement the infrastructure projects based on the different types of contract.
• Interpret the aspects of PPP in Infrastructure development projects.
Unit I PROJECT FORMULATION 9
Project – Concepts – Project identification – Preparation of Initial Screening Report (ISR) – Approval of ISR and
Project by Government / Owner / Statutory Authorities – Project Development Studies – Preliminary Analysis, SWOT
analysis, Market, Technical, Financial, Economic and Ecological - Pre-Feasibility Report and its Clearance, Project
Estimates and Techno-Economic Feasibility Report, Detailed Project Report – Different Project Clearances required.
Unit II PROJECT PERFORMANCE AND APPRAISAL 9
Economic evaluation - NPV – BCR – IRR – ARR – Urgency –Pay Back Period – Assessment of Various Methods –
Indian Practice of Investment Appraisal – International Practice of Appraisal – Analysis of Risk – Different Methods –
Selection of a Project and Risk Analysis in Practice.
Unit III PROJECT FINANCING 9
Project Financing –Means of Finance – Financial Institutions – Special Schemes – Key Financial Indicators and Ratios.
Unit IV PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION 9
Tender Document – Terms and Conditions – Bidding Process – Contracts – Terminology in Contracts – Types of
Contracts – BOO, BOT, DBOT,DBOOT, BOOT, EPC & Turnkey – Project Planning – Mobilization of resources - Work
Flow Execution.
Unit V PRIVATE SECTOR PARTICIPATION AND PPP 9
Private Sector participation in Infrastructure Development Projects –Public Private Partnership Projects -
Technology Transfer and Foreign Collaboration – Scope of Technology Transfer- Case studies.
Text Book:
1. W.Ronald Hudson, Ralph Haas, Waheed Uddin, “Infrastructure Management: Integrating, Design, Construction,
Maintenance, Rehabilitation and Renovation”, McGraw Hill Publisher, 2013.
2. Raina V.K, “Construction Management Practice – The inside Story”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Limited, 2009.
Reference Book:
1. Leslie Feigenbaum, “Construction Scheduling With Primavera Project Planner”, Prentice Hall, 2002.
2. Prasanna Chandra, “Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation Review”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi. 2019.
Extensive Reading:
• Project management for managers - https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110/107/110107081/
PAGE 389
19CEH25 HIGH RISE BUILDINGS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basic principles of high-rise building.
• Behavior of various structural systems.
• Materials handling and mechanization for tall buildings.
• Various building service systems required by tall buildings.
• Safety aspects of high-rise buildings.
Course Outcome:
• Calculate various load acting on the structural systems.
• Consciously choose the structural system for a particular project.
• Expertise to choose the appropriate equipment for the project.
• Execute various services in tall buildings.
• Adopt suitable safety measures while executing the project.
Unit I BASIC PRINCIPLES 9
Development of High-Rise Structures – General Planning Considerations – Materials used for Construction – Loading
- Bye laws and legislation relevant to tall buildings.
Unit II STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS 9
Factors affecting growth, Height and Structural form - High rise behaviour of Various structural systems – Rigid
frames, braced frames, Infilled frames, shear walls, coupled shear walls, wall frames - Tubular structures, cores,
outrigger – Braced and hybrid mega systems.
Unit III MATERIALS HANDLING AND MECHANISATION 9
Materials handling - Mechanization - Earth moving - Horizontal and vertical movement - Factors affecting selection
and location of tower cranes.
Unit IV SERVICES FOR TALL BUILDINGS 9
Express elevators – Sky lobbies – Local elevators, Service floors etc. - Water supply systems – Skip stage pumping –
Energy conservation methods – Location and sizing of water tanks - Electrical and communication systems - Disposal
of Garbage - Multilevel Car Parking.
Unit V SAFETY AND HEALTH 9
Accident prevention - Acts and regulations - Risk management and assessment - Design for safety, construct for
safety - Falls of person and objects - Confined space - Electrical installations, excavation, fire safety - Lifting
operations.
Text Book:
1. Chew Yit Lin, Michael “Construction Technology for Tall Buildings”, World scientific Publishing Ltd. 2017.
2. Bungale S. Taranath, “Structural Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings - Steel and composite construction”, Mc
Graw Hill co., 2016.
Reference Book:
1. Bryan stafford Smith and Alex Coull, “Tall Building structures- Analysis and Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 1991.
2. Wolf gang Schuller, “High rise building structures”, John Wiley & Sons, 1977.
3. Lynn.S.Beedle, “Advances in Tall Buildings”, CBS Publishers and Distributers, New Delhi,1986.
4. Guy Nordenson, “Tall Buildings”, Thames & Hudson publishers, 2003.
5. Feng Fu, “Design and Analysis of Tall and Complex Structures”, Butterworth-Heinemann imprint, 2018.
Extensive Reading:
• Compendium of High Rise Buildings - CPWD-
https://cpwd.gov.in/Publication/Compendium_of_High_Rise_Buildings_December_2019.pdf
PAGE 390
19CEH26 INFRASTRUCTURE FINANCE L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basics of financial management.
• Preparation of fund and cash flow statements.
• Capital budgeting concepts.
• Approach of capital cost and analysis.
• Details of working capital requirements.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the concept of Profit and Wealth maximization function
• Analyze the Changes in Financial Statements.
• Analyze Cash Flow with Capital Budgeting Problem.
• Examine the theories of capital structure
• Relate the factors of Working Capital, Policy and Financing Policy.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 9
Scope & Functions of Finance - Goals of Financial Management - Role of Finance Manager- Profit Maximization Vs.
Wealth Maximization - Organization of the Finance Function – Accounting Principles –Double Entry system.
Unit II STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN FINANCIAL POSITION 9
Preparation of Fund Flow Statement - Preparation of Cash Flow Statement - Analysis of Financial Statement–
Profitability Turnover Ratios - Liquidity Ratios - Leverage Ratios, and Financial Ratios.
Unit III CAPITAL BUDGETING 9
Concept and importance - Factors influencing working capital requirements - Time Value of Money- Future value of
a single cash flow - Annuity, Present value of a single cashflow- Annuity, Present value of an Uneven Cash Flow-
Multi - Period Compounding – Capital Budgeting Decision.
Unit IV CAPITAL STRUCTURE 9
Cost of Capital - Cost of Debt - Cost of Preference Capital, Cost of Equity Capital - Weighted Average Cost of Capital -
Theories of Capital Structure- EBIT Approach - EBT Approach - EBIT – EPS Analysis.
Unit V WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT 9
Factors Influencing Working Capital Requirements - Operating Cycle and Cash Cycle - Determinants of Working
Capital - Nature of Risk - Financial Leverage - Operating Leverage - Combined Leverage.
Text Book:
1. Narayanaswamy, “Financial Accounting – A Managerial Perspective”, PHI, 2014.
2. Khan M.Y., Jain P.K, “Financial Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publication, 2019.
Reference Book:
1. Maheshwari S.N., Maheshwari S.K., “Advance Accountancy Vol-I”, Vikas Publication, 2017.
2. Michael Jones, “Accounting for Non-Specialists”, Person Education, 2012.
3. Jim McMenamin, “Financial Management – An Introduction”, Taylor and Francis,2002.
4. Amitabh Mukherjee and M Hanif, “Modern Accountancy - Vol II”, TMH Publication, 2018.
Extensive Reading:
• Infrastructure Finance: An Introduction - https://www.managementstudyguide.com/infrastructure-
finance.html.
• https://www.cenfa.org/blog/infrastructure-finance-in-india-and-the-public-private-partnerships/
PAGE 391
19CEH41 MODERN CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS L T P C

Course Objective:
• The properties of special concretes.
• The application of metals and its alloys.
• The various types of composites.
• New construction materials for waterproofing and insulation.
• Smart and intelligent materials.
Course Outcome:
• Use the special concrete based on the needs in the field.
• Employ the correct metal as per prevailing weather conditions.
• Select the appropriate composites for panel constructions.
• Choose suitable waterproofing and insulating materials for effective construction.
• Utilize the state of art of energy efficient and self - healing materials.
Unit I SPECIAL CONCRETES 9
Concrete and its behaviours - Properties, advantages and applications - High Strength Concrete - High Performance
Concrete - Fiber Reinforced Concrete - Self-Compacting Concrete - Waste-material based concrete – Geopolymer
concrete - Materials for fire, thermal, electrical and explosive resistance.
Unit II METALS 9
Types of Steel - Properties and manufacturing process - Advantages of new alloy steels - Properties and advantages
of aluminium and its products - Types of coatings to reinforcement - Applications of coatings - Physical descriptions
of asbestos sheets, GI sheets, tubes and light weight roofing materials.
Unit III COMPOSITES 9
Types of plastics - Properties and manufacturing process - Advantages of reinforced polymers - Types of FRP - FRP
on different structural elements - Applications of FRP - Applications of metal, ceramics and polymer matrix
composites.
Unit IV SPECIAL MATERIALS 9
Types and properties of water proofing compounds - Properties of geo-synthetics and geo-membrane -
Conventional and modern insulating materials - Thermal, sound and electrical insulating materials - Materials for 3D
printing structures
Unit V SMART AND INTELLIGENT MATERIALS 9
Smart and intelligent materials - Special features and its types - Piezoelectric material and shape memory alloys -
Energy harvesting material - Self healing polymer - Case studies on the applications of smart and intelligent
materials - Sensor to detect structural cracks and health of structures.
Text Book:
1. Shan Somayaji, “Civil Engineering Materials”, Prentice Hall Inc., 2010.
2. Shetty M.S, “Concrete Technology: Theory and Practice”, S. Chand & Company Ltd., 2016.
Reference Book:
1. ACI Report 440.2R-02, “Guide for the design and construction of externally bonded RP systems for
strengthening concrete structures”, American Concrete Institute, 2012.
2. Ashby, M.F. and Jones.D.R.H.H. “Engineering Materials 1: An introduction to Properties, applications and
designs”, Elsevier Publications, 2015.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.theconstructor.org
PAGE 392
19CEH42 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• Planning and managing the equipment as per the field requirement
• The equipment types and its operations.
• Procurement of equipments.
• The maintenance of equipment.
• The Safety of equipment employed in different conditions.
Course Outcome:
• Become an expertise in analysing equipment characteristics and planning them effectively.
• Select appropriate equipment with respect to construction works and ground conditions.
• Get sound knowledge on construction equipment procurement process.
• Employ and practice appropriate techniques for effective equipment maintenance.
• Engage in suitable training and choose correct safety method while handling equipment.
Unit I PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT 9
Importance and role in construction field - Identification - Planning - Replacement - Cost control of equipment -
Depreciation analysis - Replacement of equipment - Replacement analysis.
Unit II EQUIPMENTS IN CONSTRUCTION 9
Types of equipment and operations - Earth moving, pile driving, road construction, concrete placing, materials
handling, off-site and on-site fabrication and repair works, mechanical and electrical equipment installation -
Tunnelling - Techniques adopted - Performance characteristics related to the jobs in hand.
Unit III EQUIPMENT PROCUREMENT MANAGEMENT 9
Construction equipment - Purchase Order - Indents - Marketing - Registration of sellers - Selection and placement of
Order - Follow up - Physical training - Physical Inspection and verification - fixation of the re-order level - Buying /
Leasing / Hiring Option – Owner’s tools and Plants
Unit IV EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT 9
Selection based on equipment performance - Equipment operations - Maintenance - Organize maintenance team -
Training - Scheme for maintenance - Monitoring and effectiveness of management - Log book.
Unit V EQUIPMENT SAFETY MANAGEMENT 9
Training - Identification of needs - Training methods – Programmes, seminars, conferences and competitions -
Safety training - Role of government agencies and private consulting agencies - Safe practice - Method of Promoting
- Motivation, communication, creating awareness, awards, celebrations, safety posters, safety displays, safety
pledge, safety incentive scheme and safety campaign - Domestic safety and training.
Text Book:
1. Peurifoy, R.L., Ledbetter, W.B. and Schexnayder, C. “Construction Planning, Equipment and Methods”, 6th
Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013
2. Sharma S.C., “Construction Equipment and Management”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2017
Reference Book:
1. Dr.S. Seetharaman, “Construction Engineering and Management”, Umesh Publications, 5th Edition, 2015.
2. Dr. Mahesh Varma, “Construction Equipment and its planning and Application”, Metropolitan Book Company,
New Delhi. 2010
3. Deodhar, S.V., “Construction Equipment and Job Planning”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2017.
Extensive Reading:
• https://basiccivilengineering.com/2015/04/type-of-equipment-use-in-construction.html
PAGE 393
19CEH43 ENERGY CONSERVATION METHODS IN CONSTRUCTION L T P C

Course Objective:
• The facts and ideas on energy conservation concepts in buildings.
• The scientific concepts of solar heating and cooling.
• The materials which improve daylighting and electrical lighting in the rooms.
• The natural ventilation and design effective heat control systems in buildings.
• The different design concepts and methods with respect to different climatic zones.
Course Outcome:
• Employ the different energy conservation methods during building construction.
• Design passive solar heating and cooling systems in large buildings.
• Construct buildings with enhanced daylight and electrical lighting facilities.
• Design and construct buildings with natural ventilation and thermal control techniques
• Become expertise in designing and construct energy efficient buildings for the special climatic zones.
Unit I ENERGY CONSERVATION 9
Energy required in buildings - Heat transfer - Thermal storage - Greenhouse effect - Psychrometric chart - Thermal
comfort - Site planning and development - Temperature - Humidity - Wind - Optimum site location - Sun protection -
Types of shading devices - IGBC’s rating systems - Indoor environmental quality.
Unit II PASSIVE SOLAR HEATING AND COOLING 9
Passive solar heating - Principles - Key design elements - Trombe walls, water walls, convective air loops - Concepts -
Passive cooling - Principles - Radiation - Evaporation and de-humidification - Mass effect - Load control - Air
filtration and odour removal.
Unit III DAYLIGHTING AND ELECTRICAL LIGHTING 9
Materials, components and details - Insulation - Optical materials - Radiant barriers - Glazing materials - Daylighting
- Building design strategies - Electric lighting - Light distribution - Illumination requirement - Supplementary artificial
lighting design.
Unit IV HEAT CONTROL AND VENTILATION 9
Requirements - Heat transmission through building sections - Thermal performance of building sections -
Orientation of buildings - Thermal design of buildings - Influence of design parameters - Mechanical controls -
Ventilation - Requirements - Minimum standards - Energy conservation in ventilating systems - Design for natural
ventilation.
Unit V DESIGN FOR CLIMATIC ZONES 9
Energy efficiency - Overview of design concepts and architectural interventions - Energy efficient buildings for
various zones - Cold and cloudy, cold and sunny, composite, hot and dry, moderate, warm and humid - Case studies
- Energy audit - Certification.
Text Book:
1. Umberto Desideri and Francesco Asdrubali, “Handbook of Energy Efficiency in Buildings: A Life Cycle Approach”,
Butterworth-Heinemann, 1st edition, 2019.
2. Brown, GZ, “Sun, Wind and Light: Architectural design strategies”, John Wiley,3rd edition, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. Matthew R. Hall, “ Materials for Energy Efficiency and Thermal Comfort in Buildings”, Woodhead Publishing
Ltd.,2010.
2. Waters J.R, “Energy Conversation in Building: A Guide to part L of the building regulations”, Black well
publishing, 2003.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.conserve-energy-future.com/energy-conservation-techniques.php
PAGE 394
19CEH44 INTELLIGENT BUILDING TECHNIQUES L T P C

Course Objective:
• The concepts of intelligent materials and buildings.
• The functions of building comfort systems and its components.
• The modern safety systems fitted in the building.
• The electronics and communication systems involved in the modern buildings.
• The factors which have influence on the performance of buildings.
Course Outcome:
• Analyse and fix the materials and technology involved in the intelligent buildings.
• Choose the appropriate comfort systems and fabricate the HVAC system efficiently and effectively.
• Execute ample safety measures that are required for the building in order to avert building accidents.
• Select correct electronic components and construct a state of art built in electronic systems.
• Improve the performance of buildings in terms of energy efficiency, clean environment and air pollution.
Unit I INTELLIGENT BUILDINGS 9
Basic concepts - Intelligent building automation - Cost analysis - Smart materials and embedded sensor technology -
Building management system and energy savings - Benefits
Unit II INTELLIGENT COMFORT SYSTEMS 9
Basic HVAC system - Human comfort - Sensor - Occupancy sensors and temperature sensors - Energy efficient HVAC
systems - Thermal energy storage - Under floor air distribution - Chilled beams - Other emerging HVAC technologies
for high performance buildings - Automated car parking management
Unit III INTELLIGENT SAFETY SYSTEMS 9
Life safety factors - Intrusion sensors - Space sensors - Closed circuit television and surveillance systems - Access
control management system - Portrait id, swipe card access control, biometric access control - Fire protection
systems - Smoke detection, automatic fire alarm detection, sprinklers, hose reels hydrants, foam systems -
Microprocessor based alarm - Emergency control of elevator, doors, HVAC systems - Security and alarm system
Unit IV BUILDING ELECTRONICS 9
Microprocessor based control - Programmable logic controller - Communication principles - Telephone systems -
Communal aerial broadcasting - Satellite communication - Fibre optic system
Unit V PERFORMANCE BUILDINGS 9
High performance buildings - Control theory - Market trends - Energy efficiency - Environmental and greenhouse gas
emission reduction - Clean development Mechanism - Practical benefits - Smart home - Smart office.
Text Book:
1. Shengwei Wang, “Intelligent Buildings and Building Automation”, Spon Press, London, 2010.
2. Derek Clements Croome, “Intelligernt Building: Design, Management and Operations”, 3rd edition, Telford ICEP
Publishers, London, 2014.
Reference Book:
1. Ehrlich, C., “Intelligent Building Dictionary: Terminology for Smart, Integrated Green Building Design,
Construction, and Management”, San Francisco, Handson-Guide, 2007.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.iofficecorp.com/blog/intelligent-building-examples
PAGE 395
19CEH45 QUALITY CONTROL IN CONSTRUCTION L T P C

Course Objective:
• The concepts of quality in construction site.
• The quality improvement process.
• The quality inspection program.
• The concept of quality management system.
• The quality management system and environment management system.
Course Outcome:
• Carry out the quality check, audit and inspection
• Employ different quality improvement techniques.
• Execute quality inspection in the various construction works.
• Adopt different quality management techniques, assurance and control techniques in construction industries.
• Employ ISO 9000 and ISO 14000 based on the functional nature of industries.
Unit I QUALITY 9
Introduction - Quality Contributors at a Construction Site - Quality plan, quality audits, quality manual, PDCA cycle -
Factors influencing construction quality - Quality plan - Inspection procedures - Total QA/ QC programme.
Unit II QUALITY IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES 9
Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction - Tiling - Plastering - Waterproofing - Factors affecting Quality and Reliability
- Quality control, tests and checklist - Quality in Execution - Good practices and Precautions - Remedial measures -
Documentation
Unit III QUALITY INSPECTION PROGRAM 9
Concrete Mix Design - Concrete Quality - Formwork: Types, Quality control, checklist -pre, during and after,
compliance - RCC Works: Coordinate checks, Pre & post pour checks - Defects in RCC Work, Precautions, Good
practices, documentation - Brickwork and Blockwork Check for quality and compliance - Remedial measures,
documentation - Inspection - Purpose - Reports and records
Unit IV QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9
Objectives - Authority and responsibilities - Quality management guidelines - Quality councils and circles - Quality
system documents - Quality related training - Implementing a quality system - Third party certification
Unit V QUALITY STANDARDS 9
Quality standards - Quality of cement, bricks, steel and concrete - Provisions of Indian standards - ISO 9000 and ISO
14000 standards.
Text Book:
1. Abdul Razzak Rumane, “Quality Management in Construction Projects”, CRC Press, 2nd edition, 2018.
2. O'Brien, James J, “Construction Inspection Handbook - Total Quality Management”, Springer, 3rd edition, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Hutchins.G, ISO 9000 : A Comprehensive Guide to Registration, Audit Guideline and Successful Certification,
Viva Books Pvt. Ltd.,
2. Juran Frank, J.M. and Gryna, F.M. “Quality Planning and Analysis: From Product development through use”,
McGraw Hill, 6th edition, 2010.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.planradar.com/quality-control-in-construction/
• https://www.designingbuildings.co.uk/wiki/Quality_control_for_construction_works
PAGE 396
19CEH46 RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN CONSTRUCTION L T P C

Course Objective:
• The various functional areas of manpower.
• The cassification, procurement, store management of materials.
• The management of machinery used in field.
• The various time management techniques.
• The types of cost and its management.
Course Outcome:
• Manage the diverse natured manpower in the construction field.
• Execute the management of construction materials effectively.
• Handle the equipment safely and maintaining the service records in a streamlined manner.
• Control the time phases of project and complete it within the stipulated time.
• Gain well versed knowledge on various costs involved in the project and carryout the time-cost trade off.
Unit I MANPOWER MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction - Organization - Fulcrum of the modern enterprise - Informal groups - Management - Employees -
Human resource management
Unit II MATERIAL MANAGEMENT 9
Importance - Classification and Codification of materials - Inventory control - Managing the inventory and flow of
raw materials, Work - in - Process, Finished Goods, and Supplies to ensure / enhance the organization’s
competitiveness and profitability - Stores Management - Quality control, Use of Material Management Systems
(MMS).
Unit III MACHINERY MANAGEMENT 9
Identification - Planning - Equipment Management in Projects - Maintenance Managements - Replacement - Cost
Control of equipment - Depreciation Analysis - Safety Management.
Unit IV TIME MANAGEMENT 9
Evolution of time management concepts - Need for time management - Challenges of project management (delays
in pre-execution, construction phase) - Methods and processes for time management as per IS 15883-II, PMBOK -
Work Breakdown Structure.
Unit V COST MANAGEMENT 9
Time Cost Analysis - Cost components of a construction project - Direct and indirect costs - Critical Chain Project
Management - Delay Management - Earned Value Management (EVM) - Cost-Time Relationships - Utility Curves - S-
Curves - Time-Cost trade-off
Text Book:
1. Michael R. Canter, “Resource Management for Construction: An Integrated Approach”, Macmillan, 3rd edition,
2005.
2. Glenn .A, Sears and Reichard, Clough .H, “Construction Project Management - A practical guide to field
construction management”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 2009
Reference Book:
1. A.K. Datta, “Materials Management: Procedures, Text and Cases”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
2. Richard J. Tersine, “Principles Of Inventory And Materials, Management”, Prentice Hall,2004
3. P. Gopalakrishnan, Abid Haleem, “Handbook of Materials Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.2015
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.thebalancesmb.com/a-guide-to-effective-construction-resource-management-845350
PAGE 397
19CSH01 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE FOR ENGINEERS L T P C

Offered by CSE (Emerging Area Course offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To learn about history of AI and symbolic logic in AI
• To understand the knowledge representation and reasoning mechanisms
• To study uncertainty and searching techniques to solve real world problems
• To learn AI technologies and expert systems
• To introduce machine learning models and AI in various applications
Course Outcome:
• Represent problems in symbolic logic
• Use the knowledge and the process of inference to derive new facts
• Formulate a problem and find the solution using search techniques and probabilistic methods
• Build AI system using AI technologies and expert systems
• Design machine learning model for real world problems
Unit I INTRODUCTION AND LOGIC 9
Introduction-History of AI-Applications of AI-Future of AI- Logic-Propositions-Normal Forms-Logical consequences-
Resolution principle-Predicate calculus- Clausal Form-Rules of Inference- Unification-Resolution
Unit II KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION AND REASONING 9
Procedure for knowledge acquisition-Knowledge representation-Types of representation schemes-Reasoning-
Forward chaining-Backward chaining-Domain modelling-Semantic nets reasoning systems-Frame based systems
Unit III UNCERTAINTY AND SEARCH TECHNIQUES 9
Uncertainty-Non monotonic and monotonic reasoning-Bayes theorem-Dempster and Shafer’s theory of evidences-
Non-classical logics-Default logics-Bayesian networks-Fuzzy logic- Searching- Problem representation-
Representation schemes-Blind search techniques-Heuristic search techniques- Game searches
Unit IV AI TECHNOLOGIES AND EXPERT SYSTEMS 9
Computer vision- Natural language processing-Speech recognition-Expert systems- Basic characteristics-Brief
history-Knowledge engineering-Inferencing-Programming methodology and Expert systems tools
Unit V NEURAL NETWORKS AND APPLICATIONS OF AI 9
Introduction - Features of Biological neural networks-Learning algorithms-Different network architecture and their
applications-Some simple networks-Comparison of neural networks with rule based networks and expert systems-
AI Applications-AI in E-commerce-AI in E-Tourism-AI in Industry-AI in Medicine
Text Book:
1. Rajendra Akerkar, “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence”, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2012.
Reference Book:
1. Stuart Russell, Peter Norvig, "Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach", Pearson education, Third edition,
2014.
2. Richard E Neapolitan, “Artificial Intelligence: With an Introduction to Machine Learning”, CRC Press, Second
Edition, 2018.
3. Nils.J.Nilsson, "Artificial Intelligence: A new synthesis", Elsevier, July 2003.
4. Andries P.Engelbrecht, "Computational Intelligence: An Introduction", John Wiley & Sons, 2nd edition, 2007.
5. John Fulcher, L.C. Jain, “Computational Intelligence: A Compendium, Studies in Computational Intelligence”,
Vol.115, Springer, 2008.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.formal.stanford.edu/jmc/whatisai/
• http://www.sciencedaily.com/news/computers_math/artificial_intelligence/
PAGE 398
19CSH02 MACHINE LEARNING USING PYTHON L T P C

Course Objective:
• To study the basics of machine learning and NumPy
• To learn linear models and Scikit-learn for SVM
• To understand distance based models and Scikit-learn for k-means algorithm
• To know about tree model, rule based models and Scikit-learn for tree model
• To perform model evaluation and improvement in machine learning algorithms
Course Outcome:
• Explore the machine learning concepts and work with Numpy
• Apply the linear modelling technique to solve a problem
• Work with distance based models using scikit learn
• Build tree and rule based models
• Record the model evaluation results for the algorithms and analyze the results
Machine learning - Task : problems solved with machine learning, Looking for structure, performance evaluation -
Models: Geometric models, Probabilistic models, Logical models, Grouping and grading -Features – Working with
NumPy- Creating NumPy Arrays-Array indexing-Reshaping Arrays-Array Math
Unit II LINEAR MODELS 9
Least square method – multivariate linear regression – regularised regression – perceptron –support vector
machines- soft margin SVM-Going beyond linearity with kernel methods- Using Scikit-learn for SVM -Plotting the
Hyperplane and the Margins -Making Predictions -Kernel Trick - Adding a Third Dimension -Plotting the 3D
Hyperplane
Unit III DISTANCE-BASED MODELS 9
Distance and measure - Neighbours and exemplars - Nearest neighbour classification - Distance based clustering: K-
means algorithm, clustering around medoids –silhouettes – hierarchical clustering – Using K-Means in Scikit-learn-
Evaluating Cluster Size Using the Silhouette Coefficient-Calculating the Silhouette Coefficient-Finding the Optimal K
Unit IV TREE AND RULE MODELS 9
Decision trees – learning decision trees – ranking and probability estimation trees – regression trees – clustering
trees – learning ordered rule lists – learning unordered rule lists – Using Decision trees in scikit-learn- Analyzing
decision trees- Feature importance in trees
Unit V MODEL EVALUATION AND IMPROVEMENT 9
Cross-Validation in scikit-learn -Benefits of Cross-Validation -Stratified k-Fold Cross-Validation and Other Strategies -
Grid Search-Simple Grid Search-Grid Search with Cross-Validation -Evaluation Metrics and Scoring -Metrics for
Binary Classification- Regression Metrics-Using Evaluation Metrics in Model Selection
Text Book:
1. P. Flach, “Machine Learning: The art and science of algorithms that make sense of data”, Cambridge University
Press, 2012.
2. Wei-Meng Lee, “Python Machine Learning”, John Wiley & Sons, 2019.
3. Andreas C. Müller and Sarah Guido, “Introduction to Machine Learning with Python- A Guide for Data
Scientists”,O’Reilly publications,First edition,2016.
Reference Book:
1. K. P. Murphy, “Machine Learning: A probabilistic perspective”, MIT Press, 2012.
2. C. M. Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2007.
3. M. Mohri, A. Rostamizadeh, and A. Talwalkar, “Foundations of Machine Learning”, MIT Press, 2012
4. S.N Sivanandam, S.N Deepa, “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India Pvt.Ltd., 2nd Edition,2011
Extensive Reading:
• http://ocw.mit.edu
• https://www.coursera.org/learn/machine-learning/
• http://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/
• www.imdb.com
• https://www.kaggle.com/
PAGE 399
19CSH03 NLP TOOLS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To explore the fundamental concepts of Natural Language Processing
• To learn the different data pre-processing steps in lexical analysis
• To understand the working of syntactic and semantic analysis using NLTK
• To familiar with text classification and topic modeling methods
• To work with sentiment analysis and machine translation using python
Course Outcome:
• Familiarize with concept of Natural Language Processing
• Pre-process the data from the collected dataset using NLTK
• Extract the features and do the syntactic and semantic analysis using NLTK
• Classify the text using text classification algorithm and find the recent topic using LSA and LDA
• Find the different emotions and sentiment using sentiment analysis and translate from one natural language to
other using machine translation
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO NLP 9
Natural language processing – History of NLP – Early NLP systems – Phases of natural language processing –
Evaluation of NLP systems - Origins and challenges of NLP – Basic English concepts –- Language and Grammar -
Processing Indian Languages.
Unit II LEXICAL ANALYSIS USING NLTK 9
Introduction and installation of NLTK – Data Pre-processing: Tokenization – Part of Speech (PoS) Tagging - Word
Frequency Counting – Stop Words Removal – Text Normalization – Spelling Correction - Stemming – Lemmatization
– Named Entity Recognition.
Unit III SYNTACTIC AND SEMANTIC ANALYSIS USING NLTK 9
Feature Extraction: Building Bag of Words (BoW) Model – Building TF-IDF Model – Word Embeddings using
word2vec - Sentence Boundary Detection – Parsing - Lexical Resources: WordNet – FrameNet - Word Synonyms and
Antonyms using NLTK – Word Negation Tracking - Word Sense Disambiguation
Unit IV TEXT CLASSIFICATION AND TOPIC MODELING 9
Introduction to Text Classification – Machine Learning Overview – Classification Metrics – Confusion Matrix –
Developing a Text Classifier – Saving and Loading Models - Introduction to Topic Modelling – Topic Discovery – Topic
Modelling Algorithms: Latent Semantic Analysis – Latent Dirichlet Algorithms.
Unit V SENTIMENT ANALYSIS AND MACHINE TRANSLATION 9
Introduction to Sentiment Analysis – Need and Growth of Sentiment Analysis – TextBlob – Understanding Data for
Sentiment Analysis – Training Sentiment Models – Introduction to Machine Translation - Problems in Machine
Translation - Machine Translation Approaches - Translation involving Indian Languages using Python
Text Book:
1. Ela Kumar, “Natural Language Processing”, I.K International, New Delhi 2011.
2. Sohom Ghosh, Dwight Gunning, “Natural Language Processing Fundamentals”, Packt Publishing Limited, 2019.
3. Steven Bird, Ewan Klein and Edward Loper, “Natural Language Processing with Python”, O'Reilly Media, 1st
Edition, 2009.
Reference Book:
1. Tanveer Siddiqui, U.S. Tiwary, “Natural Language Processing and Information Retrieval”, Oxford University
Press, 2008.
2. Daniel Jurafsky and James H Martin, “Speech and Language Processing: An introduction to Natural Language
Processing, Computational Linguistics and Speech Recognition”, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition 2008.
3. Christopher D. Manning and Hinrich Schutze, “Foundations of Statistical Natural Language Processing”, MIT
Press, 2003.
Extensive Reading:
• http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106101007/
• http://www.tutorialspoint.com/artificial_intelligence/artificial_intelligence_natural_language_processing.htm
• http://nlp.stanford.edu/
• http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science
• https://www.udemy.com/course/nlp-natural-language-processing-with-python/
• https://www.packtpub.com/in/big-data-and-business-intelligence/natural-language-processing-fundamentals
PAGE 400
19CSH04 COMPUTER VISION WITH OPENCV L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the OpenCV methods to apply the basic operations on images
• To learn about histogram and binary vision
• To study about geometric transformations and edge detection
• To understand various features and recognition techniques
• To study about video tracking and panoramas
Course Outcome:
• Apply OpenCV image processing basic operations
• Find the histogram and apply thresholding
• Do edge detection and apply geometric transformations in images
• Extract various features from images
• Create image panorama and track videos
Unit I OPENCV AND BASIC OPERATIONS ON IMAGES 9
History of OpenCV - Built-in Modules - Setting up OpenCV on Your Computer - Stereo Matching - Homography
Estimation in Video - Circle and Line Detection - Image Segmentation - Bounding Box and Circle - Image Inpainting -
Displaying Images from Disk in a Window - The cv::Mat Structure - Converting Between Color-spaces - GUI Track-
Bars and Callback Functions - ROIs: Cropping a Rectangular Portion out of an Image - Accessing Individual Pixels of
an Image - Videos
Unit II IMAGES, HISTOGRAMS, BINARY VISION 9
Simple pinhole camera model – Sampling – Quantisation – Colour images – Noise – Smoothing –1D and 3D
histograms - Histogram/Image Equalisation - Histogram Comparison - Back-projection - k-means Clustering –
Thresholding - Threshold Detection Methods - Variations on Thresholding - Mathematical Morphology -
Connectivity
Unit III EDGES AND GEOMETRIC TRANSFORMATIONS 9
Problem Specification and Algorithm - Affine Transformations - Perspective Transformations - Specification of More
Complex Transformations – Interpolation - Modelling and Removing Distortion from Cameras - Edge Detection -
Contour Segmentation - Hough Transform
Unit IV FEATURES AND RECOGNITION 9
Moravec Corner Detection - Harris Corner Detection - FAST Corner Detection – SIFT - Other Detectors - Template
Matching - Chamfer Matching - Statistical Pattern Recognition - Cascade of Haar Classifiers - Other Recognition
Techniques – Performance
Unit V VIDEO AND PANORAMAS 9
Moving Object Detection – Tracking - Video Datasets and Formats - Metrics for Assessing Video Tracking
Performance – Affine Transformations - Perspective Transformations - Image panorama
Text Book:
1. Kenneth Dawson-Howe, “A Practical Introduction to Computer Vision with OpenCV”, Wiley, 2014
2. Samarth Brahmbhatt, “Practical OpenCV”, Apress, 2013
Reference Book:
1. Adrian Kaehler, Gary Bradski, “Learning OpenCV 3: Computer Vision in C++ with the OpenCV Library”, First
Edition, O’Reilly Media, 2017
2. Prateek Joshi, David Millán Escrivá, Vinicius Godoy, “OpenCV by Example”, Packt Publishing, 2016.
3. Adrian Rosebrock, “Practical Python and OpenCV”, Second Edition, Py Image Search, 2016.
Extensive Reading:
• https://docs.opencv.org/master/d9/df8/tutorial_root.html
• https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/opencv-c-program-face-detection/
• https://docs.opencv.org/2.4/doc/tutorials/introduction/display_image/display_image.html
PAGE 401
19CSH05 DEEP LEARNING USING TENSOR FLOW L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn deep neural network foundation with Tensorflow 2.0.
• To understand convolutional networks and its operations.
• To be familiar with word embeddings and sequential modelling.
• To illustrate the variants of autoencoders.
• To get exposure on different types of Generative Adversarial Networks
Course Outcome:
• Use Multilayer perceptron for recognition kind applications with hyper-parameter tuning.
• Apply convolutional networks for real world applications in Computer Vision domain.
• Design word embedding model and Recurrent Neural Network for text data processing.
• Construct Autoencoders and its variants for reconstruction task.
• Apply the Generative Adversarial Network based deep learning techniques for recent applications
Unit I NEURAL NETWORK FOUNDATIONS WITH TENSORFLOW 2.0 9
Introduction to Tensorflow 1.0 and 2.0 – Introduction to Neural Networks – Perceptron – Multi-layer Perceptron
with example – Activation functions – Implementation of hand-written digit recognition and improve the designed
network using hyper parameter tuning – Working with Google Colab. Regression -Types – Implementation of
regression using Tensorflow Estimators.
Unit II CONVOLUTIONAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Convolutional Networks – Deep Convolutional networks - Convolution operation – Sparse Interactions, Parameter
Sharing - Pooling – Basic Convolution function. Implementation of tensorflow based object detection and image
classification using convolutional networks. Computer Vision – Classification and Localization – Semantic
Segmentation – Instance Segmentation – Transfer Learning.
Unit III WORD EMBEDDING AND RECURRENT NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Word Embedding fundamentals – Distributed Representations – Static Embeddings: Word2Vec, GloVe – Gensim for
creating and exploring embedding space – Neural Embeddings: Item2Vec, node2Vec – Dynamic Embeddings –
Sentence and Paragraph embeddings.
Recurrent Neural Networks: Basic RNN Cell – Backpropagation through time (BPTT) – RNN Cell variants: Long-short
term memory – Gated Recurrent Unit. RNN Variants: Bidirectional RNN – Stateful RNN. RNN Topologies.
Unit IV AUTOENCODERS 9
Auto encoders: Introduction – Vanilla Autoencoder – Sparse Autoencoder – Denoising Autoencoder – Clearing
images using denoising autoencoder - Stacked Autoencoder – Convolutional Autoencoder for removing noise in the
images.
Unit V GENERATIVE ADVERSARIAL NETWORKS 9
Working functionalities of GAN – MNIST digit generation using GAN in Tensorflow – Deep Convolutional GAN –
DCGAN for MNIST digits – GAN Architectures: SRGAN, CycleGAN, InfoGAN – Applications of GAN.
Text Book:
1. Antonio Gulli, Amita Kapoor, Sujit Pal, “Deep Learning with Tensorflow 2 and Keras”, Second Edition, Packt
Publishing, December 2019.
Reference Book:
1. Yoshua Bengio and Ian J.Goodfellow and Aaron Courville, "Deep Learning", MIT Press, 2015.
2. Li Deng, Dong Yu, "Deep Learning: Methods and Applications", now publishers, 2014.
3. Special Issue on deep learning for speech and language processing, IEEE Transaction on Audio, Speech and
Language Processing, vol. 18, iss. 5, 2010
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.deeplearningbook.org/
• https://developers.google.com/machine-learning/crash-course/ml-intro
PAGE 402
19CSH06 KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION AND REASONING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn about knowledge representation and FOL
• To study resolution and horn clauses
• To understand the different representation formats
• To dealt with problem of reasoning under uncertainty
• To learn to construct plans of actions
Course Outcome:
• Represent knowledge in suitable language format
• Solve a problem using resolution method
• Apply various representation formats to store the knowledge
• Build probabilistic reasoning models to solve uncertainty problems
• Represent planning problems and find the sequence of actions to achieve goals
Unit I INTRODUCTION AND LANGUAGE OF FOL 9
Key concepts - Knowledge Representation and Reasoning - Role of logic – FOL – Syntax – Semantics – Pragmatics -
Explicit and Implicit belief - Expressing Knowledge
Unit II RESOLUTION AND HORN CLAUSES 9
Propositional case-Handling variables and quantifiers - Dealing with Computational Intractability - Horn clauses - SLD
resolution - Computing SLD derivations
Unit III REPRESENTATION 9
Object oriented representation - Object and Frames - Frame Formalism - Using frames to plan a trip - Structured
descriptions - Meaning and entailment - Computing entailment - Taxonomies and classification - Ontological
Engineering - Categories and objects - Reasoning systems for categories - Protege tool
Unit IV REASONING 9
Default Reasoning – Closed - World reasoning – Circumscription - Default logic - Autoepistemic logic -Noncategorical
reasoning - Objective probability - Subjective probability - Vagueness
Unit V ACTIONS AND PLANNING 9
Situation calculus - Simple solution to the frame problem - Complex actions - Planning in the Situation calculus -
STRIPS representation - Planning as a reasoning task - Hierarchical planning - Conditional planning
Text Book:
1. Ronald J Brachman, Hector J Levesque, “Knowledge representation and reasoning”, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers,2004.
2. Stuart Russell, Peter Norvig, "Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach", Pearson education, Third edition,
2015.
Reference Book:
1. Michael Gelfond,Yulia Kahl, “Knowledge Representation, Reasoning, and the Design of Intelligent Agents:The
Answer-set Programming approach”, Cambridge University Press,2014.
2. “Handbook of Knowledge Representation”, Editors: Frank van Harmelen Vladimir Lifschitz Bruce Porter, Volume
1, First Edition, Elsevier, 2007.
3. R.J.Brachman,H.J.Levesque,“Readings in Knowledge Representation”,Morgan Kaufmann, San Mateo, CA, 1985
Extensive Reading:
• http://cs227.stanford.edu
• http://syllabus.cs.manchester.ac.uk/ugt/2019/COMP34512/
• https://protege.stanford.edu/publications/ontology_development/ontology101.pdf
• https://cgi.csc.liv.ac.uk/~frank/teaching/comp08/protege_tutorial.pdf
• https://protegewiki.stanford.edu/wiki/Protege4Pizzas10Minutes
PAGE 403
19MAH91 NUMBER THEORY FOR INFORMATION SECURITY L T P C

Offered by MAT (Emerging Area Course offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To introduce the concept of factorization of numbers in terms of primes numbers.
• To describe the problems in system of congruence equation.
• To define and interpret primitive roots and quadratic residues.
• To apply the concept of correction, decoding and finite fields.
• To introduce the concept of linear codes, generator matrix and parity-check matrix in information security.
Course Outcome:
• Explain about fundamentals in number theory.
• Apply techniques to solve congruence’s in cryptography.
• Apply quadratic residue concept for solving problems.
• Compare the concept of coding and decoding in information security.
• Evaluate problems in linear code applicable in information security.
Basic group theory – Rings and finite fields - Division algorithm – Greatest common Divisors – The Euclidean
algorithm and continued fractions – Fundamental theorem of arithmetic
Unit II CONGRUENCE 9
Ring of congruence classes – Linear congruences – Euler phi function – Chinese remainder theorem – Euler’s and
Fermat’s theorem – Psuedoprimes and Carmichael numbers – public key cryptography
Polynomials and primitive roots – primitive roots to composite moduli – power residue – Quadratic residue –
Quadratic reciprocity law – Quadratic residues to composite moduli
Unit IV ERROR DETECTION, CORRECTION AND DECODING, FINITE FIELDS 9
Communication channels- Maximum likelihood decoding- Hamming distance- Nearest neighbor/minimum distance
decoding- Distance of a code- Fields- Polynomial rings- Structure of finite fields
Unit V LINEAR CODES 9
Vector spaces over finite fields- Linear codes- Hamming weight- Bases for linear codes- Generator matrix and parity-
check matrix- Equivalence of linear codes- Encoding with a linear code- Decoding of linear codes
Text Book:
1. Melvyn B. Nathanson, "Methods in Number Theory", Springer (SIE), 2005.
2. San Ling and Chaoping Xing, "Coding Theory A First Course", 1st Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2004.
3. Van Lint J.H., "Introduction to Coding Theory", Springer, 2012
Reference Book:
1. David M. Burton,"Elementary Number Theory", 7th Edition, MC Graw Hill Education, 2012.
2. Merkow Mark S and Jim Breithaupt, "Information security Principles and practices", 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2014.
PAGE 404
19CSH21 CRYPTOGRAPHIC ALGORITHMS AND ARCHITECTURE USING JAVA L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the concepts of security services, security mechanisms and security components in java.
• To Implement the key management techniques using Java.
• To Implement the Digital Signature Algorithm using Java
• To study the principles of symmetric key and Asymmetric key encryption
• To acquire fundamental knowledge on resource access management using Java
Course Outcome:
• Able to map the security features to the digital world
• Implement various key management techniques in Java
• Implement digital signature algorithm in Java
• Apply encryption techniques for hiding the data
• Use JAAS and GSS to authenticate and authorize the enterprise resources
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO SECURITY 9
Security Basics – Protecting the information, Security Services, Mapping security features to the digital world,
Hackers tool – different types of hacks, Understanding Network Attacks, protecting against hackers, Java Security
Components – Categorizing security elements, categorizing security components in Java.
Unit II IDENTITY AND AUTHENTICATION 9
Key Management Algorithms – Understanding the purpose of keys, Symmetric vs Asymmetric Keys, Diffie-Hellman
Key Exchange, RSA Key Exchange, Elliptic Curve Cryptography, Key Management through Internet Protocol – IP
Security Protocol, Simple Authentication and Security Layer, Implementing Keys with Java, Key Management using
Java.
Unit III DATA INTEGRITY 9
Data Integrity – Hash Function, Message Digest Algorithms, Implementing Message Digest Algorithms in Java,
Message Authentication – Message Authentication Code algorithm, Implementation of Message Authentication
Code in Java, Signature Security – Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA), RSA digital Signature Algorithm, Elliptic Curve
Digital Signature Algorithm, Implementation of Digital Signature Algorithm using Java – Applications of security
algorithms: Block chain technology
Unit IV DATA HIDING 9
Understanding Symmetric Cipher, Implementation of RSA public Key Encryption, Extending New Ciphers with the
Java – Implementation of CipherSpi, Implementation of RC4 Stream Cipher using Java, Applying Ciphers - Password
based Encryption, Blowfish Encryption, Java Smart Card
Unit V RESOURCE ACCESS USING JAVA 9
Securing Enterprise Resources – Criteria for security systems, Security needs, security requirements, Authentication
and Authorization through Kerberos, Securing Messages with Java General Security Services (GSS) API –
implementing the GSS, Authentication using Java Authentication and Authorization Service (JAAS), Java Access –
Class Loader, Security Manager, Access Controller, Policy, Permission Collection. JASS Authorization
Text Book:
1. Rich Helton, Johennie Helton, Mastering Java Security: Cryptography, Algorithms and Architecture, 1st Edition,
Wiley- dreamtech, 2002.
Reference Book:
1. Wade Trappe, Lawrence C Washington, “Introduction to Cryptography with coding theory”, 2nd edition,
Pearson, 2007
2. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, March 2013.
3. Bruce Schneier and Neils Ferguson, ―Practical Cryptography‖, First Edition, WileyDreamtech India Pvt Ltd, 2003
4. W. Mao, “Modern Cryptography – Theory and Practice”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2007.
5. Douglas R Simson ―Cryptography –Theory and practice‖, First Edition, CRC Press,1995.
6. David Hook,“Beginning Cryptography with Java”, Wiley, November 2005
7. Jonathan Knudsen, “Java Cryptography”, O’Reily Media, May 2010
Extensive Reading:
• http://tutorials.jenkov.com/java-cryptography/index.html
• https://docs.oracle.com/javase/8/docs/technotes/guides/security/crypto/CryptoSpec.html
PAGE 405
19CSH22 COMPUTER FORENSICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn the fundamentals of Computer forensics and Data Acquisition
• To study the tools and techniques in File System Forensic analysis
• To gain knowledge on Multimedia forensics, malware analysis and mobile device forensics.
• To become familiar with software and hardware tools
• To learn the tools and techniques in Network and E-mail Forensics
Course Outcome:
• Determine how to perform data acquisition.
• Analyze and validate evidences collected from various sources
• Explore the tools and techniques in File System Forensic analysis
• Perform multimedia forensics and malware forensics.
• Identify the issues in mobile device forensics, Network and E-mail Forensics
• Determine the needs of software tools and forensic hardware workstations
Unit I INTRODUCTION, DATA ACQUISITION 9
An Overview of Digital Forensics - Preparing a Digital Forensics Investigation - Procedures for Private-Sector High-
Tech Investigations- Understanding Data Recovery Workstations and Software- Conducting an Investigation. Data
Acquisitions: Understanding Storage Formats for Digital Evidence - Determining the Best Acquisition Method-
Contingency Planning for Image Acquisitions- Using Acquisition Tools- Validating Data Acquisitions- Performing
RAID Data Acquisitions- Using Remote Network Acquisition Tools- Using Other Forensics Acquisition Tools
Unit II EVIDENCE PROCESSING, DIGITAL FORENSICS ANALYSIS 9
Processing Crime and Incident Scenes: Digital evidence – Identification - Collection in private sector incident scenes -
Processing law enforcement crime scenes - Preparing for a search - Securing a digital incident - Seizing digital
evidence - Storing digital evidence - Obtaining a digital hash - Reviewing a case. Digital Forensics Analysis and
Validation: Determining What Data to Collect and Analyze- Validating Forensic Data- Addressing Data-Hiding
Techniques
Unit III FILE SYSTEM FORENSIC ANALYSIS 9
Examining File Systems: Disk Partitioning-Volume Analysis- Examing FAT File Systems- Deleted File Recovery in FAT
File Systems -Examining NTFS File Systems- Deleted File Recovery in NTFS File Systems-File Carving: Principles of File
Carving-File Carving Tools- File Signature Searching Forensics-Key word Forensics: Forensic Keyword Searching
Process- Timeline Analysis: Principles of Timeline Analysis-Timeline Analysis Process-Forensic Timeline Analysis
Tools-Data Hiding Detection
Unit IV MULTIMEDIA FORENSICS, MALWARE ANALYSIS AND MOBILE DEVICE FORENSICS 9
Digital Image Processing Fundamentals-Image Forgery Detection-Steganography and Steganalysis Basics-
Steganography Techniques and Tools- Malware Analysis : Malware, Viruses and Worms-Essential Skills and Tools for
Malware Analysis-Malware Tools and Techniques- Mobile Phone Fundamentals- Mobile Device Forensic
Investigation- Subscriber Identification Module- SIM Architecture , Security, Evidence Extraction
Unit V SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE TOOLS, NETWORK FORENSICS AND E-MAIL FORENSICS 9
Evaluating Digital Forensic Tool Needs, Digital Software Forensics Software Tools Digital Forensics Hardware Tools,
Building a Forensics Workstation: The Sleuth Kit and Autopsy Forensic Browser-- Validating and Testing Forensics
Software, Network Forensics Overview, Performing Live Acquisitions, The HoneyNet project, E-mail Forensics: Role
of E-mail in investigations. Role of Client and Server In E-mail Crimes, Investigating E-mail Crimes and Violations,
Understanding E-mail Servers, Using Specialized E-mail Forensics Tools
Text Book:
1. Nelson, Phillips, Steuart, “Computer Forensics and Investigations”, Cengage Learning, Sixth Edition, 2018
2. Xiaodong Lin,” Introductory Computer Forensics-A Hands on Practical Approach”, Springer 2018.
Reference Book:
1. Dejey, Murugan, “ Cyber Forensics”, Oxford University Press, 2018
2. John R. Vacca, “Computer Forensics”, Firewall Media, New Delhi, 2009.
3. Cory Altheide, Harlan Carvey, ”Digital Forensics with Open Source Tools”, Syngress, 2011.
4. Marjie T Britz,” Computer Forensics and Cyber Crime An Introduction”, Pearson, Third Edition, 2013.
5. Thomas J Holt, Adam M Bossler and Kathryn C. SeigFried-Spellar, ”Cyber Crime and Digital Forensics An
Introduction”, Routledge, Second Edition, 2018.
6. William J Buchanan, ”Introduction to Security and Network Forensics”, CRC Press, 2011.
PAGE 406
7. Nihad Ahmad and Hassan, Rami Hijazi, ”Data Hiding Techniques in Windows OS A practical approach to
investigation and Defense”, Elsevier 2017.
8. Keith J. Jones, Richard Bejtlich, Curtis W. Rose, “Real Digital Forensics”, Addison Wesley Pearson Education,
2005.
9. Christopher L.T. Brown, “Computer Evidence – Collection & Preservation”, Firewall Media, Second Edition, 2009
10. Jesus Mena, “Homeland Security – Techniques & Technologies”, Firewall Media, 2007.
11. Robert M. Slade, “Software Forensics Collecting Evidence from the scene of a Digital Crime”, Tata McGraw Hill,
2005.
12. Chad Steel, “Windows Forensics”, Wiley India Edition, 2006.
13. Harlan Carvey, ”Windows Forensics Analysis”, Syngress 2007
14. Fernando Carbone, “Computer Forensics with FTK”, Packt Publishing, 2014.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.cyberforensics.in
• http://www.securestate.com/Services/Incident%20Response/Pages/Forensic-Analysis.aspx
• http://www.brandeisdl.discom.com/Forensics/02Modules/07/01Overview/
• http://www.mobilephoneinvestigations.net/
• https://www.emailforensictool.com
PAGE 407
19CSH23 NETWORK SECURITY ESSENTIALS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand types of attacks and symmetric encryption
• To learn about public key encryption, key distribution and authentication
• To study about cloud security and transport level security
• To understand the issues in wireless network security and email security
• To learn about IP security, intrusion detection and firewalls.
Course Outcome:
• Analyse the types of attacks and explore how symmetric encryption can mitigate the attacks.
• Explore the application of public key cryptography and effective key distribution protocols.
• Compare effectiveness of various network access control and transport level security methods.
• Distinguish issues related to wireless networks and email security.
• Explore mechanisms for IP security .
• Compare the effectiveness of intrusion detection systems and firewalls
Unit I INTRODUCTION AND SYMMETRIC ENCRYPTION 9
Introduction: Computer Security Concepts- The OSI Security Architecture- Security Attacks- Security Services-
Security Mechanisms- Fundamental Security Design Principles- Attack Surfaces and Attack Trees- A Model for
Network Security- Standards
Symmetric Encryption and Message Confidentiality: Symmetric Encryption Principles- Symmetric Block Encryption
Algorithms- Random and Pseudorandom Numbers- Stream Ciphers and RC4- Cipher Block Modes of Operation.
Unit II PUBLIC-KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY AND KEY DISTRIBUTION 9
Public-Key Cryptography and Message Authentication: Approaches to Message Authentication- Secure Hash
Functions- Message Authentication Codes- Public-Key Cryptography Principles- Public-Key Cryptography Algorithms-
Digital Signatures
Key Distribution and User Authentication: Remote User Authentication Principles- Symmetric Key Distribution Using
Symmetric Encryption- Kerberos- Key Distribution Using Asymmetric Encryption- X.509 Certificates- Public-Key
Infrastructure- Federated Identity Management.
Unit III NETWORK ACCESS CONTROL AND TRANSPORT-LEVEL SECURITY 9
Network Access Control and Cloud Security- Network Access Control- Extensible Authentication Protocol- IEEE
802.1X Port-Based Network Access Control- Cloud Computing- Cloud Security Risks and Countermeasures- Data
Protection in the Cloud- Cloud Security as a Service
Transport-Level Security: Web Security Consideration- Transport Layer Security- HTTPS- Secure Shell (SSH).
Unit IV WIRELESS NETWORK SECURITY & ELECTRONIC MAIL SECURITY 9
Wireless Network Security: Wireless Security- Mobile Device Security- IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN Overview- IEEE
802.11i Wireless LAN Security
Electronic Mail Security: Internet Mail Architecture- E-mail Formats- E-mail Threats and Comprehensive E-mail
Security- S/MIME- Pretty Good Privacy- Domainkeys Identified Mail.
Unit V IP SECURITY AND FIREWALLS 9
IP Security: Ip Security Overview- Ip Security Policy- Encapsulating Security Payload- Combining Security
Associations- Internet Key Exchange
Intruders - Intrusion Detection - Password Management -Firewalls: The Need for Firewalls-Firewall Characteristics
and Access Policy-Types of Firewalls-Firewall Basing-Firewall Location and Configurations.
Text Book:
1. William Stallings “Network Security Essentials: Applications and Standards”, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education,
2016
Reference Book:
2. Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman and Mike Speciner, ―Network Security‖, PrenticeHall of India,2002
3. Dr. Wenliang Du, “Computer & Internet Security: A Hands-on Approach”, 2nd Edition, 2019
Pearson, 2007
5. Bruce Schneier and Neils Ferguson, ―Practical Cryptography‖, First Edition, Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt Ltd,
2003
7. by Behrouz A. Forouzan and Debdeep Mukhopadhyay, “Cryptography and Network Security”, McGraw Hill
PAGE 408
Education, 2010
Extensive Reading:
• https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/seccrypto/cryptography-reference
• https://www.cisco.com/c/en_in/products/security/firewalls/what-is-a-firewall.html
• https://digitalguardian.com/blog/what-email-security-data-protection-101
PAGE 409
19CSH24 INTERNET SECURITY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To study the fundamental concepts of classical encryption techniques and Crypt Analysis.
• To understand the principles of secret keys management.
• To acquire the concepts of IP Security and its applications
• To study the concepts of Transport layer security and its applications
• To learn the working principle of Email and public key distribution
Course Outcome:
• Interpret basic building blocks of encryption for cryptanalysis
• Identify suitable key generation technique for secret key management
• Apply IP security in VPN and Remote Access
• Apply SSL in World wide web transactions
• Explore various public key and certificate distribution strategies and its use in PGP
Unit I INTRODUCTION AND BASIC ENCRYPTION 9
Introduction – Essentials of Cryptography, Essentials of Networking and Internet, Security Objectives,
Communication Security, Legal restrictions, Basics of Encryption – Building Blocks of Encryption, Cryptanalysis and
Modern Codes, Brute Force cracking of Secret Keys, Choosing Cryptography Algorithms
Unit II LINK ENCRYPTION AND SECURE KEY MANAGEMENT 9
Link Encryption – In-line Encryptor, Point to Point Encryption, IP Routed Configuration, Managing Secret Keys –
Issues in Secret Key Management, Technology - Random Key Generation, Random Seeding, Pseudorandom Number
Generators, Manual Key Distribution, Automatic Rekeying, Key Distribution Centres, Maintaining Keys and System
Security
Unit III IP LAYER SECURITY AND APPLICATIONS 9
Basic Issues in IP Security (IPSEC), Cryptographic Checksums, IP Security Protocol, IPSEC key management, TCP/IP
Network Security Protocols, Virtual Private Network (VPN) – Issues in VPN, IPSEC proxy cryptography, IPSEC
encrypting Router, Site to Site Encryption, Remote Access with IPSEC – problems in IPSEC clients, IPSEC Client, Client
to Server site access
Unit IV TRANSPORT LAYER SECURITY AND APPLICATIONS 9
Public Key Cryptography, RSA Encryption, Key Exchange with RSA, Secure Socket Layer (SSL), World Wide Web
Transaction Security – Issues in Internet Transaction Security, Transactions on World Wide Web, Security
Alternatives for Web Forms, Web Browser with SSL, Web Server with SSL
Unit V SECURE E-MAIL AND PUBLIC KEY CERTIFICATES 9
Secure Email - Email Security Issues, Basics of Internet E-Mail, Offline Message Keying, Digital Signature, Secure
Email Client, Public Key Certificates – Distributing Public Keys, Public Key Certificates, Certificate Distribution,
Centralized Certification Authority, Hierarchical Certification Authority, Pretty Good Privacy (PGP)
Text Book:
1. Richard E.Smith, Internet Cryptography, 6th Edition, Pearson, 2011
Reference Book:
1. Tim Speed, Juanita Ellis, “Internet Security”, Elsevier, 2006
2. Uyless Black, “Internet Security Protocols – Protecting IP Traffic”, Pearson Education, 2001
Pearson, 2007
5. Bruce Schneier and Neils Ferguson, ―Practical Cryptography‖, First Edition, WileyDreamtech India Pvt Ltd, 2003
7. Douglas R Simson ―Cryptography –Theory and practice‖, First Edition, CRC Press,1995.
PAGE 410
19CSH25 ETHICAL HACKING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To explore the concepts of security testing and the knowledge required to protect against the hacker and
attackers.
• To understand reconnaissance and the publicly available tools used to gather information on potential targets.
• To discover the scanning techniques used to identify network systems open ports.
• To identify network system vulnerabilities and confirm their exploitability.
• To explore techniques for identifying web application vulnerabilities and attacks.
Course Outcome:
• Use the various security tools to assess and to predict the vulnerabilities across any computing system using
penetration testing.
• Identify prediction mechanism to prevent any kind of attacks using information gathering mechanisms.
• Protect the system using scanning techniques from malicious software and worms.
• Evaluate the wireless network flaws and able to apply security patches with different exploitations.
• Analyse the risk and support the organization for effective security measures
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO HACKING AND PENETRATION TESTING 9
Introduction to Hacking – Need for Security - Important Terminologies – Hacktivism – Computer Crimes and
Implications – Legal Perspective (US Federal Law). Penetration Test – Vulnerability Assessments versus Penetration
Test – Pre-Engagement – Rules of Engagement – Penetration Testing Methodologies: OSSTMM – NIST – OWASP –
Categories of Penetration Test – Types of Penetration Tests – Vulnerability Assessment Summary – Reports
Unit II INFORMATION GATHERING AND SCANNING 9
Information Gathering Techniques: Active Information Gathering – Passive Information Gathering – Sources of
Information Gathering – Tracing the Location – Traceroute: ICMP, TCP and UDP Traceroute – Enumerating and
Fingerprinting the Webservers – Google Hacking – Enumerating SNMP – SMTP Enumeration – Target Enumeration
and Port Scanning Techniques – Advanced Firewall/IDS Evading Techniques.
Unit III NETWORK ATTACKS 9
Network Sniffing – Types of Sniffing – Promiscuous versus Nonpromiscuous Mode – MITM Attacks – ARP Attacks –
MAC flooding - Denial of Service Attacks – Hijacking Session with MITM Attack – SSL Strip: Stripping HTTPS Traffic –
DNS Spoofing – ARP Spoofing Attack Manipulating the DNS Records – DHCP Spoofing – Remote Exploitation –
Attacking Network Remote Services – Attacking SMTP – Attacking SQL Servers – Testing for Weak Authentication.
Unit IV EXPLOITATION 9
Introduction to Metasploit – Reconnaissance with Metasploit – Port Scanning with Metasploit – Compromising a
Windows Host with Metasploit – Client Side Exploitation Methods – E–Mails with Malicious Attachments – PDF
Hacking – Social Engineering Toolkit – Browser Exploitation – Post–Exploitation – Cracking the Hashes: Brute force
Dictionary Attacks – Password Salts – Rainbow Tables – John the Ripper – Gathering OS Information – Harvesting
Stored Credentials.
Unit V WIRELESS AND WEB HACKING 9
Wireless Hacking – Introducing Aircrack– Cracking the WEP – Cracking a WPA/WPA2 Wireless Network Using
Aircrack-ng – Evil Twin Attack – Causing Denial of Service on the Original AP – Web Hacking – Attacking the
Authentication – Brute Force and Dictionary Attacks – Log-In Protection Mechanisms – Captcha Validation Flaw –
Captcha RESET Flaw – Manipulating User-Agents to Bypass Captcha and Other Protection – Authentication Bypass
Attacks – Testing for the Vulnerability – Automating It with Burp Suite – Session Attacks – SQL Injection Attacks –
XSS (Cross-Site Scripting) – Types of Cross-Site Scripting – Cross-Site Request Forgery (CSRF) – SSRF Attacks.
Text Book:
1. Rafay Baloch, “Ethical Hacking and Penetration Testing Guide”, CRC Press, 2014.
2. Kimberly Graves, Certified Ethical Hacker STUDY GUIDE, Wiley publication, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. Kevin Beaver, “Ethical Hacking for Dummies”, Sixth Edition, Wiley, 2018.
2. Michael Gregg, Certified Ethical Hacker, Pearson publication, 2014.
3. Matt Walker, All-in-one Certified Ethical Hacker Exam Guide, McGraw Hill Edition, 2012.
4. Jon Erickson, “Hacking: The Art of Exploitation”, Second Edition, Rogunix, 2007.
Extensive Reading:
• http://index-of.es/Hacking-Webserver/Certified_Ethical_Hacker_3.0_Official_Course.pdf
• http://ptgmedia.pearsoncmg.com/images/9780789751270/samplepages/9780789751270.pdf
• https://cert.eccouncil.org/images/doc/CEH-Handbook-v2.0.pdf
PAGE 411
19MEH01 INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCT DESIGN L T P C

Course Objective:
• Design a product with an understanding of product life cycle
• Be familiar with the basic concepts of Engineering Design
• Apply systematic design procedure in new product design and development
Course Outcome:
• Able to apply problem solving tools in the process of design.
• Able to judiciously make correct decision while designing products.
• Able to adopt modularity in Product architecture.
• Conscious of Environmental issues in design.
• Able to appreciate Legal and ethical aspects in design.
Unit I INTRODUCTION AND PROBLEM DEFINITION 9
Design as a Discipline-Cost reduction & Higher Sophistication-The Morphology of Design (seven phases) - Product
Life Cycle.
Problem Definition & Need Identification-Identifying customer needs-Establishing the engineering characteristics-
Quality Function Deployment-Product Design Specifications-Case studies.
Unit II INNOVATION 9
Time management – Problem Solving tools: Pareto charts, Cause and effect diagrams, Force field analysis – Planning
and Scheduling – Tools for Planning and Scheduling: Gantt charts, critical path method. Case Studies.
Criticality of data in design – Data sources: Library sources, Government sources, Internet sources, Information from
Intellectual property rights – Company centred information.
Unit III DECISION MAKING 9
Creative thinking methods – Generating design concepts – Functional decomposition and synthesis – Inventive
problem solving – Axiomatic design.
Concept Evaluation: Pugh Concept Selection Method-Measurement Scales, Weighted Decision Matrix, Analytic
Hierarchy Process – Concept Selection.
Unit IV EMBODIMENT DESIGN 9
Product Architecture – configuration design and best practices – Parametric design – Design for Assembly - Failure
Mode Effect Analysis.
Design for Environment – DFE Scoring Methods- Role of Prototyping in design – Concept of Rapid Prototyping-
Detail design – Design communication-Bill of Materials-Common challenges in Technical Writing.
Unit V ECONOMIC DESIGN 9
Cost evaluation – Methods of developing cost estimates – Make or Buy decision – Design to Cost: Order of
magnitude estimates, Costing in Conceptual Design.
Legal and ethical issues in design – Tort Law - Product liability – Protecting intellectual property – Solving Ethical
conflicts - Economic decision making: benefit cost analysis.
Text Book:
1. George E. Dieter & Linda C. Schmidt, “Engineering Design” 4th edition, McGraw-Hill, 2009.
Reference Book:
1. Nigel Cross, “Engineering Design Methods – Strategies for Product Design”, Wiley, 2005.
2. Philip Kosky, George Wise& Robert Balmer, “Exploring Engineering An Introduction to Engineering and Design”,
Academic Press, 2009.
3. Ernst Eder, Stanislav Hosnedl, “Introduction to Design Engineering: Systematic creativity and management”,
CRC Press, 2010.
4. Prasant Kumar, “Product Design-Creativity, Concepts and Usability”, PHI LearrningPvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
Extensive Reading:
• http://meche.mit.edu/research/design
• http://www.everyspec.com
• http://www.engineeringtoolbox.com
PAGE 412
19MEH02 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING PROCESSES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn about the general additive manufacturing process.
• To study the different additive manufacturing processes.
• To know postprocessing and finishing steps for each AM process.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the basics of Additive Manufacturing.
• Describe the various Vat polymerization and powder bed fusion systems.
• Illustrate about extrusion and material jetting based systems.
• Expound sheet lamination and directed energy deposition processes.
• List out the post processing techniques and explain the various software issues.
Unit I BASIC PRINCIPLES OF ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9
Additive Manufacturing (AM) – additive vs subtractive manufacturing processes – Generic AM Process – Benefits –
Related and associated Technologies – Classification of AM Processes (Liquid Polymer, Discrete Particle, Molten
Material and Solid Sheet systems) – Metal system – Variations of different processes – Maintenance and material
handling issues – Design considerations.
Unit II VAT PHOTOPOLYMERIZATION AND POWDER BED FUSION PROCESSES 9
Vat Photopolymerization – Materials and photopolymer chemistry – reaction formulation and mechanisms –
Reaction rates – Laser Scan Vat Photopolymerization –Modeling– Irradiance and Exposure – vector scanning – scan
patterns – Mask Projection systems – Two-Photon Vat Photopolymerization – Process Benefits and Drawbacks.
Powder bed fusion – Materials– Powder Fusion Mechanisms – Process Parameters – Powder Handling – Process
Variants – Process Benefits and Drawbacks.
Unit III EXTRUSION AND JETTING SYSTEMS 9
Extrusion – Basic principles – Plotting and Path Control – Materials– Fused Deposition Modeling, limitations – Bio-
extrusion – Contour Crafting and non-planar systems.
Material jetting– materials and processes – Material Jetting Machines – Process Benefits and Drawbacks – Binder
jetting – materials –BJ Machines– Process Variations – Process Benefits and Limitations.
Unit IV SHEET LAMINATION AND DIRECTED ENERGY DEPOSITION PROCESSES 9
Sheet lamination – Gluing or Adhesive Bonding, Bond-Then-Form and Form-Then-Bond Processes – Materials and
processing – process parameters – Ultrasonic additive manufacturing (UAM) – Effect of micro-structures – UAM
Applications
Directed Energy Deposition Processes – Description – Material Delivery – Laser and electron beam Based Metal
Deposition – Process parameters – Materials and Micro-structure – Benefits of DED.
Unit V POST PROCESSING, SOFTWARE CHALLENGES AND APPLICATIONS 9
Need for post processing – Support structure removal – Surface Texture Improvement – Accuracy Improvement –
Aesthetic Improvement – Preparation for Use as a Pattern – Property Enhancements Using Non–thermal
Techniques and Thermal Techniques.
Software Issues in AM – Preparation of CAD Models – STL File Format – Problems with STL Files – STL File
Manipulation – STL file with multiple materials – STL for machining – newer file formats and their capabilities –
Applications in Medical, Aerospace, Automotive field.
Text Book:
1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen and Brent Stucker, “Additive Manufacturing Technologies: 3D Printing, Rapid
Prototyping, and Direct Digital Manufacturing”, Second Edition, Springer, 2015.
Reference Book:
1. Chee Kai Chua, “3D Printing and Additive Manufacturing: Principles and Applications”, World Scientific, 2017.
2. Jyothish Kumar, “3D Printing and Additive Manufacturing Technologies”, Springer, 2019.
3. Manu Srivastava, “Additive Manufacturing: Fundamentals and Advancements”, CRC Press, 2019.
PAGE 413
19MEH03 DESIGN FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To introduce the basics of design for additive manufacturing.
• To demonstrate comprehensive knowledge of part consolidation and tooling design
• To know the design requirements for Metal AM and Polymer AM technique.
• To illustrate the implication of part design on build time and material strength
• To realize the concept of the post processing treatments in AM
Course Outcome:
• Understand the basics of need for Design for Additive Manufacturing.
• Exhibit the details about Part consolidation and Tooling Design
• Describe design considerations for metal and ceramic based Additive Manufacturing.
• Know the design guidelines for polymer based AM and other AM.
• Comprehend the post processing treatments and Future of AM.
Unit I STRATEGIC DESIGN IN ADDITVE MANUFACTURING 9
Design for additive manufacturing (DfAM) – Value addition with AM – General Guidelines for Designing AM parts –
Design to Avoid Anisotropy – Design to Minimize Print Time – Design to Minimize Post–processing – Topology
Optimisation.
Design Analysis for AM – Considerations for Analysis of AM Parts – role of mesh, topology and size optimization –
Build process simulation.
Unit II PART CONSOLIDATION AND TOOLING DESIGN 9
Part Consolidation – Design for Function – Material Considerations – Number of Fasteners - Conventional DFM/DFA
principles to DfAM – Assembly Considerations – Design of Moving Parts
AM Tooling Design – Mounting Fixtures and Guides – Conformal Cooling – Coolant Flow Strategies – Coolant
Channel Shape and Spacing – Steps to minimise Print Time in Tooling.
Unit III DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR METAL AM 10
Designing for Metal Powder Bed Fusion – Metal Powder Production – Powder Morphology – Powder Size
Distribution – Other Powder Considerations – Potential Defects in AM Materials – Topology Optimisation – Lattice
Structures – Overhangs and Support Material
Designing to Reduce Residual stress and Stress Concentrations – General Part Positioning Guidelines - Design for
Laser Powder Bed Fusion, Electron Beam Melting and Metal Binder Jetting.
Unit IV DESIGN FOR POLYMER AM PROCESS AND OTHER AM CONSIDERATIONS 9
Design considerations due to Anisotropy, Wall Thickness, Overhangs and Support Material, Holes, Ribs, fonts and
intricate details – Design guidelines for Material Extrusion, Vat Photopolymerisation and Polymer Powder Bed
Fusion.
Designer Machine Operator Cooperation – Health and Safety – prevention of explosion – AM Part Certification.
Unit V POST PROCESSING AND FUTURE OF AM 8
Post Processing: Support Material Removal - Polymer Surface Treatments - Metal Surface Treatments - Gluing and
Welding AM Parts – Heat Treatment and Aging
Future of AM: Functionally Graded Materials – Bio printing - Printed Electronics - Nano Printing - Food Printers.
Text Book:
1. Olaf Diegel, “A Practical Guide to Design for Additive Manufacturing”, Springer, 2019.
2. Martin Leary, “Design for Additive Manufacturing”, Elsevier, 2019.
Reference Book:
1. Ben Redwood, “The 3D Printing Handbook: Technologies, Design and Applications”, 3D Hubs, 2017.
PAGE 414
19MEH04 REVERSE ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn about reverse engineering systems
• To know the selection process for reverse engineering systems
• To understand reverse engineering and additive manufacturing
• To study the application of reverse engineering in additive manufacturing
• To know the legal issues in reverse engineering
Course Outcome:
• Understand the various reverse engineering techniques.
• Select a suitable reverse engineering system for a given application.
• Describe the combination of reverse engineering and additive manufacturing systems.
• List out the key application areas of reverse engineering.
• Illustrate the legal issues and the barriers to reverse engineering
Unit I TECHNIQUES FOR REVERSE ENGINEERING 8
Reverse Engineering – Need for Reverse Engineering – The Generic Process – Scanning – Point Processing –
Application Geometric Model Development – Computer-aided Reverse Engineering – Computer Vision and Reverse
Engineering – Structured-light Range Imaging – Scanner Pipeline.
Unit II SELECTION OF REVERSE ENGINEERING SYSTEMS 10
Reverse Engineering Hardware and Software – Selection Process for a Reverse Engineering system – Point Capture
Devices – Triangulation Approaches – Ranging Systems – Structured-light and Stereoscopic Imaging Systems –
Tracking Systems – X-ray Tomography – Probe positioning – Post processing the Captured Data – Handling Data
Points – Inspection Applications.
Unit III REVERSE ENGINEERING AND ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9
Modeling Cloud Data in Reverse Engineering – Data Processing for Rapid Prototyping – Integration of RE and AM for
Layer-based Model Generation – Adaptive Slicing Approach for Cloud Data Modeling – Planar Polygon Curve
Construction – Determination of Adaptive Layer Thickness – Application Examples.
Unit IV APPLICATION AREAS 9
Reverse Engineering-Workflow for Automotive Body Design – Virtual NASCAR Engine Block – Ferrari reverse
engineering CFD simulations – Reverse Engineering for Better Quality.
Reverse Engineering in the Aerospace Industry – Reducing Costs of Hard Tooling – Digitizing a NASA Space Vehicle –
Inspection in Half the Time.
Reverse Engineering in Medical Industry – Orthodontics – Digital Dentistry – Hearing Instruments – Knee
Replacement – Total Artificial Heart – Mass Customization.
Unit V LEGAL ISSUES AND BARRIERS TO REVERSE ENGINEERING 9
Copyright Law and Reverse Engineering – Case studies – Fair Use Statutory Defense – Barriers to adopting reverse
engineering technology – Understanding the user needs for reverse engineering – Challenges in reverse
Engineering.
Text Book:
1. Vinesh Raja, Kiran J. Fernandes, “Reverse Engineering, An Industrial Perspective”, Springer, London, 2008.
2. Wang W, “Reverse Engineering: Technology of Reinvention”, CRC Press, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. Ian Gibson, “Advanced Manufacturing Technology for Medical Applications: Reverse Engineering, Software
Conversion and Rapid Prototyping”, Wiley, 2006.
2. David Kadavy, “Design for Hackers: Reverse Engineering Beauty”, Wiley, 1st edition, 2011.
PAGE 415
19MEH05 BUSINESS VALUE ENHANCEMENT WITH ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn about the sustainable development with additive manufacturing
• To know about the business value enhancement in different industries with additive manufacturing
• To know about the operational values of additive manufacturing and their impact in various processes
• To know about the various factors that are acting as driving force for additive manufacturing techniques
• To know about the business values of additive manufacturing and their key application areas
Course Outcome:
• Understand the need for sustainable manufacturing and realize how AM helps in that direction.
• Explain Business value improvement with additive manufacturing.
• Describe the value addition due to reduced operations.
• Expound strategic alignment of additive manufacturing.
• List out the applications of AM for value addition in key application areas.
Unit I SUSTAINABILITY WITH ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9
Sustainable manufacturing – Economic Sustainability with AM – Environmental Sustainability – Impacts on Energy
Consumption resources and pollution – Societal Sustainability with AM – Destructive implications and counter
measures.
Unit II BUSINESS VALUE 9
AM as a Driver for Business Competitiveness, new services, creativity and Innovation – Impact on Manufacturing
Paradigms, Product Lifecycle and Operational Costs and Supply Chain Management – Mass customization – Strategic
Challenges and Barriers Ahead of AM.
Unit III OPERATIONS VALUE 9
Impact of AM on the Product Development Process – Evolution in Design Methodologies – Design Freedom – Impact
on Production Process, Product Quality, Manufacturing Costs and Material Waste – Impact on Inventory Turnover,
Spare Part Supply Chain and 3DP Online Platforms Supply Chain.
Unit IV STRATEGIC ALIGNMENT OF ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9
Framework for Strategic Alignment – Contingency Factors Driving AM Performance – Organizational Factors,
Operational Factors and Product Characteristics – Economic Analysis – Technology Analysis – Selecting AM
Technology – Organizational, Operational and Supply Chain Changes for implementation of AM.
Unit V BUSINESS VALUE IN KEY APPLICATION AREAS 9
The Role of Additive Manufacturing and business value in Industry of the Future – Industrial Diffusion – Business
value addition in Healthcare, Automotive, Aerospace, Consumer Goods, Architecture, Food Industry and Research
and Education industries – Case Studies.
Text Book:
1. Mojtaba Khorram Niaki, Fabio Nonino, “The Management of Additive Manufacturing: Enhancing Business
Value”, (Springer Series in Advanced Manufacturing), Springer, 2018.
2. David M. Dietrich, Michael Kenworthy,Elizabeth Cudney, “Additive Manufacturing Change Management: Best
Practices”, CRC Press, 1st edition, 2019.
Reference Book:
1. Subramanian Senthilkannan,” Handbook of Sustainability in Additive Manufacturing”, Springer, 2016.
2. Olaf Diegel, Axel Nordin, Damien Motte “A Practical Guide to Design for Additive Manufacturing”, Springer,
2019.
PAGE 416
19MEH06 STANDARDS, QUALITY CONTROL AND INSPECTION L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn about additive manufacturing standards
• To study the material characterization for additive manufacturing
• To know the process control and quality management in additive manufacturing
Course Outcome:
• Understand the various additive manufacturing standards.
• Select a suitable additive manufacturing standards for a given application.
• Understand the material characterization and its types for additive manufacturing systems.
• Select a suitable process control for additive manufacturing systems.
• Understand the quality management frame work in additive manufacturing.
Unit I ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING STANDARDS 8
Introduction to standards for Additive Manufacturing, Importance of standards, Importance of Quality
Management, Standards, Quality Control, And measurement Sciences. History of formation of committee for
standards. Work plan and roadmap of Joint Committee between ASTM, ISO. Priority areas on Additive
Manufacturing Standards, List of different types of Standards for Additive manufacturing (ASTM AM Standards).
Unit II MEASUREMENT SCIENCE AND DATA FORMAT FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9
Introduction to measurement science, challenges, Additive Manufacturing Materials, processes, parts and
Uncertainties, Additive Manufacturing Modelling and Simulation, Potentials of Measurement science, typical
applications, Data format in Additive Manufacturing – New Developments- Scanning Technology-Contact scanners
and Non-contact scanners.
Unit III MATERIAL CHARACTERIZATION FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 10
Introduction to Material Characterization –Types. Liquid Materials Characterization Techniques-rheology and
wetting behaviour –curing characteristics-liquid density. Solid materials characterization techniques- Filament
Diameter Consistency, density, porosity, Moisture content, thermal properties. Micro structure of filament-
Mechanical properties. Powder material characterization Techniques-powder size measurements-chemical
composition, Flow characteristics.
Unit IV PROCESS CONTROL AND MODELING 9
Introduction to qualification-Definition and Terms, equipment qualification and general test, Four stages for
qualification. Motivation for process control, Monitoring sensors, visual imaging, Thermal sensing, Displacement
sensing. Measurand of In-Process Control Research-SLM, EBM, DED, Wire Fed DED. Commercial solutions on
process modelling, simufact additive, ESI-Additive Manufacturing, Netfabb Simulation.
Unit V QUALITY MANAGEMENT FRAME WORK IN ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9
Need for Quality management frame work, Leader ship and commitment, planning, Additive Manufacturing
support, Additive manufacturing operation, performance Evaluation, PDCA Frame work cycle, Roles of regulatory
and certification bodies, Proposed Framework For Additive Manufacturing Implementation-User inputs, product
knowledge, Equipment qualification, process knowledge, continuous process verification.
Text Book:
1. Chee Kai Chua , Chee How Wong and Wai Yee Yeong,” Standards, Quality Control, and Measurement Sciences
in 3D Printing and Additive Manufacturing”, Singapore Centre for 3D Printing, Academic press, Singapore, 1st
Edition, 2017
Reference Book:
1. Ben Redwood, Filemon Schöffer, Brian Garret, “The 3D Printing Handbook: Technologies, Design and
Applications”, 3D Hubs, 2017
2. Chee Kai Chua, “3D Printing and Additive Manufacturing: Principles and Applications”, World Scientific, 5th
edition, 2017.
PAGE 417
19MEH61 BIO ENERGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Bio energy and its thermodynamic behaviour.
• Understanding the different conversion technologies for bio energy.
• Government policies and bio market.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the fundamentals of bio energy and thermodynamic functions.
• Understand the different feeds of bio fuel production and its processing.
• Apply the fundamentals and understand different biological conversion technologies.
• Apply the fundamentals and understand different thermal conversion technologies.
• Understand the bio energy system analysis using TEA and LCA.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO BIO ENERGY 9
Introduction to Bio Energy – Energy and Heat – Henry Law – Sources and Classification – Mass Balance – Enthalpy –
Energy Balance – Properties of Biomass – Thermodynamics and Kinetics of basic chemical reaction, Reaction
thermodynamics and Reaction Kinetics Size.
Unit II BIO ENERGY FEEDS 9
Growing Condition, Yield for the Production of Biofuel Production – Plantation Harvesting and Storage of Feedstock
Like Corn – Sweet Potato – Cassava – Soybean – Jatropha. Biomass Size Reduction, Briquetting, Drying, Storage And
Handling of Biomass.
Unit III BIOLOGICAL CONVERSION TECHNOLOGIES 9
Pre-treatment – physical , Thermochemical – Enzymatic hydrolysis of carbohydrates – Butanol fermentation,
Substrate and factors affecting – anaerobic digestion, organic conversion and Methane production – Biogas
cleaning, upgrading, utilization and digestate – Microbial fuel cell , Electron transfer process, Electrical power and
energy generation, Design and Operation.
Unit IV THERMAL CONVERSION TECHNOLOGIES 9
Biomass Furnaces, Power Generation, Biomass Co-Firing with Coal – Bio Refinery – Sugar Based – Stoichiometry –
Sugarcane, Sweet Sorghum, Sugar Beet Ethanol Production – Starch Based Ethanol – Pyrolysis Reactions and
Mechanism – Bio-Oil – Bio-Oil Refining.
Unit V BIO ENERGY SYSTEM ANALYSIS 9
Bio-hydrogen production – Techno-Economic Analysis, Steps, Tools, Software and Data sources – Life Cycle
Assessment, Procedure, Tools – Bio Energy Market – Government Policy
Text Book:
1. Yebo Li and Samir Kumar “Bioenergy: Principles and Applications” Wiley-Blackwell, 1st Edition, 2016.
Reference Book:
1. Venkata Ramana P and Srinivas S.N, “Biomass Energy Systems”, Tata Energy Research Institute, 1997.
2. Khandelwal. K. C. and Mahdi S. S, “Bio-Gas Technology”, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, 1986.
3. Mital K.M, “Biogas Systems: Principles and Applications”, New Age International publishers (P) Ltd., 1996.
4. S P Sukhatme, J K Nayak, “Solar Energy Paperback” McGraw Hill Education; Fourth edition, 2017.
5. Bioenergy and Biofuel from Bio wastes and Biomass edited by Samir Kumar Khana, ASCE Publications, 2010.
PAGE 418
19MEH62 ALTERNATE ENERGY FUELS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To know about different types of alternate fuels.
• To understand the suitability of various alternate fuels in IC engines
Course Outcome:
• Understand the Need for Alternative Fuels
• Understand about alcohol fuels
• Apply the usage of bio diesel and synthetic fuels
• Understand the usage of Hydrogen as a substitute fuel
• Use Gaseous fuels in Internal Combustion engines
Unit I NEED FOR ALTERNATIVE FUELS 9
Effects of constituents of Exhaust gas emission on environmental condition of earth (N2, CO2, CO, NOx, SO2, O2)-
Pollution created by Exhaust gas emission in atmosphere-Greenhouse effect, Factors affecting greenhouse effect-
Study of Global Carbon Budget, Carbon foot print and Carbon credit calculations-Emission norms as per Bharat
Standard up to BS – VI and procedures for confirmation on production.
Unit II ALCOHOL 9
Sources of Methanol and Ethanol, methods of its production-Properties of methanol & ethanol as engine fuels, Use
of alcohols in S.I. and C.I. engines, performance of blending methanol with gasoline-Emulsification of alcohol and
diesel. Dual fuel systems-Improvement / Change in emission characteristics with respect to percentage blending of
Alcohol.
Unit III BIO DIESEL AND SYNTHETIC FUELS 9
Base materials used for production of Bio Diesel (Karanji oil, Neem oil, Sunflower oil, Soyabean oil, Mustard oil, Palm
oil, Jatropha seeds)-Process of separation of Bio Diesel. Properties-Diesel blended with vegetable oil, Various
Vegetable oils for Engines – Esterification, performance and emission characteristics of Engine. Algae Biodiesel, Di-
Methyl Ether (DME), P-Series, and Eco Friendly Plastic fuels (EPF).
Unit IV HYDROGEN 9
Hydrogen as a substitute fuel. Properties, sources and methods of production of Hydrogen, Storage and
Transportation of hydrogen. Economics of Application and Advantages of hydrogen (Liquid hydrogen) as fuel for IC
engine/ hydrogen car. Layout of a hydrogen car.
Unit V GASEOUS FUELS FOR IC ENGINES 9
Introduction to Bio gas system-Process during gas formation-Factors affecting bio gas formation-Usage of Bio gas in
SI engine & CI engine-LPG & CNG : Properties of LPG & CNG as engine fuels-fuel metering systems-combustion
characteristics-effect on performance, emission, cost and safety.
Text Book:
1. S. S. Thipse, “Alternative Fuels”, Jaico Publications, 1st Edition, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. Ganesan V, “Internal Combustion Engines “, McGraw Hill HED Publications, 4th edition, 2017
2. John Heywood, “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, McGraw Hill Education; 1st edition, 2017.
3. Viswanathan, “Fuel Cells: Principles and Applications”, Universities Press; 1st edition, 2006.
PAGE 419
19MEH63 COMBUSTION ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To develop knowledge in different types of fuels.
• To understand the basics of combustion process
Course Outcome:
• Understand the fundamentals of solid fuels and its processing
• Understand the Production , processing , Storage and handling of liquid fuels
• Apply the fundamentals and understand types, cleaning and purification of gaseous fuels.
• Understand about the principles behind Combustion stoichiometry and kinetics
• Apply the basic knowledge and understand the concepts of flame and combustion appliances
Unit I SOLID FUELS 9
Biomass – Peat – Lignite – sub bituminous coal - Bituminous coal – Semi anthracite – Anthracite – Cannel coal and
boghead coal – Natural coke – Coal – Composition – Analysis and properties – action of heat – oxidation –
hydrogenation – classification – Processing of solid fuels – Coal preparation – storage – Carbonisation – Briquetting
– Gasification – Liquefaction of solid fuels
Unit II LIQUID FUELS 9
Petroleum – Production – composition – processing – distillation – breakdown processes – rebuilding – purification
– clay treatment – Deasphalting – Dewaxing – Deoiling- Petroleum products – Liquid fuels from sources other than
petroleum – Storage and handling of liquid fuels
Unit III GASEOUS FUELS 9
Types of gaseous fuels – Natural gas- Methane from coal mines- producer gas-water gas-carburetted water gas-
complete gasification of coal-coal gas- blast furnace gas- gases from biomass- refinery gases- Cleaning and
purification of gaseous fuels
Unit IV COMBUSTION PROCESS 9
Combustion stoichiometry – rapid methods – Combustion process – nature and types – Mechanism of combustion
reactions – spontaneous ignition temperature - Kinetics of solid and liquid fuel combustion
Unit V FLAMES AND COMBUSTION APPLIANCES 9
Limits of in flammability - Velocity of flame propagation – Flame structure - Flame stability – Gas burners – Oil
burners – Coal burning equipment
Text Book:
1. Samir Sarkar, “Fuels & Combustion”, Universities Press; 3rd edition, 2009
Reference Book:
1. S.P. Sharma & Chander Mohan, “Fuels & Combustion”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.Ltd., 1984
2. Kenneth K. Kou. “Principles of Combustion”, Wiley India Pvt Ltd; 2nd edition, 2012
3. Shaha A.K., “Combustion Engineering and Fuel Technology”, Oxford and IBH, 1974.
4. O. P. Gupta, “Elements of Fuels, Furnaces & Refractories”, Khanna Publishers , 6th edition, 1989.
PAGE 420
19MEH64 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• the operation principles of different air conditioning systems and calculation methods of duct design, heating
and cooling loads
Course Outcome:
• know about the working of various air conditioning systems
• identify various standards in indoor air quality
• learn the procedures in calculation of heating and cooling loads
• know about the piping system fundamentals and piping design
• understand the design of building air distribution
Unit I AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 9
System selection and arrangement, All air systems - Single zone system, Reheat system, Variable volume system,
Dual duct system, Multi zone system, Air and water systems, All water systems, Decentralised cooling and heating,
Heat pump systems, Heat recovery systems.
Unit II INDOOR AIR QUALITY 9
Comfort – physiological considerations and environmental indices, comfort conditions, ventilation for acceptable
indoor air quality, common contaminants, methods to control humidity and contaminants.
Unit III HEATING AND COOLING LOAD 9
Space heating load – outdoor and indoor design conditions, transmission heat losses, infiltration, heat losses from
air ducts, heat gain, cooling load and heat extraction rate, application of cooling load calculation procedures, design
conditions, internal heat gains, overview of the heat balance method
Unit IV PIPING DESIGN 9
Piping system fundamentals, air elimination, control of heating and cooling coils, system design, light and large
commercial systems, steam heating systems, spray chambers, cooling towers.
Unit V BUILDING AIR DISTRIBUTION 9
Fan performance and selection, fan installation, field performance testing, fans and variable-air-volume systems, air
flow in ducts and fittings, duct design – general and sizing.
Text Book:
1. Faye.C.McQuiston, Jerald.D.Parker, Jeffrey.D.Spitler,”Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning – Analysis and
Design”, Wiley India (P) Ltd, 7th edition, 2011.
Reference Book:
1. N.C.Gupta, “Comprehensive HVAC system design”, Viva books private limited, 2016.
2. Edward.G.Pita, “Air conditioning principles and systems”, Pearson India education services pvt. Ltd, 4th edition,
2018.
3. P.N.Ananthanarayanan, “Basic refrigeration and air conditioning”, McGraw Hill education (India) pvt. Ltd, 4th
edition, 2013.
PAGE 421
19MEH65 ENERGY AUDIT AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the various components and their energy saving opportunities.
• To study the importance of different modes of environment management.
Course Outcome:
• To know the basics of energy audit and management in electric motors, lightings and electric load
management.
• To gain knowledge on boilers and industrial furnaces.
• To know the energy saving strategies on fans, blowers and cooling towers.
• To know the conservative usage of pumps and pumping systems, Refrigeration and Air conditioning
• To know about the fundamentals of clean energy audit and environment management.
Unit I ENERGY CONSERVATION 9
Initiatives in India – Potential for energy conservation-Barriers – Energy audit –Economic analysis. Electric motors –
selection and application, Efficiency, Losses, Performance and Energy conservation. Lighting- Principles, Quality,
Types of source, Efficiency and maintenance. Electric Load Management – Transformers, Section of a transformers,
Reduction of losses – Power factor. Energy Management Information system – Components and Design.
Unit II BOILERS AND INDUSTRIAL FURNACES 9
Boilers- Classification, Efficiency, Energy conservation, Waste heat recovery, Performance. Industrial furnaces-
Classifications, Efficiency, Energy conservation measures. Electrical, Induction furnaces- Energy saving measures.
Compressed air network – Types of compressor, Selection of compressor, Performance monitoring and compressed
air-distribution system.
Unit III FANS, BLOWERS AND COOLING TOWERS 9
Fans- Classification, Selection of fans, Flow control methods, Performance curves, Efficiency. Cooling tower –
Classification, Selectin and Usage, Performance evaluation at site, Factors affecting cooling tower performance and
Energy saving opportunities.
Unit IV PUMPING SYSTEMS, REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 9
Pumps and Pumping systems - Classification, Performance, Factors affecting pump performance, characteristic,
Efficiency and Flow control strategies. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning – Vapour compression system, Vapour
absorption system, Measurement and field testing, Performance evaluation, Air washer and Energy conservation
methods.
Unit V ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT 9
Water audit and conservation – Need for water conservation, Effective conservation methods, Integrated water
management. Solar Energy options for industries – Energy, Climate change and clean development mechanism.
Text Book:
1. Abbi Y. P. and Shashank Jain, “ Handbook on energy audit and environment management”. The Energy and
Resources Institute (TERI), 2009.
Reference Book:
1. Rao. P. SasiBhushana and PM Rao PSB Rao, “Environment Management and Audit” Deep and Deep
Publications, 2000.
2. Turner Wayne C and Steve Doty, “Energy management handbook”. The Fairmont Press, Inc., 2007.
3. Klemes, Jiri, Robin Smith, and Jin-Kuk Kim, “Handbook of water and energy management in food processing”.
Elsevier, 2008.
4. Beggs Clive, “Energy: management, supply and conservation”. Routledge, 2010.
5. Thollander, Patrik,.” Introduction to Industrial Energy Efficiency: Energy Auditing, Energy Management, and
Policy Issues”. Academic Press, 2020.
PAGE 422
19MEH66 DESIGN OF ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDINGS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn the green buildings concept applicable to modern buildings
• Familiarise students with the basic principles and theories behind the passive technology, construction
techniques and to create energy efficient buildings
Course Outcome:
• Design energy efficient buildings and suggest the conservation measures.
• Perceive the methods of landscape design and materials
• Learn the techniques of passive cooling in buildings
• Conceive the heat energy involved in building structures
• Integrate the renewable energy systems in the buildings and passive cooling in buildings.
Conventional versus Energy Efficient buildings – Historical perspective - Water – Energy – Indoor Air Quality
requirement analysis – Future building design aspects - Thermal comfort conditions - Energy consumption in a
building– Criticality of resources and needs of modern living
Unit II LANDSCAPE AND BUILDING ENVELOPES 9
Energy efficient Landscape design - Micro-climates – various methods –water bodies-Building envelope: Building
materials, Envelope heat loss and heat gain and its evaluation, Fenestration and shading, Insulation, Design
methods and tools
Unit III PASSIVE COOLING OF BUILDINGS 9
Natural Ventilation, Passive cooling and heating- Trombe wall – water wall- Application of wind, water and earth for
cooling, evaporative cooling, radiant cooling, shading, paints and cavity walls for cooling; Hybrid Methods – Energy
Conservation measures, Thermal analysis of building integrated solar components- passive solar by glazing –
Transparent thermal insulation (TTI) – Heat storage by interior building elements.
Unit IV HEAT TRANSMISSION IN BUILDINGS 9
Surface co-efficient: air cavity, internal and external surfaces, overall thermal transmittance, wall and windows;
Heat transfer due to ventilation/infiltration, internal heat transfer; Sol-air temperature; Decrement factor; Phase
lag. Design of day lighting; Estimation of building loads: Steady state method, network method, numerical method,
correlations
Unit V RENEWABLE SOURCES INTEGRATION 9
Introduction of renewable sources in buildings, Roof radiation traps; Earth air tunnel, Solar water heating, small
wind turbines, stand-alone PV systems and Hybrid system – Economics, GRIHA - Green Rating for Integrated Habitat
Assessment-
Text Book:
1. Mili Majumdar, Energy Efficient Buildings in India, The Energy and Resources Institute (TERI), 2nd edition, 2009.
2. Eicker, Ursula, Energy Efficient Buildings with Solar and Geothermal Resources, John Wiley & Sons, 1st Edition,
2014.
Reference Book:
1. Sustainable Building - Design Manual: sustainable building design practices, The Energy and Resources Institute
(TERI), 2004.
2. Krieder, J and Rabi, A., Heating and Cooling of buildings : Design for Efficiency, Mc Graw Hill, 1994.
3. Ursala Eicker, “Solar Technologies for buildings”, Wiley publications, 2003.
4. Kumar, Pradeep & Tyagi, Amit Kumar Ed., Managing Energy Efficiently in Hotels and Commercial Buildings, New
Delhi Tata Energy Research Institute, 2000.
5. Bansal Nk & Mathur Jyotirmay, Energy Efficient Windows, Anamaya Publishers, 2006.
6. Moncef Krarti, Optimal Design and Retrofit of Energy Efficient Buildings, Communities, and Urban Centers,
Elsevier-1st Edition, 2018.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.grihaindia.org/
• http://www.bee-india.nic.in
PAGE 423
19MEH81 SCHEDULING ALGORITHMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To enhance students’ knowledge in the basics of scheduling theory using the concepts of scheduling functions
and sequencing etc.,
• To impart knowledge on various scheduling algorithms applicable to single machine, parallel machines, flow
shop and job shop models.
Course Outcome:
• learn the introductory aspects of scheduling theory using the concepts of scheduling functions and sequencing
etc.,
• learn the methods of single machine scheduling using various algorithms.
• design and analyse parallel machine scheduling using McNaughton’s algorithm and Hu’s algorithm etc.,
• design and analyse flow shop scheduling.
• design and analyse job shop scheduling.
Unit I SCHEDULING THEORY 9
Scheduling background – Scheduling function – Sequencing – Ready time – Flow time – Tardiness - Weighted flow
time – Inventory – Regular measures of performance – Dominant schedules – Shortest Processing Time (SPT),
Earliest Due Date (EDD), Weighted shortest processing time (WSPT) sequences – Scheduling Theorems.
Unit II SINGLE MACHINE SCHEDULING 9
Pure sequencing model – Hodgson’s algorithm – Smith’s rule – Wilkerson Irwin algorithm – Neighborhood search –
Dynamic programming technique – Branch and Bound algorithm – Non simultaneous arrivals – Minimizing T ̅ and F ̅
for dependent jobs – Sequence dependent set up times.
Unit III PARALLEL MACHINE SCHEDULING 9
Preemptive jobs: McNaughton’s algorithm – Non preemptive jobs – Heuristic procedures – Minimizing (F_w ) ̅ : H1 &
Hm heuristics – Dependent jobs: Hu’s algorithm – Muntz Coffman algorithm.
Unit IV FLOW SHOP SCHEDULING 9
Characteristics – Johnson’s algorithm – Extension of Johnson’s rule – Campbell Dudek Smith algorithm – Palmer’s
method – Start lag, stop lag – Mitten’s algorithm – Ignall Schrage algorithm - Despatch index heuristic.
Unit V JOB SHOP SCHEDULING 9
Characteristics – Graphical tools – Jackson’s algorithm – Feasible, Semi-active and Active schedules – Single pass
approach – Non delay schedule – Priority dispatching rules – Heuristic schedule generation – Open shop scheduling.
Text Book:
1. Kenneth R.Baker, “Introduction to sequencing and scheduling”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2000.
Reference Book:
1. Richard W. Conway, William L.Maxwell and Louis W. Miller,“Theory of Scheduling”, Dover Publications, 2003.
2. Michael L. Pinedo, “Scheduling: Theory, Algorithms, and Systems”, Springer, 2008.
PAGE 424
19MEH82 LEAN AND AGILE MANUFACTURING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To make the students acquire the basic knowledge in lean six-sigma and make them understand the various
phases involved in the implementations.
• To understand how lean management today represents a profound change in the competitive business culture
and a leading indicator of excellence in the organization.
• To understand how by implementing lean management organizations can improve product & processes
without adding any more money, people, equipment, inventory or space and aim for perfection
Course Outcome:
• Develop a comprehensive set of skills that will allow students to function effectively by using Lean six- sigma for
quantitative analysis.
• Understand issues & challenges in implementing & developing lean manufacturing techniques & its
contribution for improving organizational performance.
• Apply lean techniques to bring competitive business culture for improving organization performance
• Analyze how lean techniques can be applied to manufacturing & service industry.
• Analyze how lean technique can create value generation for organization.
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO LEAN AND SIX-SIGMA 9
Introduction to Lean- Definition, Purpose, features of Lean ; top seven wastes, Need for Lean, Elements of Lean
Manufacturing, Lean principles, the lean metric, Hidden time traps. Introduction to quality, Definition of six-sigma,
origin of six-sigma, six-sigma concept, and Critical success factors for six-sigma. Evolution of lean six-sigma, the
synergy of Lean and six sigma, Definition of lean six-sigma, the principles of lean six-sigma, Scope for lean six sigma,
Features of lean six- sigma, the laws of lean six-sigma, Benefits of lean six-sigma.
Unit II INITIATION, RESOURCE AND PROJECT SELECTION FOR LEAN SIX SIGMA 9
Top management commitment – Infrastructure and deployment planning, Process focus, organizational structures,
Measures – Rewards and recognition, Infrastructure tools, structure of transforming event, Launch preparation.
Resource and project selection, Selection of Black belts, Selecting projects – Benefit/Effort graph, Process mapping,
value stream mapping and Balanced score card for project identification, project suitable for lean six sigma.
Unit III TEAM BUILDING AND THE DMAIC PROCESS 9
Predicting and improving team performance, nine team roles, Team leadership, Team building & Team exercise.
DMAIC process and toll gate reviews.
Unit IV THE TOOLS FOR LEAN SIX- SIGMA 9
Define tools- Project Definition Form(PDF) and SIPOC; Measure tools- Process mapping, Parato chart, cause and
effect matrix, FMEA, Brain-storming, NGT, Multi-voting, Cause & Effect diagram, Check sheets, Gauge R&R, Run
charts, Control charts and process capability analysis; Analyze tools- scatter plots, ANOVA, Regression analysis and
time trap analysis; Improve tools- Mistake proofing, KAIZEN, Reducing congestions and delays, SMED, TPM, Design
of Experiments and the pull system; Control tools-SPC.
Unit V AGILE MANUFACTURING 9
The Agile Production Paradigm- History of Agile Manufacturing- Agile Manufacturing Vs Mass Manufacturing, Agile
Manufacturing Vs Mass Customization- Agile Manufacturing Research Centers- Agile Practices- Agile practice for
product development - Manufacturing agile practices - understanding the value of investing in people, Concept
models of Agile Manufacturing -Infusing managerial principles for enabling agility.
Text Book:
1. Forrest W. Breyfogle III, Implementing Six Sigma: Smarter solutions Using Statistical Methods, John Wiley &
Sons; 2nd edition, 2003.
2. James P. Womack, Daniel T. Jones, Lean Thinking, Simon & Schuster, 2003.
Reference Book:
1. Michael L. George, Lean Six Sigma, McGraw Hill Professional, 2002.
2. Ronald G.Askin and Jeffrey B.Goldberg, Design and Analysis of Lean Production Systems, Wiley; 1 edition, 2007.
3. Rother M. and hook J., Learning to See: Value Stream Mapping to Add Value and Eliminate Muda (Lean
Enterprise Institute), Productivity Press, 1 edition, 1999.
4. Gunasekaran A, “Agile Manufacturing, 21st Strategy Competitiveness Strategy”, Elsevier Publications, 2001.
PAGE 425
19MEH83 SYSTEMS SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• This course is intended to introduce the students to the systems engineering process used to create multi-
disciplinary solutions to complex problems.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the functions, capabilities and limitations of systems engineering in the context of large
developmental programs.
• Design a system or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints such as economic, environmental,
ethical, health and safety and sustainability.
• Design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data.
• Use the techniques, skills and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice.
• Apply system engineering practices for management conceptions.
Unit I SYSTEMS SCIENCE CONCEPTS 9
System as a function of system-hood and thing-hood, Systems thinking, Evolution of systems movement,
Framework of deductive and inductive approaches, classification systems models, Methodological paradigms, Laws
of systems science, Organized complexity, Systems simplification.
Unit II SYSTEMS ENGINEERING PROCESSES 9
Life cycles-Phases-Steps, Formulation of Issues: Problem Identification – Scoping – Bounding, Problem definition –
Identification of needs, alterables, constraints; Value System Design: Objectives and objective measures; Generation
of Alternatives/ system synthesis – Identification of activities and activity measures; Functional decomposition and
analysis.
Unit III ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES 9
Uncertain/ Imperfect information; Cross-impact analysis - an alternative way of qualitative analysis, Hierarchical
inference, logical reasoning inference; Structural modeling; System Dynamics.
Unit IV INTERPRETATION OF ALTERNATIVES AND DECISION MAKING 9
Types of decisions – descriptive, prescriptive, normative; Decision assessment efforts types – under certainty,
probabilistic uncertainty, probabilistic imprecision, information imperfection, conflict and cooperation; Prescriptive
normative decision assessments; Utility theory; Group decision making.
Unit V SYSTEMS ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 9
Organizational structures, Systems Engineering management plan; Network based systems planning and
management methods; Cognitive factors in Systems Engineering - cognitive analysis and cognitive design –
Advantages and Limitations.
Text Book:
1. Andrew P Sage and James E Armstrong, Introduction to Systems Engineering, Wiley-Interscience; 1st edition
(2008).
2. George J Klir, Facets of Systems Science, Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers; 2nd ed. 2001 edition (2001).
Reference Book:
1. Alexander Kossiakoff, William N. Sweet, Samuel J. Seymour, Systems Engineering Principles and Practice, Wiley;
Second edition (2016).
PAGE 426
19MEH84 SERVICES OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To enhance the students’ understanding of the nature and importance of the service sector in the economy.
• To improve the students’ analytical abilities in solving problems that service managers’ face.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the impact of services in global economy
• Appreciate the role of information and globalization
• Design a service enterprise
• Make effective decisions in the management of a service organization
• Use various tools for a service industry
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO SERVICES 9
Manufacturing and Services, Definition of Service, Role of Service in the economy, History of service, Characteristic
of Service, Nature of Services, Classification of Services, Importance of Activity, Impact of technology - service
concept as a strategic tool, focused and unfocused service operations.
Unit II INFORMATION AND GLOBALIZATION 9
Role of information in services, Data privacy, Virtual value chain, E-markets, Types of Globalized Services,
Outsourcing, Growth and Expansion strategies, issues in Globalization, Service strategies - strategy formulation and
development, sustaining a strategy.
Unit III DESIGNING A SERVICE ENTERPRISE 9
Service process design, Customer value equations, Internet and Automation, Scalability, Estimating geographic
demand, Facility location techniques, Geographic Information System, Strategies for managing capacity and
demand, Tools for service design
Unit IV SERVICE QUALITY AND PRODUCTIVITY 9
Service quality – importance - measuring service quality, Quality service by design, Stages in quality development,
Audit, Continuous Improvement, Quality tools for analysis and development, managing customer service encounter
– Issues in Productivity Measurement.
Unit V TOOLS FOR SERVICES AND SERVICE MANAGEMENT 9
Waiting Lines, Analysis of waiting lines, psychology of waiting, Single and multiple server model, Data Envelopment
Analysis – Vehicle Routing models, Resource utilization, Networks, performance and information Applications –
Case study. (Qualitative Approach only)
Text Book:
1. Fitzsimmons, J.A. and Fitzsimmons, M.J. Service Management, Tata Mc Graw Hill India, 2006.
Reference Book:
1. Haksever C, Render B, Russell RA and Murdick RG ,Service Management and Operations, Prentice Hall
International, USA, 2000
PAGE 427
19MEH85 QUALITY ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To introduce the basic concept of Quality and its influence on the productivity and relibility of a material.
• To introduce the concept of Sampling plan, acceptance sampling and control measure for monitoring the
process capability.
Course Outcome:
• Acquire knowledge on basis of quality control and Quality assurance and cost of quality.
• Know the various tools for controlling the quality parameters.
• Understand the various control charts used in monitoring the quality parameters.
• Acquire the knowledge on machine capability and process capability.
• Understand the various types of sampling techniques Operating Characteristic curves.
Statistical concepts for quality- Fundamentals of quality- history, Quality definitions, Quality dimensions, Quality
terminology- Inspection, Quality control, SQC, Quality Assurance, Quality planning- policies & objectives, Quality
costs – Economics of quality, Quality loss function, Quality Vs productivity, Quality Vs reliability.
Unit II STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL 9
Process variation, Control charts for variables- X , R and S charts- preliminary decisions, computation of control
limits, Construction and interpretation, Relation between process in control and specification limits, modified and
warning control limits, O.C. curve for X chart, Control procedure, adjustment for trend in process mean
Unit III SPECIAL CONTROL PROCEDURES 9
Control charts for attributes- p, np, c and u charts, demerits control chart, O.C curve for p-chart, Control charts for
individual measurements- X-chart, moving average and moving range charts, cumulative-sum and exponentially
weighted moving average control charts, multi-vari chart.
Unit IV PROCESS AND MEASUREMENT SYSTEM CAPABILITY 9
Process stability, process capability analysis using a Histogram or normal probability plot and control chart, process
capability indexes, Gauge capability studies, setting specification limits.
Unit V ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING 9
Acceptance sampling, Economics of sampling, Single sampling plan for attributes- O.C. curve, design, double
sampling- O.C. curve, multiple and sequential sampling plans, sampling plans for variables.
Text Book:
1. Douglas C Montgomery, Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, Sixth Edition, John Wiley & sons, Inc., 2009.
2. Joseph A.Defeo, Juran’s Quality Handbook, McGraw-Hill Education; 7 edition, 2016
Reference Book:
1. E.L. Grant and R.S. Leavenworth, Statistical Quality Control, Seventh Edition,TMH, 2017
2. Bertrand L.Hansen & Prabhakar M.Ghare, Quality Control & Applications, Prentice Hall of India,2004
3. Dale H.Besterfield, Carol Besterfield-Michna, Glen H.Besterfield and Mary Besterfield-Sacre, Total Quality
Management, Prentice Hall, 3rd edition,2002
PAGE 428
19MEH86 PRODUCTIVITY MANAGEMENT AND RE-ENGINEERING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To introduce the basic principles of Productivity models and the applications of ReEngineering concepts
required for various organizations.
• To impart knowledge on various system approach to productivity and organisational transformation.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the basic concepts of Productivity and measurement.
• Acquire basic knowledge on various methodology in manufacturing sector.
• Understand the various elements of Organisation transformation and re-engineering fundamentals.
• Acquire knowledge on Various models of Re-engineering.
• Implement BPR tools and techniques for improving the productivity.
Unit I PRODUCTIVITY 9
Productivity Concepts – Macro and Micro factors of productivity – Dynamics of Productivity - Productivity Cycle
Productivity Measurement at International, National and Organisation level - Productivity measurement models -
Factors influencing productivity-Techniques in improving productivity.
Unit II SYSTEMS APPROACH TO PRODUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT 9
Conceptual frame work, Management by Objectives (MBO), Performance Objectivated Productivity (POP) –
Methodology and application to manufacturing and service sector.
Unit III ORGANISATIONAL TRANSFORMATION 9
Elements of Organisational Transformation and Reengineering-Principles of organizational transformation and re-
engineering, fundamentals of process re-engineering, preparing the workforce for transformation and re-
engineering, methodology, guidelines – DSMC Q & PMP model.
Unit IV RE-ENGINEERING PROCESS IMPROVEMENT MODELS 9
PMI models, PASIM Model, Moen and Nolan Strategy for process improvement, LMICIP Model, NPRDC Model.
Unit V RE-ENGINEERING TOOLS AND IMPLEMENTATION 9
Analytical and process tools and techniques – Information and Communication Technology – Implementation of
Reengineering Projects – Success Factors and common implementation Problem – Cases.
Text Book:
1. Edosomwan, J.A., “Organisational Transformation and Process Re-engineering”, Library Cataloging in Pub. Data,
1996.
2. Premvrat, Sardana, G.D. and Sahay, B.S., “Productivity Management – A Systems Approach”, Narosa Publishing
House. New Delhi, 1998.
Reference Book:
1. Rastogi, P.N., “Re-engineering and Re-inventing the Enterprise”, A.H.Wheeler Pub. New Delhi, 1995.
2. Sumanth, D.J., ‘Productivity Engineering and Management’, TMH, New Delhi, 1990.
3. Michael Hammer and James Champy, “Re-engineering the corporation – A Manifesto for Business Revolution”,
Nicholar Barkey Publishing, London, UK,Revised Edition 2006.
PAGE 429
19CSH41 DATA SCIENCE FOR ENGINEERS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To describe the life cycle of Data Science and computational environments for data scientists using Python.
• To describe the fundamentals for exploring and managing data with Python
• To examine the various data analytics techniques for labeled/columnar data using Python
• To demonstrate a flexible range of data visualizations techniques in Python
• To describe the various Machine learning algorithms for data modeling with Python
Course Outcome:
• Identify phases involved in the life cycle of Data Science
• Preprocess and manage the data for efficient storage and manipulation in Python
• Realize the various data analytics techniques for labeled/columnar Data using Python Pandas
• Explore a flexible range of data visualizations approaches in Python.
• Analyze various Machine learning algorithms for data modeling with Python
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO DATA SCIENCE 9
Introduction to Data Science and its importance - Data Science and Big data-, The life cycle of Data Science- The Art
of Data Science - Work with data – data Cleaning, data Munging, data manipulation. Establishing computational
environments for data scientists using Python with IPython and Jupyter.
Unit II TOWARDS DATA SCIENCE USING NUMPY 9
Understanding Data Types in Python - The Basics of NumPy Arrays - Computation on NumPy Arrays: Universal
Functions - Aggregations: Min, Max, and Everything in Between Computation on Arrays: Broadcasting-Comparisons,
Masks, and Boolean Logic Fancy Indexing-Sorting Arrays
Unit III DATA MANIPULATION WITH PANDAS 9
Installing and Using Pandas, Introducing Pandas Objects,Data Indexing and Selection. Operating on Data in Pandas,
Handling Missing Data, Hierarchical Indexing Combining Datasets: Concat and Append, Combining Datasets: Merge
and Join. Aggregation and Grouping, Pivot Tables, Vectorized String Operations, Working with Time Series.
Unit IV DATA VISUALIZATION WITH MATPLOTLIB 9
General Matplotlib Tips, Simple Line Plots, Simple Scatter Plots, Visualizing Errors Density and Contour Plots,
Histograms, Binnings, and Density, Customizing Plot Legends Customizing Colorbars, Multiple Subplots, Text and
Annotation, Customizing Ticks Customizing Matplotlib: Configurations and Stylesheets, Geographic Data with
Basemap.
Unit V MACHINE LEARNING USING PYTHON 9
Intro Machine Learning: Categories of Machine Learning algorithms, Dimensionality reduction-Introducing Scikit-
Application: Exploring Hand-written Digits. Feature Engineering- Naive Bayes Classification - Linear Regression - k-
Means Clustering.
Text Book:
1. Python Data Science Handbook-Essential Tools for Working with Data, Jake Vander Plas, O'Reilly Media, 2016.
2. Data Science from Scratch: First Principles with Python, Joel Grus, O'Reilly, 2015.
Reference Book:
1. Python for Data Analysis, Wes Mckinney, O'Reilly Media, 2013.
2. Field Cady, “Data Science Hand Book”, John Wiley & Sons, 2017.
3. Fundamentals of Data Science, Samuel Burns, Amazon KDP printing and Publishing, 2019.
4. Doing Data Science, Straight Talk From The Frontline, Cathy O'Neil and Rachel Schutt. O'Reilly. 2014.
5. Tony Ojeda, Sean Patrick Murphy, Benjamin Bengfort, Abhijit Dasgupta, “Practical Data Science Cookbook”,
Packt Publishing Ltd., 2014.
6. Nathan Yau, “Visualize This: The Flowing Data Guide to Design, Visualization, and Statistics”, Wiley, 2011.
7. Shai Vaingast, “Beginning Python Visualization Crafting Visual Transformation Scripts”, Apress, 2nd edition,
2014.
Extensive Reading:
• https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_cs28/
• http://bigdatauniversity.com/
• http://home.ubalt.edu/ntsbarsh/stat-data/topics.htm#rintroduction
PAGE 430
19CSH42 DATA MINING USING R L T P C

Course Objective:
• Apply various Data manipulation techniques in R to import and export data
• Apply classification and regression techniques in R
• Implement programs of clustering & outlier detection in R
• Build association rules & perform time series forecasting in R
• Explore R for various applications
Course Outcome:
• Apply the basics of R programming to perform import & export
• Apply the supervised learning techniques in R
• Use R to perform clustering and to detect outliers
• Explore data analysis for time series and build association rules
• Applr R for text mining and other applications
Unit I BASICS OF R & DATA IMPORT EXPORT 9
Introduction to Data Mining – Basics of R – Working with Datasets in R – Data Import and Export – Save and Load
Data in Different Formats - Data Types – Vectors & operations – Matrices – Arrays – Factors & operations – Data
Frames – Subsetting of Data Frames – List – Data Exploration and Visualization
Unit II CLASSIFICATION & REGRESSION 9
Supervised Learning – Classification – Decision Tress – Working with party and rpart module – Random Forest –
Regression – Linear Regression – Logistic Regression – Non Linear Regression
Unit III CLUSTERING & OUTLIER DETECTION 9
Unsupervised Learning – K-Means Clustering – K-Medoids Clustering – Hierarchical Clustering – Density-based
Clustering – Outlier Detection – Univariate Outlier Detection – Detect by Clustering – Time Series – With LOF
Unit IV TIME SERIES & ASSOCIATION RULES 9
Time Series Data in R – Decomposition – Time Series Forecasting – Time Series Clustering – Time Series Classification
– Association Rule Mining – Removing Redundancy – Interpreting Rules – Visualizing Association Rules
Unit V TEXT MINING &SOCIAL NETWORK ANALYSIS 9
Text Mining – Applications in R – Social Network Analysis – Network of Terms – Network of Tweets – Two-Mode
Network – Analysis and Forecasting of House Price Indices - Customer Response Prediction and Profit Optimization
Text Book:
1. Yanchang Zhao, “R and Data Mining: Examples and Case Studies”, Academic Press, First Edition, 2013
Reference Book:
1. K.G.Srinivasa, G M Siddesh, Chetan Shetty, “Statistical Programming in R”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi,
2017
2. John Chambers, “Software for Data Analysis: Programming with R “, Springer; 1st ed. 2008. , 2nd printing 2009
edition
4. Nicholas J. Horton, Ken Kleinman,” Using R and RStudio for Data Management, Statistical Analysis, and
5. John Maindonald, W. John Braun, ”Data Analysis and Graphics Using R: An Example-Based Approach”,
University Press, Cambridge, Third edition, 2010
PAGE 431
19CSH43 DATA ANALYTICS USING SPARK L T P C

Course Objective:
• To explore the basics of Apache Spark and deploy spark.
• To perform various basic operations on RDDs.
• To work with storage functions and use external programs to process data in Spark RDDs.
• To use Spark in NoSQL and SQL applications.
• To develop real time event processing system and make better decisions using machine learning.
Course Outcome:
• Deploy Spark and provide a fully functional programming and runtime environment.
• Work with basic operations on RDDs.
• Apply suitable storage functions for program optimization, durability and process data.
• Develop NoSQL and SQL applications using Spark.
• Apply spark streaming and machine learning techniques
Unit I SPARK FOUNDATIONS AND DEPLOYING SPARK 8
History of Big Data and Hadoop – Apache Spark – Functional Programming using Python – Spark Deployment Modes
– Installing Spark: Linux, Mac OS X, Windows – Exploring Spark installation – Deploying Multi-node Spark standalone
cluster – Overview of Cloud - Deploying Spark in the Cloud
Unit II SPARK ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING BASICS 10
Anatomy of Spark Application – Spark Applications using standalone scheduler – Deployment modes for spark
applications running on YARN – RDDs – Loading data into RDDs – Operations on RDDs
Unit III ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 9
Shared variables – Partitioning Data – RDD storage options – Processing RDDs – Data Sampling – Cluster
Configuration – Optimizing Spark
Unit IV SQL AND NOSQL PROGRAMMING 9
Spark SQL: HIVE - Spark SQL architecture – DataFrames: caching, persisting, repartitioning, saving DataFrame output
– Accessing and using Spark.
Spark with NoSQL: NoSQL – HBase – Cassandra – DynamoDB
Unit V STREAMING, DATA SCIENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING 9
SPARK streaming – Structured streaming - Machine Learning with Spark – Machine Learning Primer – Machine
Learning using Spark MLlib: classification, collaborative filtering, implementing recommender – Machine Learning
using ML: classification, collaborative filtering, clustering – ML pipelines
Text Book:
1. Jeffrey Aven, “Data and Analytics with Spark Using Python”, Pearson Education Inc., 2018.
Reference Book:
1. Wenqiang Feng, "Learning Apache Spark with Python", 2020.
2. Mike Frampton, “Mastering Apache Spark”, Fourth Edition, O’Reilly Publications, 2015
3. Holden Karau, Andy Konwinski, Patrick Wendell and Matei Zaharia, “Learning Spark”, O’Reilly Media, Inc., 2015.
Extensive Reading:
• https://spark.apache.org/docs/latest/quick-start.html
• https://www.edureka.co/blog/spark-tutorial/
• https://data-flair.training/blogs/spark-tutorial/
• https://towardsdatascience.com/a-neanderthals-guide-to-apache-spark-in-python-9ef1f156d427/
• https://www.tutorialspoint.com/pyspark/index.htm
• https://supergloo.com/spark-tutorial/spark-tutorials-python/#Spark_Tutorials_WithPython
PAGE 432
19CSH44 DATA DRIVEN DECISION MAKING L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the basics of business analytics
• To learn the algorithm and framework used in various analytics
• To study the fundamentals of descriptive analytics
• To learn the basics of predictive analytics
• To expose the applications of big data analytics
Course Outcome:
• Apply various tools for business analytics problems
• Apply machine learning algorithms for decision making problems
• Use descriptive analytics for data visualization
• Solve LP , ILP and MCDM problems for various case studies
• Use the big data analytics for various business applications
Unit I BUSINESS ANALYTICS 9
Introduction to Business analytics – Importance in modern business decisions – Types of Business Analytics –
Descriptive Analytics – Graphical and numerical methods – Predictive analytics – Models – Prescriptive analysis –
Analytics Tools - Application and Implementation
Unit II ALGORITHMS AND FRAMEWORK 9
Big Data Analytics - Web and Social Media Analytics - Machine Learning Algorithms - Framework for Data-Driven
Decision Making - Analytics Capability Building – Road map - Challenges in Data-Driven Decision Making and Future
Unit III DESCRIPTIVE ANALYTICS 9
Introduction to Descriptive Analytics - Data Types and Scales - Types of Data Measurement Scales - Population and
Sample - Percentile, Decile and Quartile - Measures of Variation - Measures of Shape − Skewness and Kurtosis - Data
Visualization
Unit IV PRESCRIPTIVE ANALYTICS 9
Introduction to Prescriptive Analytics - Linear Programming - Linear Programming (LP) Model Building - Linear
Programming Problem (LPP) Terminologies - Assumptions of Linear Programming - Sensitivity Analysis in LPP -
Solving a Linear Programming Problem using Graphical Method - Linear Integer Programming (ILP) - Multi-Criteria
Decision-Making (MCDM) Problems
Unit V BIG DATA ANALYTICS FOR BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE 9
Big Data and Big Data Analytics - Data Science and the Data Scientist – Examples – Big Data Technologies – Cloud
Computing - Big Data Analytics Software and Services – Applications – Online Advertising – Recommendation
Systems
Text Book:
1. Amar Sahey, “Business Analytics - A Data Driven Decision Making approach for business”, Volume I, Business
Expert Press , LLC ,2018 ( Unit I)
2. U Dinesh Kumar , “ Business Analytics : The Science of Data Driven Decision Making”, Wiley Publication , 2017 (
UNIT II – UNIT IV)
Reference Book:
1. Jay Liebowitz , “ Business Analytics”, Auerbach Publications, 2013 (UNIT V)
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.coursera.org/learn/decision-making
• https://www.smartsheet.com/data-driven-decision-making-management
• https://www.datapine.com/blog/data-driven-decision-making-in-businesses
PAGE 433
19ITH01 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND HASHING L T P C

Offered by IT (Emerging Area Course offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To introduce the fundamental concepts and techniques in cryptography and network security
• To illustrate the working principles of various Symmetric Ciphers
• To explore knowledge on Asymmetric Ciphers
• To learn the various Hash function
• To realize the Construction
Course Outcome:
• Apply essential mathematical concepts to Cryptography and identify the vulnerabilities in Classical
cryptosystems
• Experiment Symmetric-Key cipher algorithms
• Apply Asymmetric-Key Cryptographic techniques
• Manipulate the Hash function
• Demonstrate cryptographic Hash function to real-time applications
Computer Security Concepts- OSI Security Architecture- Security Attacks- Security Services- Security Mechanisms-
Model for Network Security- Classical Encryption Techniques- Symmetric Cipher Model- Substitution Techniques-
Transposition Techniques- Rotor Machines- Stegnography- Basic Concepts in Number Theory and Finite Fields-
Divisibility and the Division Algorithm- Euclidean Algorithm- Modular Arithmetic-Groups, Rings, and Fields- Finite
Fields of the Form GF(p)
Unit II MODERN SYMMETRIC CIPHERS 9
Block Ciphers and the Data Encryption Standard-Block Cipher Principles-The Data Encryption Standard (DES)-
Strength of DES-Differential and Linear Cryptanalysis-Block Cipher Design Principles-Advanced Encryption Standard-
Block Cipher Modes of Operation- Stream Ciphers-RC4
Unit III ASYMMETRIC CIPHERS 9
Prime Numbers- Fermat's and Euler's Theorems- Testing for Primality- Chinese Remainder Theorem-Discrete
Logarithms- Principles of Public-Key Cryptosystems- RSA Algorithm- Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange- ElGamal
Cryptosystem- Elliptic Curve Arithmetic- Elliptic Curve Cryptography
Unit IV HASH FUNCTION 9
Block cipher Based hash function - Non-Block cipher Based hash function - Design principles - Methods of Attack on
Hash function
Unit V CONSTRUCTION 9
Theoretic Construction - Hard bit and Pseudo random bit generation - strong one-way permutation - UOWHF
Construction and PBG -Strong one-way permutation
Text Book:
1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and network Security”, Pearson, Sixth edition, 2013.
2. Alan G. Konheim, “Computer security & cryptography”, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
3. Josef Pieprzyk Babak Sadeghiyan ,”Design of hashing Algoritms “,Springer-Verlag 1993
Reference Book:
1. Charles P. Pfleeger, Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Security in computing”, Prentice Hall of India, Third Edition, 2006.
2. Wade Trappe, Lawrence C Washington, “Introduction to Cryptography with coding theory”, Pearson, Second
edition, 2007.
3. Behrouz A.Forouzan, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
Extensive Reading:
• http://www.interhack.net/pubs/network-security/
• http://docs.sun.com/source/816-6154-10/
• http://www.cgi.com/cgi/pdf/cgi_whpr_35_pki_e.pdf
• http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RC4
PAGE 434
19ITH02 INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL CURRENCIES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To study the concepts of Bitcoins
• To study Bitcoin Client and Transactions
• To understand Bitcoin Network and Blockchain
• To understand Storage and Mining
• To study Alternative Chains
Course Outcome:
• Implement the basic element of Bitcoins
• Realize Bitcoin Client and Transactions
• Use Bitcoin Network and Blockchain
• Work with Mining techniques
• Work with alternate bitcoin techniques.
How Bitcoins works-Transactions, Blocks, Mining, and the Blockchain-Bitcoin Transactions-Constructing a
Transaction-Bitcoin Mining-Mining transactions in blocks -Spending the transaction-Public key cryptography and
crypto-currency-Bitcoin Addresses-Wallets
Unit II THE BITCOIN CLIENT AND TRANSACTIONS 9
Bitcoin Core - The reference implementation-Using Bitcoin Core’s JSON-RPC API from the command line-Alternative
clients, libraries and toolkits-Transaction Lifecycle-Structure-Outputs and Inputs-Chaining and Orphan Transactions-
Scripts and Script Language-Standard Transactions
Unit III BITCOIN NETWORK AND BLOCKCHAIN 9
Peer-to-Peer Network Architecture-Nodes Types and Roles-The Extended Bitcoin Network-Network Discovery-Full
Nodes-Simplified Payment Verification (SPV) Nodes-Bloom Filters and Inventory Updates-Transaction Pools-
Blockchain-Structure of a Block-Block Header-Block Identifiers-Genesis Block-Linking Blocks in the Blockchain-
Merkle Trees
Unit IV BITCOIN STORAGE AND MINING 9
Simple Local Storage - Hot and Cold Storage - Splitting and Sharing Keys - Online Wallets and Exchanges - Payment
Services - Transaction Fees - Currency Exchange Markets - Task of Bitcoin Miners – Mining Hardware – Energy
Consumption and Ecology – Mining Pools – Mining Incentives and strategies – Anonymity Basics - De-
anonymizeBitcoin– Mixing - Decentralized Mixing – Zerocoin and Zerocash
Unit V ALTCOINS 9
Altcoins: History and Motivation – Few Altcoins - Relationship Between Bitcoin and Altcoins - Merge Mining - Atomic
Cross‐chain Swaps - Bitcoin‐Backed Altcoins, “Side Chains” - Ethereum and Smart Contracts - The Block Chain as a
Vehicle for Decentralization - Routes to Block Chain Integration - Template for Decentralization
Text Book:
1. Andreas M.Antonopoulos,“mastering bitcoins” o’reilly media, inc.,2014
2. Arvind Narayanan,”Bitcoin and Cryptocurrency Technologies” Princeton University Press,2016
Reference Book:
1. Chris Dannen, Introducing Ethereum and Solidity: Foundations of Cryptocurrency and Blockchain Programming
for Beginners. Apress 2017
2. ChrisBurniske &jack Tatar, cryptoassets The Innovative Inverstor’s Guide to Bitcoin and Beyond,McGraw-
Hill,2018
3. S Shukla, M. Dhawan, S. Sharma and S. Venkatesan, “Blockchain Technology: Cryptocurrency and Ap.plications”,
Oxford University Press, 2019.
4. Josh Thompson, “Blockchain: The Blockchain for Beginnings, Guild to Blockchain Technology and Blockchain
Programming”, Create Space Independent Publishing Platform, 2017
Extensive Reading:
• https://blockgeeks.com/guides/what-is-cryptocurrency/
• https://www.coinbase.com/learn
• https://bitcoin.org/en/how-it-works
• https://www.thebalance.com/altcoins-a-basic-guide-391206
PAGE 435
19ITH03 BLOCKCHAIN TECHNOLOGIES L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn the various cryptography primitives used in blockchain.
• To study the design principles of blockchain.
• To understand the various consensus algorithms.
• To study the blockchain in networking.
• To learn the enhancements of blockchain technologies.
Course Outcome:
• Implement the required cryptography primitives for blockchain systems.
• Work with various blockchain design principles.
• Implement with various consensus algorithms.
• Equip networks with the various blockchain techniques.
• Work with blockchain optimization techniques.
Unit I CRYPTOGRAPHY IN BLOCKCHAIN 9
Blockchain Definitions – Blockchain versus Databases – History – Motivation – Characteristics – Types – Overview -
Hashing in Blockchain – Linking blocks in blockchain – Linking blocks using SHA256 – Block structure – Blockchain
functionality – Creating Blockchain – Byzantine failure problem in blockchain – Digital signatures in blockchain –
Blockchain wallets
Unit II BLOCKCHAIN DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9
Networked Integrity – Distributed Power- Value as Incentive – Security – Privacy – Rights Preserved – Inclusion –
Centralized Registries versus Distributed Ledgers – Public versus Private Ledgers – Transparency as a Strategic Risk –
Transparency as a Strategic Asset - Zero Knowledge Proofs
Unit III CONSENSUS ALGORITHMS 9
Proof of Work – Pure Stake Based Consensus – Proof of Stake - Leased Proof of Stake – Delegated Proof of Stake –
Hybrid Form of PoS and PoW – Practical Byzantine Fault Tolerance – Ripple –Tendermint – Proof of Elapsed Time –
Proof of Activity – Proof of Burn – Hyperledger Fabric
Unit IV NETWORKING IN BLOCK CHAIN 9
Peer – to –peer Networking – Network Discovery – Block Synchronization – Building a simple Blockchain in P2P
Network – Validating new Block – Selecting Longest chain – Block Exchange between Peers – Application Interfaces-
Blockchain Networks – Testnet – Regtest – Blockchain in 5G – Blockchain in Social Networking – Blockchain for IoT
Unit V BLOCKCHAIN OPTIMIZATIONS AND ENHANCEMENTS 9
Blockchain Optimizations – Transaction Exchange – Off-chain Transactions – Block size improvements – Blockchain
enhancements – Sharding – Evolution of consensus algorithm – Proof of Stake – Proof of Activity – Byzantine Fault
Tolerance Consensus Models – Proof of Elapsed Time – Cross-chain Protocol – Privacy Enhancement – Blockchain
Security – Transaction Security Model – Decentralized Security Model – Attacks on Blockchain
Text Book:
1. Koshik Raj, “Foundations of Blockchain”, Packt Publishers, 2019.
Reference Book:
1. S. Shukla, M. Dhawan, S. Sharma and S. Venkatesan, “Blockchain Technology: Cryptocurrency and Applications”,
Oxford University Press, 2019.
2. Josh Thompson, “Blockchain: The Blockchain for Beginnings, Guild to Blockchain Technology and Blockchain
Programming”, Create Space Independent Publishing Platform, 2017.
3. Andreas M. Antonopoulos, “Mastering Bitcoin: Unlocking Digital Cryptocurrencies”, Oreilly Media, 1st Edition,
2014.
4. Arvind Narayanan, Joseph Bonneau, Edward Felten, Andrew Miller, and Steven Goldfeder. “Bitcoin and
cryptocurrency technologies: a comprehensive introduction”, Princeton University Press, 2016.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.coursera.org/learn/cryptocurrency#syllabus
• https://www.coursera.org/learn/wharton-cryptocurrency-blockchain-introduction-digital-currency
• https://www.coursera.org/learn/blockchain-basics
PAGE 436
19ITH04 SMART CONTRACTS AND DECENTRALIZED APPLICATIONS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Understand how "wallets" hold digital keys that control funds and smart contracts
• Interact with Ethereum clients programmatically using JavaScript libraries and Remote Procedure Call interfaces
• Learn security best practices, design patterns, and anti-patterns with real-world examples
• Interact with Ethereum clients programmatically using JavaScript libraries and Remote Procedure Call interfaces
Course Outcome:
• Use "wallets" for holding digital keys that control funds and smart contracts
• Analyze Smart Contracts with Solidity and Vyper
• Create tokens that represent assets, shares, votes, or access control rights
• Build decentralized applications using multiple peer-to-peer (P2P) components
• Implement distributed ledgers with Hyperledger
Unit I WALLET AND TRANSACTIONS 9
Wallet Technology Overview - Nondeterministic (Random) Wallets - Deterministic (Seeded) Wallets - Hierarchical
Deterministic Wallets - Seeds and Mnemonic Codes - Wallet Best Practices. Transaction – Structure - Transaction
Nonce - Transaction Gas - Transaction Recipient - Transaction Value and Data - Special Transaction: Contract
Creation - Digital Signatures - The Signature Prefix Value and Public Key Recovery - Separating Signing and
Transmission - Transaction Propagation
Unit II SMART CONTRACTS 9
Smart Contract - Life Cycle - Ethereum High-Level Languages - Building a Smart Contract with Solidity - The
Ethereum Contract ABI - Programming with Solidity - Contract Definition - Functions - Contract Constructor and
selfdestruct - Function Modifiers - Contract Inheritance - Error Handling - Events - Calling Other Contracts - Gas
Considerations. Smart Contracts and Vyper : Vulnerabilities and Vyper - Comparison to Solidity - Decorators -
Function and Variable Ordering - Compilation - Protecting Against Overflow Errors at the Compiler Level - Reading
and Writing Data
Unit III TOKENS 9
Tokens - Use - Tokens and Fungibility - Counterparty Risk - Tokens and Intrinsicality - Utility or Equity -
Tokens on Ethereum - Token Standards - Extensions to Token Interface Standards - Tokens and ICOs
Unit IV DECENTRALIZED APPLICATIONS 9
Decentralized Applications (DApps) - Basic DApp Example - Decentralizing the DApp - Storing the Auction DApp on
Swarm - The Ethereum Name Service (ENS) - History - Specification - Bottom Layer - Middle Layer - Top Layer -
Registering a Name - Managing Your ENS Name - ENS Resolvers - Resolving a Name to a Swarm Hash - from App to
DApp
Unit V DISTRIBUTED LEDGERS WITH HYPERLEDGER 9
Exposing Network Assets and Transactions - Building a complete application - Integration with existing systems and
processes - Business Networks - Defining business networks - Introducing participants - assets – transactions -
Discussing events from the perspective of designing a business network using Composer - Implementing a business
network - Business Network Example - letter of credit sample - Analyzing the letter of credit process - description of
the business network - model of the business network - Examining the live network - Creating business network APIs
Text Book:
1. Andreas M. Antonopoulos, Gavin Wood, “Mastering Ethereum: Building Smart Contracts”, O'Reilly Media, Inc,
2018
2. Nitin Gaur, Luc Desrosiers, Petr Novotny, Venkatraman Ramakrishna, Anthony O'Dowd, Salman A. Baset
“Hands-On Blockchain with Hyperledger”, Packt Publishers, June 2018
Reference Book:
1. Siraj Raval, “Decentralized Applications: Harnessing Bitcoin's Blockchain Technology”, O'Reilly Media, Inc, 2018
2. Roberto Infante, “Building Ethereum DApps: Decentralized Applications on the Ethereum Blockchain”, Manning
Publications, 2019
Extensive Reading:
• www.nptel.ac.in
• https://github.com/ethereumbook/ethereumbook
PAGE 437
19ITH05 BLOCKCHAIN PLATFORMS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the various primitives used in blockchain.
• To implement using Ethereum Platform.
• To understand the various modules in Hyperledger framework.
• To develop using Hyperledger Platform
• To learn about different Blockchain Platforms.
Course Outcome:
• Implement the required cryptography primitives for blockchain systems..
• Develop and Deploy using Ethereum Platform.
• Work with various techniques in Hyperledger framework.
• Develop and Deploy using Hyper ledger Platform.
• Work with alternate Blockchain Platforms.
Decentralized applications-Dapp-Good and bad Dapps-Understanding the blockchain-A deeper look at decentralized
applications-Ethereum’s history and governance-Connecting to Ethereum through the wallet-Smart contracts: The
brain of Dapps-Connecting to Ethereum with geth-Managing accounts with geth
Unit II ETHEREUM 9
Managing smart contracts with Web3.js-Revisiting deployment through geth’s interactive console- Interacting with
SimpleCoin through geth’s console-Simplifying command-based deployment with Node.js-Deploying on a private
network-Making development more efficient by deploying on mock networks-Smoother interaction with SimpleCoin
through a web UI-The Ethereum ecosystem-The core components -Decentralized address resolution with ENS-
Decentralized content storage-Accessing external data through oracles-Dapp frameworks and IDEs
Unit III HYPERLEDGER FABRIC FRAMEWORK 9
Exploring Hyperledger Fabric- Hyperledger frameworks, tools, and building blocks-Hyperledger frameworks
Hyperledger tools-The building blocks of blockchain solutions-Hyperledger Fabric component design-the Journey of
a sample transaction-Hyperledger Fabric explored-Understanding governance in business networks powered by
blockchain
Unit IV IMPLEMENTATION IN HYPERLEDGER 9
The Hyperledger Family-Prerequisites and Setting up a Development Environment –Developing First Business
Network and Deploying it -Define your Business Network -Secure your API using Passport and Enable Multi-Use Case
Study and Implementation
Unit V DIFFERENT BLOCKCHAIN PLATFORMS 9
Multichain-Features-Mechanisms-Deployment-R3 Corda-Features-Model-Consensus Mechanism –Use cases-Ripple-
Technology-Transection- IOTA-Consensus Mechanism- Implementation-Setup-Real World Implementation
Text Book:
1. Roberto Infante, “ Building Ethereum Dapps “, Manning Publications,March 2019, ISBN: 9781617295157
2. Petr Novotny, Nitin Gaur, Luc Desrosiers, Salman A. Baset ,”Blockchain Development with Hyperledger”, Packt
Publishing, March 2019
3. NiazChowdhury,”Inside Blockchain, Bitcoin, and Cryptocurrencies”,CRC press, Taylor & Francis,2020.
4. Ernesto Lee, Sudip Ghosh,”Enterprise Blockchain Development: With Hyperledger Fabric and Composer” ,
ConsultantsNetwork,2018
Reference Book:
1. Josh Thompson, “Blockchain: The Blockchain for Beginnings Guide to Blockchain Technology and Leveraging
Blockchain Programming”, Create Space Independent Publishing Platform, 2017.
2. Andreas M. Antonopoulos, “Mastering Bitcoin: Unlocking Digital Cryptocurrencies”, Oreilly Media, 1st Edition,
2014.
3. Austin Grice, Eric Everson Mendes Marins, Garrett Lee Woodworth, Juliana Medeiros Destro, Rahul Gupta,
VasfiGucer , “Implementation Guide for IBM Blockchain Platform for Multicloud”, IBM Redbooks,2019.
Extensive Reading:
• https://data-flair.training/blogs/blockchain-terminologies/
• https://github.com/anders94/blockchain-demo
• https://anders.com/blockchain/
• www.redbooks.ibm.com › LinuxONE
• https://www.coursera.org/learn/blockchain-platforms
PAGE 438
19ITH06 BLOCKCHAIN FORENSICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn about security and privacy in Bitcoin and Blockchain
• To propose Blockchain based security mechanism for different applications
• To understand the importance of bitcoin forensics
• To build Blockchain-based apps and PKI solutions
• To understand challenges and the future of cybersecurity and Blockchain
Course Outcome:
• Understand the security issues in Blockchain
• Develop Blockchain-based security mechanism
• Comprehend the need for bitcoin forensics
• Summarize the security and privacy issues in bitcoin
• Realize the challenges and the potential of blockchain in the field of cyber security
Unit I BLOCKCHAIN ON THE CIA SECURITY TRIAD 9
CIA security triad - Blockchain on confidentiality - Blockchain on integrity - Blockchain on availability - Deploying PKI-
Based Identity with Blockchain - Two-Factor Authentication with Blockchain.
Unit II BLOCKCHAIN BASED SECURITY MECHANISMS 9
Domain Name System - Understanding DNS components - DNS structure and hierarchy - DNS topology for large
enterprise - Blockchain-based DNS solution - Blockchain-Based DDoS Protection.
Unit III BITCOIN FORENSICS 9
Cryptocurrency artifacts and investigation – Bitcoin crimes – Cryptocurrency investigation challenges - Case studies
- Tracking bitcoin transactions - Numisight bitcoin explorer.
Unit IV SECURITY AND PRIVACY IN BITCOIN 9
Security of confirmed transactions – Security of Zero-confirmation Transactions – Bitcoin Forks - User privacy -
Network layer attacks - Enhancing privacy in bitcoin.
Unit V BLOCKCHAIN AND CYBER SECURITY - CHALLENGES AND FUTURE 9
Decision path for Blockchain – Checklist – Challenges - Future of cyber security with Blockchain.
Text Book:
1. Rajneesh Gupta, Hands-On Cybersecurity with Blockchain", Packt Publishing, 2018
Reference Book:
1. Ghassan Karame, Elli Androulaki, "Bitcoin and Blockchain Security ", Artech, 2017.
2. Tiana Laurence, " Blockchain For Dummies", Dummies, 2017.
3. Niranjan Reddy, "Practical Cyber Forensics: An Incident-Based Approach to Forensic Investigations", Apress,
2019.
4. Harish Garg, "Hands-On Bitcoin Programming with Python", Packt Publishing, 2018.
5. Makoto Yano, Chris Dai, Kenichi Masuda, Yoshio Kishimoto, " Blockchain And Crypt Currency: Building A High
Quality Marketplace For Crypt Data", Springer 2020.
Extensive Reading:
• www.nptel.ac.in
• www.ciphertrace.com
• www.hackernoon.com
PAGE 439
19ITH21 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To learn the output primitives like line, circle and ellipse using algorithms.
• To study the 2-D and 3-D viewing and transformations.
• To understand various, color models modeling and animation techniques.
Course Outcome:
• Apply the line, circle and ellipse drawing algorithms
• Apply the two dimensional geometric transformations and clipping
• Apply the three dimensional geometric transformations
• Work with color and illumination models
• Apply different methods for Modelling
Introduction-Applications-Graphics systems-Output Primitives-representing Image-Straight Line-Line drawing
Algorithms-DDA Algorithm-Bresenhams’ Line Algorithm-Circle Generating Algorithm- Bresenhams’ Circle Algorithm-
Midpoint Circle Algorithm-Ellipse Generating Algorithm-Midpoint Ellipse Algorithm.
Unit II TWO DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATIONS 9
Introduction-Representation of points-Matrix Algebra and Transformation-Transformation of points-Straightlines-
Midpoint Transformation-Transformation of parallel lines-Intersecting lines-Rotation,Reflection and scaling of
straight lines-Combined Transformations-Translation and Homogeneous Coordinates-Rotation about Arbitrary
point-Reflecion about Arbitrary line-Windowing and clipping
Unit III THREE DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATION 9
Introduction-3D Transformation-Rotation about an axis parallel to coordinate Axis-Reflection about an arbitrary axis
in space-Reflection through an arbitrary plane-3D Modelling schemes-Projection-Orthographic-Isometric-oblique-
perspective-3D clipping
Unit IV COLOR AND ILLUMINATION MODELS 9
Introduction –colors-Illumination model and light sources-specular Reflection-Intensity Attenuation-Shadow-
Reflectivity and refractivity-Radiosity Model-Texturing-Surface-Bump mapping-Environment Mapping-Shading
Methods
Unit V MODELLING CONCEPTS AND TECHNIQUES 9
Introduction-structures and Hierarchial Modelling-Advanced Modelling Techniques-Procedural Models-Fractals-
Grammar based Models-Physical based Modelling-Animation-Devices-Computer assisted-video formats-Frame by
Frame animation-Real Time Animation Techniques
Text Book:
1. Amarendra N Sinha,Arun D Udai,”Computer Graphics”,Tata Mc-Graw Hill ,2008
Reference Book:
1. Foley, van Dam, Feiner and Hughes ,”Computer Graphics Principles and Practice”, Addison Wesley,2004
2. D Hearn and P M Baker ,”Computer Graphics”, Prentice Hall of India Second Edition,2008
3. F .S. Hill, “Computer Graphics using OPENGL”, Second edition, Pearson Education 2003
Extensive Reading:
• http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-837-computer-graphics-fall-2003/
• http://www.moshplant.com/direct-or/bezier/
• http://www.cs.mtu.edu/~shene/COURSES/cs3621/NOTES/spline/B-spline/bspline-curve-prop.html
PAGE 440
19ITH22 INTRODUCTION TO VIRTUAL REALITY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the basic functioning of virtual Reality systems.
• To understand the concepts of Geometric modeling and Geometrical Transformations
• To learn Animating the Virtual Environment.
• To learn applications of Virtual Environment.
• To understand various types of Hardware’s and software’s in virtual Reality systems
Course Outcome:
• Develop 3D virtual environments.
• Develop 3D interaction techniques.
• Develop immersive virtual reality applications.
• Select types of Hardware’s and software’s in virtual Reality systems
• Develop and design research ideas and results
Virtual Reality & Virtual Environment : Introduction – Computer graphics – Real time computer graphics – Flight
Simulation – Virtual environments –requirement – benefits of virtual reality- 3D Computer Graphics : Introduction –
The Virtual world space – positioning the virtual observer – the perspective projection – Human vision – stereo
perspective projection – 3D clipping – Colour theory – Simple 3D modeling – Illumination models – Reflection
models – Shading algorithms
Unit II GEOMETRIC MODELING GEOMETRICAL TRANSFORMATIONS 9
Geometric Modeling: Introduction – From 2D to 3D – 3D space curves – 3D boundary representation - Geometrical
Transformations: Introduction – Frames of reference – Modeling transformations – Instances – Picking – Flying –
Scaling the VE – Collision detection - A Generic VR system: Introduction – The virtual Environment
Unit III VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENT 9
Animating the Virtual Environment: Introduction – The dynamics of numbers – Linear and Non-linear interpolation -
The animation of objects – linear and non-linear translation - shape & object in betweening – freeform deformation
– particle system- Physical Simulation : Introduction – Objects falling in a graphical field –Rotating wheels – Elastic
collisions – projectiles – simple pendulum – springs – Flight dynamics of an aircraft
Unit IV VR HARDWARES & SOFTWARES 9
Human factors : Introduction – the age- the ear- the somatic senses - VR Hardware : Introduction – sensor hardware
– Head-coupled displays –Aquatic hardware – Integrated VR systems-VR Software: Introduction – Modeling virtual
world –Physical simulation- VR toolkits – Introduction to VRML
Unit V VR APPLICATION 9
Introduction – Engineering – Entertainment – Science – Training – The Future: Introduction – Virtual environments –
modes of interaction
Text Book:
1. John Vince, “Virtual Reality Systems “, Pearson Education Asia, 2002
Reference Book:
1. Adams, “Visualizations of Virtual Reality”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.
2. Grigore C. Burdea, Philippe Coiffet , “Virtual Reality Technology” , WileyInterscience, Edition,1994.
3. William R. Sherman, Alan B. Craig, “Understanding Virtual Reality: Interface, Application, and Design”, Morgan
Kaufmann, 1st Edition,2002.
Extensive Reading:
• www.vresources.org
• www.vrac.iastate.edu
• www.w3.org/MarkUp/VRML/
PAGE 441
19ITH23 GEOMETRIC MODELLING FOR XR L T P C

Course Objective:
• To introduce the features of Augmented Reality
• To explore the aspects Virtual Reality modelling
• To learn the design approaches of Virtual Environment
• To study the implementation strategies for Virtual Reality
• To explore the applications of Virtual Reality
Course Outcome:
• Discover thefeatures of Augmented Reality
• Use the Solid Modelling and Haptic Interface in VR Technology
• Design new Virtual Environment with different design approaches
• Apply different implementation strategies for Virtual Reality
• Analyze the applications of Virtual Reality
Unit I AUGMENTED REALITY 9
Introduction-Types of Augmented Reality-Augmented Reality Displays – sensors-Augmented Reality-Marker vs
Markerless-User interfaces in Augmented Reality system
Unit II VIRTUAL REALITY MODELLING 9
VR Technology – Modelling- Solid Modelling in a VirtualReality Environment-Model Representation- Constraint-
based Manipulations- Implementation and Results- Interactive Solid Modelling in a Virtual Environment with a
Haptic Interface- Solid Modelling Engine- Haptic Rendering and Interfaces-Implementation.
Unit III DESIGN APPROACHES 9
Motion in Real and Virtual Worlds-Velocities and Accelerations -The Vestibular System -Physics in the Virtual World -
Mismatched Motion and Vection-Tracking -Tracking 2D Orientation -Tracking 3D Orientation -Tracking Position and
Orientation - Tracking Attached Bodies -3D Scanning of Environments-Interaction-Motor Programs and Remapping -
Locomotion -Manipulation - Social Interaction - Additional Interaction Mechanisms
Unit IV IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGIES 9
Introduction -General Characteristics of Vection -Motion Sickness and Adaptation Phenomena-Multisensory Vection
Illusions-Haptic and Tactile Cues-Relevance of Vection for VE System Design and Use-Research Issues-Effect of Visual
Frames of Reference on Vection and Orientation-Spatial Knowledge Acquisition-.Navigation Performance
Enhancement -Environmental Familiarization-Experiments-Performance Enhancement-Environmental
Familiarization
Unit V APPLICATIONS OF VIRTUAL REALITY 9
Audio -The Physics of Sound -The Physiology of Human Hearing -Auditory Perception-Auditory Rendering –Making
the most of Virtual Reality with Audio-Virtual Reality space and beyond-Common terms-Audio Source Component-
Add Audio to the Scene-Create Audio Mixture-Adding Mixer groups-Setting audio source to use the Audio mixer
groups
Text Book:
1. Jon Peddie ,”Augmented Reality: Where We Will All Live”,Springer International Publishing AG 2017
2. Kelly S. Hale,Kay M. Stanney ,”Handbook of virtual environments Design, Implementation, and Applications” ,
CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group,2015,Second Edition
3. S.K. Ong and A.Y.C. Nee (Eds.) ,”Virtual and Augmented Reality Applications in Manufacturing”, Springer-Verlag
London 2004
4. Jeff W Murray ,”Building Virtual Reality with Unity and Steam VR “,CRC Press ,2017
5. Steven M. LaValle,”Virtual Reality”Cambridge University Press, 2017.
Reference Book:
1. Max K. Agoston, “Computer Graphics and Geometric Modeling”, Springer-Verlag London Ltd, 2005
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.designtechsys.com/articles/computer-geometric-modelling
• https://digitalcommons.fiu.edu/etd/3988/
• http://ecoursesonline.iasri.res.in/mod/page/view.php?id=2482
• https://arc.aiaa.org/doi/abs/10.2514/6.1998-4824
PAGE 442
19ITH24 INTERACTIVE 3D DESIGN L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand the concept of Virtual Reality
• To understand the basic modeling concept
• To become familiar with VR programming
• To become familiar with Unity
• To expose various game development techniques
Course Outcome:
• Know about virtual reality techniques
• Apply the different Modeling techniques
• Create simple application in VR
• Create simple scenes using unity
• Create world space user Interface
Unit I INTERACTING WITH THE VIRTUAL WORLD 9
User Interface Metaphors – Manipulating a virtual world – Navigating in a virtual world – Interacting with others –
Interacting with VR system – Virtual reality experience – Immersion – Rules of the virtual world – substance of the
virtual world
Unit II MODELING 9
Kinematics Modeling - Homogeneous Transformation Matrices – Object position – Transformation Invariants –
Object hierarchies – Viewing the Three Dimension World – Physical Modeling – Behavior Modeling – Model
Management
Unit III VR PROGRAMMING 9
Toolkits and Scene Graphs – WorldToolKit – Java 3D – General Haptics open source Toolkit – PeopleShop – Human
factors in VR – Methodology and Terminology – User Performance Studies – VR Health and Safety Issues – VR and
Society
Unit IV UNITY BASICS 9
Getting started with unity – creating a simple diorama – measurement tools – using third party content – creating
3d content in VR – setting up the scene – Basic button input – Polling for clicks – Using scriptable objects for input –
Using unity events for input – Intractable items
Unit V WORLDSPACE UI 9
Reusable default canvas – Visor HUD – Reticle cursor – Windshield HUD – TextMeshpro – Info bubble – Pointing and
clicking with VR components – Building a wrist based menu palette – Using Glide locomotion – Adding comport
model locomotion – Techniques for teleportation – Teleportation toolkits – Managing VR motion sickness
Text Book:
1. Grigore C Burdea , Philippe Coiffet “Virtual Reality Technology”, second edition, 2006.
2. Jesse Glover, Jonathan Linowes, “Complete Virtual Reality and Augmented Reality Development with Unity”,
packt 2019
3. William R.Sherman , Alan B.Criag “ Understanding Virtual Reality “, first edition ,Elsevier, 2008.
Reference Book:
1. Kothari Dp & Saxena Anshu “Hypermedia From Multimedia to Virtual Reality” , Second Edition ,PHI,2008
2. Bahttacharya, Tapan, “Illusive World of Virtual Reality” , National Book Trust,India,2010
3. Ben Tristem ,Mike Geig, “ Unity Game Development”,Second Edition ,SAMS 2015
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.lynda.com/3D-Animation-training-tutorials/1-0.html
• https://www.vectary.com/3d-modeling-education/make-your-lessons-more-interactive-with-video-tutorials-
729d9ab34f72/
• www.tinkercade.com\learn
• https://www.gamedesigning.org/learn/3d-design/
PAGE 443
19ITH25 XR APP DEVELOPMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• Understand the basis of VR and AR
• Study the need for content creation in VR and AR
• Study the need for VR and AR in the wild
• Understand the techniques for implementing app using VR
• Understand the techniques for implementing app using AR
Course Outcome:
• Apply the basics of VR and AR
• Implement VR and AR for content creation
• Apply VR and AR in the wild
• Develop app using VR
• Develop app using AR
Unit I DEFINING VIRTUAL AND AUGMENTED REALITY 9
Introducing Virtual Reality and Augmented Reality- Mixed reality - virtuality - Extended reality -Evaluating the
Technology Hype Cycle - Exploring the Current State of Virtual Reality - Form Factors - Focusing on Features: Room-
scale versus stationary experience - Inside-out tracking - Haptic feedback – Audio - Considering Controllers- Current
Issues with VR -Exploring the Current State of Augmented Reality - Form Factors -Considering Controllers - Current
Issues with AR
Unit II CREATING CONTENT IN VIRTUAL AND AUGMENTED REALITY 9
Evaluating Your Project - Assessing Your Project’s Technology Needs - Choosing Virtual Reality - Choosing
Augmented Reality - Planning Your Virtual Reality Project - Defining Your Virtual Reality Project - Exploring Design
Principles in Virtual Reality - Planning Your Augmented Reality Project Defining Your Augmented Reality Project -
Exploring Design Principles in Augmented Reality - Assessing Design Software - Capturing Real Life - Assessing
Development Software - Distributing Your Content .
Unit III VIRTUAL AND AUGMENTED REALITY IN THE WILD 9
Exploring Virtual Reality & Augmented Reality Use Cases. - Art – Education – Entertainment – Healthcare – Gaming -
Mobile Apps for Experiencing Augmented Reality - Google Translate - Amazon AR View – Blippar - AR City – Arise -
Ingress and Pokémon Go - MeasureKit and Measure – InkHunter - Sketch AR - Find Your Car and Car Finder AR -
Future of Virtual Reality and Augmented Reality
Unit IV VR APP DEVELOPMENT 9
Getting Set Up for Unity SteamVR - The SteamVR Interaction System - Building a Main Menu - Advanced Interactions
- Making the Most of Virtual Reality with Audio - Building Seated or Static VR Experiences - Hands-On, Practical
Techniques for Reducing VR Sickness in Unity
Unit V AR APP DEVELOPMENT 9
Smartphones and AR – Vuforia SDK – Unity 3D - Setting up the AR environment – understanding Vuforia –
Trackables and Tracking – Exporting dataset – Advanced AR – AR games
Text Book:
1. Paul Mealy, “Virtual & Augmented Reality for Dummies” 1st Edition. 2018, Wiley Publishers, ISBN-978-1-119-
48134-8.
2. Building Virtual Reality with Unity and Steam VR (1st edition), A K Peters/CRC Press, ISBN13: 978-1138033511
3. Dominic Cushnan, Hassan EL Habbak, “Developing AR Games for iOS and Android”, Packt publishing, 2013
Reference Book:
1. Gerard Jounghyun Kim, “Designing Virtual Systems: The Structured Approach”, 2005.
2. Doug A Bowman, Ernest Kuijff, Joseph J LaViola, Jr and Ivan Poupyrev, “3D User Interfaces, Theory and
Practice”, Addison Wesley, USA, 2005.
3. Oliver Bimber and Ramesh Raskar, “Spatial Augmented Reality: Meging Real and Virtual Worlds”, 2005.
4. Burdea, Grigore C and Philippe Coiffet, “Virtual Reality Technology”, Wiley Interscience, India, 2003.
5. John Vince, “Virtual Reality Systems”, Addison Wesley, 1995.
6. Howard Rheingold, “Virtual Reality: The Revolutionary Technology and how it Promises to Transform
Society”,Simon and Schuster, 1991.
7. William R Sherman and Alan B Craig, “Understanding Virtual Reality: Interface, Application and Design (The
Morgan Kaufmann Series in Computer Graphics)”. Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, San Francisco, CA, 2002
8. Alan B. Craig, Understanding Augmented Reality, Concepts and Applications, Morgan Kaufmann, 2013.
PAGE 444
19ITH26 VIRTUAL REALITY AND GAME DEVELOPMENT L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand 10-stage workflows
• To Understand static meshes and modular environments
• To learn terrain system offered by Unity and Blender
• To Understand hard-coded dependencies and even driven programming
• To understand XML, data serialization and Baking
Course Outcome:
• Implement 10 stage workflows
• Build Unity scenes from modular prefabs
• Use the Blender sculpting tools
• Create an event and notification system
• Load ,save game functionality and light probes in Unity
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO 10 STAGE WORKFLOWS 9
Brainstorming-Initial Design-Prototyping-Refining Design-Project Management-Asset Creation-Importing Assets-
Level Design-Scripting-Testing-Building-Configuring the Blender GUI-The Close-Without-Saving Bug- Exporting
Blender Models to Unity-Exploring FBX File
Unit II MODULAR ENVIRONMENTS AND STATIC MESHES 9
Modular Environments in Blender-Extending from the Base Tile-Modular Environment Blender Workflow-UV
Mapping and Texture Creation-Importing and Configuring Environments in Unity--Using Prefabs-Static Batching
Unit III TERRAIN 9
Creating Terrain in Unity-Evaluating Unity Terrains-Blender Terrain Modeling-Terrain Resolution-Texture-Painting
Terrain-Working with Roads and Paths-Animation Units-Preparing for Animation in Blender -Keyframe Animations
from Blender to Unity-Follow-Path Animations and Animation Baking-Blend Shapes and Shape Keys-Blend Shapes
and Shape Keys.
Unit IV OBJECTS, DEPENDENCIES, EVENT-DRIVEN PROGRAMMING AND RETOPOLOGIZING 9
Hard-Coded Dependencies-Solving DI: Component-Based Design and Messages-Sending Messages to Selected
Objects-Sending Messages to Parents-Notification System-Notifications Manager In-Depth-Singletons-Messages and
Active Objects-Traversing Game Object Hierarchies-High-Poly Meshes and Subdivision Surfaces-High-Poly Meshes
and Real-Time Games-Retopologizing in Practice
Unit V SAVED GAMES AND PERSISTENT DATA AND BAKING 9
Persistent Data-Player Preferences-Player Preferences-Customizing Persistent Data-XML Files-JSON – Binary-Class
Serialization-Getting Started with XML Serialization-Saving Data to an XML File-Read Data from an XML File-Working
with the SaveState Class- Baking- Preparing for Lightmapping in Unity- Lightmapping: Lightmap Resolution-
Lightmapping Mode- Indirect Illumination and Ambient Occlusion- Baking Lightmaps- Baking Maps in Blender-
Compositing Render Passes in GIMP¬- Baking Real-Time Lighting with Unity Light Probes- Baking Navigation
Text Book:
1. Alan Thorn,”Practical Game Development with Unity and Blender”, Cengage Learning, 2015
Reference Book:
1. Vahé Karamian,” Introduction to Game Programming:Using C# and Unity 3D”, Noorcon Inc.2016
2. Michelle Menard, Bryan Wagstaff,”Game development with Unity”, Cengage Learning, 2015
3. Oliver Villar, “Learning Blender: A Hands-On Guide to Creating 3D Animated Characters”, Addison -Wesley,2017
Extensive Reading:
• 1. https://learn.unity.com/
• 2. https://unity3d.com/learning-c-sharp-in-unity-for-beginners
• 3. https://www.blender.org/support/tutorials/
• 4. https://www.blenderguru.com/tutorials
PAGE 445
19BTH01 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY L T P C

Offered by BT (Emerging Area Course offered to BAD, BBE, BBT, BCI, BCS, BEC, BEE, BIT, BME, BRA) 3 0 0 3
Course Objective:
• To impart comprehensive understanding of the cell and tissue organization
• To expand on the understanding of cardiovascular and respiratory physiology
• To impart knowledge on the function of the brain, central nervous system and autonomic nervous system
• To provide a complete understanding of the digestive and excretory system
• Make student to understand the physiological regulations of metabolism and reproductive system by various
gland and the hormones
Course Outcome:
• Acquire an enhanced knowledge and appreciation of cell and tissue organization
• Explain the functions of important physiological systems such as the cardiovascular and respiratory systems
• Explain the functioning of central nervous system and neurophysiology
• Explain the physiological processes associated with the digestive and excretory system
• Explain the role of glands and hormones in the regulation of metabolism and the reproductive system
Unit I CELL AND TISSUE ORGANIZATION 9
Cells – interaction with extracellular environment, diffusion and osmosis, carrier mediated transport, membrane
potential, cell signaling and cell respiration. Primary tissues- Muscle, Nervous, Epithelial and Connective Tissues,
origin & function; organs, body-fluid compartments. Body planes, homeostasis and feedback control- negative &
positive feedback, neural and endocrine regulation, feedback control of hormone secretion.
Unit II CARDIOVASCULAR AND RESPIRATORY PHYSIOLOGY 9
Functions and components of the cardiovascular system; Blood-Composition, cells, plasma proteins and
lipoproteins. Buffer systems, hemostasis, Mechanism of blood clotting and anticoagulants; Structure of heart, blood
vessels and lymphatic system. Cardiac output, blood flow, blood pressure and its regulation. The respiratory system
- structure, thoracic cavity; physical aspects of ventilation, mechanism of breathing – gas exchange in the lungs;
Regulation of breathing, haemoglobin and oxygen transport – effect of pH, temperature and 2-DPG and muscle
myoglobin; CO2 transport; Acid base balance of the blood; Exercise and high altitude on respiratory function.
Unit III NEUROPHYSIOLOGY 9
Nervous system – Neurons and supporting cells, axons- Conduction of nerve impulse, origin of resting membrane
potential and action potential - Electrophysiology of ion channels, synapse, neurotransmitters – types and functions
and synaptic integration; Structure of the Brain, spinal cord and nerves; Autonomic nervous system – sympathetic
and parasympathetic, functions. Sensory physiology – characteristics of sensory receptors, taste and smell, ears and
hearing, eyes and vision. Neural control of skeletal muscles.
Unit IV DIGESTION AND EXCRETION PHYSIOLOGY
Introduction to the digestive system – mouth to stomach, small intestine, large intestine, liver, gall bladder and
pancreas; Regulation of digestive system, digestion and absorption of foods. Structure and function of the kidneys;
glomerular filtration; reabsorption of salt and water; renal plasma clearance; renal control of electrolyte and acid-
base balance; diuretics and renal function tests.
Unit V ENDOCRINE AND REPRODUCTIVE PHYSIOLOGY
Endocrine glands and hormones – classification of hormones, hormone interactions, neural and endocrine
regulation, mechanism of hormone action; pituitary gland, Adrenal gland, thyroid and parathyroid glands, pancreas
and other endocrine glands; paracrine and autocrine regulation. Regulation of metabolism by hormones. Sexual
reproduction, endocrine regulation of reproduction.
Text Book:
1. Stuart, I.F., Human Physiology, Mc Graw Hill, 17th edition, 2017.
2. John, H.E., Guyton and Hall Text book of Medical Physiology, W B Saunders and Company, 13th Edition, 2015.
Reference Book:
1. Gerad, J. T., Sandra, R.G., “Principles of Anatomy and Physiology - Control systems of human body, Vol-3”,
Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, 2006.
2. Barett, K.E., Barman, S.M., Boitans, S., Brook, H., Ganong’s Review of Medical physiology, Tata McGrawHill,
23rd Edition (Lange basic science), 2009.
PAGE 446
19BTH02 ENZYME - COENZYME CHEMISTRY L T P C

Course Objective:
• To provide a detailed overview of enzymes and coenzymes.
• To impart knowledge on the various enzyme kinetics and mechanisms.
• To provide students with a complete understanding of the catalytic strategies followed by various classes of
enzymes.
• To guide students in differentiating the regulatory strategies followed by various catalytic processes.
• To demonstrate students with models and case studies on electro-enzymology and coenzyme regeneration.
Course Outcome:
• Define enzyme structure, differences between enzymes and normal catalytic substances, cofactor and
coenzymes
• Explain catalytic centre, define factors that affect enzyme activity and kinetics such heat, pH, concentration
• Explain conformational changes in enzymes, allosteric enzymes, activators and inhibitors
• Explain the various catalytic and regulatory strategies of different enzymes.
• Demonstrate electric-field control of enzymes and coenzyme regeneration and coenzyme cycling.
Unit I ENZYMES AS CATALYSTS 9
Classification – nomenclature & general properties of the enzyme. Factors affecting enzyme action: pH,
temperature, ions, substrate concentration, enzyme concentration, inhibitors. Thermodynamic models of catalysis;
protein dynamics in enzyme catalysis. Coenzymes – role in enzyme catalysis; Thiamine pyrophosphate, Flavin
adenine nucleotide, Nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide, Pyridoxal phosphate, Coenzyme A (CoA), Biotin, 5’-
Deoxyadenosyl cobalamin and Tetrahydrofolate. Role of metals in enzyme catalysis: Zn2+, Mg2+, Ni2+, Mo, Se, Mn
and K+.
Unit II ENZYME KINETICS 9
Enzyme activity; effect of temperature–Arrhenius equation and its application. Determination and application of
Vmax, Km, turnover number (Kcat), inhibition constant (KI), dissociation constant (KD), standard free energy change
(G), Kinetics of single substrate enzyme catalyzed reactions-the Haldane relationship for reversible reactions,
relaxation kinetics, rate equation by King and Altman method, Kinetics of multisubstrate enzyme catalyzed reaction-
rate equation of Alberty and Dalziel, inhibition and activation of enzymes, Binding of ligands to proteins-Hill
equation, Adair equation. Scatchard plot and their application, sigmoid kinetics and allosteric enzymes.
Unit III CATALYTIC STRATEGIES 9
Catalytic strategies: Covalent catalysis – proteases; acid-base catalysis – chymotrypsin, carbonic anhydrate and
myosin, role of catalytic triads; catalysis by approximation – hydrolases; metal-ion catalysis – EcoRV. Abzymes and
ribozymes.
Unit IV REGULATORY STRATEGIES
Regulatory strategies: Allosteric control - aspartate transcarbamoylase (ATCase); multiple forms of enzymes –
Lactate dehydrogenase; covalent modification – protein kinases, proteins phosphatases and RNA polymerase;
proteolytic activation – trypsin, chymotrypsin and pepsin, blood clotting factors; metabolic regulation – glycogen
phosphorylase; transcriptional control of enzyme activity – β-galactosidase.
Unit V ELECTRO-ENZYMOLOGY AND COENZYME REGENERATION
Bioelectrocatalysis; electrode-bound enzymes, electric and electric-field control of enzyme activity, conductive
enzyme membrane, electrochemical control of enzyme activity, electroanalytical application of enzymes,
electrochemical enzymatic assay. Coenzyme regeneration: methods, chemically modified co-enzymes, enzyme
processes with coenzyme cycling, Bioreactor systems with continuous coenzyme cycling.
Text Book:
1. Palmer, T., Enzymes: Biochemistry, Biotechnology & Clinical Aspects Chichester, Horwood Pub. West Sussex,
England, 2001
2. T.D.H. Bugg, T. D.H., Introduction to enzyme and coenzyme chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 3rd edition,
2012.
3. K. Nakamura, K., Aizwa, M., Miyawaki, O., M. Aizawa O. Miyawaki, Electro-enzymology and Coenzyme
regeneration (Biotechnology Monographs), Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 1988.
Reference Book:
1. Berg, J. M., Tymoczko, J. L., Stryer, L.,Biochemistry, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York, 2012.
2. Copeland, R. A., Enzymes-A practical introduction to structure, mechanism and data analysis, John Wiley &
Sons, 2nd Edition, 2008.
PAGE 447
19BTH03 INTRODUCTION TO ECOLOGY AND EVOLUTION L T P C

Course Objective:
• To impart knowledge on the major evolutionary radiations.
• Introduce phylogenetics and taxonomy.
• Make students understand the diversification process over the course of evolution in various ecosystems.
• Demonstrate population dynamics, abundance, distribution and regulation with in the ecosystem.
• Explain various interaction between communities and ecosystems.
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate broad-based knowledge of the major evolutionary radiations.
• Develop skills in phylogenetics and taxonomy.
• Explain the diversification process over the course of evolution in various ecosystems.
• Explain population dynamics, abundance, distribution and regulation with in the ecosystem.
• Explain various interaction between communities and ecosystems.
Unit I THE EVOLUTIONARY RADIATIONS 9
Origin of life: early Earth conditions; self-replicators; RNA world. Bacterial radiation: early Archaean metabolic
diversification. Eukaryote radiation. Archaea-Bacteria symbiosis; sex; multicellularity. Metazoan radiation: Ediacaran
and Burgess faunas; Hox and body plans. Terrestrial radiation: land animals and plants.
Unit II MODERN DIVERSITY 9
The universal phylogentic tree: relationships among major groups. Taxonomy: categories of organisms. Bacteria-
Archaea. Basal eukaryotes-euglenids-stramenophiles. Green plants-chlorophytes-rhodophytes. Fungi-amoebas.
Animals.
Unit III DIVERSIFICATION 9
The branching process: quasispecies, webs and trees. Phylogenetics: cladistics; estimation of phylogenetic trees.
Selection and adaptation: rate of directional change. Cladogenesis: species and speciation; diversity of modern and
extinct clades. Adaptive radiation: specialists and generalists; plasticity. Comparative method: valid inference from
comparative data.
Unit IV ABUNDANCE AND DISTRIBUTION 9
Abundance and distribution. Population dynamics: exponential and density-regulated populations. Abundance and
rarity: ecological niches. Species distributions: range dynamics, barriers; metapopulations. Biogeography.
Unit V COMMUNITIES AND ECOSYSTEMS 9
Community diversity: species-area; major geographical patterns. Coexistence: diversity and environmental
heterogeneity. Productivity and disturbance: diversity and ecological processes. Interaction and instability:
predator-prey, host-parasite dynamics. Food-webs: characteristics of trophically complex communities. Ecosystems:
flows of material and energy between compartments. Eutrophication, Consequences of diversity loss.
Text Book:
1. Krebs, C.J., Ecology, Benjamin Cummings, 6th edition,2008.
2. Hall, B.K., Evolution: Principles and Processes, Jones and Bartlett Publishers 1st edition,2010
3. Levin, A.S., The Princeton Guide to Ecology, Princeton University Press, 1st edition,2009.
4. Losos, J.B., The Princeton Guide to Evolution, Princeton University Press, NJ, 1st edition, 2013
Reference Book:
1. Eugene P. Odum, Gary, W. Barrett 2004 Fundamentals of Ecology, Brooks/Cole; 5th Revised edition
2. David T. Krohne 2017 Ecology: Evolution, Application, Integration, Oxford Univ Press; 2 edition
PAGE 448
19BTH04 REGULATORY ISSUES IN PRODUCTION OF BIOLOGICALS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Characteristics of biologicals
• Regulatory process in biologicals approval
• Features of regulatory science
• Biosimilars
• Sample guidelines
Course Outcome:
• Explain the characteristics of biologicals.
• Elaborate the steps involved in regulatory process.
• Comprehend the features of regulatory science.
• Summarize the features and regulatory aspects of biosimilars.
• Explain the guidelines for biologics.
Unit I CHARACTERISTICS OF BIOLOGICALS 9
Biologicals definition, Discovery and Development, Genetically engineered products, Biological products : Examples,
Characteristics of drugs and biologics, Protein molecular complexity, Concept of aggregates and Risks of
degradation, Post-translational modifications, Analytical Challenge to evaluate the purity and impurity profile of
Insulin glargine: Circular dichorism, ELISA, Peptide mapping and Mass spectrometry; Production process challenge,
Center for Biologics Evaluation and Research- Organizational chart
Unit II REGULATORY PROCESS 9
International Harmonization, Pre-IND, Guidance from regulators in advance of a Clinical trial application, Clinical
trials approvals and Investigational New Drug Applications, Marketing authorization processes, Special regulatory
programs, Post-Marketing changes to an approved application or variations, Compliance and Inspections, Central
Drugs Standard Control Organization, Introduction to Global Regulatory Authority - European Medicines Agency, US
FDA, WHO.
Unit III REGULATORY SCIENCE 9
Preclinical safety and toxicology, Animal use Ethics, Genetically modified organisms and Institutional Biosafety
Committees (IBSC), Independent Review Board, Risk Assessments, Chemistry, Manufacturing and Controls
Information (CMC) and Process validation, Analytics, Analytical validation, Lot release, and National Control
Laboratories; Regulator’s goals for Regulatory Science to 2025 (EMA approach)
Unit IV BIOSIMILARS 9
Biosimilars – Definition, Regulatory Challenges: Brief History of Biosimilar Regulation, Controversial Regulatory
Concepts- Extrapolation, Switching vs Interchangeability, Biosimilar Barriers to Entry, Biosimilar Regulatory
Pathways - Local and Global Regulatory guidelines for Biosimilars.
Unit V GUIDELINES FOR BIOLOGICS 9
Regulatory guidelines for submission of applications for manufacturing of IND and Marketed Biologics - Gene
therapy product, vaccine- blood or blood products, allergenics, cellular and tissue-based product,
xenotransplant, Monoclonal antibodies for in vivo use, Immunomodulators, Most proteins for therapeutic use
including cytokines, enzymes, hematopoietic factor, and growth factors, plant- or animal-derived or recombinant in
nature
Text Book:
1. Sheets, R., Fundamentals of Biologicals Regulation- Vaccines and Biotechnology Medicines 1st Edition,
Academic Press, 2017.
2. Gutka, H.J., Yang H., Kakar, S., Biosimilars- Regulatory, Clinical and Biopharmaceutical development, 1st Edition,
Springer Nature Switzerland AG, 2018.
3. Pisano, D.J., Mantus, D.S., FDA Regulatory Affairs- A Guide for Prescription Drugs, Medical Devices, and
Biologics, 2nd Edition, Informa Health care, 2008.
Reference Book:
1. Prugnaud, J.L., Trouvin, J.H., Biosimilars- A New Generation of Biologics, 1st edition, Springer, 2013.
2. Pacifici ,E., Bain S., An Overview of FDA Regulated Products: From Drugs and Cosmetics to Food and Tobacco,
Academic Press, 1st edition, 2018.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.fda.gov/vaccines-blood-biologics/guidance-compliance-regulatory-information-
biologics/biologics-guidances
• https://www.fda.gov/vaccines-blood-biologics/general-biologics-guidances/biosimilars-guidances
PAGE 449
• https://www.ema.europa.eu/en/similar-biological-medicinal-products
• Hines et al., The EMA’s goals for regulatory science to 2025, Nature Reviews Drug Discovery Vol 18, June 2019,
p403-404
• https://www.ema.europa.eu/en/documents/regulatory-procedural-guideline/ema-regulatory-science-2025-
strategic-reflection_en.pdf
• https://cdsco.gov.in/opencms/opencms/en/biologicals/
• http://www.nib.gov.in/NIB-DBT2016.pdf
PAGE 450
19BTH05 GENE EDITING TECHNOLOGIES L T P C

Course Objective:
• Overview of genome editing techniques
• Biology of CRISPR-Cas systems
• Vector design principles of CRISPR-Cas system
• Strategies for delivery of genome editing components
• Applications of CRISPR-Cas systems
Course Outcome:
• Explain different techniques used for gene editing
• Describe the biology of gene editing by CRISPR-Cas systems
• Identify the components critical for the function of CRISPR-Cas systems
• Explain the various approaches used for the delivery of genome editing components
• Comprehend the applications of gene editing techniques
Unit I GENOME EDITING TECHNIQUES 9
Brief history of genome-editing; Targeted Nucleases: Zinc-finger nucleases (ZFNs): Zinc finger protein, FokI catalytic
domain; Homing; Transcription activator-like effector nucleases (TALENs): TALE repeat arrays, Custom TALE DNA-
binding domains, Nuclease-mediated alterations; Clustered regularly interspaced short palindromic repeats
(CRISPR)-CRISPR-associated protein 9 (Cas9) endonucleases or meganucleases
Unit II CRISPR-CAS SYSTEMS – BIOLOGY 9
Adaptation - detection, Protospacer selection and processing, spacer integration; crRNA maturation- class I and
class II maturation pathway; Interference - Class I interference machinery : Type I and Type III systems; Class II
interference machinery : Type II (Cas9), Type V (Cas 12), Type VI (Cas13) ; Limitations; Enhancing Specificity with
Nickases and High Fidelity Enzymes.
Unit III CRISPR-CAS SYSTEMS – DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9
Design principle for Genetic Manipulation: Selection of Expression System, Target Sequence and Design of gRNA
based on predicted on-target and off-target activity, Validation of genetic modification
Unit IV DELIVERY OF GENOME-EDITING COMPONENTS
Viral delivery of genome-editing systems: In vitro and ex vivo approaches - Integrase-defective lentiviral vectors,
Adenoviral and AAV vectors, CAR T cell therapy; In vivo approaches - ZFN systems, CRISPR Cas systems
Non-viral delivery of genome-editing systems: In vitro and ex vivo approaches - Physical methods (Electroporation,
Micro-injection), Nanoparticle-mediated delivery (Lipids, Polymer); In vivo approaches - Physical and combinational
methods, Nanoparticle-mediated delivery, Embryonic injection.
Barriers to delivery of genome-editing components (DNA, mRNA, single guide RNA (sgRNA) and/or protein) or
nanoparticles
Unit V APPLICATIONS
CRISPR/Cas in disease diagnosis: detection of Zika virus, Dengue virus, SARS-Cov2 using SHERLOCK (specific high-
sensitivity enzymatic reporter unlocking) technology, HPV detection using DETECTR (DNA Endonuclease-Targeted
CRISPR Trans Reporter); Therapeutic Genome Editing: Gene disruption, Gene addition, Gene correction, HIV
treatment using ZFN, B-cell leukemia, Muscular dystrophy and β-thalassemia treatment using CRISPR/Cas;
Challenges in therapeutic targeting;
Gene editing in Plants: Crop improvement, Resistance to biotic and abiotic stress; gene regulation by
CRISPR/Cas; CRISPR interference; Ethical concerns.
Reference Book:
1. Krishnarao Appasani, “ Genome Editing and Engineering From TALENs, ZFNs and CRISPRs to Molecular Surgery”,
Cambridge University Press, 1st Edition, 2018.
2. Weeks D.P., and Yang B “Progress in Molecular Biology and Translational Science : Gene editing in plants”,
Volume No.149, Academic Press, 1st Edition, 2017.
3. Vijai Singh and Pawan K. Dhar, “ Genome Engineering via CRISPR-Cas9 System”, Academic Press, 1st Edition,
2020.
Extensive Reading:
• Yin H, Kauffman K.J., Anderson D.G. Delivery technologies for genome editing. Nature Reviews Drug Discovery,
16(6):387‐399. 2017.
• Joung J.K., Sander J.D., TALENs: a widely applicable technology for targeted genome editing. Nat Review
Molecular Cell Biology. 14(1):49‐55, 2013.
• Urnov, F.D., Rebar E.J., Holmes, M.C., Zhang, H.S., Gregory, P.D. Genome editing with engineered zinc finger
PAGE 451
nucleases. Nature Review Genetics,11(9):636‐646,2010.

• Jiang, F., Doudna, J.A. CRISPR–Cas9 Structures and Mechanisms. Annual Review of Biophysics, 46(1), 505–529.
2017.
• Gaj T, Sirk S.J., Shui S.L., Liu J. Genome-Editing Technologies: Principles and Applications. Cold Spring Harb
Perspect Biol., 8(12), 2016.
• Gootenberg J.S., Abudayyeh O.O., Lee J.W., et al. Nucleic acid detection with CRISPR- Cas13a/C2c2. Science.
356: 438-42, 2017.
• Chen J.S. et al. CRISPR-Cas12a target binding unleashes indiscriminate single-stranded DNase activity. Science.
360: 436-439, 2018.
• Li, H., Yang, Y., Hong, W. et al. Applications of genome editing technology in the targeted therapy
• of human diseases: mechanisms, advances and prospects. Sig Transduct Target Ther 5, 1, 2020.
PAGE 452
19BTH06 TRANSGENIC TECHNOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Impart knowledge on the biological methods for creating transgenics.
• Impart knowledge on the physical and chemical methods for creating transgenics.
• Demonstrate the use of transgenics in biological research.
• Demonstrate the applications of transgenic animals.
• Demonstrate the applications for transgenic plants.
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate the biological methods for creating transgenics.
• Describe the physical and chemical methods for creating transgenics.
• Apply transgenics in biological research.
• Explain the applications of transgenic animals.
• Explain the applications for transgenic plants.
Unit I METHODS OF CREATING TRANSGENICS - BIOLOGICAL 9
Methods of creating transgenic animals - retroviral vectors, engineered embryonic stem cells, Cre–loxP
recombination system, RNA Interference, transgenesis with high-capacity vectors. Methods of creating transgenic
plants - Agrobacterium-mediated gene transfer, Gateway technology, native gene transfer method, chloroplast
transformation.
Unit II METHODS OF CREATING TRANSGENICS – NON-BIOLOGICAL 9
Physical methods of transformation – Biolistic, electroporation, microinjection, vacuum infiltration,
nanotechnological approach, PEG-mediated, liposome-mediated and Silicon-carbide mediated transformation
(SCMT).
Unit III TRANSGENICS IN RESEARCH 9
Transgenic mice: applications, transgenic disease models: Alzheimer disease, amyotrophic Lateral sclerosis,
Huntington disease, arthritis, muscular dystrophy, tumorigenesis, hypertension, and coronary disease. Using
transgenic mice as test systems, conditional regulation of transgene expression, conditional control of cell death.
Ethical, Legal and biosafety issues in working with transgenics.
Unit IV APPLICATIONS OF TRANSGENIC ANIMALS 9
Cloning livestock by nuclear transfer, transgenic livestocks - production of pharmaceuticals, therapeutic protein
production in milk, production of donor organs, disease-resistant livestock, improving milk quality, improving animal
production traits, transgenic poultry, transgenic fish.
Unit V APPLICATION OF TRANSGENIC PLANTS 9
Transgenic plants resistant to biotic and abiotic stress, Plant derived vaccines – ETEC, Cholera, Measles, Rabies, HIV,
Anthrax. Plantibodies - Plant-derived anti-Lewis Y mAb, anti-anthrax mAB, DoxoRx - cancer therapy, RhinoRx –
rhinoviruses, CaroRx. Clinical trials on plant-derived vaccines and antibodies
Text Book:
1. B.R.Glick, J.J.Pasternack & C.L.Pattern 2010 Molecular Biotechnology – Principles and Applications of
Recombinant DNA, ASM Press Washington.
2. M.Z.Abdin, U.Kiran, Kamaluddin, A.Ali 2017 Plant Biotechnology: Principles and Applications, Springer Nature
Singapore.
3. J.D.Watson, Michael Gilman, J.Witkowski, M.Zoller 1992 Recombinant DNA WH Freeman and Company, NY
4. M.R.Davey, J.R.Soneji, M. Nageswara Rao (auth.), C.Kole, C.H. Michler, A.G. Abbott, T.C. Hall (eds.) 2010
Transgenic Crop Plants: Principles and Development, Springer-Verlag ISBN 10:3642048080 ISBN
13:9783642048081
Reference Book:
1. Eric F. Wagner (Author), F. Theuring (Editor) 1995 Transgenic Animals As Model Systems for Human Diseases,
Springer Verlag
2. George C. Khachatourians, Y. H. Hui, Ralph Scorza, Wai-Kit Nip 2002 Transgenic Plants and Crops, CRC Press, 1
edition
PAGE 453
19BTH21 MOLECULAR TOXICOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Impart knowledge on the tissue types, response of various tissue types to injury and toxicity.
• Demonstrate omics techniques for the study of toxicity.
• Demonstrate methods for the evaluation of toxicity.
• Impart knowledge on the animal models and genotoxicity measurements.
• Make students understand the mechanisms of carcinogenesis.
Course Outcome:
• Demonstrate multiplicity and properties of biotransformation enzymes, and their role in bioactivation and bio-
inactivation of drugs and other chemicals.
• Demonstrate the experimental approaches used to identify individual biotransformation enzymes involved in
bioactivation and inactivation reactions using omics techniques.
• Demonstrate experimental approaches to identify and quantify metabolites, reactive intermediates and
adducts to cellular target molecules.
• Explain the risk factors for susceptibility to drugs and other chemicals, including genetic polymorphisms, drug-
drug interactions, and environmental factors.
• Explain the oncogenes and the process of carcinogenesis.
Tissues and their maintenance, tissue damage, tissue response to injury, key concepts in toxicology, toxicogenetics
and genomics, genotyping and phenotyping, polymorphic xenobiotic metabolism. Cell signalling and receptor
mediated toxicity- Ion channels: Receptors linked to protein kinases and phosphatases, intracellular receptors;
Second messengers: Signalling to the nucleus, general overview of mechanisms of cell death; Calcium- mediated
toxicity: Excitory amino acid toxicity; Cytokines toxicity: Steroid hormone induced toxicity
Unit II OMICS TECHNIQUES FOR THE STUDY OF TOXICITY 9
Toxicogeneomics, Transcriptomics: Expression profiling in prediction of toxicity; Proteomics – methodology;
Metabolomics/metabonomics – MS-based, NMR-based; Integrating omics data – ‘omics’ in drug discovery and
omics profile as biomarkers of toxicity.
Unit III METHODS FOR EVALUATING TOXICITY 9
In vitro toxicology, acute toxicity in vitro, repeated dose toxicity, reproductive toxicity, stem cell-derived systems. In
vitro bioassays: Predictive and mechanistic toxicology, different cell lines their use and limitations, apoptosis assays,
caspase activity assays, comet assay, modified Salmonella assay, core in vitro test, assessment of genotoxicity for
regulatory purpose - in vitro micronucleus assay, chromosome aberration test.
Unit IV ANIMAL MODELS AND GENOTOXICITY MEASUREMENT 9
Animal models in toxicology, ADME models-, Reporter models – Genotoxicity testing, animal models for short-term
carcinogenicity bioassays.
Unit V ONCOGENES AND IDENTIFICATION OF HUMAN CARCINOGENS 9
Identification of human carcinogens, genetic changes in cancer – methods for detecting activated oncogenes, in
vitro transformation assays. Non-genotoxic carcinogenesis.
Text Book:
1. David Josephy 2006 Molecular Toxicology, Oxford University Press; 2 edition.
2. L.A. Stanley 2014 Molecular and Cellular Toxicology-An Introduction, Wiley Blackwell
3. James C. Fishbein 2001 Advances in Molecular Toxicology, Elsevier Science; 1 edition
4. Daniel Acosta 2017 Cellular and Molecular Toxicology and In Vitro Toxicology, CRC Press; 1 edition
Reference Book:
1. Jos Kleinjans (Edt) 2014 Toxicogenomics-Based Cellular Models: Alternatives to Animal Testing for Safety
Assessment, Academic Press; 1 edition.
2. Urs A. Boelsterli 2017 Mechanistic Toxicology: The Molecular Basis of How Chemicals Disrupt Biological Targets,
CRC Press; 2 edition.
PAGE 454
19BTH22 BIO-TRANSPORT PHENOMENA L T P C

Course Objective:
• Transport of conserved quantities of relevance to the human body
• Mass transport principles with a focus on oxygen transport in the human body and relevant other biological
systems
• Momentum transport principles with a focus on flows in the human body and relevant other biological systems
• Heat transport principles with a focus on the human body and relevant other biological systems
• Charge transport principles with a focus on the human body and relevant other biological systems
• Pharmacokinetic analysis.
Course Outcome:
• Apply principles of mass transport. momentum transport, heat transport and charge transport to the human
body processes and relevant other biological systems
• Clarify oxygen transport in biological systems.
• Use mass transfer concepts in biomolecule transport.
• Explain the physical properties of the body fluids and the cell membrane.
• Explain action potentials and axial current through charge transport across a neural membrane
• Relate drug transport with the help of pharmacokinetic analysis.
Unit I REVIEW OF MASS CONSERVATION AND THE CONCEPTS IN THERMODYNAMICS 9
Mass conservation - material balances - first law of thermodynamics - second law of thermodynamics -
thermodynamic property relations – chemical potential – activity coefficient - phase equilibrium - Clausius-
Clapeyron equation.
Unit II MASS TRANSPORT CONCEPTS WITH APPLICATIONS TO THE HUMAN BODY 9
Mass flux – diffusive velocities - Fick’s laws of diffusion – diffusivity – diffusion of a solute across the cell membrane
– diffusion of solutes (say oxygen) across a capillary wall to transport a solute between a capillary and the
surrounding tissue space (including oxygen-hemoglobin dissociation curve) - tissue oxygenation – diffusion of
solutes (oxygen/carbon dioxide) across the alveolar wall-Mass transfer coefficient – oxygen transport in blood
oxygenators, bio-artificial organs, and tissue engineered constructs – kLa in bioreactors.
Unit III MOMENTUM TRANSPORT CONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS TO THE HUMAN BODY 9
Review of the following concepts: Rheology – types of flows (laminar/turbulent) – momentum transport – laminar
flow in a circular tube – friction factor approach
Body fluid compositions – blood rheology – capillary flow principles – blood flow in capillary - capillary plasma
protein retention - osmotic pressure - filtration flow across a membrane - predicting the hydraulic conductance - net
capillary filtration rate - blood flow into the capillary - capillary filtration flow rate - lymphatic system – friction
factor for blood flow through a stenosis.
Unit IV HEAT TRANSPORT AND CHARGE TRANSPORT CONCEPTS WITH APPLICATIONS TO THE HUMAN BODY
Heat transport principles – conduction – temperature profile in a muscle - convection – heat transfer coefficient -
Charge transport – ion transport across a membrane - ions in solution – electroneutrality – charge relaxation –
Debye length - action potential – axial current - Ion pumps
Unit V PHARMACOKINETIC ANALYSIS
Entry routes for drugs- Pharmacokinetic modelling approaches- Factors that affect drug distribution- Drug
clearance- drug absorption and elimination models.
Text Book:
1. Fournier, R.L., Basic Transport Phenomena in Biomedical Engineering, CRC press, Taylor & Franscis group, 4th
edition, 2018.
2. Suraishkumar G. K., Continuum Analysis of Biological Systems: Conserved Quantities, Fluxes and Forces,
Springer Publishing, Heidelberg, 2014
Reference Book:
1. Charm, S.E., Kurland G.S., Blood Flow and Microcirculation, New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1974.
2. Bird, R.B., Stewart, W.E., Lightfoot, E.N., Transport Phenomena, New York: John Wiley & Sons, 2nd edition,
2002.
3. Gibaldi, M., Perrier, Pharmacokinetics, New York: Marcel Dekker, Inc., 2nd edition, 1982.
PAGE 455
19BTH23 GOOD LABORATORY AND MANUFACTURING PRACTICES L T P C

Course Objective:
• Good Laboratory Practices (GLP) facilities
• GLP for Non-Clinical Laboratory Study
• Current Good Manufacturing Practices (cGMP) for Biologicals
• cGMP for Blood and Blood product
• cGMP for Combination product
Course Outcome:
• Explain the facilities required to establish and carry out GLP in Pharmaceutics.
• Describe the GLP for Non-Clinical Laboratory Study
• Explain the cGMP for the production of Biologics
• Describe the cGMP for the production of Blood and Blood product
• Explain the cGMP for the production of Combination product
Unit I GLP – FACILITIES 9
History of GLP; organization and personnel: testing facility management, study director, quality assurance unit.
facilities: animal care facilities, animal supply facilities, standard operating procedures, animal care, facilities for
handling test and control articles, laboratory operation areas, specimen and data storage facilities; disqualification
of testing facilities : purpose, grounds for disqualification, notice of and opportunity for hearing on proposed
disqualification, final order on disqualification, actions upon disqualification, public disclosure of information
regarding disqualification, alternative or additional actions to disqualification, suspension or termination of a testing
facility by a sponsor.
Unit II GLP – NON CLINICAL LABORATORY STUDY 9
Test and control articles: test and control article characterization, test and control article handling, mixtures of
articles with carriers; protocol for and conduct of a nonclinical laboratory study: protocol, conduct of a nonclinical
laboratory study; records and reports: reporting of nonclinical laboratory study results, storage and retrieval of
records and data, retention of records.
Unit III CGMP FOR BIOLOGICAL PRODUCT 9
Scope, personnel, starting and raw materials, seed lot and cell bank, premises and equipment, clean rooms,
production, campaign production, labeling, validation, quality control, documentation (lot processing records),use
of animal, Pharmaceutical Quality System (PQS) and quality risk management. GMP Guidelines – India, US FDA, EU,
WHO.
Unit IV CGMP FOR BLOOD AND BLOOD PRODUCT
Organization and personnel, plant and facilities, equipment, production and process controls- standard operating
procedures, plateletpheresis, leukapheresis, and plasmapheresis, additional labeling standards for blood and
blood components - labeling, general requirements, container label, circular of information, laboratory
controls - laboratory controls, control of bacterial contamination of platelets, compatibility testing, records and
reports - records, distribution and receipt; procedures and records, adverse reaction file, reporting of product
deviations by licensed manufacturers, unlicensed registered blood establishments, and transfusion services
Unit V CGMP FOR COMBINATION PRODUCT
Definition of combination product, General considerations for cGMP compliance, Application of cGMP requirements
to specific types of combination products- Prefilled syringe, Drug-coated mesh, Drug Eluting Stent (DES).
Reference Book:
1. Current Good Manufacturing Practice Requirements for Combination Products; Draft Guidance
OCP/CBER/CDER/CDRH/ORA, 2017.
2. WHO good manufacturing practices for biological products, WHO Technical Report Series, No. 999, Annex 2.
3. 21 CFR 58.1 - 58.219 Good Laboratory Practice Regulations effective June1979, and amended effective October
1987
4. Good Laboratory Practice Regulations, Management Briefings, PostConference Report, 1979.
5. Current good manufacturing practice for finished pharmaceuticals. Code of Federal Regulations Title 21, Vol. 4,
revised 1 April 2014. Silver Spring, MD: United States Food and Drug Administration, 2014.
6. Current Good Manufacturing Practice for Blood and Blood Components, Code of Federal Regulations Title 21,
Part 606, MD: United States Food and Drug Administration, 2011.
7. EU Guidelines for good manufacturing practice for medicinal products for human and veterinary use. Vol.4,
Annex 2, 2013.
8. Joseph D. Nally, (2007), Good Manufacturing Practices for Pharmaceuticals, 6thed., New York, USA, Informa
Healthcare.
PAGE 456
9. Andrew A. Signore, and Terry Jacobs, (2005), Good Design Practices for GMP pharmaceutical Facilities, Boca
Raton, FL, USA, Taylor & Francis.
10. Shayne C. Gad, (2008), Pharmacutical Manufacturing Handbook: Regulations and Quality, Hoboken, NJ, USA,
Willy Interscience.
Extensive Reading:
• https://www.fda.gov/drugs/pharmaceutical-quality-resources/current-good-manufacturing- practice-cgmp-
regulations
• https://www.fda.gov/vaccines-blood-biologics/general-biologics-guidances/cmc-and-gmp- guidances
• https://ec.europa.eu/health/documents/eudralex/vol-4_en
PAGE 457
19CSH91 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS FOR BIOLOGICAL DATA REPRESENTATION L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand data in biology
• To explore concepts of database
• To learn fundamentals of data structures
• To understand concepts of trees and graphs
• To know elementary concepts of algorithm development
Course Outcome:
• Identify, define and utilize the data in biology
• Design a entity relationship model
• Collate data as stacks and order them
• Draw relationship between data
• Develop algorithms for data analysis
Unit I COMPUTERS IN BIOLOGY AND FEATURES OF BIOLOGICAL DATA 9
Historical perspective of computers in biology; Biological Information: data in discovery process, nature of biological
data - diversity, variability, databases are autonomous, dynamic, heterogeneous; data integration approaches –
federation, mediator, data warehouse; meta-data specification, data provenance and accuracy, ontology, web
presentation
Unit II DATABASE MANAGEMENT 9
Fundamental database concepts: data, database, database system, purpose of database system, view of data,
relational databases, database architecture, transaction management - Entity-Relationship model: Database design
and ER Model: overview, ER-Model, Constraints, ER-Diagrams, ERD Issues, weak entity sets, Codd’s rules, Relational
Schemas - Relational Model: Logical view of data, keys, integrity rules – Relational Database Design: features of
good relational database design. Case study: Design of ER model for biological data
Unit III DATA STRUCTURE: BASICS 9
Data Structures Basics: Structure and Problem Solving, Data structures, Data structure Operations, Algorithm:
complexity, Time- space tradeoff. Linked lists: Introduction, Representation of linked lists in Memory, Types of
linked list; Stack and Queue: Introduction, Array Representation of Stack, Linked List Representation of stack,
Application of stack, Queue, Array Representation of Queue, Linked List Representation of Queue.Case study:
choosing appropriate linear data structure for biological data – Position of a residue in a sequence
Unit IV DATA STRUCTURE: TREES & GRAPHS 9
Trees: Definitions and Concepts, Operations on Binary Trees, Representation of binary tree; Graphs: Matrix
Representation of Graphs, List Structures, Directed Graphs Types of Directed Graphs; Binary Relation As a Digraph;
Euler’s Digraphs; Matrix Representation of Digraphs. Applications of Graphs: Topological Sorting, Shortest-Path
Algorithms.Case study: choosing appropriate non-linear data structure for biological data – interaction of atoms in a
molecule in 3D space
Unit V ALGORITHMS 9
Algorithm: definition, notation, pseudocode, characteristics of an Algorithm, building blocks of algorithms,
expressing algorithms – arithmetic, conditional, array access;Biological vs Computational algorithm, correct vs
incorrect algorithm, iterative vs recursive algorithm, fast vs slow algorithm, Big-O-Notation; algorithm design
techniques – exhaustive, branch-and-bound, greedy algorithm, dynamic programming, divide-and-conquer.
Example of an Algorithm applicable for biological domain - most probable k-mer(Motif) in a sequence using Greedy
Algorithm.
Text Book:
1. Goodrich, M. T. and Tamassia R., (2013), Data Structures and Algorithms in Python, Wiley; 1st edition. ISBN:
978-1118290279
2. Cormen, T. H., Leiserson, C. E., Rivest, R. L., Stein, C., (2009) Introduction to Algorithms, 3rd Edition (The MIT
Press), ISBN: 9780262033848
3. Silberschatz, A., Korth, H. and Sudarshan, S. (2020), Database System Concepts 7th Edition. ISBN:
9780078022159
Reference Book:
1. Karumanchi , N. (2016). Data Structures and Algorithms Made Easy: Data Structures and Algorithmic Puzzles,
5th Edition, ISBN: 9788193245279
2. Miller and David Ranum, D. (2013), Problem Solving with Algorithms and Data Structures using Python, Franklin
Beedle & Associates, 2nd edition, ISBN: 978-1590282571
3. Wirth N. (1998), Algorithms + Data Structures = Programs, Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited, 2nd
PAGE 458
Edition, ISBN: 978-8120305694
PAGE 459
19CSH92 PYTHON AND R PROGRAMMING FOR BIOTECHNOLOGISTS L T P C

Course Objective:
• To understand basic elements of python and concepts on controlling program flow
• To solve problems by writing functions and using objects
• To explore fundamentals of biopython
• To handle data using R program
• To perform statistical analysis of biological data
Course Outcome:
• Write programs handling data input and control the data flow
• Solve simple problems using a program
• Write python programs with inbuilt functions from biopython package
• Solve analytic data using R program
• Perform statistical analysis of biological data using R
Unit I ELEMENTS OF PYTHON PROGRAMMING: DATA, FLOW AND CONTROL 9
Introduction to Python: source code, text editors, whitespace, syntax and syntax errors, Python versions – Lists: lists
and arrays – Dictionaries: paired data types, hashing, key uniqueness, argument unpacking and tuples – Working
with files: objects and classes, paths and folders, relationships between variables and values, text and binary files,
newlines - Loops: blocks and indentation, variable scoping, iteration, ranges - Conditions:Truth and falsehood,
Boolean logic, identity and equality, evaluation of statements, branching. Case study: Biological data representation:
Organization of a gene sequence file and relationship between data
Unit II PROBLEM SOLVING 9
Comprehension: List and Dictionary - Writing functions: nuts and bolts of writing functions: argument passing,
encapsulation, data flow through a program – Classes and objects: classes, instances, methods vs. functions, self,
constructors, magic methods – Object-oriented programming: inheritance and class hierarchies,method overriding,
superclasses and subclasses, polymorphism, composition, multiple inheritances. Case study: Object representation
of biological data: Defining features of a system (eg., organism) and using them to identify the organism.
Unit III BIOPYTHON 9
Python libraries: using standard modules and creating a new module; Biopython: introduction,
installation,important components like seq, seqIO, alignIO, BLAST, ClustalW, PDB, SwissProt etc., parsing
output.Case study: Use of python libraries for biological application: using BioSeq to change information content
from DNA to RNA to protein
Unit IV R PROGRAMMING ESSENTIALS 9
Fundamentals: Constants, operators, functions, variables, Random numbers, Vectors and vector indexing, Simple
descriptive stats, Loops, Conditional expressions - Datatypes: Levels of measurement (nominal, ordinal, interval,
ratio scale), Vector types, Characteristics of tidy data (missing values), data imputation,duplicates, outliers, spelling,
Create new variables in a data.frame - Filter rows and columns - Merging datasets.Case study:Representation of
Biological data in R: Plotting data obtained from field trials to identify relationship between attributes.
Unit V STATISTICAL DATA ANALYSIS USING R 9
Basic Statistics: mean, median, standard deviation, variance, correlation, covariance - Linear regression: simple
linear regression, introduction to multiple linear regression - Classification: logistic regression, decision trees, SVM -
Ensemble methods: bagging, random forests, boosting - Clustering: K-means, Hierarchicalclustering, X-means.Case
study: Deployment of R in Biological data analysis: Statistical data analysis of field trial data for experimental
significance.
Text Book:
1. Stevens, T.J. and Boucher, W. (2005) Python Programming for Biology: Bioinformatics and Beyond, Cambridge
University Press; 1st edition, ISBN: 978-0521720090
2. Kinser, J., (2009), Python for Bioinformatics, Jones and Bartlett Learning, ISBN: 978-0763751869
3. Gardener, M., (2012). Beginning R: The Statistical Programming Language Wiley Publications(Wrox), ISBN: 978-
1-118-22616-2
4. Gries, O, Montojo, J., and Campbell, J., (2017), Practical Programming: An Introduction to Computer Science
Using Python 3.6, Pragmatic Bookshelf 3rd Edition ISBN: 978-1680502688
5. Libeskind-Hadas, R. and Bush, E. (2014), Computing for Biologists: Python Programming and Principles
Cambridge University Press 1st edition. ASIN: B00O0RKC02
6. Jones, M. (2013), Python for Biologists: A complete programming course for beginners CreateSpace
7. Independent Publishing Platform 1st edition. ISBN: 978-1492346135
Reference Book:
PAGE 460
1. Jones, M. (2014), Advanced Python for Biologists. CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform 1st edition.
ISBN: 978-1495244377
2. Downey A. B. (2012), Think Python O'Reilly Media 1 edition ISBN: 978-1449330729
3. MacLean, D., R Bioinformatics Cookbook: Use R and Bioconductor to perform RNAseq, genomics, data
visualization, and bioinformatic analysis, Packt Publishing, ISBN: 978-1789950694
4. Pilgrim M, (2009), Dive into Python 3 Apress ISBN: 978-1430224150
5. Hartvigsen, G., (2014), A Primer in Biological Data Analysis and Visualization Using R. Columbia University Press
1st Edition ISBN: 978-0231166997
6. https://devguide.python.org/
PAGE 461
19BTH41 COMPUTER-AIDED DRUG DESIGN L T P C

Course Objective:
• Process of drug discovery.
• Elements of small molecules and representations.
• Approaches of modeling molecular motion.
• Analog-based drug design.
• Structure-based drug design.
Course Outcome:
• Understand the process of drug discovery pipeline.
• Represent and prepare small molecules for drug design.
• Apply appropriate mathematical and statistical methods defining molecular motion.
• Relate structural and functional data for molecule-based drug design.
• Prepare and define active site for structure-based drug design.
Unit I DRUG DISCOVERY PROCESS 9
Targets: Enzymes, Membrane proteins, DNA and RNA; Target Identification and Validation: computational analysis
of nucleic acid sequence, protein sequence and structure, expression databases and functional pathway data
contained in databases; Lead molecule, lead identification: from trial and error to high throughput screening, assay
development and qualities of screening assay; lead optimization: functional assays; pre-clinical drug development.
Unit II CHEMOINFORMATICS 9
Small molecules in drug discovery, chemical structures and representations, chemical databases and data sources,
reaction databases; search methods: representation and substructure search; descriptors, physical and chemical
data, applications of chemoinformatics in drug discovery – compound selection, in-silico ADMET, problems in in-
silico predictions
Unit III MOLECULAR MECHANICS & DYNAMICS 9
Molecular structure, conformation, energy minimization, quantum mechanics: ab-initio methods, semi-empirical
methods, Born-Oppenheimer approximation for force field calculation, classical force fields; algorithms for energy
minimization: simplex, steepest descent, conjugate gradients and Newton-Raphson, advantages and limitations of
force-field approach; Molecular Mechanics: algorithms – Verlet Leap Frog & Beeman, approximations – periodic
boundary conditions (PBC), stochastic boundary conditions (SBC); limitations of molecular dynamics.
Unit IV ANALOG BASED DRUG DESIGN 9
Pharmacophores 3D database searching, conformation searches, deriving and using 3D Pharmacophore,
constrained systematic search, Genetic Algorithm, clique detection techniques, maximum likelihood method;
Structure Activity Relationship: physiochemical properties (descriptors) – logP, number of rotatable bonds, polar
surface area, substituents and stereochemistry, QSAR: CoMFA, CoMSIA.
Unit V STRUCTURE BASED DRUG DESIGN -13
Docking: definition, target and ligand format conversion; searching methods in docking: searching conformational
space – before and during docking, incremental docking; Score, scoring methods/functions: categories are
empirical, force field, knowledge, consensus scoring; factors affecting docking score; softwares in docking; role of H-
bonds in target-drug interaction; De Novo Drug Design: principle and types of design methods - Connection
Methods, Sequential Grow, Fragment Placements, Virtual screening.
Text Book:
1. Gundertofte, K., Jorgensen, F. S., Molecular Modeling and Prediction of Bioactivity, Springer, 1st edition, 2000.
2. Höltje, H.D., Folkers, G., Mannhold, R., Kubinyi, H., Timmerman, H., Molecular Modeling - Basic Principles and
Application, Wiley-VCH, 3rd edition, 2008.
3. Norman, P., Ruud, K., Saue, T., Principles and Practices of Molecular Properties: Theory, Modeling, and
Simulations, Wiley, 1st edition, 2018.
4. Roy, K., Kar, S., Das, R.N., A Primer on QSAR/QSPR Modeling Fundamental Concepts, Springer Briefs in
Molecular Science, 1st edition, 2015.
5. Jensen, J.H., Molecular Modeling Basics, CRC Press, 1st edition, 2010.
Reference Book:
1. Zhang, W., (2016). Computer-Aided Drug Discovery (Methods in Pharmacology and Toxicology), Methods in
Pharmacology and Toxicology Humana Press, 1st Edition. ISBN: 978-1493935192
2. Reynolds, C. H., Holloway, K. M., Cox, H. K.(Editors), Computer-Aided Molecular Design: Applications in
Agrochemicals, Materials, and Pharmaceuticals (ACS Symposium Series) Wiley-VCH ISBN: 978-0841231603
PAGE 462
19BTH42 MATHEMATICAL MODELING IN BIOLOGY L T P C

Course Objective:
• Data representation and behavior
• Models defining data interaction
• Fundamentals of modeling molecular evolution
• Mathematical and statistical analysis of population data
• Disease progression models
Course Outcome:
• Handle biological data for scientific representation
• Fit the data with appropriate models
• Identify and perform representation of relationship tree
• Perform elementary statistical analysis of population data
• Identify and model disease progression
Unit I BIOSTATISTICS FOR MODELING 9
Measurement, Variables, variability in data, central tendency of data, spread of data, population and sample data,
mean, Probability, conditional probability, correlation, regression, curve-fitting, measures of error, method of least
squares, model, linearity, non-linearity, cob-web plot, scalar, vectors; matrices: identity, inverse, square, basic
operations.
Tutorial: fundamentals of data input and performing mathematical operations, plotting
Unit II LINEAR & NON-LINEAR MODELS 9
Creating a linear model, cobwebbing, analyzing a non-linear model, transients, equilibrium and stability,
linearization, influence of oscillations, bifurcations and chaos in a logistic model, structured models – Leslie model,
Usher model; a simple predator – prey model, positive and negative interactions.
Tutorial: modeling predator-prey interaction
Unit III MODELING MOLECULAR EVOLUTION 9
Matrix models of base substitution, Markov models – Jukes-Cantor Model (1-parameter), Kimura Model (2-
parameter), measuring phylogenetic distances; phylogenetic trees – operational taxonomic unit, lateral gene
transfer, root, vertex, leaf, topological trees, metric trees, Fitsch-Margoliash algorithm, optimality criteria -
Maximum Parsimony, bootstrapping; Case Study: “Out-of-Africa” hypothesis of human origins, Florida Dentist AIDS
cases.
Tutorial: phylogenetic tree drawing case study
Unit IV MODELING POPULATION GENETICS 9
Mathematical interpretation of genetic concepts: Laws of Mendel, Mendelian genetics, probability distributions in
genetics, chi-square distribution, linkage, mapping, recombinants and parental type, gene frequency in a
population, Hardy-Weinberg equilibrium, random mating, fitness and selection, genetic drift.
Unit V INFECTIOUS DISEASE MODELING 9
Elementary epidemic models – homogenous mixing, population as susceptible, infective and removed class, S I R
model – threshold-values, critical parameters, severity and duration of epidemics, limitations; infectious disease
models – S I and S I S models, contact rate and contact number, modeling for immunization strategies; modeling
cases with multiple population and differentiated infectivity.
Tutorial: Case study for infectious disease model
Text Book:
1. Allman, E.S. and Rhodes, J. A. (2004), Mathematical Models in Biology: An Introduction, Cambridge University
Press; 1st edition. ISBN: 978-0521525862
2. Bailey, N. T. J (2012), Statistical Methods in Biology, Cambridge University Press, 3rd Edition. ISBN:
9781139170840
3. Ingalls, B. (2012), Mathematical Modeling in Systems Biology: An Introduction, The MIT Press; 1st edition. ISBN:
978-0262018883
4. Vynnycky, E. and White, R. G. (2010), An Introduction to Infectious Disease Modeling, Oxford University Press,
USA; 1st edition. ISBN: 978-0198565765
Reference Book:
1. Chou, C-S., and Friedman, A. (2010), Introduction to Mathematical Biology Modeling, Analysis, and Simulations.
Springer Undergraduate Texts in Mathematics and Technology. ISBN: 978-3-319- 29636-4
2. Demin, O. and Igor Goryanin, I. (2008), Kinetic Modelling in Systems Biology, Chapman & Hall/CRC
Mathematical and Computational Biology ASIN: B00866HCKQ
PAGE 463
19BTH43 COMPUTATIONAL GENOMICS L T P C

Course Objective:
• Basic elements of genomic data and databases
• Sequencing genomes and identification of genes
• Features of genome and relationship between genomes
• Relationship between related genomes based on a feature
• Apply the genomic information to solve social medical problems
Course Outcome:
• Identify the information content in a genome
• Identify methods of finding sequence features
• Use sequence features and compare genomes
• Draw relationship between sequences
• Design a exploratory set up to solve real-world problems arising from genomic variations
Unit I GENOME, GENOMICS AND DATA 9
Genome and its anatomy – prokaryotic, eukaryotic, viral and organelle genome; sequence properties – genome size,
genome complexity, average base composition, DNA repeats, genes, operon, intron, exon, coding and non- coding
mRNA, rRNA and tRNA genes, genomic information: storing and finding data (GenBank, EMBL and DDBJ), specialized
genome databases, organism specific databases.
Unit II GENOME SEQUENCING & PREDICTION 9
Sequencing: Classical Sequencing - Sanger sequencing, top-down and bottom-up approaches of genome
sequencing; introduction to next-generation sequencing methods and sequencing pipeline; Probabilistic models of
genome sequences – alphabets, sequences, sequence space; models, markov chain, algorithm and the case study of
odorant receptor prediction.
Unit III ANNOTATION & COMPARATIVE GENOMICS 9
Genome Annotation and Statistical Analysis: composition, GC content, change point analysis, k-mer frequency and
motif bias, unusual words/motifs and their biological basis, pattern discovery, genome annotation data flow,
automation and accuracy; Mitochondria as a model for variation analysis, whole genome comparisons orthologs,
paralogs (gene families) and synteny, Genome trees and genomic clock, tree drawing, quantification of natural
selection.
Unit IV GENOMIC VARIABILITY & EVOLUTIONARY GENOMICS 9
Sequence, similarity, homology – paralogs, orthologs, gene-order, gene loss and gene expansion, horizontal gene
transfer, minimal gene set concept, phyletic patterns; analysis of genomic context, “rosetta stone”, gene clusters
and genomic neighborhood; ancestral life form and evolutionary reconstruction, LUCA, prokaryote-eukaryote origin
and novelty in eukaryotes.
Unit V APPLICATIONS OF COMPUTATIONAL GENOMICS 9
Case study: phylogenetic analysis of the SARS epidemic; Case study: natural selection and the HIV genome; Case
study: cancer-risk SNPs, higher order organization of proteins, structural genomics, dynamics of multidomain
proteins, target identification of broad-spectrum and pathogen specific drugs.
Text Book:
1. Koonin, E. V. and Galperin, M.Y., (2004) SEQUENCE - EVOLUTION - FUNCTION: Computational approaches in
Comparative Genomics, Kluwer Academic Publishers. ISBN 978-1-4419-5321-6
2. Cristianini, N. and Hahn, M. W. (2006) Introduction to Computational Genomics: A Case Studies Approach,
Cambridge University Press. ISBN: 978-0-52185-603-4
3. Choudhuri, S. (2014), Bioinformatics for Beginners: Genes, Genomes, Molecular Evolution, Databases and
Analytical Tools, Academic Press; 1st edition ISBN: 978-0124104716
Reference Book:
1. Ussery, D. W., Wassenaar, T. M. and Borini, S. (Eds.) (2009), Computing for Comparative Microbial Genomics
Springer-Verlag London Limited. ISBN 978-1-84800-254-8
2. Computational Genomics with R (https://compgenomr.github.io/book/)
PAGE 464

Eee Bee R19

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Eee Bee R19

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Eee Bee R19

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mepco R2019 BE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), SIVAKASI

BE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

8 19EE352 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5

Core Elective-1 (BEE)

5 19EEC14 SMART GRID EEE

Core Elective-4 (BEE)

Core Elective-6 (BEE)

32 19MEP02 INNOVATION AND DESIGN THINKING MECH

9 19CEP17 ROAD SAFETY AND PRACTICE CIV

28 19MEP24 SIMULATION MODELLING AND ANALYSIS MECH

17 19CSA05 FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING CSE

Emerging Area Electives for BE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

Electrical & Computer Engineering

6 19ECH06 PRIVACY AND SECURITY IN IOT ECE

Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning

4 19CSH04 COMPUTER VISION WITH OPENCV CSE

Virtual Reality & Augmented Reality

1 19ITH21 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS IT

Genome Engineering & Technology

Computer Science and Biology

Medical Robotics and Devices

19HS101 TECHNICAL ENGLISH - I L T P C

19BS102 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C

19GE101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING L T P C

19GE102 BASIC CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING L T P C

19BS181 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C

10. Uniform pending- Young’s modulus determination

19GE151 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C

19GE152 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

GROUP B (ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS)

ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE

19HS201 TECHNICAL ENGLISH - II L T P C

19BS203 MATERIALS SCIENCE L T P C

19EE201 ELECTRIC CIRCUITS AND NETWORKS L T P C

19GEM01 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C

19BS281 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT L T P C

3. pH-metric titration (acid & base)

19EE251 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS LABORATORY L T P C

19GE251 LINUX COMMANDS AND SHELL PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C

• Print the list of items from 4th to 10th position

19HS251 COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY L T P C

Remedial Grammar and Vocabulary 6

19MA301 MATHEMATICS - III : BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEM AND PROBABILITY L T P C

19EE301 MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS L T P C

19EE302 ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS L T P C

19EE303 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T P C

19EE304 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING L T P C

19EE381 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS L T P C

19EE351 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C

19EE352 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LABORATORY L T P C

19HSM01 PRESENTATION AND LANGUAGE SKILLS LABORATORY L T P C

Presentation and Appraisal Sessions 15

IAS30 INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS - I (LOWER) L T P C

19MA401 MATHEMATICS - IV : NUMERICAL METHODS AND STATISTICS L T P C

19EE401 DC MACHINES AND TRANSFORMERS L T P C

19EE402 CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P C

19EE403 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION L T P C